eee ell

NOTES on true WEANING or a YOUNG KOALA
(PHASCOLARCTUS CINEREUS)

By A. KEITH MINCHIN, Koara Farm, AvELAIDE.
Plates i and ii.

In June, 1938, a member of my staff informed me that one of the female Koalas in
the Adelaide Koala Farm appeared ill with diarrhoea. This female had been
thriving and only five weeks before the baby she was carrying in her pouch had
been seen with its head out for the first time. Six months previously (January,
1933) a slight swelling in the mother’s pouch had first indicated the presence of
the juvenile (at birth the young is about the size of a man’s finger nail).

On inspection I discovered the Koala sitting back in the position illustrated
on pl. ii, fig. 1. Only the head and forelegs of the young Koala were protruding
from the mother’s pouch, and its face was covered with a yellowish-green slime.
The baby was forcing its nose into the mother’s anus, and as it nuzzled it attempted,
with its front claws, to enlarge the opening into which it was thrusting its snout.

The baby was energetically eating the substance from the mother’s rectum.
Although the parent appeared uncomfortable while this was going on, she re-
mained quiet and made no attempt to ‘‘claw’’ the baby or to stop its activities by
moving her position, as happened on other occasions when the young one became
annoying. The posterior areas of the mother and the fur up to the pouch opening
were saturated and stained with the yellowish-green material; at times the baby
would cease eating from the anus to suck and claw at the stained fur.

This particular meal took an hour to complete and during that time the baby
avidly and actively fed, giving the impression that it had at last discovered the
food for which it had been craving. The substance appeared to be peptonized gum
leaves, and in no way resembled faeces passed during diarrhoea.

On the ground immediately beneath the female was a mound of faeces some-
what like fresh cow manure. This mound was fresh, and on examination I found
beneath the soft shapeless manure, soft well-formed pellets, mixed with hard dark
pellets, such as are passed by any Koala under normal conditions. This seemed to
indicate that the mother’s lower bowel had been emptied so that the peptonized
gum leaf from her upper bowel might be hurried along to nourish a baby requiring
more than milk but yet still too young to digest such a coarse diet as gum leaves.

If a Koala becomes sick with diarrhoea its fur invariably remains matted and

2 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

stained for a long period; in the case described, within three hours both the
mother’s posterior and the face and fore limbs of the baby were dry and clean.

For almost a month the baby Koala took food in this manner every second or
third day, but always between 3 p.m. and 4 p.m. My observations point to the
probability that the mother Koala does not produce this food entirely voluntarily,
but that the young Koala brings about the operation by massaging her anus with
the nose and mouth. Before commencing this diet the baby had appeared weak and
undeveloped (pl. i, fig. 1) ; twenty-four hours after the first meal it had grown and
appeared so much stronger that it was difficult to believe that it was the same
animal. Within two weeks its body weight appeared to have doubled and it began
to take an interest in the tips of the youngest gum leaves. Within a month the baby
was definitely weaned and had transferred its attention from the mother’s anus to
gum leaves alone.

The writer has observed the same procedure in the case of each young Koala
reared in his park, although the length of the period during which the young con-
tinue to take food from the rectum varies according to seasonal or local conditions
affecting the young edible tips of the gum leaves. If plenty of tender tips are
available, the baby may be weaned in a month; on the other hand I have seen a
young Koala feed from the mother’s anus for as long as six weeks,

In June of this year I watched the fifteenth young Koala reared under obser-
vation take food from the mother’s anus as had all the others. The weaning of this
baby occupied five weeks, and during that period it took food from the mother
always between noon and 2 p.m.

It may be well to mention that the Koalas were not under surveillance at
night, and observations were made only between 9 a.m. and 6 p.m. It is possible
therefore that the young feed upon partly-digested gum leaves more frequently
than is thought, but I do not consider this probable as it would weaken the females
too much.

A cinematograph record in colour of this strange method of weaning has been
made by the writer. This film has been viewed by a number of interested persons,
including the Professor of Human Physiology and Pharmacology at the University
of Adelaide, Sir Stanton Hicks. The last-named has furnished the following
comment :

“‘T have witnessed a showing of Mr. Minchin’s film of the phenomenon re-
corded in the above notes, and have seen a specimen of the material passed by the
bowel of the parent Koala subsequent to the stimulation by the young animal. I
have no doubt that the phenomenon is a more extensive one than that generally
known as reflex colonic peristalsis following rectal dilation and stimulation. It
acquires greater interest in view of the fact that the dietary of the Koala is so

MINCHIN—WEANING OF A YOUNG KOALA 3

limited, and that the presence in it of poisonous essential oils involves special meta-
bolic processes to ensure detoxication. The subject is one deserving extended bio-
chemical and physiological investigation, and it is hoped that this may follow on
Mr. Minchin’s interesting and important observation.’’

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate i.

Fig. 1. Young Koala just prior to taking first meal of partly digested gum leaves.
Note undeveloped hind-quarters.

ty
a
Be}

iw)

Young Koala twenty-four hours after first meal.

Plate ii.

Fig. 1. Attitude of mother when feeding young on partly digested leaves; note
paw of the infant gripping its mother’s body.

in|
a
ge

i)

Young Koala one month after taking its last meal of partly digested gum
leaves.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE I.

WEANING OF A YOUNG KOALA.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM Vor. VI. PLATE IT.

WEANING A YOUNG KOALA.,

ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, ACTING ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

When examples of aboriginal art from various parts of Australia are examined, it is
noticeable that those originating from the Northern Coast and, to a lesser extent, from
the Eastern coastal fringe north of Sydney, are largely representations of various
animals, fish and human beings. Some of the cave paintings from Napier Broome Bay
(Mountford, 1937, pp. 30-40), Prince Regent River (Bradshaw, 1891, p. 100), and
adjacent localities are drawn with a freedom of style that is not known in any other
part of Australia.

ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS From THE
WARBURTON RANGES tn WESTERN AUSTRALIA
RELATING TO THE WANDERINGS OF TWO ANCESTRAL BEINGS

Tue Wati KuTyara

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, Hon. Assisrant 1n EtuHnoLocy, Sourn AusTraLian MusEeum.
Text fig. 1-27.

THIs paper places on record a series of aboriginal crayon drawings and the rele-
vant details, which concern incidents in the life of two mythical ancestors, the
Wati Kutjara, who belonged to the Ngadadjara tribe of the Warburton Ranges of
Western Australia.

Tindale has already published a summary and map of the wanderings of
these ancestral beings (Tindale, 1936, pp. 169-185). His paper deals with the
song's, ceremonies and wanderings, while the present paper describes the drawings,
the information gathered at the time that they were made, as well as an analysis
of the designs, the colours used, and the ages of the artists concerned.

The drawings were collected in August, 1935, during an expedition carried
out under the auspices of the Board for Anthropology at the University of Ade-
laide, assisted by funds from the Rockefeller foundation and administered by the
National Research Council. They form a small part of an extensive collection. A
general report on the Expedition appears in Oceania (Tindale, 1936, pp. 481-485,
map). :

The method of obtaining the drawings was as follows: Sheets of brown wrap-
ping paper, approximately 50 em. by 30 em., were distributed, together with
erayous of the only colours available to the natives, i.e. red, yellow, black and
white. The Australian aborigine is particularly susceptible to suggestion, and it
was especially desired that nothing external should influence the choice either of
the subject, the colours chosen or the method of drawing’; therefore no subject was
nominated, and the native was asked only to make marks (walka) on his paper.
Un the completion of the drawings, the meanings of the various designs, and if
possible, the mythological ideas associated with them, were obtained through an
interpreter and the details noted on the sheet concerned. The registration number
of the native and the date were also included. The registration symbol for the
Warburton Range Expedition is K, and this letter precedes the numbers of the
natives mentioned.

6 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Before the confidence of the natives had been gained (this being fully estab-
lished at the end of the first week) simple drawings of everyday things of abori-
ginal life were made, such as kangaroos, emus, trees, camps and waterholes. At
the end of that time, drawings relating to the travels and exploits of the abori-
ginal’s mythical ancestors began to be produced by the older men. From that
time onward, no difficulty was experienced in obtaining designs, in fact, if was
unfortunate that, as only a limited amount of time was available for the inter-
pretation of the detail, and the recording of the data, the distribution of the sheets
had to be curtailed.

Although no attempt was made to conceal the work from any member of the
expedition, drawings would be covered if a woman, child, or uninitiated youth
approached within 50 metres. In fact, in order to preserve further secrecy, the
old men insisted that the sheets should be carried into our tent in a folded position.

The drawings secured, particularly those of the aged men, are mostly cere-
monial in character, and refer to the exploits of such mythical beings as the kan-
garoo (malu), the wallaby (tawalpa), the snake (wanambr) who was responsible
for most of the permanent water holes, two separate groups of ancestral women,
and several human beings, including one called Jula, and the Wati Kutjara.

Other ancestors were mentioned, but this paper deals in detail only with
drawings relating to the Wati Kutjara (Wati = man, Kutjara = two).

In order to secure accurate copies, the drawings were photographed, the de-
signs outlined on the print and the photographic image bleached away. Thus
unintentional alterations are not introduced in the process of copying for re-
production.

The Wati Kutjara, according to our interpreter Pitawara (K.6), were good
looking and kindly young men, who made the best camping places for the natives,
and were generally held up as models to the young men of the tribe.

After many adventures, they climbed into the sky and can be seen on any
clear night, 8 Gemini representing Kurukadi, the elder, and a Gemini the younger,
Mumba.

Fig. 1 depicts an incident in the life of the Wati Kutjara at Njidibunga, an
unlocalized place some distance west of our base camp at Warupuju. The draw-
ing was made by a middle-aged native, Mungalu (K.14). The two designs on the
right hand side represent Kurukadi, the elder, while those on the left hand side
picture Mumba, the younger. The latter was a lazy individual, who sat about
most of his time, leaving his companion, Kurukadi, to do the greater share of
hunting and cooking.

Mumba, A, is depicted as seated upon a stone, B, with fires (shown as small
circles) on either side of him. The stone, B, is now a large hill at Njidibunga.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 7

Kurukadi, C, is shown without fires. The upper pair of figures depicts Kurukadi,
D, returned from the hunt and still carrying a kangaroo on his head. The upper
black line on the forehead of D represents the powdered charcoal and grease on his
forehead, while the lower line refers to the red ochre rubbed around the nose (1).
The fires are shown as adjacent to Kurukadi, and possibly represent cooking
hearths. Mumba, KE, is shown without legs, seated on some unspecified object. In
BLACK

AD
1
“—

FIG.2 YELLOW GJ RED

Cc

both A and E, Mumba is depicted as wearing a head-dress, whilst Kurukadi, at C,
has only a black line across the face, and at D, as previously mentioned, the face
was covered with powdered charcoal and ochre. Our informant, Mungalu, also
indicated that these ancestors made extensive journeys through the country,
creating many hills, waterholes and other natural features.

The placing of the figures, the choice of the colours, and the execution of this
drawing make it one of the most attractive obtained from the area.

Fig. 2 is of unusual character, and like fig. 1 forms one of the more decorative
sheets in the series. Tolaru (K.3) was responsible for this design. It refers to a
waterhole, Lelele (see fig. 15) some distance north-west of Warupuju, where one

(1) The custom of greasing the face and the body, and rubbing on crushed red ochre or
powdered charcoal was often witnessed during our stay.

8 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the Wati Kutjara threw a boomerang, its circuitous path being illustrated by
the incomplete ellipse A. He named the spot Lelele, picked up the boomerang, and
continued his journey ; the ancestor is pictured in the centre. B indicates his head
(kata), C and D the arms (ngaruka), F and G the feet (¢jena), and E the body
(jananggo). The footprints and chest scars are shown at K, L and M, N.

Fig. 3 was made by a middle-aged native, Windinja (K.51), and illustrates
the natural features made by the Wati Kutjara during their journeys in country
adjacent to two small water holes, A and B, known to the natives as Julduda and
Jalatja. These are situated in a creek lined with gum trees, The trees are indi-
cated by six series of concentric circles and spirals, D. E. F. G. H and J. The
creek, Warumba, C, is shown as a meandering line across the top of the drawing.
The only waterholes indicated are those at A and B, but Windinja when making
the drawing stated that other small water supplies could be found alone the
whole length of the creek.

The lower part of fig. 2 refers to the meeting of the two men with one of a
group of ancestral Kunkarunkara women. This woman made the creek, K, and

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 9

camped at Jabu Muluta, M (jabu = hill). The Wati Kutjara quarrelled about
the women, and one drove the other away, after which he rested at P, and slept
with the woman. The following morning, the two men made up their quarrel,
spirals N and O, indicating where they rested. (Although not specified by the
artist, these spirals doubtless represent natural features, probably hills). In this
place, the ancestral men laid down lines of bushes at Q, which, as time went on,
were transformed into a range of hills,

From their resting places at N and O, one of the men travelled to a locality,
R, near two hills called Jabu Njinga, where, in order to play a joke on his com-
panion, he impersonated a kangaroo. ‘The other man was about to spear the
supposed animal when the joker revealed himself. The above-mentioned hills,
Rand 8, were created from the two nose-bones (2) left behind by the ancestors at.
this place..

From these hills they travelled to a spot, T, where a waterhole, Kapi Jiljudi,
was created. Leaving this they camped or rested at U, Kapi Murara (kapi =
water, or waterhole), journeyed past an unnamed water to V, Muludumbi, rested
at W, and finally camped at X, Kapi Nealbari. At the latter place a number of
small waterholes, in addition to the larger ones shown at X, were made. ‘he lines
of spinifex at Y grew under the feet of the Wati Kutjara as they walked about.

An ancestral human beine, Wati Muluta, camped at Z. This individual is not
recorded in any other drawing, and is probably an unimportant mythical being.
M (Jabu Muluta) is associated with this ancestor.

An examination of fig. 3 will give some indication of how intimately these
ancestors (for the Wati Kutjara is only one of many) are associated with the
country, every natural feature being attrbiuted to the agency of one or the other
of them. The drawing also indicates the importance whieh natives of this arid
country attaeh to water supplies.

(2) A short piece of bone pushed through a hole in the nasal septum for purposes of decoration.

if

10 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 4 was drawn by Wanpiri (K.49) and deals with the wanderings of the
Wati Kutjara near Kapi Konapurul. The being or beings lay down and slept at
A and B. Where the buttocks rested, Kapi Kunpural, A, was formed, and the
depression made by the head became Kapi Kulpudjara, B. An unnamed creek,
which connects the two waterholes, was formed in the hollow made by the weight
of the body. The ancestors then travelled to C, where another waterhole appeared,
while a small unidentified waterhole to the right of C was made at the same time.

LOFIG.S

From here they went to D where a series of small waterholes named Kapi
Wangu now exist. Returning on the same track the Wati Kutjara passed through
C, camped at HE, forming Kapi Kanari (which is situated in a direction N.N.E.
from our base camp at Warupuju). Travelling through F, Kapi Kumbul, the
mythical beings camped at G, H.

Here again, as at A, B, two waters, Kapi Marltadara, G, and Kapi Kumpulta,
H, appeared where the buttocks and head had rested. As before a creek connect-
ing these two waters resulted from the gutter made by the weight of the body. No
explanation was given as to the maker of Kapi Wiwara, J.

On being asked why a square design (an unusual symbol) was used to repre-
sent J, Wanpiri stated that he drew both this water and Kapi Kumbul, F, in that
manner because that was their shape.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 11

The zig-zag line K represents a range of hills made by the ancestral kangaroo.
This he did by laying down bushes. On the same sheet were further drawings
relating to the wanderings of this ancestor, and also those of the mythical wallaby.
Ag these were not relevant to this series they are not reproduced.

Fig. 5 was drawn by Katabulka (K.1), the aged owner of Warupuju Spring
(our base camp). The drawing relates to a time when the Wati Kutjara left two
wanigt (3) at Kalkakutjara (Tindale, 1936, p. 179).

A and B represent the wanigt.

Although designs EK and F’ were marked on the sheet as representing two
additional wanig?, it is likely that Katabulka was misunderstood. Fig. 4 was one
of the first sheets of ceremonial drawings obtained, and considerable initial diffi-
culty was experienced, even with the help of the interpreter, in understanding the
explanations of the artist. The spiral designs at either end of E and F, and the
more or less parallel lines connecting them, resemble AB and GH in fig. 3. Further
as E and F are associated with the pubic tassels C and D, it is reasonable to suppose
that the former are symbolic of the Wati Kutjara.

It is also likely that G, H and J, which Katabulka explained were painted on
the backs and abdomen of the sub-initiates, represent the body decorations of the
ancestors themselves. This supposition is strengthened by the fact that Pitawara
(one of our interpreters) when referring to the Wati Kutjara ceremonies, at
Kanba, of which he was the owner, made the following statement: ‘‘We must do
the same as did Wati Kutjara. We sing the same songs, and have the one mark
(i.e. identical marks) on our bodies.’’

G, F and J, the designs painted on the bodies of sub-initiates, may be
representative of the marks on the bodies of the two ancestors. It is likely, then,
that E and F are the two men, B and C their pubic tassels, G and H the designs
painted on the back, and J that on the abdomen, while A and B stand for the two
wanigi lett behind at this locality.

The design at K was given the name of Merejawara. The transverse lines are
the marks on the chest, and the meandering lines a trail made by some being. For
the same reason as mentioned earlier, the meaning of the word, or the significance
of the symbol, could not be obtained. A rendering of Merejawara as mere = dead
or dying, and jawara = a mark made by a dragging object, would appear Literally
to mean ‘‘the trail made by a dying animal or man’’. his interpretation, how-
ever, may not be correct.

The two wanigi, A and B, were made at Turarurana (see fig. 8) and left at
Kalkakutjara (Tindale, 1936, p. 179).

(4) A saered object emblematic of some totemic animal or plant, Spencer and Gillen (1899,
page 231) give an excellent description. The Aranda name is Waninga.

12 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 6 was drawn by a fully initiated young man (K.8), and illustrates water-
holes and hills made by the Wati Kutjara. Reading from A across the centre of
the figure the names of the waters are as follow: A, Wanatara; B, Parlka-parlka ;
C, Walbawati; D, Kindingara; E, Kalitara; F and G, Kalianda; H, Lutja; J,
Muri.

2-90-68 © © <«. :
Si inal 7 rs

r* q ee e©€6

H | i]

ore: e. a = ©:

. _ Sa =“S4

¢3 ° * -

e >
F1G.6 ® © @ 6 =e

The remainder of the circles, O, P and Q, and similar designs, are hills, while
the parallel lines are the game pads made by present-day curos as they travel
between the waterholes and the hills.

On fig. 7 the Wati Kutjara are depicted as carrying a sacred object between
them at Kanba (Ghanda, P.B.197 (4) ). Tindale (1936, p. 174) gives the following
description of the making of a sacred anma board at this place. ‘‘The Wati
Kutjara cut off a slab of wood from the solid trunk of a large mulga tree, and made
an inma (or large wooden object of the type called tywrunga in Central Australia).
Two parallel marks were made up the trunk of the tree, and for three ‘‘nights”’
they hacked along the marks until they had cut out two deep grooves; a kandt or
adze stone, mounted on the end of a spear-thrower, was used for the work. On
the third night the slab of wood came off in their hands. . . . The long line of
dark patches in the Milky Way, between a Centauri and a Cygnus, called pula
pulinu, represents the inma (totem board) which the Wati Kutjara made, and
then left at Kanba. It remains there in the sky always, notwithstanding that the
material inme board still exists on earth. . . . They left the arma in a cave near
Kanba.”’ ,

The saered object being carried by the ancestors is the same as that described
in the above legend. The attempt to show some peculiar form of head-dress on
each of the men is of interest.

Fig. 8 relates to the doings of the Wati Kutjara at an unloealized place, Tura-

(4) P.B. 197 is one of a series of official bench marks made in 1932, and may be found in
Western Australian maps of this area, e.g. Plan 1X/800.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 13

ruranja, south-east from Julia (Tindale, 1936, p. 179). A and B represent two
rock holes, C an echidna which the men had killed and eaten at this place, and D
the trail made by a wanigt, which after having been constructed by the Wati
Kutjara, was dragged away. Althouch the writer was not told that these ancestors
were responsible for the creation of the rockholes (°) A and B, it is more than
likely that it was so, the men having camped there, thus becoming ceremonially
associated with the place.

Fig. 9 relates to the meeting of the Wati Kutjara with the aged ‘‘ Moon man’’
and his grandson. This drawing was made by Mungalu (K.14) towards the end
of our stay, when comparative freedom from routine enquiries made possible the
obtaining of a more complete story.

At the place A the old man and the boy camped for the night. The following
morning they set out on a journey to a spot, D, the tracks made by the two being
indicated at B and C respectively.

Kidjili, the aged moon man, was feeble and partly blind, and therefore unable
to see that game was plentiful in the country. His grandson was anxious to obtain
meat for the evening meal, and seeing a cat called out, ‘‘There is a wilka. Let us
kill it for food.’”’? ‘‘No,’’ said the old man crossly, ‘‘leave it alone. We have a
long way to go, and there is no time for hunting.’’

After this rebuff the boy was silent until he saw an opossum. He again asked
to be allowed to catch meat, but the old man refused, on the same grounds as before.
On several occasions during the journey the boy made similar requests, only to
receive a gruff denial.

The old man Kidjili knew that the Wati Kutjara, who were following, would
eatch and kill any game seen by his grandson. The boy, however, was not aware
of this, the grandfather having intentionally kept such knowledge from him.

(5 7) An Australian term to signify a water catchment i in a rocky ‘outerop.

14 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

When the two moon people reached D, the boy was given a wooden dish, and
sent to a neighbouring rockhole, E, in order to bring water to the camp. On his
arrival he found that the dish leaked so badly that long before he reached the camp
it was empty. After several ineffectual journeys he achieved his purpose by block-
ing the holes in the dish with human excrement.

On his arrival he found to his surprise that the old man had already obtained
fresh meat and had cooked it in the oven, T.

It transpired that during the boy’s absence the Wati Kutjara had approached
the camp from another direction, and, laying the captured game on the ground
for the blind man, retired to their camps at Q and R. The unused portion of the
meat was transformed into a range of hills (see parallel lines M) ; the footmarks of
the Wati Kutjara, now large gum trees, are indicated by circles F, G, H and I, J, K.

The boy, knowing his grandfather to be too blind to catch game, said to him-
self: “‘T wonder where my grandfather obtained his meat?’’

The same thing having happened on several occasions, the boy became sus-
picious and, instead of going for the water as instructed, watched the doings of
the old man from the cover of some bushes. To his surprise two good-looking men
came up and gave meat to the old man. The boy then showed himself, and the old
man, finding that further subterfuge was useless, told the grandson that the Wati
Kutjara were his ‘‘uncles’’.

The camps of the Wati Kutjara are now two large hills, Q being called Nan-
gulpa, while R is unidentified. The depression S was made by the buttocks of

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 15

one of the men when he sat down to comb his beard, the creek P appearing where
the beard had rested on the ground,

It is interesting to note the difference between Kidjili, the moon man, who was
a relative of the Wati Kutjara, and Kulu, the man who pestered the Kunkarunkara
women, and who was finally killed by the Wati Kutjara at Tjilandi (Tindale, 1936,
p.176). Ina drawing by our interpreter, Pitawara (K,6), which shows influences
of his European associations, Kulu is described as ‘‘the ‘boss’ of the Moon, as well
as the morning and evening star’’.

=”

\

FIG. II

Fig. 10 refers to a place situated some distance east of the base camp called
Tjukata. The drawing, the work of Mungalu (K.14), is included in this series
because it was at this place that the Wati Kutjara are stated to have killed and
eaten the ancestral kangaroo, Malutjukur (malu = kangaroo, tjukur = relating
to the long distant past).

Several mythical beings, in addition to the Wati Kutjara, were responsible
for the hills, waterholes and creeks in this part of the country. The great snake,
Wanambt, as it travelled between B and W, forced the hills, C and D, apart and
created the creek A. The two hills are known as Jabu Tjukata. The ancestral
eaglehawk was responsible for the waterholes EK, F, G and H, the first two being
called Tjukata and Wakaelabunga respectively ; the latter was described as a rock-

16 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

hole inside of a hill, and it is interesting to note that the artist has attempted to
picture it in a different manner to the others.

The paired tracks J and K belong to the ancestral kangaroo who was killed
and eaten by the Wati Kutajara, who, after they had finished their meal, left the
head of the kangaroo behind. I and V are spear-throwers that belonged to the
hunters. Although not specifically mentioned these are probably natural features,
most likely hills.

Fig. 11 drawn by Windinja (K.51) relates to the incidents surrounding the
meeting of the Wati Kutjara and a eroup of ‘‘Sun’’ women at a place called Bubul.

FIG. 12

The story given as an explanation of this drawing is as follows: At the end of
a day’s journey the Wati Kutjara made a camp at A, and while resting heard the
sound of natives talking. The ancestors called out to the people ‘‘Come over here’’,
but received no reply. The ancestral men than said to one another, ‘‘I wonder
who they can be,’’ and continued to call. As the people who were talking in the
bush did not show themselves, the Wati Kutjara became angry, and set fire to the
spinifex that covered the surrounding country. The fire burnt these unsociable
people, who, it transpired, were a group of ‘‘Sun’’ Women (®). At every spot

(6) These women were called Tjindulakainguru. This word refers to one of the subdivisions
in the social organization of the Ngadadjara. tribe, and literally translated means ‘‘ Those who
sit, or camp in the sun’’, They thus belonged to the same generation as the Wati Kutjara. It
will be seen that the translation, given by the interpreter as ‘‘sun women’’, is a reasonable one,

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 17

where a woman was burnt (indicated by the series of concentric circles) a spring
arose. These are connected by large hills, drawn as parallel lines.

After the burning of the women the men travelled to D, where they lit a fire.
The hill that stands at this spot rose out of the ashes of that camp fire.

X is another hill, N a spring of water, and A the first camp of the Wati Kut-
jara, a large group of gum trees. The meandering lines H, F and G, represent a
series of creeks which flow into a waterhole at M.

Fig. 12 refers to a totemie centre called Julia (which place is identified by
Tindale, 1936, p. 170, as Sladden Waters in the Rawlinson Range). The sketch
was associated with the Wati Kutjara, but being one of the earlier drawings full
details were not secured. According to the artist, Katabulka (K.1), the concentrie
circles A, B, C and D were painted on the chest and forehead, and G on the back,
of the sub-initiates during the time they were undergoing ceremonial training at
this centre.

The rough sketches EK and F were made by the writer, and Katabulka was
asked to show the exact positions of the markings on the boy’s body. This he did,
explaining at the same time, that although the design covered the whole face of
the rough figure H, the actual symbol was painted on the forehead only.

The meandering lines connecting the various groups of circles were named
wanajawara, i.e. the trail made by the dragging of a digging stick (7) (wana =
digging stick, jawara = the trail made by a dragging object). This word suggests
the possibility of women being associated with this place, for the digging stick is
essentially a woman’s implement.

It is almost certain that A, B, C, D and F have a topographical significance,
but, as explained in connection with fig. 4, full details were not obtained.

(7) Wana, a stick about 5 em. in diameter and 1-5 metres long, sharpened to a chisel point
at one end by means of fire, It is used by the women for digging out yams and small marsupials,

18 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 13 was drawn by Katabulka (K.1) and its details recorded by Tindale.
It relates to the adventures of the Wati Kutjara at Tjawan, some two days’ walk
west of Windalda (Tindale, 1936, p.175). At Tjawan the Wati Kutjara made a
damper (*) from an unidentified fruit called turuba. The larger series of con-
centric circles, A represents a heap of the fruit, B and C the cooked dampers. The
latter were made by mixing the ground or pulverized fruit with water, and cooking
the mixture in the ashes.

F G J : ©"

The meandering lines connecting A, B and C depict the fruit spilling out on
the earth from the large heap at A. This may be a symbolic device by which an
aborigine expresses the presence of a plentiful supply. The meanings of A, B, C
and F apparently relate to the topography of the country. D and E are known to
be a water supply and a hill respectively.

Fig. 14 drawn by Tolaru (K.3) refers to ranges of hills and a waterhole north-
east of Warupuju. These hills were the handiwork of the Wati Kutjara. The
two outer circles picture the ranges named Jabu Neridji, and the inner circle a
waterhole called Kapi Paleuduna.

Fig. 15 was drawn by Ngawanti (K.48) and relates to the country a few miles
east of our camp. In this district the Wati Kutjara were responsible for eighteen
waterholes, a creek and a low range, A, called Bimulba. The latter grew up from
a game trap which had been constructed from the branches of trees for the purpose
of catching wallabies. One man hunted the animals into the trap while the other
killed them as they became entangled in the bushes. The two lines of concentrie
circles refer to the previously mentioned water supplies. Reading from the left
the names of those on the bottom are N, Wildjeri; O, Karnka (Tindale considers

(8) An outback Australian term applied fo a scone-like bread cooked in the ashes of a camp
fire. The name is not without its humorous side.

MoUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 19

His is likely to he Barlee Springs, P.B. 332); P, Katajungili; Q, Jili; R, Lelele;
8, Talunba; T, Neunduls UV, Kamini (Gamminah Soak, west of Mount tHerbert).
The last lwo, V and W, are munamed.

The names of the upper line. in the same order, ate; D, Duira; H, Pintapila;
h’, Katata; G, Palkiitay WH, Kakili; 1, Kapibura; KX, Juara; M, Tarnaja. Spinifex
country surrounded these waterholes.

The natives believe that the creek C was formed where the loosened hair string
(") of the Wati Kutjara rested after the wind had blown it along the ground.

Wie. 16 was drawh by K.8 and snegests that the Wati Kutjara were trans-
formed from erested pigeons into human beings at one time in their existence.
The large oval A represents a wet weather camp, the small upper oval B the camp
of the mother of the Wati Kutjara and her two children (apparently the youthful
Wati Kutjara). The mother is at R and the children at S, and their tracks at
Cand D lead away to the right, ln the lower oval O are the Wati Kutjara, T, their
tvacks, being shown at H.

Inchided in the same sheet are the drawings ol a crested pigeon, I, with its
tracks al B. K.8 explained thai this pigeon or pigeons later became the Wati
Kutjara. The camp of the crested pigeons al EK is now a well known waterhole
Windurn (Windarro, P.B. 280), while the large oval A is a place in the spinifex
country known to the natives as Jaralubulba. J is a wanigi left behind by the
Wati Kutjara.

This fragmentary sidelight touches on another aspeet of the Wati Kutjara
legend. It suggests that a group of pigeons were thansformed into human beings.
This transformation is not unusual in aborigiual mytholowy (Spencer and Gillen,
1904, pp. 400-410) quote several such instances. Tindale has shown that the

(!) The hair is bound in the form of a chignon with a considerable leugth of fur string,
Only fully initiated men are allowed to wear their hair in this fashion,

20 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

totem of the father of Pitawara (a Wati Kutjara totem man) was the mutumutu
or pigeon (Tindale, 1936, p. 182).

Fig. 17, the work of an elderly aborigine, Tolaru (K.3) illustrates a group of
three fig trees, jil¢ (19), which grow adjacent to a water supply ealled Kapi Tuk-
untjara, some distance north-west of Warupuju. The Wati Kutjara who came
from the south-west, camped at this place, and wherever they rested groups of fig
trees sprang up. A, B and C are but three of these trees.

Several sheets of drawings having a bearing on the Wati Kutjara legend were
drawn by our interpreter Pitawara (K.6). On all sheets, with the exception of
two figured by Tindale (1936, fig. 5 and 6), the designs used to illustrate the legend-
ary stories were typically European. This was probably due to the fact that the
aborigine had been in contaet with missionaries and police officers since he was a
young man, and thus had a restricted education in ceremonial matters. Pitawara
thus had little or no knowledge of the traditional symbols used by his countrymen,
although he appeared to be conversant with many of the legendary stories, par-
ticularly those relating to his own totem, the Wati Kutjara.

This would suggest that, although the legends are a matter of common know-
ledge to the men and to a lesser extent, the women, the method of depicting such
stories would only be acquired after years of association with the secret life of
the tribe.

In another of Pitawara’s series of drawings, a story relating to Kulu, the
morning and evening stars, and the new and full moon, is illustrated. The body of
Kulu is marked to show the manner in which the Wati Kutjara decreed that all
men should be decorated when they danced in the ceremonies relating to Kulu, who
was killed by the Wati Kutjara for interfering with women called the Kunkarun-
kara (Tindale, 1936, p.176). As mentioned in connection with fig. 9, Kulu should
not be confused with Kidjili, the moon. According to Pitawara, Kulu is the
master of the moon and morning and evening stars. The two latter, which the
natives recognize as one and the same, is called Murunba, the new moon Kidjili
pilda, and the full moon Kidjili takanba. The moons were depicted in the conven-
tional European manner, i.e. a crescent and a circle respectively, Murunba, five
pointed stars, and Kulu as a man in the usual manner.

Another drawing by the same aborigine shows a native dancing in the Wati
Kutjara ceremonies. It depicts him as wearing shaved sticks in his hair and with
his body marked with lines of down.

(10) A tree (Ficus platypoda) which grows on rocky outerops, the fruit of which is an
aboriginal food.

MouUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS al

ANALYSIS OF DESIGNS.

When examples of aboriginal art trom various parts of Australia are ex-
amined, it is noticeable that, those originating from the Northern Coast and, to a
lesser extent, from the Hastern coastal fringe north of Sydney, are largely repre-
sentations of various animals, fish and human beings. Some of the cave paintings
from Napier Broome Bay (Mountford, 1937, pp. 30-40), Prince Kegent River
(Bradshaw, 1891, p. 100), and adjacent localities are drawn with a freedom of
style that is not known in any other part of Australia.

When, however, the art of the natives from Central and South Australia, Tas-
mania aud Western Australia is examined, it will be noticed that by far the
greatest number of designs im use are so highly conventionalized as to be inde-
eipherable without the assistance of the artist who produced them.

The identifiable figures of uleu, animals and reptiles form a small percentage
of the designs Lo be seen at the various sites. An examination of Basedow’s work
on the rock carvings of South Australia (Basedow, 1915, p. 195-211), and the
writer's work on the sanie subject (Mounttord, 1928, p. 887-366), will make this
potol clear,

The drawings in the Wati Kutjara suite and, for that matter, all those collee-
ted at the Warburton Ranges, showed characteristics similar to the designs trom
Central, Southern and Western Australia,

Hor that reason, if was decided to analyse the Wati Kutjara suite under six
headings, as follows:

(a) 'l'ypes of designs used,

(0) Number of oceasions on which a particular design appears.

(¢) Meaning attached to a specitied design in each particular figure,
(d) The numbers of each type design used,

(e) The choice of colours.

(f/) Age of aborigines respousible for the production of the drawings,

(a) Typr ov Dusian Usep.

Figs. 1 and 2, being anthropomorphic, are excluded from the analysis, figs.
3-17 only being considered.

An examination of the various figures showed that the symbolical designs used
could be grouped under ten headings. The drawings of miscellaneous objects,
including human, animal, and animal (racks, may be set under another two,
making a total of Lwelve categories in all, .

The ten symbolic designs are shown in figs, 18 to 27. Three of the tigures, i.e.

22 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

18-19, and 22 are considered to be amplifications of simpler figures such as 20, 23
and 25.

Each of the figures, i.e. 18-27, was used by the natives to convey different
meanings, and will be considered as a separate element.

o — ~ © <=
21 22

18 19 20
|| \/
23 24 25 26 27

As mentioned previously, the analysis excluded designs from figs. 1 and 2.
These, however, would not influence the averages to any extent as they only con-
tain 17 only in a total of 357 designs.

(b) Number or FIguRES IN WHICH A PARTICULAR DESIGN Is USED.

Concentric cireles (fig. 18) 10
Parallel straight lines (fig. 19) 8
Meandering or zigzag lines (fig. 20) 5
Spirals (fig. 21) i ‘ 6
Parallel meandering or zigzag lines (fig. 22) 4
Circles (fig 23) 9)
Ellipses (fig. 24) 2
Straight lines (fig. 25) 2
Squares (fig. 26) 1
Fern leaf (fig. 27) 1

(¢) Mnanines ArracHepD TO Eacu Design ELEMENT.

Fig. 18. Concentric circles (10 figures).
Fig. 3—Haills, waterholes and gum trees.
Fig. 4--Waterholes and ceremonial marks placed on the bodies of the natives
(which may refer to some totemic centre).

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Pig. 2

MouNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 23

Fig. 6—Waterholes and hills.

Fig. 8—Waterholes.

Fig. §—Ilills, gum trees and waterholes.

Fig, 10—Waterholes.

Fig. 12—Ceremonial body markings (see fig. 4 above).
Fig. 13—A ‘‘damper’’ made from ground or pounded fruit.
Fig. 15—Waterholes and hills.

Fig. 16—Waterholes.

Fig. 17—Ceremonial fig tree.

19. Parallel straight lines (8 figures).

Fig, 4—Creeks between two waterholes,
Fig. 5

Ceremonial marks on aborigine’s chest.

Fig, 6—Paths made by euros.

Fig. 7—The Wati Kutjara and an wna board.

Fig, 8—Mark made by dragging a ceremonial object.
Fig. 9—Creek and range of hills.

Fig. 11—Range of hills.

Fig. 17—No meaning obtained.

20. Meundering or zigzag lines (5 figures).

Fig. 3—Creeks, ranges of hills, lines of spinifex.

Fig. 4—Ranges of hills.

Fig, 5—Trail made by dragging object.

Fie. 7T—Creeks.

Fig. 15—Creeks and ranges of hills.

21. Spirals (6 figures).

Fig. 3—Waterholes, hills and gum trees.

Bie. 5—Ceremonial marks on backs of initiates. Similar meaning on same
plate for concentric circles.

Vig. 12--Ceremonial marks on backs of initiates.

Hie. 13—Damper made from eround fruit.

Kie. 15—Waterholes.

Fig. 17—Fig trees.

2 Parallel meandering and zigzag lines (i figures).

Bie. §—Paths made by ancestral beings.

Wig. 1O—Creek made by ancestral snake.

Fig. 12—Trail made by the dragging of digging sticks.

Wig. 13—Paths made by fruit as it rolled from large heap.

24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 23. Simple circle (5 figures).
Fig. 3—Small waterholes.
Fig. 4—Waterholes.
Fig. 6—Waterholes.
Fig. 10—Waterholes.
Fig. 16—Opossum being’s camp and windbreak.
Fig. 24. Ellipse (2 figures).
Fig. 9—Native oven.
Fig. 10—Hills.
Fig. 25. Simple straight lines (1 figure).
Fig. 11—Hills.

Fig. 26. Square (1 figure).
Fig. 11—Waterholes.

Big. 27. Fern leaf design (1 figure).
Fig. 5—Pubiec Tassels, Wanigt.

Summary or ANALysIs OF MEANINGS ATTACHED TO VARIOUS Design ELEMENTS.

Fig. 18. Concentric circles.

These are largely used to represent a geographical feature, a locality, or a
waterhole.
fig. 19. Parallel straight lines had a broad range of meaning, such as was to be
expected with so simple a design. In general, it represents creeks, ranges of hills,
paths and ceremonial markings.
Fig. 20. Meandering or zigzag lines.

The meanings attached to fig. 20 were similar to those associated with fig. 19,
representing ranges, creeks and tracks followed by the various ancestors.
Fig. 21. Spirals.

These were used side by side with the concentric circle, fig. 18. In many cases
the figure was started as a spiral and completed asa concentric circle (see fig. 3,
G.J.M.).
Pig. 22. Parallel meandering and zigzag lines.

This is an amplification of fig. 20, and the meanings used for the one are
equally applicable to the other.

MouNnTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 25

Fig. 23. Plain cireles.

This figure, like that of the spiral, has similar significance to the concentric
circles.

Fig. 24, Ellipse.

Used twiee only, once picturing a native cooking hearth, and in fig. 8 in a
somewhat more elongated form depicting hills.

Piy. 25, Straight line.

Although a simplified form of fig. 19, the single isolated straight line was used
twice, On each oceasion it represented ranges of hills.

Fig.26. Square.

This unusual pattern was used on fig. 5 to represent rock holes; the native
drew the square to indicate particular rock holes of that shape.
Big. 27. Fern leaf.

Well known to students of primitive art from many parts of the world
(Mountford, 1935, p. 215), the fern leaf design appeared only in fig. 4. In this
ease, it had two totally unrelated meanings, Le. a pubic tassel and a wanigt.

Various tracks of animals and men were uoted in figs. 2, 10, 11 and 16. It
is more than likely that, in suites of drawings relating to the personal experiences
of the aboriginal artists, or to the domgs of the animal ancestors, such as the
kaugaroos, CLUS OF OpOssuTus, a wreater percentage of footprints would oeeur.
Nevertheless, they would not approach the percentage of hunmn and animal foot
tracks seen among the voek carvings in South Australia (Mountford, 1928, p. 348).
tu some localities, in the rock carving sites of South Australia, various footprints
form the bulk of the petroglyphs present.

(d) Tae Numepers or Hacn Drsian Usp.

Fig. 18 we BM Fig. 23 - oe oR
Fig. 19 -. eg 204 Fig. 24 5
Fig, 20 ma Pa Fig. 25 2
Fig. 21 aoe Fig. 26 2
Fig. 22 io ~ #1 Fig. 27 » Bf 4

These figures reveal an interesting fact. Out of 340 figures drawn, the eir-
cular designs, i.e. fies, 14, 21, 25 aud 24 represent about one half, i.e. 176.

As most of the drawings are, in reality, crude maps of the country, it is to be
expected that the circular figures shonld predominate, for, as has already been

26 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

shown, such designs usually represent some well known topographical feature such
as a hill, a waterhole, or an especially large tree. The predominance of circular
designs is also evident in Aranda drawings (Mountford, 1937A, p. 193).

For the same reason, designs 20 and 22 (parallel straight and meandering
lines) symbolical of creeks and ranges, were used 149 times, leaving 75 figures to
represent other features.

The drawings of tracks, objects, and animal and human forms, which number
17 in all, are excluded from the above analysis.

(e) THE CHoIce or CoLours.

As mentioned previously, the native was given the free choice of four coloured
crayons, i.e. red, yellow, black and white. Especial care was taken to see that these
colours were always on hand. One red crayon was, by chance, of a brighter hue
than the others, and it was interesting to note that this crayon was in constant
demand.

The colours used were also analysed, with the following results :

Combinations of colours used.

(Number of figures in suite, 17.)

Ried and white . 23 or ils be & . 11
Red, yellow and white 2
Red, yellow, white and black . 2
Yellow and white 1
Red 1

It will be seen that the most commonly used colours were red and white, each
appearing in 16 out of the 17 figures. Yellow was used in only five sketches, and
black in two.

In the majority of cases, white was used as an outline of the main design,
whilst red, and in two eases, yellow, formed the main design. (12).

Red is the favourite colour of the aborigines, it being considered to be the
sign of good health by the Narrinyeri peoples of the Lower Murray. During the
smoke drying of the dead body, it was anointed with red ochre and grease for the
same reason.

The colour is used most extensively in ceremonial as well as personal decora-
tion, and long journeys are undertaken to obtain this valued cosmetic. The most
famous of these journeys recorded was that undertaken by the Deiri tribe of the
North-East of South Australia to the red ochre deposit at Blinman in the Northern

(42) The key to the colours used in Figs. 1-17 can be seen on Fig, 2.

MouUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS a7

Flinders Ranges in South Australia, a distance of 300 miles (Gason, 1879, p. 280).
During a recent expedition to the Northern Flinders it was ascertained that natives
travelled from Charlesville, 8.W. Queensland, to Blinman, a journey of over 900
miles, for the same purpose.

Black, as the figures show, was used in two drawings. Dislile of this colour
could hardly be the reason for a not greater use, for on many occasions during his
stay at Warupuju the writer saw the natives decorating themselves with grease
and powdered charcoal,

Ages of the men who produced the drawings.

The majority of the drawings collected on this expedition were the handiwork
of the older men.

In the series under review, 15 figures were produced by men over 50 years
of age, one by a native of about 21 years of age, and {wo by a youth of 18.

Figs. 0, 8, 12 and 13, drawn by K.1 estimated age 50.

Figs. 2, 14, 17 iets ee BD.
Fig. 7 7 » KA by yy dt
Figs. 6 and 16 s » K.8 5 » =(18.
Figs. 1, 9 and 10 5 , Kd ,, » 46.
Fig. 15 A » KAR, » 40,
Figs. 3 and 11 ” pee hs) yo BoE

(K.6), the interpreter Pitawara, also made four sketches (not reproduced) ; his
estimated age was 24.

It will be seen that the average age by the seven artists responsible for the
fifteen figures is estimated to be thirty-seven years.

Younger men, with the exception of K.8, made sketches of simple objects, or
lines of waterholes, similar to fig. 6. These men volunteered little detail. This is
to be expected, for the acquisition of a full knowledge of the legendary stories re-
quires years of training, as well as many long and arduous journeys to the various
totemic centres.

K.8, who drew the sketch indicating the ovigin of the Wati Kutjara (fig. 16),
although quite a young man, 18 years old, took a prominent part in the ceremonies.

He showed more personality than his companions of the same age and it is
likely that this, coupled with a higher degree of interest, enabled him to aequire
a deeper knowledge of the ceremonial life than that obtained by other young men.

28 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SUMMARY.

This paper records a suite of aboriginal drawings relating to the wanderings
of two legendary men, the Wati Kutjara. The drawings are the work of men of
the Ngadadjara tribe of the Warburton Ranges of Western Australia.

The first part of the paper deals with a detailed description of each sheet,
and the second, an analysis of the designs used, the meanings thereof, the favourite
colours, and the ages of the aboriginal artists concerned.

LITERATURE.

Tindale, N. B. (June, 1936) : Oceania, Vol. vi, No. 4, pp. 481-485.

Tindale, N. B. (Dee., 1936) : Oceania, Vol. vii, No. 2, pp. 169-185.

Spencer, B. and Gillen, F. J. (1899) : Native tribes of Central Australia.

Spencer, B. and Gillen, F. J. (1904) : Northern tribes of Central Australia.

Mountford, C. P. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. Aust., pp. 30-40.

Bradshaw, Jos. (1891) : Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc. Aust., Vic., p. 100.

Basedow, H. (1935) : Journ. Roy. Anthrop. Inst., xliv, pp. 195-211.

Mountford, C. P. (1928) : Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., pp. 337-366.

Mountford, C. P. (1935) : Aust. Ass. Adv. Sct., p. 2138.

Gason, Samuel M., Taplin, G. and others (1879) : Native tribes of South Australia,
p. 280.

Mountford, C. P. (1987) : Trans. Roy. Soc. of 8. Aust., p. 98.

TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Scattered through early accounts of South Australia there are brief references to
Tasmanian women who were brought to South Australia by sealers and escapees from
Van Diemen Land during the early years of last century.

The present paper summarizes some facts relating to four Tasmanian women and
places on record a few words still known to the descendants of the Tasmanians. It also
gives an account of two small pieces of archaeological work carried out by Dr. H. L.
Movius of the Department of Anthropology, Harvard University, N. de Crespigny,
and the writer at Cape Hart and at Antechamber Bay, in March, 1936.

TASMANIAN ABORIGINES on KANGAROO ISLAND
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By NORMAN B.'TINDALT, B.Se., Emawonacier, Sourn AuerrALiAN Museum.
Plate iii, and Text fig. 1-3.

INTRODUCTION.

Scarrnren through early accounts of South Australia there are brief references
to Tasmanian women who were brought to South Australia by sealers and escapees
from Van Diemen Land during the early years of last century.

The present paper summarizes some facts relating to four Tasmanian women
and places on record a few words still known to the descendants of the Tasmanians,
Tt also eives an account of two small pieces of archaeologieal work carried out by
Dr, Fl. L. Movius of the Department of Anthropology. Harvard University, N, de
Crespigny, and the writer at Cape Hart and at Antechamber Bay, in March, 1936.

There are many references in the literature to the lawless people of Tasmanian,
Avistralian and European origin who lived along the Southern coasts of Australia
between 1803 and 1836. A useful account is given by Moore (1925), while Berry
(1907) deseribed a then living half-caste Tasmanian descendant of one of the
Tasmanian women, Tindale and Maevraith (1931) have also given a brief account
of these people during the course of their deseription of the archaeological remains
of an ancient occupation of Kangaroo Island.

Tn more recent years the collating of the reminiscences of some of the oldest
inhabitants of the island and a study of official doeuments anc records has enabled
the main outline of the story of the Tasmanian native women to be traced down
to the time of the death of the last one about the year 1888,

Amone those who have contributed to these details are Mr. Robert Snelling.
born in 1853, whose parents issued Government rations to the blaeks on Kangaroo
Island; Mr. Fred Buick, born in 1856; the late Mr, C. J. May, Curator of the Flora
and Fauna Reserve at Flinders Chase, and Mr, A. Daw. Tam indebted also to Mz.
M. T. MeLean (Protector of Aborigines) for information contamed in official
doeket No. 3890/1894 in the Aborigines Office and in docket No, 280/1894 of the
Destitute Board Office. Mr. H. T, Condon kindly made drawings Nos. 12-15.

The only pictorial record of the Tasmanian women of Kangaroo Island is
probably the one given in a sketch by Leigh (1839) opposite p. 105 of his aceount
where three women are shown as squatting with legs folded before a fire, behind
a low breakwind (pl. iii, fig. 1).

30 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

THE NATIVE WOMEN OF KANGAROO ISLAND,

The lack of originality shown by the sailors in naming their native womentoll
has helped to confuse the record but numerous accounts attest 1o the presence of
four Tasmanian women on the island. The South Australian census returns for
1866 (5) for example record the native population of Kangaroo [slanc, and a foot-
note states that ‘4 natives of Van Diemen Land”’ were also present, In Destitute
Board Office docket No, 28/1894 there is correspondence which (discusses the status,
for relief purposes, of Mary, the half-easte daughter of Betty, one of these Tas-
manians (italies are owrs) : ‘The applicant is not an aboriginal of S.A. blood, but
it has been the practice to assist aborigines from the other Australian colonies when
located in South Anstralia. There were three (3) Tasmanian women, native
hbload, lining in Kangaroo Island for many years, the last of these aborigines died
about six years ago, and she was reeeiving rations from this department. The
present applicant is believed to be the very last of this race, and on the ground of
Intercolonial reciprocity would, I submit, haye some claim on S.A. for assistance,
(Signed) E. AH. Hamilton, 8th. Sept. 1894,’’

This official record indicates the probability that the last Tasmanian survived
on Kangaroo Island until 1888.

In addition to the Tasmanian women at least two Australian aboriginal women
are mentioned in early records and it seems advisable therefore to list the names
of both the Tasmanian and Australian women and also to give supplementary
details mentioned by my informants and a list of some other notes found in the
ephemeral literature.

TASMANIANS.
(1) Rumble-foot Sal = Biy Sal,

‘Fine-looking big black’’, bumble-footed, had lost two toes by burning in a
fire ; her hair was ‘‘ wonderfully eurly as in Suke and Betty’’, Old accounts state
that she had dark skin and woolly hair, She is supposed to have died somewhere
near the waterfall at Middle River, She is mentioned by Bull (1878, ps. 8) as‘‘a
Tasmanian hlackwoman, called Sal, who had lost half of one of Ler feet when
young by sleeping with them too near the fire’’,

(2) Betty = Pole-cat = Old Bet.

Brought trom Van Diemen Land about 1819 by Robert Wallen. She lived
with Nat Thomas at Antechamber Bay and had a son and two daughters, These
children are mentioned in a newspaper article (‘South Australia Register’’, 25th
September, 1844) :‘‘Nat Thomas has , . . . a native woman who eatehes veullaby
for him, By her he has three very interesting little children, who eombine the

intelligence of the white with the activity of the native.’’ The son went io sea

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO TSLAND 3)

and was not heard of again. The daughters both had ehildren of whom five were
still living in 1936. There are also numbers of oetoroon deseendants, Detailed
venealogies have been gathered as a basis fora study of the deseetidants of the two
families. Ller grandson Joseph, living on Kangaroo Island, states that Betty died
i 1878 and was buried at Antechamber Bay; the approximate site of her graye is
known to be in a small field opposite the point where the main road tums abruptly
northwest away from the banks of Chapman River (Seetion 75, Hundred of
Dudley). Unfortunately the surface indications have been obliterated aeciden-
tally by ploughing, Tolmer (1882) mentions Old Bet as a Tasmanian and one of
her daughters, Mary, as the child of Nat Thomas. Mary was studied and deseribed
hy Berry (1907), Her photograph is also published by Hallack (1905, p, 43).
Mary’s previously mentioned 1894 application to the Government for sustenance
was approved, and in retran for the surrender of her property she was allowed
‘ations from the Aborigines Office until her death on the 9th September, 1913, A
few days after her death her eldest daughter Enima applied for permission to
retain the use of the cottage property until it was sold by the Government. Emma
was then 60 years of age, Her brother Joseph wrote to the Snrveyor-General from
Penneshaw on August 31, 1914, asking for partienlars regarding the ‘‘ property
lately aeenpied hy my late mother Mary’’.

The other daughter of Betty is stated to have married a fair-haired man from
Lincolnshire, and threg of her four sons and several grandehildven survive,

(3) Old Suke = Sal (not to be confused with Little Sal),

A. Tasmanian who was of a retiring nature. She was seldom seen in the later
days except when she gathered her rations. According to R. Snelling she was the
last to die, but there is donbt as to her burial place. In 1844 she was arrested with
another woman by Tolmer for complicity in the killing of Meredith, an early
visitor from Van Diemen Land,

(4) Puss.

A fourth Tasmanian woman is mentioned under the name of Puss.

Puss and Poleeat (Betty) are described as having been brought, together,
from Van Diemen Land by Robert Wallen (Worley, Whalley, Wally, Walker,
Wallens) who escaped from eustody there about 1817 (arriving at Kanearoo
Ixland about 1819), There seems to be little remembrance of Puss on the island.

AUSTRALIANS.

In addition to the above Tasmanians, several mainland natives are believed
to have lived on the island and one or two have heen al times confused with the
foregoing. Twa of them are given particular notice:

32 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(1) Little Sal = Sal.

In Tolmer’s (1882) account of Kangaroo Island Little Sal is mentioned as
having been abdueted from Port Lincoln about 1827. According to R. Snelling
she claimed to be a mainlander. Two other informants emphasize that in contrast
to Betty and Suke she had straight, or at most wavy hair, an Australian charac-
teristic. It appears from local information that she was buried at Springy Water,
near Stokes Bay, about the year 1877.

Two other informants, the late Mr. C. J. May, and Mr. A. Daw, regarded
Little Sal as a Tasmanian, and Hallack (1905) states that the last of the Tas-
manians is buried at the place called Springing Vale, near Stokes Bay, Kangaroo
Island. This seems to be the same place as Springy Water.

The weight of evidence seems to be that Little Sal was a native of Port Lincoln.

(2) Sally Walker.

This woman was well known as a native of the adjoining mainland. She
lived at Hog Bay and had no associations with the Tasmanian women.

It seems that at most four Tasmanian women were among the permanent
native inhabitants of Kangaroo Island during the lawless days preceding the
foundation of the State. The earliest date suggested for their arrival is 1810.
They were definitely present in 1519. Official records indicate the presence of
four in 1866, and one of them lived on until about 1888. One (Betty) had children
and some ten quadroon and octoroon descendants live in South Australia te-day.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL TRACES OF THE TASMANIANS ON KANGAROO
ISLAND.

Mr. H. M. Cooper, who has displayed much interest in the systematic collecting
of implements from camp sites on the mainland of South Australia, several years
ago, was asked by the writer to extend his activities to Kangaroo Island. During
the years 1935 to 1937 he found no fewer than 47 sites indicative of the ancient
highly characteristic native occupation of Kangaroo Island. Some details of his
discoveries are given in another paper in this series. In February, 1936, after one
of his periodic visits to the island he brought back to the Museum a European gun
flint and several strange bluish-egrey flint implements of a type not previously
found on the island,

At first glance these seemed to be of Tasmanian origin. Some of the flint
implements and the gun flint had been found on a small rectangular site indicated
by stones and by the remains of a stone chimney at Cape Hart. The others, even

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ARORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND 33

more characteristically Tasmanian, were found on a wind-swept rise less fhan two
hundred metres from the sea at Antechamber Bay beside the well on Seetion 394
whieh appears in the 1910 edition of the Hundred map of Dudley.

The flint from which the inplements were made proved to he similar lo that
found commonly in the Tertiary Marine limestones of the South-Bast of South
Australia, several ocenrrenees of whieh have been noted by Tindale (1983, ps, 158)
and by Towehin (1984, p, 16).

Throngh the courtesy of Dr. CLT. Code Crespigny in organizing a visit to the
ishind, Dr, H, L, Moving, N. de Crespigny, ancl the writer, visited the sites in
March, 1986. Examination led to the recovery of further flint flakes at the Cape
Fart site, while flint boulders were found to abound on the adjoining beach and
several broken ones were ford associated with the flint chippings present within
the wind-swept area covered by the Wit site and in its immediate vieinity, The
flint chippings weve confined to an area little more than 10 m. x 15 m. on the sea-
ward edge of a flat limestone shelf some six inetres above sea level immediately to
the west of Cape Hart. Wind scour had dropped all remains to the limestone and
had removed most traces of Pood debris except for a few weathered bones,

The Antechamber Bay site, which was situated approximately 50 metres due
north of the mouth of Chapman River and about 200 metres inland from the beach
line, proved to be more productive and notwithstanding that some wind seou had
already talcen place it was possible to dig into and sieve a thin layer of undisturbed
debris on the site of what was once a hut. Several additional flint implement
flakes were recovered and the productive layer, only a Few centimetres in thiekness,
was found to consist of ashy material, remains of shellfish (all Turbo undulatus )
and bones, principally (lose of (he Sooty or Kangaroo Island Kangaroo (Macropus
fuliginosus). EBragments of glass bottles, a small hand-carved bone, forming part
of a domino piece and several flints were recovered,

Examples of the flint implements, fhe game piece (ihe half of the two. of
duminges), # kangaroo jaw bone, a Turbo undulatus shell and a tragment of glass
bottle are shown in plate iii, fig. 2, and one of the flints and the game piece are
shown in the text figures 1 and 3,

On our visit to Antechamber Bay we were accompanied by a grandson of
(he Tasmanian woman Betty, wito was able fo indicate the site as beg at the
landing place favoured by sealers who visited Antechaniber Bay. 1 was the first
home of his grandmother, who, later on, lived im a cottage at Seetion 63, south
of Chapman River, until her death in 1878. Betty's children were educated by
the wife of (he lighthonse-keeper at Cape Willoughby, a lew kilometres away.
This statement corroborates one mentioned by Hallack.

34 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MusEUM

SIGNIFICANCE OF THE IMPLEMENTS.

The Tasmanian implements, made on Kangaroo Island in the years immedi-
ately after 1819, are of considerable theoretical interest.

They are entirely unlike the coarse and large implements characteristic af
the many sites of the archaic Kangaroo Island culture. They were found on two
small and restricted areas, associated with hut sites, and remote from places where
implements of the Kangaroo Island industry have heen found,

They mdicate how, when conditions are favourable, even such a transient
oceupation as is indicated to us by our historical knowledge of Kangaroo Island,
may become recorded in archaeological debris.

The presence of the Sooty Kangaroo as the principal mammalian food, places
the period of ocenpation of the Antechamber Bay hut site at-an early date, within
the period of lawless oceupaney before 1836, for it is stated that owing to the de-
pradations of the sealers these animals soon became rare. Tn later years pies,
wallabies and goats provided the principal animal foods used on the island,
Flinders in 1802, and Sutherland in 1819, both noticed the amazing abundance of
emu and kangaroo at the eastern end of the island, in contrast with Bull (speaking
of the year 1836) and Leigh (of 1487) who both comment on the absenee of these

creatures,

The home-made game-piece from Antechamber Bay suggests that for the
refugees and sealers, the tedium of life in their isolated home was made easier by
means of games.

The flint implements indicate that their Tasmanian women partners had not
yet become entirely divorced from their old culture.

The implements themselves are of considerable interest.

Tn April, 1986, at the request of the Royal Society of Tasmania, the writer
made a visit to Tasmania and examined and reported on Lhe rock carvings fount
by Mr. A. lL. Meston (1934) at Mount Cameron West. He was accompanied on
his visit by the Director of the Tasmanian Museum, Dr. Pearson, and by Mr.
A, L, Meston, A passing visit was made to Roeky Cape Cave where, some years
ago, a narrow trench had been cut by Mr. Meston theongh (he occupational debris,
toa depth of more than two metres, Tt was then noticed that flints and implements
from the basal strata of the cave were strongly patinated, while those from the
superficial layers were not so affeeted, When the collections made by Mr. Meston
in the Rocky Cape section were separated, arbitrarily, into a patinated and non-
patinated series, it was apparent that important. typological differences were pre-
sent in the two. It should be emphasized that these preliminary indieations should
be tested by a carefully controlled excavation of the considerable portions of the
site which remain undisturbed,

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND 35

A few months later while on a visit to Oxford, Dr. Henry Balfour informed
the writer that some time previously he had determined the presence of two typo-
logically distinct series among the Tasmanian implements in the Oxford Museum
collections. Thus it is evident that when careful excavations are made, consider-
able light will be thrown on the development of Tasmanian implement cultures,

Ce =
‘Ze

N.B.T.

3

Text fig. 1-3. 1. Three views of a flint implement from Antechamber Bay ( 87). 2. Mlint
implement from N.W. Tasmania (x 4). 3, Portion of a hand-made domino piece ( X 45),

36 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

Implements of the Old Tasmanian series are typically made from flakes which
have been struck off from an unprepared platform. These flakes are trimmed
around the edges before and during nae, and while often of highly characteristic
form generally conform to the shape of the primary flake from which they were
made, Specialized implements of the Newer Tasmanian series are typically made
by striking off a flake from a prepared striking platform. The angle between that
portion of the striking platform retained on the implement and the flake surface
produced, is an obtuse one, usually tending to about 110°. Sueh implements are
characteristic in form, Text fig. 1 shows a typical flint implement from Ante.
chamber Bay, Kangaroo Island. It may be compared with fiz. 2, an example
from North Western Tasmania (.A.23192 in fhe 8. Anst. Museum). Both of these
implements agree in possessing the characters peculiar to the Newer Tasmanian
series, That the implements made by Tasmanian women in the period shortly
after about 1819, were of this specialized form, is therefore of some interest and
importanee to our study of Tasmanian culture sequences, since it helps to confirm
what we have already noticed in Tasmania.

TRACES OF A TASMANIAN VOCABULARY BURVIVING ON KANGAROO [SLAND,

Joseph, a grandson of Betty. the Tasmanian woman, 4 man of perhaps 80
years of age, was interrogated for a short. while during our stav at Penneshaw.
He complained of loss of memory and it was difficult for him to talk for lone on
one subject, but it was felt that much could have been learned if time had per-
mitted, The following words were written down in a phonetic system in use at
the University of Adelaide and described by Tindale (1935). They were clearly
enunciated by Joseph, who remarked that they were taught to him by his erand-
mother, who had told him that they were in the ‘Hobart Town Lunguage’’,

‘nina tu: napari you nncerstand,

lil tu:‘napari do you understand ?
“bulunta wo straight ahead,
maibir, ma:bier oy around.

The material is seanty, Two of the words have a nautieal flavour. ‘The pro-
nonu |‘nina| appears lo be the same as the neena — you, recorded for one of the
Sonthern tribes of Tasmania. According to another grandsou of Betty the two
families at one time used many words which were not understood by other people,
but the children had forgotten most of them,

SUMMARY.

Some details are given of the Tasmanian women who formerly lived on Kan-
garoo Island together with some notes on the mixed blood survivors,

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND 37
Some stone implements, made on Kangaroo Island by the Tasmanian women,
are deseribed together with an account of the circumstances in which they were
round.
Several words, believed to be of Tasmanian origin, are transcribed in phonetic
form.

REFERENCES CITED.

Moore, H. P. (1925) : Notes on the early settlers in South Australia prior to 1836.
Roy. Geog. Soc. of Australia, South Aust. Branch, Proceedings, xxv, pp. 81-
135.

Berry, R. J. A. (1907) : Living deseendant of an extinet (Tasmanian) race. Proc.
Roy. Soc. of Victoria, xx (1.8.), pp. 1-20, pL. i, with bibliography.

Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, B. G. (1981) : Traces of an extinet aboriginal popu-
lation on Kangaroo Island. Records of the 8S. Aust. Museum, iv (3), pp. 279-
289, figs. 1-11.

Leigh, W. H. (1839) : Reconnoitering Voyages, travels and adventures in the new
colonies of South Australia, London,

South Australian Parliamentary Papers, 1866, No. 8, p. 12.

Bull, J. W. (1878) : Karly experiences of colonial life in South Australia, Adelaide.

Tolmer, A, (1882): Reminiscences of an adventurous and chequered career al
home and in the antipodes. 2 vols., London.

Hallack, E. H. (1905): Kangaroo Island. Adelaide,

Tindale, N. B. (1933): Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., wii, pp. 130-142.

Howehin, W. (1934); Stone implements of the Adelaide tribe of aborigines now
extinct, Adelaide,

Meston, A. L. (1984); Aboriginal rock-carvings in Tasmania. Antiquity, 8, pp.
179-184, pl. 1-4.

Tindale, N, B. (1935) : Legend of Waijungari, Jaralde Tribe, Lake Alexandrina,
South Australia; and the phonetic system employed in its transcription.
Records of the 8S, Aust. Museum, v (3), pp. 26-274.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LILI.
Fig. 1. Leigh's encounter with the Tasmanian women of Kangaroo Island in 1836
(atter Leigh).
Bie. 2, Remains from Antechamber Bay, a-c. Flint implements, d. Turbo undu-
latus shell, e. gaming piece, f. base of a glass bottle.

Ree. S.A. Museum Vor, Vie Poate IV,

BVIDENCES OF EARLY NINETEENTH CENTURY OCCUPATION OF
KANGAROO ISLAND.

RELATIONSHIP OF THE EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND
CULTURE WITH CULTURES OF AUSTRALIA
TASMANIA AND MALAYA

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

An account of some observations on the former human occupation of Kangaroo
Island was given by Tindale and Maegraith (1931). At the time of its first discovery
by Matthew Flinders in 1802, this island was devoid of inhabitants. Additional details
regarding this occupation have come under notice in recent years and there has been
opportunity for comparison with similar industries on the adjacent mainland; other
discoveries have been made on mainland sites, which appear to bear some relation to
the island one. The valued opportunity presented by the receipt in 1936 of a Carnegie
Travelling Grant has enabled the writer to discuss the problem of these implements
with research workers in Europe and America and also to see examples of similar
objects, characteristic of the Upper Palaeolithic of Malaya, in the Royal Colonial
Institute, Amsterdam, and at the Peabody Museum, Harvard University. The
following observations summarize the results obtained by several field workers.

RELATIONSHIP or rae EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND
CULTURE wrruy CULTURES or AUSTRALIA
TASMANIA ann MALAYA

By NORMAN B. 'TINDALE, B.Sc., Erunonocisr, SourH AusrraLian Museum,
Fig, 1-16.

INTRODUCTION.

AN account of some observations on the former human occupation of Kangaroo
Island was given by Tindale and Maegraith (1931). At the time of its first
discovery by Matthew Flinders m 1802, this island was devoid of inhabitants.
Additional details regarding this occupation have come under notice in recent
years and there has been opportunity for comparison with similar industries on
the adjacent mainland ; other discoveries have been made on mainland sites, whieh
appear to bear some relation to the island one. The valued opportunity presented
by the receipt in 1936 of a Carnegie Travelling Grant has enabled the writer to
discuss the problem of these implements with researeh workers in Europe and
America and also to see exaiuples of similar objects, characteristic of the Upper
Palacolithie of Malaya, in the Royal Colonial Institute, Amsterdam, and at the
Peabody Museum, Harvard University. The following observations summarize
the results obtained by several field workers.

ln Deeember-January 1931-32, Mr. F. J. Hall accompanied the writer to the
south coast of Kangaroo Island in order to examine Mount Taylor Cave. Although
this cave proved to be unproductive implements of the Kangaroo Island Industry
were found on surtace sites at several other places, and in situ in estuarine silts
at Rainy Creek. Ln December, 1934, a party of naturalists visited Flinders Chase
at the western end of Kangaroo Island. Soine general notes on the physiography
of the island were published by Tindale, Fenner aud Hall (1935), and several
additional sites for implements were found.

Mr. H. M. Cooper, who has extensively and systematically colleeted umple-
ments on maimland sites, was requested to search for implement sites on Kangaroo
Island, aid in the years 1935-37 tound traces of ocenpation at no fewer than forty-
seyen sites of {his ancient native Industry; more than forty of these oeeurrences
Were previously nouoted, Ot the implements brought logether by Mr, Cooper,
half have been donated to the South Australian Museum, and are stucied herein,

40 REcorpDs oF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The implements found below a marine horizon, at Fulham, South Australia,
by Capt. 8. A. White, were recently lent by their discoverer for stucy.

The area in the vicinity of Fulham where White (1919) found these imple-
ments, hus been under examination for several years by a committee of members
of the Anthropological Society of South Australia, Some shallow bores have been
drilled to depths of 2-5 metres in search of information. The aetual site exedyatec
by White is now an artificial lake and is inaccessible, but bores drilled within the
nearest practical distance lave passed Wirough the tenacious blae-black elay ol a
lake bed and then the marine horizon veeorded by White and by Llowehin (119).

There has been no opportunily to test (he Pulham site by excavation, but the
presence of consolidated matrix adhering lo one of the original unplement spee-
mens which, under the microscopy, sees identical with that established by our
bores as being below the lacustrine horizon, is a useful piece of evidence. These
implements are figured in this paper.

This year Mr. Cooper aud the writer made a close study of a recently ploughed
surface site on the western portion ot Section 562, Hundred of Noarlunga, on the
shoulder of the hill just below Hallett Cove Railway Station, linplenients of F'al-
ham type were found, which had been buried in the surtace layers of tle soll The
implements Were apparently confined to au area of some 10 acres on w& site where
cealeareous clay and sand is present on the flat top of a bill, ood debris and other
signs of recent occupation were lacking, Three small superimposed arens of
recent cumpsite with black ash soil, each forming a mound, are present, wid du the
best preserved of these abundant food debris and a few implements of the so-called
~*Murundian’’ type were guthered.

Howchin (1954) published a most interesting account of the ty poloyy of
Huplements Form in the area once occupied by the Adelaide tribe. It is the
result of many years spert in collecting specimens [rom surlave sites in the eoustal
distrieta of South Australia near Adelaide, Howehin ts vareful lo indicate that
the implements are all archaeological and that they are not necessarily the iinple-
ments belonging to the historieal Kaurna, or Adelaide tribe, A sad commentary
on the rapidity with which the aborigines disappeared is the Fact that, despite
aclive search and enquiry, nol one authentic stone implement, inounted for use
by a member of the Kaurna tribe, has yet been found in any eblimovraphic collec-
tion, either in Australia or abroad.

Howehin deals with the implements of all peoples who may have lived in the
Adelaide area, without reference to any cultural sequences whieh way cl inately
be established,

It is One of the purposes of the discussion concluding (his paper ta iudieate
the probability that, aear Adelaide, there may be welbdefined sequences, simile
to those established by Hale and Tindale (1980) for the Lower Murray Valley.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 41

THE KANGAROO ISLAND INDUSTRY.
New Locaurry Recorps ANp A DuseriptTion or tite Rarny Creek Sirs.

During 1931-22 additional implements of this industry were found by F. J.
Hall and the writer at Hawks Nest, principally on some areas of ti-tree sernb which

IMPLEMENT SITES on
KARTA on KANGAROO ISLAND.

Omiles 16
gKilormetves

e Bay of Shoals
we hngscole

hi

Fig. 1. Sketeh map of Karte or Kangarou Islanil, to show implement sites.

had been cleared and ploughed since our earlier visit. Other sites (Text fig. 1)
were:

(a) Lig Timber, 1-6 kilometres east of ‘‘ Fords’’.

(b) Mount Pleasant, on eroded laterite-vravel-coyvered vround,

(a) Rleanor Station.

(d) Kaiwarra or Mownt Pleasant Station, 3-2 kilometres 8. of the station on
the higher bank of Eleanor River,

(c) Redbank Station, near the southern gate on the road to Hawks Nest, on
eroded laterite soil,

(f) Cygnet Rwwer, evoded from soil near the bridge on the Penneshaw road.

(9) Rainy Creek, near the homestead of Eleanor Station, At this site a wash-
out, caused by the artificial cutting of a ditch across a flat, has eaused the stream
to cut toa depth of some two metres into a series of clay beds and silts; apparently
of estuarine origin (Text fig. 2-4). These are situated at an estimated height of
five-six metres above present, sea level. he silts in this basin seem to have acen-

42 Recokbs oF THE S.A, MUSEUM

mulated behind a bar of calcareous dune limestone which marks the seaward
margin of a former shoreline of Vivonne Bay into which the waters of Rainy
Creek once flowed, At present its waters are captured by the Eleanor River which,
atter flowing for 0:3 kilometre tiether west parallel to the shore-line, turns south

Wylit Y,

s My
eff

ee zy ane

Sandy clay

yellow c lay

pt I Mne ye pet ot ‘
“7 we ™ma a.
ay =i "en. °f <onseg |

Ie aed doy.
+ implements ___100 netres "Mes. aS |

implements
f iv bedded hays

,unconsolidated sands
of constal dunes

5
ree rnoullt of — > <=
,/ELEANOR woe - a tare veule ~
re Ce foe ee a ee
A MARINE CARCA)SHELL BEDS |:

ep , t the psht : q pees tS eprr &
N é-~%
EST RIAL Limes oy ES “it i ae rad 2be Pa

Fig, 2-5, 2, Sketeh plan of the vicinity of the junction of Eleanor River and Rainy Creek,
Kangaroo Tshind, 3, Sketeh seetion, ueroas Rainy Creek, 4. Knlarged section of clay beds, eon-
(aining dnplements, Rainy Creek, 5, Natural seetion revented along banks of Eleanor Riyer in its
passage through the coastal saud dunes,

and breaks ont through the present coastal dunes, Tn doing so it has eut through
some four metres of a consolidated limestone sea floor in which one of the dominant
shells is the locally extinet Arca (Anadara) trapezia (see sketch section, Text fix.
4). his sea floor overhes an old caleareous land surtace whieh is exposed at about
present sea level along the river banks and on the foreshore.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 43

The clay beds exposed at Rainy Creek (Text fig. 4) evonsist of a dark clay
(forining the lowest layer visible in the section) upon which there rests a metre
thickness of yellow clay, followed by 0-5 metres of light yellow sandy clay, above
which is the dark sandy soil of the present day surface.

Implements were present in the yellow clay ata depth of 1-3 metres and in
the sandy clay at 0-8 metres from the surface, while seventeen others including
both hammerstones and eutting implements were found on the floor of the washout
where they had been deposited by the erosion of the clay, No traces of food remains
or ash huve been preserved. Samples of yellow clay when washed and examined
microscopically unfortunately do not seem to furnish any direct indications of
the associated fauna,

Other implements are present on the weathered surface of the calcareous dune
limestone near its junetion with the old quartzites east of Rainy Creel as is also
indicated in the section,

The local physiographic conditions seem to indieate the possibility that the
élays were laid down during a period when the heds were at or near sea level,
whereas at present Rainy Creek is engaged in entrenching itself, to a shallow
depth, in its own sediments.

Estimations of! the area over which the implements were distributed suggest
that the twenty-four implements recovered were derived from an area of 275
square metres by the natural washing of some five hundred enbie metres of clay.

During the 1934 visit to Kangaroo Island a few further implement sites were
noticed.

(h) At Roehky River une excellent exaniple of a hanmierstone was pielked wp
by the caretaker of the Flora and Panna Reserve (Mr, H, Hausen) near the top
of the old limestane clune immediately south of the Station house, Up to the
present no examples have been turned up by the plongh on the neighbouring fats,
which have yielded bones of maiy recently extinct manuals,

(4) About two kilometres downstream from the Station the Rouky River sud-
denly entreuches itself and drops toto a rather deep limestone gorge excavated in
dune lioestones, On its northern bank the steep walls ave hollowed, im places, into
shallow eaves. One of these is sufficiently large lo serve as a shelter, A siuall
occupational horizon had been discovered lere a few years ago by one of the
selllers, who had been iu search of guano, The whole of the floor debris had been
silted and the finer dust and ash packed into sacks, Several saeks full of the sifted
earth had not been tuken away, The saeks were old and now decayed. The coarse
rejectamenta of the sieve yielded Turbo undulatus shells, a few iarsuptal bores
aid some vhareoal, but no implements were present, ‘Che paucity of the remaiis

44 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

and their disturbed condition prevented our arriving at any certain conelttsions
as to their significance.

(j) At North-ELast River, on the flat just above its junction with North-West
River, a hammerstone was found on the surface.

(4) On hillside above Penneshaw School house.

(lj) Between 1935 and 1937 Messrs. H. M. Cooper and R, Peake were able to
clevote several holiday periods to a search for additional sites on Kangaroo Island.
They collectedl numerous examples of the implements and have donated the first
set of their finds to the South Australian Museum. The localities are too numerous
for detailed deseription but the Cooper collection number and name of the sile
will be given below together with summaries of their field notes:

Anxious Bay (83). Waterworn pebbles from this locality probably furnished the
stone used in making many implements,

Muston (84). Property of E. Davies; from cultivated land running down to a
fresh water lagoon, dry in summer,

Muston (85). Property of W. Davies, on cultivated ground near a lagoon on iron-
stone rubble country. Several Port Lincoln Oyster (Ostrea simuata) shells
were also present.

Pennington Bay (86),

Salt Lagoon (87). East side of American River, Muston, Near a small lagoon
on cleared but uncultivated land, on property of BF. Buick. One quartzite
implement was enclosed in w bloek of loose limestone; limestone mdges sur-
rounding the lake yielded no implements.

Llog Bay River Station (89). On cultivated land sloping to the creek.

Deep Creek, Eastern Cove (91). On raised flat of cultivated ground adjoining
(he creek. Coastal sandhills in the vicinity yielded no sites.

Red Banks, Nepean Bay (92). Behind the coastal sandhills and inland on the
ironstone rubble country.

Taylor Lagoon (93).

Cape Hart (96). On wind-swept high limestone ground 0-4 kilometre worth-east
of the sealer’s hut site where Tasmaiian iniplements were found ; one trimmed
core was of Cape Willoughby granite.

Hog Bay River (97). Site on the cliffs above the river mouth.

Creek Bay Station (98), Cultivated area on bank of creek running into Lashmar
Lagoon, The largest specimen so far discovered, a chopping implemeni
weighing 108 oz. was found on this site,

Wallers (100), Three kilometres cust of Pennington Bay.

Bay of Shoals (101). An extensive site on cultivated land on the property of W.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 45

Turner. Many implements occurred on limestone ridges associated with an
extensive swamp.

Discovery Lagoon (102). Eleven kilometres S.W. of Kingseote. This must have
been a well oceupied area. Five inspections resnited in the largest collection
of chopping tmplements found on any site in this list,

Ten Mile Lagoon (103). Five kilometres W. of Kineseote.

Pennington Bay (120). Six kilometres east of the Bay,

Muston-Red Banks road (121).

Thomas Station, Point Morrison (122).

Muston Jetty (123).

Flour Cask Bay (156), south-west of Salt Lagoon. Two hammerstones found on
wind-swept limestone ridges together with many shells. The eoastal sandhills
themselves were examined, without result, for three kilometres to the west-
ward and more than one kilometre eastward of the Australian Salt Cowpany's
Lake.

Ilo Bay River, above mouth (157). Another site on the banks of Hog Bay River
which, together with sites 98, 101, 102 constitute the most important localities
found.

East. of Hog Bay River (158).

S.W. of Point Tinline towards Cape Linois (159). One large flint flake, one
hammerstone and a few unworked quartzite chippings in the sandhills.

Lagoon inland from D’Estree Bay (ten kilometres S.W. of Kingscote-Muston
turnoff (160). On eultivated ground.

Kast of White Lagoon (161). A ridge of cultivated vround revealed implements.

Buleara Station (162), Some very much worn hammerstones.

Hawk Nest Station (163).

Kaiwarra Station (164).

Eleanor River (165).

Karatta Station (166).

Sou’West River (167).

Cape Borda Road (168), Ten kilometres 8. of Stokes Bay turnoff. A single
chopping implement in scrub-covered ironstone gravel country.

Western River (169). One hammerstone behind the coast sandhills: on the steep
incline above the high cliffs were several chopping implements and stone flakes.

Middle River (170). Although there are extensive coastal sandhills here, results
were negative, One excellent hammerstone was collected a short distance
inland.

Stokes Bay (171). On cultivated ground,

Smith Bay (172),

46 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Kmu Bay, 1:3 kilometres inland from the seashore (173),

Wisanger (174). Near the Gap,

Cyenet River-Gap Road (175),

Lagoon N.W. of Cvenet River Post. Office (176),

Gum Creek, near Cygnet River (177). Light sandy soil on its hanks yielded
implements,

Near Bay of Shoals (178). On Bell’s homestead.

Railway, four kilometres inland from Muston Post Office (179).

Creek on property of C, Buick, American River (180).

The distribution of the above localities on the map of Kangaroo Island seems
to indicate a concentration of the occupation on the eastern half of the island, but it
must be remembered that the eastern end has been subjected toafar greater aniount
of clearing than the western extremity, and it is generally in ploughed ground and
occasionally in disturbed and driftine sandy ground, that finds have been made,
The western end of the island is still largely unecleared and uncultivated and a
large area is enclosed within the Flinders Chase Flora and Fauna Reserve, and is
thus not subjected to clearing operations. Mr. Cooper writes: ‘On present im-
perfect information it could perhaps be suggested that the more eastern portions
of the island carried the bulk of the population—the more open nature of the
country, warmer climate and lower rainfall, together with the abundanee of
lagoons and swamps would tend to substantiate this; the rugged and damper
western end was used perhaps more for hunting expeditions. However, later
working of the land in the latter localities may disprove such an opinion.”’

Only two sites have yielded information revarding the foods of the island
people, At Muston a few Port Lincoln Oyster (Os/rea sinuata) shells may have
heen ones left by these people, while in a wind-blown area on site 120, east of
Pennington Bay, where the specimens often have a thin coating of white lime
deposit, ‘fragments of emn eggshells, also oyster, mussel and limpet shells were
obtained as well as a few choppers and hammerstones’’. According to '' Mr. dames
Waller, another old resident of Kangaroo Island, this drift) commenced about
forty years ago after u period of clearing ond burning’’.

IMPLEMENTS OF THE KANGAROO ISLAND INDUSTRY.

In the light of the argmented collection of implements brought together since
1931 it is possible to make some detailed observations.

The dominant implement of the eulture is undanhtedly the elongate pebble-
core implement, hammer-flaked along one margin, whieh was deseribed by Tindale
and Maegraith (1931, p. 281) as ‘‘elongate-oval trimmed eore’’ (/.c. fig. 9).

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 47

Among the well-worked implements they are second only to the hammerstones in
abundance.

These elongate-oval trimmed cores have become known to archaeologists in
South-Eastern Asia as ‘‘Sumatra-type implements’’, for in Sumatra and the
Malay Peninsula they occur in several sites considered to belong to the Upper
Palaeolithic. Sites of this type are described by Kiipper (1930) and others.

20
15
a Pa
. 0
T = E
= tid
45 \ {8
a \ a
| = =
= < 6 7
FE a
5 / a <
/ = = 4
} — >
¢ o ”
/ FE = x
s Oo Ss ‘
/ ad x \ /\
of Gx i eH se 4 48 | _/ eo \ so go 80 \/ 90\

Fig. 6-7. 6, Weights of 96 swmatra implements from Kangaroo Island. 7, Length-breadth
index of 57 sumatra implements from Kangaroo Island.

Examples of this type of implement from Malaya have been examined by the
writer at the Royal Colonial Institute Musenm, Amsterdam, and at the Peabody
Museum, Harvard. Specimens from Kangaroo Island seem to be morphologically
indistinguishable from these, and in this paper it is proposed to use therefore the
term ‘‘Sumatra type implement’’ or briefly ‘‘sumatra’’ as a convenient name for
the implement.

An analysis of the dimensions and weights of nearly one hundred examples
of Kangaroo Island sumatra implements, reveals the presence of two sub-types
which may be arbitrarily called ‘‘heavy’’ and ‘‘light’’,

48 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

When the weight in ounces is plotted, using intervals of 4 oz., the eraph (‘Tex!
fiz. 6) indicates [hat peaks oceur at 20 oz, and d4 02. If the trough between these
two (at 22 0z.) is taken as a dividing line if will be noticed that, with one exception
(15 em.), all “light sumatrva’’ are 14 em, or under in length while all “heavy
(Br 100)...
an FT length indicates
that although there is considerable variation it! proportions, as shown by the range
of indices from 45-90, yet the natives, uneonscionsly or otherwise, strove to make
implements of the proportions indicated by a length-breadth mdex of about 60
(Text fig, 7). ‘Heavy’! and “light sumatra’’ implements have approximately
the same range in their proportions.

Tt would be of considerable interest to compare these results with those for
the same type of implement found in Malaya, while the application of acenrate
statistical data to series of implements in various areas, might give significant,
elnes as to their origin and uses.

The diseovery of further examples of the discoidal ‘implements called
trimmed flakes’? by Tindale and Maegraith (19381, p. 281, fig. 6-7) has enabled a
clearer idea to be obtained of the form and method of manufacture of these highly
characteristic implements. If is now evident that there are fundamental differ-
ences between them and the so-called arapia implements of Central Anstralia, and
thal they should not have been classified together.

sumutra’’ are 15 em. or over. The length-breadth index

Examination of a long series sugeests that, while all the Kangaroo Islani
examples are either made from cores or from pebbles broken at random, all trie
arapia agree with the type exawple from Wndala, Central Anstralia (Ie. £10) 10
being struck off as flakes from prepared core. A hlow directed against a prepared
platform detached a characteristically shaped Hake, Teehnieally the qrapra is a
mieh more advanced implement than the implements found on the island,

The Kangaroo Island core implements which superficially resemble the arajna
are thus trimmed from pieces of broken stone which approximate to the desired
form, A few exainples are really made from what are technieally flakes, but as
they do not seem to be obtained by any specialized techniqne the specimens shonid
be recorded as in the main a ‘‘eore industry’.

I+ seems convenient that the Kanearoo Island implements of this type should
be known by a different name from the arapia and it is proposed to use for them the
term karta, a native word, belonging to the wainland Raminjeri tribe, meaning
Kangaroo Island, The example deseribed and figured by Tindale and Maegraith
(1981, p, 281, fig. 6) may be regarded as the type example.

Mr. H. M. Cooper has found that on most sites Karta are not as common as the
larger sumatra implements, At Hawks Nest, during the 1931 survey they proved

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 49

(0 be somewhat more abundant, but the significance of this apparent difference is
Hot yet known.

Trimmed cores of the horse-hool?? type deseribed by Tindale and Maegraith
(1991, p. 281, fiz. 8) continue to he found in considerable numbers and it is evident,
(hat they must have functioned as implements. All are characterized by closely
set stepped, secondary flaking sears margining the right-angled eutting edge.

Fig. 8. Swmatratike implement from Baleoracana Creek, South Australia (X 54).

In addition to the above mentioned implements and hundreds of hammer-
atones, a great many simple flakes, frequently of white quartz, are found in asso-
ciation with the implements. Simple irregular flakes of quartzite are also abun-
dant. Oceasional examples of white quartz seem to have been shaped to a definite
form, approaching some of the crude discoidal stone implements characteristic
of the Tartangan Industry deseribed by Hale and Tindale (1930, p. 167, figs. 21,
29, etc.). However, quartz is a refractory material and it is difficult to compare
them with certainty; detailed description of the type may therefore be reserved
for the future, when examples made in a more satisfactory material may be
discovered.

Before discussing the Kangaroo island industry and its significance it is
proposed to mention several series of implements from the mainland,

50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SUMATRA-LIKE IMPLEMENTS FROM BALCORACANA CREEK,
8. AUSTRALIA.

During a recent visit to the Flinders Ranges, Mr. H. M. Cooper found a site
on a rock-strewn ridge, on the north bank of Baleoracana Creek at Red Banks (his
site No. 209), where two sumatra-like implements occurred. One of these weighed
16 oz. and measured 15 x 8 em. It is figured herein (Text fig. 8). The other was
smaller and only weighed 6 oz.

On the opposite bank of the creek, within 0-5 kilometre, there is a native site
(his No. 144) where many pir7t implements may be found.

After this paper had been prepared for press Mr. Cooper revisited the Flin-
ders Range and found eight additional sites where implements resembling those
from Kangaroo Island and Fulham oceur. At Mount Chambers Creek (183) near
a site possessing many rock carvings karfta, horsehoof implements and sumatras
occur alone. At several other waters Pirrian types of implements oecur with them,
e.g. Emu Springs (136), while at Yappala Lagoon (187) and Little Bunkers (195)
the only other implements seem to have a Murundian facies.

IMPLEMENTS FROM TASMANIA RESEMBLING THOSE FROM
KANGAROO ISLAND.

For several years the writer has been in communication with Mr. Adrian C.
Smith, of St. Helens, Tasmania, who has kindly presented to the South Australian
Museum many interesting Tasmanian implements. In a recent consignment he
sent a series of large specimens including several which appeared to be comparable
with the swmatra implement, the karta and even the ‘‘horsehoof’’ core of Kangaroo
Island.

Text fig. 9 shows a karta-like implement of quartzite from St. Helens, weighing
9 oz.

The average of the weights of three sumatra-like examples is 16 oz. and the
length/breadth index is 72. Text fig. 10 shows an example from St. Helens
weighing 11 oz. and with a L/B index of 71. The original pebble from which this
was made is more angular than are those from Kangaroo Island, but the method
of manufacture is similar.

An examination of the fine collection of Tasmanian implements belonging to
Mr. A. L. Meston at Launceston, suggests that karta and swmatra-like implements
are found in several places in Tasmania, but that relatively little attention has been
paid to them. The smaller and finer implements are of considerable interest to
collectors and in the past the large ones seem to have been passed over. Another

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 51

explanation may be considered. In a letter dated 13th Jane, 1987, Mev. Advian
Smith writes :

“The large stones of pebble type were not, as faras | remember, found on the
ocean beaches where the small flake types were found. The one from ‘St, Columba

Fig. Y-1. Narta and swnatre-lke inplements trom St. Helens, Tasmania (> 4),

Malls’ was found in the heart of the bush, in myrtle and fern eourtry., ‘The
olhers were found on Gevrges Bay on the golf Lolks,’’

It may be suggested therefore that these relies may oeeur on siles where the
ordinary Tasmanian implements are not present.

52 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

IMPLEMENTS OF THE FULHAM SITE DESCRIBED BY 8. A. WHITE.

Fig. 11 gives a generalized section of the beds associated with the implement
site at Fulham described by White (1919) and Howchin (1919). It is based partly
on their notes, partly on information provided by bores drilled by members of the
Anthropological Society of South Australia in 1933-1934, and also on the writer’s

Tuland ope
Red Sandhills fo

at
Fulharn
Murundion
se, Bent Pirrian Industry Site
Fulham Indujstry take bed

sarees Marine Beds oF
tiresrasre ease { Dactonia, §iPHe
Qld land surface

ny
Smaseaue

1 Kilometre

) nile 4

Fig. 11. Section at Fulham, South Australia, indicating in generalized form the succession
of beds and relationships of implement sites.

own observations. It is not proposed to discuss in detail the history of the site as
revealed by the bore sections, for the results obtained are sufficiently interesting to
warrant separate description. Suffice to state that bores at ‘‘A’’, at 10 yards 8. of
‘A’? and at ‘‘B’’ seem to confirm the first two metres of White’s section while
deeper bores, at ‘‘ Between B and ©”’ and at ‘‘E’’, ‘‘F’’, “‘K’’ and ‘‘M”’’, situated
at distances of respectively 150, 375, 600, 1,075 and 1,300 yards in an easterly
direction indicate the continuance of the blue-black clay of the estuarine lake-bed
and also suggest the presence of an old land surface at the level indicated by White.

The implements ascribed to this old land surface comprise well worn hammer-
stones of two types (fig. 12 and fig 13), made from quartzite pebbles and several
core-like implements, also of two types. The latter are similar to the karta and the
horsehoof cores of Kangaroo Island and are made of quartzites. Fig. 14 shows
an example of the karta 6-8 em. in diameter. In manufacture it has been broken
off from a large block of quartzite, apparently as a random ‘‘flake’’, and bears
evidence of much marginal secondary flaking. Fig. 15 shows an example of the
larger ‘‘horsehoof’’ core type of implement. It is 9 em. in greatest diameter and
6 em. in height, and is made of a fine-grained quartzite.

One of the core implements has attached to it part of the consolidated matrix
of ‘‘River Sand with calcareous concretions’’ in which it was once imbedded.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 53

Portions of this matrix, when mounted and examined under the microscope, com-
pare closely with samples from the same bed.

During the study of the Fulham site it was observed that a small surface area
of campsite containing abundant pirri together with other implements of a rich

i
tp Ta SKN
ne a th (h

ue
a

MMH aN

»\ ah i ‘ th

N hi \ " \
Na NA ik

oN
\ WN N\

\

Kig, 12-15. Implements from buried land surface at Pulham, South Australia, 12-13, Ham-
merstones, showing marked marginal wear, 14, Karta-like implement. 15, Horsehoof core (X 14)

54 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

stone industry, lay beside the line of section indicated by the bores. It was possible
to demonstrate that this campsite was formed on top of the blue-black clay of the
estuarine lake. It is thus later in date than the Fulham industry. Careful collect-
ing brought to light the following implements :

Pirri 24; small crescents 6; small chipped-back knives 3 ; discoidal adze stones,
prepared from flakes struck from prepared platforms 6; irregular adze stones 14;
large pirri-like flakes 3; large cores 1; hammerstone 1.

The position of this site is indicated by the words ‘‘Pirrian Industry Site’’
on the general section of the Fulham area (fig. 11).

IMPLEMENTS AT HALLETT COVE SIMILAR TO THOSE OF THE
FULHAM INDUSTRY.

The Hallett Cove site is located on the western half of Section 562, Hundred
of Noarlunga, and is situated a few hundred metres south-west of the Cove Rail-
way Station, on a flat terrace forming the top of the cliffs. It is at a general height
of sixty metres (200 feet) above sea level (Text fig.16). Here an old soil of
calcareous sandy nature is preserved over an area of some ten acres. Recent
ploughing of the surface has revealed that large implements of the types present

“Gal <<

Cave (266 ft)

Fulham Industry Mauvundian site

Fig. 16. Plan and sketch section at Hallett Cove, to show an implement site of the Fulham
industry overlain by a newer series.

at Fulham, namely kurta-like implements, and ‘‘horsehoof’’ cores together with
one or two doubtful sumatra implements and some hammerstones are present in
the surface layer over the area where this special type of soil occurs. They are
not associated with shells, or other signs of recent occupation.

Three small patches of black soil composed of ashes, abundant shell and other
food remains and a poorly developed adze-stone industry are present on the
southern side of this area and rest on the surface of this soil. The food remains of
this upper stratum consist of :

TINDALE—EXxTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 55

Shells Turbo undulatus (dominant).
Monodonta odontis
Nerita melanotragus
Mactra pura
Haliotus sp. fragments only.
Crab Ozius truncatus
Bird Dromaeus novachollandiae, ege shells of emu.
Mammal Macropus sp. fragments of bones.

These surface sites seem to be comparable with sites of recent occupation
which are elsewhere in South Australia called Murundian.

DISCUSSION,

In the preceding pages some records of stone implement sites on Kangaroo
(sland, on the Australiin mainland, and in Tasmania, have been set out, while
several types of implements have been described and figured.

It is proposed now to speculate on the significance of these occurrences and
to discuss some tentative correlatious.

The systematic study of Australian implement cultures is only just beginning
and it is eertain that many of our conclusions will be modified in the light of new
discoveries. Pressing’ desiderata are the systematic exploration of all rock
shelter and other sites where it may be possible to find evidence of successions.
In particular it seems highly desirable that preliminary conclusions here arrived
al regarding the sequence in Tasmania should be tested by excavation of one of
the roek-shelters present on the north coast of Tasmania.

At Tartanga and Deyou Downs a sequence has been noted which has enabled
tentative correlations 10 be made with surface sites in other parts of South Aus-
tralia. In the accompanying table is set out in diagrammatic form the additional
details brought out by a study of the Kangaroo Island Industry and the closely
related Kulham ludustry.

Ai Kangaroo Island we seem to have an old culture which has connections
with the Upper Palaeolithic of Malaya and may thus represent the type of mi-
plement culture which the first visitors to Australia brought with them, These
people may have been the ancestors of the Tasmanian aborigines; for like those
people they did not succeed in carrying the dog with them to Kangaroo Island.
The presence of simular implements in Tasmania and on some mainland sites lends
colour to this suggestion.

56

TENTATIVE

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

AUSTRALIA AND TASMANTA.

CORRELATION OF SOME IMPLEMENT SERIES IN

KANGAROO

MURRAY RIVER. ISLAND. FULHAM. HALLETT COVE.| TASMANTA.
NEWER
ae TASMANIAN | MURUNDIAN- | MURUNDIAN- | NEWER
¢ INDUSTRY LIKE SITES LIKE SITE. TASMANIAN
¢. A.D, 1819 (on present shore INDUSTRY
dunes). (implements struck
from. specially pre-
MUDUKIAN 7 _|pared cores).
INDUSTRY. Period of
__ no
PIRRIAN occupation. PIRRIAN
INDUSTRY TNDUSTRY. | _____ fasstnenntntnntntntnntnnnntnnnntnn
Higher river de- pectin ba iy
positing series of Kangaroo I. LACUSTRINE
silts over Tartan- | mdustryatRainy | CONDITIONS. (Flake industry ;
gan beds; these Creek epparently implements made
bel - Jevel | #8sociated with a from random
Be i M iameiianiok raised beach. ESTUARINE flakes).
taking place. and fae

TARTANGAN
INDUSTRY

associated with ex-
tinct species of
Unio.

KANGAROO
ISLAND
INDUSTRY

(sumatra, karta,
and horse - hoof
implements) .

old land surface.
FULHAM
INDUSTRY.

(karta and horse-
hoof implements).

FULHAM

INDUSTRY
(karta and horse-
hoof implements,

some _ doubtful
sumatra — imple-
ments).

(surface finds of
crude sumatra
type implements,
karta, and horse-
hoof implements).

The almost unvarying uniformity of implement type in over fifty campsites
on Kangaroo Island, suggests that this industry stagnated on the Island until
the inhabitants became extinct; the swmatra apparently remained the dominant

implement.

In the Fulham Industry, as known to us at Fulham and Hallett Cove, as well

as from scattered sites in other parts of South Australia, the swmatra seems to have

lost its dominant position and is rare or even absent; otherwise the implement

types remain the same.
At Fulham the industry appears to be associated with an old land surface

which was covered by marine, estuarine, and lacustrine beds.

At Rainy Creek on

Kangaroo Island there is also some evidence of physiographic changes associated
o * 5 Do

with a recent raised beach, and it also seems significant that on the island imple-

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 57

ments are not found in the present day coastal sandhills although they are present
relatively abundantly on many of the higher parts of the island, Tindale anc
Maegraith (1931) have already drawn allention to certain apparent changes in
climate associaled with the Hawks Nest site, The extinetion of the Kangaroo
Islanders inay have taken place a relatively long time ago,

At Tartanga on the River Murray physiographie changes of a suuilar nature,
involving uw rise in river level, seen to be necessary io explain the building up ol
the series of Upper Sill Beds, These overlie tle Tartangan beds, whieh contain
Niinan oecupational debris assoviated with an extinet spevies of Vio, Mineraliza-
tion of the bones preserved in the Tartangan beds apparently took place dure
this period of high river levels.

At Devou Downs Rock-shelter on the Murray River the Pirrian is the earliest
recognizable mdustry in the type section deseribed by Uale and Tindale (1930)
aud on several erounds it Las been placed as later thaw the Tartangan,

Ad Fulbaya a Pirrian site oceurs above a lalke bed which covers Lhe site of Lhe
Wiulhan Industry; it is therefore younger than the Mualhans series,

Analysis of the implements present on the Pirrian site at !ulham shows that

number of pirrt >< 100
Humber of other worked implements

the pirrt index ( is about 7, This is a

surtace site, and i! some of the earlier implement collectors lave visited it in past
years it is likely that the percentage of pirrd lovms has been lowered by the gather-
ig of some of these attractive litle objects, Nevertheless the proportion of piped
Is high. At Devon Downs ihe proportion was even higher us is imdieated by a
“Pure Index’’ of 174. This index is based on the recovery of 386 port and 21
other duplements trom the block of Pirrian strata excavated,

At Seetion 1175 Hundred of Yankalilla the Rey, N. LL, Louwyck has found
an totouched Pirrian site on Uie southern bawk of Bungala River where the ratio
of porve to other tuplements is in tl neighbourhood of 100, Three kilometres
uway, near the present shore line at ILayeoek Point (here is a campsite of Muriun-
dian facies, with abundant debris of resent ovenpation, where pirrd duplements
do Hol ocer,

The presence of pirat in such large proportions among the implements vceur-
ring in Pirrian sites suggests that they were of considerable importance in the
cullure and nol likely to be of merely cerennouial dnportanee, as sugvested by one
reven! weiter. la size aid Lorm they are closely similar to the pressire-flaked
spear heads of North-Western Australia, which ave made in great ttitmbers, anel
ure often used on hunting, as well as om fighting spears. ‘There is oe spear front
ibe Great Western Desert in the South Australian Museum which bears a pinned as

58 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

a spear point. In the absence of further examples it may be suggested that it is
an archaeological pirrt put to a new use, but it may indicate that formerly these
implements were in general use as spear points.

The great abundance of pir7i around some waterholes and also on some now
apparently waterless sandhill sites around the arid Lake Eyre Basin and in the
country south of the Musgrave Ranges indicates that the Pirrian culture once
thrived there. A seemingly significant feature in the Lake Eyre Basin, as else-
where, is the absence of pure from some areas where other implements such as
adze-stones are otherwise abundant. On the basis of the Devon Downs section it
is possible to interpret this variation as one of the effects due to presence of a
succession of industries rather than to any very local, and seemingly haphazard
variations in the contemporary distribution of styles of implement making tech-
niques

In 1934 one of the last survivors of the Dieri (Dintibana) informed the writer
that ‘‘pirrt were natural stones which always had that form. They were found on
the ground and were on occasion picked up and used as drills.’’ Like the Neolithie
polished stone axes called ‘‘thunder stones’’ by the people of Lron Age Hurope,
their human origin was not readily appreciated.

In an earlier paper in this volume, the writer has discussed the relationship
between an Older and a Newer Tasmanian implement series. His observations
were based on the examination of the open face of an excavation in Rocky Cape
Cave and a study of the collections made therein by Mr. A. L. Meston. In the
present paper is noted the occasional presence in Tasmania of implements similar
to those of the archaic Kangaroo Island Industry. This suggests the possibility
that future work may lead to the recognition of at least two and perhaps three
stages in the development of the Tasmanian implement culture.

The absence of any of the specialized implements of Tasmanian type on main-
land sites has been an impressive argument for those who would derive the Tas-
manians from an extra-Australian source by a sea route, especially if they overlook
the faci that implements of Tasmanian type are not found either in New Guinea,
in New Caledonia, or even in Patagonia whence they would like to derive them.
Lf the Tasmanian implements have developed locally and if the prototypes are
similar to those already recognized from the Australian mainland then one of the
major bases for their argument lapses. A useful statement of recent opinion on
the question of the origin of the Tasmanian culture is given by Davidson (1937)
who also provides a bibliography of the subject. A general discussion on the
problem of the origin ot the Australians is given by Fiirer-Haimendort (19386)
while Davidson has also considered the same problem.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 59

SUMMARY.

Additional sites for implements of the extinct Kangaroo Island culture are
described and several artefact types are defined. The relationship of one of the
implements with the Sumatra-type ones of Palaeolithic sites in Malaya is dis-
cussed.

The original specimens found by White and indicative of the Fulham In-
dustry are described and figured, and a new loeality is recorded at Hallett Cove
for similar objects.

Implements similar to those of the Kangaroo Island culture are described
from Tasmania and from Wirrealpa in South Australia.

A tentative correlation of these industries with the suecession already de-
seribed from the Murray River is discussed and it is suggested that the Kangaroo
Island Industry may be similar to that brought to Australia from Malaya by the
first native visitors, who may have been of Tasmanian type. he distinetive
features of the Tasmanian implement culture are thought to have largely developed
after their isolation on the island.

REFERENCES CITED.

Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, 5, G. (1931): Traces of an extinct aboriginal popu-
lation ou Kangaroo Island. Records of the 8. Aust. Muscum, iv (3), pp. 275-
289; figs. 1-11, bibliography.

Tindale, N. b., Fenner, B.S. and Hall, Wf. . (1985): Maan) bone beds of probe
able Pleistocene age, Rocky Niver, Kangaroo Island. Trans. Roy. Suc. 8.
clust., 59, pp. 103-106, figs. 1-3.

White, 8. A. (1919) : Notes on the occurrence of aboriginal remains below marine
deposits at the Reedbeds, Fulham, near Adelaide. Trans. Roy, Soc, 8S. Aust.,
43, pp. 77-80, fig.

Howelun, W. (1919): Supplementary notes on the o¢eurrence of aboriginal 1e-
myns discovered by Captain 8. A. White at Fulham (deseribed in the pre-
ceding paper), with remarks on the geological section. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.
-Lust., 45, pp. 81-84.

llowehin, W. (1984) : Stone implements of the Adelaide tribe of aborigines now
extinet. Adelaide, pp. 1-94, fies. 1-148.

Hale, Ht. M. and Tindale, N. GB. (1980): Notes on some liuiman remains in the
Lower Murray Valley, South Australia. Records of the 8S. Aust. Museum, iv,
(2), pp. 145-218, figs, 1-249,

60 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Kiipper, H. (1930): Palaeolithische Werktuigen uit Atjah, N. Sumatra. Tvjd-
schr. van het kon. Nederl. Aardrijkskundige Genootschap, xvii, pp. 985-988.

Davidson, D. 8. (19387) : The relationship of Tasmanian and Australian cultures.
Philadelphia Anthropological Society: twenty-fifth Anniversary Studies,
University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 47-62.

Haimendorf, Christoph von Fiirer (1936): Zur Urgeschichte Australiens. An-
thropos, Xxxi, pp. 1-86, 433-455.

FURTHER NOTES ON THE CUMACEA OF
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS

By HERBERT M. HALE, DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Since the publication of the last records of Cumacea from South Australia (Hale,
1936) collecting has been continued. As a result the following species are added to the
forms known to occur in the littoral fauna of our State.

Cyclaspis cottoni sp. nov.

Paradiastylis tumida sp. nov.

Dic brevidactylum sp. nov.

Nannastacus nasutus var. camelus Zimmer.
Schizotrema depressum Calman.

FURTHER NOTES on ruzr CUMACEA or SOUTH
AUSTRALIAN REEFS

By HERBERT M. HALE, Director, Souru AusTRALIAN Museum.
Fig. 1-9.

Stnce the publication of the last records of Cumacea from South Australia (Hale,
1936) collecting has been continued. As a result the following species are added
to the forms known to oceur in the littoral fauna of our State.

Cyclaspis cottont sp. nov.

Paradiastylis tumida sp. nov.

Dic brevidactylum sp. nov.

Nannastacus nasutus var. camelus Zimmer.
Schizotrema depressum Calman.

Twenty-one species have now been taken on the shore-line of Gulf St. Vincent
and Spencer Gulf. The limestone reef at Port Willunga, three miles north of
Sellick’s reef, was worked systematically and, as would be expected, all the species
recorded from the last-named were found at Port Willunga also,

The Cumacean fauna occurring on loose stones on our reefs is remarkably
uniform. If short, filamentous algae are present to retain a film of sand even the
smoothest rocks harbour Cumacea and other small Crustacea. For instance, in
March of this year, Messrs. B. C. Cotton and K. Sheard spent a couple of hours
on a tiny shingle patch in shallow water at Marino, a few miles from Adelaide.
Here they immersed the larger smooth pebbles in weak formalin as previously
deseribed and obtained the following species:

Famity BODOTRIIDAE

CYcLASPIs PuRA Hale.

(A fully adult male has the hairs of the pleopods much longer than in the
type.)

PricrocuMA POEcILOTA Hale.

62 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Faminy DIASTYLIDAE
PacHystyuis vietus Tale.
JOLUROSTYLIS WAITED (Hale).
(See Zimmer, 1930, p. 651.)
GYNODIASTY LIS SIMILIS Zimmer.

GYNODIASTYLIS TURGIDUS Hale.

Faminy NANNASTACIDAE

NANNASTACUS GIBBOSUS Calman,
CuMELLA Lima Hale.
CUMELLA LAEVE Calman.

ScHIZOTREMA BIFRONS var. ACULEATA Hale,

Again IT have to acknowledge my indebtedness to Mr. K. Sheard who spent
many days painstakingly sorting out thousands of small crustaceans from fine
debris.

Famity BODOTRIIDAE
Cyrcuaspis G. O. Sars.

CYCLASPIS COTTONI sp. noy.

Ovigerous female. Integument firm but easily broken ; surface slightly glossy,
squamose. Carapace with dorsal edge, when viewed from the side, slightly irreeu-
lar, less than one-third total length of animal, its depth more than half its length
and less than its greatest breadth. Pseudorostral lobes not quite reaching apex of
eye-lobe. Most of the several ocular lenses, black. Antennal notch wide and deep,
and tooth acute. Anterior half of carapace with a sharp dorsal keel, on each side
of which is a shallow depression ; there is a double pit at the middle of the length of
the carapace and posterior to these indentations the keel bifureates (the divergent
portions being swollen and less elevated) forming a single keel again just before
reaching the hinder margin, Most of the first pedigerous somite concealed ; second
to fifth somites with a low but distinet dorsal carina; third to fifth, each with a
pair of dorso-lateral elevations.

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SoutTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 63

Pleon somites all feebly keeled above and with small lateral articular pro-
cesses on all but sixth; first to fourth and telsonic somite of approximately equal
length; fifth distinetly longer.

Fig. 1, Cyelaspis cottoni. Type female; a, lateral view; b, dorsal view of carapace.
«, Luteral view of allotype male (all % 38).

First antennae with third segment longer than second and with first as long
as second and third together; inner flagellum minute, elongate and apparently
two-jointed ; outer two-jointed, the first sezment three times as long as second.

Basis of second maxillipeds a little longer than rest of appendage and with
an apical plumose seta. Basis of third maxillipeds wide, strongly geniculate, dis-
tinetly longer than the ‘‘palp’’ and with outer apical portion expanded, and ex-
tending forwards beyond level of insertion of carpus; outer distal part of merus
also expanded and reaching almost to level of apex of carpus, which is distally
expanded on the inner side. First peraeopod with carpus reaching to apex of
antennal angle; basis curved, subequal in length to remaining joints together,
with inner (or ventral) distal portion produced into a sharp tooth and with a long
plumose apical seta on opposite side; ischinum and merus together as long as carpus
which is a little longer than propodus (15:14); dactylus three-fourths as long as

64 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

propodus, and with two unequal apical spines. Second peraeopods with basis as
long as remaining joints together ; ischium short and merus longer than carpus;
dactylus a little shorter than carpus and propodus together and with three unequal
spines at the oblique apex. The last three pairs of limbs offer no special features.
Pedunele of uropods nearly half as long again as telsonic somite, slender, with
inner edge feebly serrate; exopod four-fifths as long as pedunele, a little longer
than endopod and narrowly truncate distally, with two unequal terminal spines;
endopod slender, distally pointed and with inner edge serrated for portion of its
length. ;

Fig. 2. Cyclaspis cottoni. Paratype ovigerous female; a, first antenna; b and ¢, second
and third maxillipeds; d, e and f. first, second and fourth peraeopods; g, uropod (a, X 96;
b-g, x 62).

Colour white with sooty markings and mottlings.

Leneth 3-3 mm.

Male. Differs from female in having carapace less deep, in the much larger
ocular lenses, and in having the first pedigerous somite wholly concealed. The
second pedigerous somite is shorter and its crest is less elevated. The infero-
lateral portions of the first to fifth pleon somites are expanded downwards as
usual in this sex.

Length 3-2 mm.

Loc. South Australia: Spencer Gulf, Port Germein, ‘‘burrowing in dirty
sand between tide marks’’ (B. C. Cotton, Apl., 1937). Types in South Australian
Museum, Reg. No. C. 2140-2141.

This is one of the several Cumacea new to South Australia which have been
collected by Mr. Cotton, and I have pleasure in associating his name with it. It

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 65

was secured by stirring sand in a bucket of sea water and straining out the dis-
turbed Crustacea,

Although the carapace exhibits no bold seulpture, the impressions at the
termination of the anterior, clear-cut part of the dorsal carina anc the waviness
of the more faintly marked, double posterior portion are responsible for slight
but characteristic irregularity in the dorsal outline.

C. cottoni is very closely allied to (. herdmanit Calman (1904, p. 171, pl. iil,
fig 56-69, and pl. iv, fig. 60-66) and one would not hesitate to refer the South Aus-
tralian specimens to that species were it not for the faet that they differ in having
the exopod of the uropod distally truneate and with two distinetly articulated
terminal spines. Calman in his fig. 65—66 illustrates the uropods of C. herdmant
as he describes them—‘ Both rami are acutely pointed, without terminal spines.’’

Leprocuma G. O. Sars.
Leprocuma sHeArDI Hale.

Leplocuma sheardi Hale, 1936, p. 409, fie. 38-4.

The adult male is now available. The carapace in dorsal view is narrower
than in the female. The ocular lobe is sooty, with four of the eve lenses clear,
prominent and glittering. The pseudorostral lobes are produeed in front of the
eye-lobe, but do not come into contaet. The exopod of the fourth peraeopods is
rudimentary as in the female and young males.

In a male 5-65 mm. in length five pairs of pleopods are well developed and
hear long setae, but in an example 4-35 nm, long the abdominal appendages are
rudimentary.

The uropod of the adult male is much as in the female but is armed with
longer and more numerous spines and setae.

The colour pattern is remarkably uniform and is as in the type (Hale, 1936.
fiz. 3).

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent. Port Willunga, on stones, 1 fath.
(Hale and Sheard, Feb., 1987).

Famity DIASTYLIDAE
GynoprastyLis Calman.
GYNODIASTYLIS TRUNCATIFRONS Hale.

Gynodiastylis truncatifrons Hale, 1928, p. 43, fig. 13-14.
Several specimens of this distinctive species were secured at the southern end
of Sellick’s Reef. The type was taken five miles from shore,

66 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Sellick’s Reef, 1 fath. (Hale and
Sheard, Jan., 1937),

PARADIASTYLIS Calman.

PARADIASTYLIS TUMIDA sp. nov.

Ovigerous female. Integument strongly indurated, Carapace one-third total
length, much wider than deep; triangular in dorsal view, its greatest breadth
occurring at posterior end, where it is almost as wide as long; a dorso-lateral fold
or ridge on each side is marked off into three prominent tumidities; there is also a
large rounded elevation at each side near the hinder margin, and from it curves
forwards and downwards a swollen ridge, which does not reach to the anterior
margin. Pseudorostral lobes rather narrow, meeting in front of eye lobe for a
distance equal to more than one-fifth of length of carapace. Ocular lobe wide,
with three unpigmented lenses. Antennal notch distinet; a distinct tooth below
notch and above the rounded and serrate infero-lateral angle of carapace.

First pedigerous somite exposed, short; second and third somites short dor-
sally but with pleural portions lengthened and swollen above articulation of
peraeopods; dorsal length of fourth somite about equal to that of first three so-
mites together ; fifth smaller than any of others.

Pleon somites one to four not markedly differing in length; fifth somite one.
fourth as long again as fourth; telson three-fourths as long as fifth somite, and
equal in length to sixth, with two upeurving rather prominent terminal spines
and six pairs of smaller lateral spines.

First antennae with first joint barely longer than third and half as long again
as second. Third maxillipeds without exopods; basis curved near proximal end,
wide, and distally expanded, with a series of stout and very long plumose setae;
length of basis equal to that of remaining segments together.

First peraeopods reaching but little beyond apex of pseudorostrum, basis
only about two-thirds as long as rest of limb; ischium and merus each with a long
plumose seta distally ; carpus a little longer than propodus, half as long again as
merus and three times as long as ischium; dactylus subequal in length to merus,
tipped with several setae, of which one is conspicuously the stoutest ; exopod short
and slender. Second peraeopods widely separated from third pair; with basis
very broad (two-thirds as wide as long’) and having inner edge toothed; ischium
suppressed ; carpus barely longer than merus but nearly twice as long as propodus;
dactylus shorter than propodus, with one of the terminal setae strong; exopod
relatively longer and stouter than in first peraeopods. Last three pairs of peraeo-
pods with basis shorter than remaining joints together (much shorter in fifth

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 67

pair) ; carpus mueh shorter than merus in third and fourth peraeopods but as long
ax merus in fifth; carpus in each pair with an unusually stout and long clistal seta
and a slender bristle; dactylus terminating in a strong claw-like seta, and with one
or two bristles near distal end.

Fig. 8. Paradiastylis tumida. Type female; a, lateral view; b, dorsal view of cephala-
thorax; ¢. antero-lateral margin of carapace. Juvenile male; d, lateral view; e, dorsal view
of cephalothorax (1h, * 26; 6, * 60; d-e, X 46),

Pedunele of uropods about half as long again as telson, wide (its greatesi
breadth nearly one-fourth the leneth) and armed with three spines on inner mar-
vin, two being placed near distal end; excluding the terminal spines the endopod
isa little longer than exopod ; including the spines the rami are subequal in length ;
endopod with first joint longer than second and the latter longer than third; four

68 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

short spines on inner margin of endopod, one at middle of length and one at distal
end of first joint, and one at distal ends of second and third joints.

Colour cream.

Length 3-75 mm.

Juvenile male. Carapace in dorsal yiew with sides parallel for posterior two-
thirds, relatively much narrower and not so deep as in female; dorso-lateral and
lateral ridges sharply defined and not swollen. Appendages as in female excepting
that an exopod is present on the third maxilliped, the exopod of the first and
second peraeopods is much stouter, and the bases of second and fourth pairs of
legs are wider, with the inner margin serrate.

Fig. 4. Paradiastylis tumida, Paratype ovigerous female; a. first antenna; b, third
maxilliped; e—f, first, second, third and fifth peraeopods; g, telson and uropods (X 52).

That the specimen is young is evidenced by the faet that exopods are absent
on the third and fourth peraeopods, pleopods have not yet appeared and the
second transverse suture of the endopod of the uropods is absent, although the
spines are arranged as in the female; this two-jointed condition is without the
slightest doubt due to immaturity,

Length 2 mm

Loe, South Australia: Gulf St. Vineent, Port Willunga Reef, on stones, 1
fath., and Sellick’s Reef, on stones, 1 fath. (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Jan. and
Feb, 1987). New South Wales: Sydney Harbour, Vaucluse, on stones between
tide marks (T. Harvey Johnston, Jan. 1937). Types in South Australian Museum,
Reg. No. C, 2144-2147.

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 69

Dic Stebbing.
Dic LastopacryLum Zimmer.

Dic lasiodactylum Zimmer, 1914, p. 193, fig. 17-18; Hale, 1936, p. 422, fig. 12-13.

In recording this species from South Australia, the writer deseribed an im-
mature male, larger than Zimmer's types and differing in having the carapace
spiny and the telson and uropods relatively much longer and markedly spinose.
The collecting of further material from Sellick’s and Port Willunga Reet's, shows
that, as adults, both **typical’’ and ‘‘spiny’’ torms cover the same range of size,
Thus, one finds ovigerous females from 3 mm. down to 2:5 mm. in length having
the long spiny telson and rough carapace. On the other hand a ‘‘typical’’ female
nearly 3 mum, in length is like Zimmer’s specimens in so far as telson and uropods
are concerned, but has a pair of spinules on the ocular lobe and the inferior margin
of the carapace spinose (fig. 5, a).

Vig. 5. a, Carapace of adult female of typical form of Dic lasiodactylum. |, Carapace of
adult female of Die lasiodactylum yar, spinicuuda (* 46).

As, however, the long, spiny telson consistently distinguishes the ‘‘spiny”’
form from ‘‘typical’’ specimens of the same size, the varietal name spinicauda is
proposed for it. The earapace of var. spizicauda always bears a goodly number
of spines arranged more or less as shown in fig. 5, b; in some examples the spines
are more abundant and the dorso-lateral elevation on each side is much more
marked.

Dic BREVIDACTYLUM sp. nov,

Ovigerous female. Integument rather thin. Carapace about as deep as wide,
less than one-third total length ; in dorsal view the lateral margins, to level of base
of pseudorostrum, are subparallel; surface without sculpture save for a slight
dorso-lateral bulge on each side. Pseudorostval lobes upturned, meeting in front
of ocular lobe for a distance equal to more than one-fourth length of carapace.
Ocular lobe very wide.

70 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

All pedigerous somites fully exposed; pleural parts of first and second pro-
duced forwards, of third to fifth backwardly produced.

Pleon a little longer than thorax; telson distinetly longer than sixth somite,
without armature excepting a pair of rudimentary apical spinules.

rg

Fig. 6. Die brevidactylum. a, Lateral view of ovigerous female. Juvenile male; b, lateral
view; ¢, dorsal view of cephalothorax (X 32).

First peraeopods with small exopod, tipped with a few very short setae; basis
one-fifth as long as remaining joints together ; carpus stout, one-third as long again
as propodus, which bears a long apical spine; dactylus less than half as long as
propodus and with only three apical setae. Second peraeopods with small exopod
bearing one or two hairs; ischium suppressed and carpus equal in length to pro-
podus and dactylus together.

Peduncle of uropods nearly one-fourth as long again as telson, which is equal
in length to exopod; endopod almost as long as exopod, with setae on inner edge,
with a long terminal seta, and with third joint longer than second but shorter than
first ; exopod wtih two spines on outer margin and with three terminal setae.

Colour white.

Length 2-7 mm.

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 71

Immature male. Rudimentary exopods are present on the first four pairs of
peraeopods, and the second antennae do not nearly reach to hinder margin of
carapace. Appendages otherwise much as in female.

Length 2-1 mm.

5

Fig. 7. Die brevidaectylum. Type female; a and b, first and second peraeopods; ¢, telson
and uropod (x 70).

a

WH,

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Sellick’s Reef, on stones, 1 fath.
(11. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Jan. and March 1937). Types in South Australian
Museum, Reg. No. C, 2151-2152.

This species differs from D. lasiodactylwm in the very different proportions
of the segments of the first peraeopods and in the absence of long bristles on the
dactylus of that limb, the subparallel (instead of convergent) sides of the carapace
as seen in dorsal view and in the character of the uropods.

Pacuystyuis H, J. Hansen.

Anchicolurus of Stebbing seems to be a synonym of Colurostylis Calman
(Hale, 1928, p. 47 and Zimmer, 1930, p. 651). The acquisition of a male of Pachy-
stylis vielus makes it increasingly difficult to separate Colwrostylis from Hansen’s
genus.

72 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PACHYSTYLIS VIETUS Hale.
Pachystylis vietus Hale, 1936, p. 424, fig. 14-15.

The species was previously known only from the adult female. <A single
young male differs as follows. The first four peraeopods bear well-developed exo-
pods, the accessory flagellum of the first antennae is not much shorter than the
main flagellum, there are pleopods on the first two pleon somites and the apical
spines of the telson, although tiny, are longer; the branches of the pleopods are
rudimentary and are not furnished with long setae. The apex of the telson has
two short, slender setae, in addition to the small spines, just as in the female.

Loe. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Sellick’s Reef (H. M. Hale, Keb.
1937) ; Port Willunga (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Jan. and Feb. 1937) ; Marino
(K. Sheard and B. C. Cotton, Mar. 1937).

Fig. 8. Allodiastylis eretatus. a, Cephalothorax of adult female. b, Cephalothorax of male
with form of female (xX 34).

ALLODIASTYLIS Hale.
ALLODIASTYLIS CRETATUS Hale.
Allodiastylis cretatus Hale, 1936, p. 426, fig. 16-17.

This species was originally described from a single adult female and a single
maie. Further material now available reveals some curious facts.

The type female is abnormal in so far as the pseudorostrum and the anterior
margin of the carapace are concerned; it has already been noted (Hale, wf supra,
p. 428) that its first peraeopods do not form a symmetrical pair. In females now
before me the pseudorostral lobes are upturned, are spinose interiorly and have
long setae radiating from the apex, while the antero-lateral angle of the carapace is

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 73

prominent and, like the inferior margin, is spinose. In lateral view the serrated
dorsal margin exhibits a ceeper indentation at the middle of its length and the
antero-lateral portions of cach dorso-lateral ridge are spinous, one of the spines
heing fairly prominent (fig. $,a). The appendages and telson are as in the type
female (with the exception of the malformed first right peraeopod of the latter)
and no exopods are apparent on any of the thoracie limbs.

One exumple from South Australia (fig. 8, b) resembles the females described
above, but lias exopods on the third maxillipeds and first to fourth peraeopods,
although they are not fully developed; the appendages generally are as in the type
ihaie, The sculpture is exactly asin the females, while the integument is indurated
aud chalky white, the pseudorostrim is uplurned and the telson terminates in a
pair of very short blunt spines, instead of long spines as in the type male.

Using the “formalin method’? of collecting on a reef in New South Wales,
Prof. T. Harvey Johnston secured a number of females in conipany with an adult
maie; the latter agrees in every detail with the type male. Thus, (his transiiecent
male, with raised ocular lobe, downbent rostrum, strongly ridged carapace and
lony telsonic spines, has now been found associated with the very different white
females in two widely separated Australian loealities—evidence supporting the
assumption that they are the sexes of the one species.

The variation exhibited by some other Cumacea indicates the desirability uf
examining large series whenever possible. One may cite, for example, the range
of variability of Miastylis glabra Zimmer (see Zimmer, 1926, pp. 57 and 72), Nann-
aslacus nasutus Zimmer, VN. gibbosus Calman, V. zimmeri Calman, and Die lasiv-
dactylum Zimmer.

Loe, South Australia: Guit St. Vineent, Sellick’s Reet, on stones, 1 fath.
(H, M, Male and ik. Sheard, Jan. 1937). New South Wales: Sydney Harbour,
Vaucluse, on stone between tide marks ('‘T, Harvey Johnston, Jan, 1937).

Famiry NANNASTACIDAE
NANNASTACUS Spence Bate.
NANNASTACUS NASUTUS Var, CAMELUS Aiminer.

Vunnustacus nasulus var, cornelius Zimmer, 1914, p, 186, fig. 15,

Aaunber of specimens taken on South Australian reels conform to the above
variely. The eve is pigmented in all, A female 2-5 mn. in length is figured,

Loe, South Australias Gull St, Vineent, Port Willimpa Reet, on stone, 2
Nath. al high (ide, and Sellick’s Reef, on stone, 1 fath. (11. M. Hale and Kk, Sheard,
Jan-Feb. 1937).

Hlab. South-western and South Australia,

74 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 9. Nannastacus nasutus var. camelus. Female; a, lateral view; b, dorsal view of
cephalothorax (X 30).

ScHIZOTREMA Calman.
ScHIZOTREMA DEPRESSUM Calman.
Schizotrema depressum Calman, 1911, p. 361, pl. xxxiv, fig. 14-17.

Specimens of this species have now been taken in South Australian waters.
Adult females attain a length of 2 mm. and have the carapace more rugose than
that of smaller examples.

As noted by Calman the lateral setae of the cephalothorax and pleon are al-
ways encrusted—either with algae or mud—so that the bizarre appearance of the
creature is increased.

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Port Willunga Reef, on stones, 1
fath. (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Feb. 1937).

Hab. Gulf of Siam and South Australia.

REFERENCES.

Calman, W. T. (1904) : Rep. Ceylon Pearl Fish., ii.

Calman, W. T. (1911) : Trans. Gool. Soc., xvii.

Hale, H. M. (1928) : Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., li.

Hale, H. M. (1936) : Rec. S. Aust. Mus., v, No. 4.

Zimmer, C. (1914) : Fauna Stidwest Aust., v.

Zimmer, ©. (1926) : Kungl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand., Band iti, No. 2.
Zimmer, C. (1980) : Mitt. Zool. Mus., Berlin, Band xvi, Heft. 4.

A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TROMBIDIIDAE
(ACARINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., ENTOMOLOGIST,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Recently Dr. Sig Thor (Zool. Anz., 1935, ex, pp. 107-112) has divided the family
Trombidiidae into ten subfamilies. In this paper therefore I propose to revise our
knowledge of the Australian forms in the light of Sig Thor’s studies.

Subfamily I, Trombellinae Sig Thor, 1935.

Body elongate, abdomen rectangular. Cuticle strong, tuberculate; hairs ciliated or
simple, short and pointed; the two pseudostigmal hairs placed close together in the
middle of the thorax on one or two prominences between the two pairs of stalked or
sessile paired eyes. Fourth segment of palp with various spines or hairs; fifth segment
long.

A REVISION or raz AUSTRALIAN TROMBIDIIDAE
(ACARINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., Enromonoctsr, SourH Ausrratian Museum.
Fig, 1-3.

Recentuy Dr. Sig Thor (Zool. Anz., 1935, ex, pp. 107-112) has divided the family
Trombidiidae into ten subfamilies. In this paper therefore I propose to revise our
knowledge of the Australian forms in the light of Sig Thor’s studies.

Subfamily 1, TRomBevurnae Sig Thor, 1935.

Body elongate, abdomen rectangular. Cuticle strong, tubereulate; hairs
ciliated or simple, short and pointed; the two pseudostigmal hairs placed close
together in the middle of the thorax on one or two prominences between the two
pairs of stalked or sessile paired eyes. Fourth segment of palp with various spines
or hairs; fifth segment long.

In this subfamily Sig Thor places only the typical genus T'rombella Berl.
1887. Inasubsequent paper (Zool, Anz, 1936, exiv, pp. 29-32), however, he puts
the genera Chyzeria Canest. 1897 and Parachyzeria Lirst 1926, both of which he
omitted from the earlier paper, in the subfamily Microtrombidvnae. According
io his subfamily diagnosis, both the above genera seem to me io be more closely
related to Trombella and should, I believe, be grouped with that genus in the
Trombellinac, rather than in the Microtrombidiinae. Such inclusion, however,
does necessitate a slight alteration in the diagnosis of the Trombellinae, In both
Chyzeria and Parachyzeria the erista is absent and the pseudostigmal hairs are
placed close together on a single prominence, while the paired eyes are on long
peduncles and not sessile, he above characteristics are included in the diagnosis
of the subfamily as given above.

The three genera here included in the subfamily may be keyecl as follows ;

1, Pseudostigmal hairs on two slightly separated tubercles. Body hairs simple
or very finely serrated. Eyes 2 4- 2, sessile. Dorsal surface of abdomen often
with glandular clepressions he - Gen. Trombella Berl. 1887.

Pseudostigmal hairs on a single tubercular promineuce. Body with or without
lateral processes ; hairs ciliated and simple. Eyes 2-+ 2, pedunculate .. 2,

76 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

2. Body with 4 lateral abdominal processes on each side. Dorsum posteriorly
with simple sinuate hairs, overlying which are long ciliated hairs.
Gen. Chyzeria Canestrini 1897,

Body without above processes. Dorsum anteriorly with four brushes of very
long ciliated hairs, underlying which posteriorly are the simple sinuate hairs
asin Chyzerta .. .. Gen. Paruchyzeria Hirst. 1926 (not Australian).

Genus TROMBELLA Berlese, 1887.
The only known Australian species is U'rombella warregensis Hirst 1929,
which is recorded from New South Wales and South Australia.

Genus Cuyzeria Canestrini, 1897.

This genus is widely distributed in Australia and also occurs in New Zealand.
The following forms have been described and have been keyed in an earlier paper
(Womersley 1984) ; C. australiense Hirst 1928; C. australiense v. musgravei Hirst
1929; C. a. var. occidentalis Hirst 1929; C. a. var. hirsti Wom. 1934; C. insulana
Hirst 1929; C. montana Hirst 1929; C. armigera Hirst 1929.

Subfamily II, Tanaupopinak Sig Thor, 1935.

Body moderately broad. Cuticle smooth or tuberculate; hairs pointed, short
or long. Crista weak, without sensillary areas; the two pseudostigmal hairs placed
near the crista in the middle of the thorax. The two pairs of sessile eyes some:
times absent. Palpi with few spines. Legs short, seldom long.

This subfamily is as yet unknown from Australia. It includes the following
genera: Tanaupodus Haller 1882; Hothrombiwm Berlese 1910; Rhinothrombium
Berlese 1910; T'yphlothrombium Berlese 1910; Neotanawpodes Garman 1925,

Subfamily I11, Jounsronianinag Sig Thor, 1935.

Abdomen cylindrical, with pointed simple hairs. Crista well developed, with
two sensillary areas in the middle (or at ends) and 4 (2 pairs) of pseudostigmal
hairs. With a distinct nasus. Eyes shortly stalked or sessile. Palpi with or
without a few tibial spines. Legs moderately long.

Included here by Sir Thor are Johnstoniana George 1909 (= Diplothrombium
Berlese 1910 = Rohaultia Oudemans 1911), Centrotrombidium Kramer 1896,
Notothrombium Storkan 1934. To these should be added Myrmicotrombium
Womersley 1934. The genus Rohaultia Oudemans was erected for a larval form.
As the genus Centrothrombidiwm Kramer possesses only one pair of pseudo-
stigmal hairs on a single sensillary area of the erista, the inclusion of it here does

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 77

not seem natural. Tt would probably he hetter placed in the Microtrombidiinae.
With the exception of this genus and of Notathrambiiwmn, the deseription of whieh
is not available to me, the two Australian genera may he separated thus:

1. Eyes 2 -++ 2. sessile. Crista with either both or only one pair of psendostigmal
hairs situated medially ; if only one, then the seeond pair is at the anterior end
hoth pairs on sensillary areas. ‘a Gen, Johnstoniand George 1909,

(= Diplothrombium Berl, = Rohaultia Ouds.).

2. Tyes 1 -+-1, sessile. Crista with two pairs of psendostigmal hairs placed al

opposite ends, on sensillarv wreas.. Gen, Murmicotranbiunm Wom,. 1934.

’

Genus JOHNSTONIANA George, 1909.

= Miplothrombinm Berl, 1910, Tlirst 1928, Womersley 1934.
= Rohaultia Onds. 1911, Wom, 1934.

Only a single species Johnstoniuna australiense (TMirst, 1928) is known from
Australia. It was described by Hirst from Queensland and was later recorded by
the present writer from South Australia.

Genus Myruicorromern™ Womersley, 1934,

This genus is only known from the type species M. hrevicristatum Wom. de-
seribed from specimens found in an ants’ nest in South Australia.

Subfamily IV, Eurrompipirnar Sig Thor, 1935.

Abdomen broad, triangular (except the narrow Leptathrombium), with short
thickly ciliated hairs and with a few transverse furrows, Apex of abdomen with
an oval shield-like area, seldom without. Thorax anteriorly with a distinct nasus.
Crista well developed, with a medial small but solid sensillary area and two pseudo-
stigmal hairs between the shortly peduneulate or sessile paired eyes. Palpi with
strong accessory claw and many strong spines. Lees strong, of variable length,
Larvae with 2 or 3 dorsal shields; lower lip forming a chitinons ring; tarsal claws
of leg ITT strongly modified, the inner claw being stump-like and projeeting
backwards.

The genera placed here by Sig Thor are Hutrombidiwn Verdun 1909, Lepto-
thrombium Berlese 1912, and Cercethrombinm Methlag] 1927. The last is only
known from the larval stage, Mutrombidiwm from both larva and adult, and
Leptothrombium from the adult only. The last genus is regarded by Berlese as bit
a subgenus of Hutrombidium.

The following key will help in the separation of the genera.

78 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1. Adults

2.
Larvae is 4 a : 3
2. Form broadly triangular ; body hairs uniform.
Gen. Lutrombidium Verdun, 1909.
Form narrow and elongate; body hairs of two forms.

Gen. Leptothrombidium Berlese, 1912.

3. Only two dorsal shields ; coxal hairs short and stumpy and apically bifureated.

Gen. Hutrombidium Verdun, 1909.
Three dorsal shields; coxal hairs long, pointed and ciliated.

Gen. Cercothrombiwm Methlagl, 1927.
Genus Evurromepipium Verdun, 1909.

This is the only genus as yet known to occur in Australia, It is represented
by Lutrombidium trigonum Herman, the larvae of which have been found at-
tached to the Black-tipped Locust, Chortoicetes terminifera (Walker) at the
Waite Institute, Glen Osmond, South Australia, by Mr. D. C. Swan in April, 1934.

Subfamily V, Poporurompunar Sig Thor, 1935.

Abdomen moderately broad, cordate, with shoulders and with fine, very
weakly or unciliated hairs. No nasus. In the middle of the thorax and between
the two pairs of shortly peduneulate eyes is a well developed sensillary area with
two pseudostigmal hairs; crista behind sensillary area shortened and in front
rudimentary. Fourth segment of palpi with accessory claw and many spines or
combs; fifth segment (tarsus) large. Legs long.

The genus Podothrombiwm Berlese 1910 is the only one included in this sub-
family. It does not occur in Australia.

Subfamily VI, Tromsicutinakr Ewing, 1929.
(Itch- or Chigger-mites.)

Body form in adult with the shape of an 8, with a constriction behind the
shoulders; abdomen rounded behind. Body hairs thick, soft, and finally ciliated.
Thorax without nasus, sometimes with an anterior incision. Crista well developed,
extending the whole length of thorax, posteriorly with a sensillary area and two
pseudostigmal hairs. Eyes weakly developed, seldom one or two pairs near the
sensillary area, often absent or rudimentary. Palpi long, fourth segment without
comb or accessory claw, with few spines (more in Blankaartia). Legs short.
Larvae with only one dorsal shield (two in Blankaartia).

In this group Sig Thor places the following genera: Heterothrombidium Ver-
dun 1909, Neothrombium Bruyant 1909, Doloisia Oudemans 1910, Leewwenhoekia

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 79

Ondemans 1911, Zannemania Oudemans 1911, Gahrliepia Oudemans 1912, Schon-
gastia Oudemaus 1910, Neoschdngastia Ewing 1929, Schdngastiella Tlirst 1915,
Odonlacarus Ewing 1929, Walehia Ewing 1932, Endolrombieula Ewing 1932,
Atonus Late, 1795 (= Metathrombium Oudemans 1909), Vrombieula Berlese
1905 (= Neabrombioula Mirst 1925).

Very few of these genera are known from the adult forms, most of them being
represented in collections by larvae, The larval stages are generally to be found
as ectoparasites on warni-blooded animals (ineluding man) but some appear to be
restricted to amphibians,

The genus Atomus Latr. (= Metathrombiwmn Ouds.) is here regarded as being
more properly placed in the Wicrolrombidtinae.

The varions genera may be separated with the help of the following key

1. Adults; body 8-shaped, Eyes one or none on each side 0 ee Ay
Larvae fr 3 i 34 we “4 vi Sh
2. Byes placed at base of large sensillary area of erista, or absent. Sensillary
area broad with two pseudostigmal hairs, Gen. Trambicula Berlese, 1908.

Eves placed on anterior adie of thorax; apex of thorax incised.
Gen. Blankaartia Oudemans, 1911 (not Australian).
4%. With two median dorsal shields. Eyes two on easel side, posterior eve the
smaller, Dorsum behind seeond shield with numerons small symmetrical
shields, Lower lip not as a chitinous ring. Tarsi T and Tl with only 2 claws,
TIT with three. Gen, Blankaartid Oudemans, 1911 (not Australian),
With one or three median dorsal shields and only one eve on eaeh side... 4.
4, Anterior dorsal shield with 3 or more pairs of setae, in addition to the two
psendostigmal hairs BY . A. ae + ee HS
Dorsal shield with only 4 or 6 si ingle setae besides the psendostigmal hairs 1).
5. Dorsal shield with 4 pairs of setae besides the psendostigmal hairs, Remur of
lee T only divided; one pair of setae between coxae T and one pair between

coxae TIT. Palpal claw bifureate. Gen. Gahrliepia Oudemans, 1912,
(= Typhlothrombivm Oudemans, 1911) (not Australian),
Dorsal shield with 3 pairs of setae .. - - x: J. 6,

6. Pseudostizmal hairs clavate,
Gen. at Dp apiiatls Hirst, 1915 (not Avstralian).

Pseudostivinal hairs not clavate... ois . Le 2

7. ae dorsal shielcl longer than broad ; magsitary eoxal setae in front of
palpi Gen. Heterothrombinm Verdun, 1910 (not Australian).
Dorsal shield broader than lone, . Fi ’s ee 8.

8. Dorsal shield] without any median anterior process but with a poorly developed
erista 0 Gen. Hannemunia Oudemans, 19117 (not Anstralian).

Dorsal shield with a short median anterior process; without erista,
Gen. Leenwenhoekia Oudemans, 1911.

80

10,

11.

13.

14.

16.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dorsal shield trapezoidal . ut nd 7 me a0:
Dorsal shield triangular. Palpal claw with 1-5 points.
Gen. Doloisia Oudemans, 1912 (not Australian).
Dorsal shield with only two pairs of setae besides the psendostigmal hairs;
latter clavate. Eyes absent or rudimentary. Palpal claw trifureate.
Gen. Walchia Ewing, 1931 (not Australian).

Dorsal shield with 5 setae in addition to the pseudostigmal hairs; latter clavate

or not . phe #: - a A, ia sis ed
Pseudostigmal hairs clavate J , f. als ., 12.
Psendostigmal hairs not clavate .. ; Mh J yo he,

Chelicerae with a row of teeth dorsally ; palpal claw usually bifureate.
Gen. Schénqastia Oudemans, 1910.
Chelicerae without more than one dorsal tooth; palpal claw trifureate. Eyes
two sd fe Gen. Neoschdngastia Ewing, 1929 (not Australian).
Dorsal shield distinetly pentagonal, with the posterior sides forming a strong
angle. HKyes two on each side or absent es 7 £. ~_ 44,
Dorsal shield at most roughly 5-sided, without strong posterior angle .. 15.
Eyes two on each side. Gen. Pentagonella Sig Thor, 1936 (not Australian).
Eyes absent 3 Gen. Reidlinea Oudemans, 1916 (not Australian).
Dorsal shield poorly developed; all 5 setae placed near middle of shield;
median anterior seta simple; pseudostigmal hairs short, simple, setiform.
Chelicerae with 3 sharp recurved teeth on upper margin and a vestigial lateral
tooth. Eyes 2 + 2, well developed.
Gen. Endotrombicula Ewing, 1931 (not Australian).
Dorsal shield well developed, the 5 setae marginal or submarginal .. 16.
Chelicerae with a row of teeth on upper margin.
Gen. Odontacarus Ewing, 1929 (not Australian).
Chelicerae with not more than one tooth on upper margin.

Gen. Trombicula Berlese, 1905.
(= Neotrombicula Hirst, 1925).

Of the above genera only Trombicula Berlese 1905, Schéngastia Oudemans

1910, and Leeuwenhoekia Oudemans 1911 are so far known to be represented in
Australia.

Genus TromprcuLa Berlese, 1905.

The following five species of this genus are recorded from Australia, two as

adults and three as larvae.

TROMBICULA SIGNATA Womersley, 1934.

Described from a solitary adult specimen from Western Australia. The type

is in the South Australian Museum.

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES

TROMBICULA TINDALET Womersley, 1936.

81

Deseribed from a specimen taken on Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South

Australia by Mr. N. B. Tindale. Type in the South Australian Museum.

TROMBICULA HIRSTI Sambon, 1927.

Only known from the larval form, this species is the ‘‘ti-tree itch mite’’ of
Queensland and South Australia. Tts real host is unknown but recently the writer

has had a specimen from a blackbird where it was found walking over the beak
after the death of the bird. This specimen was from Payneham, South Australia.

June 30th, 1937.

TROMBICULA NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE Hirst, 1929.

Described from larvae found on Rattus greyi from Kangaroo Island, South

Australia, it was later taken on Potorous tridactylus in Tasmania.

TRoMBICULA MAcROPUS Womersley, 1934.

This species was described from specimens of larvae found attached to the

scrotum of a wallaby from Darwin, Northern Australia.

Genus ScnbncastrrA Oudemans, 1910.

Of this larval genus five species have been described from the Australian con

tinent as follows:
ScHONGASTIA ANTIPODIANUM Hirst, 1929.
From Rattus greyi from Kangaroo Island, South Australia.
ScHONGASTIA COORONGENSIS Hirst, 1929.
From the ears of a rodent at Robe, South Australia.
Scubncastta DASYCERCI Hirst, 1929.
From Dasycercus cristicauda, Ooldea, South Australia,
SCHONGASTIA WESTRALIENSE Womersley, 1954.
From the ears of a domestic cat, Greenbushes, Western Australia.

ScHONGASTIA PETROGALE Womersley, 1934.

From the scrotum of a wallaby, Musgrave Ranges, South Australia,

82 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Genus LEkuWENHOEFKTIA Oudemans, 1911.
LEEUWENHOEKIA AUSTRALIENSE Hirst, 1925.

Originally described from specimens taken on a human being in New South
Wales, it has also been found on the ears of a domestic eat at Glen Osmond, South
Australia.

Subfamily VII, Microrromsiniinak Sig Thor, 1935.

Body small to moderately large. Abdomen cordate. Body hairs very vari-
able, smooth, thin, weakly ciliated or thick (apparently unciliated), dagger-like,
clavate or globular, frequently combed on inner side, septate or not. Eyes usually
in two pairs or absent, sessile or shortly pedunculate. The sensillary area of erista
behind the eyes, usually posterior or subposterior, occasionally submedial. Palpi
on fourth segment with one or a few spines (besides accessory claw), on inner side
with a longer or smaller comb of stiff hairs and sometimes some spine-like setae.
Nasus absent (except Neotrombidium). Legs generally shorter than or as short
as body. Larvae with 1, 2 or 5 large dorsal plates, sometimes these followed by
rows of round or quadrate plates bearing setae. Eyes usually two on each side,
occasionally only one. Hind tarsi with 2 or 3 claws, modified or not. Lower lip
of mouth parts not ring-like.

Within this subfamily Sig Thor places the following:

Microtrombidium Haller 1882 (subg. Enemothrombium Berlese, 1910; Cam-
pylothrombium Krause, 1916); Dromeothrombium Berlese, 1912; Ettmiilleria
Oudemans, 1911 (larvae); Atomus Latr., 1795 (= Metathrombium Oudemans,
1911) ; Polydiscia Methlagl, 1927; Neotrombidiwm Leonardi, 1901; Georgia Hull,
1918; Calothrombium Berlese, 1918; Haplothrombium Ewine, 1925 (larvae) :
Dendrothrombiwm Sig Thor, 1936; Platythrombidium Sig Thor, 1936; Camero-
thrombium Sig Thor, 1936.

In 1935 (Zool. Anz. cix, 111) in defining his subfamily Sig Thor expressed
the opinion that Hnemothrombidium and Campylothrombium should be regarded
as only subgenera of Microtrombidium. Later, however (Zool. Anz. 1936, exiv,
30-31) he further split up the Microtrombidium complex and erected three addi-
tional new genera, Dendrothrombium, Platythrombidium and Camerothrombium
on corresponding differences in hair structure. As restricted in the present paper
both Mnemothrombidium and Campylothrombium are regarded as of generi¢
status in accordance with Sig Thor’s later paper. The genus Centrothrombiwm
Krause, for reasons stated earlier, is also included in this subfamily. Here also
the following new genera are erected and defined : Hchinothrombium (type Ottonia
spinosum Canest.) ; Laminothrombium (type M. myrmicum Womersley, 1934) ;
Eutrichothrombium (type M.(H.) eutrichum Berlese, 1905).

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 83

The larval genus Bthmiillerca, allhongl evidence is mot conclusive. would

uppear to be the larval stage of Aehinathrombitum or Camerathrambinm, more
probably the latter (see Womersley 1986, J. Linn. Soc. London, xl, 114)-

6.

Key to Toe Genera OF MickorrRoMBIDITINAE,

Larval forms .. nm — 3 = 3. 2
Adult forms 4 , A ci = a a Dh

With two large dorsal shields which are punctate. Inner claw of tarsus TTT
strongly modified, short stump-like and directed backwards, Palpi with

vlaws ie if be cs 43 as oe oS
One or five large dorsal shields; if one, then this followed by a series of rows
of large dorsal shields. Tuner claw of tarsus TTT not as above .. face hy

whe dorsal setae behind the second shield placed on small round plates, Tes
2+ 2, sessile. .. . Gen. Ettinilleria Oudeinans, 1911,

No small plates behind seenta shield. Hives 2 + 2, sessile.
Gen, A fomus Latr.. 1795,
(= Metathrombinm Ondemans, 1909 (not Australian),

With 5 large transverse dorsal shields. Eyes 1-1. Tarsus of lee TIT with
only two claws, one long and one short, and a lone stiff seta with lone seeon-
dary hairlets ., Gen, Hoplathrombium Ewing, 1925 (not Australian).

With one large dorsal plate, this honr-class shaped aud porous: the dorsum
behind ocenpied by 16 large quadrate plates each bearing a seta. Eves 2 + 2.
sessile, on small plates. Claws on all tarsi unmodified.

Gen. Polydiseva Methlagl, 1927 (not Anstralian).

With a distinet nasus. Dorsal body hairs uniform. trifureate from hase, with
few or no serrations x 4 Gen. Neotrombidiim Leonardi, 1911.

Without a nasus . is . ee bt oe a- 8G:

Sensillary area of crista aibmedial: Palpi with strone accessory claw, three
atronst spines on inner side and 8—9 on outer side of tibia. Body hairs short
hut strong, frequently bifureated from hase, the arms sometimes expanded
and forming an enclosure, with strong hairlets.

Gen. Calathrambinin Berlose, 1918.

Sensillary area of erista posterior or subposterior . ran

Palpal tarsus clavate, apically with two strong lone forwardly directed spines;

tibia with long apical claw and small accessory claw. Pseudostigmal hairs
elavate (Onudemans). Eyes 2 + 2.

Gen. Centratrambidium Krause. 1896 (not Australian),

Not so . . . of nt 7 . 8.
Dorsal hairs nniformly of one type bn sometimes of variahle length oO
Dorsal hairs of two distinet types . . at ae
Dorsal hairs tapering, pointed, with lone outstanding hairlets rs .. 10,

Gen, Wierotvambidium Haller. 1882,

Dorsal hairs different - rm is a. . ik

84

10.

11.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Legs I and IV shorter than the body. Subg. Microtrombidiwm Maller, 1882.
Legs I and IV longer than body. Sube. Dromeothrombium Berlese, 1912.

Dorsal body hairs long and spine-like with few serrations. Palpal tibia with
one large accessory claw and a few spine-like setae,

Gen. Echinothrombium nov. (part).

(type O. spinosum Canest., 1877).

Not so. AC . 43 riage,

Dorsal body hairs tree- like with fine intermingling iceman. Palpal tibia
laterally with a strong forwardly directed spine. Tarsi T oval, broad, much
longer than metatarsus.

Gen. Dendrothrombium Sig Thor, 1936 (not Australian).

Not so. ey : Nd - Ae ss .. 18.
Dorsal body hairs not senate ce Li, 4 oF .. 14.
Dorsal hody hairs septate, divided into chambers Po “ .. 16

Dorsal body hairs sessile, short, conical, pointed with numerous short cilia-
tions. Palpal tibia laterally with at least one, often many, strong spines.
Tarsus T generally elongate-oval, longer than metatarsus.

Gen. Platythrombium Sig Thor, 1936.
Not so. + ar - ws m4 .. pal ER,

Dorsal body hairs more or less sessile, arising from short conical tubercles,

leaf-like with marginal! ciliations. Palpal tibia with strong accessory claw and
without strong dorsal spines. Tarsus T short and broad.

Gen. Laminothrombiwm nov.

(type M. myrmicwm Wom., 1934).

Dorsal body hairs on short peduneles, claviform, apically acute or rounded,

with short ciliations we Gen. Enemothrombium Berlese, 1905 (part).

Dorsal body hairs short stalked or sessile, cup-like with short stiff ciliations.
Gen. Camerothrombium Sig Thor, 1936 (part).
Dorsal body hairs long, claviform and not cup-shaped, backwardly curved,
with subapical septum and open apex.
Gen. Campylothrombium Krause, 1916 (part) (not Australian).
Many of the dorsal hairs with thick stems and long strong hairlets and multi-
ramous apically, the rami being as thick as the stem; other hairs equally thick
with long hairlets but not ramous Gen. Georgia Hull, 1918 (not Australian).

Not so . + Pi i+ aie Pe! ts |, Be
Shorter hairs as in Microtrombidium; larger hairs stout, spine-like with few
or no serrations x a Gen. Echinothrombium nov. (part).
Shorter hairs otherwise .. . ls - me «3 9.
Longer hairs septate ate ol oe ae: ap .. 20.
Longer hairs not septate .. : 6 +3 a Baad Be

Longer hairs elongate, claviform, open at apex.
Gen. “Campylothrombium Krause, 1916 (part) (not Australian).
Longer hairs cup-like or globose, on short peduncles.
Gen. Camerothrombium Sig Thor, 1936 (part).

WoMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES a5

21, Shorter hairs sessile, short, conical, pointed, with numerous ciliations, as in
Platythrombidium, oy else without ciliations and with 4-5 short apical fungi-
form lobes; longer hairs clayiform or rod-like with many ciliations.

Gen. Hnemothrombiwm Berlese, 1905 (part).
Shorter hairs globose; without septa, closely packed but with longer fine setae
interspersed hs .t .. Gen. Butrichothrombium nov.

(type W.(#.) eutrichwm Berlese, 1905) (not Australian).

Genus ErrmMu.LuEria Oudemans, 1911.
This larval genus is, so far, represented in Australia by the following two
species.
ETTMULLERLA AUSTRALIS Womersley, 1936.
Reared trom eggs which may have been those of a species of Echinothrombium
or Camerothrombiwm trom Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South Australia.
EvrMunLeria OvscuRA Womersley, 1936.
Only known from a single individual found in moss from Glen Osmond, South
Australia,
Genus Nrorrompipium Leonardi, 1901.
Represented in Australia by a single species N. barringunense Hirst 1923,
which is known from New South Wales and South Australia.
Genus CaLorHrombiuM berlese, 1918.

To this genus should be referred the following three species.

CALOTHROMBIUM RETENTUS (Banks, 1916).

= Rhyncholophus retentus Banks, 1916.
= Microtrombidium retentus Womersley, 1934.

The longer dorsal hairs often bifurcated with straight branches. Palpal tarsus
with 3 inner spines, ‘Tarsus | four times as long as high and only slightly longer
than metatarsus.

This species is only known from the type material from Victoria,

CALOTHROMBIUM KOORDANUM (Hirst, 1928).
= Microtrombidium koordanum Hirst 1928, Womersley 1934.

The longer dorsal hairs bi- or triturcaie trom base, the branches widened, leaf-
like and forming more or less of au enclosure between the leaves. Palpi with
clavate tarsus. ‘Tarsi | twice as long as high and equal in length to metatarsus.

Only known from type material from Koorda, Western Australia.

86 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

CALOTHROMBIUM TUBBI Sp. nov.
(Text fig. I a-d).

Description. Colour reddish. Length 1-923 mm., width 1-29 mm. Eyes
2 + 2 sessile, placed well forward on anterior margin of thorax. Crista 345 long
with posterior sensillary area and two pseudostigmal hairs. Palpi 4380p long,
femur almost cylindrical and but little swollen, tibia with large blunt apical claw
and smaller accessory claw behind which are two spines, tarsus long and cylindrical
reaching tip of claw. Legs short; I 1345y, tarsus elliptical 2834 by 170u, meta-
tarsus 173n; I) 8654; LL 770%; 1V 1070u. Dorsal hairs uniform, bifurcated at
base, one branch being fan- or leaf-like and convex, the other branch elongate and
curved in towards the fan, both branches with long ciliae.

Locality. A single specimen collected by Mr. H. Tubb at Heathmont, Vic-
toria, July 28th, 1934.

Genus Microrrompipium Haller, 1882.
Subgenus DromEotHRoMBIUM Berlese, 1912.

This is separated from the subgenus Microtrombidium s. str. by the great
length of the first and fourth legs. The following Australian species should be
placed here.

MicroTroMBipiumM (DROMEOTHROMBIUM) ATTOLUS (Banks, 1916).

= Rhyncholophus attolus Banks, 1916.
= Microtrombidium attolus Womersley, 1934.

Only known from the type material from Sydney, New South Wales.

Subgenus Microtrompipium Haller, 1882, s. str.

Nine Australian species can be referred to this subgenus in the restricted sense.

They may be keyed as follows:

1. Eyes wanting. Front tarsus 4 times as long as high. Dorsal hairs long and
slender, 26n, tapering with long hairlets. Palpal tibia with 2 or 3 accessory
claw-like spines Fs a: M.(M.) barringunense Hirst, 1928.
Eyes present, two on each side, sessile a ut fs va oD

2. Front tarsus elongate, at least 24 times as long as high with straight sides which
are parallel or converge perceptibly apically .. bag re we
Front tarsus elliptical with rounded sides, at most only slightly more than twice
as long as high .. x t'. iy bet ah LOA

1

WOoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 87

arsus | 204, by Sop, with sides converging towards apex, metatarsus 136p,
Ilairs variable in length op to 65,2, with long ontstanding hairlets, Palpal
Libia with accessory claw and three strong spines on inner side, without lateral
forwardly directed spine .. .. MACM.) westraliense Womersley, 1984,
Hront tarsus with parallel sides, 4154 by 185, metatarsus 255n. Dorsal hairs
variable in length up to 50u, with long hairlets which on some of the longer
hairs lie closer apically givine a clavate bushy appearance. Palpal tibia with
strong accessory claw and laterally a strong forwardly directed spine.
M.(M.) myloriense sp. nov.
Front tarsus broadest basally, with a very distinet basal angle. Dorsal hairs
35. Palpal tibia with accessory claw he "4 Sc cD
Front tarsus broadest in the middle, without distinct basal angle . we «6.
Smaller species, 1190p, tarsus 1 twice as long as high, 2724 by 136, metatarsus
1é6u. Dorsal setae 35, long ts MAM.) karriense Womersley, 1984,
Larger species 2040, tarsus | 450 by 270p, metatarsus longer (ham tarsus is
high, 300u. Dorsal setae 38d long -. M.CM.) tasmanicum sp. nov,
Dorsal hairs 264, tapering, uniform in length, tarsus 1 272” by 136, sides
strongly and evenly curved, widest in middle, metatarsus 2702, Palpal tibia
with accessory claw, without strong lateral spine, Length 1275p,
M.(M.) wequalis (Banks, 1916),
Dorsal hairs 40 or more long, wniform i ifs o DL
Dorsal hairs variable in length to 52, longer ones bushy at apex and appearing
somewhat clavate. Tarsus 1, 2200 by 90u, broadest in middle, Palpal tarsus
with accessory elaw. Length 9804 .. ». M(M.) newman Wom, 1934,
Dorsal hairs 40p Jong, uniform e*, Syd ri ba rar VB
Tarsus | U87p by 102,, widest in middle, metatarsus 102 long. Palpal tibia
with accessory ¢law followed by a dorsal series of spines, Length 1000, by
1100p i4 iz t M.A(M.) adeluidicum Wom, 1928,
Tarsus | 2724 by 1362; widest medially, metatarsus nearly as long as tarsus,
2584. Palpal tibia with accessory claw and series of spines. Length to 1200p.
M.(M.) affine Hirst, 1928,

Micvxorroweipium (M.) BARRTNGUNENSE Hirst, 1928.

Only known from the type material from Barringnno, New South Wales,

Micnorrowemro (M.) wesrranixss Womersley, 1954.

Fouad associated with ants in Western Anstralia,

Microrromeimie mM (M.) Karetensts Womersley, 1934,

This species is widely clistvibuted in South Australia, and | have vecords of

i trom Morialta Gorge, September 2ud, 19384; Mount Osmond, June LOth, 1954;
Mylor, September Tdth, 1985; Mount Conipass, June 7th, 1985; National Park,
Belair, May 6th, 1985, July 19th, 1936, July 4th, 1987; Adelaide, May 11th, 1936;
Mount Lofty, May, 1937.

88 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Microtrompipium (M.) amquauis (Banks, 1916).

As stated in my previous paper, the type of this species appears to have become
lost, but a second record from Western Australia was given.

MicrotrompBipium (M.) NewMaAni Womersley, 1934.

Only known from the type record of Bedford-dale, Western Australia.

MicrorromsBipium (M.) Arrine Hirst, 1928.

This species is fairly common in and around the Adelaide district of South
Australia.

Microtrompipium (M.) aApELAIDIcCUM Womersley, 1934.

Not uncommon around Adelaide, South Australia.

Microrrompipium (M.) MYLORIENSE sp. nov.

(Text fig. 1, e-g).

Description. Length 1:91 mm., width 1-335 mm. Colour reddish. Abdomen
ovate, with moderately rounded shoulders, thorax small 550% wide; eyes 2 + 2,
sessile, placed on lateral edge of thorax; crista short, 300u long, sensillary area
broad with two pseudostigmal hairs, anterior arm of crista two-thirds as wide as
sensillary area. No nasus. Palpal tibia with strong apical claw and accessory
claw, laterally a strong forwardly projecting spine and on outer side of tibia with
a number of strong spines; tarsus slightly clavate, reaching tip of claw. Legs
shorter than body, I 1600,, tarsus I with almost parallel sides, 415 by 135, meta-
tarsus 235 long. Body hairs slightly variable in length, 25—50u, pointed with
long hairlets but in some of the longer ones the apical hairlets tend to cling giving
a brush-like appearance.

Locality. Two specimens from under a stone along Cox Creek, Mylor, South
Australia, September 26, 1937.

MicrorrompBipium (M.) TASMANICUM sp. nov.
(Text fig. 1, k-n).

Description. Length 2-0 mm. Colour reddish. Abdomen ovate without
distinet shoulders, 1-2 mm. wide, thorax 600 wide without nasus. Eyes 2 + 2,
sessile, placed on anterior margins of thorax; crista 430 long with posterior sen-
sillary area and two pseudostigmal hairs. Palpal tibia with strong apical and

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 89

accessory claws and on outer side with some strong setae, apparently without
lateral forwardly directed spine; tarsus not clavate, reaching tip of claw. Legs
shorter than body; tarsus 1 450. by 270u, elliptical, broadest before the middle,
metatarsus 300» long. Dorsal body hairs uniform, with strong lateral hairlets, but
not forming a distinct apical taper; length of hairs 30-35p.

Locality. Two specimens collected by Mr. J. W. Evans on Mount Wellington,
Tasmania, October, 1935,

Wig, 1. acd. Culothrombium tubbi sp, noy,; a, anterior end showing eyes and erista; b, tip
of palp; ¢, front tarsus anil metatarsus; d, dorsal seta. e-g, Microtrombidium (M.) myloriense
sp. nov.; ¢, tip of pulp; f, front tarsus and metatarsus; g, dorsal seta. lj, Hnemothrombiunm
cvansi sp. noy.; h, tip of palp; i, front tarsus and metatarsus; j, dorsal seta. k-u, Microtron-
bidium CAL) tasmanicun sp. nov.; k, eaterior end showing eyes and crista; |, tip of palp; m, front.
tarsus and metatarsus; n, dorsal seta,

Genus EouinoruROMBIUM nov.

As in Microtrombidiwin s. str. but all or some of the body hairs long stronz
aud spine-like with relatively few or no short serrations.

The type of the genus is Olfouty spinoswm Canestvini 1877, and other species
are M. cehidninwn Uirst, 1991 (= MM. wicleriense Womersley, 1954) ; AL. spina-
tun Womersley, 1934; O. hystricinum Canestrini; diverstpile Canestrini; JM.
southealli Womersley, 1934; M. willangae Hirst, 1931.

Of these spindhon, echidninum, southeottd and willungae are Australian,
spinoswin is Kuropean while hystriedumn and diversipiie are known from New
(ruinea.

90 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Key To THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ECHINOTHROMBIUM.

1. All the dorsal spines variable in length but uniform and spinelike with short
serrations. Tarsus | 270 by 135y, elliptical, metatarsus 190, long. Palpal
tarsus clavate, tibia with terminal and accessory claw and two spines.

E. spinatum (Wom., 1934).
Dorsal spines interspersed with different setae, short, smaller, with long hair-
lets “4 oa a0 hc we oe é fe

2. Dorsal spines sparsely and minutely serrated, tapering apically, 200-230.
long; smaller setae 25, pointed with comparatively long hairlets. Tarsus I
32 times as long as high, sides almost parallel. E. echidninum (Hirst, 1931).

= victoriense (Wom., 1934).
Dorsal spines not much more than 100, long; shorter setae not so pointed, wit

relatively shorter hairlets. Front tarsus elliptical. Species smaller vars.
3. Front tarsus twice as long as high .. .. . southcotti (Wom., 1934).
Front tarsus three times as long as high ve L, willungae (Hirst, 1931).

ECHIDNINUM sPINAtuM (Womersley, 1934).

The type of this species was collected at Glen Osmond, South Australia.

ECHINOTHROMBIUM ECHIDNINUM (Hirst, 1931).
= M. echidninum Hirst, 1931.
M.(E.) victoriensis Womersley, 1934.
This is one of the most abundant Trombid mites in South Australia. It is
undoubtedly synonymous with my species M.(E.) victoriensis.

EcCHINOTHROMBIUM souTHcortr (Womersley, 1934).
= M.(E.) southcotti Womersley, 1934.

Described from material from Belair, South Australia.

Genus PLATYTHROMBIDIUM Sig Thor, 1936.

To this genus belongs the single Australian species.

PLATYTHROMBIDIUM PARANUM (Hirst, 1928).
= Microtrombidium paranum Hirst 1928, Womersley 1934.

This species is only known from the type material from Gawler, South
Australia.

Genus LAMINOTHROMBIUM nov.

Dorsal body hairs leaf-like with strong midrib and marginal ciliations. Front

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 91

tarsi elliptical, width more than half the length. Palpal tibia with strong apical
and accessory claws.
The type and only species of this genus is

LAMINOTHROMBIUM MyRMIcUM (Womersley, 1934).

= MM. myrmicum Womersley, 1934.

Described from material from the nest of ants in South Australia.

Genus EnemoturompiuM Berlese, 1905, s. str.
As restricted in the generie key this genus will include the two following
species :
HNEMOTHROMBIUM CYGNUS Womersley, 1936.
= M.(L.) cygnus Womersley, 1936.
Deseribed from a single specimen from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island,
South Australia.

ENEMOTHROMBIUM BYANSI Sp. nov.

(Text fig. 1 h-j).

Description, Length 1-1 mm., width 0-7 mm. Colour in life reddish. Eyes
2-+ 2, sessile and placed on anterior margin of thorax, Crista 160 long, well
developed with posterior seusillary area and two pseudostigimal hairs. Palpal
tibia with strong apical and subapical accessory claws, dorsally with a series of
strong spines running right to base and laterally and twardly with another
shorter series. Legs shorter than body; tarsus | elliptical 1764 by 100.2, widest in
middle, metatarsus 954 long. Dorsal body hairs of approximately uniform length,
sessile, cylindrical, with blunt apex and with longitudinal lines of fine serrations.

Locality. The type of this species was found by Max. J. W. Evans in a rotten
log on Mount Wellington, Tasmania, in May, 1935, A second specimen was from
moss from Brisbane, Queensland, in October, 1934, and a third from Fern Tree
Gully, Vietoria, in January, 1937.

Genus CAMBROTHROMBIUM Sig Thor, 1936.
g

Sig Thor places in this genus the following Australian species: £7. simile Lirst,
FE. collinwm Wirst and £. hirsti Womersley. To them should be added &. wyandrue
Hirst. These four species may be separated as follows:

1, Sialler dorsal hairs cup-shaped with minute denticles . uy +, 72,
Smaller dorsal hairs otherwise se se ny , pe ~B.

92 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

bo

Larger dorsal hairs with stem suddenly expanding to form cup. Tarsus I
three and a half times as long as high M3 C. simile (Hirst, 1928).

Larger dorsal hairs with stem gradually expanding to form cup. Tarsus I
less than 3 times as long as high =... Sy C. hirsti (Wom., 1934).

3. Smaller dorsal hairs very irregular, with small lateral fungiform lobes. Tarsus
I more than 4 times as long as high .. .. C. wyandrae (Hirst, 1928).

Smaller dorsal hairs more regular, rod-like. Tarsus I more than 3 times as
long as high pe a Ae af C. collunum (Hirst, 1928).

CAMEROTHROMBIUM SIMILE (Hirst, 1928).

= M.(E.) simile Hirst, 1928.
= M.(E.) simile Womersley, 1934.

This species is fairly widely distributed in South Australia.
CAMEROTHROMBIUM Hirst1 (Womersley, 1934).

= M.(E.) hirstt Womersley, 1934.
As yet known from the type material only.

CAMEROTHROMBIUM WYANDRAE (Hirst, 1928).
= M. wyandrae Hirst, 1928.

Only known from the type material.

CAMEROTHROMBIUM COLLINUM (Hirst, 1928).

= M. collinum Hirst, 1928.

There are no further records beyond that of the type material.

Genus EKuTrRICHOTHROMBIUM nov.

Dorsal body hairs globular, on peduncles, without septa and interspersed with
fine longer needle-like setae; globular hairs finely ciliated. Palpal tibia without
true accessory claw but with a few dorsal setae and with a strong inner lateral for-
wardly directed spine. Tarsi elliptical.

This new genus is erected for the Javanese species H. eutrichwm Berlese, 1903.
?

Subfamily VIII, Tromsipiwar Michael, 1883 (part), Sig Thor, 1936.

Body large or very large, triangular or cordate, thickly covered with elongate
or clavate or ciliated or feathered hairs, generally reddish. No nasus. Eyes
paired on long peduncles. Crista with sensillary area and two pseudostigmal

WoOMERSLEY—-AUSTRALIAN MITES 93

hairs; sometimes the crista is tripartite, usually entire, always narrow. Palpi
large; tarsus long and clavate, tibia simple with apical claw but no accessory claw
or comb. Legs short and thick, tarsi without pulvill1.

Included here ure the genera Trombidium Fab. 1775 (= NSericothrombium
Berlese, 1910) ; Dinothrombiwmn Oudemans, 1910 (= Trombidium Berlese, 1905) ;
Yenothrombium Oudemans, 1927: Caenolhrombinm Oudemans, 1927; and Austro-
thrombium Womersley, 1984. They may he keyed thns:

1. Crista divided into three parts, with broad sensillary area, anterior arnt ending
in a broacl rectangular plate in whieh the front marein is straight or only
slightly eoneave. Gen. Dinothrombiam Ondemans, 1910 (not Australian).

Crista entire i. tt ee .- . + ilies

2. Crista with the seusillary area medial, anterior arm simple aha not ending in
a plate .. wa .. Gen, Venathrombiam Ondemans, 1927.

Crista with the sohailavy area anterior of middle aD Ay ote AE

2 Body bairs claviform ov brnsh-like; apex of abdomen incised,

Gen, Trambidinn Bab,, 1775.
(Laryae with two dorsal plates, front plate with 3 pairs of setae and 2 psendo-
stigmal hairs. Claw of maxillary palp bifureate. Median dorsal plate trans-
verse; front plate folding below to venter. Mouth-parts not visible from
above, lower lip ring-like, Leg TYT with deformed inner claw.)
Not so; crista anteriorly with a broad transyerse plate . . mw 4

4. Anterior plate of erista very deeply cleft, so as to appear fork-like,
Gen, Austrathromhinn Womersley, 1934.

Anterior plate of erista with straight or only shghtly concave front marein,
Cen. Caenothrombium Oudemans, 1927.

Genus Xeno turRomMetnM Oudemans, 1927.

Only represented in Australia by the following recently ciscovered species,

XENOTHROMEIUM HIRSUTUM sp. NOV,
(Text fie. 2 e-7.)

Description. Length to 3-0 mm., width 1-5 mm., with a distinet constriction
behind the shoulders. Colour bright red. Crista well developed with the sen-
sillary area anterior of the middle, anterior arm simple and not ending in a
transverse plate. Eyes 2 + 2, peduneculate. Palpi as figured, tarsus long, clavate,
and reaching tip of elaw. legs shorter than body, strong; tarsus [ 654» by 211)p,
more or less with parallel sides, metatarsus 480. Body thickly clothed with very
long ciliated hairs, mostly up to 8300p long and red, but some up to 7-800u and
white (ef. fig. 2j).

94 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Locality. This species has so far been found only at the National Park, Belair,
South Australia, 1936 and since. It is moderately common under stones and fallen
branches.

Genus CAENOTHROMBIUM Oudemans, 1927,

This seems to be the dominant genus in South Australia, no fewer than ten
species having been described to date.

N72 (3

5555555

Fig. 2. a-d, Caenothrombium furcatum sp. nov.; a, erista and eyes; b, palp; ¢, front tarsus
and metatarsus with claws enlarged; d, dorsal seta. e—j, Xenothrombium hirsutum sp. nov.;
e, dorsal view; f, crista; g, front tarsus and metatarsus; h, palp; i, shorter dorsal seta; j, longer
dorsal seta.

Key TO THE SPECIES.

1, Anterior two pairs of legs with bifureate, occasionally trifureate, claws; pos-
terior two pairs with simple claws. Tarsus I nearly 4 times as lone as high,
with parallel sides; metatarsus # length of tarsus. Dorsal hairs 70p long,
pointed, with long hairlets . es a5 .. C. furcatum, sp. nov.

All tarsal claws simple .. & is oe ns 332:
2. Dorsal body hairs of two sizes. Front tarsus 3 times as lone as high, 425, lone.
C. montivagum (Hirst, 1928).

= rainbow (Hirst, 1929).
Dorsal body hairs more uniform od . we

3. Front tarsus very elongate, about 7 times as ‘tone as high. Length of animal
2-4 mm. = an 7 C. augustae (Hir st, 1928).

Front tarsus much shorter, not sxvoading 4% times as long as high J OA,

4. Front and hind legs much longer than body. Front tarsus 44 times as long
as high, 780 by 175. A large well defined white patch on each shoulder and
another at apex of abdomen ! i C. album Womersley, 1934.

Front and hind legs scarcely exuceding length of body .. es pant Ds

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 95

4. Species not exceeding 4-0 mm. in length

a

Species more than 4-0 mm, long os Mi 3 : f

fi, Front tarsus 444 times as long as high. Dorsal body hairs 60-90, lone,
slender, tapering with long hairlets a C. farridwm (Wirst, 1928).
= taylori (Hirst, 1928).

Front tarsus almost 4 times as long as high. Dorsal body hairs stont, blint

and strongly ciliated, 60« long ir .. ©. miniatum Womersley, 1934.
Front tarsus 24 times as long as high, Body hairs fairly stout and reaching
60. in leneth .. 2 ok .. OC. nyunganense (Hirst, 1928),

7. Posterior dorsal hairs short and stout, parallel sided, with short hairlets, often
slightly swollen distally, 50-604 long and slightly eurved. Front tarsus 44
times as long as high a. * .. Cy sericatum (Rainbow, 1906).

= splendidum. (Tirst, 1928).
= ventricosum (Tlirst, 1928).

Posterior hody hairs longer and straighter, 75p long, more tapering and never
swollen distally. Front tarsus 3 times as long as high.
C. crassum (Hirst, 1928),

Posterior body hairs longer still, 1504, slightly curved, more tapering and
delicate 3 Ha ic C. nobile (Tirst, 1928),

CAENOTHROMBIUM FURCATUM sp. nov.
(Text fie. 2a-d.)

Description, Length to 1-73 mm., width 1-0 mm. Colour light red with a
tendency to white patches or bands behind the shoulders. Crista well developed
with a broad sensillary area antero-medially and with two pseudostiemal hairs:
anterior plate of crista with slightly concave front margin. Eyes 2 + 2, on lone
peduncles, posterior eve the smaller, Front tarsus 397, by 110, metatarsus 318,.
Tarsi of legs I and TT with bifwreated claws occasionally one or other claw trifur-
cate; claws of legs IIT and TV simple. Leg I 1-53 mm., 11 1-21 mm., [11 1-10 mm.,
IV 1-69 mm. Palpal tibia with long strong apical claw; tarsus long and clavate.
Dorsal body hairs arising from short conical tubercles, 70. long, tapering to a
point and with long strong hairlets.

Locality. Three specimens from a small paddock at Wood’s Point, South
Australia, Oelober 24th, 1935 (H.W.).

CAENOTHROMBIUM MONTIVAGIM (Tlirst, 1928).
= Microtrombidium montivaqum Hirst, 1928.
Dinothrombinm montivagum Hirst, 1929,
Pinothrombium rainbour Hirst, 1929.
Cornothrombium montivaguin Womersley, 1934.

There are no fresh records for this species,

96 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

CAENOTHROMBIUM AUGUSTAE (Hirst, 1928).
= Dinothrombium augustae Hirst, 1928.
Caenothrombium augustae Womersley, 1934.

This species is fairly widely distributed in the southern parts of South
Australia.

CAENOTHROMBIUM ALBUM Womersley, 1934.

Also a fairly widely distributed species.

CAENOTHROMBIUM TORRIDUM (Hirst, 1929).

= Dinothrombium torridum Hirst, 1929.
Dinothrombium taylori Hirst 1929.
Caenothrombium torridum Womersley, 1934.

This appears to be rather an uncommon species in the southern part of South
Australia.

CAENOTHROMBIUM MINIATUM Womersley, 1934.

Not uncommon around the Adelaide district.

CAENOTHROMBIUM NYNGANENSE (Hirst, 1928).
= Dinothrombium nynganense Hirst, 1928.
Caenothrombium nynganense Womersley, 1934.

Common and widely distributed in South Australia; it also occurs in New
South Wales.

CAENOTHROMBIUM cRASSUM (Hirst, 1928).

= Dinothrombium crassum Hirst, 1928.
Caenothrombium crassum Womersley, 1934.

Only known from previously published records.

CAENOTHROMBIUM SERICATUM (Rainbow, 1906).

= Trombidium sericatum Rainbow, 1906.
Dinothrombium splendidum Hirst, 1928.
Dinothrombium ventricosum Hirst, 1928.
Caenothrombium sericatum Womersley, 1934.

T have no further records of this species to add to those already published.

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 97

CAENOTHROMBIUM NOBILE (Ehirst, 1928).
= Dinothvombium nobile Hirst, 1928.
Caenothrombium nabile Womersley, 1934.

No additional records.

Genus AustrotHrompium Womersley, 1934.
Of this genus the three following species only are known from Australia :
AUSTROTHROMPIUM AUSTRALIENSE (Hirst, 1929).
=Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) wustraliense Tirst, 1929.
slustrothrombium australtiense Womersley, 1934,

There are no further specimens to be recorded.

AUSTROTHROMBIUM INSIGNE (Hirst, 1928).
= Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) insiqne TWirst, 1928,
Austrothrombium imsigne Womersley, 1934,

T know of no further specimens of this species,

AvUsTROTHROMBIUM KONDINTUM (Hirst, 1928).

= Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) antipodianum v. kondinium Virst, 1928.
Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) kondiniwm Hirst, 1929,
Austrathrombium kondiniwm Womersley, 1934.

Only known from the previously published records.

Genus Trompipium Fab., 1775.

No adult species of this genus has yet been found in Australia, but the follow-
ing larval form has recently been discovered by the writer.

TROMBIDIUM CLARKT Sp. noy.
(Text fig. 3a-f.)

Description, Length 2-3 mm., width 1-5 mm, Colour red. Month parts
not visible from above, lower lip forming a chitinous ring. Anterior dorsal plate
only slighlty showing on the dorsal surface, mostly veniral, 175p wide posteriorly
and 112 anteriorly, finely and longitudinally striate, with three pairs of hairs
and one pair of long fine pseudostigmal hairs. Posterior plate wide and short,
142y by 50p, longitudinally striated with two hairs, 4 times its own length from

98 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the anterior plate. Eyes small, 2-2. Dorsal body hairs short, fine with few
ciliations and sparse, in 5 rows of 2, 4, 4, 4, 2. Legs: anterior pairs of coxae
adjacent, tarsi with three claws, front two pairs with the middle claw long and
slender, lateral claws stouter, shorter and subapically trifurcate; inner claw on
leg III modified, stump-like and directed backwards, outer claw spine-like with
long hairlets, middle one short and sickle shaped. Venter with three pairs of
hairs behind third legs.

Fig. 3.
c, entire dorsal view; d, front claws; e, posterior claws; f, dorsal seta.

a-f, Trombidium clarki sp. nov.; a, anterior half from above; b, same from below;

Locality. Several specimens taken from an Anthomyid fly at Fern Tree
Gully, Victoria, in January, 1937. It is named in honour of Mr. J. Clark, Entomo-
logist 10 the National Museum, Melbourne.

Subfamily 1X, AtLorHrompiinak Sig Thor, 1936.

Body larger, with strong shoulders, rounded, with bristle-like feathered,
seldom fureate hairs, Hyes 2 + 2 on long peduncles. Crista distinctly tripartite,

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 99

with large broad, cross- or heart-shaped sensillary area which is placed on or in
front of the middle; sensillary area with two pseudostigmal hairs. Palpi large,
with large apical claw but without accessory claw or comb of spines. Legs short
or moderately long, tarsi with characteristic pulvilli or on the onter side of each
claw with a brush-like bristle (in Coreothrothrombwum).

The two genera Allothrombiwm Berlese 1908 and Coreothrothrombium Oude-
mans 1928, are placed in this subfamily. Only the first of these is known from
Australia.

Key vo tHe AusgTRALIAN Specius or ALLOTHROMBIUM.

1. Up to 1-2 mm, in length, sparse haired; form rather elongate and much con-
stricted behind shoulders. Body hairs uniform aud with few long secondary

hairlets a he 4 A, delicatulum Womersley, 1954.
Large species... a Fr oe én 2% a 2,

2. Dorsum with a distinct pattern of red and white. Some of the body hairs very
much elongated F wie m; A, guitatum Hirst, 1928.
= ornatum Hirst, 1928,

Colour entirely red er, a: #, ake ba va) By

3. Body hairs uniform, short, plumose. Front tarsus twice as long as high.
A, toyend poe Hirst, 1928.

Body hairs of two distinct types... oo OA
4, Longer body hairs more clavate apically, axial thread fiifehiee shorter hairs
more tapering apically... Y: a OAL antipodianum Hirst, 1926.

=v. olorinum Hirst, 1926.

parvulum Tirst, 1929.

? wasselt Hirst, 1931.

Lonver body hairs less clavate apically, the hairlets longer near the base, stall
apparently shorter; short hairs not tapering apieally.

A, lerrae-reginae Hirst, 1929.

ALLOTHROMBIUM DELICATULUM Womersley, 1934.

This small species is moderately abundant, under loose stones, fallen branches
and even on tree trunks in the National Park, Belair, South Australia.

ALLOTHROMBIUM GUTTATUM Hirst, 1928.

= Allothrombium guttaudum Hirst, 1928,
Allothrombium ornatwm TWirst, 1928,
Allothrombium quttatum Womersley, 1934.

T have no further records of this species since my earlier papers.

100 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ALLOTHROMBIUM ANTIPODIANUM Hirst, 1926.

= Allothrombium antipodianum Hirst, 1926.
Allothrombium antipodianum v. olorinum Hirst, 1926.
Allothrombium parvulum Hirst, 1929.

Allothrombium ? wasseli Hirst, 1931.

Allothrombium antipodianum Womersley, 1934.

I have no further records of this species. The species A. wasseli described
posthumously by Hirst appears to be identical with the above form as far as one
can judge by the description, the accompanying drawings of which were lost after
Hirst’s death.

ALLOTHROMBIUM TERRAE-REGINAE Hirst, 1929.

There is nothing further to add to the previously published data on this
species.
ALLOTHROMBIUM WYANDRAE Hirst, 1928.

Only known from the type material from Mount Kosciusko, N.S.W.

Subfamily X, SrycorHRomBiNaE Sig Thor, 1936.

Body small, elongate, worm-like, swollen dorsally, with only small rudimen-
tary hairs. Cuticle thin, striated, with low papillae. Crista similarly rudimen-
tary, narrow, anteriorly with weak areola which, near the two sensory hairs, has
4 or 5 fine hairs. Rostrum outstanding, behind flask-like, in front spoon-like, with
two bristles. Mandibles long and narrow with stylet-like claw. Palpal segments
weakly differentiated, fourth segment can be distinguished with the reduced fifth
attached ; segment II has 2 thorns and 6 long hairs, III 3 thorns and some hairs,
IV with a few hairs and a long thin end claw (no accessory claw). Legs with 3
claws, the lateral combed. Species living in water.

This subfamily is entirely unknown in Australia. It includes only the genus
Stygothrombium Veitz, 1932, and its subgenus Cerberothrombium Veitz, 1934.

EGGS AND EGG CASES OF SOME SOUTHERN
AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, CONCHOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary
Melo Miltonis Gray.

The South Australian Museum is indebted to the Director of the Western Australian
Museum (Mr. W. L. Glauert) for the opportunity of examining the egg capsule of the
Southern Australian Baler Shell, Melo miltonis Gray, and a series of seven juvenile
shells from Cottesloe, Western Australia.

The egg capsule is cylindrical, 165 mm. long, 75 mm. in diameter and contains 47
protoconchs. The protoconchs average 26 mm. in length and 16.5 mm. in greatest
width; they consist of four whorls, axially crinkled and finely, obsoletely, spirally
ribbed subsuturally. The last 3.5 mm. of the outer lip has the typical triangular white
blotches on the light brown ground, while the rest of the protoconch is uniformly
cream coloured. In an adult specimen, 10 mm. of the protoconch rises above the shell.

EGGS anp EGG CASES or SOME SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN
MOLLUSCA

By BERNARD C, COTTON, Concuonncisr, Souwrn Austrataan Musrum.

Plate iy.

Meno minronts Gray.

Tue South Australian Museum is indebted to the Director of the Western Aus-
tralian Museum (Mr. W. L. Glauert) for the opportunity of examining the ege
capsule of the Southern Australian Baler Shell, Melo maltonis Gray, and a series
of seven juvenile shells from Cottesloe, Western Australia.

The ege capsule is cylindrical, 165 mm, long, 75 mm. in diameter and contains
47 protoconchs. The protoconchs average 26 mm. in length and 16-5 mm, in
greatest width ; they consist of four whorls, axially crinkled and finely, obsoletely,
spirally ribbed subsuturally. The last 3-5 mm. of the outer lip has the typical
triangular white blotches on the light brown ground, while the rest of the proto-
conch is uniformly cream coloured. In an adult specimen, 10 mm, of the proto-
vonech rises above the shell.

The protoconch of a common Queensland species, Melo flammeum Bolten,
measures 19 mm. in length and 13 mm. in ereatest width; an adult is half as bie
again asthe fully grown Melo milionis. There does not appear to be the subsutural
crinkling in the protoconch of Melo flammeum.

COMINELLA ADELAIDENSIS Grosse.

The type locality of the species is ‘Port Adelaide’’. This species or variety
is one of the Cominella lineolata group, very nearly allied, if not synonymous with
Cominella acutinodosa Reeve (type locality, South Australia), At the Outer
Harbour there is an isolated group of stones in the middle of a vast sand and mud
flat where Cominella adelaidensis is found in plenty, being the dominant molluscan
species.

The ege capsules are laid from the bezinning to the end of September, and all
appear to be hatched by the end of October. The egg capsules are acuminate
blunt at the point, slightly expanded at the base and attached individually in
irregular groups or lines folowing the depressions or cracks on the under surface
of the stones. Height 8 mm., width 4 mm,

102 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

User contcum Lamarck.

The collar-like egg nidi of this species are found in great numbers in spring
time after storms, and are flexible when wet and extremely brittle after drying.
Levens Beach, Yorke Peninsula and Holdfast Bay are two places where these
egg nidi are particularly common. Specimens usually range from 100-150 mm. in
diameter; smaller specimens are sometimes found, probably incomplete, only 59
mm. in diameter or less.

HAPLOCHLOAENA MACULOSA Hoyle.

This small ‘‘Octopus”’ is frequently found in Pinna dolabrata Lamarck, and
under rocky ledges at low tide in shallow water.

The eggs are attached individually by a delicate thin stalk to any convenient
sheltered surface. Those figured are attached to the inner surface of a dead valve
of the Port Lincoln Oyster (Ostrea sinuata Lamarck) colleeted at Dutton Bay by
the Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Mr. F. W. Moorhouse, in April, 1937.

The eggs are club-shaped, smooth, shining, and are attached in clusters by
their respective thin stalks. The cluster on the oyster contained about fifty eggs.
Measurements are as follows: Length of flask, 17 mm.; width, 6 mm.; stalk length,
5 mm.; width, 0-5 mm.

The female of this species broods over the eggs apparently syringing them
from the funnel.

During a collecting trip with Messrs. H. M. Hale, Leo Stach and K. Sheard, a
small adult female was taken at the Port Willunga Reef in shallow water. Evi-
dently disturbed in the act of brooding the specimen swam away dragging some
of the ova with her, and these were retained after capture. Some of the eggs on
the point of hatching were collected and placed in a bowl! of sea water, others not
secured hatched and the young were seen swimming in the rock pool.

Sixty-three young hatched out in the bowl; all consistently swam to the
shaded side, as did also the parent who adopted the inverted brooding attitude,
actually covering some of the young while clinging to the surface of the dish.

The funnel is proportionately larger in the juvenile, but the colour pattern is
similar in scheme to that of the adult, consisting of bluish bands on a cream
ground, the bands being regular and transverse on the arms, oblique and irregular
on the body. The average measurements of the newly-hatched young are as
follows: Total length, 11 mm.; length of body, 5 mm.; width of body 3-8 mm.;
length of funnel, 2 mm.; length of arms, 6 mm.

It is surprising to learn that in Robson’s Monograph of Recent Peleeypoda the
egos sizes of only nine Octopi are listed, probably the only available records.

CoTTON—EGGS OF SOME MOLLUSCA 103

Ova are best preserved in weak formalin as aleohol, even if diluted, shrinks
them hopelessly.

AMPLISEPIA APAMA Gray.

Thirty eggs of this species were taken on the beach of St. Vincent Gulf, he-
tween Glenelg and Henley Beach, in October, 1982, after a storm. A few speci-
mens placed in sea-water developed far enough to confirm the identification of the
species. The specimen figured measures 60 mm. in total length, the flask being
32 mm. long and 21 mm. wide. Further specimens were taken at Brighton in
November, 1933, so that October and November can be definitely cited as the
breeding months.

SEPIOTEUTHIS AUSTRALIS Quoy and Gainard.
’

Bunches of ege@ nidi of this species were cast ashore in large numbers after
the above-mentioned storm of October, 1932. They are particularly common on
the beach during early spring.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV.

Cominella acutinodosa Crosse, single egg capsule, lateral view (X 6).
Cominella acutinodosa Crosse, single ege capsule, top view (X 6).

Fominella acutinodosa Crosse, group of egg capsules (> 1-25).

|

-_—
Fh Ee
ie oo; No

Amplisepia apama Gray, single egg (nat. size).

Fig. 5. Melo miltonis Gray, ege capsule (< 0-6).

Fig. 6. Melo miltonis Gray, protoconch showing commencement of colourations
(xX 1-6).

Fig. 7. Melo miltonis Gray, protoconch showing aperture (X 1-6).

Fig. 8. Haplochlaena maculosa Hoyle, eggs attached to Ostrea sinuata Lamarck

(X 0:6).

Rec. S.A, Muskum Vou. VI, PLATE. LV.

6 7

MOLLUSCAN BEGGS AND EGG CAPSULES.

Je

A NOTE ON THE OCCURRENCE OF RHABDOPLEURA
ANNULATA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS

By PROFESSOR T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE

Summary

The only published reference to the presence of Rhabdopleura in Australian waters is
that of Harmer (1904, p. 23) who found in South Australian material a fragment
which he did not determine specifically. Norman (1921, p.98) described R. annulata
from localities close to the Three Kings, a group of islands lying to the north of New
Zealand. His material consisted of coenoecia found on stones and on a shell dredged
from depth of 183 and 549 metres.

A NOTE on Toe OCCURRENCE or RHABDOPLEURA
ANNULATA tw SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS

By Proressor T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, Universiry of AveLAve.

Tu only published reference (0 the presence of Mhabdopleura iu Australian
waters is that of Harmer (1904, p. 23) who found in South Australian material a
fragment which he did not determine specifically. Norman (1921, p. 98) deseribed
K. annulata from localities close to the Three ings, a group of islands lying to the
worth of New Zealand. His material consisted of coenoecia found on stones and
ona shell dredged from depth of 185 and 549 retres.

In an aceount which has for some years been awaiting publication in the
Reports of the Australasian Antaretic Expedition of 1911-1914, the present. anthor
has recorded the finding of fragments amougst the debris from a dredging in 64
fathoms off Maria Island on the east coast of Tasmania. Mention is also mace in
that report of the oecurrence of the same species, identified as A. annuata, at bwo
collecting stations (Nos. 113 and 114) of the British, Australian aud New Zealand
Antarctic Researeh Expedition of 1929-1931, both localities beinw off ihe eastern
coast of Tasmania, viz.: (1) 42° 40° 5, 148° 27-5" HB, in 122 aetres, as well as iu
15910178 metres; and (2) -H" U8? 8, 148° 42° HK, i 128 metres, The latter locality
is close to the entrance to Banks Strait.

In the report just mentioned, it was suggested that Harmer’s material which
was not definitely localized, wight have been deteeted in dredgines taken from
South Australian waters by the late Sir Joseph Verco who, we know, forwarded
his collection of Polyzoa to that investigator for identification. The continental
shelf in the vicinity of Kangaroo Island was suggested as a possible locality because
of the depth. A mass of Polyzoa taken by Verco from various localities off our
soulbern coast is at present in tbe collection of Lhe South Australian Museum, and
this was examined macroscopically in 1956 at my request by B.C. Cotton and by
L. Stach, the latter being especially engaged in a study of the group. My own ex-
alination was only a enrsory one, As u result of these searches, no trace of the
characteristic peristomial tubes or peclocaulus was recoehized,

lu May of the present year, scrapings of the material adherent to the under
surface of rocks at, or just below, low spring tide marl at Port Willunga Reef were
examined for their content of lower invertebrate life and, quite unexpectedly, a
fairly lang, well preserved coenoecium of R. annulata was found. The specimen
was probably not taken im situ and no doubt was washed up trom deeper water in

106 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the vicinity as a result of storm action. The locality is open to the influence of
south-westerly gales, so that it is possible that the tube may have been carried
from the sea floor of Investigator Strait, whose depth varies from 60 to 70 fathoms
between the end of Eyre’s Peninsula and the western part of Kangaroo Island, but
diminishes to 12 to 17 fathoms between the island and Yorke’s Peninsula. The
adjacent part of St. Vincent’s Gulf varies from about 20 to 12 fathoms, shallowing
rapidly close to the coast in the vicinity of Port Willunga.

As Harmer’s article was published in 1904, his specimen must have been
taken either in that year, or more probably earlier. Vereo had been engaged in
dredging prior to that date, but he stated (1935 Edit. Cotton) that, prior to Janu-
ary 1905, he had never dredged in depths greater than 35 fathoms.

The Port Willunga specimen, on which numerous minute filamentous algae
were growing, is 2°53 mm. long and 0-265 mm. broad, the internal diameter of the
tube being 0-19-0-192 mm. The maximum thickness of the wall at the projecting
portion of each ring is 0:02-0:025 mm. The rings resemble closely those figured
by Norman and are 0-042—0-045 mm, apart. The length of the fragment is much
ereater than in those illustrated by Norman who noted, however, that such was
variable, and reminded one of those of R. norman Allman. The projecting rim
and other features agree completely with Norman’s figures. It is to be remarked
that R. normuni is a very widely distributed species, occurring off Greenland, the
Shetland Islands, the coast of Norway, and in the South Atlantic off Tristan
da Cunha where it was taken by the ‘‘Challenger’’, The known depths for that
species range from 5 metres (according to Schepotieff) to 500 metres. Broch
(1927, p. 468) recorded briefly the finding of fragments of R. normani by the
‘‘Gauss’’ in the Antarctic at 66° 02’ 8, 89° 38’ EH, in 350 metres, but since he con-
sidered that there was only one valid species (FR. norman), and as he did not figure
his specimen, its relation to R. annulata is not known. A specimen taken by the
‘*Siboga’’ in the Hast Indies, south-westerly from Celebes, in 75 to 94 metres and
described by Harmer (1905, 127, Text fig. 2) as Rhabdoplewra sp., was assigned by
Norman (1921, 101) to R. annulata.

The present note extends greatly the known range of the species, which now
includes the seas off the northern part of New Zealand, the east coast of Tasmania
from Maria Island to Banks Strait, and the region in the vicinity of the entrance
to St. Vincent’s Gulf in South Australia.

JOHNSTON—RHABDOPLEURA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS 107

REFERENCES.

Broch, H. (1927) : Die Pterobranchier, Rhabdopleura. Deutsche Siidpolar Exped.,
19 (Zool. 11), 468.

Harmer, 8S. F. (1904) : Hemichordata. Cambr. Nat. Hist., 7, 21-82.

Harmer, 8. F. (1905) : The Pterobranchia of the ‘‘Siboga’’ Expedition. Siboga-
Expeditie. Monogr. 26 bis, 132, pp.

Johnston, T. H. (1911-1914) : Rhabdopleura. Rep. Austr. Antarct. Exp., Ser. C,
3 (4), in press.

Norman, J. R. (1921) : Brit. Antaret. (‘‘Terra Nova’’) Exp., Nat. Hist. Rep. Zool.,
4 (4), 95-102.

Verco, Sir J. (1935): Combing the Southern Seas. (Edit. by B. ©. Cotton),
Adelaide.

OBITUARY OF JOHN SUTTON

By HERBERT M. HALE, DIRECTOR AND
H. CONDON, ASSISTANT IN ZOOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Mr. John Sutton, who succeeded the late Dr. A. M. Morgan as Honorary Ornithologist
at the South Australian Museum, died on November 22™, 1938, after a short illness.
Mr. Sutton was a Victorian; he was born at Castlemaine on March 25", 1866, and his
early years were spent at Bendigo. He was a banker by profession, at one time being
acting Manager of the National Bank in Adelaide, and later Inspector at Melbourne.
On his retirement from the bank in 1917, Mr. Sutton returned to this State and acted
as lecturer in Banking at the University of Adelaide. He was a member of the Institute
of Bankers.

OBITUARY or Joun Sutton

By HERBERT M. HALE, Direcror, ann

H. CONDON, Assisrawr ix Zoonocy, Sourmn Ausrrantan Museum,

Mr, Jomn Suvron, who sueceeded the late Dr. A. M. Morgan as Honorary Or-
nithologist at the South Australian Museum, died on November 22nd, 1938, after
a short illness. Mr, Sutton was a Victorian; he was born at Castlemaine on March
25th, 1866, aud his early years were spent at Bendigo. He was a banker by
profession, at one time being acting Manager of the National Bank in Adelaide,
and later Inspector at Melbourne. On his retirement from the bank in 1917, Mr.
Sutton returned to this State and aeted as lecturer in Banking at the University
of Adelaide. He was a member of the Institute of Bankers.

At the age of 53, Mr. Sutton began seriously to study our native birds. With
characteristic thoroughness and enthusiasm, he set about observing and recording
the habits, calls, and distribution of the South Australian avifauna, and whenever
opportunity arose, extended his researches into other parts of the Commonwealth.
Mr, Sutton was not a private collector of birds, but many specimens found by him
are now in the Museum collection. Several trips were made to Queensland, New
South Wales, and Vietoria, and the habits of the birds observed there were
recorded.

Mr. Sutton was also keenly interested in the historical side of South Aus-
tralian ornithology, and discovered many new and interesting facts about early
ornithologists and their activities in this State. He was the author of many papers
and articles on birds as well as innumerable short notes and descriptions in the
Emu’! and ‘South Australian Ornithologist’’. During his comparatively short
career as an ornithologist, it can be said that he beeame one of the leading figures
in South Australian ornithology, and his knowledge and opinions were valued
greatly by all with whom he came into contact.

In 1923, following the death of Mr, . R. Zeitz, Ornithologist at ihe Museum,
Dr. A. M. Morgan was appointed Honorary Ornithologist, and during the same
year, Mr. Sutton joimed him as Assistant Honorary Ornithologist. Wor the next
fifteen years, Mr, Sutton spent every afternoon at the Museum, and as a result of
his organizing ability and thoroughness, about fifteen thousand specimens were
registered, catalogued, and stored during this period. He was an expert penman,
and all his records were kept with meticulous care.

110 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Mr. Sutton joined the South Australian Ornithological Association in 1919,
acted as Honorary Secretary for sixteen years, and was a member of the Editorial
Committee of the ‘‘South Australian Ornithologist’’ for eleven years.

In October, 1934, on the death of Dr. Morgan, Mr. Sutton became Honorary
Curator in Ornithology, which position he held until his death. He was a member
of several learned and scientific societies, including the Royal Society of South
Australia, the Royal Australasian Ornithologists’ Union, the Royal Geographical
Society, and the South Australian Ornithological Association.

CONTRAST IN DRAWINGS MADE BY AN AUSTRALIAN
ABORIGINE BEFORE AND AFTER INITIATION

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, ACTING ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The remarkable change in the mental outlook of a partly detribalized aborigine, after
he had passed through the ceremonies admitting him to full tribal membership, and
the distinct alteration in the character of the crayon drawings, produced by him before
and after initiation, form the subject of this paper.

When the 1935 Adelaide University Anthropological Expedition to the Warburton
Ranges in Western Australia (') left Laverton, two interpreters were employed; one,
Pitawara, a fully initiated aborigine twenty-five years of age, the other, a youth named
Niyau (pl. vii, Fig. 2), who, we understood at the time, had passed through all stages
of initiation — that is to say, he had been circumcised and subincised.

CONTRAST tn DRAWINGS MADE psy an AUSTRALIAN
ABORIGINE BEFORE anp AFTER INITIATION

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, Acting Errunonoaiwr, Sourn Ausrranian Museum.
Plates v—vii.

Tuy remarkable change in the mental outlook of a partly detribalized aborigine,
after he had passed through the ceremonies admitting him to full tribal member-
ship, and the distinet alteration in the character of the crayon drawings produced
by him before and after initiation, form the subject of this paper,

When the 1935 Adelaide University Anthropological Expedition to the War-
burton Ranges in Western Australia (1) left Laverton, two interpreters were em-
ployed; one, Pitawara, a fully initiated aborigine twenty-five years of age, the
other, a youth named Nijau (pl. vii, fig. 2), who, we understood at the time, had
passed through all stages of initiation—that is to say, he had been cireumeised and
subincised.

After a journey of three hundred and fifty miles across uninhabited country,
composed largely of mulga flats and spinitex-covered sandhills, we reached Waru-
puju, a small waterhole on the junction of the Elder and Warburton Creeks, Here
we established our base camp and started work among a group of people of the
Ngada tribe, who were practically untouched by civilization.

In order to gain some insight into the art of the aborigines, sheets of brown
paper and red, yellow, black and white crayons were distributed amongst the
natives.

For a while, when every-day objects formed the subjects of the drawings, the
older men made no attempt to conceal them from our younger interpreter, But
when confidence beeame established between the older men and myself and the
drawings beyan to take on a more secret character, it beeame obvious that Nijau
was not aceepted by the tribal leaders. He was diffident and hestitating in their
presence, and spent most of his time playing with boys many years his junior.
Should Nijau pass near the place where the older men were making the drawings,
these were at once turned face downwards.

Inquiries then revealed the fact that our younger interpreter, although he

(1) This was financed by funds made available by the Rockefeller Foundation and adminis-
tered by the Australian National Research Council,

112 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

had been circumcised some years ago, had been persuaded by the mission authori-
ties not to undergo the ritual subincision ceremonies, the participation in which
would have granted him the rights and privileges of full tribal membership. He
was therefore tribally a child, and as such would not be allowed to see drawings
depicting legends known only to the initiated. Nijau was therefore useless as an
interpreter.

During this period Nijau, in common with other aborigines, made a number
of drawings; pl. v, figs. 1 and 2, are two examples of his work. The subjects are
purely European, and are such as any white child in the upper classes of a primary
school might have produced. In the first sheet (pl. v, fig. 1) the objects illustrated
are easily recognizable, i.e. on the top of the sheet a policeman, then an aeroplane,
railway train, axe, boot on the lower left, a revolver, and on the lower right a
station hand, with his wide-brimmed sombrero and gay neckeloth, who had evi-
dently caught the imagination of the aboriginal youth.

The drawings on the second sheet (pl. v, fig. 2) are, if anything, of a higher
order. A, isa house on the Mount Margaret Mission; B, a ram (reminiscent of one
of the famous paintings at the Altimira Caves in Spain) ; C, an echidna; and D, a
cauliflower in blossom. The lower drawing is an excellent representation of the
stockyards, windmill and troughs at the above mission station. Considerable
detail is shown, even to the wheel of the stop valve E, that controls the flow of
water to the trough. These sketches showed considerable skill, for, as Nijau could
neither read nor write, it is almost certain that he had not received instruction in
drawing.

During the latter part of our stay, Nijau, in company with two other younger
poys, passed through the subincision operation and rituals.

This act wrought a major psychological change in the youth. He no longer
played with the boys or approached the men with downeast eyes or diffident mien,
put associated freely with the elders, noticeably proud of his new status and the
head-dress that proclaimed it (pl. vii, fig. 1), while in his general conduet he dis-
played all the confidence and assurance of much older men.

No longer did the men turn their sheets of drawings face downward, but
willingly explained, through Nijau, the meaning of the symbols on the sheets of
drawings which illustrated the wanderings of their semi-human ancestors. The
youth’s pride and self-importance reached even greater heights when he was
chosen as guardian to a boy selected for cireumeision (pl. vii, fig. 1), and was, for
the first time, allowed to sit in the circle of singers and chant the sacred songs of
his tribe.

Thus Nijau reached full tribal membership. But it was in the crayon draw-

MOUNTFORD-—DRAWINGS OF AN AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINE 113

ings that the remarkable psychological change was most clearly exhibited. After
his initiation Nijau produced two sheets of drawings (pl. vi, fig. 1 and 2), and on
these every object depicted is associated with the life of the uncivilized aborigine,
and the symbols (with the exception of F, fig. 2) are the same as those used by the
older men to illustrate their traditional stories.

A (pl. vi, fig. 2) are the tracks of parent emus as they travelled backwards
and forwards to their nest at G. B is a line of wallaby tracks leading into a cave
at C; a hill F overlooks this place. D pictures a distorted gum tree seen by the
artist whilst on our outward journey; according to Nijau it had been blown over
by the wind and had re-rooted itself. KE indicates the roots of the tree. Except
for A, a waterhole called Kapi Pilbit, and the associated creek (created by the
ancestral Kangaroo) every object pictured would be known only to the fully
initiated. B is a wanigi made by two ancestral beings, the Wati Kutjara, and left
behind at Winduru Waterhole (2).

At C is shown another wanigi seen by the author and Nijau at a semi-secret
ceremony enacted at the expedition camp. D isa gnanma hole (*), Kapi Matara;
F, a somewhat Europeanized representation of an aborigine wearing the sacred
wanigi supported from his head, his face painted with white pipeclay, and body
decorated with lines of eagle-down, while E is the equally sacred bullroarer pup-
imba (equivalent to the Aranda tjurunga).

The cohesive power of the ceremonial life of the aborigines and the calamitous
effect of any influences that tend to destroy that power will be evident from this
short paper. If Nijau had not been subincised, he would have lived his life as an
outcast from his tribe. At the same time, such nonconformity to native customs
would not have rendered him more acceptable to the white community. For the
happiness of the aborigine, the maintenance of his ceremonial life and social or-

ganization is vital.
REFERENCE.
Mountford, C. P. (1937) : Rec. 8S. Aust. Mus., vi, pp. 5-28, fig. 1-27.

(2) Figured by Mountford, 1937, p. 19, in a suite.of drawings describing the exploits of these
ancestors. Winduru is a large water-hole some fifteen miles north-east of the base camp of the
expedition (see W. Aus. plan [X/800).

(3) A water catchment of limited supply found in the arid parts of Western Australia.

114 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate v.

Fig. 1 and 2. Crayon drawings produced by Nijau before subincision ceremony.
Plate vi.
Fig. 1 and 2. Crayon drawings produced by Nijau after subincision ceremony.

Plate vii.

Fig.1. Nijau guarding initiate in circumcision.

Fig.2. Nijau.

Rec. S.A. MusEuM Von. VI, PLATE V,

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM Vou. VI, PLATE VI.

Rec. S.A, MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE VIL.

A SURVEY OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PEARL AND
BALER SHELL ORNAMENTS

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, ACTING ETHNOLOGIST, AND
ALISON HARVEY, HON. ASSISTANT IN ETHNOLOGY

Summary

The shell ornaments described in the following paper are used by the aboriginal
population over wide areas in Australia. They may be divided into two general types,
one made from the Baler shell (Melo diadema), the second from the shell of the Pearl
Oyster (Meleagrina maxima), and from the smaller pearl shell (Meleagrina
margaritifera).

The pearl shell ornaments are found almost exclusively in the western half of the
continent, while with a few exceptions, the baler shell ornament is limited to
Queensland, Western Central Australia and North-eastern South Australia.

A SURVEY or AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PEARL anv
BALER SHELL ORNAMENTS

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, Acting MrunoLocisr, anb ALISON HARVEY, Hon. Assisrant

IN ErHNoOLoGY.
Plates vili-ix, and Text fig. 1-7.

INTRODUCTION,

Tne shell ornaments deseribed in the following paper are used by the aboriginal
Wy

hey may be divided into two general
types, one made from the Baler shell (Melo diadema), the second from the shell of

population over wide areas in Australia.

the Pearl Oyster (Meleagrina maxima), and from the smaller pearl shell (Melea-
gring margaritifera).

The pearl shell ornaments are found almost exclusively in the western half of
the continent, while with a few exceptions, the baler shell ornament is limited to
Queensland, Western Central Australia and North-eastern South Australia.

PEHARL SHELL ORNAMENTS.
MANUFACTURE.

The pearl shell ornaments of the North-west Coast of Australia early attracted
the attention of visitors and scientists. Martin and Panter in 1863, p. 86, noted
that the method of manutacturing these objects consisted in grinding away about
two-thirds of the marginal substanee of the shell, and drilling a hole at one end of
the smaller diameter for the hair-string. The patterns on the decorated ornaments
were engraved to a depth of about half a millimetre, and the spaces filled in with a
pigment of gum and chareoal.

Stirling, on a card in the South Australian Museum, substantiates the above
description. and noted that the rough outer surface of the shell was covered with
hot ashes and then removed by erinding with sand and water.

Usage,

Use of the pearl ornament. lies in two fields, as a means of personal decoration
and as an object of ceremonial importance. Love (1925, p. 27) points out that the
men of the Worora tribe wear these shells as ornaments, and suspend them from

116 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

their belts at the back and front; while both men and women hang several of them
down their backs from a necklet made of human hair. Small pieces of oval pearl
shell are sometimes used as forehead ornaments.

Martin and Panter (1863, p. 86) noticed the coastal north-western tribes
wearing these ornaments suspended from a waist band. These writers consider
them to be largely ornamental, although Campbell (1914, p. 86) saw them, at
Sunday Island, being worn by youths who were passing through the final stages
of initiation. On these occasions they wore richly ornamented shells (E and F,
pl. viii). This evidence is supported by Mr. J. Heggie in connection with A and
B, fig. 1. The dress of a fully initiated man consists of a plain shell.

Baler shell ornaments A
Pearl shell ornaments e

Fig. 1. Distribution of Pearl and Baler Shell ornaments.

The shell ornaments of South-Western Queensland have two uses, one as a
pubic ornament for ‘‘corroborees and other public rejoicings’’, the other, in the
hands of malignantly-disposed people, as an object of evil magic.

In Central Australia, such ornaments have an important magical value.
Nevertheless they are still used as a form of decoration (Spencer and Gillen, 1899,
p. 544).

According to Mr. N. B. Tindale, pearl shells at Ooldea (H, fig. 3) were used

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 117

in the rain-making rituals, but a photograph by the late R. H. Pulleine, which
pictures an aborigine wearing one as a neck pendant, suggests that on some occa-
sions, the shells still perform the function of decoration.

In the Ngada tribe of the Warburton Range of Western Australia one of the
authors observed that a pearl shell pendant was used by one of the older men as
an article of dress in both the ordinary camp life and the initiation ceremonials.

In a recent interview a native called Waria, a member of the almost extinct
Ngadjuri tribe of the middle north of South Australia, described how he wore
pearl shell ornaments at the time of his circumcision. The shell ornaments, which
he had not seen previously, were tied on the upper part of the leg (C, fig. 6) and
according to Waria rattled and shone in the firelight as he ran round the cere-
monial ground. The fact that Waria had not seen these ornaments before his
initiation indicates their sacred character.

Maaic.

As articles of magical worth, these ornaments are widely distributed in
Australia.

In Central Australia they are found as such, and the chief aspects of their
magic being their potence as charms for women and their healing properties. De-
scribing their use in connection with the latter, Spencer and Gillen (1899, p. 544)
write : ‘If a man desires to charm a particular woman, he takes a Lonka-lonka, as
the ornament is called, to some retired spot, and charms it by singing over it, ‘Ma
quatcha purnto ma qillia purtno’, which conveys an invitation to the lightning to
come and dwell in the Lonka-lonka, After the charming has taken place it is hung
on a digging stick at the corroboree ground until night time, when a man removes
it and ties it to his waist band. While he is dancing, the woman whom he wishes to
attract, alone sees the lightning flashing in the Lonka-lonka, and all at once her
internal organs shake with emotion. If possible, she will creep into his camp that
night or take the earliest opportunity to run away with him.”’

From the description of the Lonka-lonka ‘‘flashing”’ in the firelight, it would
appear that the object was made from pearl shell, as a baler shell (which is also in
use in this area) would not ‘‘flash’’.

On the same page, in a footnote, Spencer and Gillen refer to the healing quali-
ties of the Lonka-lonka. Used in sickness of any kind its magic has great curative
properties. Roth (1897, p. 163) also refers to the use of the pearl plate as an anti-
dote to sickness because of its magical powers.

At Ooldea, according to Mr. Tindale, scrapings of the shell are used in the
rain-making ceremonies.

118

Fig. 2.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

eS
Wa

Decorated Pearl Shells. A, B, and D; Sunday Island, Western Australia,

Cygnet Bay, Western Australia. E; Mount Casuarina, north-western Australia,

MoUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 119

MytTHOLoey.

Various myths are woven round the pearl shell. Professor A. P. Elkin, in a
foreword of ‘* Aboriginal Decorative Art’’ (McCarthy, 1938), writes that on the
north-west coast a particular chant is sung when the design is being engraved on
the pearl shell. The design cannot be made except by those who know the ‘‘sone’’.
This suggests that the patterns are traditional. This statement is supported by
Mr. Heggie in connection with A, fig. 2.

According to Mr. N. B. Tindale, the natives at Ooldea believe that the shell
comes from a place in the far north-west, where large lizards live in the water and
attack the men who collect the shells (H, fig. 3).

DESCRIPTION,

The pearl shell ornaments are somewhat oval in shape, and vary from two to
eight inches in length. Hach shell has at one end either a hole or a mass of resin or
wax to which a hair-string is attached. Pearl shells are of two types, plain and
engraved. The pattern on the latter is usually carried out on the concave face,
but sometimes on both.

Twenty-eight examples of pearl shell ornaments, from the eighty-five avail-
able for study, were chosen as being representative of the various forms. These
are illustrated in fig. 2-6.

A, fig. 2, collected at Sunday Island by Mr. J. Heggie, is a striking example
of a maze design. Commencing at the lower edge of the shell, three parallel lines
can be followed without a break over most of the surface, finishing in the
middle of the left-hand side. Basedow (1925, p. 355) figures a pearl shell from
the same locality in which a definite anthropomorphic figure can be traced, and
the fundamental design of the Sunday Island specimen is similar. According to
Mr. Heggie, the youths of this locality, after they have passed through the four
earlier stages of their initiation, wear engraved ornaments, while the insignia of
the fully-initiated is a plain pear! shell.

The owner of the ornament (A, fig. 2) explained to Mr. Heggie that the pat-
tern hac been thought out by somebody a ‘‘long long time ago’’, and in that form
had been handed down, generation by generation, to the aborigines of the present
day. This statement suggests that the design is associated with the tribal mytho-
logy.

B, fig. 2, is also from Sunday Island. The engraved pattern is the key or
meander type—a definitely aboriginal concept belonging to the north-western area
(Davidson 1937, p. 1830)—but the lines of circles, the leaf, and the conventional
designs make one suspect Huropean influence, while the regularity and accuracy

120 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 5. Decorated Pearl and Baler Shells. A; Pearl Shell, Roebuck Bay. B; Pearl Shell,
Katherine River, Northern Territory. C; Pearl Shell, Roeburn, Western Australia. D; Baler
Shell, Daly Waters, Central Australia. E; Pearl Shell, north-western district, Western Aus-
tralia. F; Baler Shell, Central Australia. G; Pearl Shell, between Barrow and Tennants
Creek, Central Australia. H; Pearl Shell, Ooldea, South Australia. J; Pearl Shell, Sunday

Island, Western Australia.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 121

of the circles suggest the use of a steel tool. With one exception (C, fig, 3) this
shell is the only example in the collection on which the concentric cirele is en-
graved. This design is that most commonly employed in Central Australian de-
corative art (Mounttord, 1937, p. 25).

The ladder-like, meandering design on C, fig. 2 (from Cygnet Bay) resembles
the snake motif often found in the tjurunga designs of the Central tribes. Mount-
ford, 1937, fig. 9, illustrates a crayon drawing that relates to a snake totemic
centre, the meandering line of which resembles that on the left-hand of C, fig. 2.
Tt is not unlikely that the design of the pearl shell refers to some mythical snake
ancestor. The significance of the other figures is unknown, except those resembling
arrow heads, which throughout Australia represent bird tracks.

D, fig. 2, was collected from the same locality as A, fig. 2. These are two of
the most decorative examples in the collection. Three parallel lines meander
backwards and forwards over the whole surface of the shell, making a modified
maze. The spaces between are filled with engravings of tracks of human beings,
kangaroo-like creatures and birds.

Snake designs have been engraved across the centre of the shell, on the upper
right-hand edge, and emerging from the drilled hole at the top. This pattern is
repeated on the reverse side (F, fig. 2) in greater detail. Above the snake is a
remarkable group, the significance of which could hardly be misunderstood. The
upper figure pictures one of the many sharks that infest the northern waters, while
that immediately below is strongly suggestive of a Sucker-fish or Remora (1)
ready to attach itself to its host.

E, fig. 2, was obtained at Mount Casuarina, which is the most northerly locality
at which engraved pear! shell plaques have been collected. No meaning can be
ascribed to the pattern.

A, fig. 3, from Roebuck Bay, is in the collection of the Hamburg Museum, and
was photographed there by Mr. N. B. Tindale in 1937. The patterns, which do not
appear to be as deeply engraved as those previously described, are almost entirely
naturalistic. The two main figures, one on the lower right, the other slightly left
of the centre, are similar to representations of yams seen on bark paintings from
Arnhem Land, and in crayon drawings of the Granites district in the north-west
of Central Australia. In such figures the circles indicate the yams, and the con-
necting lines the roots. The engravings on this pearl shell may have a similar
meaning. Several star forms are also present.

B, fig. 3, was collected on the Katherine River, Northern Territory. A sharp-

(1) The Sucker-fishes possess a large dorsal sucking dise and attach themselves to sharks,
whales, or even the bottom of boats. When a meal is in sight the remora will leave its host, capture
the prey, and return to its resting place,

122 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

48
Suwa TT)
“a i)

IN

5)
Sd

LORY

RERESS

F

Fig. 4. Decorated Pearl Shell. A; Derby, Western Australia. B; Roebuck Bay, Western
Australia. C; Cygnet Bay, Western Australia. D; Bernice Bay, Western Australia. E; Bernice
Bay, Western Australia. F; Kimberley Coast, Western Australia.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 123

edged tool had been used to cut the pattern, which is composed entirely of fine
lines, some almost indistinguishable. With the exception of a single star, only
ladder-like designs are present.

A fragment of what must have been a particularly decorative example is
shown in CG, fig. 8. The original is in the possession of Mr. W. B. Saunders, of
Georgetown, who collected it at Roeburn. He kindly permitted a rubbing to be
made, and from this the illustration was prepared. The plant-like figures on the
lower edge are suggestive of those on A, fig. 3. Meandering lines, stars, and a single
concentric circle form the remainder of the designs.

K, fig. 3, was collected from the north-western districts of Australia by David-
son (1987, fig. 44). The engraving on the lower right hand probably represents
the silver bat fish (Monodactylus argentius), and that on the centre left one of the
coral fish. No meaning can be ascribed to the circular figures.

G, fig. 8, is a portion of a large pearl shell—collected between Barrow and
Tennant’s Creeks, Central Australia—on which the angular meander had been
engraved. This design is strongly suggestive of the north-west coast, the home
of this motif. The central portion of the pattern had been ground away, perhaps
for the same reason as that recorded in connection with H, fig. 3 (7).

H, fig. 3, when sketched by Mr. N. B. Tindale at Ooldea, on the Trans-Aus-
tralian Railway Line, was being used by the natives of those parts. Here again
only a fragment of the original pear] shell remains, and consequently only portion
of the engraved angular meander. According to Mr. Tindale the shell is called
kararba. The natives claim that it comes from a place in the north-west, where
large lizards live in the water and attack the men who collect the shell. Scrapings
of the shell are used during rain-making ceremonies, which practice probably
accounts for the small size of examples collected in South Australia (see also H,
fig. 5; B, fig. 6; and as previously noted G, fig. 3).

By the courtesy of the Australian Museum, rubbings of J, fig. 3, as well as
many others, were made available for study. This, in common with A, B, and D,
fig. 2, was obtained from Sunday Island. The triple meandering lines, particu-
larly on the upper right-hand side, resemble the almost obliterated design on H,
fig. 5.

The long oval shell pictured on A, fig. 4, comes from Derby, north-west Aus-
tralia, and had been cut from a shell already engraved with the angular meander.
This example was attached to several long strings of shells, and had been used as
a neck pendant. Similar, but unengraved, plates, attached to shell necklets, are
in the South Australian Museum.

(2) In Central Australia, similar unengrayed ornaments, called Lonka lonka, are worn by men,
especially during ceremonies (Spencer and Gillen, 1899, p. 544).

124 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ae
WOE

Fig. 5. Decorated Pearl Shell. A, C, and J; Maratuna Tribe, Western Australia. B

and D; Lake White, Northern Territory. E; Central Australia.
Northern Territory. H; Koonibba, South Australia.

F and G; Timber Creek,

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 125

B, fig. 4, is from Roebuck Bay. The zig-zag lines predominate in the decora-
tion of this shell; the concentric rhomboid is also present. This motif is unusual
on this class of ornament, although common on other forms of aboriginal mobile
art (Davidson, 1937, p. 119).

C, fig, 4, is a pendant from Cygnet Bay engraved with a meandering desivn,
and like A, fig. 4, it was attached to a necklet of shells. E, fig, 5, from Central Aus-
tralia, bears an identical but almost obliterated design.

D, K, and F, fig. 4, were collected by Dr. D. 8. Davidson (1937, fig. 44) from
Bernice Bay, and Kimberley Coast, respectively. These are figured on account of
the unusual lattiee pattern on D, the uig-zagz and leaf-like forms of F, and the
striking representation of a crocodile on ER. The distortion of the crocodile to fit
into the available space is a common feature of the bark drawings of Arnhem Land.

A, C, and J, fig. 5, were photographed at the Leiden Museum by Mr. N, B.
Tindale, The pattern on all three examples is unlike any other in the series, with
the possible exception of the faint lines on B, fig. 6. These ornaments were made
from the smaller pearl shell (M, margaritifera), by the Maratunia Tribe. The
locality of the above tribe could not be traced, but the fact that neither the larger
nor the smaller pearl shell occurs any further south than Hamelin Pool, on the
West Coast of Australia, suggests that the tribe is north of this place.

B, D, F, and G, fig. 5, were collected by Dr, C, J. Hackett while on medical
research in the Northern Territory, B and D (from Lake White), and G, from
Timber Oreek, are scratched with lattice patterns similar to those on D, fig. 4. A
decorative fern leaf design occupies the lower edge of F (Timber Creek).

E, fig. 5, comes from Central Australia. From the point of design this
specimen is of unusual interest. The parallel lines and star motif, which is con-
fined to the centre of the continent (fig. 7) had been scratched on the surface of
this pearl ornament. In addition, three faint meandering lines, reminiscent of
those on C, fig. 4, from Cygnet Bay, proclaim, so to speak, the place of its birth.
1t would appear that this shell was engraved on the north-west coast, and, by the
process of trade, found its way into Central Australia. Deve it was again. en-
graved, but this time with stars aud parallel lines. Another such example is illus.
trated on D, pl, ix. A baler shell ornament bearing the same design is shown
beside i for comparison.

I, fig. 4, is a fragment of the large pearl shell which, according to Mr, N. B.
Tindale, had been traded to the natives of the Koonibba Station from Kalgoorlie.
This shell has several scarcely discernible meandering lines on its inner surface, a
remnant, no doubt, of the original engraving, This, as pointed out earlier, re-
sentbles the upper right-hand side of J, fig. 3.

126 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

B, fig. 6, a specimen from Penong, is also a fragment, chipped to its present
size from a much larger shell. On this ornament a series of very fine lines forms a
ladder-like pattern.

Pearl shell ornaments, called Mukuli, of which no specimens have been collec-
ted, were used by the Ngadjuri tribe of the middle-north of South Australia in
their circumcision ceremonies. C, fig. 6, illustrates the method of wearing.

D

Fig. 6. Pearl and Baler Shell ornaments. A; Decorated Baler Shell, Coopers Creek, South
Australia. B; Decorated Pearl Shell, Penong, South Australia. OC; Method of carrying Pearl
Shell ornaments by the Ngadjuri Tribe, South Australia. D; Decorated Baler Shell ornament,
South Australia.

D, pl. viii, is the top of a fruit tin lid collected by the Canning Stock Route
expedition. When obtained it was in use as a pubic ornament.

It is easy to imagine that the native, finding a lid when new, would see in it a
striking resemblance to the shining pearl shell, and would wear it as such.

A, pl. viii, figures a plain pearl shell from Neweastle Waters, which illustrates
the custom of repairing these shells, which have considerable value in this area.

B, pl. viii, is a shell bearing a modified maze design in which two bird tracks
are incorporated. Both A and B, pl. viii, are attached to belts of hair string.

BALER SHELL ORNAMENTS.

MANUFACTURE.

The method of production of the baler-shell ornaments for spear-throwers at
Princess Charlotte Bay is described by Hale and Tindale (1934, p. 99) : ‘‘Two
pieces of shell are roughly chipped to shape, and are then ground to an oval form
on stones, sand and water assisting the operation; next the convex outer face is
polished on a smooth rock, using finer sand as an abrasive, until it is pure white.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 127

The shells are then placed, one on each side and with the concave or inside faces
opposed, at the ‘grip’ end of the throwing-stick and fastened with beeswax, which
fills the gap between them. A charm is frequently concealed within the adhesive
between the two shells.’’ G, pl. ix, pictures the haft of a spear-thrower from this
area.

USAGE.

The use to which this ornament is put varies with the different: localities; it
may be used for ornamental or ceremonial purposes. Among the tribes of north-
west-central Queensland it appears to be solely ornamental, being found as an
article of personal adornment and as a decoration on the haft of spear-throwers.
In the former case, Roth (1897, p. 112) states that as a chest ornament it is worn
suspended on a hair string, and that it is occasionally but irregularly worn as a
forehead ornament. He also gives the following description of its use as a spear-
thrower (1897, p. 149) ; ‘*This (spear-thrower) has a sort of haft to prevent the
hand slipping off; this, projecting at an angle from the same edge as the peg, is
composed of a flattened ovate piece of beef-wood gum, about three inches or more
in its greater diameter; a white piece of shell . . . . with convex side outwards,
is fixed to both sides of it.’’

Hale and Tindale (1934, p. 99), also found the baler shell used as a decoration
for spear-throwers. Among the Dieri people of the far north-east of South Aus-
tralia the shell ornament has a great magical value, and is closely connected with
the circumcision ceremony in which it is worn by the initiate as a chest ornament.

Gason (1874, p. 18) refers to its use in the above ceremony, and states that,
as soou as a boy shows signs of advancing manhood, the older men select a woman
whose duty it is to suspend a ‘‘mussei’’ shell around the boy’s neck, which she does
at the appointed time, while engaging him in conversation.

Mr. T, Vogelsang, who spent many years among the Dieri people, related in a
personal interview that the youths wear them immediately before, and just after,
the circumcision ceremony, One of the tribal elders (the man who seized the youth
chosen for initiation) also wore a plain baler shell around his neck, which gave
him considerable authority and magical power.

Further south, the Urubunna and Wongkanguru tribes of the Peake district
use this shell ornament in connection with initiation ceremonies in a way similar
to the Dieri. In the manuscript notes by Mr. E. C. Kempe, on the Aborigines of
the Peake District, the following reference is made to the initiation of a young
man: ‘‘A certain rare shell is used in this ceremony. It is considered particularly
precious by these blacks, and is handed down from operator to operator. When a
young man is to be operated upon, he is, on a given signal, suddenly seized in camp

128 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

by two blacks, his mouth covered to prevent outcry, and the shell ornament hung
round his neck by a string.”’

In the Anjamatana tribe in the Northern Flinders Range, these ornaments
have the same ceremonial uses. A string of these shells, makili, is suspended
round the neck of the youth during the initiation ceremonies after they have been
handled by certain women relatives.

These shells are the objects of greatest value in the tribe, and are placed under
the care of one of the old men, who informed one of us that if they had been lost
or broken in the olden days he would have been killed for his carelessness (F, pl.
aR

Macic.

The only tribe known in which the Baler shells are used as objects of evil
magic is the Dieri. Among the members of this tribe they serve the same purpose
as the ‘‘pointing bone’’ of Central Australia, and have similar lethal qualities.

MytTHoLoey.

These ornaments are used by the Anjamatana tribe of the Northern Flinders,
who, not knowing their source, suppose them to have a mythical origin. Two such
legends are known to these people. One tells of a great ‘‘whale’’ (Kukurt) who
lived in the springs, but is now in the sea; from the back of his neck come the shells
that make up the necklace worn by a youth in the first initiation ceremonies. At
one phase in the above ceremony, the youth, placing his hand under the shells,
rattles them as he runs around the ground (#).

In a variant of the foregoing legend, baler shells were ‘‘tick’’ on the neck of
snakes. An Anjamatana native told one of the authors that he had heard that a
mythical snake died in John Creek, and, on searching the locality, found an un-
drilled baler shell in a swamp near Wertaloona. This shell is one of the string
still used by that tribe.

DESCRIPTION.

The baler shell ornament has a fairly uniform appearance; it is an ovate piece
of white Melo shell varying in length from two and a half to five inches, and has
either a hole or a piece of resin gum to which the suspensory hair-string is attached.
There are two types, one of which is plain, and the other engraved on the concave
face (see E, pl. ix). In both, the inner face is smooth and white, and in most cases
shows signs of having been coloured with red ochre, which makes the pattern stand

(8) This rattling of the shells was a feature in a similar ceremony of the more southerly tribe,
the Ngadjuri (see C, fig. 6).

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 129

out clearly. In the plain forms, however, this colouring has almost disappeared,
due no doubt to continual use.

Twenty-nine ornaments made from Baler shells (Melo diadema) are available
for study, and of these seven are shown as text figures. They have been selected
to illustrate types and designs. D, in fig. 3, collected at Daly Waters, exhibits the
arrangement of stars anl parallel lines so characteristic of the Central Australian
area (fig. 7). The lines of the design are about 0-5 mm. in width, engraved on the

Baler Shells

Plain ©
Engraved x

Fig. 7. Distribution of engraved and plain Baler Shell ornaments in Australia.

coneave face, and coloured with red ochre rubbed into the cuts. The topmost por-
tion of the shell, above the hole through which the string is threaded, has been
broken, and later repaired with gum made from Poreupine Grass (Triodia) resin.

¥F, also in fig. 3, is a variation of the above motif in which engraved stars pre-
dominate. The shell is smooth and white, but red ochre has been rubbed into the
design. This specimen, collected in Central Australia by F. J. Gillen, has not been
fully localized.

A, fig. 6, is from Cooper’s Creek. A large lump of gum has been attached to

130 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the top of the ornament, probably to fix the hair-string. Two parallel lines in a
loop design have been lightly seratched at each side of the shell; this was the only
specimen of baler shell which bore any sign of the meander motif so frequently
found engraved on pearl shells, especially on those from the north-west coast.
(See E and H, fig. 5, and C, fig. 2.)

D, in the same text figure, is an unlocalized baler shell collected by Mr. R. T.
Maurice. This specimen is one of two varying from the usual ovate form; it bears
an uncommon design composed of sets of dots and parallel lines. B, pl. ix, is a
typical example of the plain baler shell. (The convex face has been photo-
graphed). The specimen—ealled Kuripikirit by the Mikari tribe—was collected
at Minnie Downs, North-Eastern South Australia, by Mr. L. Reese. The smooth,
white and glossy concave face was not engraved, but showed signs of having been
coloured with red ochre, which remains as a faint trace in scratches on the face.
Human hair string suspends the ornament through a hole in the top portion of
the shell.

B, pl. ix, is a shell from Daly Waters bearing the characteristic line and star
design on the concave face. Here again the engraved design was coloured with
red ochre. <A pearl shell (D, pl. ix) from Barrow Creek, three hundred and fifty
miles south, is included for comparison on the same plate.

A, pl. ix, shows an unlocalized copy in bone of the plain baler shell ornament.
Spencer and Gillen (1904, p. 446) in the legend of the two Oruntja men, tell of
how one of them killed Induda, an opossum man, and from his shoulder-blade
made a Lonka-lonka, which he wore as a forehead decoration.

CG, pl. ix, shows the convex face of a ‘‘shell’’ ornament from Cooper’s Creek,
made from kaolin. This specimen was pale pink in colour, had acquired a surface
gloss, and was made as a substitute for the true baler shell ornament. The latter
is rare and of great value in this area.

F, pl. ix, is a photograph of a youth of the Anjamatana tribe of the northern
Flinders wearing the baler shell ornament while undergoing initiation. This shell
is eailed makali by these people (*#).

DesigN AND DisTRIBUTION.
The engraved patterns of the ornaments described in this paper can be classi-
fied into two main groups:

(1) Geometric.
(2) Naturalistic.

(4) The name is similar to that given to the pear! shell ornament (see C, fig. 6) of the Ngulgura
tribe who live in the area bounded by Wilpena Pound to the north, the western Flinders to the
west, and Gawler in the south.

MouNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 137

The former, which predominates, can again be subdivided into :

(a)
(b)
(¢)

The angular meander or maze designs.
Meandering and zig-zag lines.
Lattice and ladder designs.

(d) Parallel lines and stars.

Geometric.

¢

(b)

(e)

(a) The angular meander or maze design (see A, B, D, and H, fig.2; Gand H,

fig. 3; and A, fig. 4), originates on the north-west coast of Western Aus-
tralia, whence all but four of these examples were obtained. The remain-
ing ornaments, 7.e. those collected on the Canning Stock Route, Western
Australia, at Barrow Creek, Central Australia, sketched by Mr. Tindale
at Ooldea (C, pl. vili, and G and H, fig. 3) and that seen by one of the
authors in the Warburton Range of Western Australia, undoubtedly
reached their present position by various native trade routes.

The meandering and zig-zag pattern is largely confined to the far north-
west. Fourteen pearl shells and one baler shell bearing this pattern were
examined, and on the only three collected outside of this area (Ji, fig. 5,
from Central Australia, A, fig. 6, and H, fig. 5, from the Great Australian
Bight), the designs were hardly distinguishable, due no doubt to age and
attrition. When, however, one considers how long it must have taken
for such an ornament to have been traded from its source to the Great
Australian Bight, it is not surprising that the engravings were almost
obliterated and the shell much reduced in size, particularly in view of the
custom mentioned in connection with H, fig. 3.

The lattice and ladder motifs (C, fig. 2; B, fig. 8; D, fig. 4; B, D, C, -J,
fig. 5; and B, fig. 6) are, without exception, cut into the surface of the
shell with a sharp tool. In general, these designs originate on the north-
west coast, although B, fig. 3, was collected on the Katherine River,
Northern Territory, and B, fig. 6 from the Great Australian Bight. The
lines on the latter are so fine that a magnifying glass was necessary to
distinguish them. A, C, and J, fig. 5, were decorated with lightly-incised
lines. The latter were unlocalized, and unlike any other examples in the
series.

(d) Twelve of the shell ornaments were engraved with the stars and parallel

lines motif. Three of these were made of pearl shell. One, D, pl. ix, is
compared with a baler shell, E, pl. ix, both from Central Australia. This

132 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

method of marking is confined entirely to the centre of the continent, and
is more commonly seen on the baler shells of this area (see fig. 7).

(2) Naturalistie.

With the exception of the single example from south-western Northern Terri-
tory (F, fig. 5) all naturalistic designs originated in the north-west. Some are
decidedly decorative, 7.e. F, fig. 2; A, C, and H, fig. 3, and E and F, fig. 4.

A comparison of the patterns engraved on pearl-shell and those on tjurungas
of Central Australia show few, if any, points of resemblance. In fact, except for
the tracks on D, fig. 2, the concentric circles on B, fig. 2 and C, fig. 3, and the zig-zag
lines and conecentri¢e rhomboids on B, fig. 4, none of the engravings on the shells
ot the north-west area appear on the tjurungas or the crayon drawings of the
central tribes. The latter were collected by one of the authors,

it would seem that the art of the pear|-shell ornament is confined to the north-
west, with the exception of the parallel lines and star motif, which is only found
on both baler and pearl! shells in the centre of the continent (fig. 7). It is note-
worthy that the ornaments tend to become engraved with the typical design of the
area in which they are used. Thus, a pearl shell from Barrow Creek (GQ, fig. 5), to
which reference has already been made, has the typical design of the ‘‘centre’’
superimposed on an almost obliterated meander design of the north.

From the information already obtained, the southerly diffusion of these orna-
ments is a noteworthy feature. They originate in two well-defined areas, the pearl-
shell in north-western Australia, with King’s Sound as an approximate centre,
and the baler shell in the Cape York area of Northern Queensland. Both types
can be traced through Central Australia to South Australia (fig. 1).

Numerous references in literature support this evidence. Campbell, 1914,
p. 86, noticed pearl shells in the Gascoyne districts similarly marked to those at
Sunday Island. He concluded that they had been carried southward by barter,
as the shells indigenous to the Gascoyne districts were much smaller and belong
to a different species (probably M. margaritifera).

Roth, 1897, p. 163, when studying the aborigines of south-western Queensland,
found that the pearl shell ornaments were traded to those districts from the north-
west. Similarly, the same author, in p. 112, mentioned that the baler shell orna-
ments reached the same districts by the north or north-easterly trade routes,
originating in the Gulf of Carpentaria. He traces these routes in considerable
detail.

Hale and Tindale (1934, p. 99) when at Princess Charlotte Bay, ascertained
the direction of their diffusion ; they write: ‘‘The area over which these baler shell

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 133

ornaments are made is limited to Cape York, but the shell discs are articles of trade
to southern inland people.’

Mr. T. Vogelsang, in a personal communication, said that trade in these orna-
ments, as well as pituri and other articles, took place among the Dieri along the
present Queensland stock route, which runs in a somewhat north-easterly direction,

An examination of the distribution and uses of these ornaments reveals an
interesting fact. In plaves where the articles originate they have, in general, an
utilitarian purpose, particularly in the ease of the baler shell. As these are traded
further from their source they assume the function of ornament, and in the most
distant localities are associated only with the ceremonial aspect of the tribe. Tu
other words, they tend to take on a more secret character as they travel further
from their source. The two types meet in South Australia, the Anjamatana tribe,
to the east, using the baler shell, and the Ngadjuri tribe, the adjacent tribe to the
west, the pearl shell.

REPLACEMENT,

The high value placed upon these shell ornaments in the mland districts is
Ulusirated by the fact that numerous replacements ov substitutes of both types of
shell ornaments have been found, and that such replacements have oceurred where
the shells have magical or ceremonial value. Thus the kaolin specimen (C, pl. ix),
collected at Cooper’s Creek, was made by tribes amony whom, as before observed,
the baler shell ornaments are of value both as magical objects and factors in initia-
tion rituals.

The bone example (A, pl. ix) is unfortunately unlocalized, but the legend of
the two Oruntja men, collected by Spencer and Gillen in Central Australia, in
which a Lonku-lonku was made from a shoulder-blade, shows that bone replacements
are known in Central Australia. Roth (1897, p. 112) records that at Roxburgh,
in north-west Queensland, and south of that station (which is well within the area
wherein the shells are used as ornaments at Boulia) the shell ornament is copied
by grinding down pieces of broken chinaware,

Another interesting replacement is that collected on the Canning Stock route
of Western Australia, where a fruit tin lid had been used in place of a pearl shell
ornament (D, pl. viii). C, pl. vii, figured as a comparison, is a pearl shell pen-
dant, also collected on the Canning Stock route,

Usr by Women.

In general these shell ornaments are for male use only, and this is a fact to
which any observers have drawn attention, Tt appears, however, that in certain

134 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

circumstances women are associated, as is shown by Gason’s description of the
circumcision ceremony, to which reference has been made earlier in this paper
(Gason, 1874, p. 18). Also in the Anjamatana tribe of the Northern Flinders
certain female relatives handle the baler shell necklace before it is placed round
the neck of the initiate. Sir Edward Stirling, in a note on shell ornaments in a
ease in the South Australian Museum, also mentions their use ‘‘in certain cireum-
stances’? by women. Hale and Tindale obtained specimens of baler shell orna-
ments at Princess Charlotte Bay from both men and women.

SUMMARY.

This paper describes the aboriginal shell ornaments of Australia. A selected
number are figured and described, and their method of manufacture, use, magical
value, mythology, design, and distribution are discussed.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

The authors wish to acknowledge the help received from both the Australian
Museum of Sydney and Miss D. Cowan of Western Australia.

LITERATURE,

Campbell, W. D. (1914) : Trans. Roy. Soc., W. Aust., 1.

Davidson, D. 8S. (1987) : Mem. Amer. Phil. Soc., LX.

Elkin, A. P. in F. D. McCarthy (1938) : Australian Aboriginal Art.

Gason, Samuel (1874) : The Dieyerie tribe of South Australian Aborigines, 1874.

Hale and Tindale (1934) : Rec. S. Aust. Mus.

Love, J. R. B. (1915) : Trans. Roy. Soc., 8S. Aust., XL.

Martin and Panter (1863) : Journals and reports of two voyages to the Glenelg
River and North-Western Australia.

Mountford, C. P. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc., 8S. Aust., LXI,

Roth, Walter E. (1897) : Ethnological Studies among the North-Western Central
Queensland Aborigines.

Spencer and Gillen (1899) : Native Tribes of Central Australia.

Spencer and Gillen (1904) : Northern Tribes of Central Australia.

UO D>

MoUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 135
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate viii.

Repaired plain Pearl Shell ornament, Central Australia.
Engraved Pearl Shell ornament, Western Australia.
Engraved Pearl Shell ornament, Canning Stock Route, Western Australia.

Fruit tin lid used in place of Pearl Shell ornament, Canning Stock Route,
Western Australia.

and F. Method of wearing Pearl Shell ornaments, Sunday Island, north-

western Australia.

Plate ix.

Plain bone ornament, locality unknown.

Plain Baler Shell ornament, Minnie Downs, South Australia.

Plain Kaolin ornament, Cooper’s Creek, South Australia.

Decorated Pearl Shell ornament, Barrow Creek, Central Australia.
Decorated Baler Shell ornament, Daly Waters, Northern Territory.

Initiate wearing Baler Shell ornament, Anjamatana Tribe, South Australia.

Baler Shell on spear-thrower, Princess Charlotte Bay, Northern Queensland.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE VIII.

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. VI, PLATE IX.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF STONE MONUMENTS
OF THE WORORA

By J. R. B. LOVE

Summary

Attention has been called to the presence in Australia of arranged stones, presumably
evidence of a stone-cult of the aboriginals, but concerning which there has been little
recorded at first-hand from aboriginal informants.

Professor F. Wood Jones (1925) has drawn attention to some interesting arrangements
of stones in South Australia, and he also notes references by Brough Smyth (1978) to
arranged stones in Victoria.

ILLUSTRATIONS or STONE MONUMENTS
oF THE WORORA

By J. R. B. LOVE.

Plates x—xiv.

ATTENTION has been called to the presence in Australia of arranged stones, pre-
sumably evidence of a stone cult of the aboriginals, but concerning which there has
been little recorded at first-hand from aboriginal informants.

Professor F. Wood Jones (1925) has drawn attention to some interesting
arrangements of stones in South Australia, and he also notes references by Brough
Smyth (1878) to arranged stones in Victoria.

The territory of the Worora tribe, which lies between the Glenelg and Prince
Regent Rivers, in North-Western Australia, is plentifully besprinkled with stone
monuments which still oeeupy an important place in the mythology, as also in
the everyday talk, of the people.

The Worora stone monuments are of two different classes, viz. those which are
natural rock formations and to which a mythological origin has been attributed
by the Worora, and, secondly, those which are patently of human arranging. This
second class is again to be divided into two groups, those to which the Worora
attribute a supernatural origin, and those which are admittedly of human arrange-
ment or erection.

Arranged stones, if heavy enough to withstand the levelling tendencies of rain
and wind, remain as permanent memorials to the activities of the men who ar-
ranged them, even though, as must be the case in many parts of Australia, the
people who knew their meaning have long been dead. But, whether arranged or
natural formations, the stories associated with these rocks and stones can be ob-
tained only from men to whom they have a meaning and value.

Fortunately, in the Worora tribe we have a surviving people who retain their
traditional lore; this lore the elder men willingly impart to a trusted enquirer.

The Worora believe in a class of supernatural beings, named Wondjuna.
Each local horde of the tribe has its own particular Wondjuna, with his own
proper name. The Wondjuna have been elsewhere described by the writer (Love,
1929, p. 6-15) and by Professor A. P. Elkin of Sydney (1930, p. 256-269). Many
of the natural features of the land, and also the arranged stones, represent in the
Worora mythology, the scenes of exploits of one or many of the Wondjuna.

138 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Animals, birds, and insects are also credited with human attributes in the
times past, and many of the natural or arranged rocks and stones represent ex-
ploits of various of these creatures. The Wondjwna, and no less the lower creatures
featured in Worora mythology, are represented in story as having travelled about
the land, hunting for food and performing ceremonies in much the same way as
the present generation of Worora people, and have left the land dotted with monu-
ments to their experiences.

Most of these places, whether naturally or artificially marked, play an impor-
tant part in the Worora theory of conception and birth. The Worora belief is that
a man conceives the spirit of his child, either in a dream or by catching it in a
lightning flash, at some spot where the spirits of children are present, waiting to
be conceived by the father. When a child is born, the father thinks back to where
he imagines he may have camped and conceived the spirit of the child. When the
child can sit up, the father gives it the name of the place where he believes he con-
ceived it. This place is called wungguru. A normal child, boy or girl, claims a
certain spot as his or her wungguru, the place from which his spirit emerged, and
where other spirits are waiting to be conceived by man and born as children.

Some of the rock monuments, natural or arranged, are just described as
wungguru, without any special incident in the mythical past being allotted to
them. There does not seem to be any difference in efficacy or fertility between
those wungguru which have an incident attached to them and those which have
none.

In the illustrations to this paper it will be seen that the monuments may be

(1) Remarkable natural features;

(2) Monoliths, not heavier than one or two men could erect;

(3) Groups of elongated or peculiar-looking stones ;

(4) Elaborate arrangements of stones, such as circles, parallel lines, ovals, or

more intricate designs ;

(5) Cairns.

Among monuments which have no mythological story are single stones erected
to commemorate some striking incident, such as the killing of a big kangaroo, the
place where a man had a narrow escape (e.g. from snakebite or fall from a horse).
Also, a stone placed in a prominent position to draw attention to a sacred place,
or even to a spot where a hunter might hope to find a kangaroo resting behind a
rock, On one oceasion when the writer shot a ‘‘plain turkey’’ his aboriginal eom-
panion marked the place with a stone. Such spots could become legendary, and,
with repeated exaggerations in the telling, even mythical in time.

Im ascribing natural features to the activities of mythical ancestors, the ob-

LOVE—ABORIGINAL STONE MONUMENTS 139

jects represented are enormously magnified by their monuments. Thus a parcel
of cooked fruit is represented by a rock more than one hundred feet long (A, pl. x) ;
the digging of an edible root is shown by a cleft in the rock many feet wide and
many yards long, and the head of a Wondjuna is two feet in diameter. Cairns have
quite different meanings in different localities. Thus, in the illustrations given, a
cairn represents the place where a Wondjuna lay down and died (so Sir George
Grey was not so far out in his assumption that the cairns he saw near the Prince
Regent River were tombs) ; again, a big stone on a cairn represents a mass of
cooked food (D, pl. xiv) ; and a group of cairns are ‘‘sneezing places’’ (C, pl. x).

It may be remarked that, with the one exception of the stone that represents a
subineision (B, pl. xiv), none of the long or cylindrical stones has any phallic
significance.

A further type of stone arrangement is that left after death and burial cere-
monies. On the first night after the death of a man the body, with thumbs tied
together and big toes tied together, is doubled wp, laid on its side on the ground,
and surrounded by an oval of stones set in the earth. Next day the body is placed
on a platform of branches, to await the drying and bleaching of the bones. The
oval of stones remains, and is often to be found where the name of the man who
died has long been forgotten. This oval looks like a grave, but no body remains
are there (C, pl. xiii). The burial platform is laid across poles supported by four
corner posts, which are in turn supported by small piles of stones. When the
platform has decayed, or been burnt by a bush fire, these corner supports remain,
as four little heaps of stones. When the body is placed on the platform the custom
is, or was, to put a long line, or else a circle, of large stones near, or surrounding,
the body on the platform. Each stone represented aman. After a day or two, the
elder men, particularly the banmandja, or wizard, examined this line or cirele of
stones. Should one of them be marked by a splash of the fluid dripping from the
decomposing corpse on the platform it was taken as proof that the man represented
by that stone was the guilty one, responsible for the death, and the suspected in-
dividual was speared by men detailed for the purpose. This line or cirele of stones
remains when the bones have been removed for placing in the appropriate cave.

LITERATURE.

Brough Smyth, R. (1878) : Aborigines of Victoria.

Elkin, A. P. (1930) : Oceania, i, No. 3, pp. 258-269.

Love, J. R. B. (1929) : Trans. Roy. Soc., W. Aust., xvi, pp. 15-16.
Mountford, C. P. (1938) : Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Aust., Ixii.

Wood Jones, F. (1925) : Journ, Roy. Anthro. Inst., lv.

140 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate x.

A. Sandstone rock on the sea coast. The larger rock above the cliff represents ‘a
wallet of paper-bark, such as is used for carrying food. The smaller rock on
top is a mass of cooked ‘‘mandjawora’’, a small black berry that is roasted,
pounded into a mass, and then carried to the main camp to be shared. These
masses may weigh five pounds. The rock is named ‘‘Tjimbalert’’, which
means the bark dish (1).

27

B. The wungguru of the ‘‘white-fish’’, a hollow circle of stones. This is the re-

productive centre for this species of fish.

C. Dindjin kart, meaning ‘‘Sneezing-things’’. Cairns of stones near Sale River.
Seven cairns can be seen in the picture. The explanation is that a man who
might pass that way on his hunting must deposit a spear or a stick on one of
these heaps. Should he fail to do this, he would be troubled by sneezing for
the rest of the day.

D. Wiarinja, a stingray. This is a rock that has fallen across a stream, several
miles from the sea shore. It represents a stingray that swam from the sea to
this place, but could go no further.

Plate xi.

A. Kulorubada. The large round stone projecting from the earth represents the
head of Kulorubada. It isa red stone. The name Kulorubada means ‘‘ He-
having-the-tranquil-dove’’. The white stone set on the head represents the
dove (Geopelia tranquilla), named kulorugu. The dove is sitting on the head
of Kulorubada. The little stones round the head are chicks of the dove.

B. Kunggurum, the wungguru of the kunggurum, a palm with an edible fruit.

C. Ilaidja, a yellow, cylindrical stone, set in a cave that contains the pictures of the
Wondjuna named Kulorubada. Ilaidja is the edible root of a lily. The root
is cooked in ashes, then pounded and rolled into a more or less cylindrical
shape, really very like this stone in shape and colour. Beside the wadja stone
is part of a human thigh bone, from a long-forgotten cave burial.

D. Stone set to mark the proximity of a store-house of sacra (‘‘bull-roarers’’).

(1) Mountford, 1938, fig. 12, p. 252, figures an aboriginal crayon drawing from the Warburton
Ranges of Western Australia that illustrates the wooden dish, resting on the lower grinding
stone, which was left behind by the mythical Kunkarunkara women. These are now a large hill
near Meitika water hole.

LoveE—-ABORIGINAL STONE MONUMENTS 141

Plate xii.

A, Rangqudj ingganung, meaning, ‘‘ Where-the-heart-is’’, This is a heart-shaped
stone, representing the heart of a kangaroo killed here by a group of Wond-
juna,

RB. Burot kenga, weaning ‘‘ He-wrestled’’. This is the scene of a great wrestling
that took place among kangaroo ancestors. The stones set upright represent
kangaroos that wrestled ; stones lying on the ground those thrown down in the
struggle,

C. Ranggudj-inggaunung. The heap of stones on a boulder is the spot where the
Wondjuna eooked the kangaroo, whose heart they put on another stone,

D, Kanawei, a great man of the Worora, once lay asleep near a tree. He was
awakened, or said that he was awakened, by a black snake passing over his
thighs, fle rose and set wp this stone to mark the place, and is here seen with
his hand resting on his kawanja (black snake) stone.

Plate xiii.
A. Kulorubada, a cairn at the foot of a ‘‘bottle tree’’ (Adansonia gregorti). This
marks the spot where the Wondjuna named Aulorubadu lay down and died.

B. Ngo:-go. This group of stones is on the brow of a hill overlooking an arm of
the sea. According to the story the sea once threatened to overflow the earth.
As the tide rose in the yalley below, a boobook owl, seeing the danger, flew to
the brow of the hill. He seated himself on this spot, looked down on the sea,
and uttered his awe-inspiring ery, ‘‘Ngo:k-nge:k! Nqo:k-ongo:k!l’’ Seeing
the big eyes of the owl, and hearing his terrifying voice, the sea receded. These
stones arose spontaneously to mark the place where maununggota, the boobook
owl, saved the land from being overwhelmed by the sea.

C, Stones at the scene of a burial platform, The remnants of the bleaching plat-
form can be seen, four poles supported by stones. The line of big stones
passing across the picture is the row of ‘‘inquest’’ stones, At the right ean
be seen the oval of stones where the corpse lay for the first night, before being
placed upon the platform.

D. Men at the store of sacra, One man stooping to remove a ‘‘ Bull-roarer’’ from
the cleft where they are stored.
Plate xiv.

A. Tjakarara-tjari-kadjirim, a double row of stones that represents the root of a
wild grape extending under the surface, In the centre foreground, at the end

142 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the double row, is a stone with a hole in it. This represents the kuworw, or

butt-of-the-stem, the part where the stem of the grape vine emerges from the
soil.

B. Njanggaltja, subincision. This stone resembles a subincised penis, and has been
set up because of its resemblance.

C. Tjakarara-tjari-kadjirim, which means ‘‘ Where-they-dug-tjakarara’’, the root
of the wild grape. This is an inlet of the sea, which is said to have been made
by some Wondjuna digging out roots of the wild grape.

D. Tjakarara-tjari-kadjirim. The large stone set on the cairn represents the mass
of cooked and pounded grape vine root. This cooked mass is called nuguwa.

VoL. VI, PLATE X.

kec. S.A. MusEuM

Rec. $,A. MusEuMmM VoL. VI, PLaTe NI.

Rec. S.A. MuseEuM VoL. VI, PLATE XII.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE NITI.

Rec. S.A. MusrEuM VoL. VI, PLaTE XIV.

SOME AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC
SKULLS

By FRANK J. FENNER, HONORARY CRANIOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN
MUSEUM

Summary

The term scaphocephaly has been used in two ways in anthropological literature.
Firstly, to describe long narrow normal skulls, like those of the Australian and the
Eskimo, which are distinguished by a flattening of the paramedian parts of the frontal
and parietal bones, and by the development of a sagittal crest of the parietal and
sometimes also of the frontal bone.

Secondly, the term is used in connection with a very long narrow type of skull in
which there is invariably a premature, probably foetal, synostosis of the sagittal
suture. These skulls are rare, and occur in many races of man, European, Egyptians,
Negroes, Australians, etc. In this paper, in accordance with Poirier (1931) the term
scaphocephaly is used to describe the second type of skull, i.e. the pathological type.

Some AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC
SKULLS

By FRANK J, FENNER, Honorary Cranio.ocisr, Sourn Ausrratian Museum.
Plate xv and Text-fig. 1-8.

INTRODUCTION.

THE term scaphocephaly has been used in two ways in anthropological literature.
Firstly, to describe long narrow normal skulls, like those of the Australian and the
Eskimo, which are distinguished by a flattening of the paramedian parts of the
frontal and parietal bones, and by the development of a sagittal crest of the parie-
tal and sometimes also of the frontal bone.

Secondly, the term is used in connection with a very long narrow type of skull
in which there is invariably a premature, probably foetal, synostosis of the sagittal
suture. These skulls are rare, and occur in many races of man, Europeans, Egyp-
tians, Negroes, Australians, ete. In this paper, in accordance with Poirier (1931)
the term scaphocephaly is used to describe the second type of skull, 7.e. the patho-
logical type.

It may be noted here that premature closure of the sagittal suture may occur
without any trace of scaphocephaly, e.g. skull A999 (South Australian Muesum,
Adelaide), that of a youth of 14 years, shows complete synostosis of the posterior
half of the sagittal suture without any deformation of the skull. Davis (1867)
deseribes a similar skull, that of an Australian female about 17 years old with
premature obliteration of the sagittal suture, but no seaphocephaly. Hamy (1874)
also describes skulls with premature sagittal synostosis but no seaphocephaly, and
suggests that in these the fusion begins at some later (postnatal) period, when the
ossification of the parietals is well advanced. In scaphocephalie skulls the synos-
tosis commences during intranterine life.

PREVIOUS LITERATURE.

The only references which I can find to scaphocephaly in the Australian abo-
riginal are those of Davis (1867). He describes scaphocephalic skulls from Me-
Leay River, New South Wales, and Victoria Tribe, Australia.

N. de Miklouko-Maclay (1883) published a short description of skull B1, de-
seribed later in this paper, but did not recognize it as being scaphocephalic,

144 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SOURCE OF MATERIAL.

During an examination of over 2,000 Australian aboriginal skulls in the
museums of Adelaide, Melbourne, Sydney, and Canberra, five scaphocephalic
skulls were seen. Particulars of these skulls may be given:

REFERENCE
No. LOCALITY. AGE. SEX. MUSEUM.
A.248 Wellington, R. Murray, c.6yrs. —— S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

South Australia
A.16520 Teatree Gully, South Australia Adult J 8.A. Museum, Adelaide.

B.1 Rockhampton, Queensland Adult rol Australian Museum,
Sydney.

31837 Riverina District, N.S.W. Adult roe National Museum,
Melbourne.

38586 Riverina District, N.S.W. e.4-5 yrs. —— National Museum,
Melbourne.

OBSERVATIONS MADE.

All five scaphocephalic skulls were measured and examined. Circumstances
prevented a fuller examination of the two specimens from the National Museum,
Melbourne. A search for a comprehensive series of measurements with which to
compare those of the abnormal skulls proved fruitless, and the figures given in
Table 1 are from several sources. The reference numbers of the measurements cor-
respond with those in Martin (1928), whose technique has been followed in all
cases.

(a) Measurements 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 18, 20, 22a, 25, 26, 27, 28(1), 29, 30, 31(1),
32(1), 32(5), 33(1), 33(4), 38, 48, 44, 45, 46, 48, 50, 51, 52, 54, 55, 72, 73, 74, 75,
and 75(1) were made from the reconstructed normae of Wood Jones (1929).

(b) Measurements 5, 17, 28, 31, 40 are the averages of the measurements of
the first 50 skulls of Berry and Robertson’s series (1914), from which Wood
Jones’s normae were constructed.

(c) Measurements 7, 11, 12, 23, 24, 57, 57(1) were made on a series of fifty
adult crania (unsexed) from Swanport, S.A., which are housed in the South Aus-
tralian Museum.

(d) Measurements 62, 63 are from Campbell (1925).

No measurements of juvenile Australian aboriginal crania were available for
comparison. For this reason five normal aboriginal children’s skulls of about six
years of age were measured. The skulls are from the collection in the South Aus-
tralian Museum.

The measurements are set out in Table 1, and the indices derived therefrom in
Table 2. Where a figure is preceded by a question mark, the measurement is ap-
proximate owing to indefinite measuring points.

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 145

TABLE I.
Scaphocephalic Skulls.
Normal Juvenile Skulls, Juvenile. Adult.
Ox Normal pee ees
Bub es * Adult is
Measurement. £ : mM S at oo Skull. oo D & a
2 & S&S 8 8S Baverge £ 8B 8 | &
aa <a <q a < <q figures. <q 8 o8 feat <q
Greatest skull length 1 171 173 180 167 175 185 197 196 213 203 200
Glabella-Inion length 2 131 159 164 155 162 179 177 156 204 202 189
Glabella-Lambda 3 163 161 172 164 167 180 187 2195 7208 197 189
length
Skull base length 5 88 89 87 85 87 98 86 84 114 101 _
Length and width of 7 933 35 36 37 38 36 31 31 36 937 _
foramen magnum 30 27 28 32 31 31 30 26 30 32 —
Greatest skull breadth 8 131 121 129 126 125 130 122 134 123+ 121 113
Smallest frontal , 9 90 89 90 91 89 94 93 95 101 90 88
breadth
Greatest frontal 10 103 103 109 105 103 107 104 122 104 104 98
breadth

Biauricular breadth 11 105 99 105 104 106 119 100 93 115 108 _
Greatest occipital 12 100 99 91 105 98 111 100 106 2108 106 102
breadth
Mastoid breadth 13 85 89 107 90 91 99 85 74 103 100 —
Basion-Bregma height 17 ?114 119 119 119 116 130 1124-9137 149 134 —_—
Ear-Bregma height 20 107 104 114 108 107 110 108 7131 128 118 110
Highest point of skull 22a 95 90 95 98 93 94 101 130 116 101 98
from Glabello-
Tnion line
Horizontal cireumfer- 23 480 471 495 471 478 535 505 536 560 545 527
ence on Glabello-
Opisthion line
Transverse arefrom 24 267 265 284 276 270 293 267 3345 310 262 7260
porion to porion
Median sagittal are 25 341 342 357 343 345 360 392 458 420 408

Median sagittal 26 113 120 117 115 120 120 142 7188 138 1386 136
frontal are

Median sagittal 27 115 108 127 118 128 128 137-7140 2160 152 99127
parietal are

Median sagittal 28 113 114 110 109 109 112 113 = 7130 #122 2120 seo
occipital are "

Median sagittal 28(1) 75 75 67 69 69 56 75 295 65 50 72
supra-occipital are

Median sagittal 29 97 102 103 99 102 111 110 92137 121 103 114
frontal chord

Median sagittal 30 105 101 114 105 107 115 126 9134 150 135 9121
parietal chord

Median sagittal 31 92 91 88 94 87 93 82 2102 298 96 _—
occipital chord

Median sagittal 31(1) 65 65 57 64 61 52 65 985 959 48 64
supra-occipital
chord

Frontal angle 32(1) 68° 62° 63° 63° 60° 57° 66° 70° 66° 57° 59°
(Bregma-Nasion-
Tnion)

Angle of frontal Saya is He LST PIS ee EBB eelgae ld te yap? 126° 129°
convexity

Angle of Lambda- 33(1) 157° 103° —_ — 104° 94° 114° 118° 104° 92° %97°

Inion line with
Frankfurt Hori-
zontal

146 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TapuE I (continued).

Scaphocephalic Skulls.
Normal Juvenile Skulls. Juvenile. Adult.
O's Normal
WV ; 5 hy is} oo Sku © bY aS
Leasurement s 5 S & x Ea Se Average 4 % 3 r B
: aa < a <q < figures. <4 8 0 fq <
Occipital angle 83(4) 129° 122° 122° 129° 120° Tet 104s to? LSS lig? 3982
(Lambda-Inion-
Opisthion)
Cubic capacity of 38 1,090 1,040 1,230 1,140 1,070 1,290 41,160 — 1,400 1,270 _
skull (in ¢.es.)
Face length 40 284 92 92 85 86 99 287 83 105 — —_
Upper facial breadth 43 92 93 96 96 92 109 92 997 119 <= —_
Biorbital breadth 44 86 85 88 88 86 99 85 —_— 106 —_ —_
Bizygomatic breadth 45 297 105 116 ©2107 110 128 99 — 144 —_ oo
Middle facial breadth 46 ise 79 87 77 76 93 80 —_— 299 —- —
Upper facialheight 48 53 58 59 52 54 65 950 44 68 — —_
Anterior interorbital 50 17 20 23 20 18 21 20 — 25 24 —_—
breadth
Orbital breadth from 51 R.36 R.34 R33 B.36 R35 39 R.34 R.— R44 R420 —
maxillo-frontal L.36 1.34 1.34 1.36 L. 34 L.34 L.34 L.44 L.— —
suture
Orbital height 52 R.28 R.33 R.32 B.30 R32 34 R31 RB.— R33 R32 —
L.28 0.31 £L.32 1.29 1.32 L.31 L.28 L31 L— —
Nasal breadth 54 20 20 21 20 21 26 21 — 30 — —_
Nasal height 55 36 45 43 40 40 47 236 — 53 —_ —
Smallest breadth of 57 5 8 11 8 5 10 8 _ 13 — —_
nasal bone
Greatest breadth of | 57(1) 12 16 16 14 14 17 14 ay 221 —< —
nasal bone
Palatal length 62 36 46 44 43 40 51:5 40 — 54 _— —_
Palatal breadth 63 29 28 27 25 30 39 31 —_ 35 — —
Profile angle 72 84° 76° 78° 83° 80° 89° 91° 85° 87° —
Nasal profile angle 73 87° 79° 83° 86° 84° 92° 999° 87° 92° — —
Alveolar profile angle 74 78° 68° 62° = 64° 68° 73° = 81° 66° — _—
Profile angle of nasal 75 82° 69° 67° 76° 76° 66° 99° — 76° — —_—
roof
Angle ofnasalroof 75(1) 2° pe i ae 4° 13° —8° —_ 4 BST — —

with profile line
* These refer to the definitions given by Martin (1928). + 130 between supra = meatal crests.

DESCRIPTION OF SKULLS.

(1) A 248, child of approximately six years, Wellington, South Australia.

The accompanying figures (fig. 1, 4, and 5) show the remarkable shape of
this skull. There is no trace whatever of a sagittal suture. The posterior third of
the right and the posterior two-thirds of the left squamous sutures are also com-
pletely fused. All other sutures are normal for the age.

Accompanying this synostosis is a great forward bulging of the frontal bone,
with a strongly orthognathie face, an elongation of the parietal bone, and down-
ward projection of the occipital bone behind. There is a well-developed keel along
the median sagittal plane of the frontal bone extending from glabella to just

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 147

behind bregma, where it is replaced by the flattening of a post-coronal depression,
The parietals themselves are very slightly keeled about. half-way back. From here
the bone slopes away rapidly to the occipital bone. There is no sign of a parietal
tuberosity on either side.

Tasie IT,
Scaphocephalie Skulls.
Normal Juvenile Skulls, Juvenile, Adult.
Se oe —Io1—<—. =_eeeses oo
a € Adult Stull Pa
Ya 2 & 5 8 @ “Averge 2 B 8 e
Q Dal et to iS 2 ol we ra nd cal
<q <q < <q 4 Figures. <4 oF en ise) 4
Leugth—Breadth 76:6 70-0 70-2 Ti-4 71-4 70-4 61-9 68-4 57-7 59-6 56-5
Longth—Teight 66-7 68-8 66-1 71-3 66-0 70-3 56-8 69-4 70-0 66-0 —
Breadth—Height 87-0 98-3 2-4 94-4 92-8 100-0 91-8 102+2 121-1 117-4 —
Length—Anricular height 62-6 60-1 63-3 G4-7 61-1 59-5 54:8 66-8 60-1 58:1 —
Skull Height 72+5 56-7 57-9 63-2 61-2 o2-5 57-1 83-3 56-8 50-0 —
Transverse Frontal 87-3 86-6 82-6 86-7 86-4 90-+ 884 77-8 96-1 86-5 89-8
Transverse Fronto-parietal 68-7 73-6 69-8 72-2 71-2 72-3 76-2 70-9 88-1 74-4 77-9
Sagittal Pronto-parietal 101-8 90-0 108-5 100-3 93-8 106-7 96-5 74-5 116-0 108-8 93-4
Sagittal Frontal 85-8 85-0 88-3 86-1 85-0 2-5 77-5 G28 87-7 75-7 83-8
Sagittal Parietal 91-3 93-5 89-7 89-0 Sd-4 89-8 93:0 99-7 94-8 SS-8 95-3
Sagittal Oecipital 81-4 80-0 80:0 86-2 79-8 83-0 72-6 78-5 80-0 80-0 ae
Convexity IndexofSupra- 86-7 86-7 85-8 92-7 88-4 93-0 86-7 89-5 90-8 96-0 88-9
oceipital
Upper Face 54-6 55-2 50-9 48-6 49-1 a0-8 55-6 — 64-8 = —
Orbital 77-8 97-1 97-0 88-3 91-4 87-2 91-1 83-3 R.75-0 76-2 —
L. 70-5
Interorbital 19-8 23-5 26-1 22-7 29.3 21-2 93-5 = 25-5 _ —
Nasal 55-6 44-4 48-8 50-0 50-3 55-3 A+B — 466 — —_—
Palatal 80-6 60-9 61-4 78-2 75-0 76-0 77-5 — 4-8 -— —_
Transverse Cranio-facial 74-0 86-8 89-9 84-9 88-0 98-5 Bla — 117-0 — —
Fronto-biorbital 97-8 95-7 93-7 94-8 96-7 90-4 101-0 98-0 84-9 — —
Jugo-frontal 92-8 84-8 77-6 85-1 80-9 7a-4 94-0 — 70-0 — =
Transverse Nasal Bone 41:7 50-0 68+8 57-1 35-7 58-8 57-1 — fi2-0 = —

A study of the measurements shows that the frontal and parietal bones have
been considerably lengthened in a sagittal direction. The occipital bone has under-
gone no lengthening, but it bulges down because of the lower position of lambda.

In spite of the great longitudinal extension of the bones of the vault, the
breadth measurements of the skull are only shehthy reduced. This is due, in the
case of the greatest width measurement, to a lateral bulging of the squamous
temporal bone, a condition probably associated with the partial fusion of the
squamous sutures. In spite of the great length and normal width of the skull, the
eranial contents are approximately normal, This is due to the pronounced lateral
flattening of the parietal bones.

As the photograph (pl. xy, fig. 1) shows, there is a greater degree of local
bulging in this skull than is usually seen, here are bulges in front of the spheno-
parietal grooves, and the occipital bone consists of a large supraoccipital protuber-
ance and two smaller symmetrical bulges on the nuchal plane of the bone.

148 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The basis eranii is of normal dimensions, though somewhat curved with its
concavity downwards.

The face shows strong orthognathism, probably caused by the great bulging
of the frontal bone, and accentuated by the flatness of the nasal bones.

— A248. ----"A56. 9-1 Zem.

Fig. 1. Diopterographic tracings of norma. lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull A248
(Wellington, S.A.), compared with a normal aboriginal skull of a child about the same age (A56).
(B = bregma, L = lambda of A248) (B’ = bregma, L’ = lambda of A56).

There is no trace of the sagittal beak of Turner. The bone of the whole of the
vault is considerably thinner than normal, and the juga cerebralia are particularly
well marked. A skiagram of this skull (pl. xv, fig. 2) shows the ‘‘beaten-silver”’
effect in the bones of the vault.

The surface of the parietals shows no trace of the radiations and etching of the
bone on which Hamy comments, but this condition is evident on the frontal bone
just above glabella. The outer table of the parietal bone is beset with many tiny
vascular pores, some of which can be seen in figure. There are no parietal fora-

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 149

mina present, but in a series of 1,154 adult Australian skulls recently examined
(Fenner, 1938) absence of these foramina bilaterally was recorded in 36 per cent.

(2) A.16520, adult male, Teatree Gully, South Australia.

This skull, of which the face and basis eranii have been destroyed, was found
associated with a few other bones which are normal save for an exaggerated for-
ward bowing of the upper third of both femora.

Al6S20. 2° 1

Fig. 2. Diopteragraphic tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull A16520
(Teatree Gully, S.A.).

There is no trace of a sagittal suture. The skull is that of an old man, and
the coronal suture is obliterated save for pars complicata. The pars lambdoidea
of the lamboid suture is completely fused. The other sutures are open.

The general shape of the skull can be seen in the diagrams (fig. 2, 4, and 5).
There are no parietal tuberosities present, and there is a moderately well-developed
sagittal keel of the frontal and anterior half of the parietal bones. It has an excep-
tionally long, narrow skull, and there is no bulging of the temporal bone as was
noted in A.248.

The bone of the vault is very much thinner and lighter than in a normal adult
aboriginal skull. The surface of the bone has been somewhat injured by exposure,

150 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

but there are many tiny vascular pores over the parietal bones, especially near
the midline. There is a parietal foramen on the right side in its ordinary position,
and another small emissary foramen just above and to the right of lambda.

(3) B1, adult male, Rockhampton, Queensland.

This skull is imperfectly preserved, and most of the face is missing. There is:
no trace of a sagittal suture. All other sutures are normal and not synostosed at
all. Fig. 3, 4, and 5 show the shape of this specimen.

Fig. 8. Diopterographic tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalie skull Bl (Rock-
hampton, Q.).

The features in which this skull differs from A.16520 are in part those in
which distinct differences are found between Queensland and South Australian
skulls (Fenner, 1938), 7.¢. it is broader and higher, the temporal fossae are better
filled, and the occiput is somewhat more steeply planed than A.16520.

The sagittal keel is well developed, and extends along the whole of the frontal
and the anterior half of the parietal bones. The parietal tuberosities are better de-

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 151

veloped than in the other scaphocephalic skulls, but would be classed as small.
The surface of the parietal bones between the parietal tuberosities and the sagittal
erest is quite flat. The transverse occipital torus and the mastoid processes are well
developed, and the glenoid fossae deep. The basis cranii is of the usual aboriginal
type. Beyond the fact that the bone of the vault is not excessively thinned, it is
not possible to state whether there is any evidence of past disease of the bones.

A248. —-—Al6520. -----Bl.

O 1 22cm. .

Fig. 4. Diopterographic tracings of norma verticalis of the three scaphocephalic skulls
A248, A16520 and Bl. (Oriented about a common point N = nasion).

152 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(4) 31837, adult male, Parish of Nyang, Southern Riverina, New South
Wales.

This is a well preserved skull, rather highly impregnated with lime. There
is no trace of a sagittal suture. The coronal suture is almost completely fused,
whilst the pars asterica of the lambdoid is the only part of that suture not fused.
The internasal suture is fused in the greater part of its extent.

— A248. —-—-—Al6520. —---BI.

© 1 2cm.

Fig. 5. Diopterographic tracings of norma occipitalis of the three scaphocephalic skulls
A248, A16520 and Bl. (Oriented about a common Frankfurt horizontal).

It corresponds rather closely with the other adult Australian scaphocephalie
skulls (see fig. 6 and 7). It is greatly elongated, narrow, and high, and the
frontal bone is more bulging than usual. There is no sign of a parietal tuberosity
on either side; the sagittal crest of the parietal bones is fairly well developed, and
the bregmatie eminence of Klaatsch (1908) is strongly developed.

In its other features this skull is typical of the adult male Australian, with a
pronounced transverse occipital torus, well developed superorbital ridges and

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 153

supramastoid crests, deep nasion, wide nasal aperture, subnasal prognathism,
shallow guttered nasal margins, ete. There are no parietal foramina. The tem-
poral lines are very high and well marked.

The glenoid fossae show advanced arthritic changes. The suture between the
squamous temporal bone and the great wing of the sphenoid is raised up on a
prominent crest, and in front of this there is a well marked spheno-parietal groove.

Fig. 6. Diopterographie tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull 31837 (River-
ina District, N.S.W.).

(5) 38586, child ¢. 4-5 years old, near Moulamein, Southern Riverina, New
South Wales.
Although included here as a scaphocephalic skull, early closure of the sagittal

154 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

suture probably played only a part in the development of its remarkable shape.
It is fairly heavily mineralized and encrusted with carbonate of lime. The bones
constituting the right side of the face are missing.

Fig. 7. Diopterographic tracing of norma facialis of the scaphocephalic skull 31837 (Riverina
District, N.S.W.).

The sagittal, coronal, lambdoid, and greater part of both squamous sutures
appear to be fused. In general contour it resembles A.248 somewhat, with a very
protruberant forehead ; flattened, backwardly projecting parietal bones with no

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC: SKULLS 155

definite parietal tuberosities and no parietal foramina; and a rather bulbous occi-
pital bone.

It has several features which distinguish it from the South Australian skull.
Firstly, the extensive and general obliteration of sutures. Secondly, the large
knob-like bulge of the sagittal part of the bones of the vault, in the neighbourhood

of bregma. Also it is very heavy, and its great weight is due to the enormous
thickness of the bone. The greater part of the vault of this skull appears to be up
to 10 mm. in thickness, and the specimen weighs more than 34 lb.

Fig. 8. Diopterographic tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull 38586 (River-
ina District, N.S.W.).

There is a deep erosion just to the right of where lambda would probably lie.
It has irregular edges and does not penetrate the bone completely. The surface
of the bone has a curious pitted appearance over the greater part of the vault.

This skull merits a detailed study, and this short description is intended to do
no more than bring the skull under scientific notice.

156 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION.

Hamy (1874), in his review of the subject, comes to the conclusion that
scaphocephaly is the result of the synostosis of the two parietal bones, that this
synostosis is the result of a pathological process, probably inflammatory, and that
the deformation occurs only when the fusion begins during intranterine life at a
time close to the commencement of ossification of the cranial vault.

The evidence provided by these skulls supports this hypothesis. In two of
these skulls and in the McLeay River specimen described by Davis (1867) the sur-
face of the bone was covered with fine vascular pores—evidence of the pathological
condition of the bone. The other three skulls are not sufficiently well preserved
to determine the condition of their bone.

Hamy describes a scaphocephalic skull in which the posterior third of the
squamous suture is synostosed, and mentions that he considers this synostosis to
be of quite a different origin from the sagittal fusion, namely secondary to growth
changes in the underlying brain.

In skull A.248 of this series there is a synostosis of the posterior parts of the
squamous suture bilaterally ; skull 38586 shows but a trace of the squamous suture,
and Davis’s McLeay River specimen had a completely obliterated right squamous
suture. Only three out of 1,200 normal aboriginal skulls recently examined showed
fusion of the squamous sutures, and these were all the skulls of aged individuals.
Thus it seems likely that the squamous synostosis in the skulls we are considering
is definitely related to the sagittal synostosis, and there is no reason to doubt that
it is a further result of the same underlying pathological process which was re-
sponsible for the early fusion of the sagittal suture. What this pathological pro-
cess was, other than that it was probably inflammatory, is not known.

Hauschild (1921) said that seaphocephalic skulls showed a heavy layer of
osseous tissue on the tabula interna beneath the obliterated sagittal suture. The
vault of the skulls described here was not cut open, but there did not appear to be
any great thickening of bone beneath the obliterated sagittal suture as far as could
be ascertained.

SUMMARY.

Five scaphocephalic Australian aboriginal skulls have been measured and
deseribed, and their measurements compared with those of series of normal abo-
riginal skulls.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

I am indebted to Professor F. Wood Jones for the diopterographic tracings
of skulls 31837 and 38586, and for his help in the preparation of the paper. I have

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 157

to thank Mr. D. J. Mahony, Director of the National Museum, Melbourne; Dr. C.
Anderson, Direetor of the Australian Museum, Sydney; and the Director, Mr. H.
M. Ilale, and Board of Governors of the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, tor
their kindness in allowing me to examine the skulls in their care. Mr. C. IH. Mar-
shall, of the Adelaide Hospital, kindly prepared the skiagram reproduced in
pl. xv, fig, 2.

REFERENCES.

Berry, R. J. A. and Robertson, A. W. D. (1914): Diopterographie Tracings in
Three Normue of Ninety Australian Aboriginal Crania. Trans. Roy. Soc.,
Vict., vi.

Campbell, T. D. (1925) : ‘* The Dentition and Palate of the Australian Aborigine.”’
University of Adelaide Pub., No. 1.

Davis, J. Barnard (1867) : Thesaurus Craniorum, London.

Fenner, F. J. (19388) : The Australian Aboriginal Skull: Its non-metrical morpho-
logical characters (in manuscript).

Hamy, FE. T. (1874): Sur la genése de la scaphocephalie. Bull. Soc, d’Anthrop.
de Paris, Ser. 2, ix, p. 836.

Tauschild, M. W. (1921) : Verh. d. anatom. Ges., Ergzh, Anatom. Anz., liv., p. 85
(Abstr. in Am. J. Phys. Anthrop., v, p. 91).

Klaatseh, H, (1908): “The Skull of the Australian Aboriginal.’’ Reports from
the Pathological Laboratory of the Lunacy Department, N.S. Wales, i, Part 3,
p. 45.

Martin, R, (1928) ; ‘‘ Lehrbuch der Anthropologie’’, Bd. I1, Jena.

Miklouko-Maclay, N. de (1888): ‘‘On a very dolichocephalie skull of an Aus-
tralian Aboriginal.’’ Proc, Linn, Soc., N.S. Wales, viti, p. 401.

Poirire, P., Charpy, A., et Nicolas, A, (1931): Traité d’anatomie Humaine, 41h
Ed., Tome 1, Fase, 1, Paris.

Wood Jones, F. (1929) : Journal of Anatamy, Lxill, p. 352.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE xv.

Vig. 1, Photograph from norma lateralis of seaphocephalic skull A.248 (S.A.M.,
Adelaide). Note the small yasenlar foramina on the parietal bone
and the fusion of the posterior part of the temporoparietal suture.
(Photo: K. Sheard.)

Fig. 2. Skiagram from norma lateralis of scaphocephalic skull A.248. Note the
thinning of the lateral parts of the vault due to the pressure of the
vrowing brain, Photo: C. H. Marshall.)

Rec. S.A. MusEUM VoL. VI, PLATE XV.

A NEW STROMATEIFORM FISH FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By GILBERT P. WHITLEY, F.R.Z.S., ICHTHYOLOGIST,
THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, SYDNEY

(Contribution from The Australian Museum, )

Summary

A most interesting fish has been submitted to me for identification by the Director of
the South Australian Museum. It belongs to the Series Stromateiformes, family
Nomeidae, and represents a new genus and species, quite unlike any hitherto
described.

It is hoped that efforts will be made to obtain further specimens of this fish, since the
study of its oesophagus, to ascertain whether teeth are present there, its
branchiostegals, gill-arches, and vertebrae is very desirable, and cannot be carried out
on the unique type-specimen.

A NEW STROMATEIFORM FISH rrom SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By GILBERT P. WHITLEY, F.R.Z.S., [cHTHyoLocist, THe Ausrratian Museum,

SYDNEY.
(ConTRIBUTION FROM THE AusrRALIAN Museum. )

Plate xvi.

A most interesting fish has heen submitted to me for identification by the Director
of the South Australian Museum. It belongs to the Series Stromateiformes, family
Nomeidae, and represents a new genus and species, quite unlike any hitherto
deseribed.

It is hoped that efforts will be made to obtain further specimens of this fish,
since the study of its oesophagus, to ascertain whether teeth are present there, its
branchiostegals, gill-arches, and vertebrae is very desirable, and cannot be carried
out on the unique type-specimen,

Famity NOME IDAE
Genus Criporsa gen, nov.
Orthotype CrIpoRSA MOONTA sp. nov.

A genus of small Stromateiform fishes with the body deep, form not elongate,
flesh firm. Eye large, without adipose lids. Jaws with cusped incisors in front
and small canines at the side. First dorsal fin well developed, with twelve spines.
Soft dorsal and anal fins with about twelve rays. Pectoral fins small. Ventral
fins well developed. Seales etenoid. Coloration patterned.

In some respects this genus may represent a form ancestral to the more highly
specialized Stromateiformes.

CRIDORSA MOONTA $p. Nov.

D. xi/12; A. iii/12; P. 18; V. 1/5; C. 17,
L.lat.53. L.tr.8/1/20 from first dorsal spine, to 5/1/5 on caudal pedunele.

Head (15 mm.) 3, depth of body (21 mm.) 2-1 in standard length (45 mm.).
Kye (5 mm.) 3, interorbital (6 mm.), 2-5 in head. General facies as shown in pl.
xvi. Head very scaly, except anteriorly, where there are many large pores, the

160 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

latter mingling with scales on the broad, weakly convex interorbital. Two large
nostrils on each side. Eyes large, with supraorbital ciliary processes. Jaws equal
anteriorly, deflected downwards laterally, Premaxillary well developed, reaching
back under the scaly maxillary.

A single outer row of erect incisor teeth in each jaw, each one compressed and
with several eusps. Behind these is a series of inconspicuous villiform teeth, and
there are small spaced canines at sides of jaws. Apparently there are no teeth on
vomer or palatines.

Tongue free, tip broadly rounded. Velum maxillare present. Margins of
preorbital and of upper limb of preoperculum serrated. Lower limb of preoper-
culum weakly serrated. The interoperculum, suboperculum, and branchiostegals
are covered by strong ctenoid scales. Opercular margin free, entire. A small
opereular spine. Gill openings wide, the membranes slightly overlapping across
the narrow isthmus.

Risk of damaging the unique specimen prevents me from examining the
branchiostegals, gill-arches and oesophagus. Chin and breast scaly. The broadest
part of the fish is just behind the eyes. Body compressed, deep oval, and entirely
covered with imbricate, thin but strong, markedly ctenoid scales, which extend
over the bases of the fins.

About forty predorsal scales.

Lateral line complete, not very conspicuous, subparallel to the dorsal outline,
each scale with a short tube.

Vent small, with a papilla, a little in advance of anal fin.

Caudal peduncle constricted.

First dorsal fin well developed, of eleven spines of which the middle ones are
longest. Soft dorsal base shorter than that of spinous dorsal, and invested with
geales. Anal fin commencing below notch between dorsal fins. It has three stout
spines (middle one longest), and the soft fin terminates before the end of the soft
dorsal. Twelve dorsal and anal rays, the last ones divided to their bases. Pectorals
small, rounded, upper rays longest. Ventrais well developed, not reaching anal
when adpressed, but only as far as vent. Caudal damaged in this specimen but
probably originally emarginate.

Colour. A water-colour painting of the fresh fish shows the eround-colour as
dull brownish on the back, becoming red to orange on the flanks, and dirty yel-
lowish on the belly.

The sides of the head, body, and caudal peduncle are well-endowed with
about sixty large white oval spots which break the eround-colour into a network.
There is a subhorizontal white stripe below the eye.

The pupil of the eye is blackish, the iris is reddish to white, and the orbital

WHITLEY—A NEW FISH FROM SOUTH’ AUSTRALIA 161

margin grey. The fins are similar in ground-colour to the adjacent parts of the
body.. There is a good deal of white on the proximal half of the spinous dorsal,
towards the rear of the soft dorsal, and over the caudal fin. The rays of the fins
are largely greyish.

In spirit, the specimen is brownish-grey with the white spots now much duller.
The fins are largely infuscated and the eye is blue. On the nape and belly the spots
tend to fuse with their fellows of the other side to form cross-bars.

Described and figured from the unique holotype of the species, a specimen
45 mm. in standard length or about 24% inches overall.

Loc. South Australia: Spencer Gulf, Moonta Bay (H. Kemp, Mar. 1938).
Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. F. 2023.

162

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATE xvi.

Cridorsa moonta sp. nov. (xX 4).

Rec. S.A. MusEUM VoL. VI, PLATE XVI,

IDOTASIA OF FIJI (COLEOPTERA, CURCULIONIDAE)

By ELWOOD G. ZIMMERMAN, BERNICE P. BISHOP MUSEUM,
HONOLULU, T.H.

Summary

Heretofore five species and two varieties of Idotasia have been recorded from Fiji. In
this paper I add three new species. In using the name Idotasia Pascoe in place of
Trigonopterus Fauvel, I follow Hustache (Coleopterorum Catalogus, part 151, p. 264,
1937).

Through the kindness of the South Australian Museum I have been able to examine
the types of Lea’s Fijian species and varieties (Trans. Roy. Sco. S. Aust., 11, 1928,
pp. 156-157). I have not seen specimens of Fairmaire’s three species described as
Trigonopterus anthrax, T. semicribosus, and T. merophysioides (Ann. Ent. Soc.
France, 1881, pp. 314-316). Dr. P. Lesne, of the National Museum at Paris, kindly
compared several of our specimens with the types of T. anthrax and T. semicribosus,
and found that none of them was the same. The type of T. merophysioides could not
be located. I have been unable to glean enough information from Fairmaire’s original
descriptions to feel safe in placing them in the key.

IDOTASIA or FIJI (COLEOPTERA, CURC ULIONIDAE)
By ELWOOD G, ZIMMERMAN, Bernice P, Bishop Museum, Honotuxu, T.H.

Fig. 1.

Hererorore five species and two varieties of Idotasia have been recorded from
Fiji, In this paper I add three new species. In using the name [dotasia Pascoe
in place ot Trigonopterus Fauvel, I follow Ilustache (Coleopterorum Catalogus,
part 151, p. 264, 1937).

Through the kindness of The South Australian Museum I have been able to
examine the types of Lea’s Fijian species and varieties (Trans. Roy. Soe., S. Aust.,
lii, 1928, pp. 156-157). 1 have not seen specimens of Fairmaire’s three species
deseribed as Trigonopterus anthrax, T. semrcribosus, and 1’, meroplysioides (Ann.
Ent. Soc. France, 1881, pp. 314-316). Dr. P. Lesne, of the National Museum at
Paris, kindly compared several of our specimens with the types of 7. anthrax and
7’. semicribosus, and found that none of them was the same. The type of 7’. mero-
physioides could not be located. I have been unable to glean enough information
irom Fairmaire’s original descriptions to feel safe in placing them in the key.

Creck List.

1. Ldotasia humeralis Lea. Viti Levu.

l-a. I[dotasia humeralis var. posthwmeralis Lea, Viti Levu.

i-b. Idotasia humeralis var. immaculata Lea, Viti Levu.

2. Idotasia cribricollis Lea. Viti Levu (Colo-i-Suva).

3. Jdotasia absoleta, new species. Viti Levu (Colo-i-Suva).

4, Idotasia grandicollis, new species. Yuvutha and Ongea, Lau.
5. Idotasia dehiscens, new species. Ovalau.

6. Idotasia semicribosus (Fairmaire). Ovalan.

7. Idotasia anthrax (Fairmaire). ‘‘Fiji.’’

8. Idotasiw merophysioides (Fairmaire). ‘‘ Fiji.”’

Key 'ro rug Spectres.
(1. anthrax, I. semicribosus and I. merophysioides omitted.)
1, Punctures on the pronotum comparatively small and round, separated by

distances at least equal to, and often greater than their diameters, never
close and coarse es e4 a Le a4 23 By

164 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pronotal punctures coarse and close, often subhexagonal, separated by
distances equal to or less than their diameters, often subconfluent .. 4.

2(1). Form stout (fig. 1, b), prothorax broader than long, longitudinally convex ;
longitudinal dorsal outline of prothorax and elytra discontinuous, the ely-
tra rising above the pronotum (fig. 1, e) ; ninth elytral stria with three
abnormally large, coarse punctures at the base; fore femora with a blunt
tooth on the outer side below... a; obsoleta.
Form elongate (fig. 1, a), prothorax as long: as broad, or but slightly broader
than long, the disk slightly or distinctly “flattened ; dorsal outline of pro-
thorax and elytra subcontinuous, the elytra not rising above the pronotum
(fig. 1, f) ; ninth elytral stria without much larger Sat a at the base;
femora edentate coat . ; oe

8(2). Elytra with a large black area in the baked fourth pedanine at the base and
lateral margin .. humeralas.
Elytra with a large black spot before the middle that i is isolated from the
base, suture and lateral margin .. .. hwmeralis var. posthumeralis.
Elytra without a humeral black spot .. hwmeralis var. immaculatus.

4(3). Elytra dehiscent, separately, subtubularly produced at the apex (fig. 1, d)
dehiscens.

Elytra either jointly and broadly rounded at the apex or slightly emar gi-

nate, not dehiscent nor separately produced (fig. 1, ¢) Pv Pageie

5(4). Pronotum so strongly convex at the base that the dorsal outline of pro-
notum and elytra form a conspicuous notch; prothorax large, strongly
rounded on the sides, punctures very deep and coarse, the interstices narrow
and subcarinate .. grandicollis.
Prothorax subparallel- sided in the basal half, the ‘dorsal outline subeon-
tinuous with that of the elytra, punctures moderately coarse, their inter-
stices flat and not appearing like carinae ne .. eribricollis.

IDOTASIA OBSOLETA sp. noy. (fig. 1, b, e).

Male. Derm reddish, thorax piceous, reddish to piceous below, variable;
with a small elongate patch of white scales near the apex of each elytron between
stria four and six and along the dorsal edge of the hind femora.

Head finely reticulate and almost impunctate, with a small interocular pune-
ture at the base of the median rostral carina. Rostrum with three polished dorsal
earinae that terminate at about half-way between the antennae and apex; with
fine, erect, or slanting setae in the striae; punctuation fine and inconspicuous.
Prothorax broader than long (3-2:2-+7), and almost as broad as the elytra in the
male, broadest at about the middle, rounded on the sides and without a subapical
constriction, apex gently areuate and about half as broad as the base; the longi-
tudinal dorsal outline evenly convex, slightly, but distinctly discontinuous with
that of the elytra; the dorsal punctures round, medium-sized, separated by dis-
tances equal to or greater than their diameters; with a row of impressed punctures
at the base; the punctures normally bearing short, fine setae. Hlytra subcuniform,

ZIMMERMAN—COLEOPTERA FROM FIJI 165

broadest near the base, thence rapidly narrowing to the broadly rounded apex;
striae obsolete, marked by series of small, shallow, inconspicuous oval punctures ;
with three large punctures at the base of row nine; intervals plain. Legs with the
fore femora with a blunt tooth on the anterior ventral margin slightly beyond the
middle that marks the termination of the outer ventral flange, the other femora

+

Fig. 1. Outlines of Fijian Idotasia: a, Idotasia humeralis; b, I. obsoleta; ¢, I. grandicollis;
e, I. dehiscens; e and f, dorsal outlines of I. obsoleta and I. hwmeralis,

edentate, with a punctate groove along the outer lower margin, and several irregu-
lar rows of punctures in the distal half; the tibiae without a median carina on the
outer side, with an almost obsolete, hardly discernible tooth at the base of the uncus
on the hind pair. Sternwm with the mesosternal receptacle impressed on each side
of the median line at the base only, with large round punctures; metasternum con-
eave, with coarse punctures on the sides and apex. Venter with the first two ven-
trites rather deeply and narrowly caniculate down the middle, with coarse punc-
tures bearing rather long, fine, erect setae on the sides, but impunctate in the
middle; ventrites three and four with two or three setiferous punctures on each
side; ventrite five concave, densely set with small setiferous punctures. Length,
3 mm.; breadth, 1-4 mm.

166 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

Fiji, Viti Levu. Holotype male in Bernice P. Bishop Museum, collected by
Mr. E. H. Bryan, Jr., at Colo-i-Suva, 29th June, 1924.

This species is closely allied to J. cribricollis Lea, but the prothorax is less
coarsely and densely punctate, and the fore femora are not edentate as in that
species.

IDOTASIA GRANDICOLLIS sp. nov. (fig. 1, ¢).

Derm shiny, thorax, usually the head, rostrum and venter black, antennae
and legs reddish, elytra reddish, black at the apex; with an elongate patch of white
seales at the apex of each elytron between the third and sixth striae and white
scaling along the dorsal edges of the hind femora.

Head almost impunctate on the crown, the front flattened and very coarsely
and confiuently punctate; with numerous fine, reenmbent setae. Rostrwm coarsely
tricarinate to the apical fourth or near the apex in the male, less coarsely so and
only in the basal half in the female; coarsely punctate throughout. Prothorax
about as broad as the elytra in the female and slightly broader in the male, some-
what broader than long in the female (3-8: 2-8), and distinetly broader than long
in the male (3°8:3:2) ; rather straightly and slightly expanded on the sides from
the base to the apical third, and thence rapidly narrowing to the apex; base sub-
truneate ; dorsum strongly convex, very coarsely and densely punctate throughout ;
the punctures large and subhexagonal, the interspaces very narrow. Elytra two-
fifths longer than the prothorax, broadest near the base, thence rather rapidly nar-
rowing to before the apex which is somewhat produced and rounded; striae im-
pressed only at the base and apex, otherwise marked by small, well separated,
elongate-oval punctures, the outer stria deeply impressed, its punctures very
coarse in the basal third ; intervals flat, the outer one raised in the basal third ; apex
coarsely punctate, with a dense, elongate patch of white scales in an impression
between the second and sixth stria, inflexed at the sides. Legs with the femora
edentate, the anterior pair serrate on the outer ventral edge in the basal two-thirds ;
rather densely, longitudinally punctate, with a sulcus along the outer ventral mar-
gin, the posterior pair with a dense dorsal patch of white scales in the distal half,
otherwise with erect or prostrate scales or setae; tibiae with a dorsal, median and
ventral carina on the outer surface, with a small, obtuse tooth at the outer side
above the base of the uncus on the hind pair. Sternwm with the mesosternal re-
ceptacle slanting forward from the middle of the mid coxae to the posterior edge
of the fore coxae, impressed on either side of the raised median line; metasternum
set with coarse, setiferous punctures. Venter with the first two ventrites deeply
and broadly concave in the male, shallowly concave in the female, rather closely
and evenly set with large, coarse setiferous punctures; third and fourth ventrites
impunctate; fifth ventrite somewhat concave, with numerous punctures bearing

ZIMMERMAN—COLEOPTERA FROM FIJI 167

sharp erect setae; the intercoxal process forming a broad angle. Length, 2-6—3-2
mm.; breadth, 1-2-1-5 mm.

Fiji. Holotype male, allotype female, in Bernice B. Bishop Museum, and six
paratypes from Yuvutha, Lau, August 11, 1924, from ‘‘Yangasa Cluster’’, and
one paratype from Ongea, Lau, July 30, 1924, all collected by Mr. HE. H. Bryan, Jr.

This species is allied to Z. cr¢bricollis Lea, but the thorax is broader and much
more densely and coarsely punctured, and with the dorsal contour of the prothorax
and eiytra strongly discontinuous. The squamose area at the apex of the elytra
is distinctly impressed, and the intervals at the sides of the squamose area form a
round subcostaform area which overhangs the side margin of the elytra.

[DOTASIA DEHISCENS sp. nov. (fig. 1, d).

Male. Derm-variable in colour, dark reddish to piceous; with but a few white
squamiform setae near the apex of each elytron, and without a dense white patch;
with dense white scaling on the dorsal edge of the hind femora.

Head with the front flattened and coarsely, closely, and irregularly punctate ;
finely punctate above. Rostrum somewhat dilated near the base, and there with
five dorsal cariae, the lateral one on each side fine, the three median carinae rather
irregular and continued nearly to the apex; striae between the carinae coarse and
with fine erect setae. Prothorax somewhat subquadrate, slightly narrower than the
elytra, distinctly broader than long (3-3: 2-8), almost straight on the sides in the
basal two-thirds, and thence abruptly narrowed to the truncate apex, which is half
as broad as the base; the longitudinal dorsal outline gently convex, almost con-
tinuous with that of the elytra; coarsely and densely punctate throughout, the
punctures separated by distances equal to about one-half of their diameters, each
puncture bearing a fine recumbent seta. Hlytra subcuniform, base slightly sinu-
ous; broadest behind the base and thence sharply and almost straightly narrowed
to near the apex which is produced, and the elytra separated, each elytron pro-
duced into a subconical process; strial grooves wanting on the disk, but the pune-
tures elongate, close and conspicuous throughout, the ninth stria very coarsely
punctate to above the hind coxa, and the seventh and eighth striae with large punc-
tures near the base; punctures large and coarse at the apex, and bearing fine re-
cumbent setae, those near the apex of stria three bearing a few white, squamiform
setae; the first interval with a complete row of small punctures. Legs with the
femora edentate, the fore pair minutely serrate in the basal half of the anterior
ventral edge; with numerous setigerous punctures, coarser and more abundant on
the fore pair; fore tibiae with two fine carinae between the dorsal and ventral
carinae on the outer face, mid and hind tibiae with one median carina, that of the
hind tibiae nearer the ventral than the dorsal carina; hind tibiae with a small put

168 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

distinct sharp tooth on the outer edge at the base of the uncus; all the tibiae with
rows of fine, erect, or slanting setae between the carinae. Sternum with a large,
foveaform impression on either side of the middle of the base of the mesosternal
receptacle ; metasternum transversally impressed near the base. Venter with the
first two ventrites broadly and shallowly concave, with rather small punctures
separated by distances about equal to twice their diameters; the second ventrite
with a narrow vertical face behind; ventrites three and four impunctate; ventrite
five concave, densely set at the edges and apex with small setiferous punctures.
Length, 3-5 mm.; breadth, 1-4 mm.

Fiji, Ovalau. Holotype male, collected by Mr. M. Greenwood, June 4, 1922,
to be deposited in the British Museum from whence it was sent by Sir Guy A. K.
Marshall for study.

This species may be easily distinguished from all of the other known Fijian
species by its dehiscent and conically produced elytral apices.

THE AMPHIPOD GENERA EUONYX, SYNDEXAMINE
AND PARADEXAMINE

By KEITH SHEARD, HONORARY ASSISTANT IN ZOOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The specimens treated below have been selected in order to revise the genera
concerned. They were taken from tow nettings and dredgings made on the patrol boat
of the Department of Fisheries and Game, during March, 1938, in Spencer Gulf,
South Australia; these collections were made possible by the co-operation of the
Chief Inspector of Fisheries and Game (Mr. F. W. Moorhouse).

Acknowledgements are due to the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research and
to the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum, and Art Gallery of South
Australia for their assistance; to Professor E. Percival, of the Canterbury University
College, New Zealand, for the loan of New Zealand type material for comparison and
revision; to Professor G. E. Nicholls, of the University of Western Australia, for
literature; and to Dr. R. C. Bassett, of Adelaide, for the use of his apparatus in the
preparation of the drawings.

Tue AMPHIPOD GENERA EUONYX, SYNDEXAMINE
AND PARADEXAMINE

By KEITH SHEARD, Honorary Assisrant 1n ZooLocy, SourH Ausrratian Museum.
Fig. 1-9.

THE specimens treated below have been selected in order to revise the genera con-
cerned. They were taken from tow nettings and dredgings made on the patrol
boat of the Department of Fisheries and Game, during March, 1938, in Spencer
Gulf, South Australia; these collections were made possible by the co-operation
of the Chief Inspector of Fisheries and Game (Mr. F. W. Moorhouse).

Acknowledgments are due to the Council for Scientific and Industrial Re-
search and to the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum, and Art
Gallery of South Australia for their assistance; to Professor EK. Percival, of the
Canterbury University College, New Zealand, for the loan of New Zealand type
material for comparison and revision; to Professor G. E. Nicholls, of the Univer-
sity of Western Australia, for literature; and to Dr. R. C. Bassett, of Adelaide,
for the use of his apparatus in the preparation of the drawings.

The species dealt with in this paper are only a fraction of those obtained. The
remainder cannot be described until the revision of Haswell’s types of Australian
Gammaridea, now in progress, has been completed.

A curious feature of the material collected was the very great predominance
of Gammaridea in both tow-nettings (using Marine Biological Association stan-
dard nets) and dredgings. Copepoda, Euphausiacea and Mysidae were very
scarce, Hyperiidea were absent, while fish eggs were only present in one tow-
netting—and then in very small numbers. Nebalia and Sagittae as yet undeter-
mined were moderately plentiful. This balance was constant from near the head
waters of the Gulf up to and ineluding the open sea near Kangaroo Island.

There would appear to be some connection between the abundance of destrue-
tive forms and the relative scarcity of fish and oysters, but since this is the first
time tow-nettings have been made in these waters, any conclusions are premature.

Famity LYSIANASSIDAE

Evonyx Norman, 1867.

Stebbing, 1906, p.19 (key) ; Chevreux, 1908, p. 1 (fig.), and 1919, p. 576; Barnard,
1916, p. 110; Chilton, 1921, p. 52 (fig.) ; Stephensen, 1923, p. 41; Schellen-
berg, 1926, p. 200; Pirlot, 1933, p. 120 (fig. and key) ; Sheard, 1937, p. 19.

170 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EVUONYX PIRLOTI sp. nov.

Euonyx norman (nec Stebbing) ; Chilton, 1921, p. 52; Pirlot, 1933, p. 120; Sheard,
1937, p. 19.

Chilton ascribed his specimen ( 4) to Huonyx normani Stebbing (1888, p.
669, pl. xix), and from manuscript notes in my possession, was considerably in-

Fig. 1. Huonysx pirloti: A, lateral view (9); B, detail of head and epistome; C, peduncle
first antenna (9); D, peduncle first antenna (Chilton’s ¢), refigured; E, attachment of antenna
(2); F-I, details of urosome and uropoda (9); L—K, telson (2). (K.S. del.)

fluenced in this by the fact that Stebbing’s species was a (2) with the ( é) yet
to be discovered. Pirlot (loc cit. p. 120) in his key separates the two, while Sheard
(loc. cit., p. 19) states that Chilton’s specimen is probably not the ( ¢ ) of Steb-
bing’s species.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 171

Specimens obtained by Mr. F. W. Moorhouse off Kangaroo Island led me to
search carefully through the unnamed material in the Museum collection, with the
result that along series has been found (? 2, 6 é ) which, on examination, proved
to be cospecifie with Chilton’s specimen. The new species has been named in re-
cognition of the credit due to Professor J. Pirlot for his original separation.

Fig. 2. Huonysx pirloti (2): A-E, details of mandibles; F, half of lower lip; G—L, details of
first maxilla; M, second maxilla. (K.S. del.)

In a recent letter from Professor G. E. Nicholls, he remarks: ‘‘ With reference
to your remarks about Euonyx normani as identified by Chilton, I should tell you
that I tco have amongst the ‘‘Discovery’’ material a specimen (ovigerous 2 only),
which I regard as new, and probably belonging to the same species as that referred
by Chilton to Z. norman Stebbing. If you are publishing shortly, would you let

172 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

me see the typescript, so that I may refer my species to your manuscript name if
that is necessary. If, however, you are not proposing to publish immediately, I
should still be glad if you would allow me to quote you as having made that same
discovery from South Australian material.’’

Tracings of the South Australian specimen have been forwarded to Professor
Nicholls. and thanks are due to him for his courtesy.

So far specimens have been obtained in dredgings close to land and in wash-
ings from reefs. The species is a moderately common element in the faunule, at a
eursory glance quite like Waldeckia, but distinguishable therefrom by its chelate
first gnathopod.

Fig. 3. Euonysx pirloti (9): A, first gnathopod; B, detail of chela; C, second gnathopod;
D, lateral view, maxilliped. (K.S. del.)

The specimen figured (@ ), Kangaroo Island, is representative of the series,
aithough those specimens collected in St. Vincent Gulf are slightly less robust,
with gnathopods 1 and 2 slightly more slender. The specimen is fully figured so
that only the main differences from Huonyx normani Stebbing are given here.

Mandible; palp with first segment equal to third, and three-quarters length
of thesecond. (2H. normani, one-third length of second.)

Maxilliped; the second segment of the palp appears to be relatively longer
and more expanded.

Gnathopod 1; giving the basis (segment two) the value of one hundred, the
proportions of the segments are as follows:

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 7s

E. pirloti 100 90 39 55 +2 69°7 25
Segment 2 3 4 5 6 7
EK. norman 100 50 41-8 36°2 87:5 Pal

Gnathopod 2; giving the length of the basis the value of one hundred, the pro-
portions of the segments are as follows:

Segment 2 3 + 5 6 7
HE. normam 100 43-7 37 56 31 3-1
FE. pirloti 100 50 23-3 68:8 20 373

Pleon segment 3; side plate not pointed behind.

Peraeopod 5; segment 5 is slightly longer than segment 4, not shorter as in
#, normani Stebbing.

The rami of the uropods are approximately equal in length. (The outer ramus
of uropod 2 is slightly foreshortened in fig. 1 (f).) No small teeth could be seen
on the dorsal surface of the telson (¢.f. Stebbing, 1888, pl. xix).

The relatively much longer gnathopod 1 of FZ. pirloti, due to a longer segment
five, and its attachment nearer to the anterior end of segment four than in Z,
normant, readily distinguishes between them.

In passing, it may be noted that Chilton (loe cit. p. 52, fig. 5a) omitted a shal-
low groove on the anterior dorso-lateral surface of his figure of segment one of
antenna 1. This groove gives a slightly keeled effect to this segment.

Loc. Nepean Bay, Kangaroo Island (F. W. Moorhouse, May, 1938) ; Brighton,
St. Vincent Gulf (K. Sheard and B. C. Cotton, Mar., 1937) ; Sellick’s Beach, St.
Vincent Gulf (H. M. Hale, Apr., 1936) ; off | Seta Ghiors: St. Vincent Gulf (H. M.
Hale, Mar., 1924) ; Spencer Gulf (A. Zeitz, 1887) ; Ardrossan (Dr. J. C. Vereo,
Jan., 1903) ; Western Shoal, Spencer Gulf (K. Sheard and F. Moorhouse, Mar.,
1938).

Famity DEXAMINIDAE

Dexanwmidae ; Stebbing, 1906, p. 514 (lt. and syn.), and 1910, p. 602; Chilton,
1914, p. 332; Spandl, 1924, p. 56; Schellenberg, 1928, p. 655, and 1931, p. 209 ;
Barnard, 1932, p. 217.

The following key is adapted from Stebbing (1906, p. 514) to include recent
genera:

a. Maxillipeds, palp with 3 segments.
b. Lower lip, with inner lobes well developed. . a .. Dexaminella
bb. Lower lip, with inner lobes rudimentary.
ec. Peraeopods 1-5, 4th segment shorter than 5th and
6th combined ; .. Dexamine
ec. Peraeopods 1-5, 4th segment longer than 5th and 6th
combined .. .. Tritaeta

174 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

aa. Maxillipeds, palp with four segments.
d. Maxilla 1, palp with one segment.

e. Maxillipeds, inner plates short and bud-like .. Dexaminoides
ee. Maxillipeds, inner plates of moderate size.
f. Lower lip, mandibular process absent .. .. Syndexamine
ff. Lower lip, mandibular process present .. .. Paradexamine

dd. Maxilla 1 palp with two segments.
g. Maxilla 1, second segment of palp large, maxillipeds,

inner plates well developed F Polycheria
gg. Maxilla 1, second segment of palp small, maxillipeds,
inner plate rudimentary .. wt me .. Guernea

The genera discussed here are Syndexamine and Paradexamine.
Professor E. Percival, to whom I wrote for types, states :

‘“There are no types of Paradexamine pacifica (Thomson), merely tubes of
material labelled with the country of origin. You will need, I suppose, to select
suitable specimens for description therefrom. Syndexamine carinata Chilton is
represented only by two co-types.’’

Accordingly, specimens have been selected and figured as lectotypes.

In passing it is worth recording that the examination of some of Chilton’s
Amphipod material and its comparison with more modern work has convinced me
that he tended to simplify the issue a little too much. While it is quite true that
growth changes occur in the chitinous cuticle with age, that secondary sexual
characters emerge and develop, and that every specimen varies in some slight par-
ticulars from every other specimen; it is also true that growth changes tend to
follow a certain course within the species, that secondary sexual characters de-
velop in a definite manner, while the intra-specific variation bears a high degree
of relationship to the species itself. Consequently it is the business of the system-
atist to record outstanding differences and divergencies from the already known
ranges of variation and not to seek to integrate the pattern until significant data,
widely spaced along the curve of variation, is accumulated.

Full illustration of all differences is essential, an ideal often difficult of
attainment.

SYNDEXAMINE Chilton.

Syndexamine Chilton, 1914, p. 332 (fig.).

SYNDEXAMINE CARINATA Chilton.

Chilton’s generic description must be slightly emended as a large well-defined
molar area is present.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 15

Lectotype (4). As described and figured by Chilton except in the following
particulars:

A definite, large molar area is present.
An accessory plate (see fig. 4, A, B, C, D) is present.

Fig. 4. Syndexamine carinata (lectotype): A—D, mandibles; E, first maxilla; F, urosome.
(K.S. del.)

The palp of Maxilla 1 appears to be broader than in Chilton’s figure.

The small rounded protuberance in the mandibles mentioned by Chilton (loc.
cit. p. 384) appears to be the newly-developing mandibular cutting edge, previous
to moulting.

176 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The eye is slightly oval, and is situated between the two antennae at the base
of the inter-antennal angle.

PARADEXAMINE Stebbing.

Paradexamine Stebbing, 1906, p. 518 (lit. and syn.), and 1914, p. 366; Chevreux,
1906, p. 88 and 1913, p. 181; Chilton, 1909, p. 632, 1912, p. 501 and 1925, p.
179; Stephensen, 1927, p. 347; Barnard, 1930, p. 389, and 1982, p. 217;
Sheard, 1937, p. 25.

As it is difficult to find a reliable character which has been positively de-
seribed by authors for each of the seven species of this genus, the following key
which I have drawn up for their separation is even more suspect than most. It
is accurate within its limits, but must be used in conjunction with the specific
description.

a. Apex of telson with many small teeth on each lobe, inter-
antennal angle pointed.

b. Gnathopod 2, joint 5 subequal to joint6~ .. .. P. pactfica
bb. Gnathopod 2, joint 5 more than 14 times joint 6.
ec. Lower lip, with no teeth on apex of each lobe .. P. moorhousei
ee. Lower lip, with one tooth on apex of each lobe... P. barnardi

aa. Apex of telson with several small teeth together on each
lobe, then an outer spine. Inter-antennal angle convex.
d. Gnathopod 2, joint 6 longer than joint 5;
antenna. 1, first joint of peduncle longer
than second; antenna 2, peduncle stout,
subequal to peduncle of antennal .. P. flindersi
dd. Gnathopod 2, joint 6 shorter than joint 5;
antenna 1, first joint of peduncle shorter
than second; antenna 2, peduncle long
and slender, longer than peduncle of
antenna 1 . P.frinsdorfi
aaa. Apex of telson with two teeth separated by ¢ a strong spine,
antennal angle rounded (? P. nana).
e. Maxilla 11, setae on distal third of inner

edge of inner plate “a .. P.sexdentata
ee. Maxilla 11, setae confined to end of inner
plate a . P.nana

aaaa. Apex of telson without teeth, antennal angle rounded ;
lower lip, a tooth on inner margin of outer lobes;
maxilla 11, seta on inner edge of inner plate .. .. P. fissicauda

PARADEXAMINE PACIFICA (Thomson).

Stebbing, 1906, p. 518 (lit. and syn.) ; Chilton, 1909, p. 632; Stephensen, 1927,
p. 347 (fig.) and 1938, p. 246; Schellenberg, 1931, p. 209; nec Barnard, 1930,
p. 389, fig.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 177

The specimens sent to me from the Chilton collection include some originally
collected and named by Thomson, but the only locality given is New Zealand. As
might be expected, there is a slight variation existing between the specimens in
minor characters, but the complex is itself so clearly marked off from any other

Fig. 5. Paradexamine pacifica (lectotype J, 2): A, lateral view (3); B, peduncle first
antenna (¢') ; C, peduncle second antenna (3); D, portion of lower lip (3s); E, mandible (¢);
F, first maxilla (3) ; G, second maxilla ($) ; H, head (9); I, first maxilla (2); J, second maxilla
(2); K, tip of telson (9). (K.S. del.).

species of the genus that there would be nothing gained by making further new
species or subspecies. When material is to hand with the localities definitely
marked, splitting is to some extent justified. The characters which present some
degree of variation are as follows:

178 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1. The armature of the peraeopods.

2. The presence in varying numbers of setae on the margins of the palp of
maxilla 1.

3. The presence in varying numbers of scattered setae on the outer edge of
the outer plate of maxilla 2.

4, The finger of the palp of the maxilliped varying from slightly swollen and
blunt (type) to slender. In no ease is it at all large.

5. The eye colour (spirit specimens) varies from very faded to very bright
red.

Among the constant characters connecting all the specimens are the following :
. The pointed inter-antennal angle of the head.
. The slightly swollen first joint of antenna 1.
. The relative proportions of the joints of the gnathopods and peraeopods.
. The slightly greater length of peraeopod 4 as compared with peraeopods
3 and 5.

5. The presence of two spines on each side of the dorsal surface of the last
urosome segment.

Ee wD eH

The last part of Thomson’s statement, ‘‘Peraeopoda slender, thickly setose,
all having the dactylos directed posteriorly, except the last pair, which are also
much the longest’’ (Trans. N.Z. Inst., XI, 1878, p. 238), is incorrect in one par-
ticular. On account of the way in which the peraeopoda are carried it is very easy
to consider the longest to be peraeopod 5; actually it is peraeopod 4.

Two specimens (¢ and ¢) have been erected as lectotypes. Their salient
points have been figured. For the rest, while I am not quite satisfied that Stephen-
sen (loc. cit. p. 345) was dealing with the same species, I can see no difference in
the appendages named below, and since Thomson’s specimens are somewhat dam-
aged by long storage, while Stephensen’s figures of the peraeopods and uropods
are taken from comparatively fresh material, I see no necessity for duplicating
his work. In the type selected the pleon side plates are slightly damaged. In
other specimens they are as drawn by Stephensen (loe. cit. p. 345).

Distribution: New Zealand; East Coast of Australia (7).

PARADEXAMINE BARNARDI Sp. nov.
PARADEXAMINE PACIFICA (nec Stebbing) Barnard, 1930, p. 389, fig.

At the request of Dr. H. K. Barnard, of the South African Museum, some
specimens of this ‘‘Terra Nova’’ species were sent to me by Dr. Isabella Gordon,
of the British Museum.

As is usually the case with such expeditions, the specimens had obviously

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 179

Fig. 6. A-R, Paradexamine barnardi (type g) : A, peduncle, first antenna; B, sensory setae;
C, cephalon; D, lower lip; EH, upper lip; F, mandible; G, first maxilla; H-I, second maxilla;
J-M, details of maxilliped; N first gnathopod; O, second gnathopod; P, hand, first gnathopod;
Q, urosome; R, apex, telson; 8S, Paradexamine moorehousei: hand, first gnathopod; T, Para-
dexamine frinsdorfi: hand, first gnathopod. (K.S. del.).

180 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

been for a considerable time in formalin before their transfer to spirit: This has
had the usual effect of making the chitin very brittle, resulting in reticulations of
the surface and false joints, very difficult to distinguish from true ones in the
antennae, unless the underlying muscle fibres are made visible by appropriate
staining.

Direct comparison with type specimens of P. pacifica (Thomson) and with
other Paradexamine species shows that the ‘‘Terra Nova’’ specimens are distinct
from, but fairly closely allied to, P. pactfica, and I regret that the time of going
to press of this paper will not permit me to follow the course of returning them to
their original author for fuller description.

The general facies, with the exceptions noted by Barnard, show a close resem-
blance to the P. pacifica group. The lower lip with its toothed apex resembles P.
fissicauda, while the large outer plate of the maxilliped is somewhat like P. flindersi.

However, unless the species concept is enlarged beyond the point when it will
be of use in taxonomy, these are all distinct species.

The species is as described by Barnard (loc cit., p. 389) with the exception of
the second joint of the peduncle of antenna 2 (fig. 9, A) and the addition of the
following details.

Upper lip; slightly lobed on its upper marign.

Lower lip ; with a tooth on the inner margin of the apex of each outer lobe.

Maxilla; with two hairs on the inner plate.

Maxilliped ; outer plate slightly longer than palp. Finger of palp very
small,

Gnathopod 1; long and slender, joint five longer than joint six.

Gnathopod 2; long and slender, joint five about one-and-a-half times
joint six.

The row of transverse fringed spines on the hands of the gnathopods vary
much as in P. pactfica; in P. moorhousei and P. frinsdorfi the number
is less, but there is a slight variation.

Pleopods; long and slender.

There appears to be only one long spine on each side of the dorsal surface
ot the last urosome segment near the telson.

Branchiae ; pleated.

The fascicules of setae on the peduncle of the antennae are distinctive.

Loc. Off Three Kings Island, north of New Zealand.

PARADEXAMINE MOORHOUSEI Sp. nov.

Very lke Paradexamine pacifica (Thomson) but smaller and much more
lightly spined.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 181

The resemblances lie mainly in the pointed inter-antennal angle, the lower
lip, the proportions of the peraeopods (peraeopod 5 excepted) the type of carina-
tion, the dentation of the apex of the telson, and in the general facies.

Fig. 7. A-L, Paradexamine moorhousei (type 9): A, head and antennae; B, upper lip;
C, mandible; D, first maxilla; E, second maxilla; F, half of maxilliped; G, first gnathopod; H,
second gnathopod; I, urosome; L, basis peraeopod 5. (K.S. del.). J-K, Paradexamine sexdentata
(after Schellenberg): J, first gnathopod; K, dorsal outline of pleon.

The main differences are:

Antenna 1; no tooth on the lower margin of the first joint of the peduncle,
but instead rows of single setae.

Antenna 2; instead of spines the fourth joint of the peduncle bears a fringe
of single setae.

Eyes; relatively larger, filling most of the side of the head and present as
prominent black spots in spirit material.

182 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Maxilla 1; relatively feeble, a single spine on the inner plate, four long hairs
on the apex of the single-pointed palp; the eleven spine teeth on the outer plate
are weak.

Maxilla 2; feeble, and with sparse hairs present on the apices of the plates
only.

Maxilliped ; the teeth on the outer plate are small, and the plate itself does not
reach much above the second joint of the palp, of which the finger is slender and
weak.

Gnathopod 1; much less setose than P. pacifica, and its greater slenderness
is due to the more elongate and slender joint five.

Gnathopod 2; very little setose with joint five twice as long as joint six.

Peraeopod 5; the basis (fig. 6, 1) is more rounded than in P. pacifica, and is
only lightly spined.

The last urosome segment bears no spines,

The side plates are of moderate size, the first, second, third, and fourth with
the margins very finely serrate.

This species was present in countless numbers in the waters of Spencer Gulf.
The specimens collected varied in size between 3 and 5 mm. In life they are nearly
transparent with prominent black eye-spots. Associated with them are many
Nototropis homochir Haswell with the smaller specimens of which they are easily
confused in the collecting dish.

Loc. Spencer Gulf, South Australia (K. Sheard and F. Moorhouse, March,
1938).

The species is named in recognition of the indispensable assistance given by
Mr. F. W. Moorhouse (Chief Inspector of Fisheries and Game), particularly in
the securing of tow-net material.

PARADEXAMINE FRINSDORFI sp. nov.

Head; rostrum acute, inter-antennal angle convex. Antenna 1; peduncle
shorter than that of antenna 2; first joint shorter than second, third very slender
and shore; antenna 2, peduncle slender, joints 4 and 5 long and slender. Flagella
in each case moderately long.

Carination of body ; commencing from second last peraeon segment, accessory
dentation from the last peraeon segment.

Lower lip; inner lobes long and slender, outer lobes with no tooth on inner
margins, mandibular processes only slightly upturned.

Mandible; cutting edge complexly dentate, accessory cutting edge dentate,
two spines on spine row, molar fairly prominent, the space between the spine row
and the molar is occupied by a ridge with rounded teeth.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 183

Maxilla 1; inner lobe with no end bristles, outer plate with 10-11 toothed
spines, single-jointed palp with six long hairs.

Maxilla 2; inner plate with strong setae, 3 to 5 on outer edge, 6 to 8 on apex,
outer plate with the distal half fringed with scattered setae.

Fig. 8. A-L, Paradexamine frinsdorfi (type ¢): A-C, first gnathopod; D—F, second gnat-
hopod; G—K, peraeopods; L, half maxilliped; M, Paradexamine pacifica (lectotype #) half of
maxilliped. (K.S. del.)

Maxilliped; inner plate small, outer plate not reaching much above second
joint of palp, teeth small, finger of palp moderately strong.
Gnathopod 1; joint five slightly longer than six.

184 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gnathopod 2; joint five longer than joint six. Side plates of both, minutely
dentate with short hairs growing between the teeth.
Peraeopods 1 to 5, comparable with P. flinderst.

Fig. 9. Paradexamine frinsdorfi (type 3): A, outline of body; B, margin of pleon side plate
three; C, urosome; D, plan of head; E, plan of urosome; F, upper lip; G, lower lip; H, mandible;
I-J, first maxilla; K, second maxilla; L, apex of telson. (K.S. del.)

Pleopods; strong.

Uropods; comparable with P. fisstcauda.

Telson; cleft to base, each lobe bearing six teeth on its outer margin, the apex
of each lobe is produced to a small point at the outer side, then follows a strong
spine, then several very small teeth with no intermediary setule.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 185

Branchiae; pleated.

Eyes; large, oval and prominent (see fig. 7, d). Their colour varies from
faded red to dark red in spirit.

Length; 6-8 mm.

Although not nearly as numerous as P. moorhouset, the species is quite com-
mon, and together with the first named, provided the bulk of the free Amphipodan
fauna of the Gulf waters at the date of the collections.

In life, with its predominating colour of scarlet, eyes of reddish sapphire, and
with prominent sapphire colour-spots on the side plates, it is at once recognizable
in a collecting dish. In the darkness it is faintly phosphorescent.

Although the specimen described is probably an intersex (see rudimentary
marsupial plate, fig. 7, J), it is characteristic of the species and neither ( ¢ ) nor
(@) appear to exhibit any marked variation from this form.

The species was named after Mr. A. Frinsdorf (Senior Inspector of Fisheries)
to whose knowledge of the Gulf waters and conditions our useful collections were
largely due.

Loc. Off St. Francis Island, Great Australian Bight (Dr. J. C. Vereo, 1907) ;
Spencer Gulf (K. Sheard and F. W. Moorhouse, March, 1938).

The literature and synonomy of the other species admitted in the Genus (of
which FP’. pacifica is the genotype) are as follows:

PARADEXAMINE FISSICAUDA Chevreux.
Paradexamine fissicauda Chevreux, 1906, p. 88 (fig.) and 1913, p. 181; ? Chilton,
1912, p. 501 and ? 1925, p. 178; Schellenberg, 1931, p. 210; Barnard, 1932,
p. 217; Stephensen, 1938, p. 240.
PARADEXAMINE FLINDERSI (Stebbing).

Dexamine flindersi Stebbing, 1888, p. 146.
Guernea flinderst Stebbing, 1906, p. 522.
Paradexamine flindersi Stebbing, 1910, p. 103, plate 1ii.

PARADEXAMINE NANA Stebbing.

Paradexamine nana Stebbing, 1914, p. 366; Schellenberg, 1931, p. 210.

PARADEXAMINE SEXDENTATA Schellenberg.

Paradexamine sexdentata Schellenberg, 1931, p. 211, fig. 106.

186 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

LITERATURE.

Barnard, K. H. (1916) : Ann. 8. Afr. Mus., xv, part 3.

Barnard, K. H. (1980) : Brit. Ant. (‘Terra Nova’’) Exped., 1910, Zool. viii, No. 4.
Barnard, K. H. (1932) : Discovery Reports, v.

Chevreux, E. (1906) : Haped. Ant. Franc. (1903-05), ‘‘ Amphipodes’’.
Chevreux, BE. (1913) : Deux. Exped. Franc. (1908-10), ‘‘ Amphipodes’’.
Chevreux, HE. (1919) : Bull. Mus. Franc., xxv.

Chilton, C. (1909) : Sub. Ant. Is. N.Z., Article xxvi.

Chilton, C. (1912) : Trans. Roy. Soc., Edinburgh, xviii, part 2.

Chilton, C. (1921) : Biol. Res. ‘‘Endeavour’’, Sydney, v, part 2.

Chilton, C. (1925) : Com. Mus. Nac. Hist. Nat. Buenos Aires, ii.

Pirlot, J. (1933) : Siboga Exped., Mono, exxxiii, livr. exx.

Schellenberg, A. (1926): Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped. (1901-03), xviii, zool., x.
Schellenberg, A. (1928) : Trans. Zool. Soc., xxii, part 35.

Schellenberg (1931) : Swed. Ant. Exped., Further Zool. Res., xi, No. 6.
Sheard, K. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., 1xi.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1888) : Challenger Reports, Zool., xxix.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1906) : Das Trerretch, xxi.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1910) : Mem. Aust. Mus., iv, part 2.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1914) : Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond.

Stephensen, K. (1923) : Danish Ingolf-Exped., iii, part 8 (Amphipoda 1).
Stephensen, K. (1927) : Medd. fra. Dansk. foren., \xxxili.

Stephensen, K. (1938) : Sond. Senckenbergiana, Bd. 20, No. 3/4.

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN MARSUPIALS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND P. M. MAWSON

Summary

The present paper is the third of the series relating to nematode parasites of our
marsupials. The first (1938a) dealt with Filariidae, and the second (1938b) with
Strongylidae (Trichoneminae), chiefly from Central Australian kangaroos and
wallabies. We now give an account of a number of nematodes from various
Queensland localities extending from the Gulf of Carpentaria to the coastal region
adjacent to the New South Wales border. The species are distributed amongst the
Filariidae, Spiruridae, Oxyuridae, and Trichostrongylidae.

Some NEMATODES rrom AUSTRALIAN MARSUPIALS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON anv P. M. MAWSON.

THE present paper is the third of the series relating to nematode parasites of our
marsupials. The first (1938a) dealt with Filariidae, and the second (1938b) with
Strongylidae (Trichoneminae), chiefly from Central Australian kangaroos and
wallabies. We now give an account of a number of nematodes from various
Queensiand localities extending from the Gulf of Carpentaria to the coastal region
adjacent to the New South Wales border. The species are distributed amongst
the Filariidae, Spiruridae, Oxyuridae, and Trichostrongylidae.

This series of studies has been made possible by a Commonwealth grant to
the University of Adelaide.

Oxyurids had not been recorded as occurring in Australian marsupials, but
no less than four species, probably belonging to as many distinct genera, are de-
scribed in this paper. Three of these were found in the preserved viscera (ileum
and caecum) of a flying opossum, Petawroides volans var. minor collected by H. H.
Finlayson on the Fitzroy River, Central Queensland, and forwarded to the South
Australian Museum. Unfortunately this interesting assemblage of parasites is
in a poor state of preservation. One of the forms has been assigned to a new genus,
Austrozyuris. The fourth species was found in the common opossum, T'richosurus
vulpecula, from South-eastern Queensland.

Only the female of the Spirurid, Protospirura marsuptalis, was known pre-
viously. One of the two species of Filariids from the Gulf of Carpentaria is re-
garded as new, while the other, which was represented by immature females, is
probably the female of one of our recently described species. The two Tricho-
strongylids belong to genera previously known from Australian marsupials, a
second species being added to Austrostrongylus and Filarinema, which were
monotypic, and described from material collected in zoological gardens in the
United States and Pretoria respectively.

We are indebted for material to H. H. Finlayson, Honorary Curator of
Mammais, South Australian Museum; Dr. F. H. 8S. Roberts, Parasitologist, De-
partment of Stock, Brisbane; the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft and his daughter, Dr.
J. M. Mackerras, formerly of Hidsvyold, Burnett River. The types of the new
species have been deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

188 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hosts AND PARASITES REFERRED TO IN THIS REPORT.

Macropus robustus Gould Dipetalonema robertsi sp. nov.

Macropus sp. Dipetalonema annulipapillatum
Johnston and Mawson

Macropus dorsalis Gray Austrostrongylus minutus sp. nov.

Trichosurus vulpecula (Kerr) Protospirura marsupialis Baylis

Syphacia trichosurt sp. nov.
Petauroides volans (Kerr) var. minor Austroxyuris finlaysom gen. et. sp. nov.

Collett
Passalurus parvus sp. nov.
Oxyuris (s.1.) acuticaudata sp. nov.
Tsoodon obesulus (Shaw) Filarinema peramelis sp. nov.

Famity FILARIIDAE
DIPETALONEMA ROBERTSI sp. nov.
(Fig. 1-5.)

From the body eavity of Macropus robustus, from Normanton, North Queens-
land.

Male. 6-5 em. long, 0:23 mm. in maximum breadth; female, represented by
fragments of two specimens, one fragment being 11 em. long with a maximum
width 0:45 mm. Anterior end dome-shaped with papillae arranged in two rows,
each with four large and two small (probably lateral) papillae. The cuticle pos-
sesses fine transverse striations which are not obvious except in the lateral lines,
since they are masked elsewhere by deeper longitudinal markings. The lateral
regions have each two irregular rows of ‘‘gland cells’’ or ‘‘pores’’. Mouth small,
leading into a short vestibule, 6 long, with its base supported by a chitinous ring.
Oesophagus about 2 mm. long in both sexes; with narrower anterior portion, 0°55
mm. in female. Nerve ring at about 0-28 mm. from anterior end.

Male. Testis tube extends as far forwards as the posterior end of the oeso-
phagus. Tail 0°48 mm. long, with rounded tip which is apparently without
papillae. Larger spicule 0-24 mm. long, cylindrical proximally but tapering to a
fine point; shorter spicule 0-12 mm. long, broad, ending in a rounded tip. Three
pairs of preanal papillae, somewhat irregularly arranged, one pair immediately
postanal, and another pair some distance behind the latter and not quite symmet-
rically placed.

Female. Tail 0-4 mm. long, with two very small subterminal papillae. Uter-

JOHNSTON AND MAwsoN—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 189

ine tubes extend posteriorly to within 1:7 mm. from the anus; the two tubes unite
just behind the vulvar region, the single uterus passing forward to within 1] mm.
from the oesophagus before turning posteriorly as the vagina the latter forming
a loop before entering a small muscular pyriform bulb at the vulva which lies at
6:5 mm. from the anterior end of the worm.

+02 mm

0-2 =m

Fig. 1-5. Dipetalonema roberts. 1. Cloacal region of male, lateral view; 2. head; 3. posterior
end of female; 4. tip of female tail, ventral; 5. cuticle at lateral line. Fig. 6-7. D. annulipapil-
latum. 6. posterior end of female; 7. anterior end of female. Fig. 1 and 4 to same scale; 5 and 6
to same scale.

Explanation of lettering: a. anus; dr. dorsal ray; dt. dorsal tooth; edr. externo-dorsal ray ;
elr, externo-lateral ray; ep. excretory pore; g. gubernaculum; i. intestine; ic. inflated cuticle;
nr. nerve ring; plr. postero-lateral ray; s. spicule; ut. uterus; v. vulva; vd. vas deferens.

D. robertsi differs from other species of the genus in the number and arrange-
ment of the head papillae. The female system resembles that of D. tenue J ohnston
and Mawson 1938. The specific name is given in recognition of the excellent work
now being carried out by its collector, Dr. F. H. 8. Roberts. Parasitologist, Depart-

ment of Stock, Queensland.

DIPETALONEMA ANNULIPAPILLATUM Johnston and Mawson 1938.

(Fig. 6-7.)
The material consists of two female specimens, both immature, taken from
the dorsal aorta of Macropus sp., at Inverleigh, near the Flinders River, Gulf of

190 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Carpentaria, North Queensland, by Dr. F. S. Roberts. The larger is 9-5 em. long,
0-07 mm. wide at the head, 0-4 mm. in maximum breadth, and 0-12 mm. broad
at the anus. The anterior portion of the head of each worm is damaged, but one
can distinguish a chitinous ring around the mouth, and there appears to be out-
growths of the hypodermis into the cuticle resembling those occurring in D. annuli-
papillatum, of which species only the male has been described. The oesophagus
is 2-6 mm. long, with an anterior narrower portion 0-6 mm. in length, and a wider
posterior part. The nerve cord is situated at 0:3 mm. from the anterior end. The
anus lies at 1-18 mm. from the tip of the tail. The uteri are not readily dis-
tinguishable because of immaturity. They pass forward to enter a muscular vagina
a short distance behind the vulva, the vagina coiling on itself once before entering
a pyriform muscular structure leading into the small vulva. The latter lies at
5:3 mm. from the anterior end. The long tail has a rounded tip on which papillae
were not detected.

The characters present suggest that the specimens may be females of D. an-
nulipapillatum, recently described by us (1938) from three species of wallabies,
two of them from the Burnett River, Central Queensland, and one from coastal
New South Wales. The main differences are the presence of a chitinous ring
around the buccal region, and the differentiation of the oesophagus into a narrower
and a wider region.

Famity SPIRURIDAE

PROTOSPIRURA MARSUPIALIS Baylis.
(Fig. 8.)

Baylis (1927) described only the female. Since our material contained both
sexes, an account of the male can now be given. The host was the opossum, T'richo-
surus vulpecula, from Kidsvold, Burnett River, Central Queensland (collected by
the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft and Dr. M. J. Mackerras) and from Brisbane.

The head and general features of the body have already been described by
Baylis.

Male. About 3:5 em. long, shorter and thinner than the female, and with
two or three close coils at the posterior end. The distance from the anterior end of
the head to the posterior end of the oesophagus is 4:05 mm. The thick-walled
vestibule is 0-25 mm. long, with an internal diameter 0-07 mm. The nerve cord
lies at 0:34-0:35 mm. from the anterior end, and just in front of the excretory
pore. The tail has long alae, 0-22 mm. wide, narrowing near the tip, slightly
beyond the end of which they project. The spicules are subequal in length, but

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 191

the left is thinner than the right, to which the vas deferens is attached. In one
specimen the right spicule measured 1-15 mm. and the left 1-2 mm.; in another
they were 1-3 and 1:1 respectively. A gubernaculum is present. The cloaca is
slit-like, slightly elongated transversely, and lies at 0-7 mm. from tail end.
There are four pairs of pedunculate preanal papillae, and a similar pair about
mid-way between the cloaca and the tip of the tail. There is a pair immediately
postanal, as well as two or three pairs of very small papillae close to the end of the
tail. The alae are ornamented with longitudinal striations, and similar markings
form a very narrow zone across the ventral surface of the body in the immediate
vicinity of the cloaca.

Famity OX YURIDAE
AUSTROXYURIS FINLAYSONI gen. et sp. nov.
(Fig. 9-12.)

This tiny species was present in great numbers in the caecum and intestine of
Petauroides volans var. minor, obtained by H. H. Finlayson in the Fitzroy River
District, Central Queensland. The viscera in which the parasites were found were
forwarded by the South Australian Museum. The state of preservation was poor.

Worms short, straight ; male 1-7-1-8 mm. long; female about 2mm. Cuticle
with fine transverse striations. Maximum diameter of male 0-11 mm. of female
0-15 mm., occurring at the level of the posterior end of the oesophagus, the body
then tapering to the tail.

Head end rounded, with cuticle not regularly inflated. Mouth cireular, diree-
ted forwards, with its margin supported by a continuation of the chitinous wall
of the bueeal capsule. One pair of lateral papillae. Buccal capsule 0-01 mm. in
diameter and 5» long in the female, with a projection outwardly from the middle
of its wall. Oesophagus 0:3-0-4 mm. long in the male (1:4+5-5:6 of body
length) ; narrow, slightly constricted in front of the rounded bulb, the latter 0-035
mm. in diameter, and provided with valves. Anterior end of intestine swollen.
Nerve ring at the end of the first third of the tubular portion of the oesophagus,
and about 0-12 mm. from the head end. Excretory pore just behind the oesopha-
geal bulb.

Male. A pair of symmetrical caudal alae with maximum width (each 0-01
mm.) at cloacal level, length 0-2 mm. Body narrowed suddenly just in front of
the posterior end of the alae, continuing as a very thin tail 0-06 mm. long. <A pair
of adanal papillae; a median papilla immediately postanal; three lateral papillae
just behind the anal region, arising close together, supported by long peduncles,
one pair of these papillae being located at the widest part of the alae, the others

192 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

arising more ventrally. No papillae could be detected at the posterior end of the
alae. Spicule single, short, cylindrical, 0-05-0-08 mm. long, not strongly chiti-
nized except at its proximal end, where it joins the vas deferens and has a well-
chitinized ring. Gubernaculum absent.

Fig. 8. Protospirura marsupialis. Posterior end of male. Fig, 9-12. Austroxyuris finlay-
sont. 9. posterior end of male; 10. ditto, lateral view; 11. head, lateral; 12. oesophageal region,
lateral. Fig. 13-14. Passalurus parvus. 13. head; 14. posterior end of male, lateral. Fig. 15-16.
Oxyuris acuticaudata. 15. oesophageal region; 16. head. Fig. 17-18. Syphacia trichosuri.
17. head; 18. oesophageal region. Fig. 9, 10, 14 and 17 to same scale; 11, 13 and 16 to same scale.

Female. Tail very long, 0:29 mm. in length, tapering to a fine point. Vulva
large, round, dividing the body antero-posteriorly in the ratio 1:1-8. Uteri very
indifferently preserved, but appear to be divergent. Eggs not observed.

The species belongs obviously to Oxyurinae, near Passalurus, from which it
differs chiefly in the characters of the vestibule, in the absence of a prebulbar
swelling on the oesophagus, and in the absence of narrow cuticular flanges at the
anterior end. Some of the features suggest those of Protozoophaga. A new genus
Austroxyurts is proposed for it, and is diagnosed as follows:

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 193

Oxyurinae. Mouth simple with two papillae; cuticle without cephalic ex-
pansions; vestibule short, without teeth. Oesophagus with distinet bulb but with-
out marked prebulbar swelling; excretory pore behind bulb. Male with alae, a
pair of sessile adanal papillae, a median postanal, and three pairs of pedunculate
postanal papillae; spicule, single, weakly chitinized, short ; gubernaculum absent ;
tail short, resembling a spike. Female with very long tail, tapering to a fine point ;
vulva in anterior third. Type A. finlaysont.

The species is dedicated to H. H. Finlayson, Honorary Curator of Mammals,
South Australian Museum. In company with it were found the two Oxyurids,
whose descriptions follow this account.

PASSALURUS PARVUS sp. nov.
(Fig. 13-14.)

Found in company with other oxyurids in Petawroides volans var. minor,
Fitzroy River, Central Queensland.

Short worms, females 3-3-5 mm. long; single male found, 1-12 mm. long.
Cuticle deeply annulate, finely striated longitudinally. Anterior end rounded.
Mouth small, terminal, with three lips supported by chitinous prolongation from
the buccal capsule. Two (perhaps four) small papillae at anterior end. Buecal
capsule very large, 0:02 mm. long, 0-023 mm. wide at its base, with thin outwardly
concave walls; three semi-circular teeth, 7. long, arising from the anterior end of
the oesophagus. Oesophagus 0-52 mm. long in male, 0-63 mm. in female; with a
constriction between the tubular portion and the spherical bulb. Nerve cord and
excretory pore not observed.

The posterior end of the only male available is in an unsatisfactory state.
The single spicule is 0-06 mm. long, more strongly chitinized at its proximal end.
There is a short spine-like tail. The papillary arrangement was not recognizable.

The female has a narrow tapering posterior end, the tail being 0:42 mm. long
and markedly ringed. Position of vulva not determined. Eggs thick-shelled,
0-03 by 0-01 mm., mostly with a thickening of the shell at one pole; embryos
present.

The species belongs to a genus closely related to Passalurus. In view of the
indifferent condition of the specimens, a satisfactory examination could not be
made, and it has been considered advisable to place the species provisionally under
that genus.

194 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Oxyvris (s.1) ACUTICAUDATA sp. nov.

(Fig. 15-16.)

From caecum and intestine of Petauroides volans var. minor, Fitzroy River,
Centrai Queensland. Only females were found. They were 6-8 mm. long, tapering
gradually towards posterior end, with very finely-pointed tail, 1-4 mm. long.
Cephalic cuticle inflated; body narrowed suddenly in the anterior 0:25 mm.;
cuticle at extreme anterior end forming a collar 0-015 mm. in depth, surrounding
oral aperture. Six minute papillae pass up through the collar and project about
1-5y, a pair of larger papillae behind these. Buccal capsule wide, shallow, 0-016
by 0-007 mm. Oesophagus 0:7 mm. long, with wide lumen which narrows at the
end of the anterior tubular portion, expanding again in the bulb; the latter wider
than long. Nerve ring just in front of mid-oesophagus. Exeretory pore in the
vicinity of junction of first and second thirds of tubular part of oesophagus. Vulva
strongly chitinized, lying at end of first quarter of the body length. Eggs 0-034
by 0-017 mm.

On account of the absence of males we prefer to assign the species to Oxyuris
(s.1). Itis certainly not a member of Oxyuris (s.str.).

SYPHACIA TRICHOSURI Sp. nov.

(Fig. 17-18.)

From the intestine of Trichosurus vulpecula, West Burleigh, South-eastern
Queensland. Only females present ; 5 mm. long; with cervical cuticle inflated for
0-12 mm. from the anterior end, the body being narrowed in this region. Tail
long, 0-8 mm. in length, tapering to a point. Vestibule small, 0-015 mm. long,
0-02 mm. wide, chitinized, with three small rounded teeth at its base. Oesophagus
0-6 mm. long, with a constriction between the tubular portion and the spherical
bulb which is about 0-1 mm. in diameter. Nerve ring at 0:3 mm. from the anterior
end and at about mid-length of the tubular portion of the oesophagus. Vulva at
about midlength ; vagina muscular ; uterus long, single. Two ovaries. Eggs 0:05
by 0-025 mm., with very thick shells.

In most features the species agrees with those of Syphacia, but differs in
possessing a definite vestibule and in having the vagina at mid-body. On account
of the absence of males it is considered preferable to assign the parasite to Syphu-
cia, all of whose previously described species occur in rodents,

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 195

Famiry TRICHOSTRONGYLIDAE
AUSTROSTRONGYLUS MINUTUS Sp. Nov.
(Fig. 19-21.)

From the intestine of Macropus dorsalis, Kidsvold, Burnett River, Queens-
land. Male 2:9-3-1 mm., female 3-2 mm., all specimens probably immature; red-
dish when collected. These small thin worms were coiled in alcohol. There are
six longitudinal ridges on the body, a ventral and a dorsal pair, in addition to a
very wide lateral pair, Hach of the latter is about 0-035 mm. wide, and the others
each about 0-012 mm, They extend from the region just behind the inflated area
almost to the end of the body, and in the case of the female reach to the anus. The
lateral lines are longest. The transverse striae are about 1-6u apart. Cuticle at
head end inflated, but not striated, for a distance of 0:46 mm. Mouth small, cir-
eular. Buceal capsule dome-shaped anteriorly and funnel-like at its base, its
chitinous walls being continued back into the oesophagus. Projecting into the
base of the capsule is a relatively large dorsal tooth 8, long in the male, 10» in
the female. There are also a smaller ventral and two small lateral teeth. The
capsule is 7-8» long and 13-144 wide in the male, 104 long and 18» wide in the
femaie, The oesophagus is 0-20 mm. long in the male (about one-sixteenth of body
length) and 0-25 mm. in the female (one-thirteenth of body length), widening
posteriorly. The excretory pore lies at about 0-16 mm. from the head end, and in
the vicinity of the junction of the third and fourth quarters of the oesophagus.

Male. Bursa expanded laterally and nearly symmetrical; ventral lobes
slightly separated from the laterals; small dorsal lobe. Ventral rays widely separ-
ated and subequal, the ventro-ventral curving antero-ventrally, the latero-ventral
extending directly laterally. Externo- and medio-lateral rays stout, close to each
other and parallel ; postero-lateral ray much narrower than the other laterals. All
ventral and lateral rays reach almost to the bursal edge, as also does each long nar-
row externo-dorsal which arises separately. Dorsal ray rather short, giving off
two narrow curved branches at about half its length and then continuing a short
distance before bifureating into the short terminations. Spicules equal, 0-35-0-4
mm. long, about one-eighth of body length, narrow, cylindrical, curved at the distal
end to meet each other at a blunt point. <A long narrow chitinization of the dorsal
wall of the spicule sheath probably represents a gubernaculum.,

Female. The tail ends in long spine-like portion. Anus at 0-09 mm. from
the posterior end. Vagina very short; ovejectors stout, relatively long; eggs not
present; vulva at 0°31-0-35 mm. from tip of the tail, the distance being about
one-ninth of body length.

196 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A, minutus differs from the other known species, A. macropodis Chandler
1924, in the following features: smaller size, presence of lateral teeth in the buccal
capsule, smaller dorsal tooth, rather shorter oesophagus, more posteriorly situated
vulva, longer spicules, bursa much less markedly asymmetrical and of different
shape, most of the bursal rays relatively stouter, and the different arrangement. of
the branches of the dorsal ray.

FILARINEMA PERAMELIS sp. nov.
(Fig. 22-25.)

From the intestine of a bandicoot, Isoodon obesulus, from West Burleigh,
South-eastern Queensland. Male, 4:6-4-9 mm. long with a maximum diameter of
0-07 mm.; female, 5-8-6 mm. Head very small, and its parts are difficult to deter-
mine accurately. Head end with a very narrow cuticular inflation extending back
for about 0:05-0:06 mm., the underlying region being somewhat narrower than
the succeeding portion. There appear to be six minute lips. Longitudinal cuti-
cular striations are present. There is no buccal cavity, the oesophagus reaching
the anterior end. A tooth could not be recognized, though in a few specimens a
tooth-like structure seemed to be protruding from the end of the oesophagus
through the mouth. Oesophagus 0-35-0-38 mm. long, thin, widening slightly to-
wards its base. Intestine narrow. Nerve cord and cervical papillae not observed.
Excretory pore quite distinct and lying in the vicinity of the mid-oesophagus,
about 0:22 mm. from the head end.

Male. Bursa large, consisting of two large lateral lobes and a dorsal lobe,
laterals with lower edges inturned. Ventral and lateral rays more or less equal
in length and thickness, and all extending practically to the bursal edge; all of
them arise together from a common stem, diverging in their distal third. Ven-
trals separate; ventro-laterals curved ventrally ; postero-laterals slightly curved ;
externo-laterals nearly straight; medio- and postero-laterals bending rather dor-
sally. Dorsal ray stout and long, the externo-dorsals arising as stout curved rays
from the end of its proximal third; the main stem continues a short distance and
then gives off two short thin lateral branches, the main portion proceeding back-
wards to divide ultimately into two small bidigitate rays almost reaching the bursal
edge. Spicules 0-14—0-15 mm. long; anterior part cylindrical, 0-015 mm. in dia-
meter; widest near middle; eventually subdividing to form three pointed pro-
cesses, two shorter laterals, and a longer median. The lateral structures are com-
parable with the whip-like processes described by Ménnig for Filarinema flagrtfer.
The gubernaculum is spindle-shaped. There are two minute prebursal papillae.

Female. Tail 0:08-0:09 mm. long, tapering to terminate in a median ventral

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 197

and two latero-dorsal conical processes, the ventral cone bearing on its dorsal
surface a spine-like process 0:012 mm. long. Vulva 1-13 mm. from the posterior
end and protected by a thin flap arising in front of it. Vagina short; ovejectors
muscular ; uteri divergent.

Fig. 19-21. Austrostrongylus minutus. 19. head, ventral; 20. head, lateral; 21. bursa, dorsal.
Fig. 22-25. Filarinema peramelis. 22, bursa, ventral; 23. head end; 24. spicule, lateral; 25.
spicule, subventral.

Fig. 19, 20, and 23 are drawn to scale adjacent to fig. 23; 21, 22, 24, and 25, to scale beside
fig. 22.

The specific name is derived from Perameles, the generic name under which
most Australian bandicoots were formerly placed. J’. peramelis approaches most
closely to F. flagrifer Monnig 1929, from Macropus rufus, but differs in size; the
presence of cuticular cephalic inflations and longitudinal striations; the form of
the spicules; and the characters of the dorsal ray. The difference regarding the
branching of the dorsal ray may be of generic value, but we prefer to place the
species under Moénnig’s genus because of the similarity of most of the other
characters.

LITERATURE.

Baylis, H. A. (1927) : Some new parasite nematodes from Australia. Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (9), 20, 1927, 214-225.

Chandler, A. C. (1924): A new genus of Trichostrongylid worms from the kan-
garoo. Parasitol, 16, 1924, 160-163.

198 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Johnston, T. H. and Mawson, P. M. (1938) : An account of some filarial parasites
of Australian marsupials, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. 62 (1), 1938, 107-121.

Johnston, T. H. (1938) and Mawson, P. M.: Strongyle nematodes from Central
Australian kangaroos and wallabies. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust. 62 (2), 1938,
263-286.

Ménnig, H. O. (1929) : Filarinema flagrifer n.gen. n.sp., a Trichostrongylid para-
site of the kangaroo. Rep. Dir. Vet. Serv. Pretoria, 15, 1929, 311-316.

NEW SPECIES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, CONCHOLOGIST AND
FRANK K. GODFREY, HON. ASSISTANT CONCHOLOGIST,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

In preparing a list of South Australian Gastropoda we found that some new species
awaited description, and that a few names required emendation. The more obvious are
here dealt with. Holotypes are in the South Australian Museum, and their registration
numbers are quoted herein.

Scissurella Cyprina sp. nov.

Scissurella ornata Cotton and Godfrey (nec May), S. Aust. Nat., Xv, Nov. 30, 1938, p.
21, pl. i. Fig. 8.

NEW SPECIES or SOUTH AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, Concuotocisr, ann
FRANK K. GODFREY, Hon. Assistant ConcHoutocist, Sourn Ausrratian Museum.

Plate xvii.

Ln preparing a list of South Australian Gastropoda we found that some new
species awaited description, and that a few names required emendation. The
more obvious are here dealt with. Holotypes are in the South Australian Museum,
and their registration numbers are quoted herein.

SCISSURELLA CYPRINA sp. nov.

Scissurella ornata Cotton and Godfrey (nec May), 8. Aust. Nat., XV, Nov. 30,

1938, p. 21, pl. i, fig. 8.

Minute, discoidal, somewhat oblique; colour yellowish-white; protoconch of
one-and-a-half turns, squared by a beaded ridge, and sunken below the level of the
two rounded adult whorls, which are somewhat angled by the canal; canal, a deep
furrow, about mid-way between the suture and the periphery, has sharp, raised
edges, and the whole is surmounted on a distinet ridge surrounding the shell;
radial ribs, sixteen, raised, curved, interrupted by the furrow, extend from the
suture to the small, deep umbilicus; numerous spirals, smaller than the ribs, do
not pass over those ribs which are between the canal and the suture, but pass over
the lower ribs and develop a crested appearance; aperture defined by a continuous
narrow margin; slit open, deep, moderately wide. Holotype, height 1:5 mm.,
diameter 2 mm., Venus Bay, 8S. Aust. (Reg. No. D 9674). Distribution: Cape
Borda, 8. Aust., Venus Bay, beach.

From Scissurella ornata May, the species is larger, the spirals stronger and
radials weaker. South Australian examples have been formerly labelled ornaia
jm error.

ZEIDORA LEGRAND! Tate, 1894.

Zeidora tasmamca Cotton and Godfrey (nec Beddome), S. Aust. Nat., XV, March
27, 1934, p. 53, pl. i, fig. 12.

This is separable from Zeidora tasmanica Beddome in the position of the
protoconch, which does not quite reach to the posterior margin, whereas in the
Tasmanian species it sometimes overhangs. Furthermore the South Australian
shell is twice as large as the Tasmanian. Holotype, length 9-5 mm., breadth 6 mm.,

200 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

height 2 mm., depth of cleft 2 mm., Corny Point, 8. Aust. (D 13371). Distribu-
tion: Corny Point; Venus Bay; also dredged St. Francis Island, 35 fathoms;
Backstairs Passage, 7-20 fathoms.

CALLIOSTOMA (SALSIPOTENS) CALLIOPE sp. nov.

Calliostoma (Salsipotens) ciliare Cotton and Godfrey (nec Menke), 8S. Aust. Nat.,

XVI, April 10, 1935, p. 19, pl. i, fig. 9.

Pyramidal, broadly depressed, thin, imperforate; colour yellowish, red-
spotted along the suture; sometimes the adult whorls have a spiral line articulated
brown and white like a twisted cord, below which are crescents of brown, open
forwards, also with axial flames of brown growing wider as they descend to the
periphery, beyond which they extend for a short distance across the base; sculp-
ture obsolete, transversely striate, and decussated by very fine axial striae; whorls
six, flat, margined below; suture linear ; base flat; aperture obliquely ovate, outer
lip margin callous within. Holotype, height 23 mm., diameter, 830 mm., Gulf St.
Vincent, S. Aust., 13-17 fathoms (D 13611). Distribution: Gulf St. Vincent;
Investigator Straits; Backstairs Passage; 13-17 fathoms; also W. Aust., Swan
River ; Esperance Bay; on beach. Formerly misidentified as Calliostoma ciliare
Menke, from North-west Australia, which is different in shape, sculpture, and
eolour.

ETHMINOLIA ELVERI sp. nov.

Trochoid, depressed, widely umbilicate, thin; whorls medially angulate, and
subanguiate above; colour extremely variable; base colour white or rose, axially
flecked and blotched ; protoconch minute, depressed, white, smooth, of one-and-a-
half whorls; sculpture of regular microscopic spiral lirae cut by fine, regular,
accremental striae; umbilicus profound and narrow, spirally obsoletely ribbed;
aperture subquadrate, outer lip thin; columella simple, very slightly convex at
the lower half. Holotype, height 7 mm., diameter 10 mm., Gulf St. Vincent, 8.
Aust., 7 fathoms (D. 13388). Distribution: Beach, not common, Hardwicke Bay,
Spencer Gulf; dredged, Gulf St. Vincent; Investigator Straits; Backstairs Pas-
sage; Cape Jaffa; 7-130 fathoms. Also King George Sound, W. Aust., on beach
and dredged to 28 fathoms. South Australian Museum specimens have been lab-
elled angulata Adams, prodictus Fischer, and later probabilts Iredale. The species
is larger, higher, less shouldered, and less acutely angulate than the Peronian
probabilis Iredale.

ETHMINOLIA CINCTA sp. nov.

Conical, elevated, umbilicate, spirally ribbed ; colour, creamy-white with duli
red interrupted zig-zags, except the first three whorls which are yellow; spiral

COTTON AND GODFREY—NEW SPECIES OF GASTROPODA 201

striae, very fine, crowded, present on the base and in the umbilicus; well marked
axial wrinkles in the infrasutural excavation; spire rather high, scalar; proto-
conch small, blunt; adult whorls about five-and-a-half, convex medially, with a
noduled shelf below the suture, angulated, and ribbed at about one-fifth of their
breadth, and flatly rounded from the angulation to the suture; last whorl bluntly
angulated at the edge of the rounded base; suture well defined; aperture slightly
oblique, round ; outer lip thin, sharp; inner lip thin, sharp, slightly spreading on
the columella; interior iridescent ; umbilicus wide, deep, much impressed at the
suture, which is spirally continuous to the apex. Holotype, height 4-5 mm., major
diameter 6-5 mm., minor diameter 5-5 mm., Leven’s Beach, Spencer Gulf, 8. Aust.,
shallow water (Cotton) (D. 3389). Distribution: Beachport, to Hardwicke Bay,
Spencer Gulf, to 200 fathoms.

Related to the Peronian shell, Ethminolia pulcherrima Angas (Minolia), but
our shell has the sculpture more valid, though the base is almost smooth; the
coloration is different from the bright dotting of the N.S. Wales shell. The
deeper water form from 200 fathoms off Beachport is less validly sculptured, with
whorls more rounded and smaller, with higher spire, recalling Ethminolia pul-
cherrima emendata Iredale, the Peronian deep-water form.

SPECTAMEN MARSUS sp. nov,

Conoidal, umbilicate, thin ; colour, protoconch white, consisting of one-and-a-
half whorls, then five adult whorls of saffron yellow, gradually fading out into
very light yellow or dull grey; adult whorls and base have rather broad, equi-
distant, radiating, somewhat flexuous, rosy streaks which are disconnected at the
periphery ; spiral striae very crowded; spire elevated; whorls six, convex, de-
pressed—canaliculate below the suture, gradate; last whorl carinate; aperture
subquadrate ; outer lip thin; columella scarcely arcuate, narrow, forming an angle
with the basal margin; umbilicus funnel-shaped with two spiral carinae within,
which are granulate; the angulate margin has about twenty tubercules, due to
axial wrinkles in the umbilicus, which end just outside the border. Holotype,
height 5°2 mm., major diameter 7 mm., minor diameter 6+5 mm., Beachport, 8.
Aust., 40 fathoms (D. 13390). Distribution: Dredged, Beachport to 120 miles
west of Hucla, Great Australian Bight, 40-300 fathoms.

Differs from Spectamen philippensis Watson, in being smaller, thinner, and
less elate; it is somewhat less canaliculate at the suture, and the spiral lineations
are more crowded ; it is yellowish instead of white; the rosy axial colour markings
are fewer, and are present on the base; also there are two or three spirals in the
umbilicus. In all these characters, except the colour, our shells show some varia-

202 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tion, a few having been misidentified as Spectamen bellulus Angas, but they are
not that species, and are merely variants of Spectamen marsus.

BASILISSA BOMBAX sp. nov.

Basilissa radialis var. bilia Verco (nec Hedley), Trans. Roy. Soc., 8S. Aust., XXX,

1906, p. 218, pl. x, fig. 1, 2, 3.

Depressedly conical, umbilicate; protoconch homostrophe, smooth, of one-
and-a-quarter whorls; adult whorls six; spire somewhat gradate; one marked
spiral rib in the first whorl and two in the others, becoming gradually more valid
and distant ; a secondary threadlet appears between the two ribs in the third whorl ;
another threadlet arises in the fourth, two in the fifth, and still another spiral rib
in the body-whorl; the last rib forms the periphery and the suture, and, separated
from its fellow by a furrow, gives an apparent canaliculate suture; sutures well
marked; base flatly rounded with eight, equidistant, nearly equal, concentric
rounded spiral lirae, as wide as their interspaces; shell surface cancellated by
crowded narrow erect lamellae, crossing the spirals, and sinuous, but not follow-
ing exactly the outline of the labrum, and ending at the outer basal lira; crowded
radial striae cancellate and granulate the base; aperture obliquely quadrate, with
a large posterior sinus in the outer lip, rather deeper than wide ;a second sinus at
the baso-iabral junction, about as deep and rather wider, and a third shallow and
wide at the baso-columellar angle; columella oblique, concave, expanded towards
the umbilicus, truneate anteriorly; inner lip thin, smooth; interior of aperture
smooth; umbilicus deep, small, margined with oblique plicate tubercles. Holo-
type, height 3-6 mm.; diameter 3-4 mm., Cape Jaffa, 8. Aust., 130 fathoms (D.
13397). Also dredged from 300 fathoms off Cape Jaffa.

Formerly recorded as Buasilissa radialis var. bilix Hedley, a Peronian shell,
noticeably different in the validity of sculpture and the shape of the whorls. The
species is well figured by Verco loc. cit.

PELLAX GABINIANA sp. nov.

Subglobose, thin, imperforate, smooth; ground colour whitish, beautifully
closely lined or speckled with rose—which colour predominates ; protoconch white ;
columella white; spire depressed, of three whorls; subangled at the lower portion
of the body-whorl, where there is a white maculated band; aperture oval, simple.
Holotype, height 6 mm., diameter 4-5 mm., Royston Head, Yorke Peninsula, 5.
Aust. (D. 13414). Distribution: Corny Point, and generally along the west coast
of Yorke Peninsula, to Albany, W. Aust. This distinctive species has been in-
correctly listed as Phasianella kocht Philippi.

COTTON AND GODFREY—NEW SPECIES OF GASTROPODA 203

Scaua (MazEgcaLA) BEACHPORTENSIS sp. nov.

Squat, imperforate; sculpture of thin, erect lamellae, forming a right-angled
shoulder on the upper portion of each whorl; lamellae numbering seventeen on the
body-whorl; interstices crossed by obscure spiral incisions; protoconch of four
whorls, smooth, polished, sharp; aperture oval, free. Holotype, height 9 mm.,
diameter 4 mm., Beachport, S. Aust., 110 fathoms (D. 18302). The holotype is
unique.

From Scala heloris Iredale, the species differs in being smaller, more nume-
rously but less prominently variced, and in lacking the basal rib. From Scala belli-
cosa Hedley, it differs in being spirally sculptured and stouter.

ScauA (NARVALISCALA) FLINDERSI sp. nov.

Elongate, acuminate, imperforate, variced at about every one-and-a-quarter
whorls; sculpture of longitudinal rounded ribs, about twenty-five on the body-
whorl, crossed by about six spiral threadlets; protoconch smooth, sharp, incon-
spicuous; adult whorls, fourteen, rounded; suture impressed; base smooth, de-
fined by a fine basal rib; aperture circular. Holotype, height 24 mm., diameter
7mm., 120 miles west of Eucla, Great Australian Bight, 300 fathoms (D. 13303).
The holotype has the varices mostly on the dorsum, therefore only those at the
upper quarter and the last one on the body-whorl, are seen in the figure.

Compared with Scala dorysa Iredale, the present species is separable by the
greater height of the individual whorls, and their roundness. The last three
whorls of Scala flinderst together, form more than half the length of the shell,
whereas in Scala dorysa they form less than half.

Scaua (NopiIscaLA) SUBCRASSA sp. NOV.

Narrow, thick, imperforate; longitudinally sculptured with thick, low ribs,
angled at the upper third, and obsolete at the rather deep suture, crossed by spiral
threads; protoconch, fairly blunt, of two smooth whorls; adult whorls nine, flat-
tened ; basal keel indistinct; aperture oval, not separate from the body-whorl, a
thick varix forming the outer lip; a further thick varix is situated in the middle
back of the penultimate whorl. Holotype, height 13 mm. diameter 4 mm., Gulf St.
Vineent, S. Aust., 22 fathoms (D. 1383801). Allied to Scala apostolorum Iredale,
but is larger, and also differs in that the basal rib is obsolete; the general appear-
ance too is different.

The present species was formerly classed in error as Scala crassilabrum
Sowerby, from the Philippines and Central America.

204 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

RETICUNASSA FLINDERSI sp. nov.

Thin, white, sculptured with twenty obsolete, axial riblets, crossed by about
eight spiral riblets, producing rather depressed tubercles at the intersections ; base
with five sharp, spiral riblets; protoconch of four depressed whorls, smooth, pol-
ished, horn coloured, with microscopic axial accremental striae only ; adult whorls
four, a little convex, sharply shelved at the suture. There is no abrupt cessation
of sculpture at the commencement of the adult shell as in Reticwnassa dipsacoides
Hedley, but a very gradual formation of sculpture, leaving no definite axial indi-
cation as to the finish of the protoconch and the start of the adult shell; the basal
keel of the protoconch is only just discernible at the junction. Holotype, height
9mm., diameter 5 mm., Cape Jaffa, 8. Aust., 300 fathoms (D. 13298).

Distinguished from Reticunassa dipsacoides Hedley, by the less developed
sculpture, the different basal sculpture, the protoconch features, and the relative
height and diameter.

SEGNITILA gen. nov.

Shell dextral, discoid, keeled, somewhat flattened beneath, last whorl com-
paratively rather large, spire small and sunken, umbilicus narrow, aperture
acutely angled, no internal laminae. Genotype, Segmentina victoriae BH. A. Smith,
1881.

This genus is introduced for that species, in describing which Smith stated:
‘‘Tt appears inconsistent to place a shell in Segmentina, lacking the essential char-
acters of internal laminae.’’

ATAXOCERITHIUM BEASLEYI Sp. nov.

Protoconch, blunt, of three convex whorls, the first smooth, the second and
third with distant, valid, axial, sigmoid, round cords. Spire whorls with close
spirals, rounded, wider than the interspaces, five in the penultimate whorl, the
lowest two more prominent throughout, the upper three diminishing in number
towards the apex where there is but one; periphery roundly angular; base nearly
flat with six spirals; axial, obsolete, round costae, nearly as wide as the interspaces,
fourteen in the penultimate whorl; mouth roundly rhomboid; outer lip slightly
expanded, sharp, crenulated ; inner lip erect and free; canal short, nearly closed
at front of point of contact of inner and outer lip, reflected ; collumella curved and
forming an obtuse angle at the canal. Shell colour of holotype white. Holotype
height 8 mm., diameter 2-9 mm., Cape Borda, 8. Aust., 55 fathoms (D. 13435).
Distribution : 81 miles west of Eucla, 4 fathoms; Gulf St. Vincent, ? depth, seven
specimens larger and more solid than the type, four are uniformly brown, another
has the protoconch white and the rest of the shell brown, two are nearly white ; 45

COTTON AND GODFREY—NEW SPECIES OF GASTROPODA 205

fathoms east of north of the Neptune Islands; Beachport, 100-150 fathoms, one
specimen brown; Gulf St. Vincent, 10 fathoms; 50 miles west of Eucla, W. Aust.,
80 fathoms.

This species differs from A. serotinwm in having valid spirals of obsolete
axials. In A. serotinwm the axials are more prominent than the spirals.

EPIDEIRA FLINDERSI Sp. nov.

Fairly solid, acuminate, last whorl longer than the spire; colour, cream,
blotched with light brown just below the sutures; sculpture of spiral lirae crossed
by numerous, fine, axial plicae, which have each two small nodules arranged ver-
tically, one at and one just below the suture; below the lower nodule is a narrow
area in which the axial plicae are obsolete, there another nodule tops the longer
plica of the whorls; plicae are somewhat cut by the axials but not sufficient to form
distinet tuberculose sculpture; protoconch bulbous, of two smooth, turbinate
whorls, set obliquely on the adult shell; adult whorls seven. Holotype, height 21
mm., diameter 8 mm., 80 miles west of Eucla, Great Australian Bight, 75 fathoms
(D. 13645).

The species is readily distinguished from others of the genus, the only one
bearing the remotest resemblance is Epideira striata Gray, from New South Wales,
which, however, has a coarser sculpture of a very different pattern.

EPIpEIRA BEACHPORTENSIS sp. nov.

Very solid, acuminate, last whorl longer than the spire; colour cream, with
distant lines of elongate, small, brown spots; sculpture of fine, regular, spiral
riblets, with slightly wider interspaces, the whole crossed by weak, irregular
axials; protoconch bulbous, of two smooth, turbinate whorls, set obliquely on the
adult shell; adult whorls six; columella bearing a heavy callus; notch broad and
shallow; outer lip not inflected; canal very short. Holotype, height 31 mm., dia-
meter 11 mm., Beachport, 8. Aust., 150 fathoms (D. 13644).

This species appears quite distinct from all its congeners.

ONUSTUS FLINDERSI sp. nov.

Onustus peromanus Cotton and Godfrey, nec Iredale, S.A. Nat., XIII, 1982, p. 38,

pl. i, fig. 4.

Trochiform, medium size; white or yellowish, the basal ridges yellowish-
brown; growth lines strong, irregular, oblique, crossed by flexuous, curved, ob-
lique striae; base with numerous, sharp-ridged, curved, granose ribs, with fine
thread lines between, crossed by distinet spiral ribs; spire conical, slightly convex;

206 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

protoconch conic, whorls few, convex, smooth, polished, white, with marks where
very small fragments have formerly adhered; adult whorls nine, the last keeled;
base flat; aperture low, broad, interior porcellanous; outer lip produced above;
inner lip reflexed, forming a thick, white, shining callus; juveniles narrowly um-
bilieate, adult shells without umbilicus; operculum squarish. Holotype, height
9 mm., diameter 18 mm., Petrel Bay, St. Francis Island, 8. Aust., 15-20 fathoms
(D. 13615).

The upper surface is almost or quite hidden by the agglutinated shells. Com-
pared with Onustus peronianus Iredale, the species is smaller and differently
sculptured, and has the usual South Australian mollusean shells attached.

GUNDLACHIA EREMIA sp. nov.

Limpet-like, subpellucid, thin, oval, obliquely conical, in two distinct tiers;
the juvenile portion above, long and narrow, one-third overlapping the margin of
the adult; viewed laterally the juvenile is set obliquely on the adult, but follows
the median line when viewed dorsally ; internal shelf well produced. Holotype,
total length 3-5 mm., breadth 1-8 mm., juvenile, length 2 mm., breadth 0:9 mm.,
Mount Lofty, 8. Aust., in creek (D. 13613). Distribution: Mount Lofty; Aldgate;
Reed Beds, River Torrens, near Henley Beach.

From Gundlachia petterdi Johnston, the species is smaller, thinner, smoother,
and has the juvenile portion set along the median line and not obliquely to it, also
the internal shelf almost reaches to the middle of the adult shell. It is compar-
atively rare in South Australia.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE xvii.
Fig. 1. Hpidewra flinderst sp. nov. ( 2:4).

Fig. 2. Gundlachia eremia sp. nov., dorsal view (>< 12).
Fig. 3. Gundilachia erenua sp. nov., ventral view (x 12).
Fig. 4. Epidewa beachportensis sp. nov. (< 1-6).

Fig. 5. Scala (Mazescala) beachportensis sp. nov. (< 7:6).
Fig. 6. Ataxocerithium beasleyi sp. nov. (X 6).

Fig. 7. Scala (Narvaliscala) flindersi sp. nov. (* 1:8).
Fig. 8. Reticunassa flinderst sp. nov. (X 4).

Fig. 9. Hthminolia cincta sp. nov. ( 5:6).

Fig.10. Hthnwnolia elvert sp. nov. (X 4).

Fig.11. Spectamen marsus sp. nov. (X 6).

Fig. 12. Pellax gabiniana sp. nov. (> 6).

Fig.13. Scala (Nodiscala) subcrassa sp. nov. (X 4).

REc. OF S.A. MUSEUM VoL, VI, PLATE XVII.

PUBLIC LIBRARY, MUSEUM, AND. ART GALLERY
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM
Vol VI,_No. 3

“® Published by the: Board of Governors, and edited by the: Museum: Director
. “(Herbert M. Hale) .

ADELAIDE, DECEMBER 16TH, 1939.
PRINTED AT: THE: HASSELL- PRESS» 104 CURRIE STREET

A NEW ASTROCONUS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. LYMAN CLARK, MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,
CAMBRIDGE, Mass., U.S.A.

Summary

Thanks to the kindness of the Director of the South Australian Museum, I have had
the privilege of studying a very remarkable “basket star” (Gorgonocephalid) of the
genus Astroconus. The specimen is exceptionally well preserved and very
handsomely coloured, and hence quite different in appearance from any other
specimen of the genus I have ever seen.

Astroconus Pulcher sp. nov.

Disk 35mm. in diamter, with five arms, exceeding 125 mm. in length, forking at least
seven or eight times; width of arms at base 10 mm., height 6 mm., disk distorted by
drying; in life it was undoubtedly more or less swollen with the radial and interradial
areas about equal ; in its dry condition the radial ridges are elevated, the interradial
areas much sunken; radial shields distally widely separated from each other, space
between considerably depressed.

A NEW ASTROCONUS rrom SOUTH AUSTRALIA
By H. LYMAN CLARK, Muszeum or ComParativE Zoorocy, Camnripcs, Mass, U.S.A,

Plate xviii.

THANKS to the kindness of the Director of the South Australian Museum, IT have
had the privilege of studying a very remarkable ‘‘basket star’? (Gorgonocephalid)
of the genus Astroconus. The specimen is exceptionally well preserved and very
handsomely coloured, and hence quite different in appearance from any other
specimen of the genus [ have ever seen.

ASTROCONUS PULCHER sp, noy,

Disk 35 mm. in diameter, with five arms, exceeding 125 mm. in length, forking
at least seven or eight times; width of arms at base 10 mm,, height 6 mm.; disk
distorted by drying; in life it was undoubtedly more or Jess swollen with the
radial and interradial areas about equal; in its dry condition the radial ridges are
elevated, the interradial areas much sunken; radial shields distally widely separ-
ated from each other, space between considerably depressed, The shrinkage of
the disk causes the immer ends of the radial ridges to overlap in an irregular man-
ner laterally, making it impossible to see the actual centre of the disk, Relatively
large wrinkled, conieal tubercles, 1 to 2 mm. high and nearly as thick at base, are
scattered sparsely over the disk, chiefly at the distal ends of the radial shields. The
covering of the disk is made up of crowded granules and plates as in typical Astra-
conus. Beginning at the very base, the arms are covered by tubereled transverse
ridges all the way from the radial shields to the tips, the ridges separated from
each other by slightly depressed areas without tubercles; if it were not for their
distinctive colouration they would be much less defined and difficult to make out.
Covering of arms, ridges, and valleys similar, made up of granules and small
smooth plates as on disk. Each ridge to the third or fourth fork of the arm carries
blunt, conical tubercles like those on the disk but distinctly smaller ; occasionally
there may be only one on a ridge, or very rarely none, usually two, three, or four,
very rarely five, On the outer branches of the arms tubercles are wanting,

Entire lower surface eoyered by a fine granular coat, coarsest in the inter-
radial areas, Tentacle spores small. but the first pair well within the disk and
lacking any tentacle seale, appear to open at the tip of a more or less ealeified pap-
illa whieh has shrunken on drying into a minute shapeless heap. Hach sueceeding

208 REcoRDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

spore more or less concealed by a slight ridge on the adoral side, which earries three,
four, five, or even six short, thick, slightly flattened spines, terminating in a cluster
of 3-5 short but sharp glassy thorns ; the ridges themselves merge into the tubercled
ridges of the sides and upper surfaces of the arms. Each mouth angle carries a
large number of teeth and oral papillae of diverse sizes, arranged irregularly on
the sides und angle of the jaw. Genital slits conspicuous, 5 mm. lone, placed near
the arm but distinctly separated from it. Madreporie plate single, well defined,
close to the mouth frame in one interradial area,

Colour: above, a light ashy-grey with a purplish tinge; disk with numerous
spots and irregular slender brownish-blaek lines; arms with the ridges light ashy-
grey, the depressed areas between brownish-black in sharp contrast; the large
tubercles are ashy, but many have the tips more or less dusky. ‘The annulation of
the small branches of the arms is very handsome. Lower surface pale-buff or
eream colour; on the interradial areas are numerous irregular lines and spots of
brownish-black ; the mouth-frame and the lower surface of the arms is prettily
marked with numerous spots and small blotches of brownish-black. Arm spines
lemon-yellow in marked contrast. Oral papillae and teeth pale orange.

Holotype. South Australian Museum Coll. No, 1.561.

This very handsome, anc at present unique, specimen was taken in a crayfish
pot, in 20 fathoms of water, at Cape Dutton, South Anstralia, by Mr. 1K. Mattson.
Aside from its colouration there is little to distinguish it from australis, but the
reeular ‘‘ringing’’ of the arms is unlike amy specimen of that species which I have
seen (71linall). Itis hard to say, however, how tmuch the validity of this character
is affected by its close association with colour in the new species. Only observation
of a good series of living or well-preserved specimens Git determine the true status
of puilcher, Comparison with specimens of australis, of which no two specimens
seem to be exactly alike, showed that it was very close to some specimens of that
species. It is distinguished at once from occidentalis, the only other Astraconus
as yet deseribed, by the fact that the well marked transverse ridges which encircle
the upper surface and sides of the arms carry but few tubercles (2-5), and these
are relatively large and irregularly arranged.

As regards its relationship to australis, it may be only a colour form or ex-
treme variety, but after considerable study it seems best to treat it as a distinct
species, and I therefore have ventured to deseribe it as such, giving it the name of
pulcher, because of its beauty.

Vor. VI, PLATE XVIII.

co. S.A. MUSEUM

RE

Shy Crete asset os
eet WM

iy

+

NEW FOSSIL CHITONS FROM THE MIOCENE AND
PLIOCENE OF VICTORIA

By EDWIN ASHBY AND BERNARD C. COTTON, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

At the request of Dr. Sule, of Prague, Czechoslovakia, Edwin Ashby made
arrangements with Walter Greed, of Hamilton, Victoria, to collect fossiliferous earth
from three exposures in Victoria.

By a special process, and by using millimetre and half-millimetre sieves, Dr. Sule
washed out from four four-gallon tins of this material, no fewer than fifty species, of
which 44 are new species of fossil chitons. As hitherto the number of authentic fossil
chitons known from Australia was under twenty, the present additions more than
treble the known fauna.

NEW FOSSIL CHITONS rrom THE MIOCENE anp
PLIOCENE or VICTORIA

By EDWIN ASHBY ann BERNARD C. COTTON, Sourn AusrraLtan Museum.
Plates xix—xxi,

Ar the request of Dr. Sule, of Prague, Czechoslovakia, Edwin Ashby made arrange-
ments with Walter Greed, of Iamilton, Victoria, to collect fossiliferous earth from
three exposures in Victoria.

By a special process, and by using millimetre and half-millimetre sieves, Dr.
Sule washed out from four four-gallon tins of this material, no fewer than fifty
species, of which 44 are new species of fossil chitons. As hitherto the number of
authentic fossil chitons known from Australia was under twenty, the present addi-
tions more than treble the known fauna.

Still another species, which is represented by a unique specimen found in
soil helonging to the United States National Museum and from the same exposures,
is described. This unique specimen has been presented to the South Australian
Museum.

The great increase in our knowledge of the Australian Fossil Chitons, due to
the success of Dr, Sule’s method, should stimulate interest in the Polyplagophora
(Loricata), and seems to indicate that our ideas of the ¢lass may need considerable
revision.

The beautiful figures here reproduced were prepared by Miss Varena Nottage,
and, as an aid to the identification and understanding of the species, the missing
parts of the valves have been reconstructed, the original portion being demareated
by a dark line.

Prorocutron Ashby, 1901.
Proroourron GRANULOSUS Ashby and Torr, 1901.

The taxonomic importance of the above species cannot be too strongly stressed.
Pilsbry (4) wrote: ‘‘It is commonly known that the earlier (Palaeozoic) Chitons
are without insertion plates, and belong therefore to the family Lepidopleuridae.’’
In 1900(5) he proposed his sub-order HLoplacophora for the reception of all Palaeo-
zoi¢ genera, and adds: ‘‘ None of the Palaeozoie genera are known to continue into
the Mezozoie, but are replaced by types more related to modern Chitons.’’

210 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

While the genus Lepidoplewrus (still extant) has no insertion plates, it is Te-
coenized by most students as being the progenitor of all living forms, and that the
development of the insertion plate commenced with the end valves. Ashby (3)
has shown that the genus Protochiton has no insertion plate in either of the end
valves, but has begun to form one, still incomplete, in the median valves, It seems
certain therefore that the genus Protochiten cannot have been derived through any
member of the family Lepidopleuridae; it is undoubtedly the progenitor of the
large family Acanthochitonidae. It would seem that the Acanthochitomids have
been derived from primitive (Palaeozoic) stock along a separate and parallel line
to that which produced the Lepidapleuridae. Further, the tail valve of “ Chiton
gemmatus de Koninck’’ from the Carboniferous beds of Dunfermline, Scotland,
in the peculiar character of the outward extension of the tegmentum, absence of
insertion plate, and general shape, is seemingly the prototype of the tail valve of
Protochiton granulosus Ashby and Torr, The grains in the sculpture of P. granu-
losus are hollow, with a black dot on each grain, probably a sense organ, in which
case the hollow grain may haye been filled with ‘Serve fibre’’, a feature we do not
remember to have seen in any living Chiton, We conelnde that the strange ex-
tension to the tegmentum, common to both € thiton qemmatus de Koninels and Pro-
fochiton granulosus Ashby and Torr, is a primitive survival factor, giving in-
creased surface for the girdle attachment which was later discarded in favour of
an exteusion of the articulamentum to form the insertion plate and eaves. From
the single tin (four gallons) of material from Clifton Bank (Lower Miocene) nine
valves or fragments of valves of this species were obtained ; ove being a fairly per-
fect tail valve, the others median valves, ’

? PROTOCHITON sp.

Prom the same exposure also, comes a single median valve which is Acantho-
chitonoid in character, but with hollow grains which are widely different from those
of the above species. As this is too imperfect to make a holotype, its deseription is
deferred in the hope that future work will produce a better preserved example of
what must be a very interesting species,

Arossocurron Ashby, 1925.
APOSSOCITITON SULCI sp. TOV.
Plate xx, fig. 21.

Head valve only, length 1:0 m.m., width 1°25 mm. Straw coloured. Raised,
anterior slope convex and steep. Entire surface, under X30 Zeiss binocular,
evenly covered with circular, flat-topped polished, minute grains, which, although

ASHBY AND COTTON —Fossil CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 211

crowded, appear not to touch, Five ray ribs, three central ones strongly raised,
outer ones little more than mere folds.

Articulamentum. Insertion plate extending well forward beyond tegmentum
for one-fifth of width of latter ; colour white, three central ray ribs continned right
across insertion plate, which is folded up, the fold standing out beyond the margin
of the insertion plate; no trace of a slit.

Tegmentum inside without sculpture, turned over to an unusual degree; three
dark-coloured apertures in three depressions corresponding with the three ray ribs
of the tegmmentum, and each almost corresponding with the edge of tegmentuin
above.

Holotype. McDonald's, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4340, 8.A.M.
Beautifully preserved.

We have great pleasure in naming this i Important discovery after Dr. Sule, to
whose labours we are indebted for its discovery. Because of its excellent state of
preservation, this specimen amply justifies Ashby’'s primitive genus, Afossachiton,
which has all the characters of Acanthochiton except that of slits, and can be re-
garded as a direct progenitor of Acanthochiton. The three dark-coloured aper-
fires sugvest large nerve channels connecting with the sirdle at its junetion with
the tegmentum ; exactly similar features do not occur in living Chitons.

ArossocuiTon cupMorE! Ashby, 1925
Plate xx, fig. 22.

One median valve from MeDonald’s, Miocene (Kalimnan).

TELOCHITON subg. nov.

Sculpture conforming to that of Afassochiton, but ray ribs of auteriov and
other valves continued right across insertion plate in narrow raised ribs, which (in
some cases) do not seem to be a prolongation of the tegmentum, but are built wp
out of the articulamentum, Genotype, Afossochiton (Telochiton) dendus sp. nov.

Avoss0CHITON (TELOCHITON) DENDUS sp. lov.
Plate xx, fig, 24.

Incomplete head valve only; length of piece 3 mm., width 3 mm. Teementum
occupies about one-third of valve, insertion plate very wide; sculpture of crowded
elliptical small erains with no definite arrangement, those grains surmounting the
ray ribs sometimes larger, some several times as laree, in one place apparently
fused, larger near the posterior margin; five strongly raised ray ribs, the space

212 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

concave between the two posterior and the one next to them; an unusual feature is
that each rib in the tegmentum is continued right across the broad insertion plate
in a narrow sharply-raised rib, apparently built of the lower layer of the articula-
mentum ; this appearance is not due to attrition of the tegmentum, for, in places,
the anterior edge of the tegmentum has sculpture of small erains.

Articulamentum. White; tegmentum folded over at apex of valve, continua-
tion of ray ribs across the insertion plate not by a prolongation of tegmentum but
by a building-up of the articulamentum. No slits, but insertion plate edge con-
siderably damaged.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Ifamilton, Victoria. Lower Miocene.
P. 4342.

A¥roOssocHITON (TELOCHITON) ISCUS Sp. Nov.

Plate xix, fig. 20.

Tail valve only, length 2 mm., width 3 mm., much elevated and arched, mucro
at posterior third, tegmentum behind mucro vertical, reduced to one-third only
of area of shell; dorsal area very narrow, sides parallel, not wedge-shaped, with a
narrow short groove on either side, the posterior portion of this area worn, though
a perfect specimen may have a short second groove making this area narrowly and
partially pinnatifid ; area behind mucro, small, evenly covered with closely-packed
small, rounded, ball-like grains, posterior margin with two very large grains and
a third smaller one suggesting the beginning of a very coarse broken rib; a most
unusual feature typical of this subgenus, and situated next to the girdle at the
posterior portion of the insertion plate, are three ribs traversing the insertion plate,
one in line with the dorsal area, and one on either side diverging. (Since writing
this deseription, one rib has flaked off.) These do not appear to be narrow ridges
of the tegmentum, but are rather narrow thickenings of the articulamentum. No
slits. Area anterior to mucro decorated on either side with four horizontal rows
of globular to subelliptical grains; the pattern is so regular that transverse rows
of grains are formed.

Articulamentum. White; hollow under muero unusually deep, either the
sutural laminae were weak or the larger portion is missing.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P. 4339, S.A.M.

A¥rossocHITON (TELOCHITON) MAGNICOSTATUS Sp. Noy.
Plate xx, fig. 23.

One median valve only, length 5 mm., width 6-5 mm., angle of divergence 90°.
Carinated, beaked, dorsal ridge longitudinally convex, side slope steep ; dorsal area

ASHBY AND CoTTON—Fossit CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 213

flaked off, evidently longitudinally curved; pleural area diagonally concave, de-
eorated with rather large elliptical grains arranged diagonally in longitudinal
rows in some places; many of grains rectangular ou the upper end, obtusely
rounded at the lower; most striking feature is an exceptionally narrow and high
diagonal rib starting from the prominent beak and reaching the girdle not far
posterior of the middle of the valve; pleural area bends wpwards at the diagonal
rib, making pleural area concave; top of rib as wide as a single large elliptical
grain; pleural area slope to top of diagonal rib gradual, but on the other side, that.
of the lateral area, the slope is vertical; consequently lateral area is depressed, and
at a considerably lower level than the pleural area: sculpture of depressed lateral
area similar to that of pleural, but grains there a little more spaced.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P.4343,8.A.M.

The narrow, much raised diagonal rib and depressed lateral area easily cis-
tinguish this Afossechilon. What appears to be an extension of the sutural lami-
hie is On One side crossed by an extension of the diagonal rib. This feature is the
sole justification for placing the species under Telochiton. That a fragile fragment
of the teymentum does, at the diagonal rib, extend across the articulamentum, is
quite certain. Any but very catitions handling of the valve will break this. There
still remains a possibility that the whole of the articulamentum showing has been
produced by the flaking off of the tegmentum, for in places pieces of grain appear
to have been removed and then to haye adhered to the articulamentum, or this
appearance may be due to sears; additional examples are required for exact deter-
mination of this point.

AcantHocTUITON Gray, 1821,
ACANTHOCHITON FORSYTHENSES Sp. NOV.
Plate xx, fig, 26,

Two mediau valves. One, length 1*25 mn., width 2 mm. (holotype), and the
other, length 3 mm., width 3-8 min, telnet pe).

Carinated, dorsal area broadly wedge-shaped and pinnatifid, beaked, surface
smooth, lateral-pleural area decorated by longitudinal rows of tri angular, spaced,
flattish grains of four complete and one half- -rows ; grains regularly placed, form-
ing rows either way ; apex of triangular grains point downwards and forwards.

Articulamentum. White; insertion plates and sutural laminae broken off,
tegumentum folded back at the beak, in centre of the valve articulamentum much
thickened from one side to the other,

Tlolotype: Forsyth’s Grange Burn, near Hamilton, V ictoria, Pliocene (Kal-
imnan), P, 4345,

214 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Paratype: Same locality, median valve.

A further specimen from Clifton Bank, median valve, length 1:5 mm., width
2 mm,

This species differs from Afossochiton cudmoret Ashby in that the triangular
grains are arranged regularly, while in cudmoret they are very irregular, dorsal
areas not pinnatifid, and the carination less sharp.

ACANTHOCHITON FORSYTHENSIS RELATUS sub.sp. nov,

One median valve. Differs from forsythensis in lateral area being indicated
by a shallow fold, grains arranged diagonally, but dorsal area and grains similar.
Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, V ictoria, Lower Miocene.

ACANTHOCHITON DRUNUS Sp. Noy.
Plate xx, fig, 20.

One median valve, length 1-5 mm., width 2mm. Dorsal area worn, narrower
than in forsylhensis, not pinnatifid, but suggests longitudinal striation; ridge
straight, not arched ; pleural-lateral area decorated with straight lougitudinal rows
of grains arranged on the diagonal and almost, sometimes actually, touching ;
grains elliptical, slightly rounded at apex, flattish but not actually flat; five rows
of grains, one next to girdle has three grains and one uext to dorsal has worn
orains,

Articulamentum. Sutural laminae present but worn, broad, shallow anter-
iorly, sinus between wide; insertion plates have no indication of slit, though ab-
sence may be due to wearing,

Tlolotype : MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan), P. 4348, S.A.M.

ACANTHOCIITON CASUS Sp. NOV.
Plate xx, fig. 30.

One median valve ouly ; length 1-5 mm., width 2mm, Side slope steep ; dorsal
area, ridged, curved, and arched, less broad than in Acanthochiton forsythensis
due to smaller angle of divergence, subpinnatifid, three grooves narrower than in
forsythensis, lateral area not defined ; pleu ral-lateral area slightly concave, outer
edge becoming less steep; this area decorated with six and a partial seventh row
of grains placed longitudinally; grains small, triangular, placed in rows at an
acute angle, pointing forward ; viewed transversely, rows are curved, not at right
angles as in forsythensis; difference of pattern largely due to concavity of shell.

Articulamentum, Dirty-white; sutural laminae and insertion plates broken
off.

ASHBY AND CoTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 215

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Lower Miocene. P. 4349, S.A.M.
This species may be the progenitor of Acanthochiton forsythensis, for, in
several respects, they resemble one another,

ACANTHOCHITON SABRATUS sp. Tov.
Plate xx, fig, 25.

One median valve, length 1-75 mm., width 2-25 mm. Arched, not carinated,
side slope conyex and dorsal ridge beaked ; dorsal area has sculpture worn away
(if any was present), narrowly wedge-shaped as shown by the seulpture of pleural
area at the anterior end; pleural area separated from lateral by narrow rib, but
except for this rib, lateral area is at same level as pleural area; sculpture of both
areas and of the rib itself identical ; sculpture of small grains irregularly arranged
and crowded, minute crowded round grains near the beak, across the pleural area
grains are double the size, and for a short distance are in a semi-longitudinal
arrangement, become a little longer in shape, then another change takes place, and
a few grains along anterior margin are almost cirenlar with flattish tops; briefly,
grains are nnusnally small, with little pattern, and vary in shape.

Articulamentum. Dirty white; only a small fragment of suttwral lamina pre-
sent; we judge this to have been well developed, and sinus between fairly broad ;
all insertion plates missing; tegmeutum folded over at beak.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene,
P. 4544, S.A.M.

LikaAcurron sube. noy.

Pleural area decorated with narrow, widely-spaced ribs, instead of granular
ornamentation, In the genotype, Acanthochiton (Lirachiton) inecpectus sp. nov.,
the sculpture behind muero and in area corresponding with lateral area in median
valve is formed of triangular flat grains; near the apex of each is an ocellus or
sense organ. While we have provisionally placed the subgenus Lirachiton under
Acanthochiton, it could be placed under Afossochitan with as much justifiea-
tion ; the evidence of more material is needed to settle the point.

ACANTHOUIITON (LiRACTiITON) INEXPECTUS sp. nov.
Plate xx, fig. 31.

One tail valve only ; length 2 mm., width 2-5 mm. Shell arched, not earinated,
side slope almost straight; in most of dorsal area tegmentum has broken off, but
there is a little left at the anterior edge where it is smooth; muero a little posterior
of central, slope behind muero steep and decorated with flat triangular grains,

216 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

most of which have been partially worn off, revealing that they are apparently
hollow; at the sides, an area corresponding with lateral area in median valves
where the triangular flat grains are well preserved and larger than the posterior
ones; apertures situated near but not at the apex of each triangular grain, may
be sense organs, but larger than those in hollow grains of Protochiton granulosus,
corresponding with the ocelli common in several living genera ; rest of portion an-
terior to mucro and corresponding with pleural area, traversed longitudinally by
three much raised, rounded ribs, the trough between these ribs broad, and the
ribs themselves overhanging.

Articulamentum. White; hollow under mucro wide and deep, nerve aper-
tures exceptionally developed and numerous; slits not discernable, but two or three
very shallow grooves may be connected with slits.

Holotype: MeDonald’s Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4350, S.A.M.

The nearest allied living species is, we think, Pseudotonicia cunata Suter,
from New Zealand.

ACANTHOCHITON PILSBRYOIDES Sp. NOV.
Plate xx, fig. 27.

One median valve only, length 2-25 mm., width 3 mm. Subearinate, angle of
divergence 110°. Dorsal area and small adjoining portion of pleural area eroded
on one side, and whole of sculpture eroded on the other ; major portion of sculpture
on pleural-lateral area on the one side so well preserved and ornamentations so
distinctive, that we describe it as new; sculpture of horizontal rows of grains, the
larger portion in shape of rectangular ellipse, set in rows diagonally (similar to
sculpture of the recent Acanthochiton pilsbryi Sykes), but near the dorsal area
some grains are rhomboided and one or two fusiform,

Articulamentum. Insertion plate broad, no slits visible, but this may be due
to erosion, which also accounts for bases only of the sutural laminae being left.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P. 4346, S.A.M.

The specific name is suggested by the similarity of sculpture with that of the
Australian recent species, Acunthochiton pilsbryi Sykes, but in the shape of the
valves and absence of bridging in the sculpture, it is quite dissimilar.

ACANTHOCHITON TRIANGULOIDES sp. nov.
Plate xx, fig. 28.

One median valve, length 2 mm., width 2-25 mm, Rather flat, arched, and
beaked, dorsal area narrow and wedge-shaped, anterior half granulosely sculp-

ASHBY AND CoTTON—FossiIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 217

tured ; much sculpture flaked off, but what remains shows rather long ovate-ellip-
tieal shallow grains, changing before the centre of area is reached to three shallow
rows of small, indistinet. grains; posterior half of this area smooth and polished ;
beak protrudes well beyond posterior margin of valve; pleural-lateral area decora-
ted with eight or nine longitudinal rows of small, spaced, slightly-raised (obtuse-
triangular) flat-topped grains; direction of rows not parallel, and in one place a
short row is intercalated; arrangement of rows a little indistinct, some angles of
lighting suggest more diagonal than longitudinal arrangement; grains evenly
spaced throughout in the rows, and exceptionally even in size; no diagonal rib or
fold, lateral area differing in that in the two outer rows at the posterior corner the
grains, eight in all, are half as large again as the rest of the area.

Articwamentum, White; insertion plate and sutural laminae are niissing,

Holotype: Forsyth’s Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan).
P. 4347, S.A.M,

The sharply-ent, small, even in size, aud subtriangular grains make this quite
a distinctive species. If, when a perfect specimen should be found, the insertion
plates are unslit, the species will then have fo be removed to Afossochiton Ashby.

The description was made while viewing the specimen under X30 Zeiss
binocular.

CrypropuaAx Blainville, 1818,
CryprorLax prrrcHarpt Hall, 1904.
Plate xix, fig. 20.

Cryptoplax gatlifi Mall (6) is a synonym of the above species. Ashby (3)
states; ‘' The holotype of C. gatliffi differs in one respect only from the majority of
specimens described as C. pritehardi Hall, in that it possesses a lobe-shaped plate
on the inside, just under the apex.’’ We now find that the “‘lobe-shaped plate’’
is common to all valves, although more marked in the three anterior valves. We
find that Hall was incorreet in believing that any of the fossil exam ples he had seen
showed the tegmentum, and we are confident that the only difference is that pritch-
ardi is the remains of an ordinary median valve, and gatlifi was one of the three
anterior valves of the same species. Ashby (3) also expressed the opinion that
“valves”? may he of *‘non-Chitonvid origin’’. Now, thanks to Dr.
Sule’s washings, we have hundreds of these Cryploplux valves, very few showing
sculpture.

We now express the following opinions:

1. Holotypes of pritchardi and gatliffi and all previously recorded examples
have uo visible tegmentum, and all sculpture has been worn off.

these worn

218 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

2. Hundreds of these worn examples might reasonably be considered one
species, because in living forms there is an equal discrepancy in the valves of a
single specimen, the first two and often the first three valves are broad, and the
rest narrow, subject to variations in the tail valve.

3. The present shape of these worn valves is often not, at all the original form,
but that as they have been ground ont of all recognition by ceaseless rolling of the
waves, a valye has often been shortened by nearly one-third,

4. Not one per cent. of the valves shows any sculpture. We offer the explana-
tion that the shape is that of an elongate roller, which lends itself to rolling over
anid over with the slightest ripple, as well as in the more violent surt.

Pleisiotype. Out of the first examples of fossil Cryptoplax to show sufficient
data for specific deseription, we select one as pleisiotype of the late Prof. Hall’s
Cryptoplax pritcharda, and we also place his Cryptoplax gathffi as a synonym,

We also deseribe and name two distinct new species of Cryptoplox in the
following pages.

Re-description trom pleisiotype.

Median valve, length 6. mm., width 2mm. Sharply raised, side slope convex,
dorsal area very narrow, straight sides, raised, a little flattish top, beak slightly
worn ; seulpture forms one area at the beak consisting of spaced, circular or spheri-
cal small grains (truly Acanthochitonoid in character), from there the two upper
ribs granulose for a third the length of valve; upper rib next the dorsal area con-
tinued parallel with the dorsal area almost to the anterior edge of the valve, and
for the last two-thirds of its length is a strong irregular rib very coarsely toothed
at its base on the upper side, the effect of the coarse teeth is to suggest a series of
pits; on one side there are two outer ribs seulptured in the same manner one over
half the length of valve, the other a little less than half, these two granulose for
half their length, then change to the coatse-toothed sculpture; on the other side,
while the two upper ribs correspond with the above deseription, there are also two
outer short ribs (probably the outer one on the other side has been broken off) ;
these two immediately beyond the granulose base near the beak become a series of
confused, irregular, highly-polished grains.

Articulamentum, Creamy-white; sutural laminae worn, insertion plate worn ;
tegmentum bent over at posterior forming a pocket, the internal plate only showing
as a hollow rise.

Paratype 1. Same locality, length 4-5 mm.; worn, whole of tegmentum pre-
sent and in proportion to size, the granulose sculpture is a little more extensive,

Paratype 2. Length 4 mm., worn. Both 1 and 2 have well defined, raised
dorsal area.

Pleisiotype and Paratypes; MeDonald’s Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan).

ASHBY AND COTTON—FOSSIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 219

CRYPTOPLAX SICUS Sp. NOV.
Plate xix, fig. 17.

Large median valve (holotype), length 6 mm., long, narrow, steeply raised,
beaked ; dorsal area colour ‘‘tawny’’ (Ridgeway) narrow, straight-sided, strongly
raised, rounded; sculpture, except at beak, composed of five dagger-like ribs on
either side, ivory-like in appearance, commencing near the beak, narrow and slen-
der, becoming swollen within a third of their length from the end, and then taper-
ing to a sharp point, longest rib next to dorsal area, ending one-fifth short of the
anterior edge of the valve; close to beak ribs show slight granulation at their sides,
and so for a very short distance, but the beak itself is partly broken away, and there
might have been a small amount of granulation had there been no breaking away.

Articulamentum. White; the damage to the valve has still left the little in-
ternal ‘‘plate’’ in perfect preservation,

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4336, 8.A.M.

Paratype: One median valve, width 3 mm., worn, but showing most of the
sculpture. Same locality as holotype.

Hypotype: Of head valve, only specimen; badly worn, but showing some
sculpture, although not sufficient to make it holotype head valve. Same locality as
holotype.

The name (from

‘

‘sa’, a dagger) is suggested by the dagger shape of the
ribs.

CRYPTOPLAX NUMICUS Sp. Noy.
Plate xix, fig, 18,

One median valve only, length 3 mm., width 1-5 mm., in perfect state of pre-
servation; wider than most species, arched, side slope less steep than usual;
not beaked, but dorsal area slopes down to shell margin posteriorly ; dorsal area
has no raised, narrow dorsal ridge as in C. pritehardi and (. sicus, but presents a
broader convex surface than either; it is possible that this area received a good
deal of erosion, but the exceptionally well preserved seulpture on other portions
of valve seem to contradict this idea; sculpture entirely granulose throughout,
consisting of fine granulose longitudinal ribs, the outer one very short, little more
than the granulose thickening of the posterior edge of the teementum; upper rib
close to edge of dorsal area, indistinet in places, possibly due to wearing, grains
small, spherical, and mostly narrowly spaced,

Articulamentum. Creamy-white; insertion plate in good state of preserva-
tion, sutural laminae well defined, but shallow, tegmentum folded over at posterior

220 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

end, making that end slipper-heel shaped, a feature characteristic of Cryptoplaz.
Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4337, S.A.M.

Mo.LaAcHITON gen. nov.

Dorsal area (worn in genotype) broad, smooth except for faint growth
grooves; pleural area unique, crossed longitudinally with broad irregular ribs,
composed of large grains shaped on upper side like a large molar tooth, whole series
of grains in rib fused together, centre of each grain with a funnel-like depression,
and in centre of funnel a black dot or nerve aperture; ribs near dorsal area short,
several run forward into dorsal area, but too worn to show ‘‘ocelli’’, if present ;
twelve ribs showing between dorsal area and girdle; lateral area sharply up-folded
at the posterior margin ; both raised portion, trough below, and a small part of the
adjoining outer edge of pleural area decorated with imbricating, sub-triangular
sub-convex grains.

Genotype (monotype) : Molachiton naxus sp. nov.

The unusual sculpture of the pleural areas with the sensory organ in the centre
of each molar-shaped fused grain, and the absence of insertion plate or sutural
lamina, precludes determination of the true position of the genus in the natural
taxis, so provisionally we place it in the family Lepidopleuridae.

MoLACHITON NAXUS sp. nov.
Plate xx, fig. 32.

One half median valve only, length 4 mm., width 4 mm. Strongly beaked,
dorsal area a good deal worn, broad, smooth except for faint growth grooves;
pleural area unique, crossed longitudinally by broad irregular ribs composed of
large grains in the shape of a large molar tooth; whole series in rib fused together ;
a funnel-shaped depression in centre of each grain, and in its centre a black dot
or nerve aperture (ocellus), ribs near dorsal area short, and several run forward
into that area; these are too worn to show ocelli even if present; twelve ribs show-
ing in pleural area; lateral area sharply up-folded at posterior margin; both raised
portion, the trough (hollow below) and small part of adjoining outer edge of
pleural area decorated with imbricating, subtriangular, sub-convex grains.

Articulamentum. Cream; insertion plate and sutural laminae missing.

Holotype: McDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4251, S.A.M.

BELCHITON gen. nov.

Sculpture of pleural area consists of slender longitudinal ridges surmounted
with minute spherical glossy or porcelain grains; the interspaces twice the width

ASHBY AND COTTON—FOSSIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 221

of the granular ridges and shallowly bridged below each grain; lateral area cov-
ered with closely-packed radial rows of grains similar to those of the pleural area,
the rows in places intercalated with shorter rows; lateral area not raised as a whole,
but near dorsal area and girdle are two shallow upward folds; sutural lamina in
genotype appears perfect, weak and shallow, quite characteristic of palaeozoic
forms; in common with Pratochiton granulosus Ashby and Torr, each granule has
a black dot or ‘‘sense aperiure’’ at the summit. We place this genus in the family
Lewidopleuridue.

Genotype (monotype) : Belehiton pulcherrinus sp. nov.

The seulpture is so different from any other genns of Lepidopleuridae that we
propose the above new genus.

BELCHITON PULCHERRIMUS sp. nov,

Plate xix, fig. 10.

Two fragments median valves, good condition ; larger (holotype) 3 mm. wide,
smaller 2mm. wide. Fragments almost square (reconstructed in figure) ; pleural
area crossed longitudinally by numerous extremely slender riblets, each carrying
af the top, tiny spherical glossy or porcelain-like grains: near the dorsal area,
riblets are crowded, several short ones intercalated, where this oecurs almost
touching; from there until girdle is reached, riblets are in proportion to their
width, widely separated, each turning upward on reaching lateral area; an
important feature of sculpture in the pleural area is the bridging, the transverse
sculpture, very slender and shallow, crosses from erain to grain; lateral area
closely covered with radial rows of grains of same character as those in pleural
area, which do not seem to summnount a ridge, but lie on the surface; shorter rows
intercalate in places; lateral area not raised as a whole, but near both dorsal area
and girdle a shallow upward fold; grains in both areas with a black dot or aperture
in their apices, no doubt associated with sensory organs, a primitive feature found
in the genus Protochiton Ashby.

Articnlamentum. White; sutnral lamina very small both ways (quite primi-
tive in character), and placed towards outer margin: teymentum turned over full
length of posterior margin,

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Pliocene (Kalimnan).
P, 4329, 8.A.M,

The beauty of the seulpture suggests the name, A Zeiss X30 binocular and
pocket lens X20 were used for examination,

222 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LepmorpLeurus Risso, 1826.
LermorPLEURUS NIVARUS sp. noy.
Plate xix, fig. 5.

One median valve, holotype, length 2mm., width 4-9 mm. Valve arched, not
carinated, angle of divergence 105”, side slope slightly convex, dorsal area eroded,
shell bowed forward at beak; pleural area well preserved, crossed longitudinally
by narrow granulose ribs, a few bifid, many wavy; interspaces two to three times
the width of ribs; lateral area sharply raised and closely decorated with five ray
rows which almost touch; grams small, cireular, and rounded.

Articulamentum, Probably originally white, now stained; thickened across
middle, no insertion plate.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P. 4324, S.A.M.

Paratypes: Two fragments median valves, same locality.

LEPIDOPLEURUS PAMPHILIUS sp. DOV.
Plate xix, fig. 2.

One median valve only, length 1-9 mm., width 3 mm., angle of divergence 90°.
Side slope straight, arched, not carinated, dorsal area beaked, broadly wedge-
shaped, striate with slender, closely packed, minutely grannlose riblets; division
between dorsal area and pleural area ill-defined because similar slender riblets to
those of dorsal area are continued for at least one-third of the pleural arca, and
from there until lateral area is reached, grains and riblets, of which they are part,
increase till two or three times their size; lateral area raised, narrow, ornamented
with closely-packed granules, which commence quite minute at the dorsal area,
increasing in size towards the girdle, but even these are not as large as the adjoining
portion of pleural area.

Articwamentum. White; the lamina on one side perfect except for small
noteh, demonstrating that laminae of this genus are weak and produced yery far
apart, a feature this genus has in common with all known forms of palaeozoic
chitons from the Primary Carboniferous Beds of Europe; no insertion plate.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miovene,
P. 4321, 8.A.M.

LeriIpoOPpLEURUS BADIOIDES sp. Ov.

Plate xix, fig. 4; xxi, 47.

Tail valye, length 1-75 mm., width 2°25 mm, Muero at anterior third, im-
mediately behind mucro shell is vertical, from there posterior area is at a steep

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossiL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 223

angle, flattening out a little near posterior margin; whole of this area posterior to
muero and including both sides of mucro clothed with closely-packed radiating
minutely granulose riblets; small area anterior to mucro evenly decorated with
proportionately widely-spaced granular riblets, while coarser than those of pos-
terior portion, still slender; this sculpture present not only at sides of the valve
but continued over anterior half of dorsal area, which seems unsculptured at
muero itself,

Articulamentum. No insertion plate, sutural laminae much reduced and far
apart,

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Bnrn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P, 4828, SAM. Fig. 4,

Iypotype of median valve. One well preserved, length 1-5 mm., width 3-25
mm., from Forsyth’s, Plioeene (Kalimnan), subearinated, side slope convex ; seulp-
ture similar to that of area anterior to muero in holotype, but direction of slender
riblets in lateral area radial.

Articulamentum, Cream; no insertion plate, sutural laminae missing, tegu-
mentum folded over under beak. Fig. 47. P. 4358, SAM,

Paratype 1: Tail valve, broken, length 1-25 mm., width 2 mm., posterior and
sides of muero clothed with elosely-packed radiating minutely eranulose riblets,
a good deal obscured owing to wear. Same locality,

Paratype 2; Fragment of median valve—same locality as paratype 1.

The name budioides is suggested by the similarity to the reeent badius Tledly
and Hull.

? LEPIPOPLEURUS UXELLUS sp. nov,

.

Plate xix, fie, 13.

A portion of tail valve, length 1-25 mm., width 2-25 mm. Muero well defined,
eeniral, almost vertical immediately behind the muero: from there to posterior
margin shell is very flat, deeorated with closely-packed radiating subgranulose rib-
lets; width and erowding of riblets almost identical with the similar riblets in
Lepidoplewrus badiowdes Ashby and Cotton, but in wrellus, eranulation is only
partial; posterior area ends abruptly at the mucro, not earried forward along the
sides as in L. budivides; area anterior to mucro much raised and decorated by
numerous, strong, longitudinal, peetinated ribs (not granulose), the interspaces
deep and about half the width of ribs; this sculpture carried right across dorsal
area, which is striate for its full length, the whole of the tezmentum is slate-crey.

Articulamentum. Greyish-blue; no evidence of insertion plate; a steep nar-
row ridge commencing V-shaped under muero and reaching outer anterior margin
on either side; one side incomplete (due to breaking away), but on the other side,

22+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ridge is perfect, and shows a deep groove commencing at virdle and ending near
centre of valve; we do not recall a similar ridge in any other chiton.
Holotype: Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4382, S.A.M.
Although we have placed this species under the genus Lepidepleurus failing
further data, the flatness of the area behind the muero, the colour of artieulamen-
tum, and to some extent the senlpture of the area anterior to the muero, are not
characteristic of the genus Lepidopleurus.

LeprInporLEURUS MAGNOGRANIFER Ashby, 1925,
Plate xix, fig. 3.

Four portions of median valves from Clifton Bank. The holotype deseribed
by Ashby (3) was picked from among fossils eolleeted by Dennant and Tate from
the general locality ‘‘ Muddy Creek’’, some of which were also cleseribed by Ashby
and Torr (1).

We now designate the holotype locality as Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Lower
Miocene, Specimen figured Pleisiotype, P. 4322, 8.A.M., has better preserved
sculpture than that of the holotype.

LEFIDOPLEURUS RELATUS sp. Noy,
Plate xix, fig. 12.

One ineomplete median valve, length 2-25 mm., width 4°5 mm., angle of diver-
gence 90°, valve arched, side slope convex, dorsal area with some inconspicuous
slender network sculpture, much confused ; pleural area near to dorsal area crossed
by crowded longitudinal ribs; from there they become widely spaced, still parallel
to each other, but becoming more and more bent upwards near the lateral area; ribs
themselves very narrow, forming narrow, rather high ridges with minute erannla-
tion near their bases, those near the girdle become nearer together with gran ulation
ou top of ridges ; lateral area much raised and closely covered with irregular pebble-
like grains, pattern conspicuously in transverse rows, grains in each row about the
same size, but a row with coarse grains may be next to one with small grains, pos-
terior edge of this area consists entirely of large, pebble-like erains, three and a
partial fourth radial grooves.

Articnlamentum. White; centre much thicker, thickening diverging on either
side, but rapidly terminating in a point; no insertion plate, and sutural laminae
broken off.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P, 4331, S.A.M,

Paratypes ; Two fragments of median valves.

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossiL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 225

Although resembling Lepidopleurus magnogranifer Ashby, L. rclatus can be
easily distinguished by the narrow longitudinal ribs and minute eranulation.

LEpPiIpopLeEURUS SEPHUS sp. Nov.
Plate xix, fig. 11,

One median valve, half one side missing, complete side, length 2 mm., width
from dorsal ridge to girdle 4 mm.,, valve arehed, side slope convex, angle of diver-
gence 50°, dorsal area teementum absent, pleural area. erossed longitudinally by
rather strong parallel ribs; ribs definitely straight and parallel right to girdle,
subgranulose; most important feature is that they are mumerously and strongly
bridged across, giving the seulpture a semi-honeycomb appearance ; bridging does
not reach top of ribs or the honeyeombing would be more marked; lateral area
raised and decorated with radial ribbing; fureate in some cases; ribs coarsely sub-
eranulose, but most reeular and almost smooth ; total number of ribs and half-ribs,
seven,

Articulamentum, Cream coloured; no insertion plate; remains of sutural
lamina on one side only; lamina weak and shallow, teementum folded over along
most of posterior margin,

Holotype: Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Iamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan),
P. 48380, 8. A.M.

This species differs from both magnogranifer Ashby and relatus Ashby and
Cotton in the marked bridging of the pleural area, and in the smooth, suberanulose
ribs of the lateral area.

LEPrpOrpLEURUS SINERVUS Sp. mov,

od

Plate xix, fig, 7,

One almost complete head yalve, length 1-9 mm., width 3-75 mm., sculpture
of narrow riblets, closely-packed and smooth of surface, interspaces appearing
under X20 magnifications as mere grooves, but at the bottom of groove in places
pectinated ; under X80 magnifications, the bottoms of grooves seem to be series
of minute perforations ; at one side, a few riblets surmounted with minute granules
suggest that when newly-formed they may be minutely granular, a feature that is
quickly lost; riblets consistently twenty-three to twenty-four to the millimetre.

Articulamentum, Cream; much thickened in centre, uo insertion plate or
sutural laminae.

Holotype; Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan).
P. 4326, S.A.M,

Paratype: Large fragment, possibly of a large head valve, same location,

226 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LEPIDOPLEURUS SINGUS sp. Tov.
Plate xix, fig. 8.

One tail valve only, length 2. mm., width 3-1 mm.; mucro not defined, shell
strongly raised, sloping sharply from the anterior edge to middle of valve, and
from there vertical to the girdle; whole shell decorated with longitudinal, mostly
parallel, riblets, those in centre more slender and more closely packed than else-
where on the valve; interspaces vary a good deal; where interspaces are wide,
ridges are bridged across; where closer together this feature is reduced to a mere
hole; thirteen riblets to the millimetre, but this count includes the central crowded
narrower riblets, so we estimate that the riblets in this species are only half the
number shown in the preceding species, L. sinervus Ashby and Cotton,

Articulamentum. Colour buff, sutural laminae seemingly complete, very
small and laterally narrow; altogether they are unusually small for even this
primitive genus.

Holotype: MceDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4327, 8.A.M,

LEPIDOPLEURUS BABIDUS sp. nov.
Plate xix, fig. 6.

One half median valve, length 1-9 mm., width 3 mm. ; pleural area seulptured
with longitudinal granulose widely-spaced ribs, but close together near dorsal
area ; interspaces twice, sometimes thrice, the width of rib; ribs parallel until near
girdle, where they beeome irregular and weak ; interspaces in pleural area shal-
lowly bridged across; transverse shallow ridges correspond with erains which suv-
mount the ribs; ribs turn upwards at the lateral area ; lateral area mueh and irregu-
larly raised, eight growth grooves, two outer ones at a much lower level than those
above; sculpture of lateral area eomposed of numerous radiating snberanulose
riblets touching one another; while these are much broken by the growth grooves,
the general radial pattern is maintained.

Articwlamentum. White; no insertion plate, sutural laminae absent.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan), P. 4325, S.A.M,.

Paratype: Two worn fragments median valves, same locality.

This species is easily separated from any other species herein described by
the deep growth grooving in the lateral area, and from some others in the character
of the bridging.

ae I

ASHBY AND CoTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 22

L&EPIOPLEURUS DIVERSIGRANOSUS Sp. HOV.
Plate xix, figs. 1 and 9.

One tail valve, length 2mm., width 3mm., mucro at anterior third, area behind
mucro steep for two-thirds of area, and from there to outer margin almost flat, steep
portion sculptured with minute grains forming under X20 a decussate pattern;
outer portion of this area exhibits the start of about thirty granulose, radiating,
shallow ribs, grains occupying about same area as four of the minute grains re-
ferred to above; area anterior to mucro narrow and longitudinally erossed by
numerous, shallow, narrow, subpectinated riblets, interspaces vary from sume
width as riblets to twice that width; dorsal area wedge-shaped, small, similarly
minutely decussate as in area immediately posterior to mucro,

Articulamentum. Crean; saucer-shape, no insertion plate (Fig. 9).

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Lower Miocene. P. 4328, S,A.M.

Hypotype of median value, from same locality, width 2-75 mm.,, rather flat,
side slope straight ; part of dorsal area flaked off, what remains minutely grantlose ;
pleural area decorated with slender, rather irregular, minutely peetinated or sub-
grantilose riblets; lateral area separated from pleural by a rather coarsely yranu-
lose rib, much of this area minutely eranulose, granules double the size of those of
dorsal area, and no regular pattern; grains near girdle much larger and very irre-
gular. The hypotype value only. Fig. 1. P, 4520, S.A.M.

CALLOcHITON Gray, 1847.
CALLOCHITON MACDONALDI sp. nov.

Plate xxi, fig. 46.

One median valve, length 1:5 mm,, width 3+5 mum., shell is arched rather than
carinated, side slope straight, tegmentim of dorsal area largely missing, but was
evidently smooth and ill-defined ; pleural area smooth, without sculpture except
for four or five shallow growth grooves distinguished only by lateral lighting ;
lateral area raised aud smooth, crossed by three broad and deep growth grooves;
colour pinkish-cinnamon (Ridgeway).

Articulamentum, White; sutural laminae weak and shallow, sinus between
Lmm. wide, broad in proportion to size of valve; articulamentum not joined across
sinus, but edge of tegmentum slightly overhangs; a strong raised rib runs from
dorsal hollow almost to margin on either side. Shell arched rather than carinated,
side slope straight, anwle of divergence 100°,

Llolotype: Muddy Creek, MeDonald’s, Ilamilton, Victoria, Lower Pliocene

Z28 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(Kalimnan). P. 4368, 8.A.M. Unique example presented by the National Mus-
eum, Washington, U.S.A., to the Ashby collection in the South Australian Museum.
The valve was unfortunately broken in the washing, and was mended by Dr, Sule
before being sent to us. Although we have placed the species m Callachiton, the
shape resembles that of Loricella, but the weak sutural laminae and complete ab-
sence of forward extension of the articulamentum in the sutural sinus absolutely
removes it from Loricella. The tegmentum surface in Callochiton seen under X80
magnification is minutely decussate, a feature absent from macdonaldi; there is
no insertion plate, but we assume this has broken off. We provisionally place the
species in Callachiton.

Iscunocurron Gray, 1847.

In the material before us there are several fragments of median valve of two
allied members of this genus; the seulpture of the pleural areas in these fragments
may be broadly described as vermiform, wavy, or V-shaped. While these forms of
sculpture exist in living species, it is probable that had we a complete set of valves
of these fossil species, the combination of sculpture would more nearly conform
to the regular recent Isehnochiton pattern than it appears to do in the fragmentary
valves.

TscHNOCIITON VINAZUS Sp. OY.
Plate xx, fig. 36.

One half median valve, width 3 mm., pleural area decussate near dorsal area,
but in outer half riblets become vermiform, wavy, and increase in size towards the
girdle; two outer ribs stouter ; lateral area raised, on anterior edge next to pleural
area a row of eight very coarse grains, third grain from girdle part of one of the
extra stout ribs before-mentioned, continued right across lateral area; three fur-
ther coarse transverse bars or elongate coarse grains; interspaces or true surface
of this area covered with small, inconspicuous grains.

Articulamentum. White; most of insertion plate and whole of sutural Janina
broken away.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4335, S.A.M.

-aratypes: Two fragments of median valves; lateral area with isolated pus-
tules rather than bars, Same loeality.

ISCHINOCHITON TISURUS Sp. DOY.
Plate xix, fig. 15; xx, 35.

One half median valve 3mm. wide. Pleural area with narrow crowded riblets
without pattern near the dorsal area, become small crowded riblets with a partial

ASHBY AND COTTON—FOSSIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 229

diagonal direction, but in outer half of area they form an irregular V-shaped pat-
tern ; lateral area raised at anterior edge, and here rather worn; rest of area crossed
by six or more bars, of which three are composed of angular shallow grains ; other
bars badly worn.

Articuamentum, White; insertion plate and sutural laminae missing,

Ilolotype : MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4334, S,A.M.
Fiy. 15.

Paratype 1: Fragment of median valve, saine locality.

Paratype 2: Half median yalve from Forsyth’s, Pliocene (Kalimnan),

Hypotype—of tail valve, length 2 mm., width 8 mm. Forsyth’s Pliocene
(Kalimnan), iuero central, but broken; slope behind mucro somewhat steep at
first, then becoming very flat, only a small part of sculpture present formed of eon-
centric rows of less coarse pustules than those of lateral area of holotype; sculpture
of anterior portion of this valve corresponds exactly with V-shaped pattern of
pleural area of median valve. This solitary specimen is associated with Ischno-
chiton tisurus. Fig. 385, P. 4354, S.A.M.

ISCHNOCHITON COSSYRUS Sp. NOV.
Plate xx, fig. 37.

One tail valve only, length 3-75 mm., width 5 mm. Flattish, mucro central,
area behind mucro nearly yertical for a short distance, then sloping at 45° to the
girdle; very little sculpture left, but what remains shows that this area was radi-
ally ribbed with shallow ribs irregularly surmounted with rather shallow pustule-
like grains and elongate grains; whole surface of shell was minutely granulose
with decussate pattern ; area anterior to mucro was decorated with rather coarse,
more or less disjointed vermiform or wavy riblets; dorsal areca flaked away.

Articulamentum, Large V-shaped area with its base bounded by two sutural
laminae, and apex under mucro with bifureating branchlets on either side pure
white; rest of inside cream; insertion plate much worn away, but evidences of
slitting exist ; sutural laminae weak (probably reduced by attrition) ; sutural sinus
wide.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Greek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4356, S.A.M,

ISCHNOUHITON NUMANTIUS sp. hoy,

Plate xix, fig. 16,

One almost complete and well preserved tail valve, length 3 mm., width 3°75
mm.; muero slightly anterior of central, dorsal area broken away: area behind
mucro steep at first, then to outer edge coneave; whole of this area decorated with

230 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

closely-packed subgranulose ribs, thirty-five in all; many intercalated and not
full length; granulation most even throughout with exception of anterior rib,
where it is coarser; a small area immediately behind the mucro smooth except for
minute granulation ; area anterior to mucro minutely decussate, a pattern formed
by minute subgrannlose strings crossing one another at right angles.

Articulamentum, The central V-shaped portion slightly raised; cream, with
about five short wavy branches on either side; rest of valve white; insertion plate
broken off, but slight evidences of slitting remain; only bases of sutural laminae
remain.

Tloloty pe: Forsyth's, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Phocene (Kalinman).
P, 4355, S.A.M.

IsCTINOUHITON DURIUS Sp. NOV.

Plate xx, fig, 83.

ar

One juvenile tail valve, length 1-25 mm, width 2-25 mm., in excellent state of
preservation ; unusually flat, muecro at anterior third; area immediately behind
muero at first almost vertical, and then continued at an angle of 47° until halt-way
across area, and from there to margin almost flat; muero and a pateh equal to
one-third width of whole valve and dorsal area, smooth, without any signs of
seulpture; rest of posterior area consisting of a narrow vegion between the wn-
sculptured pateh and the posterior margin of shell, and two large patches on either
side evenly and regularly sculptured with three concentrie rows of spaced, rather
large grains; on either side are several short rows arranged in the same way as
the three outer ones; area anterior to mucro narrow and small, what seulpture pre-
sent is minutely granular, and under X30 magnification a few parallel transverse
scratches are visible; the apparent unserlptured character of the anterior area
(which corresponds with the pleural area in median valves) may take an addi-
tional pattern in the adult form, but the seulpture of the posterior area is likely
to be maintained.

Articwlamentum. Bluish-white; nine very clearly marked scratches radiating
from heneath the muero to outer edge at girdle; these probably correspond with
nine slits which, owing (o damage of insertion plate, cannot be seen; ‘‘seratehes’’
may be really nerve channels, the specimen presenting one of the best examples of
this feature seen; insertion plate broken away; sutural laminae were certainly
weak and far apart, only the bases remaining.

Holotype: MeDonald's, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4352, S.A.M,.

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossiL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 231

IsCHNOCHITON NEGLECTUS Sp, TOV.
Plate xx, fig, 34.

Half median valve, width 3 mm., dorsal area missing; pleural area sculptured
with cleyen longitudinal ribs, well preserved, but several towards eirdle badly
worn; ribs high and narrow, and each rib has at the summit a complete row of
minute, polished, spherical grains, quite even in size, a little smaller than width of
rib, and all spaced fully the width of a single grain apart; lateral area raised and
sculptured with seyen spaced radial rows of large grains twenty times the size of
minute grains referred to in pleural area; most of these grains spherical, but row
adjoining pleural area larger and variable in shape; near the girdle grains smaller
and less raised.

Articulamentum. White; base of insertion plate possibly showing, sutural
laminae absent, tegmentum folded over at posterior margin.

Holotype; Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan).
P. 4353, 8.A.M.

Paratypes: Several fragments of median valves, oue possibly has insertion
plate showing as in holotype, but the rest have no sign of it.

There are no complete valves, so the data available is not sufficient to deter-
mine accurately the generic position. We have decided to describe if, under the
genus Lschnochiton.

RadsteLua Pilsbry, 1892,
ISCIENOCHITON (RADSIELLA) CLIPTONENSIS sp. nov.

Plate xix, fig. 14,

One median valve, length 4 mm., width 7-3 mm., angle of divergence 110”,
valve well worn, subearinated, side slope slightly concave; sculpture of dorsal area
and small portion of pleural entirely eroded ; sculpture of remainder consists of a
series of strong longitudinal ribs which fureate or sometimes fuse ; ribs flattened out
in places to double their normal width, and then a short distance away narrow
rapidly to normal width; lateral area not in any way defined; whole surface of
valve with same sculpture except where worn away; longitudinal ribs inter-cou-
neeted by narrow diagonal ribs of the same height; with lateral lighting this
‘bridging’’ gives a‘‘ honeycomb”? effect, but with vertical lighting surface appears
as if studded with deep pits somewhat cuneiform in character.

Articulamentum, Cream; much thickened from the hollow under beak out

232 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

towards girdle; insertion plate and sutural laminae worn off, so there is doubt as
to generic character.

Holoytpe: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P. 4338, 5.A.M.

Sculpture suggests affinity with Pilsbry’s subgenus of Ischnochiton, Radst-
ella, of which South Africa has two representatives, but hitherto neither recent
nor fossil representatives have been discovered in Australia.

Genus Cauuistocurron Dall, 1881.

Relatively much more time has been expended in the examination of numerous
fragments (mostly median valves) of this genus, than on valves of other genera.

This is principally due to the following features :

1. The great variety of sculpture in a single individual.

2. The wide changes in sculpture from that of the juvenile to adult.

3. The depth of sculpture in this genus frequently makes a half-worn indivi-
dual look entirely different from a perfect specimen.

CALLISTOCHITON GREEDI sp. nov.
Plate xxi, fig. 41.

Median valve, width 2-5 mm.; dorsal area missing; pleural area with only
seven complete longitudinal ribs remaining ; ribs strong, almost straight and par-
allel, ridges high and many interspaces double width of ribs; ribs bridged from
bases; ribs do not turn upwards on reaching lateral area; lateral area composed of
two strong nodulose, radiating ribs with a deep groove between, ovcupying the
whole of this area; at bottom of groove ribs are bridged across forming a series
of small pits; arrangement of nodules suggests a number of funnels or cones fitted
one into the other; eleven nodules, some broken.

Articulamentum. White; sutural lamina weak.

Holotype : Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan).
P. 4369, S.A.M.

Coarseness and regularity of ribs in pleural area distinguish the species.
Named after Mr, Walter Greed, of Hamilton, Victoria, to whom we are indebted
for packing the material sent to Dr. Sule for washing.

Paratypes: There are four other fragments of median valves belonging to
this species, same locality.

ASHBY AND CoTrton—FossiL. CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 233

CALLISTOCHITON RETICULATUS Sp. Noy.
Plate xxi, figs. 44, 45.

One complete median valve, length 1-25 mm., width 3 mm.; valve arched, side
slope convex, a longitudinal ridge corresponds with cap and suggests subcarina-
tion; dorsal area not defined, but decorated with slender network sculpture con-
tinued well into the pleural area; beak broken away, slender wetwork sculpture
oceupying a third of anterior portion of yalve, in longitudinal rows fairly parallel
to one another; network sculpture replaced at the posterior margin by widely-
spaced longitudinal slender ribs; these ribs turn up acutely at the girdle, making
the ribs faleate rather than longitudinal; falcate riby four, widest interspace four
times width of rib; all interspaces between ribs narrowly and closely crossed by
slender threads of sculpture; lateral area composed of two highly raised, noduloxe,
narrow radial ribs; five nodules and next to dorsal area three clongate grains,
sulcus between the two ribs deep, and does not appear to have any bridging.

Articulamentum. Pale bluish-grey ; sutural lamina and insertion plate mis-
sing; tegmentiun folded right across from side to side,

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4370, SAM.
Fig. 44.

The nearest living species is Callistochiton generos Tredale and Hull, from
which the species wider review is easily separated; amongst other differences, (.
generos has a granular dorsal area and sharply-sloping posterior portion of tail
valve, whereas in C, reticulatus the former has network and the latter is flat. Fie.
45, P. 4883, S.A.M.

HUypotype: Tail valve taken as type of that valve. Fragment three-quarters
of whole, width 2-4 mm., mucro central, area behind muero flat, decorated with
ten nodulose ray ribs; dorsal area anterior to muero, broad; all network seulpture
like holotype, rest of anterior area with nine longitudinal ribs as in pleural area of
holotype, except that, owing to flat posterior portion, these ribs are barely faleate.
Locality same as holotype.

Paratype: One median valve, length 2 mm., width 5-5 mm., flatly arched,
side slope unusually convex, angle of divergence 100°, dorsal avea beaked, seulp-
ture a good deal flaked and worn. Clifton Bank, Lower Miocene, one specimen,

In addition, there are two half-median valves, and two partly damaged tail
valves from Forsyth’s,

CALLISTOCHITON INEXPECTUS sp. NOY.
Plate xxi, figs. 41, 42.

Median valve, juvenile, length 1-75 mm., width 4 mim,, subcarinated side slope
very slightly convex, rather flat, angle of divergence 110° ; dorsal and pleural areas

234 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

indistinguishable; a form of decussate sculpture minute near the posterior of dor-
sal ridge and increasing in size, anteriorly and laterally ; sculpture of this portion
in less worn examples strictly of network form, in which the strands are coarser
and apertures of mesh much smaller than in C. reticulatus; three short diagonal
ribs show close to girdle (am adult would no doubt have this feature far more de-
veloped) ; lateral areas formed by two coarse radial ribs, of which the nodules
numbering five to six better resemble the flange of a wheel, and continue down
into the suleus between the two ribs, causing the ribs to be coarsely bridged across.

Articulamentum, Pale-grey; imsertion plate and sutural laminae missing,
fewmentum folded over for the full length of the posterior margin of this valve,

Holotype: MeDouald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4372, 8.A.M.
Fig. 42.

Hypotype: Type of tail valve, length 1-5 mm.,, width 3 mm., muero slightly
anterior to centre, raised, at first very steep, and from there to posterior margin
slightly sloping ouly ; posterior area at first smooth behind the mucro, rest of this
area decorated with eight nodulose ribs; nodules of ribs correspond with two
broken concentric ribs; area anterior to mucro small and without sculpture ; sur
face and interspaces of both areas show signs of minute granulation. Same loeality
as holotype. Fig. 41.

1n addition, there is one more tail valve and one more median valve of this
species from the same locality.

The nearest tecent species is Callistochiton meridionalis Ashby (3), from
which inexpectus differs in the stouter nodules of the lateral areas, the flatter pos-
terior portion of the tail valve, and the entire absence of surface granulation.

Antuocutron Thiele, 1893.

Thiele, in ‘‘ Das Gebiss der Schnecken, 1893”’, proposed three subgenera under
the genus Chilton, namely Clathropleura, Rhyssoplax, and Anthochaton, but only
the last-named can date tron: 1893, because the genotype species of the other two
were not published until 1909, Therefore those two subgenera date from 1909.
We use Anthochiton Thiele, 1893, as a full genus.

ANTHOCHITON MACDONALDENSIS Sp. Hoy.
Plate xxi, fig. 39.

Tail valve, length 2-5 mm., width 3-75 mm., muero at anterior third, tegmen-
tum worn off muero, posterior slope from mucro straight at an angle of 43°; pol-
ished, straw colour, surface minutely decussate, a few shallow growth grooves, but
no sculpture in the area posterior to mucro ; area anterior to mucro small, separated

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 235

from posterior area by a shallow fold, upper half smooth and polished like the pos-
terior area, but lower or outer half possesses three fairly strong polished ribs; ribs
short owing to narrowness of this area; ribs begin at the ‘‘fold’’ and terminate at
anterior edge of valve ; anterior edge minutely granulose by lateral lighting.
Articulamentum. Creamy-white; insertion plate worn away, but evidences
of numerous slitting; sutural laminae absent.
Holotype: MeDonald's, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4359, S$, A.M.

ANTHOCHITON DUODENT sp. nov.
Plate xx, fig. 38.

One small fragment of median valve; very small, but portion of pleural area
decorated with twelve narrow, strongly-raised ribs, each of which bends upwards
at the lateral area, interspaces double width of ribs; lateral area smooth, but with
several well-marked growth lines; this area strongly raised, slightly overhanging
pleural area.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4357, S.A.M.
Name suggested by the twelve ribs.

ANTHOCHITON OCTOCOSTATUS Sp. NOV.
Plate xxi, fig. 40,

Three-quarters of median valve; single side 3 mm. wide; carinated, side slope
straight, angle of divergence 100°; teymenium flaked off dorsal area, surface of
valye minutely decussate, only definite sculpture eight longitudinal widely-spaced
ribs, interspaces three to four times width of ribs themselves,

Articulamentum. White.

Holotype: MeDonald's, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P, 4360, $.A.M,
Name suggested by the eight ribs.

Loricenta Pilsbry, 1893,
LorIceLi.A MAGNOFUSTULOSA sp. noy.
Plate xxi, figs, 50, 53,

Tlead valve, length 4 mm., width 7 mm., posterior edge imperfect, insertion
plate missing ; apex steep and worn, lower half of shell rather flat; eight and por-
tion of ninth ray ribs surmounted with two to three large, widely-spaced pustules;
surface of shell smooth, exhibits evidence of wearing.

Articulamentum, Buffish-white, shows signs of wearing, nerve perforations
correspond with ray ribs in termentum.

236 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Lower Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4365,
§.A.M., Fig. 53.

Hypotype : Half median valve, broken, taken as type of median valve; length
3 mm., width of balf-valve 10 mm.; insertion plate and sutural laminae missing ;
dorsal area and pleural areas inseparable except for two broad growth grooves, and
towards girdle several minor growth grooyes, but at junction of pleural area and
lateral area fifteen short ridges, interspaces appearing like fourteen deep pits;
lateral area defined by a very muel: raised diagnoal rib surmounted by three larger
widely-spaced pustules; most likely there were two more of these pustules nearer
the dorsal area, as shell here shows signs of wearing; colour pinkish-cinnamon
(Ridgeway ), inside white. Same locality and horizon as holotype. P. 4364, S.A.M.,
Fig. 50.

Paratypes: Two head valves, much worn, appear to belong to this species, as
they show faint signs of large pustules; same locality and horizon.

Loricenua pauerpusronosa Ashby and ‘Torr, 1901,
Plate xxi, figs. 52, 54.

One tail valve, length 2-25, width 6 mm., no sculpture showing, though it
may be worn off ; as median valves only possess two inconspicuous shallow diagonal
ribs earrying small, spaced pustules, it is possible that the tail valve never pos-
sessed any ribs; whole of upper surface of valve convex ; anterior and posterior
margin much thickened, and anal portion broadly upturned.

Hypotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalinnan). We present
this specimen as the Hypotype tail valve of the species Loricella paucipustulosa
Ashby and Torr (1).

LORICELLA CONCAVA sp. NOV.

Plate xxi, fig. 51.

5

Tail valve, length 1-5 mm., width 3-25 mm,, very flat, dorsal area much raised,
straight-sided, pleural area and lateral areas consist of one depressed smooth stu
face; posterior edge much thickened and raised, so that the pleural-lateral areas
are concave; tail upturned, posterior edge bending inwards at the upturned por-
tion; only sculpture in pleural lateral area consists of four growth grooves at an-
terior portion and two at the anal; the grooves traverse the areas, and continue up
the posterior ridge.

Artieulamentum. Insertion plates broken away, but sufficient of sutural
laminae remain to indicate that they are broad and well developed, sutural laminae
joined across the sinus, articulamentum extending beyond anterior edge of teg-

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 237

mentum; articnlamentum much thickened and notched in centre, posterior end
hollowed out under upturned tail, evidently associated with some body organ such
as a syphon; from there to anterior edge of valve on either side articulamentum
much thickened,

Tlolotype: McDonald's, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4367, S.A.M.

This remarkable little valve is definitely a Loricella. The tegmentum is in
excellent state of preservation, and sufficient of the articulamentum is preserved
to definitely state that in the thickening of the articulamentuim, both in the centre
and at the outer edge, it presents features hitherto unknown. The name concava
is sugeested by the concave tail valve.

Lorica H. & A. Adams, 1852.

We naturally expected that one of the three valves in this material of juvenile
Lorica would represent L. compressa Ashby and Torr. In neither L. veulea nor in
L. varena is there any sign of the seattered large pustules (grains) in the lateral
area that were mentioned in Ashby and Torr’s description of Lorica affinis. This
Ashby (3) considered a mere variety of L. compressa. We have now, through the
kindness of ¥', A, Cudmore, examined a serics taken at Table Cape, Tasmania, and
we are satisfied that they are conspecific, the type of L. compressa being a badly
worn example, and that of L. affinis a better preseryed specimen of the same
species. While it is quite possible that J. compressa may not always show this
sculpture in the very juvenile stage, in the best example of the adult we have seen
the coarse grains make their appearanee at a very early stage of growth.

We believe that the three juvenile Lorica valves here described represent two
different species, chiefly marked by the great difference in the angle of divergence,
and both differ from L. compressa in the entire absence of coarse pustules in the
lateral areas.

Lortca compressa Ashby and Torr, 1901.

There is one incomplete median valye that certainly belongs to the above
Species, and a tail valve which has lost all senlpture on the upper side, but is better
preserved on the underside. The tail valve of L. compressa Ashby (1), (3) has
not been figured or described, and the present specimen is too poorly pregerved to
form a hypotype. From Clitton Bank, Grange Burn, Lower Miocene.

LOorICcA OCULEA sp. noy.

Plate xxi, fig, 48,

Median valye, well preserved, but a small fragment missing; width 2 mm.,

oO?

angle of divergence 110°, Valye carinated, side slope straight, dorsal area ill-

238 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

defined, smooth except for two short and slender longitudinal ribs on either side ;
pleural area crossed by four subgranulose narrow high ribs, the interspaces three
times width of ribs, each rib where it joins the lateral area with funnel-shaped pit,
at the bottom of which is a black dot or aperture; in some lights this pit shows a
shining spot, and it is certain these apertures lead to sense organs, which we assume
are ocelli; lateral area much raised and minutely granulose; four transverse or
growth ridges composed of larger granules than rest of lateral area ; ridges under
X30 Zeiss appear due to growth grooves which vary much in width, and the ap-
parent large size of the grains on the ridges is an illusion caused by these grains
catching more light.

Articulamentum. Cream; no definite slit can be seen, sutural laminae shallow
but laterally wide, the sinus between wide, but a feature typical of both Lorica and
Loricella is the joining across the sutural sinus of the two sutural laminae, by a
forward extension of the articulamentum; this a marked feature of the holotype.

Holotype: Clifton Bank Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P. 4362, S.A.M.

Paratype: Median valve, small fragment missing, width 2 mm,, same locality.
The black dot occurring in each valve is situated at the third of the lateral area
from the girdle and a little posterior from the centre of the valve. It is circled by
a ring of normal grains on this area ; there is a rather large funnel-shaped aperture
through the tegmentum and the articulamentum with what, at the bottom in ordi-
nary light, appears to bea black dot. When the electric globe was almost directly
above, the light was brilliantly reflected in the corner at the bottom of the deep
funnel; again in good daylight the light from the window was squarely reflected.
Hitherto, no oculae have been seen in this genus other than those at the junetion of
the ribs on the pleural area with the lateral area, so this discovery is the first record
of the existence of ‘‘eyes’’ on the surface of the lateral areas (in fossil Lorica),
and the first discovery of the preservation of the cornea in fossil forms. As in the
adult fossil examples, the apertures at the junction of the ribs with the lateral area
are much larger than in any known recent chitons; the nature of the sense organs
has always been doubtful. This discovery seems to confirm the belief that they are
true ocelli, and, owing to the position of the cornea at the bottom of a deep funnel
preventing lateral sighting, it seems that they could only serve to distinguish day-
light from dark because their deep setting prevents any lateral sighting.

LORICA VARENA Sp. NOV.

Plate xxi, fig. 49.

One complete juvenile median valve, width from dorsal ridge to girdle 1-5
mm., but, owing to steepness of carination, valve is only 2 mm. right across ; angle

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 239

of divergence 80° (compared with 110° in oculea) ; compared to oeulea, ribs in
pleural area more granular, interspaces wider; lateral area has one very deep and
wide growth groove (oculed has several), granulate, less crowded and crains less
raised and more irregular, the ocelli similar in position and size; otherwise vener-
ally like oculea, except is one-third smaller.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Ilamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.
P, 4361, SAM.

Oocnrrow Ashby, 1934.
Oocurron tatu Ashby, 1934.
Plate xxi, fie. 55.

From one ten-gallon tin of fossiliferous soil from Clifton Bank, Hamilton,
Victoria, Lower Miocene, twelve median valves or fragments, four head valves, and
one tail valve of the above species.

The original holotype of the head valve of this species was destroyed when
Mr. Edwin Ashby’s house was burnt in a bushfire on March 9, 1934, We now
describe a Neotype:

Tlead valve, length 2 mm., width 3 mm.,, height 2 mm., angle of divergence
acute; highly elevated, apex slightly recurved, anterior slope very steep and con-
cave (due to recurved apex) ; seulpture of strings of ege-like pustules similar to
those in the other valves ; arrangement generally speaking longitudinal, the strings
commencing at the posterior margin and continuing to the insertion plate with
considerable irregularity, several strings bifureate, and in some places there are
short intermediate rows; the strings or rows of pustules apparently have no re-
lationship with the slits in insertion plate.

Articulamentum. Creamy white; highly polished, smooth, without any
grooves; tegmentum unfolded at the apex, this unfolded portion thiekly studded
with egg-like pustules; insertion plate well produced, perfect except for a few
minute chips; slits high, broad and short, spacing irregular; upper side of in-
sertion plate numerously grooyed, plate broad and proportionately thick, but upper
edge bevelled off so that the actual edge is sharp, the grooves not continuing to the
inner edge,

Neotype: Clifton Brank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.

The sculpture of this Oochiton is quite unique, the angle of divergence un-
usually small, resulting in the carination of the median valves being very steep;
the shape of the tail yalye has no parallel in any livine forms. The nearest to it is
to be found in the upturned extremity of the same valve in the genus Lorica, and
in both there would he body modifications to correspond.

240 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

We think that the two genera Loricella and Lorica seem to have little affinity
with any other living forms, and may, together with Oochiton, have come dowa
from Palaeozoic times along separate parallel channels to that of the Lepido-
pleuridae, as is certainly the case in the Aeanthochitonoid group.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1, Ashby and Torr (1901) : Fossil Polyplacophora from Muddy Creek, Morning-
ton, Victoria. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 25 (2), 136-144.
Chapman (1907): New and Little known Victorian Fossils in the National
Museum. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 20 (2), 218-220.
8. Ashby (1925): Monograph on Australian Fossil Polyplacophora. Proc. Roy.
Soe. Vic., 87 (2), 170-205.
4, Pilsbry (1892) : Manual of Conchology, 14, 23.
Pilsbry : In Zittel (English Translation by Eastman), 1, 433-444.
6. Hall (1905) ; On the oceurrence of two species of Cryptoplax in the Tertiary
Roeks of Vietoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 17.
Hull (1910) : Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 35, 654, and 39, 1915. (All Hull’s types
figured in Ashby’s Monograph. )
8. Ashby (1929): Notes on and Additions to Australian Fossil Polyplacophora,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 41 (2), 220-280.

bo

gr

ay

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate xix.

Lepidopleurus diversigranosus sp. nov., Hypotype.
Lepidopleurus pamphilius sp. nov., Holotype.
Lepidopleurus magnogramfer Ashby, Holotype.
Leydopleurus badioides sp. noy., Holotype.
Lepidopleurus nivarus sp. noy., Holotype.
Lepidopleurus babidus sp. nov., Holotype.
Lepidopleurus sinervus sp. nov., Holotype.

Lepidopleurus singus sp. nov., Holotype.

Lepidopleurus diversigranus sp. nov., MHolotype.
Belchiton pulcherrimus sp. nov., Holotype.
Lepidopleurus sephus sp. noy., Holotype.
Lepidopleurus relalus sp. nov., Holotype.
Lepidopleurus wxellus sp. nov., Holotype.
Ischnochiton (Radsiella) cliftonensis sp. noy., Holotype.
Ischnochiton tisurus sp, nov., Molotype. i
Ischnochiton numantius sp. nov., Holotype.
Cryptoplax sicus sp. noy., Holotype.

Cryploplaxr numicus sp, noy., Holotype.

Cryptoplax pritchardi Uall, Hypotype.

Afossochiton (Telochiton) iscus sp. nov., Holotype.

Plate xx.

Afossochiton sulci sp. noy., Holotype.

Afassochilon cundmored Ashby, Iolotype,

Afossachiton (Telochiton) maynicostatus sp. nov., Holotype.
Afossochiton (Telochiton) dendus sp. noy., Holotype.
Acanthochiton sabratus sp. nov., Holoytpe.

Acanthochiton forsythensis sp. nov., Holotype.
Acanthochiton pilsbryoides sp. nov., Holotype.
Acanthochiton trianguloides sp. nov., Holotype.
Acanthochiton drunus sp. noy., Holotype.

Acanthochiton casus sp. nov., Holotype.

Acanthochiton (Lirachiton) inexpectus sp. nov., Holoytpe.
Molachiton naxus sp, nov., Holotype.

241

242 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Fig. 33. Ischnochiton durius sp. nov., Holotype.
Fig. 34. Ischnochiton neglectus sp, nov., Holotype.
Fig. 35. Ischnochiton tisurus sp. nov., Hypotype.
Fig. 36. Ischnochiton vinazus sp. nov., Holotype.
Fig. 37. Ischnochiton cossyrus sp. nov., Holotype.
Fig. 38. Anthochiton duodeni sp. nov., Holotype.

Plate xxi.

Fig. 39. Anthochiton macdonaldensis sp. nov., Holotype.
Fig. 40. Anthochiton octocostus sp. noy., Holotype.

Fig.41. Callistochiton inexpectus sp. nov., Hypotype.

Fig. 42. Callistochiton inexpectus sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig. 43. Callistochiton greedi sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig. 44. Callistochiton reticulatus sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig. 45. Callistochiton reticulatus sp. nov., Hypotype.

Fig. 46. Callochiton macdonaldi sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig. 47. Lepidopleurus badioides sp. nov., Hypotype.

Fig. 48. Lorica oculea sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig. 49. Lorica varena sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig.50. Loricella magnopustulosa sp. nov., Hypotype.

Fig. 51. Loricella concava sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig. 52. Loricella paucipustulosa Ashby and Torr, Hypotype.
Fig. 53, Loricella magnopustulosa sp. nov., Holotype.

Fig. 54. Loricella paucipustulosa Ashby and Torr, Paratype.
Fig. 55. Oochiton halli Ashby, Pleisiotype.

CIN.

Vou. VI, PLATE

S.A. MusEUM

REc.

Rec. S.A. MusEUM Vou. VI, PLATE XX,

Rec. 5.A. MuskuM VoL. VI, PLATE XXI,

iis
} NOTTS
al PAN NO rg

EAGLE AND CROW MYTHS OF THE MARAURA TRIBE,
LOWER DARLING RIVER, NEW SOUTH WALES

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The literature relating to myths of the “Eaglehawk and Crow” series in South-Eastern
Australia is growing, and a detailed study should be made of their distribution.

During a recent visit to South-Western Australia, it was noticed that there were
kindred myths among the [“Nona:] peoples, especially amongst the “-ap” (') tribes,
who live in the extreme South-West and extend eastward along the Southern Coast to
Cape Paisley.

EAGLE anp CROW MYTHS or rut MARAURA TRIBE,
LOWER DARLING RIVER, NEW SOUTH WALES

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.Sc., Eruno.ocisr, Sourn Ausrranwan Museum.
Text-fig. 1-6.

Tux literature relating to myths of the ‘ Eaglchawk and Crow’? series in South-
Fastern Australia is growing, and a detailed study should be made of their dis-
tribution.

During a recent visit to South-Western Australia, it was noticed that there
were kindred myths among the [’Nona:] peoples, especially amongst the ‘t-ap’’(1)
tribes, who live iu the extreme South-West and extend eastward along the Southern
Coast to Cape Paisley.

Tlassell (1934) has records of a Crow and Eagle story among the ‘‘ Wheelman?’
people who live within this area, while evidences of these stories and their influences
on social organizational patterns are also to be met with among tribes such as the
Wakaman], |’Awamin|, and |"Ba:baram], thus extending their range into the
country on the western side of the Great Dividing Range in North Queensland. In
general, it may be noted that these stories can be found over a wide southern and
eastern peripheral belt in Australia, from Bunbury in the South-West, to Chillagoe
in North Queensland, Texts have also been obtained in the |Tayane] and. |Jaril-
de‘kald| languages. They tell of the activities of the Crow-man along the lower
reaches of the Murray and down the Coorong as far as Mount Gambier, where his
activities were associated with what are believed to have been voleanic eruptions.

The present contribution is intended to place on record only the form of the
story belonging to the ["Maraura] people.

The principal Maraura text takes the form of a recital or monologue, in what
may be regarded for convenience, as two acts. In this form it is told af evening
gatherings, of both sexes, around the camp fire. Explanations and asides have
heen added to render the sequences clear to those not familiar with particulars of
the story, for ii must be remembered that many, if not all, the details of these tales
were well-known to the audiences for which they were recited, The mere recountal
of the dialogue and the dramatization introduced by change of voice and tone was
sufficient to vividly reeall to the listeners the actions of the heroes.

1The terms |-ap} and [-in], the terminations of place names in separate areas of South-
Western Australia, have been used to divide the tribes of South-Western Australia intu two
series which differ in language, social organization, and other characteristics.

244 Recorps or THE S.A. MUSEUM

The informant was a seventy-four-year-old man of the Maraura tribe, who is
remotely related, throngh his father, with the Ba:kindji people. The action of the
first story takes place near the north-eastern boundary of the latter tribe, but the
wanderings of the Crow also extend down the Darling and Murray Rivers to South
Australia.

The range of the Maraura tribe, at the beginning of white contact, was from
Avoea and Tapio on the Darling River, downstream to Wentworth and Moorna.
They lived also on the western auabranch of the Darling as far north as Popilta,
but were exeluded from Milkengay Lake, which traditionally belonged to the
|"Barkindji]. On oceasion, they wandered in the dry country to the north-west of
this area. All this area was their |’keida|, or country, upon which they lived and
hunted. The Maraura are the “‘Waimbio tribe’? of Fison and Ilowitt (1880,
p. 288).

The Ba:kindji lived as next-door neighbours on both sides of the Darling
River, from about Avoca northwards to Wileannia, If Marauira wished to visit or
hunt on the [‘keiSa] of their neighbours, they had first to receive permission.

Although both tribes possessed matrilineal social organizations of the Dual
type (with Makwora and Ki:lpara as moiety terms), neither of them practised
circumeision in their initiations. Their ceremonies were indeed allied more with
those of the Jarildakald near the mouth of the Murray River. Elevation of the
youth to manhood was marked by a series of rites, ineluding hair-plucking anc
singeing, painting with red ochre, restrictions on the touching of water, and avoid-
ance of women.

The native text las been supplied with an interlinear translation with as close
a rendering of the meanings as is possible at present ; where the phrase is given im
inverted commas. ouly the general sense of the native yersion has been ascertained,
Tn such cases the rendering follows closely that of the informant, who speaks Eng-
lish rather well, although he is unable to either read or write it, The other stories
also follow his dietion as closely as consistent with clarity and brevity. Critical
passages are quoted verbatint in inverted commas within brackets. Opinions and
discussion of the statements detailed are placed in a concluding section of the
paper.

The system of transeription follows that set out in previous papers by Tindale
(1935, p. 264; 1937, p. 107). As in these papers, itulies and black letters have been
used to differentiate those vowel and consonantal sounds of which a close rendering
is of principal interest to the student of phonetics.

A song series is stated to be associated with the Kaglehawk and Crow story of
the Maraura. ‘Chere were many verses which were sung to describe incidents im
the lives of the ancestral beings, The present story still belongs to four men, and

TINDALE—EAGLE AND Crow Mytus 245

although there is no objection to the telling of the tale, the songs may not be sung
without the permission of all four of them. They were onl y sung when the owners
met for initiation rites.

Tn relating the story of ['Wa:ku] and his endeavours to marry the two sisters,
the informant on several oceasions made sketches on the eround with a stick. These
are reproduced in figs. 1-5. Their general resemblance to seratchings in rock
shelters along the Murray River is worthy of note.

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STORY OF WA:KU AND KA:NAU.

| Waiku], or Crow, a man of the |'Ki:lpara | moiety, formerly lived at one end
of Manara Range, and [Kamau], or Kagle, a man of the | Makwora] moiety, lived
at the other. They were both |‘nuwrili] ancestral beings, and in their time Mak-
word men were short, stout, and dark-haired; while Ki:lpara were tall and light-
haired, Manara Range is situated in western New South Wales (143° 45’ Bast
Longitude x 32° 25’ South Latitude),

The homes of the two meu stood up like hills, one at each end of the range, and
the camps are identified 10-day with two peaks, believed to have been formed by
the invning to stone of the ancestral huts. In between the two camps lived twa
sisters |'wittlin|. [“Wituliy| is a special term applied to a pair of sisters,

The |witulin| were unmarried wirls of the Makwora moiety, and were ["tam.
bar] (.e, sel apart, forbidden, almost saered), for no one was permitted either to
approach, or touch, or even to have conversation with them. Ka:hau, as a leading
man of the | Barindji] people (literally the ‘people of the trees’’, in contrast to
['Baikindji], the people of the |'Ba:ka| or Darling River), had the two girls under
his care, He called them by the relationship term ["yamia'ga |, mother, of which
the reciprocal is [“‘wismba:In]. Waku called them | ‘meititja| (sister’s husband’s
mother, mother-in-law). The Barindji folk had lived on the Manara Range, away
from the Darling River, for a long time. They were friendly with the River folk.

The Ba:kindji, at that time, wandered chiefly in the country on the eastern
side of the Darling, and were related to the two women as [‘nulti:li], mother’s
brother 's sons [‘wakatja|, mother’s brothers, and ["tanguwa] (not translated), All
these men were prepared to ight for the two sisters if they should be molested.

Daily the two youne women went hunting, searching on the flats for | ‘yqardu |
(seedspores of Marsilia Drummondii) and other vegetable foods, and hunting for
opossums, In the intervals of food-gathering, they ground their |‘nardu| between
stone mills, making flour for [‘nardu|] eakes. Kamau made a practice of killing
wallabies and kangaroos, and of leaving thein secretly at the girls’ camp in their
absence. The girls suspected that their |‘wi:mbaln| was the food-bringer, but
never saw him,

246 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ka:nau had as wife the sister of Wa:ku (and therefore also a Ki:lpara moiety
woman). Karan, who was a ‘‘good man”’, had no sister, and had been unable to
give a sister to Wa:ku in exchange for the wife he had received.

ACT I.

W. to K.; ‘Ondadja ‘nongomalkai = ‘janta’nenginba “noygadlui.
Brother-in-law woman-you’ve-got I-have-not ‘‘wife-of-my-own”’.

‘Onkarnel nongo ‘ba:leire

yengali. ‘Juina
Give-me woman. it-will-be-good ‘‘to-sit-down-with-a-glad-heart.”’. If-you
ila ‘nokandai “nongo nan ‘yanbar’du:ma, “Uira
don’t allow-me-to-haye woman ‘| will-eateh-you-with-a-bone’’. ‘*1l-am
(nanba = magic bone)
‘watutu ‘veinou ‘nongo nodlo ‘kangarein’garn
going-to-take’’ women two

who-sit-down-together (i.e. the two sisters).

K.to W.:'Paltjar'til ‘neinga = “ondadja. ‘Kairajukul “‘narn
A-few-days wait brother-in-law. Some-other-day (in two or
jawundu ‘gakun‘deimbar. ‘Keingudjarm ‘nairo

three days) return and-see. Your-sister’s-son is

‘anga‘neingarn ba:roleilna:ro, ‘Keingudjarm ‘ba:raleingarn kangara
with-us is-listening. Your-sister’s-son - may-listen forbidden

Thana ‘mondama'tindjal.

must-be this-secret-affair-of-ours.

(Wa:ku goes away. A few days later he returns, and WKa:nau sees him approaching.
He says to his son) :

K. to boy: B! BE! til ‘wakatjarm Sowoporan’du. ‘Wuril bari

See your-mother’s-brother appears. You-go-away
‘kudiir = ‘nali = ‘ynulpil wakatjarm duilali ‘mondabalkul.

play we talk-now your-mother’s-brother — the-two-of-us _seeret-things.

yempa = kudi:sr = buruirna “‘monda. ‘Tlinba

‘bararba
You play far-off from-the-secret. Forbidden

to-listen
‘geinun = ‘balkur.
to-our-words.

(The boy goes away, and the men talk together.)

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CROW MyTus 247

K. to W,: ananunj ‘nokaSum “nongo ‘naitau = “wari
Lcannot-see-the-way — to-give-to-you. = woman ‘'no-sueh’?
‘nongo ‘yengaipa.

woman sits-down-here (i.e. is here).

W. to K.:'narnba ‘ondadja ila‘nanunj ‘qokalmilali.
The-bone brother-in-law ‘‘ for-I-cannot-see-my-way to-yield-to-you”’,

(A. makes many excuses to W.—They are difficult to translate. )

K. to W.; Tomayeina: ‘pajarta ‘nap:abarinj ‘pamil, ‘Witarn’bal
Have-patience a-little-while about-it I-will-see. Obtain
(kitarnda = to obtain)
‘artinj ‘watiulpi nongom tjuma ‘yain'balat’pa. “Hina:
Tmight by-asking woman by tormenting-the-people. Then-again
‘nalpi ‘wata = tumiari ‘tjuma “jima ‘gainba ‘latpa ‘goita
perhaps get-by-askingy by torment-the-people.

‘wimbi ‘narndu. ‘“Hina:’na:tin ‘waijuti “nalin ‘git ~=wirmbi.
Soon **they-might-pity-us’’ those people.

“Hinanartinil ‘barralelei ‘badeil balku:l. ‘EKinanil = gok:atum
Then-I-will listen ‘“for-good — news’’. Then-you will-be-given
‘baleir = ‘balkurr. ‘Juma iha norkaduma ‘baleir ‘balkur iman
rood news. However if-not giving good news then
‘Quri larli Tuma ‘neygali baal ‘gitinka = wimbiu naygun

we-will-consider-it. After-a-while-we-listen those-fellows men — will-show-us
A-while-sit

‘kulpilati ‘juggi— ‘balku:nkari. Nadliu tuna ‘nengali ‘bar:ral
how-they-are making their-own-news. You-and-I a-while sit listen
‘gitinkadi wimbiuti nayunj ‘kulpi:lati. “Juma
those-fellow people see ‘‘how-they-are-treating-the-matter’’. THowever
baleir —_ balkur yengali ‘wora = ‘kulpilati naji dani.
e2ood news sit-and-wait how-are-they will-be-told-to-me.
‘Jina ila, ‘baleir ‘ballcur ‘kulpatijarn “wora

Ilowever —if-not good news **if-they-don 't-tell-me-true’’
‘nanonjarti. geli yengali ‘tuma = “jinratil ‘geqgali,

leave-it-tothem. We-two sit-down a-while at-that ‘‘we-will-sit-and-wait’’.

(Kamau is helpless and is unable to assist Wa:ku. The two watch each other for
signs of treachery. Hach fears the other.)

248 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
W. to K.: ‘Ondadja ‘teka:latpil ‘japiarai. ‘Kaninarn
Brother-in-law J-return-home to-my-camp. Some-day
“‘pamrtum,

1-come-again-to-see-you.

(They part. Several years elapse, Wa:ku broods over his trouble. He has other

adventures. |See later part of this paper.| By magie, he secretly assaults the

women, and when they run away he unsuecesstully chases them down the Darling

as far as Swan Reach. Embittered, he returns to the Manara Range. Le decides

to injure his brother-in-law fur his part in the many troubles that haye come over
him. He thinks, ‘* 171 kill my sister’s child’’, the son of Kamau.)

AOT II.

W. to self: HE! E! ‘Purabarit’pili ‘balkatu ‘keinkutjai.
“T-am-going-over’’ to-kill — sister’s son (of mine).

(Wa:ku journeys to the camp of Ka:nan at the other end of the Range. )

W. to K.: A! ‘Ondadja ‘nayon jey'geimbar. ‘Balkandarinari
Brother-in-law “how-are-you’’. “You-go-and-hunt”’

‘wanga ‘teinai ‘kaldaran ‘yalei — geingal. ‘Keinkudjalni
meat foot (mine) aching we-two will-camp (sit-down). My-sister’s-son
‘wandal ‘kuni ‘wora ‘nongali ‘keina ‘marinji ‘yoygitu,
is-making fire “we-will-share”’ wallaby when-it-is-cooked.
‘narneil ‘tailali. ‘“Motra. ‘ipratu ‘VQYomba mani
“Some — we-will-eat-now.” A-piece “we-will-leave”’ for-you
‘noygi ‘wanga. ‘Jawu ‘tekar ‘leinbar ora ‘garngal ora
of-eooked meat. When you-return “we” sit-down “we”
tail ‘gindu ‘ynarndin ‘kininka ‘matjul ‘wanga ‘kininka ‘karraminki
eat you raw meat to-morrow
ora ‘norwali. ‘nali ‘kana‘tar ‘imiali ‘kanarn ‘donkarn.

“we? cook-it. We stay-here — asleep this night.

(Kamau goes hunting, leaving W. and the boy at the camp. W. is supposed to be
caring for the boy. The two have a large meal of wallaby flesh. The boy sits on
one side of the fire, and Wa:ku on the other. The boy is gorged with eating.)

Boy to W.: Wakatja! ‘kuruntoi ‘kadlaramil ‘kumtoi ‘matjira: “pili.
Uncle belly paining-me belly is-full now.

(Wa:ku decides the boy has not gorged sufficiently for his purpose. )

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CROW MYTHS 249

W. to boy: ‘Paljarti, ‘paljarti, ‘katjilju ‘nok:atombari ‘nitjuru' yi.
Wait wait a-while L-eut-you one-more-piece.

Boy to W.: ya:ta‘tau ‘kuruntoi ‘bo:’bomaranil ‘jarukarpil ‘bilkararpil
Impossible belly full-now [-am-thirsty I[-will-fetch
‘nok:o = “wirtjalu.
water — to-drink.
W. to boy: Hi! Hi! ‘woreitili ‘pik:abara ‘wora ‘witjalibil ‘maul
go-on run-down “have-a-drink” presently
‘tek’rarlembil.
come-back-again.
(Shrubs, bushes, and a wattle tree were between the camp and the water. The boy
gous away to drink, and the unele sets himself in ambush against his return. The
boy goes down one side to fetch water.)

W. to boy: BE! BE! ‘wila’‘nang!
Go-around-the-other-way.

Boy to W.: Wintjarndu ‘jagnka ‘wanga'latpai? ‘Kanarnei ‘jankarn.

Did you-say that-side? =“ Which-way did-you-say.”
W. to boy: ‘nak:ur ‘Wwilununj “juwu “wanga'lunbar.
Co-back “around-the-other-way” that-side.

(W. desires the boy to come around the right side of the bush so that he may take

fair aim with his spear and pierce his belly. He squats on the ground with his

spear ['karlku] and spear-thrower [‘yamu:aga] (i.e. mother of the spear). He easts
his weapon, and says :)

W. to self: Kanguin ‘bandatuma,
“L-wot-a-gooud-hit-at-you.”
(The scene changes to the father. K. is hunting for wallaby. At the moment when
his son is being speared he is raising his spear to a wallaby. Te strikes, and misses
the wallaby. He rubs his nose with his left fist, and wonders why he has missed
the wallaby.)

K.to self: "TL! ja! nanun ‘djuljai ‘keira ‘wanga,
Why wmissed-I this meat.
(He wonders, for, until now, every wallaby he has aimed at he has ‘‘pinned”’
down to the ground: this is his first mistake. )

250 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
K. to self: “Jak:ai! ‘nangonj ‘kiki ‘keira. “Wirmba
Exclamation! why (“what’s wrong”) “in-this-country”. People

‘jarti ‘kayar tanarn. ‘Paljartil ‘karrananil ‘nanmartu.
coming “I-think-there-must-be”. Wait-a-while another-one I-will-try.

(He stalks another wallaby, but it also escapes his aim.)

He! ha! ‘nakarjitin = ‘wak:i:lin ‘norlu. ‘Paljartil ‘nitjuruin
those uneles-two — they-two. Wait-awhile once-more
‘karru yarmatil.

another-one — [’ll-try,

(Ka:nau breaks his spear—the one that kills all his game for him. Ile now knows

that something is wrong in the camp. He returns to see broken spears and pieces

of boomerang scattered over the ground as though there has been a fight between
many people. Wa:iku comes to him, limping, and crying like an old man.)

K, to W.: A! ‘ondadja “‘hayonja ‘walijiim?
Brother-in-law what-is wrong-with-you?

W. to K. (in tremulous voice of an old man): O!O! ‘ondadja ‘narukanola
Brother-in-law many-people

‘bindalaji ‘bira ‘malkaji. ‘Nanma ‘jinka ‘pandai y’gurta ‘naru‘ka
assaulted-me with weapons. “T-chased-them” speared some — others
‘tambatam'bai = ‘noija nairo. ‘Narwka ‘tambatam'bai ‘jarau ‘karlku
running-away with-fright they-were. Others running-away spears

‘ralui ‘mikrai,
full-of wounded.
(Waku shows his legs. )

W. to A.: “Kiki ‘yokila ‘jarpa ‘karlko ‘roiwlka ‘narro. ‘Hineinu
Here myself by-a-spear speared I-was. Then (while)

naru'karai ‘jorupa ‘nokeila ‘keinkutjai ‘nadlaijin ‘napen
Lwas-hard-pressed they-hit| my-sister’s-son “in-econfusion”

‘nan ‘malaji ‘apia ‘nadlaji ‘narn — ‘nok:eilai ‘keinkutjai.
running-and-ehasing then struck-down (was) my-sister’s-son.
Uria ‘pam ‘tjinanka ‘itu ‘na’maramil ‘tai ‘nimai.
We see tracks there of-chasing-fighting there-are.

(W. points): ‘Worilkata ‘tjinanka = ‘it:uli.
Those-are tracks there.

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CROW MyTHS 251

(W. points out to his brother-in-law the tracks where his combat with many black-
fellows has taken place. MKarnau can only see the twisted tracks, ‘‘ pigeon-toed’’,

of Wa:ku, )
K, to self: Kirki ‘tangu ‘kiki = ‘wimbai ‘mari “nare’kalai
This relation this man has-done to-death
‘keinkudjarndu.
his-sister’s-son,
K.to W.: B!he! ‘Kinortili “tuniarta ‘{prarleli, ‘Ondadja!
That-will-do we-may-as-well bury-him. Brother-in-law
‘Tambili ‘meynga ‘keingutjarm ‘mandi ‘orraip‘rarleli.
Dig hole for-sister’s-son that-we-may him bury.

W. commences to dig a grave, and prepares the first portion of the pit.)

W.to K.;O! ‘Ondadja! ‘nindu ‘wili ‘tambe.
Brother-in-law you now dig.

(K. goes down into the hole, digs, and comes out again.)

K. to W.:‘Ondadja! = ‘nindu’ wil ‘nitjulun ‘tamba,
Brother-in-law you once-more dig.

(W. goes down a second time. Soon K. peers in and sees that it is deep enough.)

K. to W.: ‘Kemo'tartin ‘geito ‘meinga in’djo im‘tangaleil ‘narltu’tja
That-is-enough that hole you _ lie-down “hottom-of-
‘tar
hole-to-see-if-it-will-be-suitable”’.

(K, tells W. to lie down in the proper position in the hole to test its shape. )

K. to W.:‘nartau ‘nagonji ‘imran ‘eno ‘keinkutjarn,
lie-down sister’s-son.
(K. stands over the grave and watches, telling him to move first one way and then
another, until he is in the correct position.)

K. to W.: "Keno ‘tartigeli ‘im:angaleil !
That-is-enough lie-still!
(So saying, K. picks up the body of his son, throws it down on W., and hastily fills
the grave with earth. Thinking that he has made an end of Wa:ku, K. returns
towards his camp. K. notices a dark cloud rising in the west. He says:)

252 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

K. to self: ‘ninda ‘wangalan ‘komboi ‘mari ‘pingi ‘alui.

You rising-in-West ‘“there-will-be” thunder-and-lightning.
‘Wilpi larn ‘jap:arai ‘pingi ‘alui. K(e)irkidi “tailpa‘nili,
Build-I-must shelter from-the-storm. Here-it-comes close-overhead.
(W., meanwhile, is digging his way through the ground ‘‘like a wombat’’. K.
makes three separate camps, one after the other, so that if one is struck by light-
ning he may use the other, or if one becomes wet, he may jump into the other ; the
third one is supposed to be substantial enough to keep out any amount of water.

Rain drives him into the third hut.)

K. to self: He! He! ‘Ki:kilinu ‘jap:arai ‘ila ‘balkara ‘naji ‘kanarn

Here-it-is in-camp eannot © strike me in-this
“japrarai.
camp.
(The finish comes—lightning strikes. )
Comment: ‘Tal! ‘tal! ‘malajinu ‘pingi ura ‘halkeirunai. ‘Keikil
Crash! erash! — struek lightning strnek-down. With-this
‘wombi la:pil.

he-flew-into-the-air.

(W. digs himself out of the ground, “‘like a goana’’, but it is a great struggle, and
the effort turns him into a bird, and he becomes the crow. He is [‘wanga] (i.e. a
‘meat’? or totem). Each has condemned the other to be a bird. They speak to

each other, as birds ;)

W. to K.: ‘Ondadja! ‘woreimba ‘wombilarli “karkano
Brother-in-law from-now flying-in-the-air high-up
‘keirama:'lina.

will-be-our-country.

K. to W.: nempa ‘ka:rra ‘ondadja ‘wombilarn ora ‘karkanj no
You brother-in-law fly high-up
Japiara:ilin ‘imar: wombilarli.
camping will-he flying.

WA:KU KILLS HIS SISTER’S SON,
(English Rendering of Text.)

ACT IT,
W. to K.: Brother-in-law, you have a wife, but I have not received any in
return, Give me one, for it will be pleasant to have a woman. If you won't let me

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CROW MYTHS 253

have a wife I will point a bone (perform magic bone rites) at you, IT am going to
take the two sisters (for whom you are caring).

K. lo W.: Wait a few days, brother-in-law. Come and see me again about the
matter. Your sister’s son is listening to us. He may hear about the forbidden
thing that we are discussing. (W.’s desire to wed women who stood in the socio-
logical relationship of wife’s mother.)

K. to Boy: Look! Your mother’s brother is coming. Go and play. Your
mother’s brother and I must talk of seeret things. Play far away from the secret.
T forbid you to listen to our talk.

K. to W.: 1 cannot see a way in which to provide you with a wife; there is no
suitable woman here.

W. to &K.: L will point the bone at you, brother-in-law. 1 will not yield my
rights to you,

K. to W.: Have patience ; in a while I will see about it. By continually asking
for a woman | might obtain one from the people. If not, I may be able to get one
by threatening them. Perhaps the people will take pity ou us. I will listen for any
hint of good news. J will give you the tidings. However, if there is no word, we
will have to consider the matter further, If we remain quiet these fellows will
soon show us what they have in mind. You and T will sit and listen, and find out
how they are dealing with the matter. Any good news will be told to us if we sit
and wait. If they don’t give us good news it will be their fault. We will sit down
and await the turn of events.

W. to K.: will return to my own camp now, brother-in-law. Some day I will
return (to hold you to your word).

ACT TI.

W. to self: I will go over and kill my sister’s son,

W. to K.: How are you, brother-in-law? My foot is aching from walking.
You go and hunt for game; my nephew and T will remain here. He is making a
fire. We will share ont this wallaby when it is cooked, Some of it we will eat, but
we will leave your share. When you return to where we are camped you will find
it prepared, ready to eat. To-morrow we ean cook the raw meat you obtain. We
will sleep here to-night.

Boy to W.: Unele, my belly is aching. It is full.

W. to Boy: Don’t stop eating yet ; let me cut you off one more piece.

Boy to W.: Impossible. Tam full. Tam thirsty. I am going to fetch water
to drink.

W. to Boy: Run down (to the water), have your drink, and come baek again.

W. to Boy (after an interval) : Go around the other way.

Boy to W.: Did you say the other side?’ What did you say?

W. to self ; That will finish you.

254 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

K. to self: Why did I miss my aim at that animal? What is happening?
Strangers must be coming, Twill try another one, and see what happens. (Some-
thing is happening to those relations of mine.) Hold. Ill try once more,

K. to W.: Brother-in-law, what has gone wrong with you?

W. to K.: Oh! brother-in-law, a great crowd of people have assaulted me with
weapons. Some of them I chased away wounded ; others ran away in fright; still
others ran away pierced full of spears. [ was wounded here myself with a spear.
While I was being assaulted and hard-pressed they hit my sister’s son. In the
confusion of running and chasing, my sister’s son was struck down. See the tracks
of the scrimmage there (on the ground).

K. to self : This relation of mine, this man, has murdered his sister’s son.

K. to W.: All we can do is bury him. Brother-in-law, dig a hole for your sis-
ter’s son, so that we may bury him.

W. to K.: Brother-in-law, it is your turn to dig.

K. to W.: Brother-in-law, continue the digging once more. That is deep
enough. Lie down in the hole and test it. Lie down in the proper way, just as your
sister’s son will be placed. That is enough. Lie still.

K. to self: What is that rising in the west; there is going to be a thunder-
storm. I must build a shelter from the rain. It is close overhead, It comes. It
cannot strike me in this camp.

Comment: Crash struck the lightning; struck him down, At this he flew into
the air (i.e. became transformed into a hind),

W. to K.: Brother-in-law, from now on our country will be high up in the air,

K. ta W,; You, also, brother-in-law, will make your camp high in the air.

WA:KU SEEKS. THE TWO SISTERS AS WIVES.

Following the events given in the first half of the above recital, Waku was
lonely, and becanse he was cunning (‘‘much more elever than Makwora men’’) he
songht ways to overcome the two sisters, his mothers-in-law.

From the Manara Range he watched the [‘wittin] squatting beside a claypan,
gathering food. His penis became erect, and he sang a song which had magical
power. Thereupon it became long, and, passing through the ground came up
under first one of the women and then the other.

One said to her companion : ‘Older sister ['wit:uga], I have a sirange feeling.
What is wrong?’’

The other replied: ‘‘ We had better escape; old man Wazku is trying to trick
us.’’

They both hecame big with child. The younger sister one day went away
alone, for the first time, and gave birth to a male child. She made a bed of soft
erass, With a bark eoyering, and left the child, returning empty-handed to the
camp, where her older sister had already finished food preparations.

ho
tn
uw

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CROW MYTHS

“What is wrong to-day [‘kaitjayva|, have you brought no food !”’

To this the younger sister replied: ‘‘I haye found something; it will be com-
pany for us. Tle is a little man. Come down the hill in the morning, and I will
show him to you.”

At daylight they went down on to the plain, ‘‘What a fine fellow! <A little
hoy. Ile will catch game for us. Keep feeding him in the serub until he grows
up.’

The elder gave birth to a girl in like manner. People began to notice their
unusual actions, and say; ‘‘They have broken the rules. There is something
wrong.’’

The |'witulin| saw they were hated by their own people, and ran away, travel-
ling all day until they eame to the ["Ba:ka], Darling River, at ['Pun'keiri], Poon-
caira, of maps. Tere they met a man named [Tula], also called [‘Tjulsu], or
|'Tudla|, which is now the name of the kingfisher.

‘Tulu was a noted fisherman, for no one else on the river was skilled at eateh-
ing |‘parndu], Murray Cod (MeCullochella macquariensis), Other people ate
their food raw, but ‘Tuli had fire, and was able to cook all he ate. Barkindji
people could not understand why he was so different, ‘Tul:y watched the two fine,
shinee women as they came towards him.

“What are you??? he asked, and they replied, ‘‘Makwora’’,

“You are ‘right’ for me, for T am Ki;lpara.’’ Then they took bim as their
husband, at |’Purn’keiri]. “Trlm fed them both well, and they were happy. for
there was a hig ‘‘hole"’ in the river stocked with abundance of fish.

Waku, mischief-maker, followed after the |‘witnlin]. On finding them, he
said to himself: ‘Ah! There they are. I'll kill that fellow, and take the two
women for niyself.”?

Even while he was still a long way off, it was his intention to kill Tulm, and
so he devised a trick, He pretended he was an old man, and lame.

The women, having never seen him at elose quarters, did not recognize him,
and took pity. (‘‘Tt is a deyil’s triek still done to-day.’’) They fed and made a
camp for him.

Wa:ku then asked Tulu why he was able to eatch fish when all other men had
failed. “Pnlin led him to the water’s edge, and showed him how to dive down and
peer into hollow logs lying in the mud. He found a big cod in a specially large
hollow tree trunk, They went down to see it. In diving, Wa:ku noticed the bones
of men and a large spear lying in the log. When ‘Tul:n urged him to dive through
the log and seeure the fish, he was too cunning to agree, and said to himself: ‘‘ This
is the trap of "Tule. It is for people who ask him how to fish. They are all rela-
tions of mine, Many of my uncles (mother’s brothers) have already died by the
spear of “Tulm.”’

Warku argued with “Tul:u, who, to demonstrate that it was safe, himself dived

256 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

into the end of the log, and followed the fish throngh it. Wa:ku made splashing
noises, pretending that he was struggling with the cod. As “Tulru appeared, he
erasped him by his long beard, and pierced his head with the fish spear, As Warku
struck the fatal blow, the two women had a feeling that some harm had voime to
their husband. They were sure when they saw Warku approaching alone and
without fish.

After the evening meal they made a camp for three, placing Wa:ku in between
them (Fig.1). They refused his embraces. When he had gone to sleep, the women
commenced to groan and complain of pains, and of a desire to defecate. Each
picked up her child and skin rugs. Their aches were a sham. They defecated,
one on each side of the camp, and they practised magic by singing to their excreta,
making them grow large. They taught them to say; “We are coming soon, we
have bellyache, and cannot relieve ourselves.’’

5

Figs 1-5. Ground sketches by Mavaura man made in illustrating story of Wa:ku, 1. Wacku
sleeping between the two sisters. 2. Women fishing for bream: a. Limbari Lake. b. Creek. e. Net.
8. The magical tree. a. Camp. b. Tree, ¢, Gall lump, 4. The old woman ’s camp. a, Round Camp
of old woman in acaye. b, The two sisters asleep. 5, Men sleep around the magic tree, a. Ring of
sleeping men, b. The man Nankuru, e. The magic tree. d. and e. The two women.

Then they escaped with their children. Each time Warku stirred and im-
patiently called to them, the faeces answered for the women. At last the old fellow
impatiently picked up his swordstick ¢lub, and in the darkness struck first at one
of the two black objects beside the camp, and then the other. The mess splashed
and blinded him. He cleared his eyes. Then he sang a song to the daylight, and
the dawn came up more quickly than usual. He saw the tracks of the women on
the western banks of the river at ["Pu:nkeiri], and followed them to |‘Limbari], a
lake where he saw smoke rising from a fire, near where a creek entered the lake
from the river, The two women had stretched a net across the channel, and, in
the late afternoon, were engaged in catching bream (Fig, 2). They brought a few
fish to him, and made their camp. Warku at first refused to cohabit with the elder

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CrRoW MYTHS 257

sister, for he desired the younger, but they would not allow this, and he had to he
content with the older after all.

Next morning he sent them to fish while he nursed the babies. Still anxious
to mate with the younger one, he pinched ber baby till it cried; but the two women
would not be separated, and came up the bank together, His patience was ex-
hausted. Ile prepared ‘‘a camp’? for the two children on a low gum sapling, and
sang to the tree until it grew up quickly. Then he caused a large gum tree gall
to appear halfway down the trunk (Fig. 3), to prevent the reseue of the children,
how high wp in the air.

Warku then said to the children: ‘‘When you see the smoke of a fire in the
(distance, ery for your mothers.’?

The children cried out, and the women ran to the tree, but could not climb it.
Then they ran back to the Darling River, and told all the Ba:kindji people,
| Nankuru|, Pelican, was the head man, a Makwora man like Kamau. All the
people came to the tree, and tried for many days to elimb it; none sueceeded in
surmounting the gall swelling,

Then the |’witulin| heard of a clever Maraura young man, a Ni:lpara youth
named ["Walpu|, who lived about Lake Victoria. ‘Walpu was a |'tambar], set
apart fo undergo his initiation, and therefore plastered thickly with a coating of
red ochre and oil, Tis body was [“tambar]. This youth lived with his mother in
A cHyve,

“Beteh that boy; he is the only one to rescue your ebildven.’’ The women
listened to the Ba:kindji men, and travelled in haste to Lake Vietoria, accomiplish-
ing the journey in a single day, ‘Walpu was away hunting, They told the old
women about the plight of their children,

The old woman was not anxious to help. ‘‘Tf he wishes to go, I will send him
when he returns. [| don’t want him to go, for strange men may kill him,”’

The lad returned, saw the ‘‘two fine women’’ waiting for him, and learned
that they were Makwora, Ile devided to go, Night fell, and the |'witulin| made
a bed for three people, for they wished to reward the youth. The boy remembered
that he was [‘tambar], and that the red ochre was still on his body, and refused
their advances. He left seeretly in the early hours of the night to resene the
children.

The old woman slept in the nearby eave (Fig. 4). At dawn she came and
commiserated with the women. ‘Tle will not go with you. Go ahead: I will try
and persuade hint to go.7’

At noon, as the women trudged along, they found several fat opossums Lyin
on the track, They were presents from the youth. They ate them, and kept
finding others until they were in sight of the strange tree, The lad met and
warned them not to disclose his presence, but to make all the Ba:kinji men le
around the tree. The |’witulin] were told to sleep apart, close to and with their
heads toward the butt of the tree (Fig. 5).

258 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

'Nankuru saw the women lying apart, and desired greatly to crawl over to
one of them, but he saw that it could not be done while the children were still in
the tree. Then the [tambar] youth sneaked into the circle, and quietly sang a
magic song or [‘witabai'galpa|, Old men still use this song formula when they
desire to kill young men. The song made everyone sleep soundly, Then he
jumped between and over their bodies, and came close to the tree. Ie sang an-
other magic song, and this had the effect of making the tree become small, He did
not climb the tree, but merely picked the children off, and placed one with each
of the sleeping women. He spoke to them in turn, and said :‘* That is your mother,
When you see a fire blaze up in the distance you must ery, ‘ Where is ny mother???

He fled and lit the fire; the children eried, and the camp awoke. "Nankuru
was the first. to see what had happened, and, leaping to the sides of the women ‘a
beds, pretended that he was the one who had rescued them. By this he hoped to
win the favours of the two sisters.

They refused ‘Nankuru, and went away down the [’Ba:ka] without anyone
daring to stop them. They eame to the Murray River, or |‘Rinti], at Wentworth,
and followed it downstream to Lake Victoria, keeping on the northern bank until
they came to Morgan, where the river turns south. The Maraura eall this the
country of the [Tangazli]. They eoutinned then on the western side of the stream
beyond the country known to an older generation of Maranra.

Old Warku, who meanwhile had discovered the eseape of the two women,
followed thew. He was not able to cateh up with them, for they hac had a long
start.

So far the story is as told to the informant by people who were alive before
the white men came to the Darling River. Of the story of "Wa:kn and the two
women in the country of the people he ealled the Murundi, less is known ; but the
informant outlined it as he had heard it from them in later years. Murundi people
are now all dead. The Murundi were a horde or elan of the Ngaiawang tribe, who
inhabited the Murray River, from Herman Landing upstream fo near Waikerie,

Wa:ku attempted to catch up to the women by taking a short cut across North-
West Corner. At Loxton he made a cave, into which he went, and, travelling un-
derground, emerged at Swan Reach. (The exit is a deep cave, which has been
described by Parkin, 1938.)

When Wa:ku emerged from the cave at Swan Reach he was quite stupid from
being so long underground. Many people lived at this place, and Waku did not
know quite where he was. In his own country, children followed their mothers
(i.e. there was matrilineal inheritance of the moiety terms), but he was se confused
that he ‘turned the people around, and made his children follow their father’’.
He also desired to injure the two women lor deserting him, Thus there are no
moiety terms among the Murundi people, and children inherit their father’s totem,

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CRow MYTHS 259

In Ngaiawang mythology the two women became the wives of the ancestral
man Ngurunderi [yu'runde'ri], They escaped from him downstream and, after
many vicissitudes, were magically turned to stone by him as two small islands
(the Pages), off the coast of Encounter Bay, while they were fleeing out to Kan-
garoo Island, which was then almost conneeted with the mainland.

After further adventures, which are not described in Maraura lore, Wa:ku
returned to his country on the Darling River, and revisited his brother-in-law. THe
then took revenge on his sister's son (as told in the second half of the above recital),

DISCUSSION.

These stories of the Maraura people offer us more than the mere recital of a
follc tale, for in them can be read much of the daily life and thoughts of these people,
as well as some vague indications of their former history. Without this insight,
our formal sociological diagrams, our lists of food-plants and relations, and our
tribal maps mean little,

The southward direction of movement of the story is interesting. The migra-
tions of people along the Darling and Murray Rivers, evidently one of the main
corridors of Australia, in ancient times as well as in later days, is attested by many
facts of distribution of material enlture and language, and by archaeolgoical glean-
ing. Fraser (1892) mentions some Maraura as being on the Darling River in
1831, and moving downstream.

That the Crow stories are of rather remote origin in time may also he dedueed
from their widespread distribution in the southern half of Australia. Usually the
Crow is the clever and mischievous one; Eagle a good man, although in more
northern accounts the réles are occasionally reversed. There is also the suggestion
of racial differences between them, for Kidpara men are tall and light-haired,
while Makwora are traditionally short, stout, and dark-haired. In this native
obseryation we have perhaps some confirmation of the presence in former times on
the Darling Kiver of two forms of the Australian aboriginal, a stout, heavy, short,
and hairy ‘Southern’? people, and a more gracile and rather elabrous ‘‘ Northern’?
folk.

In their possession of skin cloaks and rugs, the practising of southern forms
of initiation rites, and in the focussing of the interests of the stories on the avoid-
ance of a Ki:lpara man, may be read the suggestion that the Makwora persons
involved in the story were mainly of the ‘‘ Southern’? type,

Hlements of this story are found in many places. The unelimbable tree one
is present in an unpublished story from the hills behind Encounter Bay. In an
unpublished Tangane text, Crow kills his mother-in-law, and prepares tracks of a

260 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

N. TERRITORY,

W. AUSTRALIA.

S, AUSTRALIA.

s

6
TASMANIA.

Fig. 6, Distribution of Eagle and Crow myths in Australia,

mock battle to deceive. At Waroonie Hill (Tindale, 1987) Eagle punishes Crow
by setting him on fire, and turning him into a bird, The Crow wanders far into
New South Wales. One of the lost stories concerned ["Wa:gen-'wa:gen], the town
otherwise known as Wagga Wagea, which is named after Wa:ku.

Brough Smyth (1878, I, p. 425), Mathew (1910, p. 191), Roth (1903), have
recorded myths of Eagle and Crow type. Roheim (1925) has utilized them in an
analysis of the development of Australian totemism. He suggests that the ‘‘con-
flict myths’’ contain elements so old that they may well be a remembrance of that

TINDALE—EAGLE AND CROW MyTHS 261

theoretical stage in the development of man when the Cyclopean horde family was
the important unit of social organization. In their present form the stories are
scarcely likely to be so ancient, and the present text may perhaps be equally
readily interpreted as indicating the conflict to be due to ethnic clashes of the
type suggested herein.

SUMMARY.

Crow and Eagle myths of the Maraura tribe of the Lower Darling River in
New South Wales are detailed, partly in text, with interlinear translation. Wa:ku,
or Crow, an ancestral human being, seeks to take his two sociological mothers-in-
law as wives. Having failed, he kills his sister’s son, and is turned into a bird by
Kamau, whom he has thus injured.

In the discussion, some evidence is deduced for the belief that the stories recall
the clash of two peoples along the Darling River. This river has evidently been,
for a long time, an important corridor of migration from north to south in
Australia.

REFERENCES CITED.

Fison, L. and Howitt, A, W.: Kamilaroi and Kurnai. Melbourne, 1880.

Fraser, John: The Aborigines of New South Wales, 1892.

Hassell, E.: Folklore. 1934, p. 331.

Mathew, J.: Eaglehawk and Crow. London, 1899, pp. 14-19.

Mathew, J.: Two Representative Tribes, 1910.

Parkin, L. W.: South Australian Naturalist, 19, 2, 1938, p. 6-9.

Roth, W. H.: North Queensland Ethnography Bulletin, 5, 1903.

Smyth, R. Brough: Aborigines of Victoria, 2 volumes. London, 1878.

Tindale, N. B.: Legend of Waijungari . . . . and the Phonetic System employed
in its Transcription. Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., v, 3, 1935, pp. 261-274.

Tindale, N. B.: Native Songs of the South-East of South Australia. Trans. Roy.
Soc. 8S. Aust., lxi, 1937, pp. 107-120.

Tindale, N. B.: Two legends of the Ngadjuri Tribe from the middle north of South
Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1xi, 1937, pp. 149-152.

INTERNAL PARASITES OF THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON,
UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE.

Summary

The material on which this report is based was obtained from three pigmy sperm
whales, Kogia breviceps (Blainville). From one specimen, stranded at Sandgate,
Moreton Bay, Queensland, 2" June, 1933, nematodes belonging to Anisakis and
Porrocaecum and fragments of a large species of Crassicauda, were obtained by Mr.
H. A. Longman, Director of the Queensland Museum, Brisbane, and forwarded to us
for identification. The other two whales were a female and its calf, which were
stranded at Port Victoria, Spencer Gulf, South Australia, in April, 1937, both
specimens being obtained by Mr. H. M. Hale, Director of the South Australian
Museum. From the adult we collected the same three species of Nematoda (Anisakis
kogiae n. sp., Porrocaecum kogiae n. sp., and Crassicauda magna n. sp.), as well as
encysted larvae of a cestode, Phyllobothrium delphini. The calf contained Anisakis
kogiae. The stomach of each of the South Australian whales contained beaks of
cephalopods, Sepioteuthis australis (identified by Mr. B. C. Cotton).

INTERNAL PARASITES or ruz PIGMY SPERM WHALE
By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON anp PATRICIA M. MAWSON, Universiry of AvELawe.
Text-fiz. 1-16,

Tae material on which this report is based was obtained from three pigmy sperm
whales, Kogia breviceps (Blainville). From one specimen, stranded at Sandeate,
Moreton Bay, Queensland, 2nd June, 1933, nematodes belonginy to Anisabis and
Porrocaccum, and fragments of a large species of Crassicaudd, were obtained by
Mr. IL. A. Longman, Director of the Queensland Museum, Brisbane, and forwarded
to us for identification, The other two whales were a female and its calf, which
were stranded at Port Victoria, Spencer Gulf, South Australia, in April, 1937,
both specimens being obtained by Mr. H. M. Hale, Director of the South Australian
Musenm. From the adult we collected the same three species of Nematoda (Anis-
ukis kogiae n, sp., Porrocaccum kogiae nu. sp., and Crassicauda Mugu TL, SP.), as
well as encysted larvae of a cestode, Phyllohothrium delphini. The ealf contained
Anisakis kogiae. The stomach of each of the South Australian whales contained
beaks of cephalopods, Sepiotenthis australis (identified by Mr. B, CG. Cotton).

The only helminth previously recorded from this rare whale is a Phylloboth-
riid cestode larva, Monorygma grimaldii (Moniez), whose oecurrence was reported
by Baylis (1926, 666; 1932, 410). From the large sperm whale, Physeter catodon,
two species of nematodes (Anisakis spp.), two of Acanthocephala (Lolbosoma.
spp.), and a cestode larva (Phyllobothrium physeteris) have been recorded.

The types of the species described as new in this paper are deposited in the
South Australian Museum, Adelaide; paratype material has been placed in that
institution, as well as in the Queensland Museum, Brisbane. Acknowledgment is
made of the kindness of the Directors of those Museums, Messrs. Hale and Long-
man respectively, in giving us the opportunity to study the collections; and of
assistance obtained through the Commonwealth Kesearch grant to the University
of Adelaide.

ANISAKIS KOGIAE nh, sp. (fig. 1-6).

From the stomach of Kogia breviveps, Port Victoria, Spencer’s Gulf, South
Australia; and Moreton Bay, Queensland.

Male 5-5°5 em.; female 4-6-5 em. Interlabia absent. Dentigerous ridges
present, bilobed on each lip, with about ten teeth on each lobe, Lips of approxi-

264 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

mately similar form and length; dorsal 0:05 mm, long, 0-1 mm. wide at base ;
laterals 0-13 mm. wide, anterior end with slightly narrower bilobed part not very
distinet. [rom basal portion ; two double papillae on dorsal lip, a double papilla on
vach yentro-lateral. Exeretory pore possibly between ventro-lateral lips. Cer-
vical papillae at 0-44 mm., and nerve ring at 0°31 mm. from head end, Cuticle
annulate, also transversely and finely longitudinally striate.

Male. Spieules unequal, 1-4 and 1-9 mm. long in a male 40 mm. in length,
stout, tapering to rounded point, About 74 pairs of preanal papillae, arranged
more or less in two longitudinal rows on each side, extending for about 2-4 mm. in
front of anus; a pair of adanal; two pairs immediately postanal, sueeeeded by four
pairs of stalked postanals arranged in two groups each of two papillae. Caudal
alae about 0-35 mm, in maximum width, reached just in front of level of anus.
Tail 0:18 mm. long.

Female. ‘ail bluntly conical, 0-2 mm. long, sometimes with small papilla-
like termination. Vulva a little in front of mid-body; vagina 2-2 mm. long;
median uterus 6°75 mm. Eggs in upper parts of uteri 0-32 by 0+25 mm.

Two species of Anisakis have been described from the sperm whale, Physeter
ratodon—A. physeteris Baylis (1923) and A. caladontis Baylis (1929), Krom
the former it differs in size, length of spicules, and in the number and arrangement
of the eandal papillae. It is distinguished from the latter im being shorter, and in
possessing less prominent lobes on the lips, shorter tail and spicules, while the
nerve ring and cervical papillae are more anteriorly situated. From A. simplea
(Rud.), a species widely distributed amongst Cetacea, it differs in having the
dorsal lip slightly larger than the others, a smaller number of postanal papillae,
and spicules unequal. From A. kitkenthalt ( whieh may perhaps be synonymous
with A. simplex), it is distinguished by the possession of shorter length, shorter
spicules, fewer and differently arranged preanal and postanal papillae. Lt is
ghorter than A. dussunuert (Beneden), and has fewer postanal papillae. It differs

Figs 1-5. Anisakis kogiac. 1, head, ventral yiew; 2. head, dorsal view; 3. auterior cud;
4, head, anterior view; 5. tail of male.

Figs. 6-8. Porrvcuccum logiae, 6, anterior end; 7. tail of male, ventral; 8. head, dovenl.

Figs. 9-10. Crassicauda magna, 9. head, lateral; 10. head, dorsal.

Figs. 11-16. Phytlohothraan delphini, 11-12. cysts, slightly flattened; 14. anterior end of
scolux removed from cyst and compressed; 14, two bothridia and apex of scolex, showing arrange-
ment of exeretory canals; 15, plexus of ducts belonging to the ventral excretory syatem of on
side in the posterior part of the eyst; 16. portion of dorsal plexus of one side in the posterior
vogion of the cyst, arrows indicate direction of ventral canal proceeding towards the exuretory
ladder.

Figs. 1, 2, 4and 8 are drawn to seale below fig. 1; 5 and 7 to sewle beside fig. 7; 3, 9 and 10
to seale beside fig. #; 11, 12 and 13 to scale beside fig, 11; 14 and 15 to seale beside fig. 15.
am, apical muscle; ¢, caecum; ¢ p, cervical papilla; de, dorsal excretory canal; d1, dorsal lip;
i, intestine; n, nerye ring; 0, oesophagus; y, ventriculus; v¢, ventral excretory canal.

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON— PARASITES OF THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE 265

266 RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM

from A, typica (Dies.) in the form of the lips, relatively shorter ventriculus,
shorter oesophagus, less difference in the size of the two spicules, and number anu
arrangement of the postanal and preanal papillae.

PorrocABcUM KoGIAeE n. sp. (fig, 7-8).

From the stomach of Kogia breviceps, Spencer’s Gulf, South Australia; and
Moreton Bay, Queensland.

Male 2-3 em.; female 1-5-3 em. Cuticle with annulations but without finer
transverse striations. Lips of similar shape; dorsal about 0°04 mm. long, 0°09 mun,
wide at base; ventro-laterals about as long, but narrower; internally-projecting
bilobed part of each lip narrow (about 35p wide, 10p long in dorsal lip), with rather
long teeth in dentigerous ridge; one papilla on each yentro-lateral lip, two on
dorsal. '

In a temale 1°5 em. in length, oesophagus 2 um. long, 1: 7-5 of body length,
anterior portion 1+75 mm., yentriculus 0°35 mm. long, and usually more or less
straight ; intestinal caeeum slightly longer than ventrieulus, Nerve ring 0-5 mm.
from the head end; cervical papillae just behind nerve ring, Excretory pore ap-
parently at same level as nerve ring.

Male. Spicules unequal; 0-17 and 0-2 mm. long in @ worm 14+7 mim. long,
longer spicule 1: 7° of body length ; japering. About 65-70 pairs of preanal
papillae, arranged more or less in two longitudinal lines laterally, the more anterior
being scattered, the series extending to 0-9 mm, from posterior end of worm. Six
pairs of postanal papillae arranged in two groups of three; the more anterior
group containing larger papillae, the middle one being double, Three transyerse
rows of denticles just posterior to anus. Gubernaculum present.

Female. Tail conical, pointed, 1:50 of body length. Vulva a short distance
behind oesophagus.

P, kogiae appears to be the first member of the genus to be described from
cetaceans. It shows resemblance to P. decipiens, a widely distributed parasite of
seals, but differs in being generally shorter, in the position of the vulya, m the
presence of three rows of post-anal deutieles, and in the possession of unequal
spicules and a greater number of preanal papillae.

Larvae of Porrocaecum were present amongst the material, these showing the
same relative length of the oesophagus as m the adults, The three lips were not
differentiated, but a larval tooth was present.

CRASSICAUDA MAGNA n. sp. (fig. 9-10).
From Koyia breviceps, Port Victoria, South Australia; and Moreton Bay,

Queensland.

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—PARASITES OF THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE 267

The South Australian worm, a female, was dissected from the neck region,
where it occurred entwined in the connective tissue, lying in a very narrow tiunel,
Tis presenee was reyealed during flensing, the parasite having been cut across in
several places. On account of the tangled manner in which it lay, it was dittienlt
to extract it. The total length of the fragments obtained measured, when in a
preserved state, about twelve feet (3-7 metres), the longest unbroken piece being
over nine feet. The posterior region was not seen, and fragments were still trace-
able in the blubber when collecting ceased. The species appears to be the longest.
nematode yet described. The Queensland material is also fragmentary, and las
the same appearance and diameter, and can safely be assizned to the same species.

Maxim diameter of preserved material 3-4 mm, Head rounded, with two
sinall lips in lateral positions; the two lateral and four submedian papillae de-
seribed by Baylis as characteristic of Crassicauda were not observed, Buceal
cavity strongly chitinized ; 0-14 mm, long; width from side to side 0-06 mm., from
dorsal to ventral walls 0-08 mm, Head, measured across base of buccal vavity,
0-48-0-53 mm. Ocsophagus total length 1-8 mm., first 0-3 mm. narrower than
the remainder. Nerve ring 0°35 mm. from head end, Lutestine 0-55 mm. wide
anteriorly, Egys extremely abundant, 40-42, by 23-28), thiek-shelled.

Our species exceeds C. crassicauda and (, qiliahiand in diameter and in the
recorded length of fragments, Its buceal cavity is relatively smaller than in any
species in which it has been deseribed. The eggs are mueh smaller than those re-
corded for other species. C, bewnetld appears to be a larger worm than C. MULE Ne,
its body diameter ranging to 8 mm,, but the fragments described were shorter,
(!. boopis is about as wide as Co magna, C. bennettiand C. boopis ave known only
from posterior ends, while we have seev ouly an anterior end from each collection.
The egg shells of C. magna do not show the thickened midregion which seems to
be characteristic of those of C, bennettt. Our species appears to be nearest to C.
boopis from the hump-haek whale, Megaptera boaps (= M. nodosa).

Crassivauda is restricted to cetaceans, C. magna being the sixth species to be
deseribed, Tt is to Baylis (1916; 1920; 1922) that we owe mnch of our knowledge
o! them.

The type C. craussicauda (Creplin, 1829) originally deseribed as a Filaria,
came trom the urethra of a northern rorqual identified as Balacna rostrata, but
which Baylis (1916, 145) showed to be probably Bulaenoptera physalus lu. Leiper
and Atkinson (1914; 1915) ereeted Crassicauda to receive a parasite regarded by
them as belonging to Creplin’s species, but obtained from a humpback whale,
Meyaptera nodosa Boun,, from northern New Zealand waters, Uamilton (1916,
182) recorded the presence of C. crassicauda or a closely-related species in the
nrinary duets of three species of rorquals, Balacnoplera physalus li, B, musculus

268 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

L,, and B. borealis Less., especially the first-named, in Scottish waters. Baylis
(1916) gave uw deseription of the head region of a long fragment taken from the
kidney of Cuvier’s whale, Ziphius cavirostris, the worm being regarded as (,
ayassicauda. Tn a later communication (1934, 404 and 413) the specimen was
assigned doubtlully to C. boopis, a species which Baylis (1920, 411) erected to
receive Leiper and Atkinson's species, the latter being shown to be distinet from
Creplin’s. The true (, crassicauda was re-described, and both species were figured,
material of the former having been collected from the blue whale, at Deception
Island, South Shetlands. The presence of the genus, represented possibly by a.
third species, was recorded by Baylis (1920, 418) from the kidney of Hyperooden
sp, from the South Orkneys, Additional information regarding C. crassieauda
from whales from South Georgia was published in 1922 by Baylis. Baylis’s mate-
rial from Hyperoodon was deseribed by Spaul ( 1926) as C. bennetti, We con-
sider it likely that Baylis’s species from Ziphius was C. bennetti rather than (,
hoops. Yorke and Maplestone (1926) republished Baylis’s figures of C, crassi-
nuula. Hoeppli and Hsti (1929, 38) described Onchacerca fuelleborni trom
nodules in the vagina of Neameris phocacnoides im China, but Baylis (1934, 405)
transferred it to Crassicauda, Joyeux and Baer (1931) recorded C, erassieanda
from the mammary gland of Tursiops tursio Fabr. from the Mediterranean, but
Skrjabin and Avdreewa (1954, 28) consider that the parasite probably did not be-
long to that species, and preferred to designate it as Crossivauda sp. In 1982 Bay-
lis, in his list of worms parasitie in Cetacea, mentioned (p, 410) that the original
host of C!. bennethi was probably Hyperoodon planifrans. Skrjabin and Andreewa
(1934) described (. giliakiana from the beluga, Delphinaptera leucas, from the
Sea of Olchotsk ; published a summary and figures of C. erassicauda, C. boapis, and

(, hennetti: and gave a key to these four species. Baylis (1920, 1922) had al-
ready expressed doubts regarding the correctness of assigning the genus to the
Filariidae, Yorke and Maplestone (1926, 487) erected Crassicaudinae (Filarii-
dae), but Skrjabin and Andreewa (1934) considered that the genus belonged to
the Spirurata, and placed it in a separate family, Crassicandidae (1934, 26-28).

Puvi.oporurium pe.puint (Bose) Beneden (fig, 11-16).

A number of cysts, ovate to eylindrical and measuring (when wieompressed )
75 to 13-5 mm. long by 5 to 6 mm, wide, were found in the blubber of the tail
vegion, A spherical form, 7-5 mim, in diameter, was also obtained. The smallest
cyst seen was only 4 by 3 mm. They all possessed an invaginated scolex and neck,
(ovether measuring 10 mm, long in a slightly Hattened eyst 18 mm. in length; and
9 mm, in one 15°5 mm, long, in whieh the head and anterior part of the neck

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON— PARASITES OF THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE 269

were bent to hecome directed toward the region of invagination. The seolex was
only slightly wider than the neck, the edges of the bothridia being considerably
folded. ‘The tissues of the cyst, except the invaginated portion and the outer body
wall, were composed of & very loose parenchyma. The width of the invaginated
neck region, including the denser tissue surrounding the cavity, was about one-
fifth to one seventh that of the lightly compressed cyst.

The bothridia varied in dimensions according to the state of contraction and
folding. They were usually about 1-15 mm, long by 0-5 mm. broad, with the mar-
gin thrown into rather deep folds, except anteriorly. Hach was provided in front
with a well-developed sucker 0-16 to 0-2 mm, in diameter when uncompressed,
he front end of the scolex projected as a low dome with a very weak apical muscle
plug seen only in fayourable preparations, and measuring 0-07 mm. in diameter.
The neck showed definite transverse musculature, closely arranged and beginning
at about one-quarter its length from the head, and becoming more marked as it
approached the bladder,

The excretory system was characteristic. The terminal bladder was usnally
somewhat twisted. he ventral and dorsal canals of each side subdivided and
underwent anastomoses, so that four somewhat ladder-like plexuses were formed,
the narrower dorsal vessels more or less accompanying the wider ventral canals.
The latter anastomosed to a greater extent than the dorsals, The arrangement of
part of the system of one side in the vicinity of the bladder is shown in figs 15 and
16. The plexuses extended forwards in the tissues of the eyst almost to the
anterior end, where only the four chief canals passed over into the wall of the
invaginated region, the two canals of each side then becoming very closely approxi-
mated and thrown into very close zigzags. These canals formed a serics of loops
in the seolex, the wider canals penetrating the bothridia, the arrangement being
shown in fie, 14,

The form of the bothridia indicates that the larva belongs to Ph yllobothrinm
and not to Monoryyma. iy order to determine its relationships more clogely a sur-
vey of the recorded occurrences of similar cysts in cetaceans is necessary,

Bose (in Buffon, Tist. Nat., 3, 1802) reported finding a larval cestode, named
by him Hyrlatis delphinit, in fatty tissue of Delphinus delphis. Laennee, in 1804,
regarded the hydatid of the dolphin as Cysticercus delphini. Rudolphi (1810,265)
mentioned Redi’s earlier record of cysts in the viscera and intestine of D, del phis,
and placed them as Vermis delphini-delphis amongst doubtful genera, In 1819
Rudolphi referred to the same reeord (1819, 186 and 799), using the term df elphini
under Dubiun, but Bose’s form was placed by him (1810, 236; 1819, 182) amongst
the doubtful species as Cysticercus delphin’, though he eave a short account. of it

270 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

(1819, 551) based on badly preserved material collected by Chamisso, no loeality
or host being mentioned.

In 1837 Bennett referred to the occurrence of numerous eysts of a species of
eysticereus in the blubber of the sperm whale (cachalot). In 1850 Diesing (185),
617), used the term (Mephalocotyleum Delphini delphidis Rud. for the parasite re-
ferred to by Redi and by Rudolphi (1819, 186) ; but placed (1850, 493) Hydatis
delphini Bose and Cysticercus delphint Rud, (1810, 236; 1819, 182 and 551) under
the latter name as species inquirendaé. He also referred (1850, 493) to Bennett "9
oysts as Cyslicerous Balaenae mysticeti Bennett, apparently having readincorrectly
Beunett’s statement regarding the host. Diesing, in a later work (1864), gave 4
brief summary regarding C. delphini from Delphinus delphis (p. 63); he also re-
comnized hig error regarding the host for Bennett’s eyst, and ealled it (p. 67) C.
physclais Bennett,

Cobbold (1879, 421-2) referred to some of the foregoing records as well as to
some relating to (he presence of monostomes in the body wall of cetaceans, remark-
ing on the possibility of such trematodes being confused with eysticerci, The oe-
eurrence of Phyllobotirium larvae in Physcter tursia (apparently Turstops (ursta,
Le. 7. truncatus) was also noted. Te also mentioned that Van Beneden (1870)
considered (. delphini to be an immature stage of Phy/lobothrium delphini found
abundantly in a specimen of D. delphis in 1868. This latier material had been
described by Gervais (1870, 779) as Stenotaenia delphini, this author referring in
1885 to Phyllabothrinm delphini from Delphinus tursio. Beneden, in 1888, re-
corded finding an agamous Phyllobothrium in the subeutaneous tissues of Ziphtus
camivostiis. Moniez (1889) described as a new species Taenia grimalidit, in its
cysticercus stage, which occurred ina dolphin, the parasite possessing a very long
neck, but the account was incomplete, Leidy (1891, 418) gave a very brief ac-
count of Phyllobothrium inchoatwm from the blubber of Mesapladon sowerbiensis
(ie. WM. bidens). Stossich, in 1898, reported Neolex delphini from the reetium of
Grampus griseus in the Adriatic.

Linton (1905) gave a deseription of some eysts from Lagenorhynchus aoutis
from New England waters (U.S.A.). There were two kinds present, the smaller
belonging to Phyllobethrium, while the larger were deseribed as Taenia chamis-
sont. He stated that Rudolphi’s Cysticercus delphini (1810) appeared to belong
to Phyllobothrium, while his C. delphing (1819, 236) was almost certainly identical
with 7. chamissonii. Linton regarded the latter as being an immature stage of a
species of T'aenia or closely-related genus, whose adult condition was more likely
to be reached ina mammal such as the killer whale, Orcinus orea, A feature of his
species was the presence of a relatively very long invaginated region. Ie was evi-
dently unaware of Moniez’s observations.

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—PARASITES OF THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE 271

Baylis (119) gave a detailed account of Moniez’s cysticercus, assigning it to
Monorygma, its nearest known species being M. eleqans Monticelli, 1890, as de-
seribed by Zsehokke (1889) under M, perfectum Dies. He also stated that Steno-
taenia delphini Gervais appeared to be identical with, or closely related to, the
eysticerens. Baylis’s material was obtained from Lagenorhynchus deutus from
Hnelish waters,

In 1924 Meggitt assigned to Monerygma Taenia grimalddi Moniex, T, chimis-
sont Linton, and Stenatacnia delphini Gervais, while Cysticercus physeteris Dies.
was placed mmder Phyllobothrium. Southwell (1925, 152), in his monograph of
the Tetraphyllidea, republished Leidy’s account of Phyllobothrium inchoatum,
and stated that the latter could not be differentiated from P. lactuea. Te treated
Monorygma Diesiny (1863) usa synonym of Phyllebothriuwmn Beneden 1849, and
stated that Cyshicercus Taenae grimaldii probably belonged to Phyllaboathriwn
(p.165). He placed P. delphind Gervais (i.e. Taenia chamissoni Linton) amonest
the doubtful species (p, 182).

Baylis (1926) recorded the occurrence of (. Taeniae grimaldii in a pigmy
sperm whale, Kogia ap. ? breweeps, from southern India, and reported that (.
delplring Rud. (1819, nee, 1810), as well as the eysts deseribed by Moniez, Gervais,
and Linton, were all closely related, and possibly identical, forms, In 1932 Baylis
published his valnable list of worms recorded as parasitic in Cetacea,

We may now review the facta noted above. Tt is obvious that there are two
distinet types of Phyllobothriid eysis to be found in cetaceans, both of them oriei-
nally deseribed with the specific name delphini—C. delphini (Bose, 1802), Rud,
1810 (perhaps Laennec, 1804), and C. delphing Rud., 1819. The former belongs
to Phiyllobathriwm, and includes also Phyllabolhraum sp. of Linton (1905, 819)
and P. delphing Beneden (1870). C. delphint Rud, 1819, is apparently the same
as Taena grimalda and T, chamissom, and has been adequately described by
Baylis. This latter group represents the larval stage of a species of Monorygma,
and it seems that Moniez’s namie is the earliest available, ie. WM. grimaldit (Moniez)
Meggitt, see Rudolphi’s (1819) and Gervais’? names are invalidated by Bose
(1802) and Rudolphi (1810). Slenateenia Gervais is a synonym of Moneryqma,
To which of these two groups the other eysts, to which some form of scientific name
has been given, should be assigned, cannot be determined as yet, Most of them are
nomina nuda, Baylis listed P. physeteris (Dies.) as possibly identieal with P.
delphint Bose.

Southwell’s statement (1925) that P. inehootum Leidy is a synonym of P,
luctuca, is not supported by our observations. Leidy’s very brie! aecount ean be
applied to our cysts, and the form of the scolex and of the bothridia in our speei-
mens is not that of 2, acted, but resembles more closely that of 2. wntlalerale

272 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Southwell (1925, 155), syn. P. thridax Zschokke (1888, nee Beneden, 1850), but
the hothridia are much more elongate and narrowed than in the European species.
P. inchoatum can be regarded provisionally as a synonym of P. delphint (Bose).
We attribute our cysts to the latter species.

Kogia breviceps is now known to harbour two kinds of Phyllobothritd eysts—
those belonging to P. delphini and to Monorygma grimaldii. The adult stage of
each must oceur in an elasmobranch, probably one of the larger sharks such as the
widely distributed white pointer (Careharodon carcharias L.) and tiger shark
(Galeocerdo arcticus Fab.), or perhaps the Greenland shark, Seymnus or Som-
niosus glacialis and its southern representative, which is not as yet identified
definitely. (+)

Linton (1922) described Phyllobothrium tumidum from Carcharodon car-
charias and Iswrus dekayi from Massachusetts waters, The form of the scolex ani
of the bothridia is essentially the same as that figured by us (compare Linton’s
fiz. 15 and our fig. 14). He believed that. cestode larvae found in aquicl and de-
seribed by Leidy in 1887 as Taenia loliginis, and transferred in 1890 to Telra-
hathrium or to Phyllobothrium, represented early stages of the parasite. He re-
corded finding this type of larva in cephalopods and various fish, and noted its
very close resemblance to Beneden’s figure of the scolex of P. del phini Ben., 1870,
from the blubber of a porpoise. We regard P. tumidwm Linton as the adult stage
of P, delphini (Bose) Beneden, the latter name having priority; aud consider
that. P. inchoatum Leidy is also a synonym.

It may be pointed out that seals in the Antarctic and Subantarctie may con:
tain large Phyllobothrium cysts (distinet from, but closely related to, P. d elphini)
in the blubber (Johnston, 1937, 21-24), while a species of Monarygma, M. mac-
quariae Johnston (1937, 24-32), has been deseribed from a southern Somniasus
sp., the cestode later being considered (1987, 99) as identical with MM. maga
(Hart, 1986) from the Greenland shark, Large sharks like the white and tiger
sharks are known to prey on seals in the vicinity of Port Lincoln, South Australia,
and could probably devour dolpbins and small whales.

Blainville, in 1825, published a short account of a smooth cyst found at Havre,
France, encysted in the blubber of Delphinus dalei, which Cobbold (1879, 421)
stated was a synonym of Micropteron sowerbiensis, i.e. Mesoplodon bidens. The
parasite was named Monostomum delphini by Diesing (1850, 390) and M, blawn-
villei by Cobbold in 1860, The Jatter (1879) referred to the possibility of the
species occurring in Hyperoadon and Lagenorhynchus, aud to the possibility of
monostomes and eysticerci being confused. Brandes, i 1892, placed Diesing’s

(1) Waite, H.R. Fishes, Austr, Autaret. Exp. Rep., Ser, 0.1, 1916, 51,

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—PARASITES OF THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE 273

species under Monestomulum. Price (1932, 57) republished Blainville’s account,
stated that the organism was not. likely to be a larval monostome, and suggested
that the worm was the metacerearia stage of Alaria or a related trematode genus,
and accordingly transferred it to Agamodistomum. It seems to us that the species
may have been a Phylobothriid cysticereus, perhaps P. delphini (Bose).

REFERENCES.

Baylis, H, A. (1916) : On Crassicanda erassicauda (Crepl.) and its hosts. A.J.
NH. (8), 17, 144-48.

Baylis, H. A, (1919): A remarkable eysticereus from a rare dolphin. A.M.N.H.
(9), 3, 417-24,

Baylis, H, A. (1920) ; On the Classification of the Ascaridae IT, ete. Parasitol., 12,
2538-64.

Baylis, H. A. (1920) : Observations on the Genus Crassicanda, A.M.N-II. (9), 4
410-19.

Baylis, 1. A. (1922) : Note on the Tabitat and Structure of Crassicauda, Para-
sitol., 14, 9-12.

Baylis, I. A. (1926) : Note on the Occurrence of ‘Cysticereus Taeniae grimaldii’’
ina New Host. A.W.N.H. (9), 18, 665-67.

Baylis, H. A. (1952); A List of the Worms Parasitic in Cetacea, Discovery Re-
ports, 6, 393-4118.

Bennett, F, D. (1857): On the Natural History of the Spermaceti Whale, P.Z.S.,

?

1837, 39-42,

Cobbold, T. 8, (1879) : Parasites: A Treatise of the Entozoa of Man and Animals.

Creplin, F. C. (1829) : Filariae et Monostomi speciam noyam in Balaena rostrata
repertam, Verh. dh, Leop, Carol, Ak. Natur. (Bonn.), 14 (2), 871-82.

Diesing, K. M. (1850-1): Systema helminthun.

Diesing, K, M. (1864): Revision der Cephalocotyleen, Abt. Paramecocotyleen,
Sb. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, 48, 200-345,

Diesing, K, M. (1864): Revision der Cephalocotyleen, Abt. Gyelovotyleen. Sh.
hk. Ak. Wiss. Wien, 49, 357-430,

Gervais, H. (1870): Sur les entozoaires des dauphins. C.R. Acad. Sei. Paris, 71,
779.

Hamilton, J. E. (1916); |Report on Relmullet Whaling Slation.| Brit. Assoe.
Rep, (1915), 124-46,

Hoeppli, R. and Tsii, H, F. (1929) : Webninthologische Beitriige aus Fukien und
Chekiang. Arch f. Schiffs. u. Trapen-Hyy., 33, Beiheft 1, 48 pp.

274 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Johnston, T. H, (1937): The Cestoda of the Australasian Antarctic Expedition.
Austr. Antarct. Exp. Sci, Rep., Ser. C, 10 (4), 74 pp.

Joyeux, C. and Baer, J. G. (1931): Sur la présence du nématode Crassicauda
erassicauda (Creplin, 1829) chez un dauphin des cétes de la France, Bull,
Soc. Path, exot., 24, 198-2038.

Leidy, J. (1891) : Notices of entozoa. Pr. Acad. Nat, Sci, Philad. (3), 20, 410-18.

Leiper, R. T, and Atkinson, E. , (1914) : Helminthes of the British Antarctic Ex-
pedition, 1910-1913. P.Z.S., 1914, 222-26.

Leiper, R. T. and Atkinson, E. L, (1915) : Parasitic Worms. Brit, Antarct. (Terra
Nova) Exp. Nat. Hist. Rep. Zool., 2 (3), 19-60.

Linton, E. (1905) : Notes on Cestode Cysts, Taenia chamissonii, New Species from
a Porpoise. Pr. U.S. Nat. Mus., 28, 819-822,

Linton, EB. (1922) : A New Cestode from the Man-eater and Mackerel Sharks. Pr.
U.S. Nat. Mus., 61 (12), 1-16.

Meggitt, F. J. (1924) : The Cestodes of Mammals, London.

Moniez, R. (1889) : Sur la larve du Taenia vrimaldii, nov. sp., parasite du dauphin.
C. R, Acad. Sci., Paris, 109, 825.

Price, E, W, (1932) : The Trematode Parasites of Marine Mammals. Pr, U.S, Nat.
Mus., 81 (13), 68 pp.

Rudolphi, C. A. (1810): Entozoorum sive vermium intestinalium historia nat-
uralis. Amsterdam.

Rudolphi, @, A. (1819) : Entozoorum Synopsis. Berlin,

Skrjabin, K. I. and Andreewa, N. K. (1934) : Un nouveaux nématode, Crassicauda
giliakiana n. sp., trouvé dans reins de Delphinoptera lencos. Ann. Para-
sital., 12, 15-28.

Southwell, T. (1925): A monograph of the Tetraphyllidea, with Notes on the
Related Cestodes. Mem. Liverpool Sch. Trop. Med., 2, 368 pp.

Spaul, E. A. (1926) : Crassicauda bennetti, sp. n., a New Nematode Parasite from
the Bottle-nosed Whale (ILyperoodon). AWW.N.A. (9), 17, 581-85.

Stiles, C. W. and Hassall, A. (1899) : Iuternal Parasites of the Fur Seal. Rep, Fur
Seal Investigations. Washinglon, D.C., 3, 99-177.

Yorke, W. and Maplestone, P. A. (1926) : The Nematode Parasites of Vertebrates.

STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA

(1) THE GENUS CERADOCUS

By KEITH SHEARD, HONORARY ASSISTANT IN ZOOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This revision has been made possible by grants from the Trustees of the Science and
Industries Endowment Fund of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research and
from the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum and Art Gallery of South
Australia.

Acknowledgements are also due to the Council of the Canterbury University College,
New Zealand, for the loan of the whole of the extensive Chilton collection of
Amphipoda ; to the Trustees of the Australian Museum, Sydney, for the loan of their
collection, including many of Haswell’s type specimens; to the University of Sydney
for the loan of the Macleay collection; to the Trustees of the National Museum,
Melbourne, for the loan of the Sayce collection; and to Mr. H. M. Hale, Director of
the South Australian Museum, whose extensive collections from South Australian
waters provide a basis for these studies.

STUDIES in AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA
(1) Tue Genus CERADOCUS

By KEITH SHEARD, Honorary Asstsran‘r IN ZooLocy, SourH AusrraLiaAn Museum.
Text-fig. 1-8.

Tus revision has been made possible by grants from the Trustees of the Science
and Industries Endowment Fund of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Re-
search and from the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum and Art
Gallery of South Australia.

Acknowledgments are also due to the Council of the Canterbury University
College, New Zealand, for the loan of the whole of the extensive Chilton collection
of Amphipoda; to the Trustees of the Australian Museum, Sydney, for the loan
of their collection, including many of Haswell’s type specimens ; to the University
of Sydney for the loan of the Macleay collection ; to the Trustees of the National
Museum, Melbourne, for the loan of the Sayce collection; and to Mr. H. M. Hale,
Director of the South Australian Museum, whose extensive collections from South
Australian waters provide a basis for these studies.

This paper is the first of a series redescribing early Australian type Gamma-
ridea, together with related forms collected later. Keys to the species and genera
dealt with will be given where possible, but it cannot be sufficiently stressed that
these do not necessarily express relationships, but are designed to permit workers
to effect a preliminary sorting-out of material.

The Ceradocus group of genera appears to consist of the following, which may
be separated by the key given below:

Metaceradocus (Chevreux 1925, p. 304); Ceradocoides (Nicholls 1938, p.
123) ; Paraceradocus (Stebbing 1899, p. 426) ; Ceradocopis (Schellenberg 1926,
p. 365) ; Ceradocus (A. Costa 1853, p. 170) ; Quadrivisio (Stebbing 1907, p. 160)
(= Pseudoceradocus Shoemaker 1933, p. 11); Bathyceradocus (Pirlot 1934, p.
223).

Crrapocus Group.

Gammaridae with the following characters (adapted from Stebbing 1906, p.
364).

Pleon segments 4-6 not coalesced; pleopods with two rami; uropod 3 with
two elongate rami; telson cleft; antenna 1, accessory flagellum of more than 2

“

276 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

segments; body not at all or scarcely carinate, without groups of dorsal spinules ;

wropod 3 rami not very unequal.

a. Maxilla 1, inner plate setose at apex; maxilla 2, inner plate
setose along inner margin.
b. Antenna 1, shorter than antenna 2
(M. perdentatus Chevreux. Senegal.)
bb. Antenna 1, longer than antenna 2.
«. Peraeopods 8-5 with bases linear .. = ts
(C. chiltoni Nicholls, Commonwealth Bay, Mac-
quarie Island.)
ec. Peraeopods 3-5 with bases expanded £,
(P. miersi (Pfeiffer); South Georgia; ? P. mic-
ramphopus Stebbing, East Australia.)
aa. Maxilla 1 and 2, inner plate setose along inner margin.
d. Uropod 3, outer ramus 2 segmented; lower lip without
inner lobes 39 an 4 4 =
(C. kerquelent Schellenberg, Kerguelen.)
dd. Uropod 3, outer ramus normal, lower lip with inner
plates.
e. Side plate, gnathopod 1 produced forwards to an
acute ane.
f. Pleon segments postero-dorsally multidentate
(Denticeradocus ).
C. (D.) rubromaculatus (Stimpson), C. (D.)
raomsayi (Haswell), ©. (D.) serrata
(Spence Bate), C. (D.) sellickensis, C.
(D.) barrierensis (Australian seas); (.
(D.) chiltoni (New Zealand); C, CD.)
chevreuxt (Pacific), C. (D.) barnardi
(South Africa).
ff. Pleon segments not postero-dorsally multi-
dentate. Ceradocus (Ceradocus).
C. (C.) orchestiipes A. Costa (Mediterranean,
Bermudas) ; @. (C.) semiserratus (Bate)
(North Atlantic); C. (C.) torelli (Goés)
(Arctic Ocean); C. (C.) parkeri and C.
(@.) colet Kunkel (Bermudas).
C, (C.) baffini Stephenson (off Baffin Land)
should probably be referred to at least a
sub-genus.
ce, Side plate, gnathopod 1, rounded.
g. Mandible, palp, segment IIT longer than seg-
ment Il. Quadrivisio. Q. bengalensis
Stebbing (Pt, Canning, Bengal; brackish
water, Zanzibar). Q. lutzi (Shoemaker )
(British Guiana, West Indies),
ve. Mandible, palp, segment [TT shorter than seg-
ment Il. Bathyceradocus. B. stephensent
Pirlot (Hast Indies).

Metaceradocus

Ceradocoides

Paurdceradocus

Ceradocopsis

Ceraducus

SHUEARD—STUDTES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 277

The group as a whole may be readily separated from the Maera-Elusmopus
eroup by the setose character of the inner plates of maxillae 1 and ¥. In this con-
nection, the faleate segment LIL of the mandibular palp of Metaceradocus and the
linear segment IIL of Ceradocopsis are of interest. Through the kindness of Pro-
fessor GB, Nicholls | am able to figure (Fig, 5, N-O) the mandible of Cerado-
coules chiliow Nicholls, which shows, in my opinion. the partial development of a
process on segment [ of the palp distally.

Crrapocus A. Costa.
(For references see Stebbing 1906, p. 490, and 1910, p..598.)

The examination of series of speeimens related to Cerudocus rubromaculatus
(Stimps.) makes it necessary to divide the genus into two sections, as follows:

(a) Ceradocus (Ceradocus) : Ceradocus as defined by Stebbing (1906, p. 430),
with the addition of: pleon segments with postero-dorsal margins not multi-
dentienlate. Genotype Ceradocus (Ceradocus) orchestiipes A, Costa.

(b) Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) sub-gen. noy.: Ceradocus as defined by Stebbing
(1906, p. 480), with the addition of : maxilla 1, outer plate with 9 spine-teeth,
palp with 18 spines; pleon segments with postero-dorsal margins multiden-
ticulate; mandible with segment | of palp always produeed on inner margin
distally.

Tt may be noted that im Stebbing’s definition cited above, he states that gnatho-
pod 2, among other appendages, are as in Maera, ic. gnathopod 2 usually much
the larger in the male, This is not strictly true for the subgenus Denticeradacus,
as here gnathopod 2 is usually of a comparative size in the two sexes, with that of
the female occasionally attaining the larger relative size in aged specimens.

Key To THH Seuemws or Curapocus (DenvTicmurapocus).

4, Pleon segments 4 and 5 with a large medio dorsal tooth,
b. Telson; each half with 3 apical spines; 1 lateral hair.
CO. (D.) capensis,
bb. Telson; each half with 5 apical spines; 1 lateral hair.
C'. (D.) ramsayi (Haswell).
aa. Pleon segments 4 and 5; evenly dentate.
c. Telson; each half with 2 apical spines, 1 lateral hair.
C. (D.) rubromaculatus (Stimpson).
ec, Telson; each half with 4 apieal spines.
d, One lateral hair on margin of telson,

e. Mandible; palp, segment LI about 2/3 segment IT;
pleon side plates 1 and 2 well toothed above aud
below.

CU. (D.) sellickensis sp. nov.

278 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ec. Mandible; palp, segment [IT sub-equal to segment 1;
pleon side plates 1 and 2 barely serrate.
plates 1 and 2 barely serrate.
C. (D.) serrata (Bate).
dd. Two lateral hairs on margin of telson.
C. (D.) chilton, sp. nov.
eee. Telson, each half with 5 apical spines, 1 lateral hair.
C. (D.) chevrewxi sp. nov.

The species are fairly uniform as to their maximum recorded length, which is
about 25 mm.

The specimen deseribed by Miers (1884, p. 567, pl, 52, D, d) from the Sey-
chelle Islauds under the name of Maera diversimanus is undoubtedly to be placed
in this subgenus, and had best retain the name Ceradocus (Denticeradocus )
diversimanus (Miers).

Crrapocus (DENTICERADOCUS) SELLICKENSIS Sp, Nov,

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (nee Stimpson) ; Hale, 1927, p. 314; 1929, pp. 215-214
excluding figs. 210=C. (D.) ramsuyi (Haswell), 211—(C. (D.) serrata
Bate) ; Sheard, 1936, p. 177, fig. 4.

Description. Body elongate, head nearly equal to first two segments com-
bined, inter-antennal angle produced and rounded, separated trom lateral angle
by asinus, Hyes small, sub-oval, dark.

Antenna 2 with peduncle failing to reach to the end of the pedunele of an-
tenna 1; the whole antenna reaching just beyond this point; gland cone just fails
to reach next joint, ultimate segment of pedunele 4/5 of penultimate.

Mouth parts; upper lip rounded, lower lip with small inner lobes ; mandible,
palp, segment I with pronounced hinge-like process on inner end, segment IT long
and setose on inner margin, segment LL] cone-shaped with long setae, about 2/3
segment I.

Maxilla 1; outer plate with 9 spine-teeth, palp with 13 spines, inner plate
fringed with long hairs to base of immer margin; this plate appears to vary slightly
from the shape figured to nearly the normal subquadrate.

Maxilla 2; fringed along inner margin of inner plate with two rows of setae.

Side plates; first a little the decpest with its anterior angle forwardly drawn
out to a sharp point, lightly fringed with small hairs along the lower margin;
second and third rounded; fourth not excavate behind; fifth, sixth, and seventh,
small, bilobed.

Gnathopod 1; small, basis a little indented on the inner margin ; varpus, ratio
of length to width = 2:1; propodus, ratio of length to width = 1-7:1.

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA

Fig. 1.

9.

a)

Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) sellickensis (type ¢): A, antenna 1; B, antenna 2;
C, eye lobe and basal joints antenna D, mandible, palp; E, mandible, cutting edge; F,
maxilla 1, spines of outer plate; G, maxilla 1, inner plate; H, maxilla 2; I, gnathopod 1; J,
gnathopod 1, hand; K, gnathopod 1, defining angle palm; L, gnathopod 2; M, gnathopod 2, palm;

N, peraeopod 1; O, peraeopod 1, dactyl; P—R, peraeopods 3-5; S—U, pleon side plates 1-3;
V, uropod 3; W, telson. (K.S. del.)

280 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

tnathopod 2; enlarged in both sexes, basis stout, propodus enlarged, pau
transverse, defined by a toothJike process (which is occasionally much enlarged )
not toothed, but in older specimens occasionally becoming rugose, no differentia-
tion between the sexes,

Peraeopods 1 and 2; slender, shorter than remainder, basis the stoutest, not
indentated along inner margin but with several small groups of hairs.

Peraeopods 3-5; basis expanded and lightly serrate; the hinder margius
produced to a simple, acute angle in peraeopods 4 and 5,

Peracon smooth on dorsal surface, pleon serrate along the postero-dorsal mar-
wing of the segments, pleon side plates 1 to 8 serrate above and below. Uropods
1 and 2 reach just beyond the pedunele of uropod 3; rani subequal, slender, the
dorsal margins of these pleon segments serrate.

Uropod 3; pedunele short, rami lanceolate and elongate but irregular in out-
line, spinulose and truncate at the tips.

Telson; cleft, with divergent lobes, each lobe bearing 3 large and ove small
apical spine, with a small hair midway on each lateral margin. Lranchiae ;
medinm size, sac-like, inner wall thick.

Type (Reg. No. C, 2121, 8.A. Museunt).

Loc. Viyonne Bay, Kangaroo Island (H. M. Hale and N, B, Tindale) ; Sel-
lick’s Beach, St, Vincent Gulf (H. M. Hale, Mar., 1936), (1. M. Male and K.
Sheard, Nov., 1936, Jan., 1937), K. Sheard (Apr., 1939), Port Willunga, St. Viu-
cent, Gulf (EL. M. Hale, Mar., 1937), (JI. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Jan., 1939) ;
Marino, St. Vincent Gulf (C. Baker, 1910) ; Weeding’s Reef, Moonta Bay, Spencer
Gulf (B. J. Weeding, Noy., 1938) ; Investigator Straits (Dr. J. C. Vereo, 1910) ;
Coffin Bay (J. 'T. Mortlock, 1938).

Crrapocus (DENTICERADOCUS) RUKROMACULATUS (Stimp. ).

Gammarus rubromaculatus Stimpson, 1855, p. 394.
Moera rubromaculata (Stimpson) Haswell, 1880, p. 267, pl. X, fig. 4, 1882, p. 225;
1885, p. 10d, pl. XV, figs. 5-12.
Cerudocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson), Della Valle, 1893, p. 720 (part).
Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson), Stebbing, 1906, p. 480 (part); ! 1910,
p. a9s.
2 Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Barnard, 1931, p. 124.
Stimpson’s original description is as follows:
“49. Gammarus rubromaculdtus. Rather large, spotted with erimson above,
white below. Eyes sub-ovate. Superior antennae half as long as the body, imferior

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 281

ones much shorter and more slender, First pair of hands very small and weak;
those of the second pair large, compressed, and with a sharp spine at the middle of
the lower edge where the finger terminates. Abdomen exceeding the thorax in
length or at least equalling it, the appendages excluded. Last pair of eaudal sty-
lets half as long as the abdomen; their rami long and broad, equal and spinulated
along their edges. Length half an inch. Found on muddy bottom in the cireum-
littoral zone.

Big. 2, Ceradoeus (Denticeradocus) rubromaculatus (Stimpson); (Haswell’s original
specimen ) (9); A, head and antennae; B, upper lip; C, mandible, palp; D, maxilla 1; 1, gnath-
opod 1; F-G, guathopod 2; MH, peraeopad 1; I, peravopod ; J, peraeopod 5; K—M, pleon side-
plates 1-3; N-P, uropods 1-3; Q—R, telson, (KK.S. del.)

“Hab, Australia, at Port Jackson.’’

Haswell (1880, p. 267, pl. X, fig. 4), deseribes and figures with reasonable
acenracy a specimen which he attributes to Stimpson’s species from the same
locality. In the same paper (p. 268, pl. X, fig. 5) he deseribes a new species Moera
spinosa, trom Tasmania, evidently haying overlooked Bate’s Megamoera serrala
from the saine locality.

282 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Earlier in the same paper (p. 264) he ascribes provisionally to Melita, a new
species (M (?) ramsayi) with uropod 3 missing. In a later note (p. 385) this
species is placed in Moera, Haswell (1884, p. 109) then unites the three species
and includes Mocra festive Chilton in the synonomy. This amalgamation is made
on the form of gnathopod 2, Stebbing (1906, p. 430) follows the usage then eur-
rent, but later (1910, p, 643) regards the position as still doubtful. Chilton (1916,
p. 359) separates M. festiva Chilton from this synonomy.

The confusion was probably caused, in the first place, by the fact that Stebbing
(1888, p. 1008, plates 95, 96) gave a composite description, under the name MM.
rubromaculatus Stimpson, of two species, MW. ramsayi Haswell, and the one which
is deseribed in this paper as Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) capensis. Later authors,
lacking material, have had no option but to ascribe speeimens to this species, ar
the tradition has grown up that Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimp.) is a cosmo-
politan species. Were the forms pelagic, this possibility would of course have to
be very seriously regarded, but as they are littoral, such an easy way out cannot
be taken without very serious consideration.

For my part, after studying Haswell’s MS. notes, 1 am reasonably certam
that he deseribed a specimen which specifically conforms to Stimpson’s type.
Tlaswell’s specimen is here refigured, and such parts as are uecessary are re-
described, In the Port Jackson material, it is easy to find specimens, male and
female, immature and adult, which vary around the type specimen, and whieh
do not cross over into the ramsayr form,

Actually i would appear that here we have a ease of two closely-related popu-
lations existing side by side. There is some evidence to show that their breeding
rates and breeding seasons are slightly different, but this is inconclusive, At all
events, in life, they are readily distinguished since C. (D.) rubromaculatus
(Stimp.) is spotted with crimson, while @, (D.) ramsayi (Haswell) is banded, In
littoral crustacea generally, colour patterns appear to be an unreliable guide, but
in this case there is a high degree of correlation between the colour and other
characters.

Additions to Iaswell’s Deseription (1880, p. 267) :

Mouth parts; in general like C. (D.) sellickensis, but mandibular palp with
segments I and LIT subequal; maxilla 1 with iimer plate more truly subquadrate,
wider than deep.

Gnathopod 1 with side plate produced; basis with seattered hairs on hoth
margins; ¢arpus, ratio length to width — 2:1; propodus, ratio length to width
=1°6;1.

Gnathopod 2; like (. (D.)sclliekensis bul palm more oblique; as in the former
species no specimens have been found with a tendency to the development of teeth
on the paln.

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 283

Peraeopods 1 and 2; basis indented and setose along inner margin, merus
very little expanded, almost linear.

Peraeopods 3—5; basis moderately expanded, hinder edge produced to longer
point than in the preceding species.

Pleon side plates 1-3 well toothed above and below; 4 and 5 reenlarly dentate,
no large teeth.

Uropods 1 and 2 reaching to end of pedunele of 8; uropod 3 with rami lanceo-
late and elongate but strong and wide. Telson with two apical spines and one short
lateral hair on each half.

Branchiae of medium size, sac-like.

Loc, Port Jackson (Australian Museum, Reg. Nos. G. 5391, P. 2151, P. 3479.
P. 3480-3481 (part), P. 3489).

Crerapocus (DenTIcERADOCTS) RAMSAYI (Haswell).

Melita ? ramsayi aswell, 1880, p. 264, pl. X, fig. 1.

Moera ramsayt (Haswell), 1880, p. 354; 1882, p. 253.

Moecra rubromacuatus (Stimps.) Iaswell, 1885, p. 105, pl. XV, figs. 5-12 (part).

Maera rubromaculata (Stimpson) Stebbing, 1888, p. 1008 (part), pl. XCV A,
pl. XCVI B.

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Della Valle, 1898, p. 720 (part).

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Stebbing, 1906, p. 431 (part).

Maera vramsayt Haswell, Stebbing, 1910, p. 642.

Ceradocus rubromaculatus var, ramsayt (Haswell), Chilton, 1923, p. 94, fig, 4.

Ceradocus rubramaculatus non, Stimpson, Hale, 1929, fig. 210.

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson), Sheard, 1937, p. 24 (part).

To Haswell’s description (1880, p. 264) is added the following :

Antenna 1; peduncle relatively stout, a little shorter than that of antenna 2.
Kye sub-oval, Mouth parts; of same general type as in C. (D.) sellickensis, but
mandible or palp with segment I] longer than segment I, hinge provess rounded.

Maxilla 1 with spines of palp and outer plate weak, inner plate like that of
C. (D.) rubromaculatus (Stimpson) ; maxilla 2 with setae very long, plates wid-
ened. Lower lip setose.

Gnathopod 1 with side plate forwardly pointed, but not very mueh outdrawn ;
basis, with margins not indented ; earpus, ratio of length to width, 2:1; propodus,
ratio of length to breadth, 1-5: 1.

Gnathopod 2; one side, the right in the specimen described, but generally the
left, enlarged, with the propodus well expanded, and always toothed on the palm

284 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 3. Ceradoeus (Denticeradocus) ramsayi (Haswell), (type ¢): A, head; B, lower lip;
C, mandibles; D, maxilla 1; 1, maxilla 2; F, maxilliped; G-H, gnathopod 1; I, gnathopod 2,
right; J, gnathopod 2 right, palm; K, gnathopod 2, left; L, gnathopod 2, palm; M-N, peraeo-
pods 1-2; O, peraeon segment 7, pleon segments 1-3; Q, peraecopod 5; R-T, uropods 1-3; U,
telson; V, dorsal outline, pleon segments 4-5; W, gnathopod 2, hand, Port Stephens specimen,
immature ¢. (KS. del.)

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 285

in older specimens; sometimes in even immature specimens, the toothing may be
solid across the palm or sometimes indented by the pressure of the finger (as
figured) ; where teeth are present they are always three in number between the
large defining tooth and the hinge.

Peraeopods 1 and 2 slender, as is usual, the basis not indented but furnished
with a few setae on the inner margin; the merus is moderately expanded on its
forward edge; 3-5, basis expanded, hind margin distally produced to an obtuse
angle.

Pleon side plates; the first, with two very small teeth below, none above; the
second with two slightly larger teeth below, slightly serrate above; and the third
with two larger teeth below, more definitely serrate above. In this respect, the
species is very different from C. (D.) rubromaculatus (Stimp.) (well serrate above
and below on pleon side plates 1-3) and from C. (D.) capensis (side plate 2 smooth
above, side plate 3 well serrate above and below). Pleon segment 4 dorsally denti-
culate, the mesial tooth well produced; 5 smooth, but with a prominent mesial
tooth ; 6 produced mesially to a small tooth.

Uropods 1 and 2 reaching just to the end of the peduncle of 3, slender. Uro-
pod 3 with rami lanceolate and elongate, fairly strong.

Telson with four long and one short spine apically, and one short plumose hair
on the mid-lateral margin of each half.

Loc. Port Jackson (W. A. Haswell) ; off Eden, N.S.W., 25-30 fathoms (A.
Livingstone, Apr., 1922) ; off Norah Head, Neweastle, N.S.W., 26-38 fathoms (I.
A. MeNeill, June, 1921) (Chilton collection) ; Port Stephens; Balmoral, Port Jack-
son (T'. Whitelegge) (Australian Museum, Reg. Nos. P. 5876, P. 3480-3481 part).

Crrapocus (DENTICERADOCUS) SERRATA (Bate).
Megamaera serrata Bate, 1862, p. 226, pl. XX XIX, fig. 5.
Moera spinosa Haswell, 1880, p. 268, pl. X, fig. 5; 1882, p. 257; 1885, p. 105, figs.
5-12 (part).
Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Della Valle, 1893, p. 720 (part).
Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Stebbing, 1906, p. 431 (part).
Maera spinosa Haswell, Stebbing, 1910, p. 642.
Ceradocus rubromaculatus non Stimpson, Chilton, 1921, p. 71, fig. 9.
Ceradocus rubromaculatus non Stimpson, Hale, 1929, fig. 211.
It appears reasonably certain that the species described by Haswell and Bate

are the same. The figures given by both authors are poor, but coupled with the
descriptions, they are sufficient to justify the union. An examination of a number

286 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Vig. 4, Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) serrata (Bate); (THaswell’s original specimen 9) A,
head; B, lower lip, half; C, mandible; D-H, maxillae 1-2; F, maxilliped; G, gnathopod 1;
H, gnathopod 1, palm; I, gnathopod 1, detail of palm; J—K, gnathopod 2, right and left; L.
peraeopod 1; M-—O, peraeopods 3-5; P, uropods 1-2; Q, uropod 3; R, telson; 8, branchin.
(KS, del.)

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 287

of specimens from Tasmanian localities gives no reason to suppose that there are
two species occupying that area, although on the Victorian coast specimens oceur
which exhibit slight variations not sufficiently marked, however, to justify any
separation, Additions to Bate’s (1862, p. 226) and Haswell’s (1880, p. 268) de-
scriptions are:

The peduncle of antenna 2 just reaches to the end of that of antenna 1, the
whole antenna reaches well beyond this point; gland cone reaching to end of next
segment,

Mount parts as usual, but mandibular palp with segment TIT sub-equal to
segment I, hinge process pronounced.

Maxilla 2 with two plumose setae on the outer edge of the outer plate distally.

Gnathopod 1 with side plate moderately produced and pointed forwards, basis
moderately expanded, setose behind, carpus longer than propodus, carpus ratio
length to width = 2-3:1; propodus vatio length to width —1:4;1, the palm
ridged in the female as fivured.

Gnathopod 2; both enlarged, with one as a rule slightly larger in both sexes,
hand swollen and in very old speeimens irregular in outline: palm oblique, in
young specimens with a clean outline, later hecoming more rugose and sometimes
hecoming split 10 fornt near the hinge a large Hat tooth, followed by a depression,
then a long, rounded rugose bulge. The finger fits into a deep pocket near the
defining tooth, which is occasionally worn nearly flat.

In specimens from Westernport, Vietovia, the two-toothed form, similar to
that found in (. (.D.) chiltont, occasionally appears.

Peracopods 1 and 2 with basis very livhtly indented near the body, a row of
hairs alone the hinder margin; 8-5 with basis expanded and sometimes produced
toa small angle distally on the hinder edge; however, this is a very variable char-
acter, and [ can find no correlation between this factor and others, The best that
can be said is that generally there is a tendency for the basal expansion to be pro-
duced to a pointed angle in peraeopods 4 and 4, particularly in the male.

Pleon side plate 1 lightly erenulate behind, a nearly obsolete tooth present
above and below ; 2 lightly toothed above, two very small teeth below ; § moderately
toothed above, two teeth below; 4 and 5 denticulated strongly but evenly.

Uropods 1 and 2 fairly strong, reaching just beyond the pecunele of 3; uro-
pod 3 with rami lanceolate, strone, and elongate,

Telson with four spines, one usually small, and one lateral hair on each half.
Branchiae very large, inner wall very thin.

Loe. Tasmania (Waswell’s original specimens); 10 miles north of Cireular
Head, Tasmania, Endeavour 492; Port Wynyard, Tasmania (N. B. Tindale, Apr.,

288 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1936); Altona, Port Phillip, Victoria (M. Freame, Jan., 1933), ‘‘colour uni-
formly bright scarlet’? (Aust. Mus. Reg. No. P. 10398); Port Philip (QO. A.
Sayce) ; West Channel, Victoria (O. A. Sayce) ; Shoreham, Victoria (O. A. Sayee).

Fig. 5. A-M, Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) serrata (Bate); (Haswell’s original speci-
men 4): A, head; B, lower lip; C, mandible; D-H, maxilla 1-2; F, gnathopod 2; G—I, peraeopods
3-5; J, pleon side plate 1; K, uropod 3; L—M, telson. (K.S, del.) N-—O, Ceradocoides chiltoni
Nicholls; N—M, two views of left mandible.

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 289

Crrapocus (DENTICERADOCUS) CHILTONI sp. Noy.
Maera spinosa Chilton non Haswell, Chilton, 1883, p. 81, t 2,63; 1916, p. 369,

Very like C. (D.) serrata (Bate), but with the following differences :

Antenna 2; pedunele fails to reach the end of the peduncle of antenna 1,
Maxilla 2 without plumose setae.

Fig. 6. Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) chilloni (Chilton'’s original specimen @): A, head;
B, upper lip; C—D, left and right mandibles; E, maxilia 1; F, spine-tooth from outer plate; G,
maxilla 2; H, maxilliped; I, gnathopod 1; 7-K, gnithopod 2, left and right; L, peraeopod 1;
M-—O, peraeopods 4-5; P-R, pleon sideplates 1-3; S-U, uropods 1-3; V-W, telson, (KAS, del.)

290 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gnathopod 1; carpus sub-equal to propodus, ratio length to width =1-9:1;
propodus ratio length to width =1-9: 1.

Pleon side plate 1 with margin a little uneven above, two small teeth below ;
2 with margin smooth above, two small teeth below; 8 well toothed above, two teeth
below; 4 and 5 evenly bnt lightly denticulate,

Uropods 1 and 2 not as strong as in (. (D.) serrata (Bate), but reach well
beyond the pedunele of 3, to halfway up the rami; 3 with rami slender, lanceolate
but not elongate.

Telson with 4 spines set fairly well back (see figure), and with two lateral
spine-like hairs on each half. Branchiae very large, sae-like, with a thick inner
wall.

In this species gnathopod 2 is subject to considerable variation (see figures)
in both males and females, The tendency, however, is always towards the develop-
ment of two flat-topped palm teeth, an oblique palm, and a well-developed defining
tooth. Generally the left gnathopod is more strongly developed.

Locality. Auckland; Akaroa, New Zealand. Chilton collection,

A single specimen which is attributed to this speeies from Great Barrier
Island, New Zealand, is figured.

The most noteworthy point is the fact that wropod 3 is elongate and strong,
although 1 and 2 reach well beyond its peduncle,

Cerapocis (DENTICERADOCUS) CTLEVREUXT sp. nov.
Ceradocus rubromaculatus Cheyreux non Stimpson, Chevrenx, 1908, p. 479, fig. 6.
? Ceradocus rubromaculatus non Stimpson Schellenberg, 1938, p. 63.

This species is clearly marked off from the others of its section by the pos-
session of five spines on the apex of each half of the telson. The ciliations of the
inner margin of the telson lobes, the downward production of the posterior margin
of the basis of peraeopod 45, and the reduction of teeth, dorsal edge of the pleon
stements, are of interest.

The fact that, in these specimens, the dorsal edge of the pleon segments is
somewhat crenulate, suggests the retention of Denticeradocus as a sub-genus only.

Loc, Archipelagoes of Gambier and Tuamotu (Dr. Seurat, 1904); ? Fiji,
Marshall Islands, British Solomon Islands, Philippines (Dr. Sixten Boel).

Crrapocus (DEN'TICERADOCUS) CAPENSIS sp. oy.

Macra rubromaculatus Stebbing non Stimpson; Stebbing 1888, p. 1008 (part),
pl. XCV (EB).

Ceradocus rubromaculatus Stebbing non Stimpson, 1908, p. 81; 1910 A, p. 456,

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 291

? Ceradocus rubromaculatus Schellenberg non Stimpson, Schellenberg, 1925, p.

154.

This species may be separated from C. (D.) ramsayi (Haswell) the only other
species possessing a large mesio-dorsal tooth on the margins of pleon segments 4
and 5, by the possession of only three spines on the apex of each lobe of the telson.
However, from Stebbing’s figures (1888, pl. XCV) other good differences are:

The eye in C. (D.) ramsayi (Taswell) small and sub-oval, in C. (D.) capensis
large, egg-shaped, filling most of the interantennal angle,

Peraeopods 1 and 2 with the basis strongly indented on the inner margin and
strongly setose. Pleon side plate 8 with four teeth below. Uropods 1 and 2 with
relatively shorter and stouter peduncles.

Vig, 7. Ceradocus (Denticeradoeus) chiltunt; variation in gnathopod 2; A-B, gnathopod 2,
loft and right, aged 9; C—D, gnathopod ¥Y, left and right, aged g. (K.S. del.)

Re-examination of the South African specimens is needed,

Loc, Off Cape Agulhas, 274 metres, Table Bay; ? German West Africa,
? Swakopmund,

The following records cannot be evaluated from the literature, A recheck from
the specimens is necessary.

Maera rubromaculatus Stimpson, Miers (1884, pp. 315-316; Port Molle; Dun-
das Straits; Northern Territory.

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Walker (1904, p. 272, fig. 30). Gulf
of Manaar. Walker’s specimens certainly belong to the sub-genus.

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Walker, 1909, p. 364. Wasin, in mud.
Record only.

292 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 8. A-Q, Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) chiltoni, Great, Barrier Ts., mature 9: A, head;
B, mandible, palp; C-D, maxillae 1-2; E, maxilliped; F, gnathopod 1; G-H, gnathopod 2, left
and right; I, peraeopod 1; J—L, peraeopods 8-5; M—O, pleon side plates 1-3; P, urosome; Q,
telson, R—-U, Ceradocus (Denticeradoeus) chiltoni from Auckland: R-S, gnathopod 2, left and
right, young @; T-U, gnathopod 2, left and right, aged dg. (IK.S. det.)

SHEARD—STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 293

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Chilton, 1922, p. 8. 45 miles $.W.
Cape Jaubert, N.W. Australia.

Ceradocus rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Tattersall, 1922, pp. 6-8, pl. I, fig. 14,
16. Abrolhos Islands, Western Australia. This is almost certainly a new species,

Ceradocus rubromaculatus Stimpson. Pirlot, 1934, p. 222. 6° 8° lat. N,,
121" 19’ long. E., 275 m.; 8° 43" lat. N., 127° 16’ long. E., 828 m. (‘These depths
are extreme for forms usually found in littoral waters.) Pirlot, 1936, p. 305.
Lombok, Paternoster Island, ete., 0-90 m.

Ceradoous rubromaculatus (Stimpson) Barnard, 1937, p. 160, fig, 9. Red
Sea. (This is probably a new species. The tendency to a very oblique palm with
little definition is certainly not characteristic of the known members of the sub-
genus. Probably, examination will show that other differences are correlated with
this.)

Ceradocus rnbromacuatus (Stimpson) Walker, 1905, p. 927. (This paper is
not available to me.)

The Australian and New Zealand species may be readily separated by the
character of the telson and by the presence or absence of teeth on the posterior
margins of pleon side plates land 2. Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) ramsayi (Has-
well) is recognized by the prominent medio-postero dorsal tooth on each of the
pleon segments 4 and 5, as noted by Haswell.

SYSTEMATIC CHARACTERS IN THE Sur-Genus Den riceRADOCUS.

As I have not seen sufficient specimens of the Ceradocus group, it is not pos-
sible to generalize on the systematies of the group as a whole, However, within the
sub-genus Denticeradacus, the following observations appear to hold wood,

Growth Stages. In the immature stages both sexes are very similar, and the
palm of gnathopod 2 is regular, The denticulation of the pleon appears to be
fixed in pattern. Some differentiation occurs during the sexually mature stage :
the palm of gnathopod 2 in the male becomes irregular and toothed, occasionally
on both sides of the body, oecasionally ou the left, but more often on the right. The
serration of the bases of peracopods 5S—d becomes more marked and the dentatiou
of the pleon more evident. During the later stages, gnathopod 2 of the female
tends to become irregular, and in some eases is more heavily toothed than in the
corresponding male, Generally the more heavily toothed gnathopod is also the
larger.

It would appear that the shape of the palm of gnathopod 2 is a very unreliable
specific character, althongh its geneval shape and liability to the development of
teeth or not may be useful as a check. In Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) rubromacu-
latus (Stimps,) and in (. (D,) sellickensis Sheard, no trace of the breaking-up of

294 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the palm into teeth has been observed, although a long range of specimens has been
examined. Characters which appear to be unaltered in the various growth stages,
and which appear to exhibit very little variability, are: the telson, mouthparts,
particularly the palp of the mandible, and the dentation of the side plates of pleon
segments 1-8. Accordingly these characters haye been used for the separation of
the species,

Other characters which appear (6 be specifie but which have not been checked
over a wide range of specimens are: the proportion of length to width of segments
Vand VL of gnathopod 1, the proportionate length of the gland cone, the eharacter
of the margins of the basis of peraeopods 1 and 2, and the shape of the lower hind
corner of the basis of peracopods 3-9,

The eye shape and colour varies to about the same extent in all the species, the
shape oval to round, evlour dark red to light red (in spirit dark to pale). None of
the Australian or New Zealand specimens furnish examples of the eye shape of
C. (D.) capensis Sheard,

The close resemblances which exist between the two subgenera make me hesi-
tate to effect any further separation on the basis of literature, particularly as it
would appear that some of the Northern species are misplaced in the subgenus
Cerudocus (Ceradocus). However, this is a problem which can ouly be solved by
a worker with access to the Northern material.

Of very great interest is the 1eudeney to the formation of flat-topped teeth on
the palm of gnathopod 2, particularly in older specimens of a number of the species.
It would be idle to speculate on their origin until more work has been done on the
problem. An experiment carvied out on Talorchestia novachollandia Stebbing
(Sheard, 1938, p. 29) tends to show that the forees operating in the production
of malformations of this kind are complex,

Tlowever, it might not be out of place Lo suggest here that the position and in-
cidence of the teeth muy be controlled by factors affecting the growth rate of the
segment and by the position of the powerful museles within it. Im all animals
whose exoskeleton is periodically renewed, and which for varying periods of time
is in a plastic state, mechanical stresses and strains can be expected to produce
yery definite effeets.

LITERATURE,
Barnard, K. IL. (1931): Great Barrier Reef Exped. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Tist.), Sei.
Rep. Vol. 4, No. 4.
Barnard, K. H. (1937) : The John Murray Exp. 1933-1934 Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.)
Se. Rep. 4, Nr. 6, Lond,
Bate, ©. 8. (1862) : Cat. Amph. Crust. Brit, Mus. Lond.

SHEARD--STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GAMMARIDEA 295

Chevreux, HE. (1908) : Mem. Soc. Zool, France, Vol. 20.

Chevreux, E. (1925) : Bull. Sac. Zool. France, Vol. 50.

Chilton, EH. (1883) : Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol. 9.

Chilton, E. (1916) : Trans. N.Z. Fust., Vol. 48.

Chilton, E, (1921) : Biol. Res. Endcuvour, Syducy, V. part 2.

Chilton, B, (1922): Kungl. Svensh. Vetensk, Hanidl. Bd, 63, No. 3.

Chilton, H, (1923); Rec, Aust. Mus,, Vol. 14, No. 2.

Costa, A. (1853) : Rend. Soc, Bourbon N.S.W., Vol. 2.

Della Valle, A. (1898); F. Wl. Neapel, Vol. 20.

Hale, IL. M. (1927) : Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., Vol. 51.

Hale, HW. M. (1929): Crust. of 8. Aust., Adelaide.

Haswell, W. A. (1880) : Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol. 4.

Haswell, W, A, (1882) : Aust, Stalk and Sessile Eyed Crust.

Haswell, W, A. (1885) : Proc. Linn. Sac. NS. Wales, Vol. 10.

Miers, BE. .J, (1884) ; Rep. Voy. Alert. Lond.

Nicholls, G. H, (1938): Austr, Ant. Baped. 1911-1914, Sei. Reps. Series C, Vol. 10,
pt. 4

Pirlot, J. M. (1934) ; Sihoga Hep. Mono., 83d.

Pirlot, J. M. (1986) » Sibuya Bap. Mono., 851.

Schellenberg, A. (1925) : Beit. Kenntis. Meeresfaunu West Afrikas, Vol. 38, No. 4.

Schellenberg, A, (1926) : Deulsche Sudpolar-Ex ped. 1901-1903, Vol. 18.

Schellenberg, A. (1928) + Trans. Zool. Sov. Lond., Vol, 22.

Schellenberg, A. (1938) : Mungl. Sr. Vet, Ahad, Hundl., Bd. 16, No. 6.

Sheard, KX. (1956): T'vans, Roy. Soc. Sth. Austr., Vol. G0.

Sheard, K. (1957) » Trans. Roy. Soc. Sth. Aust., Vol. 61.

Shoemaker, C. (19383): Am. Mus. Nut. Hist. Novitates, No. 598.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1888) : Rep. Voy. Challenger, Vol. 29.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1899) : Trans, Linn. Soc. Lond., Ser. 2, Vol. 7.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1906) : Das Tierreich, Vol. 21.

Stebbing, T. NR. R, (1907) : Rec. Ind, Mus., Vol. 1, part 2.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1908) : Ann. Sth. African Mus., Vol. 6.

Stebbing, 'l’. KR. BR. (1910) : Mem. Aust, Mus. Sydney, Vol. 4, part 2.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1910a) : Gen. Cal. Sth. African Crust. Ann, Sth. African Mus,
Vol. 6.

Stephensen, K. (1983) : Medd. Om. Graenland, Bd. 79, No. 7.

Stimpson, W. (1855): Proc, Ac. Philadelphia, Vol. 7.

Tattersall, W, M. (1922) : Jowr. Linn. Soc, Lond., Vol. 35,

Walker, A. O. (1904) : Rep. Ceylon Pearl Fisheries, Loud., Vol. 2.

Walker, A. O. (1905) : Fauna, Geog, Maldive and Lace. Arch, Vol. 2, Supp. 1.

Walker, A, O, (1909); Trans. Linn. Sac. Lond., Ser. 2, Zool., Vol. 12.

THE EVOLUTION OF THE HUMAN MOTIF IN
PAPUAN ARROW DESIGNS

By R. M. BERNDT, HON. ASSISTANT IN ETHNOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The following observations record designs found on the heads of conical and barbed
arrows from the south coast of New Guinea; the specimens being from the South
Australian Museum collection. The paper is illustrated by drawings which have been
prepared from rubbings of the arrows to show specific details.

Although in this paper interest centres around the actual design, it is perhaps
appropriate to review the peculiarities which appear in the arrow itself.

Tae EVOLUTION or rue HUMAN MOTIF tw PAPUAN
ARROW DESIGNS

By R, M. BERNDT, Hon. Assisranr in Eruno.ocy, Sou'rm AusrratiAn Museum.
Plate xxii, text-fie. 14.

Tue following observations record designs found on the heads of conieal and
barbed arrows from the south coast of New Guinea; the specimens being from the
South Australian Museum collection, The paper is illustrated by drawings which
have been prepared from rubbings of the arrows to show specific details,

Although in this paper interest centres around the actual design, it is perhaps
appropriate to review the peculiarities which appear in the arrow itself,

An examination of many specimens from the southern coastal region indicates
that the designs illustrated are peculiar to arrows of which the heads are of conical
or of barbed type (fig. 4, A and B).

Arkows with Inaps or ConicaL Horm.

This type consists of blackwood or palmwood arrows with the heads carved
with a series of cones inserted one into the base of another, and of equal or unequal
length. At about the middle of the head (x, fim. 4, A a) there is a earved band of
varied pattern. The fibre used for lashing the head to the shaft, shown at CG, fig. 4
A, is usually of gummed palmleaf plaiting. The greater portion of the reed shaft
is generally scraped and blackened, but part may be varnished with red gum, the
rest remaining completely untouched. The upper internode is often lett intact,
and the end of the shaft un-notched.

These arrows average 155 em. in length, and probably each tribe preserves an
established length of its own.

The average lengths of the different parts are:

(a) the head, 42 em.
(b) ineised band, 4-5-6 em.
(c) plaited cane band, connecting head to shaft, 3 em,
(d) cane shaft, 108 em.
Variations occurring in this type are:
(a) plain conieal.
(b) a series of cones, tipped with cassowary bone,
(¢) barbed and conical (see also barbed type).
(d) barbed and conical, with cassowary bone tip (see also barbed type).

298 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The cones are often coloured at each division with red ochre, and the middle
incised band filled in with white.

Haddon (1912, 177) states that the necks of the individual cones or other con-
strictions on the head were nicked before use, so that they might the more readily
break off and remain within the body of the enemy.

Arrows or Barpep Tyrer.

The barbed type of head such as is illustrated im fig. 4, B, is of blackwood or
heavy palmwood, and is joined to the shaft by a plaited cane band; at about the
middle of the head (fig. 4, Bb) is a earved band of varied pattern.

The relative lengths of the portions are as in the conical type. The upper
portion of the head is armed with adpressed barbs.

The following variations occur in this type of head;

(a) with single row of barbs;

(b) with barbs projecting on either side;

(e) with single row of barbs, apex tipped with cassowary bone;

(d) with double row of barbs, tipped with eassowary bone;

(e) with double row of barbs, and with grooved head ;

(f) barbed and comical (see also conieal type) ;

(gz) barbed and conical, with eassowary bone tip (see also conical type) ;
(h) with a triangular-shaped head, and single row of barbs at the tip;
(i) with a notehed head, eassowary tip.

On all examples examined, the main shaft of cane is devoid of nodal deeora-
tion, and the hilt of the arrow butt un-notched. The designs deseribed in this
paper are only found on this type of arrow.

Many arrows have no decoration at the centre of the head, but these probably
were manufactured and sold to European traders as curios, (Haddon, 1894, 203.)

Only in the more highly decorated specimens are found the series of intricate
incisings which may be here termed band designs. These band designs, when they
oceur, are longitudinal to the arrow, and are incised on the round or oyal blaek-
wood head, sometimes with rubbed-in white lime decoration accentuating the work.
Tn such arrows the cones or barbs ate usually highly finished, but some are rough
and unpolished.

Berndt (1939, pp. 8-12) has referred to the conical arrow, and has given ex-
amples of the similar occurrence of the cone within cone construetion in the
northern Australian spear-heads, many specimens showing a similarity both in
decoration and manufacture to the Papuan arrows.

The large bows from Papua are made usually of bamboo, although blackwood
and light palmwood examples exist. In some cases these are ornamented at the

BERNDT—PAPUAN ARROW DESIGNS 299

ends. The shaping of the bow is done by holding a length of selected wood over
the fire (Haddon, 1912, p.173). The bow string is a broad strip of the tough outer
rind of a bamboo, but, in some examples, plaited cord fibre is used.

Haddon (1912, p. 174) states that extra arrows are held in the bow-hand, that
a quiver is not employed, and that the bundles of arrows are tied in two places with
string, the intermediate portion forming a handle for carrying the bundle.

As sketehed in Edge-Partington's Album (p. 343, No. 4), a plaited strap con-
necting the two string bands is sometimes used for carrying the hundle when
going out to fight.

DISTRIBUTION,

Oceurrence of these arrows is believed to be widespread. Haddon (1894, p.
134) suggests that they were probably brought in from the Toaripi area, and (1912,

Freshwater Bay

_MEKEO DIST

GULF OF PAPUA Kiaruku
Hall Sound

TORRES 5T
oO Matoiay
9 ‘ Mer
(Murray Is)
C York
Samierses PAPUA
NORTH SOUTHERN COASTAL REGION

QUEENSLAND SHADED AREA TRACING ARROW
DESIGN PISTRIBUTION

Fig. 1. A map of the south coast of Papua (Papuan Gulf region). The shaded area shows
the distribution of the arrow designs mentioned in the text.

p. 177) notes that they are traded from Papua into the Torres Strait Islands, while
Edge-Partington (p. 260) records the conical arrow as being found at Redsear
Bay. The South Australian Museum possesses specimens from Hanuabada (Port
Moresby), the Toaripi area, and the Mekeo and Central districts.

It appears then that both the conical and barbed variety of these arrows are
derived from the shaded area in the accompanying map (fig. 1).

Design.

On examination of these arrows, one is struck by the persistence of the designs
illustrated in this paper. These appear to have some definite significance, such as
would be suggested by a real object, in this case a human form or face conyention-

300 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

alized, and representing in this manner a gradual degeneration by successive copy-
ines of the design.

When analysing primitive art, it is often found that such designs assume a
number of forms, many of which have searcely any resemblance to the original
objeet, but which strictly symbolize its most sienificant aspects.

The native knows that the figure thus drawn is not like the original, for ex-
ample, ‘‘a man"’, but it does symbolically satisfy his desire for expression.

Primitive art tends to be bound down by the traditional code of the artists’
forefathers, and very rarely is this altered, except slowly over a period.

The designs illustrated are of various patterns whose evolution can be traced
from a common source.

Tfaddon (1894, p. 135), in noting arrow decorations, mentions that there can
be no doubt that the designs are derived from a human face, the features of which
have been laterally compressed and vertically extended, through the exigencies of
a restrieted space and the difficulty of more realistic carving on such a slender rod.

By tracing this anthropomorph through the designs found on a large number
of arrows in the South Australian Museum collection, and by confining these
observations to a restricted geographical area, as well as a particular type of
arrow, the conventionalization of this figure becomes apparent,

In the ultimate designs simple geometrical decoration such as is illustrated in
fiz, 4, J and K, and in fig, 4, C, K, and L, are evolved.

Tt has already been stated above that Haddon holds that these arvow-designs
are derivatives of the human face form, yet it must be indicated that each earving
has retained also in fundamental principle, ingredients which can be derived from
a homan figure in the squatting posture.

This human figure can be defined as having the legs haunched or in a squat-
ting position, the arms either flexed with the hands under the chin, or with the
arms outstretched.

THe DHaunciuep Fieurs.

The human hannched figure appears widely in the art of primitive people.
Berndt (1939, p. 51-62) has dealt with this type as it occurs in the spatula decora-
tion of the south-east coast of Papua, and in that paper a series was arranged to
demonstrate a gradual evolution from the natural to the extremely conyentional-
ized form, the main ingredients of the original figure being persistent throughout
the series.

The importance of the haunched figure in arrow design is shown by the appear-
ance in the figures of three definite types indicated in fig. 2, A, B, and © respec-
tively. Other designs seem to have all been evolved from these three fundamental
types.

BERNDT—Papuan ARROW DESIGNS 301

The sex of the figure in arrow designs, like that of the spatula figure, has nol
heen ascertained.

In addition to arrows and spatulae, large-sized carved figures are made and
used in this area, and in these the haunched figure design is also prominent. Had-
don (1901, p. 106-7, fig. 9) for example, illustrates a female figure in the squat
posture. This was the wooden image of a girl with searification markings on her
body from Erub, but originally from the island of Masig, in Torres Strait. Called
neur madub, it was used as a love charm. Similar male figures, sohop madub, were
used as tobaceo-growing charms, At Mabuiag Island, wooden human effigies,
modub, kept in a small hut along with bullroarers, were believed to ‘‘turn devil”’
at night time, and go around the gardens swinging the bull-roarers to make the
yams grow. Another male figure, trom Mabuiag Island, eallecl araearadubu (dau
invoke help in success in head-hunting raids.

The example, ilustvated im plate xxii, figs. A and C (from the South Austra-
lian Museum collection) is an ornamented canoe mast from the D’Entrecasteaux
Group, New Guinea, and is 25 cm. in height, and shows a similar type of dubu to
that deseribed above.

means male or an) was consulted before fighting, presents being given to it to

THe Human Face Morte,

Haddon’s (1894, p, 135) contention that designs of types illustrated are de-
rived trom the human face, may have to be modified in the light of data presented
in this paper.

Besides arrows, designs appear on other objects manufactured by the natives
in this area (sonthern coastal region of Papua), and in the majority of bark-belts,
the decoration has a definite resemblance to the human face (see plate xxii, fig. B).
In this case, even when excessively conventionalized, the design has a zig-zag ap-
pearance which represents serrated teeth, and this may occur, not only at the
region of the mouth, but also on the rest of the face. Such an example is illus-
trated on plate xxii, fig. B, and shows the face decoration in a bark-belt from the
Papuan Gulf.

In comparing the haunched figure, arrow design, and human face derivative,
one must take into account the object npon which the artist carved, the small space
for expression, and the extreme conventionalization possible,

When either the haunched figure or human face become excessively conven-
lionalized, the fundamental outlines become the same and the original motif is lost,
The followmg two examples (fig, 2, H and J) show how the elements of the
haunched figure, as well as of the human face, may be extracted. Considering the
hauneched figure first :a horizontal line conventionalizes the head, acute angles the
eyes, and a perpendictular the body. The line at (he extreme left running from the

RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

302

SSeS

SA

his shewn slougside A, C, D, B, F and ik.

1 line-skete

ies

simpli

A

Arrow designs.

w

Vig.

BERNDT—PAPUAN ARROW DESIGNS 303

eye downwards and then upwards, represents the arm, The M motif at centre
gives the conventionalized equivalent of the haunched posture. The hase repre-
sents feet. A clearer outline of ihe posture is given in 2 J.

Secondly, in extracting the ingredient of the human face, the flexed ‘t elbows’?
of the squatting figure design become the eyes of the face design. The flexed
“knees”? represent the upturned corners of the mouth.

All the arrow designs illustrated in this paper (except fig. 2, A, B, and C) may
be considered open to either interpretation. Ag is often the ease, the native mind
may have played with the design and deliberately represented both a face and
haunched figure at one and the same time.

Descrrrion or ILLUSTRATIONS.

Tn fig, 2, the arrow incisings A(a), C(e), D(d), H(e), F(t), and K(k) have
a line-sketech alongside of each to assist in tracing the human motif and the com-
pressed M (exeept in C(c)) of the haunched attitude,

In ©, the line-rawing illustrates the centre figure. B is descriptive within
itself, while H corresponds with F(f) and G with E(e).

Fig. 2 A is a human figure in hauuched posture, haying the M-like motif for
the legs, the outstretehed arms, and a Vand triangle conventionalizing the head.

Fie. 2 Bis a remarkable engraying from a conical arrow collected at Port
Moresby. At the tup of the design a horizontal line represents the head, while at
each side of the perpendicular body the arms are conventionalized, Again the
M-motif symbolizes the figure’s haunched attitude, while the buttocks are also in-
eluded in the artist’s coneeption of this traditional design.

Fig. 2 C is an exceptional piece of incising, in that the whole figure is in pro-
file. In order to make the interpretation of this engraving clear, a simple figure
has been drawn at the side (ec).

The heads are conventionalized in an oval within an oval, while the perpen-
dicular bodies, horizontal shoulders, arms, and, in the second figure, one arm rest-
ing on the line upon which the body is seated, as well as the bent elbow, ate as
clearly shown as the buttoeks indented upon the horizontal line, which possibly
represents the ground. This is the only example of the style that can be found
among the many hundreds of arrows examined,

In the actual figure, but more so in the line-sketch (¢), an analogy with Egyp-
tian treatment is shown.

The three examples described above are of the haunched figure design, and in
the illustrations following the same motif is used. At first sight these represent
the haunehed fivure highly conventionalized (fig. 2, D, BH, FP, G, H, and K), but,
upon further examination, a doubt as to this origin may occur, for it has already

RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

304

SN

——_

iN
YA

Sey Ae

9,

i

cy
x
y
ry
‘
'
t
\
ry

Lom

Pie Drew 5p

LEVEE

Arrow designs, showing transition from the conventionalized type of A to the

peometrical tigures of K and L,

Pig. 3.

BERNDT—PAPUAN ARROW DESIGNS 305

been shown that such a design as fig. 2, TT and J, may be taken as representing
either a squat figure or a human face.

The following designs have therefore been arranged to show their connection
with the above,

Fig. 2 D is a spirited carving from a barbed arrow collected in the Toaripi
area, and corresponds with E in that the V-shape is perceivable together with the
series of smaller V's, one above the other, on the perpendicular line. [f this figure
represents a human form, it may be that the series of V's represent the ribs, If,
on the other hand, it represents the face, they may be a series of ornamentations
accentuating the mouth, Fig, 2 F is an even clearer example than either D or BH,
having the main outlines of A, while in fig. 2 G, the upper design on the perpen-
dienlar line is surely a face derivation, Fie. 2 K is a typical design, from a single
barbed arrow. It resembles a mask, and still retains the compressed M, the cou-
ventionalized design following a curve around the centre diamond. L is the side
elevation of the same, hb

Fig. 3 A has the main aspeet, that is the M, retained by the artist, The centre
iva diamond with an M below, and an inverted M above. Comparison with the
traditional type, fig. 2 K shows the modification that has oeeurred.

Fig. 3 B is a peculiar modifieation, intermediate between 2 G and 2 K, con-
ventionalized into a meandering style comparable with the head of the design in
E, thus assuming the human face aspect, although F may be a better intermediate.

Fig. 3 C serves to link 3 B and 3 E, in whieh the triangular decoration appears.
Fig. 3 D retains the compressed M and inverted VY, asin 2 FB, while 8 EB has the
actual base of the fieure similar to that of 2 G.

Fig. 3 H is seemingly derived from G, the face becoming the essential accen-
tnated, while Fig. 3 J is more formal but still comparable with H. In 3 L, the
key pattern has hecome complicated, and a more elaborated yersion of the Z and
triangle at the right-hand base of C.

In the triangle motif appearing in K, each pair of geometrical figures in the
eourse of conventionalization has become joined by a line.

The extreme is shown in the designs in fig. 4, where in 1 the heart-shaped
centre (originally the compressed M), the V at the base, and the inverted V at the
head, show some similarity to the design in fig. 3 D.

Fig. 4, C and D, may be derived from 3, Il and J, as also may be 4 E, F, and Gq,
while + H can be linked with 4.1, which has the centre diamond as in 2 K, and 4 Kk
is possibly derived from either J or G, or both.

The last three are difficult to allocate, except in that they retain perpendicular
(fig. 4 D) and other lines running from head to base with a break at centre, all that
remains in + M being wavy broken lines,

306 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

LLL
TALL

SESS

SOAAANAAN

YELL:
LL

ay
CESKY }

mm)

army 7 OTL TET
|e ea a ze
lorena!

Pig. 4. A, Portions of conical type of arrow head. B, Portions of barbed type of arrow head.
ON, Extreme modifications of arrow designs,

BERNDT—PAPUAN ARROW DESIGNS 307

Little or no connection can be traced in fig. 4 N, and if is doubtful whether it
can have originated from the others of the series. It is inserted here only because
it appeared on the arrows of this area.

- SUMMARY,

This paper records designs found on the middle section of the heads of conical
or barbed arrows of Papua, the actual specimens studied being in the South Aus-
tralian colleetion,

Descriptions are given of the two distinctive types of arrows, together with a
classification of the variations, occurring in the restricted area of the southern coast
of Papua bordering the Papuan Gulf.

The main discussion is on the incised decoration, but primitive art and its
inspiration is considered, together with the native artists’ mode of approach.

The evolution of the human motif in the designs, and its conventionalization,
is analysed.

The illustrations may be modifications of either the haunched figure or the
human face, and both origins are discussed.

REFERENCES CITED.

Berndt, R. M. (1939) : Human Figure in Papuan Spatula decor, Trans. Roy. Soc.,
8S. Aust., Vol. 63, pt. 1, pp. 51-62. Adelaide.

Berndt, R. M. (1939) : Comparison between N. Austr. Spear and N. Guinea Arrow-
head, S. Austr. Naturalist, Vol. 19, pt. 4, pp. 8-12. Adelaide.

Edge-Partington, J. (1890): Album of the Natives of Pacific Islands (pt. 1), pp.
260, 343,

Haddon, A, C. (1894) : Decor. Art of Brit. N. Guinea, pp. 134, 135, 203. Dublin.

Haddon, A, C. (1901): Head-hunters, black, white, and brown, pp. 106, 107,
London.

Haddon, A. C. (1912): Anthrop, Exp. to Torres Strait Is. (pt. 4), pp. 173, 174,
177. Cambridge.

Kec. S.A. Museum

VoL. VI, PLATE XNII.

Plate xxii,

A human face design from a hark belt, showing serrated teeth,

A. A haunched figure from D’Entrecasteaux #roup.

Ii.

C. A haunched figure, profile of last.

THE PROPHLIANTIDAE

A PROPOSED NEW FAMILY OF AMPHIPODA, WITH
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND FOUR NEW SPECIES

By GEORGE E. NICHOLLS, UNIVERSITY OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

Summary

The discovery, in the collection of Amphipods brought back in 1914 by the “Aurora”
from Macquarie Island of a new genus Cylindryllioides (1938), closely akin to
Bircenna, revived the question of the systematic position of the latter genus.

Erected by Chilton, in 1883, for a single New Zealand species (Bircenna fulva), that
author remarked: “I do not know where to place this peculiar-looking Amphipod ; it
may come near to Phlias, but the species of that genus... . are not described in
sufficient detail to warrant one in forming any definite conclusion as to their
relationship.”

Tur PROPHLIANTIDAE

A PROPOSED NEW FAMILY OF AMPHIPODA, WITH DESCRIPTION OF
A NEW GENUS AND FOUR NEW SPECIES

By GEORGE I. NICHOLLS, Universery of Wesrern Ausrratia.
Text-fivs. 1-10,

THE discovery, in the collection of Amphipods brought back in 1914 by the ‘' Aur-
ora’* from Macquarie Island of a new genus Cylindryllioides ( 1938), closely akin
to Bircenna, revived the question of the systematic position of the latter genus.

Kreeted by Chilton, in 1888, for a single New Zealand species (Bircennu
fulva), that author remarked : ‘‘T do not know where to place this peculiar-looking
Amphipod ; it may come near to Phlias, but the species of that eenus . . . . are
not described in sufficient detail to warrant one in forming any definite conclusion
as to their relationship.”’

Chilton’s original account, which was very brief, unfortunately imaecurately
recorded the telson as ‘simple, not divided’’, While this may or may not have
influenced Stebbing in assigning Bircenna (in ‘Das Tierreich’’, 1906) to the
Phliantidae, it was, almost certainly, responsible for Chevreux’s proposal of a new
genus Wandelia (1906) for a subantarctic species which was referred to the
Phliantidae (Phliasidae), and was said to differ from Bircenna notably in that the
telson was completely cleft.

In 1903 another peculiar Amphipod was recorded by Walker, He placed it
in a new genus, Nuria, noted its resemblance in many particulars to Bireenni,
called attention to its cleft telson, questioned the propriety of the reference of
such forms to the Phliantidae, and finally left it incertae sedis. Stebbing, in 1906,
inchaded it, in the Phliantidae.

Chilton (1909) having re-examined Bircenna fulva, recognized the error in
his description of the telson, and correctly deseribed it as “split to the base’’, He
went further, and concluded that ‘‘ Wendelia is identical with Bircenna, and, in-
deed, Wandelia crassipes is specifically not very different from Bircenna fulva’,

Chilton, however, in his examination of Bircenna fulva, completely over-
looked one very curious aud indeed unique charaeter in that genus, viz. the ovcur-
rence of a deep and strongly curved transverse plate projecting ventrally like a

310 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

eollar, from the under surface of the first peraeon segment (fig. 7 A). It is ob-
viously a development of the sternite of that segment, and may be referred to as
the ventral flange. 1 find this present in all undoubted species of Bircenna, and
consider it a character of generie importance.

In the Western Australian species B. ignea, described below, this semi-circular
flange extends sufficiently far forward to actually underlie the base of the head,
its anterior surface being strongly concave, bounding a watch-pocket shaped
recess,

In the South Australian species, B. nichollsi Sheard, and in the New Zealand
B. fulva Chilton, it is, perhaps not quite so strongly developed, but is, neverthe-
less, a quite conspicuous feature.

In most of the members of this group of genera there is an unusually long
articular region, or ‘‘neck’’, separating the head from the peraeon, but the head
can be strongly retracted, in which case its lower surface and the hinder mouth
parts are, in Bircenna, partly received in this pocket. In the genus Eophliantts,
recently established by Sheard, as well as in Cylindryllioides, this structure is
absent, nor can I find it in any of the new species Prophlias anomalus, Biancolina
australis and Wandelia japonensis.

The specimens of Wandelia crassipes examined by Chevreux were sinaller
than fully-grown B. fulva, and correspondingly more difficult to study, yet since
Chevreux correctly recorded the cleft condition of the telson of his species, I can-
not believe that he would have overlooked the above quite conspicuous sternal de-
velopment had it been present. Indeed, his figure certainly suggests its absence,
and for this reason I consider that Wandelia must be retained as a distinct genus,
related much more closely to Eophliantis than to Bircenna.

In his ‘‘Note on the Amphipodan genera, Burcenna, Kuria, and Wandelia’’,
Chilton (1909), while amending his account of Bircenna and proposing the aban-
donment of Wandelia, recognized that, in the completely cleft condition of the
telson, this genus and Kuria differed from all the remaining Phliantidae known at
that time. A further difference is found in that all the then remaining genera
(Iphinotus, Pereionotus, ete.) are markedly dorso-ventrally flattened. Indeed, in
their appearance, they are utterly unlike the eylindriform Bircenna.

He hesitated, however, at the obvious step of establishing another family, and
suggested, instead, the enlargement of the characters of the Phliantidae to accom-
modate these very dissimilar forms—but omitted to formulate the suitably modi-
fied family diagnosis he recommended.

Recently Sheard has tentatively proposed the division of the Phliantidae
into two subfamilies, which he named respectively the Eophliantinae and the
Phliantinae.

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 311

Classification must be, to a considerable extent, a matter of convenience, and
the separation of these genera into two subfamilies does not completely meet the
case. That they are not very distantly related may be at once conceded, but that
is true of many accepted Amphipodan families.

Since there are now recorded no fewer than eight genera of this eylindroidal
or compressed Amphipodan type, with telson cleft more or less completely, it
seems reasonable to establish for them a distinet family, for which the name Pro-
phliantidae is suggested, the depressed forms with entire telson constituting the
Phliantidae,

Of these genera one, Prophlias, is new. In some particulars it seems least
specialized, and, in these, probably comes nearest to the condition of the ancestral
forms of both the Prophliantidae and of the Phhantidae: there is something about
it curiously suggestive of the Lysianassidae. In other characters it is quite un-
usual, in many linking up with Kuria. It is represented by a single species P.
anomalus 1. sp.

As regards Biancolina, it seems extremely probable that under the name B.
cuniculus, Stebbing (1906) has united two entirely distinct forms, and, while his
species may well prove to be correctly referred to the Ampithoidae, Biancolina
algicola Della Valle should, in my opinion, be removed from that family. With
the new Western Australian Amphipod described under the name B. australis, it
is here included in the Prophliantidae.

A third species of Bircenna, B. ignea n. sp., also from Western Australia, is
here named and described.

The distribution of the species, at present recorded, is mainly Australasian,
eight out of the twelve (or perhaps thirteen) occurring in that area; the remaining
four (or five) consisting of one of the two Biancolina spp. (Mediterranean) Wan-
delia, with one sub-antaretic American and one Japanese species, and Kwria from
the neighbourhood of Sokotra. If the Ceina sp. taken by the Siboga Expedition
near Sulu, proves to be actuaily identical with C. egregia (Chilton) it will be the
only example of wide distribution of a species.

All species, however, are very small, and, from the nature of their habitat,
likely to be taken only by chance; they seem never to have been secured except in
small numbers. It is probable that careful search will reveal the family to be of
very wide occurrence.

I desire to take this opportunity of recording my thanks to Mr. K. Sheard, of
the South Australian Museum, for facilitating my examination of the material in
that Collection, as well as for help in several other ways, not least of these being the
undertaking to see the paper through the press; also, in acknowledging my in-
debtedness to Dr. A. G. Nicholls for his assistance in the making of the prepara-

312 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tions required, and of the camera Incida drawings from which the illustrations
have been made.

Norn.—tThe term purachelate is proposed for that prehensile condition where
a markedly convex palm or a produced thumb is relatively minute and meets the
base only, of the daetyl. The deseription ‘‘ minutely chelate’ is obviously suitable
only where the dactyl is small and fits agaist the tip of an equally small thumb.

PROPHLIANTIDAE, fam. nov.

Body compressed or eylindrical, rostrum minute or absent. MHyes present.
Peraeon strongly developed. Pleon segments 5 and 6 generally reduced or coal-
esced. Side plates generally shallow. ‘Telson short, cleft or apically incised. An-
tennae short, without accessory flagellum. Mandible without palp, molar gener-
ally vestigial or wanting. Lower lip with or without inner lobes. Palp of maxilla 1
usually reduced or absent. Maxilliped generally with inner plate well developed.
Gnathopod 1 and 2 subchelate, parachelate, or simple. Brancbial lamellae small.
Uropods 1 and 2 biramous, uropod 3 variable.

With eight genera and twelve species.

1. Body compressed, carinate, side plates deep .. 44 <t An . 2
Body sub-eylindrical, side plates shallow si : r 28 a 2

2. Wifth side plate very large, uropod 3 well developed, bbvaanfne.
Prophlias 2. noy. (1).
Hitth side plate small, uropod 8 small, uniramous .. we Pa 1+ "Be

3. Side plates 1-t shallower than their related segments, maxilliped outer plate
large, telson apically cleft + .. Ceina Della Valle (2).
Side plates 1-4 deeper than their related semen maxilliped outer plate small,

telson cleft almost to the base .. +3 Pe Kauria Walker (3).

4+. Telson apically incised or partly cleft, sreirnens 3 biramous,
Biancolinag Della Valle (4).

Telson cleft to base, uropod 8 not biramous .. 4, =, ih
5. Pleon segments 5-6 small but distinet .. Pa " Bophliantis Shear d (5).

Pleon segments 4-6 coalesced .. bn in ef whi oy }
6. Pleopods biramous, uropod 3 uniramous.

Peraeon segment | without ventral flange .. Wondelia Chevrenx (6).

Peraeon sewment | with ventral flanye : .. Bircenna Chilton (7).

Pleopods uniramous, uwropod 3 without distinet ramils.
Cylindryllioides Nicholls (8).

1, Proruutas gen. nov.

Integuiment hard, calcified; body robust, compressed, sub-carinate; head deep,
with minute rostrum; eyes round; mouth parts prominent; side plates not quite

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 313

as deep as their related segments. Peraeon segments 4-7 and pleon segments 1-3
with posterolateral corner produced into rounded tubercle, pleon segments +-6
moderately well developed, but boundaries not clistinetly indicated ; telson deeply
eleft. Antenna 1 short, stout, with large first semment; antenna 2 short, broad,
flagellum wanting, the appendage carried flat upon the anterior surface of the
head; labriun short, broad, entire; mandible with small molar on left appendage ;
lower lip with well-developed inner lobe; maxilla 1, inner plate small, one-segmen-
ted palp; maxilla 2, inmer plate feeble, shorter than outer; maxilliped long, palp,
4-segmented, outer plate well developed, extending beyond second segment of palp,
inner plate short, not reaching middle of first segment of palp.

Gnathopods slender, alike, subequal, subchelate, palm short, transverse, eon-
vex, daetyl short; peraeopod 3 has side plate, basos and meros greatly expanded,
peraeopods 4 and 5 side plates relatively sumall, basos expanded; pleopods bira-
mons, with pedunele relatively long and moderately produced mesially, two coup-
fing hooks at postero-mesial angle; uropods biramous, 1-2 with long slender ped-
unele, rami short, unequal; unropod 3 pedunele stout, raini equal, stout and conical,
rather lonver than peduncle.

Remarks. This genus differs from all the others included in this family, ex-
cepting Cem and Kuria, in its compressed condition and the degree of develop-
meut of the side plates. Exeept, however, that it is compressed instead of de-
pressed, if approaches the Phiiantidae in its hard exoskeleton and deep side plates
1, aud (apart from the tmusual development of third peraeopod) recalls the
habtlus figure of Phlies serratus Guerin and Heterophlias seclusus Shoemaker.

There is likewise a remarkable resemblance to some members of that family
in the antennae, but with the difference that it is the second antenna of Prophliax
which is flattened and reduced, The first antennae arise close together near the
middle line, separated only by the minute rostrum. The second are mserted more
ventrally upon the anterior surface of the head, and are carried so flattened avainst
that surface so that, in profile, they are diffienlt to recognize,

The pleopods, though modified, are less aberrant than in any other member of
either the Prophliantidae (with the exception of Ceinu egregia) or of the Phlian-
tidae, while the wos and the uropods are ithe redneed, The third uropods, in
particular, ave almost normal; in size and proportions they come nearest Lo some
ol the Phliantidae, eg. Quasimodia burnarde Sheard, where, however, only oue
stout ramus persists.

The expansion of the hinder peraeopods, also reealls the condition found im
those flattened forms, but in Prophlias in peraeopod 3 it reaches an extreme de-
velopment, and involves the side plate as well.

314 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 1. Prophlias anomalus; A, 9, lateral view; B, head (slightly flattened); C, antenna 1;
D, antenna 2; EB, labrum with both mandibles; F, lower lip with maxilla 2 still attuehed; G,
maxilla 2 of opposite side; H, maxilla 1; I, maxilliped; J, gnathopod 1, with hand (enlarged)
from another specimen; K, gnathopod 2; L, peraeopod 1, with gill; M, peraeopod 2 with gill and
narrow brood lamella; N, O, P, peraeopods 3, 4, and 5 (peraeopod 4 with gill).

PROPHLIAS ANOMALUS sp. noy.

With the characters of the genus. A more detailed description of some of the
appendages may be added.

Female. Antenna d. First sezment of pedunele very stout, second and third
progressively shorter and more slender, flagelluin 4-segmented with aesthetes on
distal three segments. In antenna 2, only five segments were made out, the second
with a well developed antennary cone, segments 1-4 flattened, the last short.

Labrum short and broad, with slightly sinuous free border,

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 315

The left mandible bears a reduced molar, its cutting edge apparently with two
prominent teeth, the right with a small secondary cutting edge.

The lower lép is unusual in this family, with inner and outer lobes of almost
equal size.

The mazillae seem to have undergone displacement: laterally occurs a pair
of appendages, which I must suppose to be maxilla 1 with small inner plate armed
with a single seta, while the moderately long palp appears unsegmented, Mesial,
and adhering upon dissection to the lower lip, is the small maxilla 2, its inner plate,
armed with few setae, shorter than the outer,

The maxilliped with very long basal segment, the distal (horizontal) portion
bent upon the proximal almost at right angles, and consisting of a relatively short
4-seemented palp, the well developed outer plate armed mesially with spines, inner
plate difficult to make out, but seemingly short and unarmed.

The side plates 1-3 increase progressively in length and depth, the ventral
margins are notched, 2 and 3 bearing setae in the notches; 4 strongly emarginate
behind, armed with a few setae. The gnathopods are unusual in this family (ex-
cepting Ceina) in that the propod is rather wide and the dactyl short, scarcely
projecting beyond the short convex palm, thus producing a subchelate hand. It
seems probable that the simple or the parachelate gnathopods found in most mem-
bers of this family have arisen by reduction from an originally subchelate con-
dition such as this. In the second gnathopod the ischium is particularly long, as
in Lysianassids. Peraeopods differ from gnathopods in having the carpus linear
and the propod narrow.

The third peraeopod is peculiar. The side plate is relatively immense, deeper
than all the rest, rather longer than the combined length of side plates 1-4, and
markedly bilobed. The basos is somewhat similar in shape and size, the meros
broadly expanded. The limb appears to be partly retroverted (probably the distal
4 segments). Peraeopod 4 has basos expanded, narrowing rather abruptly towards
its distal end ; while the basos of 5 is more regularly convex behind, the fourth and
fifth seements strongly spined. Small simple gills are borne on thoracic legs 2-6.
The brood lamellae are long and strap-shaped (fig. 1 N).

The pleopods are biramous, the long peduncle being expanded mesially, two
coupling hooks on inner distal angle. Uropod 1 longer than 2, inner ramus little
more than half the length of outer; uropod 2 with peduncle slender, the linear
rami subequal and shorter than peduncle, the inner ramus in both uropods 1 and 2
armed terminally with two setae and a stout spine, which may represent a second
segment. Similar stout terminal spines are found in Cylindryllioides, Barcenna,
Eophliantis, Kuria, and Wandelia, The third uropod has a short stout peduncle,
the two rami stout, conical, equal and rather longer than pedunele,

316 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

The telson is cleft nearly to the base, each half tapering to a pointed extremity
and armed with a single seta,

Length. From 1:5 nnn—3 nun. Hivht examples were taken, Apr., 1939. Two
large specimens dissected were both female—one with four embryos (0°38 mm,
long). | cannot discern any difference which could be regarded as related to sex.

Colour. In spirit, pure white.

Loe, Rottnest, Western Australia. On west side of Bathurst Point, im fine
sand and weed between large boulders where wayes break continually, (Cotypes
in South Australian Museum. )

Fig. 2, A—D, Prophtias anomatus: A, telson; B, pleapod; C.D, uropods 1-3. B, Ceine egregia
Chilton; pleopod.

2, Cuma Della Valle.

Della Valle, 1893; Stebbing, 1899 and 1906; Chilton, 1919; Pirlot, 1986 (Peri-
phiias) and 1938.

Body earinate, moderately compressed, head small, not deep, without rostrum ;
eye small, red; peraeon segment 1 produced into ‘‘hood’’ overhanging the head,
longer than second segment; pleon segments 4-6 reduced; telson apically clett ;
side plates 1—4 less deep than related sewments; side plate 5 bilobed, shallow.

Antennae short, slender, antenna 2 the longer; mandible with molar small,
modified; lower lip with inner lobe slightly indicated; maxillipedes normal;
enathopods subchelate, gnathopod 2 (in male) chelate; uropods 1 and 2 biramous;
uropod 3 uniramous.

Remarks, Just as this paper was practically completed, my attention was
directed by Mr. Sheard to Pirlot’s referenees to this genus, who kindly sent me
a copy of that author’s later paper. Pirlot’s description (under the generic name
Periphlias) of his species carinalus had suggested that the Amphipod in question
was a fairly typical Phliantid. Im 1938 the genus Ceina is listed among the Tali-
tridae, and the species carinatus sunk in egregia. The genus differs, so far as at
present known, from all of the remaining members of this family, as well as from

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 317

all of the Phliantidae, in the condition of the second enathopod of the male, That
condition, however, differs, in degree only, from what T have ealled the para-
chelate, and, since several of the species here recorded are known from the female
ouly, Ceina may prove not to be peeuliar in this feature,
With one species,
Sarna BaREGIA Chilton,

Chilton, 1883, p. 77, pl. it (Nieea) ; Della Valle, 1898, p. 430, pl. viii, figs. 14-21;
Stebbing, 1906, p. 54; Chilton, 1919, p. 120, figs. 1-25; ? Pirlot, 1936, p. 29,
figs. 121-3, andl 1938, pp. 329-30.

Remarks, Pirlot (ec. p. 330) considers that, apart from the shape of the head
(whith he says Chilton has figured incorrectly), the discrepancies between his ac-
count and that of Chilton are to be attributed to the smaller size of his Siboga
specimen.

While that may well be true of the antennae and perhaps of the mandible, the
carpus of peraeopod 5, and the dactyl of 4 and 4, it is rather unexpected to find
changes (consequent on growth) such as those in side plates 1 and + or the meros
of peraeopods 8 and 4. In view of the faet that C. egregia has apparently a limited
distribution inn New Zealand, it seems quite possible that the Suln specimen will
proye to belong to a distinet species.

3. Kurta Walker.
Walker, 1903; Stebhing, 1906; Sheard, 1936.

Body compressed, head small, partly concealed by first side plate, without
rostrum; side plates 1-4 deeper than their related segments; pleon segments 4—6
coalesced ; telson civided almost to the base. Antennae subequal, short, few seg-
mented, Mandible with dentate primary and secondary edges; molar rather large ;
maxilliped with both plates small, especially the outer. Gnathopods alike, slender,
subequal, subchelate; peraeopods 8-5 very robust; side plates oderate, basos and
meros well expanded. Uropods 1 and 2 with pednnele shorter than the rami,
which are equal and similar; uropod 3, the single ramus as lone as pedunele.

Remorks, Of this genus, Walker remarks that it is very aberrant, but appar-
ently most nearly related to Birecnna which, as he points ont, ‘tseems . . . . out
of place with genera such as Pereionolus, Iphinotus, ete’’.

The generic definition given by Walker has been somewhat amplified, addi-
tional characters being introduced for comparison with Prophlias, to which, much
more than to Bireenna, does it show kinship. From Bircenna it differs most con-
spicuously in its compressed body and deep side plates, in both of which it re-
sembles Prophlias.

With one species.

318 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Kuria LoncimaAna Walker.

Walker, 1903, p. 228, pl. xiv B, fies. 5-An; Stebbing, 1906, p. 726; Chilton, 1909,
p. 63; Sheard, 1936, pp. 457 and 463.

Remarks. Tt is of intevest that while this species has so much in ¢ommmon with
P. anomalus, it yet differs quite strikingly in numerous details; and one or the
other may retain a less specialized condition in respect to any given character.
Thus in Kuri the head appears less deep, the side plates deeper. Side plate 4 is
large, excavate behind, principally dorsally; side plates 5, 6, and 7 are apparently
small and alike, whereas in Prophlias side plate 4 is curyed and slender (that is,
ereatly excavated), and side plate 5 is extraordinarily developed. In Murra it is
the basos of peracopod 5 which makes the largest contribution to the lateral shield,
in Prophlias the basos of peracopod 3 is most developed. Uropod 3 is reduced in
size and uniramous in Kuria, whereas in P. anemalus it is well developed and re-
tains the more generalized equal biramous condition.

Similarly with the head appendages. Kuria shows both antennae unmodified
except that they are small, and few segmented, the pedunele being scarcely dis-
tinenished from flagellar portion.

In Prophtias the second antenna is enrionsly modified, and so flattened down
upon the head that under cursory inspection if appears absent, In the mouth parts
the mandible is less reduced in Kuria, but Prophlias anomalus (alone of the ment
bers of this family in which the month parts are fully described) has the first
maxilla moderately complete, and the lower lip well developed and bilohed, in
which latter it is approached by the eondition in Biancolina,

The maxilliped of Auria shows ihe outer plate almost vestigial, whereas. in
Prophlias it is the inner plate whieh is very reduced.

In both species the isehium is unusually long in the gnathopods, and the hands
more nearly retain the subchelate condition, although in Arta the dactyl is shown
extending well beyond the palm, approaching the condition for which T haye pro-
posed the term paruchelate.

Notwithstanding these differences Kuria and Prophlias constitute a distinct
group in this family remote from the more vermiform genera—Biancoliia, per-
haps, providing a link.

4, Brancouimna Della Valle.

Della Valle, 18938, p. 562; Stebbing, 1906, p, 646, part.

Body slightly compressed, peracon strongly developed, segments subequal,
pleon segments 4—6 not greatly reduced. Head longer than deep, as long as com-
bined length of peracon segments 1 and 2, Eye small, round, red, A moderately

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 319

well developed intersegmental region or ‘‘neck’’; antenna 1 longer than antenna 2.
Labrum wide, short, its anterior border slightly emarginate. Mandible with
toothed cutting edge, without molar.

Fig. 3. Biancolina australis: A, 9, lateral view; B, head; C, head, antero-dorsal view, show-
ing insertion of antennae, and labrum with an overlying plate which from its position ean
searcely be a rostrum, but may be an epistome; D, D’, mandibles; B, maxilla 1, with inner plate
from opposite side; F, maxilla 2; G, maxilliped, with plates and palp more highly magnified;
H, telson and uropod 3,

Lower lip with large inner lobe; maxilla 1 without palp, inner plate small
with single seta; maxilla 2 small, inner plate slender with few terminal setae, and
others scattered along its mesial border. Maxilliped with small inner plate, palp

three- or four-segmented,

320 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Side plates shallow, gnathopods slender, subchelate or parachelate. Peraeo-
pods 1—5 with basos expanded, oval; 1-2, robust with expanded meros ; 38-5 slender
with short narrow carpus, propod and dactyl forming prehensile, parachelate
hand.

Pleopods with wide rami, peduncle, therefore, not appearing widened mesi-
ally, Uropods biramous, peduncles lamellar; those of 1 and 2 provided with
phimose setae on their lateral border.

Telson apically cleft or emarginate.

Remarks. he likeness of the Western Australian species to that from the
Mediterranean is extraordinarily close, extending frequently to such minute de-
taily that their close kinship is scarcely open to doubt. The head is, however, alto-
gether unlike that figured by Stebbing (1874, fig. 1b) for Ampithoe cuniculus,
with which that author had identified (1899) Della Valle’s species. This species
described by Stebbing from the English littoral is more than three times the length
of that from the Mediterranean. and his suegestion that Della Valle’s small speci-
mens were but juvenile females (1906, p. 647) was apparently an assumption, for,
in uniting these forms (1899, p. 350), Stebbing did not claim to have examined
the Mediterranean species. The Western Australian specimen is equally small,
but is fully adult (a female with embryos).

Tt seems probable, therefore, that this identification is mistaken, and that the
two European forms are, as Della Valle believed, #enerically distinct and refer-
able to different families,

Like Prophlias anomalus, the Australian species of Biancolina Della Valle
departs in several particulars from the Bircennid facies, but. these differences ap-
pear, in every case, as retentions of a more primitive (i.e. less reduced) condition.
Tn the relative leneth of the peraeon segments this genus is in close agreement with
Kwa.

With two species, known from female only.

Telson apically emarginate, uropods 1 and 2 with peduncle armed with few setae

and with rami unequal . .. algicola.
Telson apically cleft, uropods 1 and 2 2 with peduncle armed with several setae,
rami subequal iM ot 3 bea 4 or i+ .. australis.

Brancoura Aucrcona Della Valle.
Della Valle, 1893, p. 562, pl. iii, fies, 11 and 32, figs, 38-53,
Biancolina cuniculus Stebbing, 1906, p. 647, part.

Remarks. Apparently known from two specimens only, probably female,
1:5 mm. in length. Bright yellow in colour, ‘Taken in water less than 1 m, in
depth in the Bay of Naples,

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 321

BIANCOLINA AUSTRALIS sp. nov.

Integument parchment-like. Body slender, sub-cylindrical. Head rounded,
longer than deep. Eve small, round. Peraeon well developed, first segment not
longer than second, side plates shallow, scarcely touching, pleon downturned, seg-
ments distinct, urus not extremely reduced, telson cleft at apex.

Antennae arising close to middle line on antero-dorsal surface of the head.
Antenna 1 slender with rounded basal segment, remaining segments without dif-
ferentiation into pedunele and flagellum, linear, 10 segments, with setae and with

Fig. 4. Biancolina australis: A, gnathopod 1; B, gnathopod 2; C, D, and E, peraeopods
2,3 and 4; F, G, uropods 1 and 2; H, pleopod.

aesthetes on 7, 8,9. Antenna 2 stouter and shorter than antenna 1, only five dis-
tinct segments, with scattered setae, the last segment minute. Labrum wide and
shallow, its free border faintly emarginate.

Mandibles exactly as in algicola: lower lip not seen; maxilla 1, with small
inner plate armed with single seta, outer plate stout, with about seven stout spine
teeth, palp wanting. Maxilla 2 and maxilliped agreeing with those of algicola,
except that the appendages of australis are apparently slightly more setose, and
that the palp is four-segmented (Della Valle shows but three, perhaps overlooking
a basal segment). Gnathopods nearly alike, the hand rather closely resembling
that of Bircenna (B. nichollsi and gnathopod 2 of B. ignea), the dactyl over-
lapping considerably the short convex palm. The carpus, however, is shorter and

322 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

more triangular in outline, as in Prophiivs, In gnathopod 1 the hinder border of
carpus and propod is armed with close-set setae, appearing denticulate.

Peraeopods 1 and 2, short and stout, with sub-oval basos and wide deeurrent
meros; peraeopods 3-5 longer and more slender, basos uniformly expanded with
few crenations and setae, meros less widened, carpus distinctly narrowed, propod
long and curved, and with the daetyl apparently prehensile on a minute palm.
Short simple gills on thoracie lees 2-5, brood lamellae wider than in Prophlias.
The pleopods biramous, wide peduncle with three coupling hooks, the rami being
so broad that the expansion of the peduncle is less obyious,

Uropods biraniwous; uropod 1, peduncle wide, longer than rami, inner ramus
more slender and slightly shorter than outer; uropod 2, pedunele shorter and nar-
rower than in uropod 1, subequal to rami, which are slender and equal. In both
uropod 1 and 2 the outer aspect is set with long plumose setae more numerous than
in algicola, Uropod 3 lamellar with two equal slender rami and one long seta, The
inner ramus is straight, and bears two terminal setae; the outer is curved, its apex
upturned, and bears a terminal hooked spine,

Size. Leneth as fieured, 1-3 mm. Female, four embryos.

Colour (in spirit) pale yellowish-green.

Loe. Rottnest, Western Australia, West of Bathurst Point, in sand and
weed among boulders with waves breaking continually, Collected Apr., 1989,

Remarks, The likeness to algicola is astonishingly close, and in size the two
species also agree. Of the Propliliantidae, this genus has undergone least modifiea-
tion of the pleopods and least reduction of urus and uropods. In its external form
its shallow side plates, its antennae, mouth parts, ynathopods, ete., it has attaimed
the condition typical of the family.

5. Hopuntian'ris Sheard.

Peraeon strongly developed (sub-cylindrieal). Tead almost spherical, sep-
arated by well-marked neck from the first peraeon segment, which is little longer
than second, without sternal flange, Side plates shallow. Pleon segments 46
distinet. Telson small, upturned, cleft to base. Antennae short, slender, sub-
equal, the first slightly longer; molar present on right mandible; maxilla 1 with
palp vestigial ; gnathopods simple, 1 moderately slender, 2 longer and more slender,
with distal end of propod produced into slight tooth; peraeopods 3-5 with basos
broadly produced, peraeopod 5 the longest; pleapods biramous, 2-3 with peduncle
widely expanded. Uropods 1 and 2 biramous, uropod 3 a very small bilobed
structure. (1)

(1) Mr. Sheard informs me that a re-examination of the type eonfirms his original description
of this appendage as ‘*biramous’’.

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 323

fiemarks. Very near to Wandelia, from which it is distinguished by relative
shortness of first peraeon segment, the shallowness of the side plates, the simple
gnathopods, the expanded peduncles of pleopods 2 and 3, and the condition of the
third uropod.

With one species.

HOPHLIANTIS TINDALEI Sheard.
Sheard, 1936, p. 457, figs. 1-2.

Remarks. Through the kindness of Mr. K. Sheard | have been able to examine
a cotype of this species.

Fig. 5, A-F, Eophliantis tindalei Sheard; A, head and peraeon segment 1, lateral view;
B, maxilla 1; C, telson with uropod 3 in position, in dorsal view; D, E, uropods 1 and 2; F,
uropod 8 dissected out. G-H, Wandelia crassipes Chevreux G, mandibles; H, urus in side view.

In the first maxilla I find the palp represented by a vestige only (fig.5 B). Mr.
Sheard, to whom I have referred this point, has examined further material, and,
in a recent letter, states that he is able to confirm this. Further, in the very small
specimen (possibly very immature) which I have examined, the two lobes of uro-
pod 3 are not separate from the peduncle. The species may prove to be less distinet
from Wandelia crassipes than has been supposed, and a study of more abundant
material render it necessary to transfer this species to Wandelia. Judging from

324 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Sheard’s figures, there seems to be a small difference in the first and second uro-
pods of male and female, the first pair im the female and the second in the male
being the longer

6, WANDELIA Chevreux.

Body robust, sub-eylindrical ; head without rostrum, Hye small, oyal. First
peraeon segment much longer than second, its sternite not produced into ventral
flange. Pleon segments 4-6 reduced. Telson cleft to the base.

Antennae short, slender, sub-equal, the second slightly the longer; upper lip
with margin entire, rounded ; mandible with vestigial molar ; first maxilla without
palp; maxilla 2 with outer plate longer than inner; maxilliped with inner plate
longer than outer, palp 4-segmented.,

Gnatbopods alike, slender; ischium long, propod produced into a small tooth ;
peraeopods short and stout; 3-5 with basos expanded; pleopods biramous, with
pedunele only moderately widened ; uropods 1 and 2 biramons, 3 with single ramus
incompletely marked off from peduncle,

With two species.

Head sub-globular, gnathopods long and slender, peraeopods 3-5 with carpus

linear .. erassipes.
Head longer than deep, gnathopods short, peracopods 3-3 with carpus expanded
and decurrent ne a : 5 ve wé ie .. japonensis.

WANDELIA CRASSIPES Chevreux.

Chevreux, 1906, p. 45, figs. 24-6; Chilton, 1909 (Bircenna crassipes), p. 5;
Chevreux, 1913 (B, erassipes), pp, 113-4; Sheard, 1936, p. 460 (B. crasstpes)-
Remarks. This species differs from Bircenna spp. chiefly in the absence of

the sternal flange on the first peraeon segment. Other differences are found in the
gnathopods and pleopods. In the second, figured by Chevreux, the pedunele is
shown having a width one-and-a-half times as great as the length. In prepara-
tions made (2) by Chilton, one of the pleopods, probably the first, shows the ped-
unele only as wide as long. Iu Bircenna, as noted below, all ot the pleopods have
the pedunele expanded, the width being twice the length. In Prophlias, as already
stated, the more usual Amphipodan condition is found with length of peduncle
wreater than width, although some widening is evident. In every case, however,
the expansion is mesial, so that the rami of any pair of pleopods tend to be more
widely removed, and the peduneles to come into contact.

(2) In one surtts ular this specimen appears to differ from that described by Chevreux. The
partly disseated head shows the two mandibles still attached. he left is as figured hy Cheyreux
but the ight seems to have a prominence representing the molar,

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 325

The third uropod is said by Cheyreux to possess a short. peduncle from whieh
the lamellar ramus is not distinetly separated, whereas in Bircenna fulva, accord-
ing to Chilton (1909), the third uropod consists in but a single bifid segment,

WANDELIA JAPONENSIS sp. NOV.

Description. @. Body robust, snb-eylindrical; head longer than deep; eye
small, oval; first peraeon segment considerably longer than second; side plates
very shallow, widely separated, telson appearing oblong, with corners rounded,
cleft to the base.

Vig, 6. Wandelia japonensis: A, lateral view (2); B, gnathopod 2; CE, peracopods 3-5.

Antennae short, sub-equal; antenna 1 with six segments, aesthetes on the last
two; antenna 2, also with six segments, slightly longer and stouter than antenna 1;
upper lip, mandibles, maxillae, and maxillipeds as in crussipes except that the
inner plate of maxilla Ll appears to bear but a single seta.

Gnathopods alike, parachelate; less slender and relatively shorter than in
crassipes, ischia not unusually long, propod in gnathopod 1 minutely denticulate,
its distal end produced into blunt tooth-like prominence. Peraeopods robust; 1
and 2 with basos oval, 8-5 with basos expanded, but the hinder border not erenate,
the carpus as well as the meros expanded and deeurrent; most of the segments
fringed with setae.

326 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Pleopods, with peduncle comparatively little expanded mesially, most notice-
ably in pleopod 3, which is shortest ; in 1 and 2 there is a marked production of the
peduncle distally along the mesial edge of the imner ramus.

Fast

Fig. 7. A-I, Wandelia japonensis: A—B, antennae 1 and 2; C, lower lip; D, gnathopod 1;
E-G, uropods 1-3; H, telson; I, pleopod 3. J—O, Waundelia japonensis (Chilton’s figs.) : J-K,
mandibles; L—M, maxillae 1 and 2; N, half maxilliped; O, uropod 2, uropod 38, telson.

Uropods 1 and 2 alike, sub-equal, 3 with ramus indistinct (?).

Size: 3-5mm. Three @ 2, two with fully-developed brood pouch.

Loc. Otaru, Hokkaido, Japan. Coll. Dr. Hatta, ‘‘From the Medulla of
Undaria’’.

NICHOLLS—-THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 327

Remarks. These specimens form part of Dr. Chilton’s collection of Amphi-
poda, and seem not to have been described. They were labelled Bircenna japon-
ensis n. sp., but lack, however, the flange on the first peraeon segment, which is
characteristic of Bircenna. From Wandelia crasstpes they differ most noticeably
in the long Capretla-like head (crasstpes apparently agreeing with Hophliantis
tindalet in having the head sub-globular), in the shorter and stouter gnathopods,
and in the oval basos of peraeopods 1 and 2. The long first peraeon segment is
found in both crassipes and japonensis. The mouth parts and peraeopods are
strikingly like those of crassipes excepting that more of the joints are widened and
decurrent, and many are abundantly fringed with setae, which is unusual in this
family.

Of interest is the occurrence of a short tendril-like twisting at the ends of
many of the setae of the brood lamella. In the specimen dissected, so firmly were
the lamellae linked by this device that they would more readily tear than separate.
A similar twisting of these setae has been observed in Ceina egregia, Bircenna
ignea, Cylindryllioides mawsoni, and in a new and undeseribed Western Aus-
tralian species of Quasimodia. In Prophlias, setae were wanting from most
lamellae, but when present they show a slight apical twisting. It will probably
prove to be of general occurrence in both the Prophliantidae and the Phliantidae.

Since writing the above notes, Mr. Sheard has informed me that he has ob-
tained, through the courtesy of the Canterbury University Museum, New Zealand,
manuscript and drawings of the late Professor Chilton referring to this species.
These notes and drawings, which were made from a relatively fresh specimen, sub-
stantially agree with my own observations.

With regard to the mouthparts, uropod 3, and telson, Chilton states; ‘‘The
first maxilla has no sign of a palp, the outer lobe is strong with tufts of setae near
the middle of the outer margin and about 6 or 7 stout, dentate teeth at the ex-
tremity ; the inner lobe is slender, slightly more than half as long as the outer,
and ends in a single fine setae.

‘“The second maxilla has the two lobes of about the same size, the setae at the
extremity of both lobes are rather stouter than usual in this appendage; the outer
lobe has also several tufts of fine setae on its outer margin and a fringe of fine setae
on its inner margin.

‘““The mandibles are slender, entirely without palp, and there is no molar
tubercle; the cutting edge is broad, formed of three or four teeth, one larger than
the others and triangular; the accessory process is small, and in each mandible
ends in four very sharp curved teeth. The third uropod consists of a single piece
which may represent the peduncle and ramus combined. The extremity curves
upwards, and is shown in the figure as bent back on its more proximal portion; it

328 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ends in a short sub-acute tooth, with two setae on its outer side and one on its
inner. The telson appears cleft to the base, each half is rectangular, and bears a
fine seta at the inner distal angle.’’

Chilton’s figures of these parts are reproduced (fig. 6, P-U).

Mr. Sheard has called my attention, also, to the fact that Stephensen (Trans.
Sapporo Nat. Hist. Soc., Vol. 13, 1983) had published a deseription of a new
Japanese Amphipod very probably from the sanie locality as W. japonensis, which
he named Ceinina japonica. This was said to be taken on brown algae, and was
referred by Stephensen to the Talitridae,

It seems probable that, like Ceina, it should also be assigned to the Prophhan-
tidae, but I am unable to determine this, as no copy of Stephensen’s paper is avail-
able to me.

It is, of course, a possibility that it may prove to be identical with the species
here referred to Wandelia, As set ont, above, this species differs in several details
from W. crassipes, but these differences scem scarcely sufficient to warrant the
establishment of a new genus.

7. Biremnna Chilton.

Body sub-eylindrical; head large, sub-spherical, without rostrum ; eyes small,
round or oval. First peraeon segment longer than second; its sternite ventrally
produced into a deep, curved transverse flange, the concavity forwardly directed,
Pleon segments 4-6 greatly reduced. Telson cleft to the base.

Antennae short, slender, sub-equal, the first slightly larger; mandible with
molar weak or wanting; first maxilla without palp; maxilliped with palp four-
segmented; gnathopods short, moderately stout, parachelate or imperfectly sub-
chelate; peraeopods 3-5 with basos expanded; pleopods biramous, with peduncles
broadly produced mesially ; uropods 1 and 2 biramous, 3 with single ramus incom-
pletely indicated.

With three species.

1. Molar wanting on mandible .. ‘ ie a 5 .. fulva.
Weak molar present on both mandibles i2 . rp

2, Antennae slender, peraeopods 3—d scarcely longer than depth of body nichollst.
Antennae stout, peraeopods 4-5 longer than depth of body . . .. tgnea.

BircenNA FuLYA Chilton.
Chilton, 1883 (B. fuluus), p. 264, pl. xxi, fig. 1; 1909 (B. fulva), p. 59, figs. 1-3;
Stebbing, 1889 (B fulvus), p. 421, and 1906, p. 205; Sheard, 1936, p. 460,
fig. 3.

NIcCHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 329

Remarks, The vather scanty figures of this species given by Chilton have been
supplemented by Sheard in a number of drawings made from preparations of a
syntype. The figure (3 E) of maxilla 1 is, in my opinion, the complete appendaye,
otherwise it is difficult to reconcile with the condition of this appendage in the two
remaining species of this genus, which appear in other respeets very closely akin
to fulvw. It seems probable that the third member (fig. 3 G) is the detached outer
plate of maxilla 2.

Chilton’s habitus figure (1883, fig. 1) fails to show the greater length of the
first peracon segment on which, too, the ventral sternal flange is quite well
developed.

BirncENNA NICHOLLS! Sheard.
Sheard, 1936, p. 461, fig. 4,

Remarks. Since 1986, when the first specimen (an ovigerous 2) of this
species was collected, numerous other examples have come to light not only trom
Sellick Reef but also from other localities in St. Vincent Gulf.

é 3 are perhaps represented in the collection, but if so, differences between
the sexes must be yery slight, appearing only in gnathopods and uropods. So far
as the gnathopods are concerned small differences, which I[ take to be related to
sex, are seen in propod and dactyl, the former stouter aud the dactyl shorter in
the presumed male. In uropod 1 the inner ramus is the more slender, and is lounger
than the peduncle; wopod 2 shows the inequality of the rami more markedly; but
these may prove to be merely individual variations. In uropod 3 the small conical
ramus is very incompletely separated from the peduncular region, and in side
view the appendage has the appearance of being bilobed. Pleopods 1 and 3 exhibit
that projection at the proximal end of the outer margin of the inuer ramus, to
which Chilton has ealled attention in fulva (1909, fig. 1).

BinCENNA IGNEA sp. Nov.

Description. Body sub-eylindrical, rather short and stout; head nearly
globular, more massive inthe ¢ ; eye small, nearly round, with few ocelli (17-20),
peraeon strongly developed, peraeon segment 1 much longer than 2; side plates
very shallow; pleon segments 4-6 greatly reduced; telson completely cleft, the
apices broadly rounded.

Antennae sub-equal, short, antenna 1 of @ with seven segments, all but the
last of the four flagellar sezements with aesthetes, antenna 2 slightly stouter, with
six distinet segments; in the ¢@ the antennae are markedly stouter, antenna 1
flagellum with five segments, four bearing bushy tutts of aesthetes. Upper lip

330 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Fig. 8, A, Bircenna fulva: head and peraeon segment 1, lateral view. B-P, Bircenna
nichollst Sheard: B, entire animal, lateral view; C, peraeon segment 1, from the side, and D, from
the front; E, maxilla 1; F, distal part of maxilla 2; G, H, inner and outer plates of maxilliped;
1, urus and uropods from aboye; J, the same partly dissected and somewhat flattened; K, 1,
uropods 2 and 1; M, uropod 3, lateral view; N, the same removed and more highly magnified ;
O, pleopod 3; P, peraeopod 5, with part of hinder border of basos enlarged.

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE S34

rounded, wider than deep. Mandible with molar weak, primary edge not defi-
nitely toothed, minute secondary cutting edge with three slender teeth. Lower lip
without inner lobes, rounded apices of outer lobes with setules; maxilla 1 with
vestige of palp, inner plate with single seta reaching almost as far distally as the
spines on outer plate; maxilla 2, with plates sub-equal. inner plate much less ob-

Vig. 9. Bircenna ignea: A, lateral view; B, head, with peraeon segment 1 (?); C, head (4);
D, lower lip; E, mandible; F-G, maxillae 1 and 2; H, front view of peraeon segment 1; T, gnuth-
opod 1; J, pleapod #; KK, urns, in dorsal yiew, uropod 3 remoyed from one side,

liquely truneate than in nichollst. Maxilliped with outer plate armed with setae
along its inner border, shorter than inner plate.

The sternite of the first peraeon segment downwardly produced, the curved
plate showing a paired circular perforation (or perhaps merely thin transparent
area).

Gnathopods alike, minutely parachelate, slender, gnathopod 1 carpus as lone
as propod, the latter with minute palm, slender dactyl as long as hinder border of
propod; gnathopod 2 with dactyl about three-fourths of length of propod, Peraeo-
pods stout, peraeopod 1 with postero-distal angle of propod produced into strong

332 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tooth, approaching the condition figured by Sheard for gnathopod 2 of fulva
(1986, fig. 3R.) ; peraeopods 4 and 5, expansion on hinder border of basos with but
a single notch and seta. Uropods 1 and 2 stout, rami subequal and longer than
peduneles, each bearing stout terminal spine; uropod 3, short lamellar with single
small conical ramus. Apices of telson each bearing a seta and a spinule.

Vig. 10. Bireenna ignea: A, gnathopod 2; B, propod and dactyl, peraeopod 1; C—L, peraeo-
pods 3-5,

Length: 1-5 mm—2 mm.

Colour. <A fiery red.

Loc. Amongst fine seaweed and sand; nearly a dozen specimens, including
four @ 8, taken in November, 1938, Shelly Beach, Nornalup, South-western
Australia.

Remarks. All three species of this genus are very closely alike. From
nichollsi, ignea may be distinguished by the lesser depth of its peraeon segments
and the greater relative length of the hinder peraeopods. The expansion of the
basos of these peraeopods (3-5) is greater in nichollsi, although the legs are actu-
ally shorter. There is a difference in the shape of the head of these two species.
The antennae are distinctly stouter in ignea, the only species in which sex distine-
tions affecting the antennae have been seen. The eyes are larger, but seem to have

NICHOLLS—THE PROPHLIANTIDAE 333

fewer ocelli, which are black on a red pigmented ground. In michollsi the ocelli
are difficult to make out, but they appear to be more numerous and, in preserved
specimens, quite black ; the colour in life of this species is not recorded.

CYLINDRYLLIOWES Nicholls.
Nicholls, 1938.

Body slender, sub-cylindrical. Head longer than deep, without rostrum, with
sub-ocular incisure (?), and in the relaxed condition separated from the first
peraeon segment by a wide intersegmental region or ‘‘neck’’. Peraeon long, first
segment slightly longer than the second, and without ventral sternal projection.
Side plates short and very shallow, widely separated. Metasome well developed,
but pleon segments 4-6 greatly reduced without definite intersegmental boun-
daries. Telson minute, deeply cleft.

Antennae short, stout, subequal, 2 the shorter; upper lip rounded, with shal-
low median emargination ; reduced molar on left (?) mandible; lower lip without
inner lobes; maxilla 1 without palp; maxilla 2 plates sub-equal; maxilliped with
short stout four-segmented palp, inner and outer plates sub-equal. Gnathopod 1]
shorter than 2, otherwise alike, slender, parachelate ; peraeopods short, stout, basos
expanded in 3-5; pleopods with short peduncle, the single slender ramus with
few segments; uropods 1 and 2 biramous, rami sub-equal, 3 peduncle lamellar,
without rami.

With one species.

CYLINDRYLLIOIDES MAWSONI Nicholls.

Nicholls, 1938, p. 59, figs. 30, 31.

Remarks. Of all of the species of this family, this has attained most nearly
to the vermiform condition.

The side plates are extremely reduced and widely spaced, the urus quite
minute, and the pleopods with but a single ramus, the peduncle small and scarcely
widened.

Taken at Macquarie Island, by H. Hamilton, in 1913.

With the exclusion, from the Phliantidae, of Bircenna, Wandelia, and Kuria,
the remaining genera constitute a more coherent family, which may be defined as
follows:

PHULIANTIDAE Stebbing.

Body depressed; peraeon side plates expanded. Pleon strongly flexed ven-
trally, subject to degradation. Antennae 1 and 2 very short. Antenna 1 with

334 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

peduncle expanded, no accessory flagellum. Upper lip with distal margin usually
undivided. Lower lip with or without inner lobes. Mandible without palp. Max-
illa 1 without inner lobe, palp absent or one-jointed, small. Maxilliped with palp
variable. Gnathopods 1 and 2 simple or subchelate.(*) One or more pleopods
with peduncle expanded. Pleopod 3 with inner ramus subject to degradation.
Uropod 3 usually not biramous. Telson short, entire, not upturned.

With 10 genera, 13 species, including a new and as yet undescribed Quasi-
modia species from Western Australia.

These are all to be readily recognized by their broadly depressed body, short
entire telson, and wide side plates.

Rather similar side plates are met with in the more compressed Prophlian-
tidae, and in Biancolina the telson is almost entire. In the mouthparts the families
are sharply separated by the condition of the first maxilla, and, in both, parallel
degeneration has occurred in one or more of the parts and of the pleopods—per-
haps consequences of similar habitat and mode of life.

LITERATURE.

Chevreux, FE. (1906) : Lxped. Ant. Franc. (1903-1905), ‘* Amphipodes’’.

Chevreux, E. (1913) : Deuxieme Exp. Franc. (1908-1910), ‘« Amphipodes’’.

Chilton, C. (1884) : Trans, N.Z. Inst., Vol. 16.

Chilton, C. (1909) : Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. 41.

Chilton, C. (1919): Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. 51.

Della Valle, A. (1893) : 7. Fl. Neapel, Vol. 20.

Nicholls, G. E. (1938) : Austr. Ant, Baxped. (1911-1914), Sci. Rep. Ser. C, Vol. 2,
pt. 4.

Pirlot, J. M. (1936) : Stboga Expeditie Mono., 38e.

Pirlot, J. M. (1938) : Siboga Expeditie Mono., 33f.

Sheard, K. (1986) : Rec. 8S. Austr. Mus., Vol. V, pt. 4.

Sheard, K. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc. Sth, Austr., Vol. 61.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1874): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 4, Vol. 14.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1889) : Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 7, Vol. 3.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1899) : Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., Ser. 2, Vol. 7.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1906) : Das Tierreich, Vol. 21.

Stephensen, K. (1933) : Trans. Sapporo Nat. Hist., Vol. 13.

Walker, A. O. (1903) : Nat. Hist. Sokotra.

(3) Mr. Sheard informs me that the word ‘‘sub’’ was omitted between the words ‘‘ weakly’?
and ‘‘chelate’’ in his definition of the sub-family Phliantinae (Sheard, 1936, p. 463).

FOSSIL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS OF PROBABLE
PLEISTOCENE AGE FROM AITAPE, NEW GUINEA

By FRANK J. FENNER, M.B., B.S., D.T.M., ASSISTANT PHYSICAL
ANTHROPOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, ADELAIDE.

Summary

This paper consists of a description of fragments of a fossil human skull found in situ
in the Barida Area of the Aitape district of the Mandated Territory of New Guinea by
Paul S. Hossfeld, now Senior Geologist of the Northern Australia Survey.

A short account of the discovery and geological surroundings of the specimen is given
herewith from information communicated by the finder. Mr. Hossfeld intends to
prepare a detailed geological description on his return from the extensive fieldwork
on which he is at present engaged.

FOSSIL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS or PROBABLE
PLEISTOCENE AGE rrom AITAPE, NEW GUINEA

By FRANK J. FENNER, M.B., B.S., D.T,M., Assisranwr Puystcar, ANTHROPOLOGIST,

SourH AusrraLian Museum, Anrnainr.
Plates xxiii-xxiv, Text-fiy, 1-9.

This paper consists of a description of fragments of a fossil human skull found
i situ in the Barida Avea of the Aitape district of the Mandated Territory of New
Guinea by Paul S. Hossfteld, now Senior Geologist of the Northern Australia
Survey.

A short account of the discovery and geological surroundings of the specimen
is given herewith from information communieated by the finder. Mr, Hossfeld
intends to prepare a detailed #eological description on his return from the extensive
fieldwork on which he is at present engaged.

LOCALITY OF TITE DISCOVERY.

The skull was fonnd in 1929 and note was made of the fact at that time by
Nason-Jones (1930) in the report of the operations in New Guinea of the Anglo-
Persian Oil Company, The acconnt reads, “‘From the ill-bedded blue clays of the
Paniri Creek, which are typical of the argillaceous facies throughout the area, were
obtained the following fossils, indicating the life of the period | Upper Wanimo,
Pleistocene | which was very much that of the present day, Perhaps of most note
is the record of a fragment of a buman skull, which, together with carbonized
coconut-shell, was found in a thin bed of Mollusea outcropping in the side of the
stream, A further search for teeth or other remains was conducted without success,
and the skull fragment remains in the possession of the finder, Mr. P. 8. Hossfeld.’’
There is no record of any other mammalian bones being present. The original speci-
men is now housed in ihe Australian fnstitule of Anatomy, Canberra.

Fig. 1 shows the locality of the find and a geological seetion of the area. The
exact location is on the east bank of the Paniri Creek near Barida Village, Aitape,
New Guinea, 10 niles mland and about 800 ft, above sea-level.

The skull was overlain by four feet of undisturbed littoral marine deposit
ane six feet of alluvial gravel. Above this was soil with primary forest (1). In

{1) Hoxsfeld aakes the note Phere are two types of forest in New Guinea, primary and
sseondary. The primary forest is the true virgin forest, the secondary may appear to be so but

is in fact the forest which has grown up after the primary forest has been eleared for a temporary
garden by the natives'’,

336 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the littoral marine deposits in whieh the skull oceuvred several specimens of shells
were collected, They include Area granosa (marine), Nerina cornea (brackish
water, mangroye), Telescopiwn fuscum (brackish water), Cyrena coaxans (fresh
10 brackish water), Welania ?juneea, MW. Yeanaliculata, 24. reeta (fresh water).
Laoma sp.. Cyclophorus sp., Papuima sp. (land shells). In addition there were
partly Henified remains of (2) eoconnt husk. Pl. xxiii shows some of the shells
found in close association with the skull. The determination of these was carried
out by Max. B.C, Cotton, conehologist at the South Australian Musenm, whose

comments are attached as a supplement to this paper.

PRIMARY = FOREST.

MANDATED TERRITOR
OF NEW GUITER, .-—>- 2 poe a ete oo
lr S ALLUVIAL GRAVEL. +?

)

10 ToRRes STeAITS _
s

.

Pig. 1. A, Map of New Guinea showing locality of find. B, Diagrammatic section of beds to
show occurrence of Aitape skull fagmont.

PARTS PRESENT.

The fragment cousisted originally of four pieces, three of which were easily
fitted together, The fracture lines between these pieces were fresh and the breaks
were caused by the implement used at the time of diseoyery. The reconstructed
calyvarium comprises the greater part of the frontal bone, the parts absent being
the left external angular process, the lower sections of both temporal processes
and both orbital plates. The nasal process is almost entire, and the sutural im-
pressions for the nasal bones and the nasal processes of the maxilla are preserved.
On the right side the sutural impression for the frontal process of the zygomatic
bone is undamaged. Portions of both parietal hones are present, their broken
edges running roughly parallel to the coronal suture and about three centimetres
behind it. The specimen shows no evidence of being waterworn.

FENNER—FOSSIL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS 337

The small piece which could not be fitted 10 the other fragments probably eon-
sists of parts of the left frontal and left great wing of the sphenoid and their
intervening sntiive. [is exaet position being indeterminate, it ean vield no accurate
information and will not be mentioned further,

Pl, xxiv shows the extent and condition of the skull. The apparent whiteness
of the broken edge is due to a proteetive veneer of mineral wax.

ORTENTATION,

The problem of ovienting the specimen correetly is a difficult one. The
Frankturt plane. involving the estimation of two points, is obvionsly nnusuitably
as a base line.

Keith (1925) has shown that a plane through the central parts of the fronto-
malar and parietoanastoid sutures corresponds approximately to the base of the
cerebrum, Since the right frontoanalar suture is complete, | have adopted this
subcerebral plan as a base line, as it yields more tmformation than the nasion-
inion plane or Schwalbe’s elabella-inion plane. ‘To allow ease of comparison with
other tracings the reconstruction has been made in the left lateral norma.

The difficultics of correctly orienting the Aitape fragment are considerably
ereater than Keith (1927) experienced with the Galilee skull owing to the absence
of malar and sphenoid bones, which Keith used to cheek his reconstructions,

During the discussion which follows T shall anticipate some of the conclusions
reached in later sections of the paper. Firstly, there are no features of the
remnant whieh demand its separation from the modern neanthropic type of skull,
Secondly, comparing its general ovtline and measurements with large series of
Australian and New Guinea skulls, it seemed that there were closer resemblanees
to the southern type of Australian skull (type A, Fenner (1939) ) than to modern
specimens from New Guinea. This does not imply that the Aitape fragment is
identified with the southern Australian type,

Tt was decided, therefore, to orientate if on fhe assumption that the com-
plete skull bore some resemblance to the southern type of Australian skull, and
use was made of Berry and Robertson’s tracings (1914) {to determine certain
average values whieh might help iv this attempt. Series of 25 skulls (insexed)
from New Gninea and 50 skulls (unsexed) from Swanport, South Australia, were
meastived, and the average figures used in the reconstruction of the skull.

In southern Australian skills the bregma lies about 88nmm., and the yertex
about dainm, above the subeecebral plane, the vertex being 33mm. posterior lo The
breoma. Orientating the Aitape skull with the breama 88 mm. above the snbeere-
bral plane and using the mean southern Australian values for sagittal parietal,

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

338

U

*(qxe} 008) (9,9 euvld [erqoreoqns [eI}IUr ay} SUIS UOTJONAYsUOD.IL — aUT] po}joq ‘“WoLjouTys
jeug = ouy ueyorg ‘oueyrd petqadtooqns Teug :Og ‘ewetd Tetqoxeoqns [eryrat :,9 ,g ‘yoodse Te1oyR, WoIZ ‘sMOT}INAJsUOIII poysaTsng

wenn?
en | oe
“Sud 2 4 ‘9 we
a of 0
rd
oe
* - o”
Y rae 4
. — “3

ao2 Pe ween

G

3

OUT

FENNER—FossiL. HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS 339
sagittal occipital, parieto-frontal and oecipito-frontal indives, the outline of the
posterior part of the skill was completed. (Hig. 2, broken line on base 8’C’).

It is obvious that this throws the lambda, the inion and the opisthion out of

their true relations with the subcerebral plane. Two methods exist by which to

bring them into position; the bregma may be lowered (or subcerebral plane raised),

Fig. 3.
AA, BB, CC, DD, EF lines of sections shown in figs. 5, 6 and 7.

Diopterographic tracing from facial aspect, skull orientated on subeerebral plane.

or the sagittal parietal index may be reduced (i.e. the curvature of the parietal

bone increased). These alternatives are shown in fig, 2, SC being the subcerebral

plane in its raised position and the fine dotted line representing the curvature

with a reduced sagittal parietal index. Owing to the deficiency of the parietal

bones if is impossible to say with certainty which is the correct method. Ilowever,

340 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

from the specimen one gains the impression that the parietal bones were gently
curved posteriorly, and thus the more strongly defined of the suggested outlines
(on plane SC) is more probably correct. Another feature suggesting that the
bregma should be brought nearer the subeerebral plane is that in the first position
(fig. 2) the vertex lies 14 mm. above the bregma, compared with an average of
7 mm. for the southern Australian skulls previously mentioned.

Fig. 4, Diopterographic tracing from vertical aspect, skull orientated on subcerebral plane,

Controlling figures, for example, the projected distances along the subcerebral

plane of the bregma, the lambda, the inion and the opisthion, and the angles of
coronal suture and nasion-bregma line to the subcerebral plane, support the
final reconstruction given in fig. 2.

The estimated greatest length of the skull is 185m.

FENNER ~FossiL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS 341

We inay next consider the rather meagre cata that is available for the estima-
tion of the maximum width ;

sinallest frontal width .. 2... 921.
vreatest frontal width .. 2... 110mm. (estimated)
stephanion width... 2... .. 94mm.
post-orbital width .. 2... .. 94mm. (estimated)
upper facial breadth... 2...) 114 mm. (estimated)

The most notable of these figures is the upper facial breadth which exceeds the
vreatest frontal width (cerebral) by 4 mn. This is the reverse of the conditions
found in any modern race except the Australian, and even here the disproportion
is usually smaller.

Two indices are available whieh will give some idea of the maxon skull
width: the relations of the mininuin and maximum frontal widths to the maximuin
parietal width. In the southern Australian series these indices are 73% and
83% respectively, giving values of 126mm, and 132mm, for the maximum width of
the Aitape skull.

The eranial index derived from these measurements is about 70%, which
agrees with the impression that the skull was long and narrow.

Fig. 3 and 4 show facial and vertical aspects of the skull, orientated on the
subcerebral plane.

GENERAL FEATURES.

The surface of the bone is smooth and has no inerustration, the bone substance
being fairly highly and uniformly mineralized. The weight of the original frag-
ments before their assemblage was 105 grammes.

The bone of the vault is not unduly thick, its dimensions in various regions
are compared with some Australian specimens in table I. [ft will be noticed

Tasup L.(?)

Aitape A25341 A38030 A16531 119 340

Above supra-orbital notches 14 12 15 12 15

On right supraciliary eminence 17 12 16 15 15 17
On left supraciliary eminence 15 12 18 16 16 19
At: supra-glabellare 5 7 7 7 9 ti
At bregma, 8 9 6 10 y 9
Left and right parietal t ; 7 8
Mid-frontal region 6 7 6 9 § 6
Frontal tuberosities 5 7 5 7 11 8
At bifiureation of temporal lines T 9 z. 9 9 8

— (*) All measurements in uillimet res. A25341, 488030 and A16531 housed in 8A, Museum,
Adelaide: [19 smd 340 housed in the Museum of the Department of Anatomy, University of
Sydney.

344 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and supra-orbital elements of the upper orbital boundary, the supra-orbital element,
constitutes 45% of this boundary, Corresponding figures are 55% for the southern
Australian series, 53% for the New Guinea series, and 59% for Homo soloensis
(skulls 1, 1V, V, V1). In this feature, therefore, the Aitape fragment falls within
the neanthropie range and departs from the Neanderthal feature of a great pre-
ponderance of supra-orbital element.

Fig. 5 is a section of the Aitape frontal just to the left of the midline and
shows the strong internal frontal crest, which is about 50mm. long and is 10mm.
deep at its deepest part.

An estimation of the glabellar projection van be made by taking the follow-
ing measurements from this section-—(a) the supra-glabellar thickness, measured
a sufficient distance from the midline to exclude the effect of the internal frontal
crest, (b) the basal thickness of the frontal bone, from nasion to foramen caecum,
and (¢) the glabellar thickness.

Tasue IT.
Basal thickness Glabellar Supra-glabellar Glabellar
Skull. of frontal, thickness, thickness. projection.

Aitape 18 VW (j 11
Australian (Keith) 21 21 am) Ww
Galilee 24 18 5 13
(8) Australian 792 19 29 ia) 18
337 17 19 7 12

340 21 20 8 12

119 16 14 8 fi

The glabellar projection is smaller, therefore, than in some large southern
Australian skulls.

If we now take sections in the mid supraciliary region we can get a picture of
the maximum development of the supraciliary ridges (fig. 6), Fyrom these the
vertical and antero-posterior thicknesses of the supra-orbital region are deter-
mined (table III). There is obyiously none of the shelf-like projection of the
supra-orbital region which characterizes the Neanderthal type.

Tasue [I1.
Vertical thickness of Antero-posterior thickness
Skull. supra-orbital region. of supra-orbital region.
Aitape 19-6 (left) 16-1 (left)
20-5 (right) 18-0 (right)
Australian (Keith) 17-0 14-0
Galilee 165 21-0

(3) These skulls are housed in the Museum of the Department of Anatomy, University of
Sydney.

FENNER-——-FossIL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS 345

CURVATURE OF THE FRONTAL BONE.

There are several methods of expressing the curvature of the frontal bone,
Some of these are greatly affected by varying degrees of development of the
elabella, and thus they do not always provide an aceurate picture of the cerebral

curve,

Fig. 6. Sagittal sections of Aitape frontal at points of maximum thickness of supra-orbital
region. Above: 15 mm. to left of midline (BB fig. 3), Below: 20 mm. to right of midline (CC
fig, 3). Maximum vertical and anteroposterior thicknesses of supra-orbital region shown, Cl. =
coronal suture,

348 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the primitive neanthropic skull, Here again the Aitape skull contrasts with
the low flattened gable of the Neandone specimens.

There is no evidence that the parietal bones fell away sharply posteriorly ;
the prevailing contour snggests that they were gently rounded, Tt is most unlikely
that the parietal titberosities were at all prominent.

ENDOCRANIAL CAST.

An endoeranial cast was made of the Aitape skull, and fig. 8 and 9 illustrate
different aspects of this cast when it was orientated in the subeerebral plane. Bony
deficiencies of the inner table interrupt the fissrral pattern in several places. hese
are indicated by dotting in the figures.

In general outline the frontal lobes, which constitute the greater part of the
east, are long and narrow. They are quite well rounded, showing no trace of the
paramedian flattening or depression found in many Australian brains. The
orbital keel is not entire owing to the deficiency of the orbital plates of the frontal
hone, but enough of the orbital borders is present to show that the keel was well
developed.

The frontal cap is missing on both sides, but on the right its approximate
position can be estimated. Further posteriorly the imprint of the meningeal
vessels is clear, and corresponding to the parietal part of the vault are several
arachnoidal granulations.

In the report on the Galilee brain-cast Keith discussed the effect of the cerebral.
cisterns in causing the obliteration of sutural pattern. In this specimen the para-
median frontal cisterns cannot be clearly defined, but elevations corresponding
approximately to the sub-coronal cisterns are present.

In the diseussion of the sutnral pattern which follows the sulei have been
numbered according to the system of Kappers (1929) and comparison has been
made throughout with the description by Shellsheay (1987) of the morphology of
the Australian aboriginal brain.

Rian HrwisehEre,

The inferior frontal suleus (4) corresponds approximately with Shellshear’s
eroup | of this suleus. Posteriorly it is confluent! wilh the inferior part of the
precentral suleus (51) and from here it proceeds forwards curving slightly down
wards to end by bifureating into lwo branehes which spread out widely to form
a terminal transverse piece of the furrow. The lower of these terminal branches
is continuous with the suleus raciatus (3).

A short distance in front of its union with the preeentral sulcus there is a
connection with a braneh of the middle frontal sulcus (7) which rises vertically

FENNER—FOSSIL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS 349

Fig. 8. Right (above) and left (below) lateral aspects of the Aitape endocranial cast
orientated on the subcerebral plane (diopterographic tracings). Dotting corresponds to areas
of broken bone. Numbering after Kappers (1929).

350 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

on the wall of the hemisphere. The whole arrangement resembles that of Shell
shear’s specimen Q2788h.

There is no obvions midcle frontal sulens on the right side, Several indeter-
minate furrows, running upwards and slightly backwards, are present; the most
definite of these is that previously referred to as being connected with the inferior
frontal suleus.

The superior frontal sulcus (11) is fairly clearly marked and appears to be
broken into two parts. This is not quite definite owing to a flaw on the inner table
in the vicinity,

The fronto-narginal sulcus ({}) is clear. It does not become confluent with
any of the horizontal frontal sulei, Arising on the frontal aspect of orbital rostrum
if passes ip and divides into two branches which then run parallel to each other
over the frontal pole.

The distinet furrow rising vertically between the suleus radiatus (8) and the
fronto-orbital sulens (9) probably represents the anterior end of the sub-frontal
suleus of Kappers (1). Shellshear notes that this sub-frontal suture is common
in Australian brains, and his figures show that it sometimes rises fairly high on to
the anterior surtace of the frontal lobe.

Several small unnamed sulci separate off the paramedian frontal conyolutions.

Behind the region of the sub-coronal cistern, which here appears as post-
coronal rather than sub-coronal, is a small vertically directed suleus. This may
represent portion of the post-central suleus (15),

Lert HEMISPHERE,

The convolutionary pattern is less clear on this side. The inferior frontal
sulcus cannot be accurately defined. The upper extremity of the suleus radiatus
(3) courses up from the region in front of the frontal cap to become confluent with
a sulens which probably represents the anterior transverse part of the inferior
frontal suleus (4). There are several smaller shallow sulci running vaguely
towards the middle frontal snlens. The pre-central suleus cannot be defined,

The middle frontal suleus (7) is not clear. but appears to be represented by a
lone sulcus passing baek roughly parallel tothe midline. [ts two parts (7a aud Th)
appear to be confinent and anteriorly there is no connection with the fronto-
tuarvinal suleus.

The superior frontal suleus (11) comprises a continuous suleus lying parallel
{o the medial border of the hemisphere. Anteriorly it appears to effect a connec-
tion with the fronto-marginal suleis.

There is a suleus corresponding with that described on the right side at the
posterior end of the east.

Fig. 9. Vertical (above) and facial (below) aspects of the Aitape endocranial cast orien-
tated on the subeerebral plane (diopterographic (racings).

FENNER—FossIL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS

352 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

MEASUREMENTS.

Comparative skull material from the Aitape district of New Guinea. was not
available. Twenty-five unsexed specimens from Sepik River and Papua, housed
in the musenm of the Department of Anatomy of the University of Sydney, were
measured and the average measurements are given below as “‘New Guinea Series’’.

Fifty unsexed Australian skulls from Swanport, River Murray, South Aus-
tralia, in the collection of the South Australian Museum, were measured and their
average measurements are given in table VI as ‘‘Swanport Series’’.

Useful comparative measurements (necessarily approxinate) were made on
the casts of the Neandone skulls and on the orieinal Coliuna skall (which has been
cleaned by Professor Shellshear). This was all done in the Department of
Anatomy, University of Sydney.

The definitions of measurements and points given by Martin (1928) have been
used and his reference numbers are indicated in table VI.

Taste VI.

Ref. No. Swannort New Guinea Neandong
Deseription of measurement, Martin. Aitape, Reries, Series. Cohnna, Skulls.

Smallest frontal breadth (ft.—tt.) 9 92 93-9 91-2 86 104

Post-orbital breadth 9 (1) Oa (4) 90-6 9o-3 90 100

Greatest frontal breadth (eo,-eo.) 10 W04(4) 108-9 103-8 105 121

Stephanion breadth (st.-st.) 10b {4 97°8 11-4 of 111

Median sagittal frontal are (n—h.) 20 120 125°7 12241 140 131

Median sagittal gliybella are (u-se.) 26 (1) a =— _ —

Median sagittal cerebral pre of f6 (2) &S8 — — ae —
frontal (sgh)

Median sagittal frontal chord 29 108 Wiss 107-1 126 118
(ub.

Median sagittal glabellar chord 29 (1) ag _ — — —
(n—sg.)

Median sagittal ecrebral chord 29 (2) Xd — — =
of frontal (sg.—b.)

Angle of frontal convexity g2(8) 142° 138° — 147° —

Angle of convexity of cerebral 32 (0) Iffhe — — 158° —
part of frontal bone

Upper facial breadth (#mt.-fmt.) 3 VWW4(4)) 10768 103°2 117 122

Bi-orbital breadth 44 1OG(4) 100-8 97-0 110 —

Anterior inter-orbital breadth HO 25 21:9 21-2 BF 27
(mt.—mf.)

Orbital breadth fl 43(4) 40°8 40°0 44 —

DISCUSSION.

The difficulty of accurately sexing skulls is well known. When one has only
a fragment of the vault that diffieulty is much greater. It is with considerable
caution, therefore, that | suggest that the fragment is part of a female skull, and
the only support for this opinion lies in the comparative thinness and lightness of
the bone of the vault.

(4) Estimated moasurements,

tun
w

FENNER—FosstL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS 3

Coneerning its age, we know that the sagittal aud coronal sutures are
obliterated endocranially and that the fronto-nasal and fronto-malar sutures are
still open. Using Todd and Lyons figures we may say that the skull ig that of
an individual more than forty years old.

The fragment is too small to allow more than an approximate racial diagnosis
to be made, It shows no affinities with any of the aneient human races (Haima
acanderthalensis, Homo salocnsis, ete.), the supra-orbital region being definitely
neanthropie in type.

Comparing it with modern races from adjacent regions it seems to correspond
more Closely with the Australian than the New Guinea type, although the latter
is admittedly very variable. One might eo firther and sugeest that its affinities
are with the southern Australian type (type A, Fenner). The low forehead, the
bnild of the supra-orbital region and the flat parietal bones all recall this form
of skull,

The main points of distinetion between the Australian and the Aiiape frontal
are {he definite ophyronie groove and the wide upper faeial diameter with ereat
post-orbital narrowing, both primitive features,

There are no characters suee@estine aflinities with the Tasmanians: the absence
of the paramedian frontal and parietal groove stressed hy Wauniderly (1989) and
the fairly obvious narrowness of the parietal region definitely excluding this
possibility.

The endocranial east shows less froutal fattening than is usually found in
the Austvalian, but there is nothing in iis form or suleal pattern to differentiate
1 froma primitive neanthropie brain.

OONOLUSIONS.

A fragment of a fossil himan skull found at Aitape, New Guinea, in beds of
Pleistocene age (Upper Wanino Series) is deseribed, Tt aay he accepted as the
first evidence from New Guinea of hima cemains of apparent Pleistocene age.

It is suggested that the fragment is portion of a female skull about 45 years
ofage. The vacial affinities of the skull are diseussed, There is no evidenee that it
belonged to an individual differing greatly from the modern Australian aboriginal
(southern type). Lt must be remembered that oeeasional rare ** Australoid’’ types
of New Guinea skull (eo. {hose described by Cave in Moyne (1936) ) differ from
the Aitape fragment little more than do average Australian skulls.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.
My thanks are especially due to Dr, F, W. Clements, Director of the Australian

Institute of Anatomy, Canberra, who kindly lent me the speeimen for some months ;
and te Professors Burkitt aud Shellshear, of Sydney University, who placed their

354 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

comparative material at my disposal. Professor Shellshear also helped me con-
siderably in the study of the endocranial cast.

Tam deeply indebted to my colleawnes of the South Australian Museum, es-
pecially Mr. N. B, Tindale, who made the endocranial cast and photographed the
skull. Professor F. Wood Jones has kindly read through the manuscript, and his
criticisms and suggestions are eratefully acknowledeed.,

Minaneial aid for this study was rendered by the David Murray Scholarship
Fund of the University of Adelaide.

REFERENCES CITED.

Rerry, R. J. A., and Robertson, A. W. D, (1914): Trans. Roy. Soe., Viet. vi.

Cunningham, D. 7. (1908): Trans. Roy. Suc. Ndin., xlvi (2), p. 283.

Fenner, Ff. 7. (1989) : Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust, bxiii, p. 248.

Jones, Nason (1930) : Geology of the Finsch Coast Arca, Northavest New Guinea
mm The Oi] Expl. Work in Papua and N. Guinea by the Anelo-Persian Oil
Company on behalf of the Conu. Goymt, of Aust., 1920-1929, tii, p. 44 (Hare
rison & Sons Ltd.. London).

Kappers, C. U. A. (1929): Evolution of the Nervous System in Tuvertebrates,
Vertebrates, and Man, (Haarlem).

Keith, A. (1925): The Antiquity of Man, p. 579 (Williams & Northeate, London).

Keith, A. (1927): Ji Turville-Petre, Researches in Prehistorie Galilee (British
Sehool of Archueoloey in Jerusalem, London).

Martin, R. (1928); Lelirbueh der Anthropologie, ii (Jena).

Moyne, Lord (1956): Walkabout (Teinemann, London).

Shellshear, J. L. (1987): Phil. Trows. Roy, Soe., Lond., By No. A445, cexxvii, pp.
293-409.

Wunderly, J, (1939) : Bromelrtha, xxx (3 and 4). p. 3805,

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate xxiii.
Shells occurring in association with the Aitape skull.

1, 2, Arca granosa Linn.; 3, Telescopium fuscwm Sehumacher; 4, Paputna sp.;
5, 6, Neritine cornca Linn.; 7, 8, Neritind ef. sowverbiana Montr.; 9, Laena
sp.; 10, 11, 12, Cyeclophorus sp.; 13, 14, 18, 19, Melania ef. juncea Lea; 19,
Cyrena coarans Gmelin; 16, Melania ef, canaticulata Reeve; 17, Melunia ef.

recta Lea,? Plate xxiv.

Aspects of the Aitape skull. 1, right lateral view; la, small separate fragment ; 2,
skiagram showing development of frontal sinuses; 3, facial aspect; 4, vertical
aspeet. Skiagram on larger scale than photographs.

Rec. S.Av MUSEUM Vou. VI, Prare NNITE.

Vor, Vi, bbw

SAL,

PENNER—FossIL HUMAN SKULL FRAGMENTS 355

TILK ASSOCIATED MOLLUSCA.

By B,C. COTTON.

A few motlusea from the Upper Wanimo Series have been reported upon in
the Anglo-Persian Oil Company’s Survey on behalf of the Commonwealth of Aus-
tralia (Vol. 111, 1929, p. 44). The tentative identifieations are in the main gener-
ally significant. The list served the purpose for which it was made, enabling the
generally acenrate conclusion to be arrived af that ‘the evidence of brackish and
fresh-water mollusca coupled with a foraniiniferal fauna in which pelagic forms
are practically absent, points to the history of the group being that of the last
phases of sedimentation and deposition along a rising littoral much indented hy
nud Hats, laree shallow bays and lavoons, evidence of a receding o¢ean’’.

The avcenrate determination of the species 1s a matter of some difficulty in the
present stale of or knowledyve, Only a proper aud extensive survey could give
reliable information, the marine mollusea being one problem and the dissimilar
northern and southeru New Gainea tervestrial fannas another,

The genus Melania, for example, has not been systematically worked out
either for Northern Australia or New Guinea, and it is therefore a matter of eon-
Jecture whether our series is different from those dealt with in the Commonwealth
Report or whether obscure specific identifications are responsible for the seeming.
diserepancies, This is aamatter for future study. The full value of the indications
will only be realized when the venus Welonie has been systematically siuveyedt.

Arca (Tegillarca) granosa Linn, (tig. 1-2) ; type loeality, Philippine Islands,
The Area granosa complex is widely distributed in tropical regions to the North of
Australia. Subspecies and related species have heen recorded from the Gulf of
Carpentaria, Western Australia (1. rhombea), Japan, Papua, and from the Bar-
rier Reef (A. granosu bessalis). Trecdale eroups them under the genus Tegilarce.
This is the Same species as that identified as -lrea nodosa (author /) in the Com-
monwealth Report.

Telescoprum fuseum Schiunacher (fig, 3); type loeality, Kast Indies (7.
iélescopiuim is asynouyin), Widely distributed in North and Northewestern Ans-
tralia ; this Species is not listed in the series recorded in the Commonwealth Report.

Papuing sp.; Land shell (fig. 4).

Neritina cornea Linn. (fig. 5-6) ; type lovality, Philippine Islands.
Nerttina souverbiana Montrouzier (fig. 7-8) ; type locality, New Caledonia,
Laoma sp. (fig. 9),

Cyclophorus sp. (fig. 10-12).

356 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Melania ef. juncea Lea (fig. 13, 14, 18, 19).

Melania ef. recta Lea (fig. 17).

Melania ef. canaliculata Reeve (fig. 16).

Cyrena coaxans Gmelin (fig. 15).

Genera not represented in our series but listed in the Report as occurring in

the Upper Wanimo series are: Hrycina, Paphia and Placenta.
d

SOME POLYCHROME INCISED POTTERY WARE
FROM MT. TURU, NEW GUINEA

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.Sc., ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

In 1939 Dr. A. G. Schroeder, Medical Officer at the Government Station of Wiwiak,
in North-East New Guinea, made a journey through some recently-opened country in
the Upper Sepik District of the Mandated Territory of New Guinea. He visited
villages about Mount Turu in the Biligil area.

Among ethnological objects of special interest collected were three examples of a
type of hand-turned, incised and painted pottery from the village of Ambakunya, in the
vicinity of Mount Turu (on the Dividing Range east by south from Wiwiak, 143° 22’
East Long. x 3° 37’ South Lat.).

SOME POLYCHROME INCISED POTTERY WARE
rrom MT. TURU, NEW GUINEA

By NORMAN B. 'TINDALE, B.Sc., Hruxonocisr, Soura Ausrratian Museum.

Plates xxv—xxvi and Text-fiz, 1-3,
In 1959 Dr. A. G. Schroeder, Medical Ofticer at the Govermuent Station of Wiwiak,
in North-East New Guinea, made a journey through some recently-opened country
in the Upper Sepik District of the Mandated Territory of New Guinea. He visited
villages about Mount Turn in the Biligil avea.

Among ethnological objects of special interest eolleeted were three examples
of a type of handturned, incised aud painted pottery trom the village of Amba-
kunja, in the vieinity of Mount Turu (on the Dividing Range east by south from
Wiwiak, 143° 22? Hast Lone, x)" $7? South Lat.).

The inhabitants of this portion of the Upper Sepik distriet are relatively
short, thick-set folk, only a few of them reaching 5 ft. 6 in, in height. They have
uniformly woolly hair, Being keen agricultuvalists, they live in open villazes
amony their gardens. Maprik, situated 19 miles to the west of Mount Turu, is a
typical example, Within 30 miles racing of this village it has been estimated there
isa popwation of sixty thousand people. Llouses in Maprik are centred around a
fall ceremonial house over fifty feet high, built on a triangular ground plan (pl.
xxvi, fig. 1). The ridye-beam is formed by implauting a pole of considerable height
in a leaning position in the ground, and the ridge is supported hy two logs of
sinaller diameter used like sheer-legs. The relatively small triangle cuelosed by
the three poles is closed in with thatching to form a men’s house. The decorations
take the form of large painted faee-cesigns. All such houses have a rope hanging
from the eaves in front of the cutrance, and reaching to within six feet or so of the
ground. The masks kept within these houses are of basket work with body drapings
of grass (pl. xxvi, fies 2).

Villages are partially migratory within short distances. the movements being
rendered necessary by the methods of vardening which are such as to deplete the
soil of its most fertile constituents within a few years, At Maprik village a new
ceremonial house had just been completed, replacing an older one which, through
slow migration of the village, had come to be almost outside the inhabited area in-
stead of near its centre.

358 RECOKDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Three examples of Monit Tari pottery ware, collected by A, G, Sebrocder and
presented to the South Arstralian Miiseim, may be listed as follows :

A9924. Tand-eoiled pot from Ambaktitja village; with incised and stronyly
contrasted painted design ured. white, vellow, and black: a singly pierced Lug on
the rim, Diameter 28 em.. weight 65 ounces (fig. 1).

Sem.

rot mci

yollow sehra

AL brow (pot eniqury

whita

Wlach

Wiel. Design on bhiek, reds vellow, tie white painted pot, Mount Tui CA. Taek
AW9925. Lland-eoiled pot from Aimbakiija village, With ieised and tocde
rafely contrasted painted design in bed, white, and vellow ; two piereed ligs, asy it
welrically placed, about 45> apart, on the rim,
(fie, 2).
A.19926,

Dinmeter 20 en,, weight o6 onnees

HWand-eoiled pot ‘rout Ainbakuatja village, with incised design in
red aid white on painted red background: lwo pierced Ines approximately 170"

TINDALE—FPOTTERY FROM NEW GUINEA 359

apart on the raised rim; this has been incised with a series of nearly vertieal marks.
Diameter 31 cm. weight 92 ounees (fig. 9),

The importance of Ainhakunja as a pot-making centre in the Biligil area is
partly determined by the possession of adequate sources of clay, Pots from this
village ave ivaded chiefly to villages ina direction north of Mount Tarn. The only
other pots al present known to be made iv this area are from an as yet wulocalized

fon a, Ite yellow, god white painted pot, Mount Paeu. (oN, Labs)

villawe in tlie Upper Sepik disteiel, south of Matapait: pots are also tradect noril-
wards from there. They pass thenugh several interuediavies before reavliuy vil
laves i the Bombita area, Krom Bonbita they are passed ou uorth-eustwards bo
Samarkand Lo several other villages on the sonth side of the Sepik-Pacilie Divide.
Eximples of this latter type of pet have not yet been obtained.

Mount Tuen pots ave made of a rather coarse-lextured paste, which fires to a
dull brick-ved. The firing is well done and rather coniplete, The example A.15925,
which is the lightest of (he three, has been made by inieans of a coiling technique,
ani traces Of the coils are still present in ihe finished pot. The other two show less
inarked (races of the sane method of manufacture. In the smallest example, whieh
is relatively much the heaviest, the traces are little evident. The asymmetrically
placed lugs appear to have lost their primary funetion: the piercing is carclessly
done, so that there seems little chance of their being of use for suspension.

360 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The designs on the pots are reminiscent of some patterns recorded by Joyee
(1912) on archaeological sherds from Rainu in the North-Mastern Division of
Papua. They have been incised in the damp clay, and then much of the areas be-
tween the designs has also been reduced so that the primarily incised portion and
its mareins come to stand partly in relief. Crudely painted pottery has been re-
corded by Edge-Partington (1898) from about the Mambare River, but the present
examples appear to be rather different from those hitherto deseribed.

Mr, A. N. Chittleborough, in a recent address to the Anthropological Society
of South Australia, briefly mentioned a pot-makine villave named Kintayu, which

a os oe a
Zi, ePOALT TT TE TOT TATA Tg
7 i ‘6 : X & err ota re A es

Fig. od. Rect pot with white pointed design, Mount Turin CA. 1o%6.)

he saw in 1922-25, while engaged in a ¢cological survey with Dr. G. A. V. Stanley.
This village is situated about thirty miles inland on the mountains above Mambare.
In the centre of the villave is a stone platform on which is placed a wooden frame.
When he saw it this framework had strings bound to it in various directions, and
af the intersections of strings were clay balls. This was described to him as a map
of islands off the eoast of New Guinea, the clay balls representing islands, and the
stvings the projections of directions of stars, utilized when navivating out to these
places. In some ways it was reminiscent of a Polynesian ‘‘sailing chart’’, but made
ona large scale. Although these Kintavu pot-makers were frequently engaged in
hostilities with the coast peoples, they managed to maintain a trade in pots with the

TINDALE—POTTERY FROM NEW GUINEA 361

islands off the coast. Their canoes, laden with pots, were portaged to the coast in
darkness, and they set out by night on their trading voyages. Return landings
were also made in secrecy. Owing to the exigencies of survey work on which he
was engaged, Mr. Chittleborough was unable to secure examples of Kintavu wares.

His deseription of the pots suggests that they were not unlike the previously
mentioned examples from Mambare River district, which are in the Brisbane
Museum, and which were collected by Sir William MeGregor.

DISCUSSION.

The study of New Guinea pottery is not yet on a very firm basis. Probably
examples still exist in Museums without adequate description, and there are gaps
in our knowledee of the use and dispersal of these elements of culture, Sherds and

cn]
pots from Panaeati have been recently deseribed (Tindale and Bartlett, 1937).
The desirability of collecting and recording pots as well as potsherds from New
Guinea and the surrounding islands cannot be too strongly stressed. We are in-
debted to Dr. A. G, Schroeder for the photographs accompanying this note.

SUMMARY.

Polychvome incised pots made by the inland Mount Turu people of the Biligil
area of the Upper Sepik distriet, New Guinea, are described and figured; some
notes on the pot-anakers of Kintavu in the Mambare district are given.

REFERENCES CITED.

Mdge-Partington, J. and Heape, C. (1898): Album of the Natives of the Pacitic
Islands, iii, pl. Ixxvi.

Joyee: T, A. (1912) : Journ, Roy. Anthrop. Inst. Lond., xlii, pp. 645-546.

Tindale, N. B. and Bartlett, H. K. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., bxi, pp. 169-
162, pl. ix—x.

362

Fig.
Fig.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate xxv.
Maprik men.
Maprik husband and wife (same man as in fig. 3).

Maprik men wearing artificial hair coiffures.

Plate xxvi.

Newly-constructed ceremonial house at Maprik.

Man concealed under mask, Maprik.

Ree. SAL Museen. Vow Vi. Prarie NAV.

Kie. S.A. Musbrun,. Vou Vio PLuari SNV1,

FLINT IMPLEMENTS OF TASMANIAN MANUFACTURE
FOUND AT CAPE HART, KANGAROO ISLAND

By ALISON HARVEY, B.A., HONORARY ASSISTANT IN ETHNOLOGY, S.A.
MUSEUM

Summary

Archaeological research in the past decade has established the existence of an extinct
Kangaroo Island stone implement culture of characteristic type associated with an
ancient human occupation of the island. The “karta” and “sumatra” type of
implements described by Tindale and Maegraith (1931) dominate the archaeological
remains of this industry, and were apparently characteristic of the culture.

FLINT IMPLEMENTS or TASMANIAN MANUFACTURE
FouND At CAPE HART, KANGAROO ISLAND

By ALISON HARVEY, B.A., Honorary Assisranr in Ferunouocy, S.A. Musrum.
Fie, 1-14.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL research in the past decade has established the existence of an
extinet Kangaroo Island stone implement culture of characteristic type associated
with an ancient Innnan oecupation of the island. The ‘‘karta’? and ‘‘sumatra’’
type of implements described by Tindale and Maegraith (1931) dominate the ar-
chaeologieal remains of this industry, and were apparently characteristic of the
culture,

Karly in 1936, an apparently new series of implements on Kangaroo Island
rame to light when Mr. TH. M. Cooper, at sites on Cape art and Antechamber Bay,
on the east coast of the island, collected flint implements whose appearance, as
Tindale (1937, p. 32) says, “suggested a Tasmanian oviein’’. At both the loeali-
ties in question, the implements weve collected on sites associated with the remains
of carly white settlement,

Tindale records his examination of the site, and deseribes some of the flint tools
collected at the Antechamber Bay site. In his paper, it was concluded, from the
archaeological evidence of the site and the appearanee of the implements them-
selves, and from comparisons with flint implements of Tasmanian industries from
N.W. Tasmania, that the Antechamber Bay series were of Tasmanian manufacture,
made by Tasmanian native women, who were brought there by some members of
the whaling colony in the early nineteenth century. They could be linked with a
newer Tasmatian implement series.

The naplements from Cape Hart, here described, comprise 28 flint tools and
22 unworked flints. Most of them were collected by Mr. Cooper in 1936. Asso-
ciated with them are three pieces of worked flint identified as European enn flints.

Lam indebted to Mr. Cooper for his permission to deseribe these specimens,
which have been shared equally between lis collection and that of the South Aus-
tralian Museuin, and to Mr. Tindale tor his advice in the preparation of this paper.

THE SITE.

The Cape art area comprises two associated sites, one heing in the immediate
vicinity of the remains of a Huropean-built stone chimney, which is described by

364 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Diaby
Vy tn 7

bam,

5A
Fig. 1-5. Stone implements from Cape Hart, Kangaroo Island,

HARVEY—FLINT IMPLEMENTS FROM KANGAROO ISLAND 365

“a wind-blown sand flat under the lee of a high-wooded

My. Cooper as being on
coastal dune’. Tf lies approximately a half-anile west of the cape, and near the
shore, [twas from here that the flint implements and the eun flints were recovered.

The other site is a small area on the clge of a limestone shelf approximately ¢
quarteranile west fron this area; here Tindale, in 1936, found a series of flint
implements and a quantily of chippings. Flint boulders oeenr on the adjoining
beach, and broken ones associated with chippings on the hut site were also found.

THE CAPE ITART IMPLEMENTS,

The flint is a smooth, dark blnish-grey, and has been eroded from Tertiary
marine Limestone beds, Traces of limestone matrix remain on many of the worked
tools (e.g. fig, 2,3, 4, 5,8, 9,172).

The implements themselves are, with the exception of fig. 5, made from flakes
struck from a platform on a prepared core, Tliehly characteristic is the obtise
angle formed by the plane of the striking platform and the flaked faee, which, in
all cases, is between the limits of 110° and 120° (vy. fig. 3, 6, 8, 10, 12, ete.).

Vhe fashioning of the tool from the flake was earried ont with the utmost.
erudiiy, further shaping consisting merely of secondary flaking along portion of
one margin; (he unworked part of the tool apparently served as a handhold.

The present series, together with examples eollected at Antechamber Bay, and
already referred to, is further charaeterized by the frequent presence, in more or
less marked degree, of a worked point or semi-eirenlar projection as part of thy
tool, This eminenee has, in all eases, received careful secondary working (fig. 1, 9,
9, 6, 7, 10, 12, ete.) A general approximation to an ovate shape appears to have
been aimed at im the manvfachine of the daplements, but maimy divergences from
(his ocetu, notably in the ease of several hieh-haeked serapers (fig. 2), one elon-
eated narrow worked flake fool (ie. 9), two irregularly leaf-shaped points, of
which one is shown on fie. 3. Unlike all others in the sertes, the implement shown
in fig. 5 has been made from a core or accidental flake of flint, probably selected on
account of its eonvenient shape, and the flint has been trimmed by flaking and see-
ondary chipping to form the characteristic pointed tool,

Measuring the specimens produced no evidence of preference for any particu-
lar size or weight. Most examples ranged between 6-5 em. (fig. 8) and 51 em.
(liv. 5), there being a rather even and random distribution of weights between the
‘wo lands. Two are outstanding, one at 113 em. (fig. 1) and the other at 296 em.

(fig. 2),

366 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

124

Fig. U-12. Stone implements from Cape Hart, Kangaroo Island,

HARVEY—FLINT IMPLEMENTS FROM KANGAROO ISLAND 367

DISCUSSION.

Karly writers refer to the settlements of whalers alone the east coast of Kan-
garoo Island; some were certainly at Antechamber Bay and the surrounding
district,

The presence of native Tasmanian women in the households of some of the
whalers was also noted. Tindale (loc. eit. pp. 80-33) gives a description, from his-
torical sources, of the native women members of these settlements, together with a
deseription of the archacologieal evidence of their presence on the island. In his

134

144

Fig. 1-14. Stone implements from North-West Tasmania,

description of the implements from Antechamber Bay, he drew attention to their
similarity to examples of the Newer Tasmanian industry from North-western Tas-
mania; this resemblance is particularly notable in the specialized form of the tool,
in the technique of manufacture, and in the anele between the platform and the
flaked face, already referred to,

The pointed form of gouge or scraper, so prominent in the series figured, seems
to have been a characteristic feature of Tasmanian implements, both of the Older
and the Newer Tasmanian industries. Of the series of Tasmanian implements
figured by ILambly (1931) several show the pointed form, the author referring to

one example as having ‘fa useful projeetion or duek bill’? (lac, ett, p. 89).

368 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Many implements of the Newer Tasmanian series, two of which (figs. 15, 14)
from the South Australian Museum Colleetion are figured in this paper, exhibit
this characteristic.

The implements from Cape Hart under discussion share, in a marked degree,
in the characteristics of the Antechamber Bay examples and those from the newer
Tasmanian series, being apparently identical in their method of mannfacture. The
deduction is that they have the same cultural affinities and are of Tasmanian mann-
facture, and the handiwork of the Tasmanian native women brought to whalers’
camps on Kangaroo Island in the early years of the nineteenth century.

The shape of the tools is suggestive of their use as scrapers or gouges. Tlambly
suggests the use of these as elastic terms in the classification of Tasmanian types of
implements (lve cit. p. 90). Several writers who have described the early settle-
ments on Kangaroo Island have referred to the trade in wallaby skins from the
whaling camps, and the skin clothing worn hy the men. An early reference in ‘‘The
South Australian Register’? (Sept. 25, 1844) suggests that the native women were
adept in the catching of these animals,

REFERENCES CITED.

Hambly, W. D. (1931) : Amer. Anthrop,, xxxiii.
Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, B. G. (1931): Ree. 8S. Aust. Mus, iv (3), p. 275-289,
Tindale, N. B. (1987): Ree, S. Aust. Mus., vi (1), p. 29-87.

THE INITIATION OF NATIVE-DOCTORS, DIERI TRIBE,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R. M. BERNDT, HON. ASSISTANT IN ETHNOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, AND T. VOGELSANG

Summary

The following paper records some observations and discussions on the methods and
beliefs concerning native-doctors or medicine-men among the Dieri Tribe’s people on
the eastern shores and neighbourhood of Lake Eyre. The Dieri Tribe is divided into
several groups, namely the [nadi’nani] or [Bukatjiri] who inhabit the country around
Lake Perigundi; the [Pandu] or Lake Hope Dieri; the [Ku‘na:ri] the Cooper’s Creek
Dieri inhabiting the country around the Kopperamanna and Killalapaninna districts;
the [“Paritiltja] in the country from Kopperamanna northwards to the Salt Creek, and
the [Tirari] who live on the south-east shores of Lake Eyre. The Tirari have been cited
as a tribe by Stirling and Waite (1919, p. 106). These groups are bordered on the north
by the Ngameni and “Jauraworka; the north-west by the Wongkanguru; the north-east
by the “Jandruwanta; the east and south-east by the Pilatapa; the south-west by the
Kujani; and on the south by the Wailpi and the “‘Jadliaura.

Tut INITIATION or NATIVE-DOCTORS, DIERI TRIBE,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By RLM, BERNDT, How. Assistant in Erunonocy, Sour Ausrrataan~ Musvum, ano
T. VOGELSANG.

Tuk following paper records some observations and discussions on the methods and
heliefs concerning uative-doeturs or medicine-men among the Dieri Tribe's people
onthe eastern shores and neighbourhood of Lake Eyre, The Diert Tribe is divided
into several evoups, namely the |gadi'yani] or | Bulatjiri] who inhabit the country
around Lake Perigundi; the |Pandu| or Lake Hope Dieri; the | Ku'na:ri| the
Cooper's Creek Dieri inhabiting the eountry around the Kopperamanna and Killa-
lapaninna districts; the |'Paritiltja] in the country from Kopperamanna north-
wards to the Salt Creek, anid the |Tirari] who live on the south-east shores of Lake
Kyre, The Tirari have been cited asa tribe by Stirling and Waite (1919, p. 106),
These eroups are bordered on the north by the Neameni and “Janraworka; the
north-west hy (he Wonekanguru; the north-east by the “Jandruwanta; the east amd
south-east by the Pilatapa ; the south-west by the Kujani; and on the south hy the
Wailpi and the Jadlianra.

The principal information is based ona Dieri text, recorded by one of us (T.
Vogelsang), who was born at Booealtaninna, called in Dieri {Tukajandru| (husa’-
buha, trees or thick sermb; Yandru, close together) on Lake Boocaltamiuna, south-
east Of Nillalapaninna in the Diert country, and lived there for many years.

In transeribing this Dieri text, the alphabet of the International Phonetic
Association as modified for Austvalian languages has been adhered to as closely as
possible. Details of the system are recorded by Tindale (1935 and 1940).

The first vocabulary and grammar of the Dieri was compiled by Gason (1874) ;
another important work on the language was undertaken by Gatti (1930). A
Dieri yocabulary, as vet unpublished, is contained in the J.G. Reuther manuscript
in the possession of the South Australian Museum, Other workers in the Dieri field
have been O. Siehert, A.W, Tlowitt, C. Strehlow. M. von Leouhardi, IL. Basedow
and ALP. dellkin,

THE DIERE TEXT.

This imique Dieri text relates the experiences of a postulant during his initia-
tion asa native-doctor. [twas taken down and translated by one of us ( Vogelsang )
from the lips of Palkalina (Hnelish name, Klas), an old native-doctor.

370 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Palkalina was a reliable informant, whose portrait has been illustrated by
Horne and Aiston (1924, p. 14, fig. 2; to the rizht), Palkalina is also mentioned
in the Reuther Manuscript in this Museum.

In telling of the story, each word would be pronounced deliberately, in a man-
ner that isealled [yapu] (meaning quiet: said of an utterance of importance). In
the relating of unimportant phrases of uon-dramatic etfeet, the words would be
quickly passed over.

The original version of the text, with its interlinear translation, is followed by
a general rendering of the experiences of Palkalina.

THE MAKING OF PALKALINA INTO A NATIVE DOCTOR.

‘*Nulu kutjiele mili ‘marapu gamalkai, ditjini nauja “kuru’kurn
“Tle spirit followers many have, daytime he secretive
namai “minkani, ‘kaijeri ‘mikirini, mita ‘wipa wipani, mita
sits holes, creeks deep) place valleys, place
“buka’bukani, mita ‘pidarini, ja sopiri ‘pilki ja “pilkini.
timbered country, place desert and places different and different.
Kutji 9 gurali “tinkani ‘wirarial ‘ja ditjini windri = putapalpa
Spirit always night-time walks aie daytime — only sometimes
‘kantjiriai, ‘ja winta ‘waldra ‘pirna yananani nauja wopai ‘talara
appears, and = when heat ereal is he MOPS rain
“palktuaii omarmrunti, ja nana bakana ‘kuru kuru ryan watara
cloud bhick, and he also secretly sits dust-storm
‘pirmani ‘ja pildri’pildrini ‘ja “nidla nidlaqni, “patara — kukoni,
big and thunder and mirage, trees hollow,
ja kana japali yanai winta nauja wirariai “paia jeri.
and people frightened are when he walks about birdlike,
Windri kulno gana kana ‘kulkala ‘nvkaguadrm, = naw yanai
Only © one is people — safe from him, he is
kunki. ‘Jeruja gato qundrana warat — bakana konki
native-doetor. Therefore I thought dic also native-doctor
nanala, qadani nakani mili ‘yakanundrnu ‘pirna ynundrala yanai,
fo get, then my people of me ereat think will.
‘Jeruja ‘yaianani kunki Ja yani wopana warai “Tipapilia(?)
Therefore our native-doetor and I went did Tipapilla
mitaia, naka mandurila krnkkt tulani onanja kutji ‘jeri
place, there to ineet native-doetor stranger he spirit like

(1) ‘Tipapil:a, in the Salt Creek country, This place is somefimes ealled ‘Tippamara,

BERNDT—INITIATION OF NATIVE Doctors 371

yalinn ‘wokarana warai, Ja winta gani nina najina warai
to we two come had, aud = when I him saw had
yank “pina yjarana warai ‘japali ‘ja ‘pirna aru parana warai,
[ awful shivered — did fear and ~~ very much alarmed was,
ja nuru‘jeli nauja — kutji Kutinana waral, “ja yadani “nakaldra
and suddenly he spirit disappeared had, and then again
tikana warai, ‘ja yani mauali ‘pirna = “pantjina warai, ‘jeruja miu
return did, and = 1 hungry very get did, 80 he
ditji ynoparani “taijini ‘pilki = ‘jinkina ~~ warai, — kutjia ‘taijini,
day first food different gave did, — spirit’s food,
Kujamara(?), “ja yani ‘para’ warana yanana waral, “jeruja nul
kujamara, and a native tobacco been had, so he
‘kanagnndrani = ‘ynakayundru“dukarana warai qani wata ‘nindrananto
nan mind from me took ont had I not shall think
kana ‘pulki “jeri, windri kutji “jeri, ‘ja Winta nnlw narana
people others like. — only spirit like, and when he hear
waral ani ‘tjautjau “jatanani nul ana ‘Jakalkana warai.
did I confused spoke he me questioned — had.
Mina ‘jundrn najiai? Wa nani ‘kalabana warai, kutji marayn.
What = you see ! And | answered did, spirit many.
Nadani nanja jatana warai. ‘Jidni matja kunki ‘jeri,
Then he sad had. You now native-doctor — like,
nundrat “wolja “jidni konki yunt ‘pantjila anal, Dit}
think in time You native-doctor good he shall. Day
‘mandruni nial jenila qakaryu nankana waral. Ditji
second he the same fo me performed (rites) clic, Day
parkilani nauja ‘nakayn ‘jatana warai, matja “jidni kunki numn,
third he to me said had, How = you native-doctor good,
‘jeruja rato ‘Jinkani “jinkiai keonki “potu, Wodna,
therefore I vou vive native-doctor articles, Digeing-stiek,
"Pils, “Maltara, ‘Turusupita, “ja qadani uauja kutji
Dilly-hae, Mmu-leathers, Fire-stick, and then he spirit
kutinana warai. ‘Ja yakani kil qa nant ‘jelalu
(lisappeared — did, And = my natiye-doctor and I both (went)

(2) Kujamara, a species of bush, used as a native tobaceo. Professor T. Harvey Johuston
is Not acquainted with this term, As a conjeeture he states that it may refer to pituri when it is
hoing worked up iu the hand. The usual term, however, for prepared Diboisia in the Dievi and
associated tribes is pitwri. Mowitt (1904, p. 448) mentions that the name of the plant called
huja-mara means new fish. This plant. is particularly used in soreery; for instanee the dukand
(pointing-hone) ceremony. Tt is often the especial property of the kwnki, Kujamara is further
used in the mortuary ceremonials. It is used in Poisoning waterholes to eateh enus,

372 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

‘tikana warai ‘Lauerikudu(#) — mitai.’’
home (our camp) did to Loweri-hole — place,”’

A GENERAL RENDERING OF THE STORY.

‘THe, the Spirit, has many followers. During the daytime he is secretive, hid-
ing in deep holes, ereek beds, valleys, thickly imbered country, desert wastes, and
in other different places. In the night-time he always walks, but does not usually
during the day. When the weather is very hot, he goes into a black rain-cloud, He
also secretly sits (or is present in) dust-storms, during thunder, and is in the
mirage one often sees. He inhabits hollow trees too.

People are most frightened of hin when be walks about in the form of a bird,

Only one person is safe from the spirit, and he is the hen.

Therefore, T thought that | would get a f#unkt to show me his art. 1 could
then be made into one, Knowing that I am a powerful hwnd, my people would
esteem me and think me great.

Our kunki and | went toa place called Tipapilla. There we met a stranger
Ireunki, who vesembled the spirit. When | saw him, L shivered with great fear, being
much alarmed. Suddenly the spirit disappeared, but almost immediately returned.
T became very hungry.

The first day of our seclusion in the bush, with the spirit, at Tipapilla, he gave
me fvod that I had uot had before. It was ealled Kujamara, or ‘‘spirit’s food’,
which was a native tobacco, He then read my thoughts, and saw that I desired to
be made into a kunki. He said that | should not think about other people, but only
of the spirits. [then went back to my companion, the kun, 1 spoke to him mm a
confused manner, He questioned me, **What see you!’? To which | auswered,
“Many spirits’’. Le then said, ‘You are now a keunkt. In time, | believe, you
will be a good one.”’

On the second day | went back into the bush, and the spirit came to me and
performed certain rituals which | learned. 1 then returned to my companion.

THE KUNKI.

Gason (1874, p. 28-29) was the first to record the ‘* making”? of a Dieri native
doctor and his subsequent duties. He says: ‘'The Aoonkie [kunki] isa native whe
has seen the devil when a child (the devil is called hootchic [kutji] ), and is Stp-
posed to have received power from him to heal all siek. The way in which a man or

(3) ‘Lanevikudu, 0 native uame retained by the Europeans. Tt is on Salt Creek, and qwas the

site of a large cattle station.

BERNDT—INITIATION OF NATIVE Doctors 373

woman becomes a doctor, is, that if when young they have had a nightmare or an
unpleasant dream, and relate this to the camp, the inmates come to the conclusion
that he or she has seen the devil, The males never practise wntil after cireumeision,
and, in fact, are not deemed proficient till out of their ’teens,”’

Howitt (1904, p. 358-9) has also claborated on this data, having as his authori-
ties O. Siebert and 8. Gason,

Ju the Dieri country andl the south-eastern region of the continent, the native-
doctors offen act as soreerers. Those who are hot endowed with the extra power
that a haahi has received during his initiation know little about the profession, as
the more seerctive and mysterious the practitioners ave with regard to it, the more
impressed are both they themselves and others by the wonder of its form and the
ereatuess of its effects.

The hunkt wields more power and authority ina Dieri conmuiunnty than do any
other individnals therein, Usually he is an elder of a totemic group, bit wot all
elders ave native-doctors. Frazer (1911, p. 867-7), when writing of Australian
hative-doctors, mentions that ‘ona whole, it is highly significant that, in the most
prinitive society about whieh we are accurately informed, it is especially the magi-
cians or medicine-men who appear to have heen in process of developing into
chiefs’.

Tue Duties or A Kuni,

The native-doctor’s duties are many. He not only practises black-nagic, (hus
assuming the role of {he sorecrer, but is the oracle of his group, foretelling coming
events, mediating at qnarrels, offering advice, curing patients, and counteracting
alien magical influences.

The sorcery practised by the junky has been recorded by O. Siebert (1910, p.
00, 97), but the following may be added :

In the use of the pointing-bone [dukana| (a striking bone), the dunhi is
assisted by an elder of his totemic group or by another native-doctor. At the com-
pletion of the hone-pointing ceremony, and the soul of the yietim has been caught
and is drawn into the bone through the blood of the kun, a lump of wax or clay
is attached to the point. This limp is very necessary, as the soul might try to
escape af the point. This done, they bury the bone, wrapping it in emu feathers
and inthe |kujamara] plant, and leave it in the earth for several months. At the
end of this period it is disinterred and ritually burnt. As the bone burns, the
victim becomes seriously ill, watil finally, when it is completely consumed, he is
dead,

When the dudkana is pointed, it is believed that a quarizerystal whieh is
usually endowed with a life-giving substanee, bone or pebble passes from the

374 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

pointer through space into the vietim. Ou the other hand, the blood or soul of the
vietim is drawn out and enters inte the pointer. The qnartz-erystal which ts pos-
sessed of magical qualities is received by the /runii at his ‘making’’, The belief
that native-doctors can project stubstances in an invisible manner into their vic-
tims is widespread in Australia, One of the principal projectives is qnarty,
especially in the crystallized form, Such as carried as part of the ‘stock-in-trade”’
of the native-doctors, and it is said that they are associated with the mythical past,
being portion of the excreta ol a mera mura (an ancestral bem). TLowitt (1596,
p. 90) states that the Wurunjerri natives believed that evil magic inanipulated by
their medicine-men acts through quartz-cryvstal, which could be projeeted into a
man,

In several differcut tribes with whieh one writer CR. M. Bernd) is acquainted,
the ‘Anta'‘kirinja, the Neadjuri of the middle-north of South Arist ralia, and the
‘Jaralde of the lower River Murray, quartz-erystal is attributed with magical quali-
ties, is zealously enarded from the eyes of women and the iniuitiated, aid is
Indden ina pouch,

Asa quartz-crystal may be projected by a dyer into the body of a vielin, tt
may be removed by sucking ancl massage by another vei’. TL is in this duty that
the /unki assumes his real réle of native-doctor. In curing a patient. he ay use
various methods at which he is adept, A eure is affected by rubbing, press, or
sucking the affected part, sometimes accompanied by an incantation or song, and
the subsequent extraction of a foreign body, as the cause of evil, Sleight-of-hand
is most often used during the treatment of a patient. Ln this case, at the psyeho-
lowieal moment, the cause of the sickness in the form of a bone, stone or piece of
wood may be removed from the afflicted part of the body. Again, in the curing of a
patient, a quartz-crystal asa curative chatnt is used in conjinetion wilh the suki
method.

The died will conduet inquests, assisted by an elder oy another native-doetor,
During the inquest ceremouy the dead body is carried on the heads of three amen,
who kneel at the graye-side, Che Jah, holding a baton of wood in each hand, asks
it who or what has been the eause of its death. To reecive an answer the native-
doctor uses the art of ventriloquism, as recorded by Beridt and Vogelsang (1939,
p. 169), There are also further methods of inquest at whieh the Avnet presides :
the examination of the bocies of the dead and the divining of certain signs appear.
ing on the grave of a reeently-dead person. The common belief is that the spirit
of fhe ‘‘murderer’’, unknown to him, will visit from time fo tine and hannt the
grave or be present at the inquest ceremony of the vietim, Tf is the Aiahe's duty to
tind the spirit and identity il, thus revealing the veal “rourderer” Most often
the haunting spirit will betray its owl presence.

BERNDT—INITIATION OF NATIVE DOCTORS 375

The spirit of the kuah?, diving sleep, may visit distant persons or be visited by
them, Often the spirit takes the totemie form to which the dreamer belongs. The
spirit may also come into toueh with the departed, The interpretation of dreams
Japitja| and visions seen during ineditation form an important duty of the Aunhke
ov spirit-men”” Howitt (1904, p. 808) mentions that the faa may interpret
dreams, and reveal to the relatives of the dead the perso by whom the deceased has
heen killed. Visions seen in dreams ave atteiited to spirits. The phenomena of
sleep (with dreams) and visions of the waking life, as aninistie conceptions, have
been dealt with by yarious writers, ineluding Réhein (1930) and Elkin (1987, p.
50). The last-named writer, when speakime ol sone tribes in Eastern Australia,
says Lhat spirit-snakes are sent out by the medie¢ine-man during a vision to gather
information of what is happening at a clistanee.

If the kanhe declares that he has hac a real vision of his departed friend, he
may order food to be placed for the dead, or a fire to be made so that he can come
‘onakine'’, the
kunt is believed to have direet commutication with spirits, called [kutgi}, and

and warm himself By reason of his spiritual experience at his

also with [mura nimura |.
The native-doetor’s réle as rain-aaker will be dealt with later in this paper.
[Lis uuportant fo stress, however. that the above duties could not be performed
until the postulunt had received the power from the |kutji| at bis ‘'making’’.

Tite Making on A Native Doron.

The fake nist havea knowledge of (he method and procedure, and an ander-
standing of the ritual by whieh he was initiated or “made’’, Te must not only be
able to petlorm this ritual, Dut antist be invested with the power with whieh to do
i}, Among the Dieri, this power is acquired, not from learning, but by a spiritual
experience. He is ** made’? by the spirits alone, although he may be assisted by a
nalive-doctor belonging (o his own Lotemie group,

After the postulant has been subineised, be ‘tteels’’ that he wants to be a
hile. We voes to his native-doelor und asks the latter tu ‘*make’’ him. There
are, however, other signs which the aspirant is expeated tu show: a @reat interest in
the traditional love of lis vroups a tendency to psyehie experiences, and an attach-
nent Lo the elders and frm. Tle is tanght the ethod and procedure appropriate
io his profession, Te learns to conduct inquests, interpret dreams, eure the sick,
and perform other duties whieh have been deseribed above.

To receive this power from the spirit called fudji, (he postulant, aecompanied
by a donk, retires into the serub. Ie is decorated ia special maainer by his eom-
panion. Ata pre-decided place he must stay for three days, the period of seclusion.
In this tine he meditates on the spiritual experiences he has been told about, and

376 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

the powers he will receive from the kaéj/, until i oceurs ina mystie fashion. The
Fruljiis materialized, being psyc¢hically projected hy the state ol tranee the postu-
land is under, and initiates him, The first day the aspirant is given food by the
spirit, who at the same time substitutes the initiate’s “man inind’? with that of a
spirit’? or medicineman mind, The kutji afterwards disappears. The postitlant
reports his experience to his companion, who is some little distance away. The
huenkt explains to the former the significance of the experience, The second day
the spirit appears and performs certain rites. The hati then disappears, The
third day it appears once more, and finally completes the ‘making’. The
postulant becomes a fully-initiated Avie, by receiving certain articles, as a cig.
wine-stiek, dilly-hag, emu-feathers, fire-stick, and, what is perhaps most important,
apiece of quartz-erystal, which is possessed of magical qualities,

(pon the completion of his period of “malking’’, the native-doctor has been
reborn ; he is a new person, possessed of powers which no ordinary person Waly ever
suspeet. Upon the day that he enters the scrub for his period of scelision aud
meditation, he is believed to ritually die, being mourned for by his parents. Th is
not until the completion of the ‘making’? on the third day that he is reborn, Lis
old life has been completely forgotten,

The secret rites thal occur on the secoud clay are somewhal obscure, but it is
known that the postulant receives a spirit-snake which is inserted ito lis stomach,
throneh an incision, by the Awe. This spirit-snake may be sent curing meditation
jo gather mformation for the hui. Further, on that same day. he may visit the
sky-world and receive his power froucthere, Siebert, as recorded by Towitt (1904,
p.3)9), states that the hank, like a hulji, eau fly upto the sky by means of a hair-
cord, aud see a beautiful countey full of trees and bivds. Uf is said that they drink
the water of the sky-land, from whieh they obtain the power to take the lite of
those they doom, Gason (1874) inentions that the Awawhi velate their wanderings
in the sky-countey in the form of crows, snakes, or other creatures. Ellin (1058,
p. 224-5) writes that the native-doctor is taken up to the sky by means of the
magie-cord, and also to the foot of the rainbow. In this way he receives not only
his endowment of magical substances, but also the power 10 hold intercourse with
the dead, ane to visit the sky-world,

Hots clearly seen that, during ihe postuant’s meditative seclusion, when his
mint is ina state ol receptivity during the trance, he expericnees this spiritual
phenomenon.

Among the Neadjuri people of the middle-north of South Australia, an im-
formant working with one of the ubove writers (RA. M. Berndt) relates that the
native-doetor [mindapa| has to undergo a similar process of initiation, The Nwad-
juri have a similar culture to that of the Dieri,

*

BGERNDT—INITIATION OF NATIVE DocToRs 377

Asa child, he is singled out by lis tribal elders for the future profession of a
mindapa. Te is chosen because be does not mix with those children of his own age,
but prefers to play and stay with his parents in their own camp. The postulant, as
he is considered by the elders, is specially taught, not only by his parents, but by
the other native-doctors of his group. When he reaches puberty he still avoids
those of lis own age, and will not take part in their games or amusements. At this
period when the other boys are becoming sex-eonscious, he rigidly avoids all young
women. After the cireumeision and cieatrizatiou ceremonies, from which he has
emerged aman, he does not return to the young men’s camp, but retires alone lo a.
place some distance away. There he meditates and has converse with the spirits,
which at special times he may see. We will go into trances and see visions in which
would be portrayed important forthcoming events of tribal significanee. During
this period of seelusion he receives his real power to perform subsequent magical
ats which are expected of him when he is a mindapa, Kor the period he is con-
sidered ritually dead, as it is only on the completion of his seclusion that he becomes
“alive” or reborn as a new man. On receipt of his power from the spirit, he is
reeeived by the other tribal native-doctors, and duly taught the method and pro-
cedure of the protession. Until he reaches the age of about thirty, he must abstain
from sexual intercourse. Memale mindipa are also considered clever, and to pos-
sess powers at least equal to those of the male mindapa, They abstain trom sexual
relations until their twenty-fourth or twenty-fifth year. Their method of ‘miak-
ing’? as simalar to that of the males,

Tre Rent As A RAIN-MAKER.

Tin the Dieri countey, a region subjeel to frequently recurring periods of
drought, the whole tribe or group joins under the diveetion of the dawauk? in the
ritual of waking rain,

Howitt (1904, p. 894) states that the clouds are supposed to be bodies in
whith rain is made by rain-making mura mura (chiefly |Darana]), influenced by
the veremonies of the Dieri,

The clouds are called |‘thalara paula), the substanee of rain. Durand is
considerecL a powerful rain-making wooded. He not ouly controlled the tain
but also the wind |watara|, thander |"pildripildri] and lightning | ‘pildri’pildri-
‘paratji] Cpildet pildri, thunder ; "paraty) light). Tl is said that lightning comes
from thnnder, while the wind ‘‘was born’? or originated in the deep recesses of
some caves in the hills about two miles east of Boolealtaninnia,

The Snnraimura Darang, while on earth, wandered through the Gourntay
around Lake Hyre, Darane is one of the most powerful of the Pandu Dieri ‘naeit-
“mura, Lia description of Jous, or aboriginal direction signs from this region,

378 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Stirling and Waite (1919, pp. 124, 126, 151, 184, 135, 136, 138, 159, Did, 143, 147,
148, 149, 152,153) have recorded some of the places this nuwre ward visited. Howitt
(1904, p. 198-800) has a rendering of the Durana Legend; it is also referred to by
Berndt and Vogelsang (1989, p. 171).

It was in the power of Darane lo give or withhold rain, In asking for rain, the
hunki directly invoked the power of this “wura’naera by the performance of a
tain-naking ritual.

The following methods of making rain are practised by the kwaki:

(a) Rainanaking ‘vere’ mura are called on to give the fwikt power to cause
heavy rain to fall.

(b) The bull-roarer is used hy the kunke during the rain-making ceremony.

(ec) According to Llowitt (p. 396) the prepuce, carefully preserved trom a
previous cirenueision, is believed to have creat power of producing ram, becatse
of its assoviation with the flow of urine and ejaculation of seminal fluid. It is kept
in 4 parcel, which, when opeued by a council of /wnt or elders, loses its virtue.

(d) Goanna fat rnbbed on a youth's body causes steam to tise. This is sip-
posed to form inte a eloud from which rain would fall. The rainanaker performs
this ritual act most often on his sun.

(e) Howitt (1904, p. 394-5) has deseribed a rain-making ceremony in whieh
many members of the tribe take part. A hut is built in which elders sit, Two
hunki who have received power from the rain-making werd eure have their ams
cut so that the blood flows on the men sifting round in the hut, during which they
throw handsful of down into the air. The blood symbolizes the rain, the down the
clouds. The large stoues are plaeed in the centre of the Int (these are associated
with Doran), representing eathering clouds presaging rain, The two bunk after-
wards place the stones in the branches of the largest tree, and other men throw fine
powdered gypsum [kopi] into a waterhole. These ritual actions completed, the
nura mura causes clouds to appear in the sky. A ceremony is also enacted in the
pulling-down of the hut.

In the arid Dieri eoumtry where droughts often oceur, Lhe native must he sure
of his water-supply. Ile knows every waterhole in his surrounding territory, but
even these at times may dry up. Then he has recourse, as described by Cleland
(1939, p. 9), to the waler-bearing root of the Mallee ov other sueculent plants. The
frow, buried in the bed of a ercek, may be found, and, by compressing the urinary
bladder, water is obtained. Iowitt (188. p, 5+) relates that, in some parts of
South-Eastern Australia, when the rainfall is likely to be excessive, the natives
feaved to injure Tidelek, the frow, or Blok, the bull-frog, because they were said
to be full of water instead of intestines, and great rains would follow if one of them
were killed.

BERNDT—INITIATION OF NATIVE DOCTORS 379

THE KUTAT (OR SPIRIT).

Th was seen that the Funki was ‘made’? by a kutji, which ws a spirit. It is an
iniportand figure in the Dieri belief in spirits, and the shapes that it assumes are
diverse,

The hutjeov |kurtjieli| dwell usually in the shacle of bushes. and deep holes.
They show themselves in various forms, such as a black crow | kawalka!, sandhill
erow, raven, cagle, owl, or asa kangaroo or enn. They may be distinguished trom
the ordinary bird or auimal by their vireling round a persou’s head or behaving in
alike mauner, Actually. the spirit of the Av/ji takes possession of the bird or
animal concerned, Int does not remain therein for any length of time. This does
not. detract frour the inherent virtue or worthlessness of a partienlar natural
species, as dietated by legend. Usually the eagle is a good man, the erow dis-
liked generally, beige mischievous, as is (he ease among the Dieri, However, the
roles are oecasionally reversed. The owl is almost universally regarded with great
apprehension, so that while some creatures are regarded with fear and may uatur-
ally be thonght to harbour veadily an evil spirit, it is still imexplained why those
which are liked should become, for atime at least, objeets of fear. The birds or
animals become possessed, and outwardly show this evil possessiou by strange or
inusial actions, Natnrally the native explains any deviation from the orthodox
as being supernatinal Thasa kangaroo with agreed virtue, if noticed to be acting
inain dnnsnal manner, is regarded with mixed fear; a hulje has possessed it or
taken its form.

In the warm weather the futjé may be in a black rain-elond, or present in a
dust-storm, (dtiring Uiunder, or in the distant mirage.

Whirhwinds, frequent in the Lake Eyre region diving dust-storms, contain
these malignant spirits. Clonds of cust raised on the plains of Central Australia
are ascribed by the Dieri to kuti, and if one of these cust-whirlwinds passes
through the midst of a camp, there is erent consternation, as they fear that some
great calamity will follow, Towilt (1904, p.446) relates how a man of the Yenda-
avaneu seetion of the Urabunna (Arabana) tribe chased a whirlwind, trying to
kil the Ave ji with boomerangs. Tle told afterwards that he had had a fieht wiih
this spirit which ‘Sevowled’? at him. Soon afterwards he died.

Whirlwinds can be controlled by the hawki, who haye special ineantations for
this purpose, U1 is said that, under the spell of a Jaenki, the whirlwind will turn
aside from its course, Spirits ave said to inhabit whirhwinds in (he Great Vietori:
Desert region. The “Anta’kirinja say they are malignant camp spivits in flight,
while the Naadjuri natives associate the whirhyind with a snake-like creature, The
Whirlwind collects vietims, which it draws into a waterhole to be swallowed whole
by this monstrous snake. The hufji delight in these whirhyinds (or willy-willies )

380 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

|‘watara watara|, as the erow and the raven would fly into them, and when beaten
by the fury of the ‘wear watta, would caw. People stop their cars so as not to
hear this noise. A person who hnnts away a kutji erow or other creature will be
stricken with siekness. Aceording to Elkin (1937a, p. 288), the Aatji will carry a
man away while he is sick, and the |muneara) (a erave-spirit which goes to the
south, the Spirit Land, after death) will extraet his kidney-fat.

There is also the long-tailed wren [‘kutji'kutji], which is a small spirit, not so
powerful as the kutji. The etgihutji live in bushes, and are important birds used
by the funk.

The native-doetor is not afraid of the /utji, from whom he has received his
power, and with whom he is in direet communication.

The /utji may cause sickness, and could only be driven out by suitable means
applied by the Funki.

Visions are attributed to datji. Indeed, any strange apparition is called by
the same term,

SUMMARY,

This paper records some new information about the initiation of native-doetors
or medi¢ine-men among the Dieri. A Dieri text is given, together with a detailed
diseussion of the place of the native-docior in the South Australian aboriginal
community.

REFERENCHS CITED.
Berndt, R. M. (1940) : Oceania, x (3).
Berndt, R, M, and Vogelsang, T. (1939); Trans. Roy, Sac. 8. Aust. sii.
Cleland, J. B, (1939): Proe. Ray. Soe., Tusnuinia,
Elkin, A. P. (1937) : Mankind, ii.
Elkin, A. P. (1937a) : Oceania, vil.
Elkin, A. P. (1938): The Australian Aborigines (Sydney ).
Frazer, J. G. (1911): The Magie Art, i.
Gason, G. (1874) : The Dieri Tribe, Adelaide.
Gatti, G@. (19380): La lingua Dieri. Contributo alla conoscenza delle Lingue Ats-
traliane (Rome).
Horne, G. and Aiston, G. (1924) : Savage life in Central Aust ralia (London).
Howitt, A. W. (1889) : Journ. Roy. Anthrap, Inst., xviil.
Howitt, A. W. (1896) : Journ. Roy, Anthrop. Inst., xvi.
Howitt, A. W. (1904) » Native Tribes of South-East Australia.
Roheim, G. (1930) : Animism, Magic, and the Divine King.
Siebert, O. (1910) : Globus.
Stirling, E. C. and Waite, BE. R. (1919) : Ree. 8. Aust. Mus., i.
Tindale, N. B. (1985): Ree. S. Aust. Mus., v.
Tindale, N, B. (1940) : Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Aust., Exiy.

LITTORAL COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA
(I) HARPACTICOIDA

By A. G. NICHOLLS, PH.D., UNIVERSITY OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

Summary

The collection of littoral copepods in the South Australian Museum has been sent to
me for examination, and I am indebted to the Director of the Museum, Mr. H. M.
Hale, for this opportunity of studying them.

This collection comprised 15 tubes, divisible into two categories: A, samples taken by
townet; and B. shore collections and dredgings. One of the former was taken at night,
a light being used to attract animals, and so might be expected to contain bottom-
living as well as planktonic forms. All of the collections were made in South Australia
in the region of St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs, with one exception from a salt lake at
Beachport, with which we are not concerned at present.

LITTORAL COPEPODA From SOUTH AUSTRALIA
(1) HARPACTICOIDA

By A. G. NICHOLLS, Pu.p., Universiry or Wesrern Ausrratia.

Fig. 1-23.

THE collection of littoral copepods in the South Australian Museum has been sent
to me for examination, and I am indebted to the Director of the Museum, Mr. H. M.
Hale, for this opportunity of studying them.

This collection comprised 15 tubes, divisible into two categories: A, samples
taken by townet ; and B, shore collections and dredgings. One of the former was
taken at night, a light being used to attract animals, and so might be expected to
contain bottom-living as well as planktonic forms. <All of the collections were made
in South Australia in the region of St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs, with one ex-
ception from a salt lake at Beachport, with which we are not concerned at present.

The samples listed below, although divided into the two categories mentioned,
are numbered consecutively, and these numbers are used in defining the oceur-

rences of each species described.
A. TOWNETTINGS.

I. Smith Bay, Kangaroo Island, from 8.0-8.15 p.m., 15/3/38; contained
Calanopia thompsoni only.

IT, Western Shoal, on the west side of Spencer Gulf, at 8.30 p.m., 20/2/23
(Calanoids and Harpacticoids), by K. Sheard and F. W. Moorhouse.

Ill. Blanche Harbour, at the north end of Spencer Gulf, 8.30 p.m. 8/3/38, by
K. Sheard. (Mainly Calanoids, a few Harpacticoids. )

IV. Wallaroo Harbour, on the east coast of Spencer Gulf, at 8.15 p.m.,
26/2/38. ‘‘Light shone on water from deck for 7 minutes, then tow-
net hauled vertically.’’ (Mainly Calanoids and one Peltidiid.)

V. Spencer Gulf, Eastern Shoal, mid-day haul, 4/3/38, (Calanoids only.)

VI. Beachport, on south-east coast of S. Australia, from a salt lake. (Cal-
anoids and Ostracods only.)

B. SHORE COLLECTIONS AND DREDGINGS.

VII. Moonta Bay, Spencer Gulf, from a weed-covered reef exposed at very
low tide; coll. B. J. Weeding, Feb., 1939. (Calanopia thompsoni,
Peltidiids, Laophontid, Amphiascus sp.)

382 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

VUT. Port Willunga, from southern face of reef in one fathom at low tide;
coll. HL. M. Ifale and K. Sheard, 17/1/87. (Peltidiid.)

LX. Selliek Beach, to the south of Port Willunga, from a stone in five feet of
water at low tide on south edge of reef; coll. Tl, M. Tale, 31/1/37.
(Calanopur thampsoui, many Harpacticoids and some Cyelopoids. }

X. Sellick Beach, from Cambrian Rocks in one fathom at low tide; coll.
TI. M. Hale, 13/2/37. (Numerous Harpactieoids and Cyclopoids. )

XT. Sellick Beach, at low tide; coll. HW. M. Hale, 25/3/39. (Numerons Har-

pacticoids and Cyelopoids. )
XI. Sellick Beach, coll. K. Sheard, April, 1939. (Numerous Harpacticoids
and Cyeclopoids. )
XIU, Sellick Reef, eoll. K. Sheard, April, 1999. CSome Calanoids, mimerous
Harpacticoids and Cyelopoids, )
XIV. Spencer Gull, washed from dredgings, March, 1938. (Calanopir than p-
soni, Harpaeticoids and Cyelopoids. )

XV. Reevesby Island, Sir Joseph Banks group on the western side of Spencer
Gult, (One Notodelphyoid, from east coast of iskind; coll, H. ib.
Cotton, 7/12/56.)

Dissections have been made of all the species described in the following pages,
and the preparations have been deposited in the South Australian Museum. Picro-
indigo-carmine was used for staining in every case, and Monk’s (1958) Medium
and Euparal for monnting. This method is very convenient, and the stain is most
effective for chitin, as stated by Monk.

| am indebted to Mr. K. Sheard, of the South Australian Museum, for valuable
advice and help in nomenelatorial matters, in. which connection L have also re-
eeived assistance from Professor G. E, Nicholls, of the University of Western Aus-
tralia, fo both of whom 1 offer my best thanks. [1 is a pleasure here to express ny
thanks to the Trustees of the Seience and Industry Endowment Fund for a grant
enabling me to purchase a dissecting imieroscope, which has been of the greatest

use in carrying out this work.
NOTES ON TILE DISTRIBUTION OF SPECIES.

There is little to remark upon concerning the distribution within the area from
which the collections were made, since all those from the shore, where Harpacticoids
are more abundant, were taken in a comparatively small region extending for about
10 miles or so along the coast, about 30 to 40 miles south of Adelaide.

The distribution of those species which have previously been recorded is, how

ever, of interest. In general, the Harpacticoid fauna of this region shows w re-

NiIcHnoOLLS—CoOPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 383

lationship with that of Ceylon and the Malaw Avelipelago, the Red Sea, Mediter-
ranean, and even the Bermuda region, which Willey (1930, p. 1183; and 1934, p. 98)
has shown to be affiliated with that of the Red Sea aud Suez Canal,

This is particularly exeniplified by the occurrence i this region of suel Fornis
as Langipedia coranaty, Peltidium speciosum, Porceliidiim foubriatw and PP.
aeubicaudatum, Phytlothalests mysis, Aiphitscoides titermirtius, Laophonte
cormuta, Ceyloniella armalu and Metis jousseauned,

On the other hand there is also a relationship with the more southern islands.
such as New Zealand aud Kereuclen, as shown by the oecurrence ol A/tewlha sty-
nol and Poreellidium australe, deseribed trom Kerguelen and Porceliidiin fal-
mont from New Zealanc.

Faminy LONGIPEDITDAE Sars 1903.
Gens Loxateepta Claus 1863,

The genus comprises seven speeies. to which is added an eighth from this
collection,

Kry ro rik FEMALES,

1, End seoment of second ondopod with 2 inner spines and T outer spine... 2.
End segment of second endopod with 2 inner spines only,

longispind Monard 1928

2. End segment of second endopod with first inner spine the most proximal... 3.

ane segment of second endopod with outer spine the most proximal 9 963

End seement of second endopod with first tinier spine exactly opposite the outer
rosed Sars W903.

pita me: ae at
S. Cuuidal raani as Vrs as wide Me | ne a
Candal rami half as lone again as wide oa as ‘+ se as

4.) Bnd seoment of seeond endopod 3 times as lone as two basal seaments together ;
anal operculiim with 4 denticles on each side of median spine, whieh extents
beyond the caudal rami... *, minor DT, & A, Seott 1808,
End seement of second endopod 4 limes as long as wo basal seements together ;
anal operculum with 2 denticles on cach side of median spine, whieh extends
heyond the caudal rami 7 “le i L. Weber AL Seott 1909,

4. Fifth lee with 1 terminal and 4 outer setae; anal operculum with long median
spine extending pei canal rani and 2 lateral denticles and a fine hair on
eneh side .. eoronata Clas 1865,
Fifth lee with 8 inner, 2 terminal and 2 2omter ‘Setar: wal opereuhim with short
median spine and 2 lateral spines as long as median spine and a fine hair on each
side i ree vhs ay he bremispinosa Garney 1927b,

6. Fifth lew twice as loug as wide; caudal rami as wide as long; anal opereuhon
with median spine extending beyond exudal rani and with 1 large and 4 small
dlenticles on each side 4 bs scalli Sars 1903,
Kitth leg 2-7 times as lone as ywides.e auudel rani i half as lone again as wide; anal
operentin with mechan spine extending beyond caudal rami and with 7 large
and 3 small denticles and a fine hair on each side 7 ustralied sp. Nov.

384 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LonGiIPpeDiA CORONATA Claus.

Occurrence: IT, 2 females; XTI, 1 female.

Distribution: Widely distributed on the shores of the North Sea, North At
lantie, Mediterranean, and Suez Canal, also taken at Ceylon, Nicobar Islands,
Chilka Lake, anc Malay Archipelago.

Viel. Longipedia earonata Claus, female,

This species is very variable, as has been shown by Gurney (1927b), and the
specimens taken in these eollections differ slightly from other fornts (fig. 1), but
there is little doubt that they should he referred to this species.

The most variable feature is size, which ranges from 0-56 mm, to 1+3 mm, ;
specimens found here measured about 1 mm.

LONGIPEDIA AUSTRALICA Sp.noy-

Oceurrence: Tl, 2 females; X11, 2 females, 1 male; XTV, 1 female.

Female: Length 1-1 mm, to 1-3 mm, This form resembles 4, scotti in many
respects, and might well be referred to that species but for some striking differences
inthe male. [nthe female the chief difference is in the shape of the fifth leg. The
armature of fhe operculum is much as in scofti, The relative position of the spines
on the end se@ment of the second endopod is somewhat different in dustratica, hut
in another specimen examined the positions were such as in scotty, The inner
seta on the basal segment of the second endopod is quite short in seotti, and of a
much ereater length in the species found here (fig. 2).

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 385

The shape of the fifth leg in the form deseribed as L. scalli Sars, by A. Seott
(1909) and the very much longer setae, both on the basal seement of the second
endopod and on the fifth leg, suggest that Scott’s form is referable to the species
deseribed here, It is necessary that the male of his species should be found to be

certain.

syn TM

in

= ie erent
bees

Fig. 2. Lougipedia austratica sp. nov., male and female,
ay i ,

Male: Length 0-96 mm. In the first antenna the swollen fifth seement is
almost as wide as long, and bears several hook-like spines on its outer margin,
These were not seen in scofli (Nicholls, 1935, p. 43), and the fifth seement is half
as long again as wide. The better development of the setae on the basal segment
of the second endopod and fifth legs also forms a distinetive feature of this species,

386 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In the males of this genus the long seement of the second endopod bears only two
spines (coronala appears to be an exception), and it is worth noting that in hoth
scolti and austratica it is the outer spine which disappears.

Famity PELTIDIIDAR, Sars 1904.

The family is represented here by three genera, Alfeutha, Pellidiwm and Para-
peltidium. Numerically the material is very rich.

Lang (1936e, p. 30) suggests that Dactylopusia platysoma Thompson and
Seott (1903) isa Peltidiid and not a Thalestrid, but uf it is excluded from the latter
family by the swimming legs and flattened body it is equally excluded from the
Peltidiidae by the first legs. It appears to be intermediate and should perhaps he
placed in a separate family.

The genus Parapeltidium was established by A. Seott (1909) for one specimen
which differed from Pellidiwn in the possession of a narrow endopod to the firs!
legs and in having the two segments of the fifth leg completely fused. As regards
the first endopod this condition is regarded as bemg a mate characteristic (see
below), and has therefore no taxonomic value. The highly chitinized, fused fifth
legs may be distinctive, and were found in two of the species taken here, whieh
have, therefore, been assigned to Parapellidiwum. The 5-segmented first antenna of
Parapeltidium johnstoni Scott is not of gencric¢ value either, since it finds a parallel
in Peltidium aurivila (Cleve).

Key ro PELTIDIIDAR,

1. Body with anastomosing chitin bands ‘ AS aI it; 2)
Body without such bands .. Le :§ ss i Loo
2. Fifth lee 2-segmented i i 1s Pellidium Philippi 1889.
Fifth lee 1-seemented Ry “fe .. Parapeltidiwn A. Seoit 1909.
3. First endopod 3-segmented . 4, _ Me - 144
First endopod 2-seemented . $1 a rm Px >

4, BFitth lee 2-seemented ; first exopod with 2 or more terminal claws.
Altentha Baird 1845,
Fifth lee 1l-seamented; first exopod with single large terminal claw.
Alteuthella A. Seott 1909.

f. Raini of first lee subequal .. hat 1 ar a 6.
Exopod of first leg twice as long as endopod .. .. Bupelte Claus 1860.

6, Basal segments of first leg linear, at right angles, rani long and slender.
Poralteutha TV. Seott 1912.
Basal segments of first lee as wide as lone, rami short and stout.
Bupellidion A, Seott 1909.

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SouTH AUSTRALIA 387
Anreutia Baird 1845,

The following species have been assigned to this PETLUS :

aberrons Czerniavski 1868, purpurocincta Norman 1863,
austring T. Seott 1912, surst Monard 1924,

depressa Baird 1845, signata Brady 1910,

dubia T. Scott 1912, triarticulatum (Haller) 1879,
interruptu (Goodsir) 1845, trisctosa Lang 1936e,
nessticnsis Clans 1863, fypica Czerniayski 1868,
nang Brady 1910, villosa Brady 1910.

novac-zedlandiae (Brady) 1899

OF these triarticulutiem (Haller) is insufficiently deseribed ; of aberrans and
fypicu I have not seen the descriptions, and these species are therefore not included
in the key given below. According to Monard (1935a, p. 73) typicu is probably a
Synonym of messimonsis Clans. A, villosa Brady should clearly be transferred to
Scott’s genus Paralleutha.

Acording to Sars (1911, p. 365) the species deseribed by him (1904) as
depressa Baird should have been identified as purpuroctucla Norman, and since |
have not seen Baird’s original deseription, depressa has also been left out of the

key.
Key vo Apreurua FEMAues.
1, Size 0-4 nim. _ 7 ft, a ra nana Brady 1910.
Size at least 0+6 mm, dyn he rs i ae ce 7h
2. Exopod of second antenna 2-seemented al, ‘ os wt ae
Exopod of second antenna 3-segmented Ms messtnensts Claus 1863.
3. Basal segment of fourth exopod with inuer seta es Ey . 4,

Basal segment of fourth exopod without inner seta xt ls

4. Hud segment of fourth exopod with 2 outer spines,
novac-zedlandiae (Brady) 1899.

End segment of fourth exopod with 3 outer spines et ot . Oo
o, First antenna T-segmented . 4 “e 24 sptiicauda sp.nov,
Kirst antenna 8-seemented . ‘3 a riterrupta (Goodsir) 1845.
Hirst antenna 9-seemented , * a th x. we 8:
6, Distal segment of fifth lee 4 times as long as wide .. stgnita Brady 1910.
Distal segment of fifth lee twice as long as wide -- Sars? Monard 1924.
7. Middle seemeut of fourth endopod with inner seta 1% {4 of Be
Middle segment of fourth endopod without inner seta dustring T. Seott 1912,
8. Basal segment of fifth leg with inner extension a 1A ae of.
Basal segment of fifth lew without inner extension purpurocineta Norman 1868,
9. Candal rami with tour terminal setae $y .. dubia T. Seott 1912.

Candal rami with 3 terminal setae .. ita .. brisetosa Lang 1936e,

388 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ALTEUTHA SPINICAUDA Sp.noy.
Occurrence: XI, 3 females (1 ovigerous) ; XU, 1 male.
Female: Length 0:72-0:75 mm., width 0°39 mm. First antenna 7-seemented,
with sensory filaments on third and fourth; second antenna with 2-seemented

\
\4
Vi
| \
Fig. 3. Allewtha spinicauda sp. nove, male and female; the maxillule and maxilla are From
the male, other mouth parts from the female.

exopod; mandible palp bilobed ; maxilliped well developed, with long elaw. First
legs with 2-segmented exopod with 4 terminal claws, endopod 3-segmented ; legs
2-4 with following seta formula :
endopoct. exopod.
p.2. 1.2,221. 1.1.223,.
p.3. 1.2.321. 1.1.523.
p-. 1,2.221,. 11.523.

NICHOLLS—-COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 389

Fifth legs of usual shape. Caudal rami wider than long, with large spine at outer
corner (fig. 3).

Male. Length 1-0 mm., width 0-48 mim. First antenna 7-seemented and
somewhat modified ; first legs with terminal portion of exopod, bearing claws, dis-
tinetly separated from end segment. Legs 2-4 as in female, but outer spines of
fourth exopod modified on first and second segments; fifth legs strongly chitinized,
with spines only, no setae. Caudal rami as in female.

This species differs from all but mvna in having only 7 seements in the first
antenna ; the filth legs are not unlike those of nana, allowing for the spines to have
been broken in Brady's specimen, but the shape of the body and much vreater size

preclude this species trom identity with Brady's,

PALTEVUTHA stanaTa Brady 1910.
Occurrence; LX, 1 ovigerous female, 1 male,
Distribution; Kerguelen (Brady 1910, p, 552, pl. Ixi, 10-18).
Female: Length 0-60 mm., width 0-31 mm. The head was mnitortunately lost
diving dissection, but Brady states that the firsi antenna is %seemented. First legs

Fig. d. 2 Alleutha signata Brady, male and female. The female 5th leg is shown in two posi-
tions, and like that of the male is strongly chitinized,

with S-segmented rami; setae of lees 24 eactly as in spinicauda (above) ; caudal
rami at least as long as wide, armed with setae only,

Male: Hirst antenna 8-seemented. slightly modified: second antenna with 2-
segmented exopod; lees 1-4 as in female; urosome more slender than in female;
fifth legs strougly chitinized, with spines aud setae; sixth legs represented by a

single spine; caudal rami as in female.

390 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This species is almost certainly that deseribed hy Brady as signata, but his
drawings make comparison difficult. In the text (p. 552) he states that the body
is almost as wide as long, but this is not borne out by his figure (pl. bxi, 10), in
which it is more than twice as long as wide. Lt is clear from his figures that the fifth
legs have been drawn without dissection, so that a close comparison with the mate-
rial found here eannot be made, but the position of the spines appears to be rather
similar. The maxiliped is short and strongly constructed in both, and the caudal
rami ave very similar, The size and proportions are similar to those of B nauly Ss
species. In Brady's drawing the first exopod is relatively more slender than im the
specimens Found here.

Peompiem Philippi Too.

Pesta (1935, p. 367) lists 22 species of Pe/fidiwa, inchiding the three new
species deseribed by him; Monard (1956) has since added another species, raxer;
but minutia A. Seott (1909) is a synonym of speeiosim Thompson and Seott
(1908), anc serrate Thompson and Scott should be transferred Lo Pardpellidtin.

‘Two new species ave deseribed here, cach represented by both sexes; in addy
tion the previously unknown male of spociosian is deseribed.,

The males ave distinguished in cach vase by three features: 1, modification of
the first antenna, whieh may not be very marked; 2, structural differenee in the
first legs; 3, presence of sixth legs,

The difference in the first legs consists of a more slender struetinte; the basipod
seoments are longer than wide, the second segment carried at an angle (0 the first,
the endopod does not have its segments broadened as in the female, In (he first
amlenue the penultimate and ante-penultimate segments are ustially modified with
wore or less pronounced hooks,

Amongst the species of Pellidinm bitherto described, nutes ave Known in four
cases: purpurewn Philippi 1889, rabrwn Brady 191d, saeesphariai and foretpabuim
Monard 1028.

Sars (1911) figures the male of purpurewnt, Showing the trosome with sixth
legs, and the modified first antenna, Ue does not illustrate the first lees ol the
male. The male of rubrum owas lost in dissection, so that its complete structure is
not known, but Brady (1915, pl. xiii) figures the first legs of both sexes. Ln his
drawings the exact opposite condition to that found here appears to be the ease,
Ile makes no reference to the difference between the first legs of male and female
in the text, and in view of his not infrequent mistakes of such a nature, it is not un.
yeasonable to assume that he has transposed the two appendages in his plate, Mor
sacesphorum Monard (1928, p. 816, fig, ix, x) gives a full deseription of the female,
in which the first enclopods are of the broad type, but dismisses the male in a few

NICHOLLS—COPEPrODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 391

words, with Ho information ou the struetiure of its first lees. OF foretpaliem Monard
(1928, p. 517. fiv. x) only the male is known. Tere the first legs ave of exactly the
sume type as has beew Found in the males of this collection.

Arising out of this three more species mst he considered. Pesta (1950. p.
UT. fig. 5) hes deseribed a speeies yraciligides, which he regards as close to gracile
Claus 1589 (the specific name in both cases appears to have reference to the slender
first endopod). Ile states that it is a female, but it is nol apparently ovigerous,
and he does not illustrate the first antenna, The first lees are clearly of the type
found in the wales of other species. Tt is possible, therefore, that he was here
dealing with # male, although the urosome shows no sixth legs (bit these are easily
overlooked unless sought for). The same may apply to grueie Claus, though I
have unfortunately not seen his deseription.

P. ovale Thompson and Scott (1908) was deseribed as a female, the male being
Waknown. From a comparison of this species with the new species deseribed below
as simeplew, Whieh is distinguished from orale chiefly on certain differences in the
skeletal pattern, it is almost certain that orale bas been described from a inate
specimen. The irosome is not illustrated, so that it is not possible to discover
whether sixth legs were present or not. La sriepler the first autem of the male
is hot modified, and is indistinguishable from that of the female; the fifth legs also
show ho difference, and {he only distinguishing character, apart from the presence
of the sixth legs, is the narrowness of the endopods of the first legs, Fur these
redsous orale is regarded as haying been desciibed from a male aud therefore cloes
nol form an exception to the rie,

It is of interest to note that asa general male in this genus the adult tale is
smaller than the ovigerous female. Murthermore, if is almost certain that the male
transfers the spermatophore to the female when she is in the pre-acdult stage, and
atleast uo larwer than the male. Three couples of P. simples sp. nov. were talren
in the paired state, and im cach case the female was about to moult, and showed 1
trace of a skeletal pattern, whereas the imale was mative.

Posta’s implication (indicated by a query, fee. eft. p. B67) that arial
(Cleve) atay bea male (owing presumably to the few segments tt the first an-
tenma) is not sitpported cifher by the structive or nitmiber of segments in the first
antenna as shown by Cleve (1901), ov by the structure of the first legs, Tt is usual
for the male of PelMdiuan species to have more seomeuts i the first antenna than
has the female.

Key To PenrpeM FeMates.

1. Kil segment of first endopod with & appendages sty ote .2 Be
Hrd segment of first endopod with + appendages wr Pan eGR

Hid seoment of first endopod with 5 appendayes ae i .. 16.

2

te.

13.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
All appendages simple setae of equal thickness Po £3 beh,
Inner appendage a thicker seta or spine ti wisb as vs A
Setae of equal length by a couspiewon Norman and Seott 1905.
Middle seta twice as lone as other two a - roset Monard 1936,
First anteuna 6-segmented As i, st Bs
First antenna 7- to Qseemented — .. a inur pureum Philippi 188).
End sevinent of fifth leg with 5 setae ey . stniplee sp.nov.
Knd segment of fifth leg with 6 setae aan se esphor wm Monard 1928.
The 2 diner appendages of first endopod thiek setae or unmodified spies 7.
These appendages modified spines, usually laminate or seroll-like ee: 2
First antenna 6-seemented af a ertguun A. Seott 1909.
First antenna 7-scemented Pe a 7 - .. 8
First antenna 8-seementec ms fa .. Pobustiun Claus 1889.
Hnad segment of fifth leg with 5 setae spectoswit Thompson and Seott 1908,
Knd segment of fifth lee with 6 setae a .. rubrin Bracky 1915,
First anteuna 7-seemented Ld 6 BS he .. 10.
First antenna &seemented a i, ve 4. wg LD:
Hud scement of fifth leg with 4 setae an clnercum Brady 1915.
End segment of fifth leg with 5 setae. . ba 4 RS e514;
Hifth leg with outer branch of basal seement of three-quarters of end seement,
extending beyoud base of first seta. 12.
Fifth leg w ith outer branch of basal sermicit half of end sepment, hot ree iching
base of first selu .. +k Ae we intermedium A, Seott 1909,

Basal segment of first antenna half as lone again as secoud segment.
perplecum aan and Seott 1908,
Basal segment of first antenna about equal te second . a .. 1S.
Rostrum rectangular; claw of waxilliped about halt- Lenat lh of end seement,
forming auare .. .. tnetilatione Thompson and Seott 1908,

Rostriun rounded ; claw of imaxillipe d four-fifths of ened segment, curved only
clistally 63 3. a i. <y ou .. 14.
Terminal claws of first exopod not more than 3 tites end seement.

falcatum A. Seott 1909,
Terminal claws of first exopod at least 5 times end segment. prociman sp.nov.
Caudal rami extending beyoud end of genital sewment —imonardi Pesta 1935.
Caudal rami not reaching end of wenital segment hawartionse Pesta 1935.
First antenna 5-segmented ; sctae of first endopod waimodified.

duriollii (Cleve) 1901,
First antenua $-segmented ; 2 inner setae of first endopod modified,

cleqans Wolfenden 190)a.

Note. The data for rabustwi Claus 1889 have been taken from Pesta (1935,

p. 367) since L have not seen the original work.

1.

Key ro Pruriptum Manes.

lind segment of first cndopod with 3 appendages =, AP
End segment of first eudopod with 4 appendages “4 = “sy

ats

NICHOLLS~-COPEPODA ¥VROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 343

2. All these appendages simple setae. ve .f vn ve Bs
Inner appendage aspine .. Pi ae
3. Setae of equal thickness 2. gracile Claus 1880 ANE Aa ibivides Pesta 49: ,
Inner seta thicker than terminal setae z | : ao
4+. Knd segment of fifth lee with 5 setae ovale T hetnsnt and Seott 19038,
End segment of fifth lee with 6 setae axa purpurea Philippi 1839.
», Wind segment of fifth lee with 5 setae Part .. 6.
End seeinent of fifth lex with 6 setae on sdeesphor wit » Monard 192s.

6. Terminal setae of first encdopod unequal ; first antenna modified.
forcipation Monard 1928,

Terminal setae of first endopod equal; first autenna unmodified.
stiupler Sp nov,

7. Two inner spines moanmuodified is £3 2 rbrwn Brady 1915.
Two inner spines modified, seroll-like ni ar ne as V8:

8 Kirst antenna T-segmented , nf ‘ PFOLTUAL SPMOV,
First antenna 8-segmented .. és speeit LOST Thompson and Scott 1903,

As explained in the text, gracile, graciiotdes and ovale are regarded as males,
all the available evidence potming in that direction, while there is no positive
evidence against (his mtlerpretation. They are, am included in this key.

Details for gracile are taken from Pesta (1035, p. ¢ , from whieh if appears
that the original description is somewhat Siidanhelss.

Althongh the description of the male of sacesphorum is incomplete, b have
included if in the key to the males, since there is some doubt in iy mind whether
the illustration of p. 1 female given by Monard (1928, p. 815, fie. ix, 3) is not
really that of the male. The slender coudition of the first endopod (ignoring the
fringed lamella) and the stvonely developed immer spine lend support to this view:

Brady's illustration of the male of rebran is confined to the first leg, and as
explained above L consider that the first lex of male and female have beet triais-
posed. The illustration does not make clear the condition of its armature, but it
appears to have 2 lateral setae and 2 inner siiuple spines on the endopod,.

PEUPIDIU M SIMPLEX sp.nov.

Occurrence: DX, several specimens of both sexes and young; NX, 1 specimen;
XI, 4 females; XIT, 1 specimen; XC, 1 imniature.

Female: Length 1°56-1-68 mm.; width 0-90-0-99 mm. Body rounded in
front, with rostrmm projecting shehtly towards the ventral surface, invisible dor-
sully; skeletal pattern strongly developed on a simple plan (fig. 5, A). First an-
tenna 6-seemented, sensory filaments ou third and fourth segments; second an-
tenn with basal semment incompletely divided, exopod 2-seemented, attached at
middle of basal seement ; mouth parts more or less normal (fig. 6).

394 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

First lees with basal segment of endopod expanded, terminal segment Less
so, bearing 2 terminal setae and 1 inner spine; legs 2-4 with the following seta
formula :

endo pod, exopod.
p.2. 1.2.120, 1.1.2238.
p.3. 1.2.220, 1.1.525.
peb. 1,2,220. 1.1.525.

Fifth legs with end segment indistinetly separated from basal segment, cloneate,
with setae and spines all inserted distally; like the other appendages, the fifth
legs are strongly chitinized. Catidal rami short, not visible dorsally,

Pig. 5. A, Pellidiwm simplex sp. noy. B, Peltidium proaimiun sp.nov, OC, Peltidiun speeia-
svn Thompson and Scott; skeletal patterns seen front above, not to same seale.

Male: Length 1°38 mam.; width 0-69 mm. Differs from female only in the
smaller size of the first legs, with more sleuder endopods whieh are similarly armed,
and in the possession of sixth legs. The male examined was obviously mature, and
contained a spermatophore, but the first autenna is quite unmodified and indis-
tinguishable from that of the female. The fifth lees ave identical in both sexes.

This species resembles avale in shape, but has a simpler design in its skeletal
pattern, and differs in the fifth legs. The pattern is on the same general plan as in
ovale, but differs in the anterior and posterior revions. The first antennae and

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 395

end seements of the first endopods are very similar to ovale, and it is probably an
Australian form of this species.

Fig. 6. Peltidivm simplex sp. noy,, mile and female,

As already stated, in view of the similarity of the first antennae in both
sexes of stuplex and of its resemblance as a whole to ovale, it is assimed that
ovale has been deseribed from the male, since the first legs of that species show
the usual modification found in mates.

PeLTIDTIM PROXIMUM sp.nov.

Oeceurrenee: VII, 13 females, 1 male; LX, several specimens; XN, miumerous
speeimens; NIT and XIII, 5 females (1 ovigerous) ; XIV, 4 females.

Kemale: Leneth 1-62-1-80 mm., width 0:87-1:11 mm. Body with promi-
nent rostrum; very slight dorsal crest on head and thoracie segments; seement
hearing fifth lees fused with following segments; first antenna 7-seemented ;
second antenna with distinetly divided basal seoment and lone 2-seemented exo-
pod; mouth parts normal (fig. 7).

First legs with basal seements sub-rectangular, endopod widened, end seg-
tment with 2 thin terminal setae and 2 mer setae, the latter strongly modified ; seta
formula of legs 2-b as in stmpler. Fifth legs with seements distinet, very small

396 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

inner expansion and lone outer branch,
setac.

Male: Leneth 1°38 mm.; width 0+75 min.

Candal raini short with lone terminal

Body as in female, First antenna.
-seemented, with usual sensory filaments and modified seements; first lees with
elongate second basal segment, endopod slender, with two inner setae modified,

7

Fig. 7. Peltidium progimum sp. noy., male and female.

seroll-like as in Parapellidium dubrum (fig. 11); legs 2—+ as in female; fifth legs
with second outer spine much more stronely denticulate than in female; sixth legs
with 3 setae.

In the first and fifth legs this species resembles perplerwn Thompson and
Seott, but the skeletal pattern (fig. 5, B) shows certain differences, and the size
of perplerimn is much smaller (1-1 wm,).

NIcHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 397

PreLtipium speciosum Thompsou and Seott 19038.

Peltidium speciasum Thomps, and Scott, 1903, p, 274, pL. xiii, fig, 12-17,
Poininutin A, Seott, 1909, p. 205, pl. Ixv. fig. 16-20.

Occurrence: 11, 5 specimens; VIL, 5 specimens; X, numerous specimens; XT,
Lfemale; XTL, + females; NTT, 1 female, 2 males; NTYV, 6 females.

Distribution: Ceylon, washed from dredgings trom pearl banks; Aru Islands,
washed from dredgings from pearl banks, in 13 metres.

This species has been identified with speciosum on account of the strneture
of the appendages rather than the similarity of the skeletal pattern (fig. 5, C).

Fig. $8. Pelidiim speciosum Thompaon and Seott, mate and female,

In both the Ceylon material and the Australian specimens the design reaches a
rather complicated condition, and it is not certain whether all the longitudinal
hars in the original drawings are on the dorsal surface or whether some may be
ventral in position but connecting with those of the dorsal surface, as is the ease
in my specimens. For this reason a close comparison is uot possible, but in
general both A. Seott’s minutwm and the specimens found here agree with the
original drawings, and in the structure of the appendages all three are in very
close agreement. In size minuhum is somewhat smaller (0-8 mm.), whereas this
,

material agrees with that of Thompson and Seott, but the size of these Peltidiids

varies over a considerable range, as has been shown,

398 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Female: First antenna 7-seemented, with the usual sensory filaments ; second
antenna with basal segment distinetly divided; mouth parts as usual. First legs
with both segments of the endopod widened, end segment with 2 thin terminal

setae and two lateral modified setae; seta formula differs from the usual :

endopod. exopod.
p.2. 1.2.120. 1.1.223,
p.3. 1.2.320. 1.1.323.
p-4. 1,2.220. 1.1.323.

Fifth legs with segments distinct, second outer seta strong and spine-like with
several large denticles.

Male: Length 1-08-1-32 mm., width 0-62-0-69 mm, The male has not pre-
viously been described. First antenna 8-segmented, modified as usual; second
antenna with basal segment divided, exopod long, 2-segmented; mouth parts as
in female. First legs with elongate basal segments and slender endopod, end seg-
ment with 2 long thin terminal setae and 2 inner modified setae. Legs 2-4 with
seta formula as in female; fifth legs similar to those of female, but second outer

spine more strongly denticulate; sixth legs with 5 setae,

ParapeLtTipium A. Scott 1909.

This genus was created for a single specimen taken in a vertical haul from 10
metres to the surface at night, while at anchor in Laiwui, Obi Major, Station 142
of the ‘‘Siboga’’ Expedition. An electric light was used in the net, and this is
most probably a bottom living form.

The genus is retained, for the present, for such species of Peltidiwm as show a
distinet fusion of the two segments of the fifth lees, and therefore includes serra-
tum Thompson and Scott (1903), on whose ‘‘remarkable’’ fifth legs the authors
commented at the time. Further points of similarity between the members of this
genus, distinguishing them from Peltidiwm, are the noticeably flattened body and
the development of dorsal crests to the body segments in the mid-line. These are
stated to be present in johnstoni (A. Scott, 1909, p. 212) though not shown in the
figure (pl. Ixv, fig. 1). In the ease of serratum they are illustrated (Thompson
and Seott, 1908, pl. xiii, fig. 18) but not mentioned in the text. T
and strikingly developed in both the species deseribed here (fig. 9, 10), The

hey are present

males show the same sexual differences found in Peltidiwne.

There are, therefore, now 4 species to be included in this genus: serratwin
Thomp. and Se., johnstoni Scott, cristatum and dubiwn spp.nov. The second of
these, johnston, is presumably a male. Though described as a female there are
no specifically female characters described or portrayed, whereas the first leg is
obviously that of a male, and although supporting male characters are lacking,

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 399

yet in Peltidiwit also males with unmodified first antennae are known. The very
strone chitinization of the fifth lee may perhaps be regarded as a male charac-
teristic.

Thonipson and Seott’s species serratwi is elearly a female; erislalim is here
deseribed from both sexes, while dubaon is known only as a male.

As already shown the 5-se@mented first antenna here has no generic value,
while the slender endopod of the first legs has no systematie significance

Key TO ParareLTipiumM HK eMaALeEs.

First antenna 6-seemented ; first endopod with 3 small subequal terminal setac;

fifth lee with 6 setae rn ‘ at serrahion Th. and Se, 1908,
Kirst antenna T-seemented ; first pndlopid with 2 terminal setae and 1 inner spine-
like seta; fifth lee with 5 setae I My +5 cristalim sp.nov,

Key to rin Manes.
1, Virst endopod with 2 terminal setae and 1 inner thicker seta. . Je as
Kirst endopod with 2 lerminal setae and 2 inner modified spines.
dubia sp.nov.

2. Pilth leg with 1 short terminal spine, 1 inner and % outer spines and setae;
first antenuia S-scementecl . le johnston’ A, Seott 1909,
Rifth lee with 7 lone ter tinh} spine, 2 | Inner and 2 outer spines; first antenna
S-seomented *. ~ ne o: +3 cristahion spanoy.

PARAPRLTIDIUIM CRISTATITM sp.nov.

Oceurrenee: VIL. 1 ovigerous female; VIET, 1 female; TX, 1 specimen; Rott-
nest Island, Western Australia, from weed-covered rocks on the shore at Bathurst
Point, April, 1939, 1 male.

Remale: Length 1-5-1-65 mm, width 1°08-1-11 mm. Body flattened in
nsttal Parapeltidiid manner, with laree rectangilar vosivum and dorsal evest, each
seement prodieed dorsally as well as laterally (see male in fie. 9, lateral view).
Margin slightly serrated as in servatum. The skeletal pattern is of a simple design,
with weak anterior and stronger posterior transverse bands io each seement, but
without longitudinal connecting bars in the epimeral expansions. First antenna
T-segmented, with sensory flaments on third and fourth seements: sceond an-
tenna S-seomented, with 2-segmeuted exopod attached at distal end of basal join ;
mouth parts normal (fig. 9).

Hirst leg with endopod inuch broadened, bearing 3 unmodified terminal
setae, the inner of whieh is much thieker thin the other two and spine-like; sets
formula of legs 2-4:

endopod, exopod.,
p.2. 1.2.120. 1.1.225.
pa 1.2.220. 11.823,

me = -1.2.220, 1.0.323,

400 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ie

SM

Big. 9. Parapeltidium evistatiae sp. nov., male sand female, The first legs of both sexes are
drawn to the same seale, but the male Sth leg is drawn at a magnifiertion equal to twice that
of the female Sth leg; mouth pats are drawa wil to the same seale, but those of the male are
slightly smaller than those of the female; maxilla from female, mandible, maxillule, and maxilliped
from male.

Fitth lees with segments fused, strongly chitinized, with thin marginal lamella
fringed with fine hairs. Candal rami elongate, with terminal and lateral setae.

Male: Deseribed from a single specimen taken in Western Australia. Leneth
1:23 mm., width 0-93 mm. Shape of body and skeletal pattern as in female, First
antenna S-seemented, sixth and seventh shehtly modified for graypine, sensory

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 401

filaments on third and fourth; other head appendages as in female—the maxillule
is somewhat reduced from the usual Peltidiid condition,

Kirst legs with slender endopod, with 3 unmodified setae, the inner seta
slightly thicker than the two terminal setae; legs 2-1 as in female; fifth leg searcely
different from that of female.

That this species is distinet from Scott's is evideut from the relatively simple
design of the skeletal pattern, aud the greater number of seements in the first an-
tennae. If differs from serrata in the skeletal pattern, first endopod and fifth
legs.

PARAPELTIDIUM DUBIUM sp.nov.

Occurrence: TY, 1 male.

Male: Length 1-29 mm., width 0-81 nun. Body with rather irregular outline,
rostrum asymmetrical, projecting; body seements with large lateral expansions

Fig. 10. Parapeltidium dyubiin sp. noy, A, skeletal pattern from ahoye; B, male from
right side.

402 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and dorsal erests (fig. 10). First antenna 8-seemented, third and fourth with
sensory filaments, sixth and seventh modified ; second antenna with basal segment
divided, exopod long, 2-seemented:; mouth parts normal (fig. 11).

Biv. 11. Pavapeltidiiom dubia sp. noy., male,

First legs with clongate basal segments aud slender endopod, bearing 2 thin
terminal setae, and 2 modified seroll-like inner setae; legs 2-4 with the following
seta formula (right side) :

endopod. exopod.
p.2. 1.2.120. 1.1.228.
p.3. 1.1.320. 1.1.323.
pA. 1.2.220, 1,.1.823.

The third endopod on the right side is somewhat abnormal, lmt the left third lee
was quite abnormal, the second and third segments of the endopod were fused
and the exopod was t-segmented ; filth legs with seements distinetly fused. Caudal
rami long, with lone setae, but invisible from above,

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA From SouTH AUSTRALIA 403

Faminy TEGASTIDAE Sars 1904,
Treaastus Norman 1905.

A single male specimen of a species of Tegastes measuring 0-33 mau. occurred
in this colleetion (TIT), which 1 have been unable to identify with any of the known
species, The dissection was, however, somewhat inconiplete, and the species will
not be deseribed until more material has been obtained to enable a full study to
be mace,

Faminy PORCKLLIDIIDAR Sars, 1904.
PorereLiptyat Claus 1860.

Pesta (1935) has reviewed this gems. added two new species, and deseribed a
male and young without naming them. Ini his list of species (p. 875) No. 9 is
missing (probably through a printer's error), and this is presumed to be sentation.
which is later mentioned in the text, but with ne refercnee; wifortiumately T hayve
heen unable to trace this species,

Of those listed by Pesta he states that parouliue and ocolium taller (1880)
ure insufficiently dleseribed, and he reaareds thea as spectes ticerlae; Luberculatun
Wolfenden (1905a) is the young of qeudicdudilam Thompson and Neott, according
to Gurney (1927b) 5 wolfendent Brady (1910) is a synonym of affine Quidor
(1906) ; and rotundum Brady (1910) is probably immature,

To these he adds sealéi for fimbrietim of Thompson and Seott (1903), whieh
be regards as distinet from fibre Claus (1863), and eluvigeruu a new Species
from Hawaii. To these hive been added (wo varieties of fimbrialum, described bar
Monard (1928) = var.aneerueent and var. heraldiewm, Liang (1985) has suggesterl
that lecanatides Claus (1889) is a variehy of fimbriatumn.,

Pesta (/oe. eit.) makes a new species of {anbriatym as cleserihed by Thompson
and Seott on the proportions of the sewments of the first antenna, Jeneth and posi-
Lion of the iimer seta on the first endopod, the position of the rib in the fifth leg,
differences in the caudal rai aud the different distribution.

The proportions of the segments of the first antenna as stated in the text ry
Thompson and Seott ave not borne ont by the illustration (pl. xil, fie, 2), in whieh
they closely resemble the proportions quoted by Pesta from Claus, and also agree
with Sars’ drawing (1911, pl. Ixy, a1). The position of the inner seta on the first
eudopod is probably due to faulty abile vation since the point of attachment of
this seta is always hard to make out (ef. Pesta’s draay ing of this seta in clavigerum,
lac, cit., p. 877, in whieh it is stated to be attached basally). The position of the
rib in the fifth leg is merely a question of the position in whieh the lew is drawn,
since it is always more or less central, and forms the anvle at whieh ihe two halves

+04 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the boat-shaped segment meet, The difference in distribution has little value,
since many Mediterranean species haye been found as far away as the Malay
Archipelago and Australia.

But the candal rami show certain differences, as stated by Pesta, and even
more important, the posterotateral projections from the genital segment are clis-
tinetly rounded in fimbriafum Clans, and the fifth legs do not reach the ends of
these projections, whereas in Thompson and Scott’s drawing the projections are
pointed, and the fifth legs extend beyond these points, Kor these reasons, therefore,
fimbriaium of Thompson and Scott may be regarded as a (listinet species, to whieh
the name scott? has been given by Pesta.

As pointed out by Pesta (loc, cif., p. 877) elavigerm is of the fimbrulun type,
and its caudal rami resemble those of fimbriation var, wader Monard (1928 }
in their armature, Monard’s variety in the female shows a considerable differene:
in the proportions of the caudal rami from those of finbriatwne Qength to width
nearly 7:2 compared with 2:1), and elavigerune has the normal proportions of
Jimbriaton. Furthermore, Lang (1985) has illustrated the caudal rami of leer-
noirdes Claus (1889) (the original deseription of which | have not seen), and
stresses the resemblance between this species and fimbriatim var. maerwun
Monard. It is probable, therefore, that clawigermm is identical with Lecanotdes,
and this view is supported by coniparison with the illustrations of this species given
by Norman and Seott (1906).

Below is a key to the females of Poreellidinm, from which are excluded those
spevies whieh are uncertain, and those which appear to he synonyms as well as
sentulum. For lenuicauda Claus (1860) and fecanoides Claus (1889) [have relied
ou the deseriptions given by Brady (1880) and Norman and Seott (1906) re-

spectively.
Kny ro Pore euuipiiu a MEM ALES.

1, Genital segment with postero-lateral projections —.. Ae i>
Genital segment without such projections .. Ae ‘3 . |,
2. Projections from genital seement reaching end of anal segment bit not to
end of eaudal rami 4. \fae: =
Projections from venital seementt reaching endl of eandal rani. See
B. Caudal rami rectangular, Qruneale .. ' He ie oo‘
Caudal rami tapering, pointed or rounded +6 fa bo. ae
4. Projections from venital segment with convex onter margin; eatudal rami
lipped with 4 short spines aid 1 seta fe lecanoides Claus 1889.
Projections from genital sezgment with concave outer margin; caudal rami
tipped with setae only oe ie i ne seollt Pesta 19309.

5. Projeetions from genital segment reaching middle of caudal rami.
aenticaudation Thomp. aud Seatt 1905,
Projections from venital segment extending only slightly beyond anal
seamen oe EL: , ‘fs i. ré ' (i.

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 405

6. cea raid pyriform, tapering clistally
Caudal rami sub-rectanenlar proxinially, outer marein rounded distally

es

7. Caudal rami each tipped with a single spine, without other armature.
tenwicauda Claus 1860.
Caudal rami tipped with a single seta, and with 4 outer and 2 dorsal setae.
brevicaudatum Thoinp. and Seott 1903.
8. Hirst antenna 6-seemented 4 ravanac Thompson and Seott 1903.

First antenna 7-seemented ~ i .. affine Quidor 1906,
9. Kitth legs extending round caudal rami, overlapping posteriorly.
miterrupluit G. M. Thompson 1883.

Wifth lees not meeting behind caudal rami. , ~e 44 .. 10.
10. Body length to width as 8:2 2 t fimbriatiwin Claus 1863.
Body length to width as 2:1 i .. fulvwn G, M.' Thompson 1883.
11. Caudal rami as long as wide ae a .. australe Brady 1910.
Caudal rami wider than long 3 43 charcott Quidor 1906.

PORCELLIDIUM FIMBRIATUM Claus 1863.
Oceurrence: XII, 1 female.
Distribution: British Isles, Norway, Mediterranean,
A single specimen, an ovigerous female, was found in this colleetion, which
showed the typical features of this specics as deseribed and illustrated by Sars

* \
. NS

io Ment N

Fig. 12. Poreellidium fimbriatwn Claus, wosome (Ur); and Poreellidiwm fulvum G. M.
Thompson.

406 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

(1911). The lateral incisions in the expansions from the genital segment (lig. 12,
li) are somewhat deeper than is shown by Sars, but there is little doubt that it ts
identical with Claus’ species. Length 0-96 min., width 0-60 mun,

Porcennipium runvum G, M, Thompson 1885,
Oceurrence: IX, 1 female.
Distribution: Otago and Lyttleton Harbours, New Zealand,
This single specimen, which was not ovigerous and may not have heen mature,
is almost certainly identieal with that described by Thompson. Ele states that it
is ‘hardly more than half as long as broad’??; this specimen was slightly narrower,

** Candal

‘* Anterior antennae very short... . uot half the width of the body.’
segments quadrate, ciliated at the extremity.’’ The size of his specimen, however,
was cousiderably @reater than mine (1:20 im, as against 0-66 mm.), but this is
probably unimportant. Apart from the wiusual shape, the most striking resem-
biance is in the shortness of the imuer seta on the firs! endopod, which does noi
reach the end of the basal seement (fig. 12). The absence of an inner seta from the
end segment of the first exopod in Thompson's drawing (pl. vi, fig. 10) cannot be
regarded as important since it is easily overlooked.

Seta formula for legs 2-4:

endopod. —— exepod.
pee. 12.121. 11.228.
ps. 1.2.221. 11.923.

pe et. 1g.

PORCELLIDIUM ACUTIVAUDATUM Thompson and Seott LY0Od.

Occurrence: XT, 1 ovigerous female.

Distribution: Suez Canal, Ceylon, Maldives, aud laceadives.

This species was oviginally described from Ceylou, and later cdeseribed by
Gianey from the Suez Canal. There can be little doubt that Wolfencen’s faber-
culahien is identical with this as stated by Gurney (19276). The single ovigerous
female taken herve is somewhat larger than the type; it is intermediate in body
proportions between the type and Wolfenden’s form, and lacks the tubereulate

24

exoskeleton. Length 1-05 win, width 0+78 nom, The seta formula for legs
is as in Julvum above.

PoRrcebLiptuM AUSTRALE Brady 1910.
Occurrence: NI, 2 specimens, male and female taken towether,
Distribution: Kereuelen Island.
The single female, taken with the male attached, was unfortunately immature,
and a condition simular to that in the Pelldtidae is observed here in that the male

NICHOLLS-—-COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 407

Fig, Wh. Pereellidien australe Bewdly, The female rostrum and ist antenna and male
urosome tre drawi in ventral view.

is found attached to immature females, while the latter is no larver than the male,
whereas the adult female is always larger than the male. Unlike the Peltidiids,
however, when the sexes pair the male is aifached to the fifth legs of the female by
means of its strongly prehensile first antennae, so that they are arranged in landem.
In the Peltidiids the male clasps the female around the eephalosome, or between

408 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

that and the first free thoracie segment, by means of its powerful maxillipeds. In
both eases, where paired animals have been taken, the female was iamature and
about to moult into the adult condition, while the male was fully mature.

Although the female was immature it could be identified with Brady’s species,
and the male agrees well with his drawings as far as comparison could be made.
Since his description is not very full, the specimens taken here are fully iustrated.

Length 0-60 mim., width 0-45 inm., both specimens the same size. The dorsal
surface of the male is strongly tuberculate.

Famity TISBIDAE (Sars) 1904.
Macuairorus Brady 1883,

Lang (1956b) in a revision of this genus has concluded that the gents Psa-
mathe Philippi is identieal with Machawropus, and since the older name is pre-
oceupied, Brady’s name must stand. Ile @ives a key to the species, from which ouly
sarsi Brady 1910 is exeluded. Since then he has described another species, antare-
ficus Lang (19366).

Two species occurred in this collection.
MACHAMOPUS INTERMEDIUS Sp.HOoVv.

Occurrence: LX, several specimens; X, 1 female, 1 young; AL, 4 ovigerous
females, 4 young; XU, 4 females (3 ovigerous), 2 males.

Female: Length 084 nun. First antenna segmented; second antenna with
d-seemented exopod, of which the third segment is the shortest; inouth parts more
or less typical (fig. 14) ; first lee with middle segment of exopod swollen basally as
in plumose (Brady), though to a less extent, Seta formula of legs 2-4:

endopod, exopod.
p.2. 72,221, 1.1.223.
p.3. 1.2.821, 1.1.325.
pea. 1.2,221. 11.323,

Filth legs very much as in the type species, caudal ramias in plumosa. The genital
segment is partially divided, ventrally anc laterally.

Male: Length 0-66 mm, The male differs froin the female only in the first
antennae, which are S-segmented, and fifth aud sixth legs.

It is with some hesitation that this species is separated from plwitosa, which
has been redeseribed by Lang (1984). A comparison with the original and with
Lang’s description shows several points of differenee, Firstly in the proportions

of the segments of the first anteuna, in which it also differs from longicaude

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 409

(Philippi, 1840), The exopod of the second antenna lacks setae on the second and
third segments ; the mandible palp is different from that of Philippi’s species. One
of the distinguishing characters of Brady’s species, according to Lang, is the
swollen middle segment of the first exopod. In intermedius this scement is swollen
but toa much smaller extent, the swelling being restrieted to that portion proximal

Pig. 1A. Machairopus intermedius sp. uoy., mile and female, The labrum shows # recurved
fip, aid is qeeompanied by a mandible i site; the drawing of the maxillule is taken from the
male. The genital areca of the female was drawn as seen through the urosome from the dorsal
surface.

to the attachment of the seta, The fifth leg is very siniilar in all three species, and
the caudal rami show ouly sheht differences trom those of p/lawmosa (ef. Lane, loc.
ett., p. 19). The male differs from phanose in the first antenna and fifth and sixth
legs.

A second species of Machairopus ocenvred in collections from Nellick Beach
(LX). An oviverous female, measuring 0-69 mi., was found, but unfortunately
the fifth legs were lost during dissection, and without these it is useless to deseribe

the species.

410 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Famity THALESTRIDAE Sars 1905.

Lang (1936e) has recently revised this family, and gives keys to the family
and genera. Ile divides the family into four sub-families, chiefly on the sexual
characters.

Sub-family DacryLopopinaE Lang 1936.
Bupacrynopus A, Scott 1900.

This genus contains three species, which are discussed by Lang (loc, cit. p. 85).

KuDACTYLOPUS AUSTRALIS Sp.nloV.

Oceurrence: LX, 2 females; XII, 1 female; XLV, 1 female.

Female: Length 1:26-1:88 min, Body comparatively slender, the urosome
forming more than half the total length. Hirst antenna 9-segmented ; rostrum
prominent, rounded, mobile—not always visible dorsally; second antenna with
exopod distinetly 2-segmented ; mouth parts showing greater development than in

Fig. 15. ELudactylopus australis sp, nov., female.

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 411

type species (fig. 15). Hirst lees like those of robustus (Claus, 1863) ; lees 2-4
with seta formula:

endopod. exopod.
p.2. 1.2.22. 11.225,
ps. 1.2.521. 1,1,3238.

pA. 1.1.221. 1.1.323,

Fifth legs large, extending to the middle of the post-genital sezment, basal seg-
ment with more or less parallel sides, end seement pyviform. Caudal rami as wide
us long.

Male; Unknown.

This species shows several differenees from previously described species, The
genital seement is yery large, and is almost as long as the remaining three urosome
segments together, At the same time the body is relatively much more slender
than in vobustus, While the fifth legs are long, as in robustus. their sexments are
of a shape quite different from those of robustius, and they extend no further than
the middle of the post-genital segment, whereas in robustis they veach at least to
the hind margin of this segment. In Jatipes ('T. Scott, 1894) they attain approwi-
mately the same position as in australis, but ave of an entirely different shape, The
“segmented exopod of the second antenna further distinguishes this species From
rabusiys and from speelabilis (Brian, 1923),

Sub-family Trratesrrimar Lang 1936,

PrYLLOTHALESTRIS Sars 1905,

‘

According to Lang (ep, cit. p. 45) the genus contains 3 species, with a possible
fourth,

PATYLLOTHALHSTRIS MYsTs (Clans) 1863.

Occurrence: XTTT, 2 Females (1 ovigerous).

Distribution: Norway, British Isles, Madeira, Mediterranean, Suez Canal,
Ceylon, Obi Tslands.

The two females in this collection show only small differences from the type.
The size is somewhat smaller, 1-1 mm, instead of 1-4 mm., and the end segment of
the second exopod has only 2 inner setae instead of 8 as shown by Sars (1911, pl.
Ixxi). Moreover, the inner seta on the basal seement of the fifth lee is relatively
closer to the terminal setae, and the second outer seta of the distal segment is not
differentiated as a spine, but this and the third seta ave slightly stronger than the
other 4, Ina specimen taken in Western Australia these 2 setae are both small

412 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

spines. There seems to be a certain amount of variation in the fifth legs of this
species (ef. Sars 1911, pl. Ixxi, and Monard 1928, fig. xvii, 1). The Western Aus-
tralian form agrees with that from Sellick Reef in the second exopod, but the inner
seta on the basal seement of the fifth lee is missing.

Famiry DIOSACCIDAE Sars 1906.

In conjunetion with the present work | have made a revision of this family,
dealing in particular with the genus .lmphiasens and its closely-related genera.

This revision will be published separately. If need only be noted here firstly,
that Gurney’s (1927b) genus Ainphiascopsis is retained, but has been enlarged to
include a number of related forms, and, secondly, that ihe debilis forms anc. re-
lated species are placed in a new genus Amphiascotdes,

A short definition of this new genus is giyen in the appropriate place,

Amprrascorsis Gurney 1927h.
AMPHTASCOPSIS LONGIPES sp.nov.

Occurrence: VII, 1 female, X, 5 females (4 ovigerous), 2 males; NIT, 2 fe-
males (1 ovigerous).

Female: Length 0-98-1-05 mm. Rostrum round anteriorly, with 1 seta on
each side; first antenna S-seemented: exopod of second antenma 3-scemented,
middle segment with seta; first legs with very long endopod and large middle seg-
ment in exopod, typical of the venus; lees 2-4 also typical, with the followimg seta
formula :

endopod, — exopod.
p.2. 1.2.121. 1.1.225.
p.3. 1.3.321, 1.1.323.
pa. 11,221. 1.1.5238.

Fifth leg with distal seement nearly as wide as loug, bearing 6 setae, basal expan-
sion with 5 setae. Candal rami as wide as lone, setae unmodified.

Male: Length 0-90-0-96 mm. Differs from female only in the usual way.
Basis of first endopod with large inner spine, which is strongly developed and
euryed; end segments of first endopod relatively longer than in female; second
endopod modified as usual, with the spines strongly developed. Fifth legs with
basal segments of opposite sides united in mid-line and each bearing 2 small spies ;
distal seements with 6 setae (2, 1,4).

This species shows cousiderable resemblance to lagunaris Grandori, as illus-
trated by Brian (1928). Tt differs in the very long first endopod, with its short end

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 413

segments, and in the second endopod of the male. Other species of Aim phiascapsis
with very long first endopods are serselulus, tenwleulus, gracilis, latifolius, min-
ulus, degyplius, phyllopus, havelocki, banyulensis, and hirsutus. Tt differs from

Pig. 16. Amphiascopsis longipes sp. nov., invle and female,

the first two in the shape of the fifth legs, and from these and gracilis in having 3
inner setae on the end seement of the third exopod ; from latifolius and the last

® species in the first exopod, and from minufas in the fifth leo and male second
endopod.

414 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
AMPTIIASCOPSIS AUSTRALIS sp.noy.

Occurrence; NILE, 4 females, 1 male.

Female: Length 0-75-0°93 min. Rostrum triangular, pointed, without laterat
setae; first antenna 9-seemented, segments short and compact ; exopod of seeoud
autenna 3-segmented, middle segment without seta; first legs of Amphiaseopsic
type but endopod not greatly elongated nor very slender ; legs 24 with the usual
seta formula for the cenus. Le. exactly as in Jongipes (above) ; fifth lees with basal

Yan

Lowe

t——
\
— nine

vec

|

Pip. 17. Amphileseapsis australis sp. nov. mile aud female,

seement triangular, bearing 5 setae, end segment subciremar, with 6 setae. Caudal
rani wider than long and nearly as long as anal segment, setae unmodified.

Male: Length 0-99 mm. First anteuna 9-seemented; second antenna as in
female. First legs with enlarged spine at base of endopod, otherwise as in Female;
sceond endopod modified, with 1 scta ou basal segment, end seement with } lateral
setae, 1 terminal spine-like seta and 2 spines attached about middle of segment.
Remaining legs as in female, Fifth legs with basal segments of opposite sides
united in mid-line, each bearing 2 spines; distal segments cach with 6 setae (2, 1,3).

This species, which was found associated with that described above, is very
like it in some respeets, but differs in the first wmteima, exopod of second antenna,

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SoutTH AUSTRALIA 415

first legs, caudal rami and rostrum, In several respects, partiewarly in the pro-
portions of the first endopod, it resembles offenuatus (Sars 1906) but ditfers in
the clearly 3-segmented exopod of the second antenna, the relatively wider first
endopod, aud im the shape and armature of the fifth lees. The male differs from
that of offennalus, which has been described by Wilson (1932, p. 218). in the first
and second legs.

AMPHIASCOIDES gen. Nov.

The following two characters serve to define this eenus, whieh is composed of
the debilis group of Anrphiaseus sens. lat., with additions.

1: Middle segments of second and third endopods each with 1 inner seta.

2: Middle segment of first exopod without inner seta, end segment with only
4 setae and/or spines.

For the full deseription of the venus and list of species reference will have to
be made to the text of the revision whieh it is hoped will be published during 1941,

AMPTHTASCOTDES INTERMINTUS (Willey) 1935,

Occurrence: NX, 2 females; NTI, 1 ovigerous female,

Distribntion: Bermuda.

J

Big. 18. Amphiascoides intermictus (Willey), female.

In 1935 (p. 64) Willey described a species of clmephiaseus from Bermuda,
which was close to 4. debility (Giesbrecht) and which he named subdebilis; at the
sine time he found a variety (faterseiotus) which differed only in the shape of the
fifth leg. Tle has not illistrated his species very fully, and it is not known to what

416 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

extent subdebilis departs from debilis, except in the seta formula, fifth lee, and
eandal rami. The species found here has the distal sewment of the fifth leg imdis-
tinguishable from that of his variety, while the seta formula for legs 2-4 also agrees
wilh subdebilis, Inthe proportions of the segments of the first endopod, however,
it differs from debits to a certain extent, as does also the rostrum, and failing in-
formation to the contrary it must be assnmed that subdebiliy agrees with debits
in these respects. [1 is uncertain what value should be ascribed to the proportions
of legs, from a systematie aspeet, and only extensive breeding experiments can.
enlighten us. The size of subdebilis is eiven as 0-47 mn, that of the variety as
0-69 1m.—the examples found here measured 0-90 mm,

In view of the considerable difference in size and its wide cistribution [ have
raised the variety to the rank of a species, intermediate between debilis and suh-
debilis, as Willey’s choice of name inplies.

TypEMANELLA A. Seott 1900.

Tuydemanella A. Seott, 109, p. 216,
lalysus Brian, 1927.
Lalysus Gaaney 1927b, p. 504.

The genus was regarded by Scott asa Thalestrid, related to Dactylopodella,
which it resembles in shape and in the velatively large basal segment of the first
cudopod. TH is, however, as stated by Lang (1936e, p. 18) clearly a Diosaecid, and
belongs to the Diosaecuae. Talysus, which | regard as synonymous with Tyde-
manella, was correctly placed in the Diesaecidue by its author, though both Gur-
ney (1927b) and Monard (1935, p. 38) placed it in the Thalestridae. Further-
more, Monard (Joe. ett.) includes Tydamanella in the Thalestridae, and Garney
(Joe, eit.) states that Jalysus ‘*dilfers very little’? from Vollemfini, which Lang
(loc. cit.) reoards as synonymous with Daclylopodella. lt is of interest to note
that Scott (/oc. eit.) states that Tydemanclla is closely related to Duetylopodella”.

The close relationship of Tydemancia and lalysus is thus independently
established.

The generic diagnosis given hy Seoll (1909, p. 216) suffices for the two species
hitherto deseribed and for the new species described below. These are typtcu A,
Scott 1909; rufus (Brian) 1927; and robusta sp.nov.

Key v0 Tae FEMALES.

1. Segments 2,5, and 4 of first antenna long and slender, at least twice as long as
wide ms By Be Re Ss typica A. Seott 1909.
These seoments short and stout, no more than half as lone againas wide .. 2.

") Second seament of first antenna with large spine at distal corner.

rufus (Brian) 1927.
Second segment of first antenna withott spine. es robusta sp.nov.

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 417

TYDEMANELLA ROBUSTA sp.nov,
Occurrence; LX, 1 female, ovigerous; XTV, 1 male.
Female: Length 0:78 mm. (anterior portion 0°54, urosome 0-24 im.) ;

greatest width 0-36 mm. Body wide anteriorly, tapering gradually posteriorly.

Fig. 19. Tydemanella robusta sp. noy., male and female,

Rostrum large, not always visible trom aboye owing to curvature of body. Uro-
some wide anteriorly and tapering strongly fo eaudal rami, segments strongly chiti-
nized; genital segment imperfeetly divided, Caudal rami at least as wide as lone,
with 1 long terminal seta as lone as the anterior portion of the body, 1 small seta.
and 1 spine.

418 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

First antenna S-seemented, the basal segments short and strongly built, and
hearing sensory filaments on the third and fourth segments; distal portion with 3
short subequal segments and a long end segment; second antenna 2-seemented,
with a small I-seemented exopod attached at middle of basal segment, bearing 1
lateral and 2 terminal setae; mandible palp uniramous, 2-segmented, linear, the
end segment with 4 setae; maxillule simply constructed, with 1 lobe ; maxilla not
seen; maxilliped normal,

Kirst le with 3-segmented exopod, without inner setae, and only 3 setae on
end segment ; endopod 2-seamented, basal segment as long as exopod bit not ereatly
widened, end segment with 2 elaws and 1 seta. Seta formula For legs 2-4:

endopod. — exapod.
(1) p.2, 1.1121, 01.222.
peo. 12.221. 0.1.822.

pé4 .1.1.221. —0.1,322.

Fifth leg with wide basal segment bearing 5 setae, an oval distal segment with 6
setae. The female carries 2 evg-saes, each with a few large eges.

Male: Length 0-81 mm. (anterior portion 0-54, mrosome 0-27 mm.)- Body
as in female, but urosome d-segmented. First antenna. §-segmented, slightly modi-
fied: second antenna aud mouth parts as in female; lees 1-4 as in female, but
second endopod modified, 2-segmented, end segment with 1 lateral and 2 terminal
setae, and a pair of spines inserted close together, Pasal segment of first legs with
large, strong, inner spine, Filth legs with 2 strong spines on basal segment anc
4 setae on distal segment; sixth legs with 1 large spine and 2 setae.

In the shape of the body this species agrees with (he descriptions eiven for
typice and refs, but has a greater depth than is indieated in Seott’s drawing. The
first antenna closely resembles that of refus, with the exception of the spine on
the second segment in the latter. The second antenna is very like that of rifus,
though with 2 terminal setae on the exopod in place of 1; in typica the exopod is
very long and slender, and has a single terminal seta. The mandible palp differs
from typice in the structure of the gnathobase. The mouth parts of rufus are
neither deseribed nor illustrated by Brian except for the maxilliped which is
stated to be rather robust. Gurney (1927b, p. 505) deseribes the mandible palp
as ‘apparently a long, slender, unbranched rod with three setae’’, which would

(1) In the single female at my disposal the 2nd endopods were asymmetrical, the end seg-
ment being imperfectly developed on one side, Tt is possihle that there shonld he 2 setae on the
middle segment, as in rufus (ef. Gurney 1927p, p. 506).

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 419

closely resemble the condition in the species deseribed here, His Ulustration (fig.

133, D) of the maxilliped shows similarity with that of robusta. In fypica the
maxilliped is slender, differing from both rufus and robusta. The fi first legs agree
in general with both species, hut the endopod differs from typica in the relatively
shorter terminal segment armed with 2 spines and 1 seta. In rufus the basal seo-
ment of the endopod is considerably broadened and uot unlike that of typoca, The
exopod in robusta differs from the others in having only 3 appendages on the end
segment (4 in the male, whieh has an additional small outer spine) and no inner
seta on the middle segment. Lees 2-4 in typica are stated to be ‘nearly similar to
those of Dactylopodellu’’, whieh differs trom that found here; in rufus they are
deseribed as being more or less like other Diosaccids.

The fitth legs are like /ypica, but with setae instead of spines on the basal
segment, ancl are not very different from rufus. As in Brian’s species, there are
two ege-sacs, laterally compressed, with a few large ova. ‘The ege-sacs of Lypicu
are unknown,

The male shows tany points of similarity with that of rufus, particularly in
the structure of the second endopud, thoneb the shape of the end sezment is not so
strongly modified, and the inner spine on the basipod of the first legs is not en-
larged as itis in rufus, but resembles that of ihe female,

lamity CANTHOCAMPTIDAE Sars 1906.
Mesocrra Boeck. 1864.

) Mesocrrma vy qantas (Claus) 1863.

Occurrence: LX, 1 female.

Distribution: Norway, Welizotand, Bermuda, Woods Hole, Mediterranean,
Suez Canal,

The single specimen, a female, occurring in this eollection measured 0+ 27 mm.,
whereas previous records have given its size as from 0+33-0-40 mm. The strue-
ture of the first untenna could not be made out ¢learly in my preparation, neither
was the exopod of the second antenna visible. TH appears to differ in the number
of setae on the end segment of the fifth leg, having only 4, and the inner seta on
the basal segment of the first endopod is inserted mid-way along the marein in-
stead of being slightly nearer the base, Since there is ouly the single specimen, and
that not fully examined, it has been placed for the present, with Claus’ pygmaeu,
which if very closely approaches.

420 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

P.2
P. 4

Fig. 20. ? Mesuchra pugniaca (Clans), female.

OrrHopsyLiLus Brady and Robertson 1873.

Until quite recently this genus has been regarded as a Cletodid, but it has been
established by Lang (1936d) that it belongs to the Canthocamptidae. (loc. ctt., p.
451). Four species have been described : imearts (Claus) 1866; propingwus Mon-
ard 1926a; wallini Lang 1934; and major Klie 1939,

The last of these has, so far, been deseribed only ina preliminary notice, with-
oul illustrations.

ORTHOPSYLLUS RUGOSUS Sp.nov.

Oeceurrence: X, 2 females.

Female: Length 0-81 mm, for specimen in contracted condition, 1-05 mm, for
specimen with body segments extended. Body of usual shape, tapering slightly
posteriorly ; rostrum prominent, slightly down-turned at extremity; anal oper-
eulum and portions of anal segment strongly denticulate; caudal rami with similar
dentiewate fringes to luner and outer margins,

Head appendages more or less normal, first antennae with the spur on the
second segment slightly different on right and left sides (see fig. 21) ; end segment

of mandible palp with 3 setae.

NICHOLLS—COPrEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 421

First legs with endopod segments subequal, basal segment without inner seta ;
legs 2-4 without inner setae on exopods, but 4th lee has a few inner hairs; seta
5 5 ?
formula :

endopod, exopod.

p.2. 0.110. 0.0.013.
p.3. 0.111. 0.0.013,
pe. 1.111. 0.0.013.

AAV,
aint

Pig. 21, Orthopsyllus rigosus sp. nov., female,

On the exopod of these legs the terminal seta which usually accompanies the spine,
and is reduced in /inearis, is absent. The terminal seta on the third endopod is 1e-
duced to a fine hair. The fifth legs resemble those of linearis rather than any other

42? RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

species; Lang (1936e) has shown that Clans” species does ocenr with the seoments
of the fifth legs distinct.

Male: Unknown.

This species resembles linearis in the strueture of the fifth legs (allowing for
the seements to be distinet) but differs from it in the caudal rami, In this respect
it resembles the other three species. It differs from propinquts in the first legs,
exopods of legs 2-4, fifth legs and eandal rami ; wallini has only 2 outer spines on
exopods 2-4, whereas here there are 3. Without illustrations it is difficult to com-
pare this species with wajor, but it would appear to differ in the first legs, which

are assumed to be like those of linearis, aud certainly differs in the maxillipeds,

Famity LAQPHONTIDAE Sars 1907.
Laornonte Philippi 1840.
Laovuonte cornuta Philippi 1540.

Oeenrrence: VIE, 2 females (1 ovigerous); IX, 5 ovigerous females; N, 1
female; X{, 1 female, 1 male; XTY, 1 ovigerous female.

Distribution: British Isles, Norway, Madeira, Mediterranean, Black Sea, Suc
Canal, Ceylon, Malay Archipelago, Kerguelen, Falkland Islands,

Female: Length 0:90-1-02 nin, Several specimens of this clearly defined and
widely distributed species were found; they do uot depart from the description
viven by Sars 1911.

Male: Length 0°90 mim.

LAQHUILONTE LONGISETA Sp.Lloy.

Qecenurrence: LX, 1 mate.

Male: Length 0-30 nun. Body of usnal shapes first antenna 6-segmented, with
the fourth segment ouly slightly swollen ; second autennae aud mouth parts normal ;
first legs yery slender, exopordl 2-segmented, endopod with yery short end segment,
terminal claw with small accessory seta; second lees apparently without endopod,
but this may have been lost in dissection ; third eudopod with spine-like process at
outer corner of middle segment ; seta formula :

endopock. exopod,.
pz: — 0.0,022.
pet. 11.110. 0.0.012.
pe. 0.120. 0.0.112.

Filth legs with well developed eid segment, bearing 5 setae, no inner basal ex-
pansion. Caudal rami little longer than wide, with an inner basal tuft of fine hairs

NICHOLLS—-COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 423

projecting laterally, giving a somewhat indistinet outline to the bases of the rami,
and also imparting a superficial resemblance to bulbifera. Caudal setae louger
than the whole body.

Lge
he
\
\
¥
—
a

2 ‘

N

nt
;

a
L
7
Ziff,
> |
nw
= =
a
\
ai

we

Vig, 22. Lavphonte lowgiseta sp. nov. male.

This species approaches rhodiaed Brian (1928), of whieh only the male is
known, bit has fewer setae on the swinnning lees. The filth legs and eandal rami
ave remarkably alike in both. It seems possible that rhodiaca may be the male of
huibifera—the similarity extends to several points, but it will be necessary for them
to be taken together for such a relationship to be established. In some respects also
this new species resembles bulbiferd, but there are no spurs on the first antennae,
and the candal rami do not project inwards.

amity CE YLONIELLIDAE A. Scott.
CEYLONIDLUA ARMATA (Claus).

Surin avmnata Claus 1866, p. 25.

Ceylonta aculeata Thompson and Seott 1908, p. 265.
Ceylona armata A. Scott 1909, p. 227.

Ceylonia aculoata var. adriatica Brian 1925, p. 130.
Ceyloniella aculeata Wilson 1924 (1925), p. 14.
Lourinia armota Wilson 1924 (1925), p. 15.

424 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Ceyloma armala Gurney 1927b, p. 567.

Ceyloniella aeuleuta yar. adriatica Brian 1938, p. 23.
Ceyloniclla armata Willey 1930, p. 111.

Ceylomella armata Monard 1935a, p. 84.

Ceylontella armata Monard 1937, p. 83.

This copepod was first described as Jurinia armala by Claus (1866) from the
Mediterranean. In 1903 Thompson and Scott described a copepod Ceylonia

Pig. 23. Ceylonietla armata (Claus), mile jad fomale,

aculeata which A. Seott (1909) showed to be identical with Claus’ Jurinia armata,
but since Claus’ generi¢ name was preoccupied Thompson and Seott’s generic name
was retained. In 1924 Wilson showed that Ceylomia also was preoceupied, and
renamed Thompson and Seott’s genus Ceyloniella; at the same time he changed
Jurinia to Lourinia without regard to its synonyiny with Ceylonia. Ceyloniclla
stands as the correct generig name,

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 425

Oceurvence: Xo females (4 ovigerous), 1 male; XT. 1 female, 2 males.
Distribution : Mediterranean, Suez Canal, Ceylon, Malay Archipelago.
Female: Length 0-93-1-32 mm.

Male: Length 1-02-1-23 mm. Despite certain minor differences when com-
pared with Thompson and Scott's figures there can be no doubt that the specimens
found here belong to this species, The caudal rami of the female illustrated show
peculiar setae, which were not found in the male, nor in other specimens. The
female fifth lee, moreover, lacks one seta on the distal sezment, in comparison with
the Ceylon material, thus conforming to Claus’ and Gurney’s descriptions. The
seta formula tor both sexes is identical, except for the male third endopod which is

modified :
endopod. — exopod.
p.2. 1.311, 01,128.
p.s. L321. 01.125.

pel. 1.211, 0.1125,

A single specimen of what juay prove to be a new species occurred in the eol-
lection (also from Sellick Reet), but since it is represented by a non-ovigerous fe-
male, somewhat smaller than the other specimens, it is possibly only an immature
speeimen,

Vamity METIDAE Sars 1911.

Mauris Philippi 1843.

This genus has recently been revised by Steuer (1937), who includes a key to
the species.
Moris yousseaAuMEr (Richard) 1892.

Occurrence: A considerable number of specimens occurred in the collections
from Sellick Reet, both sexes being represented.

Distribution: According to Steuer (1937) it ranges from the North Atlantic
to the Pacific (for details see Steuer, ap. cil.).

There is nothing to distinguish the specimens found here from those found
elsewhere. The depth of pigmentation appears to be a variable feature of the mem-
bers of this genus. Specimens from South Australia were all colourless, whereas
others taken from Rottnest [sland, Western Australia, were bright red when cap-
tured, The pigment is destroyed on preservation in dilute formalin.

As in the cause of Gurney’s specimens (1927h, p. 571) the long caudal seta is
longer than the whole body.

426 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LITERATURE,

References marked (*) have not been consulted,

*Baurd, W. (1845): Trans. Berwich Nat. Club, ii, p. 155,
*Boeek, A. (1864): Vid. Selsh. Forh., Christiania,
Brady, G.S. (1880) : Mon. British Copepoda, i1 (Ray Society, London).
Brady, GS. (1883) : Challenger Reports, Zool., viii.
Brady, GS. (1899) : Trans. Zool. Soc., London, xv, pp. 31-54.
Brady, G. S. (1910) : Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped., xi, Zool., ii, pp. 497-598.
Brady, G.S. (1915) : Ann. Durbun Mus., i, pp. 134-146.
Brady, G. S. and Robertson, D. (1875) : dan. Mag. Nat. Hest. (4), xu, pp. 126-
142.
Brian, A. (1923) : Monel, Zool. Mal, xxxiv, pp. 126-185.
Brian, A. (1927) : Boll. Mus. Zool. Anat. comp. Univ. Gen. (2), vii, No. 9.
Brian, A. (1928): Boll, Mas. Zool. Anal, comp, Uni, Gen, (2), vii, No. 18.
*Claus, C. (1860) : Betlruge zur Kewnliiss der Bnlomostraken. Welt 1, Marbury.
Claus, C. (1863) : Dice fredlebenden Copepoden (Leipzig).
*CJaus, C. (1866) : Die Copepoden Mauna you Nizza (Leipzig).
*Claus, C. (1889) : Copepodenstudien. Die Peltidien.
Cleve, P. T. (1901) : Kongl. Svenska Vetons..Akud. Mundl., xxxv (9).
*Ozermiayski, V. (1868): Verh. Versaminl. Russ. Naturf., St. Petersburg, Abt.
Zool, Copepoda, pp. 89-57.
*Goodsir, H. (1845): Ann. Mag. Nut. Mist, (1), xvi.
Gurney, Kh. (1927a) : Trans. Zool. Soc. London, xxit, pp. 173-177.
Gurney, R. (1927b) : Lhid., xxii, pp. 451-577.
*Haller, G. (1879) : Zool. Anz., ii, pp. 178-180.
Haller, G. (1880) : Arch. f. Nalurg., Jahrg., xlvi, pp. 53-70.
Klie, W. (1989) : Zool. Anz., exxvi, pp. 228-226.
Liang, Kk. (1984) : Aungl. Fysiogr. Sallsk. Handl., N., xbv, No. 14.
Lang, K. (1935) : Awingl. Pysiagr. Sdllsk. Lund Forhandl., v, No. 9.
Lang, K, (1935a) : Tbid., No. 21.
Lang, K, (1936a) : Zool, Anz., exiii, pp. 174-177.
Lang, K. (1936b) : Lbid., exiv, pp. 83-40,
Lang, IX. (1956¢) : Jhtd., exv, pp. 152-156.
Lang, K. (1936d) : Zaal, Jahrb., Sysl., Isvili, pp. 445-480.
Lang, K. (1986e) : Swedish Antare. Baped, (1901-1903), iii, 3.
Monard, A. (192+) : Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xlix, pp. 656-672.
Monard, A, (1926) : Arch. Zool. exp. yen., xv, pp. 39-54.

NICHOLLS—COPEPODA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 427

Monard, A. (1928) : [bid., Ixvii, pp. 259-443,
Monard, A. (1934) : Rew. Zool. Bal. Africaines, xxvi, fase.. 1.
Monard, A. (1935) : Trav. Stat. Bool, Roscof?, Fase., xiii.
Monard, A. (1985a) : Stel, Occanogr. Salammoboa, Bull. 34.
Monard, A, (1936): Bull, Trav. Stat. d’Aequic. et de Peehe, Castiglione, Alger.
Monard, A, (1957) : bid.
Monk, C. R. (1988) + Secenee, lxxxviii, p. 184.
Nicholls, A. G. (1935) : Journ. Mar. Bial, Assoc., xx, pp. 29-45,
*Norman, A. M. (1868); Brit, Assoc. Reps. pp. 247-336 and 344-345.
Norman, A. M. (1908) ; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), xi, pp. 367-369.
Norman, A, M. and Seott, T. (1905) : Ann, Maq. Nat. Hist. (7) xv, pp. 284-800,
Norman, A, M, and Seott, T. (1906): The Crustacea of Devon and Cornwall
(Wesley & Son, London).
Pesta, O. (1985) : Zool. Jahrb., Syst, xvi, pp. 368-979.
Philippi, A. (1839) : Arch. f. Naturg., v. pp. 181-122.
Philippi, A. (1840) : Tbid., vi, pp. as 200,
“Philippi, A. (1948) : Lhid., ix.
Quidor, AL (1906) : Copepodes. Kapedition Antarctigue francaise (1903-1905).

Paris.
“Richard, : (1892) : Bull. Soe, Zool, Pranec, xvii.
Sars, G. (108-11): An Account of the Crustacea of Norway, v, Copepoda

eacvud ieoida). (Bergen. )
Seott, A. (1909) : Sibaga-E'rped., Mon, xxixa, pp. 1-323 (Leyden).
Seo, T. (1804): Trons, Linn. Soc. London, 2nd sev., vi, pp. 1-161,
Scott, T. (1912): Prums. Roy. Soc. Hdin., xtviti, pp. 521-499,
*Seott, T. and seott, A. (1593) san, Seot. Nal. Hist.. April,
Steuer, A. (1937): Not. ist Binlog. Rowgna, ii (8).
Thompson, G. M. (1882); Trans. NZ. Inst, xv. pp. 93-116,
Thompson, 1. C. and Seott, A. (1903): Report on the Copepoda, Ceylon Pearl
Oyster Pisheries, Supp. Rep. Pt. 1, No. 7 (london).
Willey, A. (1980): dan, Mag. Nat. Hist. (10), vi, pp. 81-114.
Willey, A. (1955): Aun. Mag. Nal. Hist. (10), xv, pp. 50-100,
Wilson, ©. B. (1924) : Proce, US. Nat. Mus., lxiv (1925).
Wilson, C. B. (1982) : Ball U.S. Nat, MWus.. No. 158.
Wolfenden, R, N. (1905a) : Fauna and Geography ot the Maldive and Laceadive
Arechipelagoes, ii, Suppl. 1, pp. 989-1040.

NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN MARINE MAMMALS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON, UNIVERSITY OF
ADELAIDE

Summary

Very little attention has been paid to the nematode parasites of Australian marine
mammals. The first to mention their presence was Krefft, who, in 1871, reported
Ascaris sp. from Delphinus forsteri from Port Jackson. One of us (Johnston 1937)
recorded Contracaecum osculatum (Rud.) from the hair seal from Pearson Island,
Great Australian Bight, the host being indicated as Arctocephalus forsteri in error for
Neophoca cinerea, the former name being that reserved for a New Zealand seal. We
reported the occurrence of Anisakis kogiae J. & M., Porrocaecum kogiae J. & M., and
Crassicauda magna J. & M. from pigmy sperm whales, Kogia breviceps (Blainville)
stranded in Moreton Bay, Queensland, and at Port Victoria, Spencer Gulf (Johnston
and Mawson, 1939),

NEMATODES From AUSTRALIAN MARINE MAMMALS
By T., HARVEY JOHNSTON ayp PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University or Aprnatpe.

Very little attention has been paid to the nematode parasites of Australian marine
mammals. The first to mention their presence was Krefft, who, in 1871, reported
Ascaris sp. from Delphinus forsteri trom Port Jacksou. One of us (Johnston,
1937) recorded Contracaccum osculatwm (Rud.) from the hair seal from Pearson
Island, Great Australian Bight, the host beine indicated as Aretocephalus forsteri
in error for Neophoca cincrea, the former name being that reserved for a New Zea-
land seal. We reported the occurrence of Anisakis hogiae J. & M.. Porrocurewn
agiue J. & M., and Crassicauda mugna J, & M. from pignry sperm whales, Aagi
breviceps (Blainville) stranded in Moreton Bay, Queensland, and at Port Vietoria,
Spencer Gulf (Johnston and Mawson, 1939),

The material now reported on was collected by Dr. J. B. Cleland; the Aus-
tralian Museum, Sydney; the South Australian Museum; the Tasmanian Biolog-
ical Survey; and the senior author. The investigation has been assisted by the
Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

The following is a list of the parasites now recorded, arranged under their
hosts :

Dugong oustralis (Owen), Cairns, North Queensland.

Dujardinia halieorts (Owen).

Delphinus detphis L.

Hehinocephalus uncinatus Molin (probably ingested with the prey), St. Vin-

cent Gull, SAL; Anisakis simpler (Rud.), Port Jackson, N.S.W.
Tursiops truncatus Montagu, Encounter Bay, S.A.

Halocercus lagenorhynchi Baylis and Daubney. — Iredale and Troughton
(1984, 68) regard the short-nosed dolphin of southern Australia as being
distinct from Montague’s species, and have named it 7. maugeunus.

Grompidelphis exitis Iredale and Troughton, Manly, N.S.W.

Crassicaude grumpicala sp.nov.

Neaphoca cinerea (Peron and Lesueur), Pearson 1., S.A.

Contracaecum oseulatum Rud.

(iypsophoca tasmanica (Seott and Lord), Derwent TLeads, Tasmania.

Contracaecum gy psophocae sp.noy., Anisakis sp.

Hydrurga leptowys: (Blainville), Port Adelaide, S.A.

Anisakis similis (Baird), Contracaeenm oseulatum (Rud.), Phocascaris hy-

drurgae spnoy., Contracuecum ogmurhini sp.nov.

430 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
CONTRACAECUM GYPSOPHOCAE Sp.nov,
Kig. 1-2.

Numerous specimens from the Tasmanian fur seal, Gypsophoca Lasmeantce
from Franklin Island, off Derwent Heads. Tasmania, collected hy the Tasmanian

siological Survey.

Fig. 1-2. Contracaecum gypsophocac: 1. head, 2. male tail. Pig, 8-4. Contracaecum
ogmorhinis 3. lead, 4. male tail. Pig. 5. Phoecascaris hydrirgae: anterior end. Fig. 6-10.
Crassicauda grampicola: 6, male tail yentral view, 7. male tail sublateral view, 8-10, posterior
ends of females. Fig. 1, 6 and 7 to same seale; 8, 9, 10 to same scale, a, anus; ¢, cloaca; @),
cervical papilla; v, vulva.

Females 45-65 mm. long, 1-5-2 mm. wide; young adults. 39 mm. long, 1 mm,
wide: immature worms 25 mm. Male (one specimen) 80 min. long, 1 mm, wide,
Lips short, wide, without marked lateral expansions; in female 45 mm. long, lips
0-5 mm. wide, 0-2 mm. long. Interlabia about two-thirds length of lips, with

truneated extremity. Collar region about as wide as head, narrower than suceced-

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARINE MAMMALS 431

ing part of body. Ovsophagus oue-seventh to one-ninth body length; appendix
ahout one-sixth oesophageal length; intestinal caecum nearly reaching collar
revion, Nerve vine at about level of anterior end of caecum.

Male: Tail conieal, 0-25 mm. long, Papillae six pair postanal arranged as in
fig, 2, 12-14 pair preanal in single row on either side of becy. Only one spienle
seen, narrow, with wide alae, tip broken off, remainder 12-1 mm, lone.

Female: Viva at end of anterior third af body, Tail short, conical. Hees 40
by 65y, smooth-shelled.

The species differs from others of the genus described from mammals in the
arrangement of the caudal papillae and in the great length of the spiceule. Type
malteand female in Tasmanian Museum, Hobart; paratypes in that Musewm and in
the Sonth Australian Museum,

CONTRACABCUM OgeCULATOM (Rud.) Baylis.

The species has already been recorded by one of us (Johnston, 1937) from
the South Australian hair seal, Veophoca ehierea, ineorreetly indicated as clrelu-
cophalis fovsteri, whieh isa New Zealand species.

CONTRAVAERCUM OGMOLLNT Sp.uoy.
Wig. i-4.

From [Tiydrurqga leptonye, Port Adelaide, Oetober, 1940.

Males wp to 18 non. lone; females to 30 mm. Each lip with anterior lateral
projection, dorsal ip with two, and laterals each with one large and one small
papillae, Titerlabia nearly as long as lips. OQesophagus 14-14, body length. Qeso-
phageal appendix M4 ..—l oy, intestinal caecum yy .9—h) 5. oesophageal length.
Nerve ring about half, and eorvieal papillae three-quarters distance hetween head
aud anterior end of intestinal cveenm, Male tail 0-2 mm, long, pointed; seven pair
postanal papillae, arranged as in fig. 4; young males with twenty-three pair pre-
anal papillae, older with about forty pair, the additional ones being much smaller,
Preanal papillae always arranged in straight row on either side, the first ten on
each side being closer towether than the suceeeding ones. Spicules equal, about one-
third body length.

Female tail short, conieal, 0-24 mm. lone, Vulva two-fifths body length from
head. Hees about 39p by 40u. The species is distinguished from C. gypsophocac
by the lengths of interlabia, of esophageal appendix, and of intestinal caecum, and
hy position of nerye ring, and number of preanal papillae in male. In the relative
lengths of oesophageal parts it resembles €. asewatwm, but differs in position of

432 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

cervical papillae and size of eges, as well as in the number of postanal and regular
arrangement of preanal papillae in male.
The specific name is based on a synonymie name for the host genus.

PHOCASCARTS ITYDRURGAB sp.noy,
Fig. 5,

fimature forms from a leopard seal, Zydrurga leptonys Blainville, whieh
came ashore from the Port River, Port Adelaide, in 1939. Worms about 6 mm. lone,
0°35 mm. wide. Head without interlabia; dorsal lip with two papillae, ventrals
each with one; dentigerous ridges absent. Oesophagus 1-2 1m. lone, with appen-
dix 0-6 mm, lone; intestinal caceum 0°75 min. lone. Nerve ring at 0-82 mm., and
small rounded cervical papillae at 0°37 mm, from head end. Tail eonieal, 0-15 mm.
long.

In spite of the absence of teeth, as figured and deserihed for Phacuscarts by
Hist, we have assigned our species to that genus, the absence of interlabia, com-
bined with the presence of an oesophageal appendix aud an intestinal caecum, pre-
cluding its entry into any other. The ratios of the parts of the alimentary canal
and the position of the cervical papillae differentiate it from P. phoeac Host. Type
and paratypes in the South Australian Museum.

Di FARDINIA HALICORIS (Owen) Baylis,

This large species was taken from an Australian dugone, Dugony australts
Owen, from Yarrabah, near Cairns, North Queensland (Ausiv. Musemn, Ree. No.
W543).

ANISAKIS Sturnis (Baird) Baylis.

Numerous immature females from Hydrurga leptonye, trom the Port River,
Port Adelaide, in 1937 are assigned to this species, The shape of the lips, length
of oesophagus and ventriculus, aud position of the yulya agree with Baylis’ de-
seription (1916, 370). The species had previously been recorded by one of us
(Johnston 1987, 18) from a leopard seal from Macquarie Island.

ANTSAKIS sp.

Animmatnre female Anisakid worm was found in company with a number of
Contracuecum trom Gypsophoca tasmanica, Franklin Island, Derwent Tleads, Tas-
mania (Tasmanian Biological Survey). Length 42 mm., width 0-9 mm, Head
0-23 min. wide, 0-09 1mm, long; yentral lips each with one papilla, dorsal lip with

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARINE MAMMALS 433

two. Posterior limit of oesophagus not clear, but cannot be more than 5 mm. from
head end. Cervical papillae large, slightly asymmetrically placed, 0°62 and 0°55
im. from anterior end, Tail end rounded. The head resembles that of A, similis
(Baird), but we consider it preferable to identify the worm as Anisuhis sp.

ANISAKIS SIMPLEX (Rud.) Baylis.

Krefft’s specimen of Ascaris sp. (1871, 212) from Delphinus farsteri L. from
Sydney Harbour (Austye. Musenm, Ree. No. G11105) has been re-examined. It is
a male sluisakis stmpler. According to Lredale and Tronghton (1934, 65), D.

forsterd is a synonym of D. delphis.

HALOCERCUS LAGENORUYNCHE Baylis and Daubney.

Specimens agrecing with the deseription given by Baylis and Danbney (1925)
were obtained from the lung of a short-nosed dolphin, collected by Dr.J. B, Cleland
at Encounter Bay, S.A. According to Wood Jones (Handbooks South Austr,
Fauna, Mammals, Part 3) the cetacean is Tustops truncatus Montagu, but Iredale
and Troughtow (1994, 68) consider the sonihern Australian animal to be distine!
from the Evivopean and have named it 7. maugeciius.

Eerinoerrnanus UxXCINATUS Molin.

A single immature worm was taken trom the intestine of Delphinus delphis
from St. Vincent Gulf. Tt agrees closely with Baylis aud Lane’s account (1920,
275) of larval forms from Pring and Myliobatis. The presence of this parasite in
a dolphin suggests that if was ingested alone with its normal clasmobranch host.
The world is ina good state of preservation, though other nematodes taken along

with it were in such au tinsatisfaetory condition as to he worthless for study.

CRASSICAUDA GRAMPICOLA Sp.Hov.
Big. 6-10.

From the pterygoid fossa of a grampus stranded at Manly, N.S.W. (Austr.
Museum, Reg. No, W2681). The label indicates the name of the host as Grampus
griseus, but Iredale and Troughton (Ree. Austr. Mus., 19, 1923, 32) subsequently
described the specimen as Grampidelphis crilis T. and T.

Several headless males and females: lougest pieces 10 em, in length ; males 0-9
min. wide; females 1-5 mm. wide,

Male: Posterior end without caudal alae or inrolling of lateral regions; 10
spicules present ; small cirenlar cloaea 0+ 7-0-8 mm, from blautly rounded posterior

434 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

end; 13 papillae on one side, 12 on the other, arrangement asymmetrical and in-
constant, generally a group of three or four on each side just in front of cloaca, the
remaining papillae extending in a more or less straight line on each side toward
posterior end of body.

Female: Tail varying in form, possibly with age; some clongate, some nearly
as broad as long; all ending in short conical tip with anus at its base (fig. 6-8).
Vulva in constriction around posterior end, as in other species of the genus; vagina
very short; eggs oval, 29 by 40u. In one, apparently young, female there was very
little constriction of the body at the level of the vulva.

Owing to the absence of head ends, the variation in the shape of the posterior
end of females, and the fact that males have not been deseribed for many species,
we are unable to compare adequately our form with all those already named. C.
grampicola is the first Crassicauda to be recorded from a grampus, and appears to
be smaller than any described. The shape of the male tail and the position of the
anus in the female indicate that we are dealing with a new species. Types in, the
Australian Museum, Sydney; paratypes in the Australian and South Australian
Museums.

LITERATURE.

Baylis, H. A. (1987) : Parasitol., xxix, pp. 121-180.

Baylis, H. A. and Daubney, R. (1925) : Parasitol., xvii, pp. 201-216.

Baylis, H. A. and Lane, C. (1920) : Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 245-310.

Host, P. (1932) : Zbl. Bakt. Jena Orig., exxv, pp. 335-340.

Iredale, T. and Troughton, KE. (1934) : Wem. Aust. Mus., vi, pp. 1-122.
Johnston, T. H. (1937): Rep. Aust. Antare. Haped., C, x (5), pp. 1-81.
Johnston, T. H. (1937a) : Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, lxii, pp. 9-16.
Johnston, T. H. and Mawson, P. M. (1939) : Rec. 8S. Aust. Mus., vi, pp. 263-274.
Krefft, G. (1871) : Trans. Ent. Soc., N.S, Wales, ii, pp. 2-6-232.

THE CORRELATION OF RECENT AND FOSSIL CREPIPODA
(MOLLUSCA) OF THE AUSTRALIAN SUB-REGION

By BERNARD C. COTTON, CONCHOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM,
AND BENJAMIN J. WEEDING

Summary

Study of the Molluscan Fauna of the Australian seas has received considerable
attention during the past half-century, and useful work has been done in this field.
Naturally this has entailed considerable reclassification of the living Mollusca, and
many alterations and additions have been made to the nomenclature.

With Australian Fossil Mollusca little has been done, consequently the nomenclature
of this branch of the subject is in need of revision, There is a confusing diversity
between the classification and nomenclature of the Fossil and the Recent species
which can only be adjusted by extensive correlations. This work has been
commenced, and some advance has been made in several groups: Pectinidae, Gatliff
and Singleton (1930) ; Harpidae, Cotton and Woods (1933) ; Viviparidae, Cotton
(1935) ; Turritellidae, Cotton and Woods (1935) ; and the Dentaliidae, Cotton and
Ludbrook (1938). Much remains to be done. Since this paper was set up some
fossiliferous material from a bore at Salisbury, near Adelaide, 331 feet, Lower
Pliocene, has been examined, and it may prove even richer in chitons than the
Victorian exposure.

THe CORRELATION or RECENT anv FOSSIL CREPIPODA
(Motiusca) or THe AUSTRALIAN SUB-REGION

By BERNARD C, COTTON, Coxecnnsocisr, Sura Ausrearian Musee M, AND
BENJAMIN J. WEEDING.

INTRODUCTION,

Srupy of the Molluscan Fauna of the Australian seas has received considerable
attention during the past half-century, and useful work has been dove in this field.
Naturally this has entailed considerable reclassification of the livine Mollusea, and
many alterations and additions have been ‘ude to the nomenclature.

With Australian Fossil Mollusca little has been done, consequently the nomen-
elatiure of this branch of the subject is in need of revision, here is a confusing
diversity between the classification and nomenclature of the Fossil and the Recent
species which can only be adjusted by extensive correlations. This work has been
commenced, aid some advance has been made in several groups: Pectinidae, Gat-
HF and Singleton (1930); Harpidae, Cotton and Woods (1933) ; Viviparidae,
Cotton (1985); Turritellidae, Cotton and Woods (1935): and the Dentaliidae,
Cotton and Ludbrook (1938). Mneh remains to be done. Since this paper was
set up some fossiliferous material from a hore at Salisbury, near Adelaide, 331 feet,
Lower Pliocene, has been examined, and it may prove even richer in ¢hitons than
the Victorian exposure.

A SURVEY OF RECENT AUSTRALIAN CREPIPODA.

The name Crepipoda Goldfuss 1820 is here used for the Order of Mollusea
commonly known as Chitons. For many years the Ordinal name Polyplacophora
Gray 1821 was used for this group for reasons of priority, but later workers have
introduced a name Loricata Schumacher 1817 on the same erounds, However, the
name Loricataus was used by Desimarest in 180d for a group of manmunals, and this
renders it midesirable for use in the Mollusea. Also the name Loricata has been
used in the classification of reptiles, erustaceans and rotifers.

It has been asserted that the international rules regarding priority do not
apply to Ordinal names, but we can see no hope of finality or stability in our nomen-
elature unless this principle be accepted. On these grounds we have uccepted the
name introduced by Goldfuss in 1820, since it appears to be the first legitimate term
available,

436 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Also we ave using the word ‘‘chiton’’ as 4 weueral name, Strictly speaking it
should be retained for a West Indian genus, but we believe it to be too firmly fixed
in our vocabulary to be easily dropped.

A large percentage of the world’s chitons are found around the Anstralian
coasts. All four Orders are represented, and these include ten Mamilies with forty-
three genera and the one hundred and ninety-five species which have been recog-

nized to date. These are classified as follows :

Order EOPLACOPHORA.

This Order is characterized by the absence of insertion plates and the sinall,
weak sutural laininae. It is represented by one Family in this sub-region.
Lepidopleuridae, with two genera; Tcrenachiton (wight species) ; Parachiton

(nine species).
Order MESOPLACOPHORA.

This Order has well developed but small and smooth insertion plates and
sutural laminae. Two Families are found here.

[sehnochitonidae with five genera; Subterenochitan (wo species) ; Lsahaw-
chiton (thirty-eight species); Stenochiton (four species) ; Ixchnoradsia (four
species) ; Anisoradsia (one species). Callistochitonidae with four genera; Cullis-
talusma (cieht species); Callistassecla (one species) ; Solivaga (one species) :

Lophochiton (two species ).

Order ISOPLACOPHORA.

The distinguishing features of this Order are the large sutural laminae ancl
jusertion plates and non-sealy girdle. There are four Families in this sttb-region.

Cry ptochitonidae with seven genera ; Craspedochiton (two species) : Craspe-
doplar (three species) ; Weluroplac (one species) 5 Acunthochiton (wenty-two
species) ; Notoplax (eleven species ) ; Bassellullia (two species) ; Crocochitonm (wy
species ).

Cry ptoplacidae has one genus; Cryploplas ( eleven species).

Choriplacidae has one genus; Choriplaa (two species).
Plaxiphoridac has three genera; Aerilanin (one specics) ; Poneroplas (Your

species) ; Kupivnella (two species ).

Order TELEOPLACOPHORA.

his Order contains all the most highly developed forms, characterized by
erooved and pectinated insertion plates. It has three families in these waters.

CoTTON—RECENT AND Fossit CREPIPODA 437

Awacochitonidae(1) with two genera; Auldcochitan (Chree species) ; Lori-
cella (lwo species).

Callochitonidae with three genera; Hudvwoplux (one species; Paricoplax (two
species) ; deutoplaa: (five species),

Chitonidae with fourteen genera; Delicaloplar (one species) ; Teguaplax
(one species) ; Authochiton (thirteen species) ; Mucrosquama (five species) ; Am-
aurochiton (one species); Acanthozostera (one species); Acanthopleura (one
species); Onilhella (two species); Onilhachiton (two species): Lucilina (six

species) ; Schizochiton (one species) ; Sypharochiton (two species).

A SURVEY OF AUSTRALIAN FOSSIL CITTONS.
Lovaurries.

Fossil chitons have been found in New South Wales, Vietoria. Tasmania, and
South Australia. The greatest number of specimens has been found in the world-
famous Muddy Creek shell beds which are situated five miles west of Hamilton,
Western Victoria. In this area the followine localities should be noted :

1. Forsyth’s Bank, situated on the Grange Burn, which is a small stream
flowing westerly to the Wannon River. This horizon is recorded as Kalimnan and
regarded as Pliocene,

2. MaeDouald’s Bank ison the Muddy Creek, a tributary of the Grange Burn,
aul is also recorded as Kalimnan.

4. Clifton Bank is also situated on the Muddy Creek, but the strata here are
recorded as Balcombian and regarded as Miocene,

Other localities in Victoria ave Baleombe Bay (Mornington) and Gellibrandd
tiver (near Williamstown). These localities are both on Port Phillip Bay and are
rewarded as Balcombian.

In Tasmania the Table Cape beds are situated between Table Cape and Wyn-
yard in North-West Tasmania. The fossils from this locality are reeorded as Jau-
Jiukian.

From South Australia the following localities are recorded :

1. Torrensville Bore, 490 ft. at Torrensville.

2. Holden’s Bore, 380 ff., at Woodville.

3. Gaza Bore, 60 ft., at Payneham.

These localities are near Adelaide, and are regarded as Pliocene,

(1) The name Lerica Broun 1848 was intradneed for a genus of Crustacea so is uot available
for chitons, The name accepted is dulacoeochiton Shuttleworth 1858 Genotype, Chiton volvox
Reeve 1847, Sydney, N.S. Wales.

438 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

As will be seen. all the fossil chitons are from the comparatively recent 'ler-
tiary Era, but in New Sonth Wales the cast of a chiton has beeu taken from the
Permo-Carboniterous of Bundanoon, Iredale and Unll (1926), and this reeord
from the Palacozoie Era is the only one from sueh an early period. The debatable
Cheloides calecoloides Fiheridge (1897) trom the Upper Silurian of Derrengullen

Jrock, Yass, N.S. Wales is not regarded by us as a chiton valve.

CUASRIFICATION OF Kloss, Ciuirons,

in the classifieation of living chitons the general form of the animal. the wills,
vacua, girdle, as well as the size, shape, aud sculpture of the shell and, i some
cases, the station and habitat, all contribute to the identification of the species. Tt
is obvious that with fossil specimens comprising often worn and broken fragments
ol valves, most of these featires are absent, and identification depends wholly upon
the shape and seulplire of the valves, from which even the insertion plates and
sitiiral laminae may be missing. Sonsequenthy all classifications must be regarded
{ou ereat extent as artificial and tentative. Workers have conipared fossil with
living species, and hy analogy placed them in the various families and genera. In
some eases genera and sub-venera hiave been introduced by some workers to Focus
attention on some distinetive feature. This practice would not be justified in living
forms, but in the absence of other features is condoned as a means of emphasizinys
differences and as an aid toa more accurate classification,

As might have been expected, owing to these difficulties, many of the speer-
mons named have been valyes, which more material has proyecl to belong to species
already named by other workers. Of fhe seventy-five specimens named, sixty-five
ure here listed as clistinet species, but this number may be reduced when more
material is available. Several doubtful mames have been retained until more
specimens are discovered fo prove or disprove their validity.

No primitive fossil chitons have heen discovered in this sub-region, ‘The mate-
ral before us is as highly developed and in some cases as highly specialized as atiy
living forms, but generally speaking the forms appear to be much siwaller than
similar material found in present-day shell sand aronnd our coasts, a fact which
appears to iudieate warmer seas in the Tertiary.

The name Lepidoplewus is now reserved fora living European gets, and the
small granulated forms formerly placed in this genus are here included in the
wos Torenochiton. There are several generic names available for small granulose
chitous without insertion plates, but Verenochitan is a genus found living around
the coast of dhe region where these fossil aneestors are Found. In the Family Lepi-
dopleuridae several specimens could be removed with justification to the Family

COTTON—RECENT AND Fossit CREPIPODA 439

Isclinochitonidae, but until specimens are found with insertion plates, we leave
them where their authors placed them,

PLEISTOCENE.

The odd valves which oveur in raised beaches and sub-fossil beds are all refer-

able to living species in the material examined to date.

PLIOCENE.

The Order Hoplacophora is represented by one Family, Lepidopleuridae with
two wenera; Terenochiton (five species) ; Belchiton (one species).

The Order Mesoplacophora is represented hy two Families, Ischnochitonidae
with one genus; Ischnochiton (eight species) ; Callistochitonidae one genus ; Cullis-
fclasima (three species).

The Order Lsoplacophora is represented by two Families. Cryptoconchidae
with five genera; cLfossochifon (oue species) ; Tclochiton (one species) ; Acuntho-
chitow (four species) ; Lirachiton (one species) ; Koplas (one species).

Cryptoplacidae one venns; Cryploplas (tree species).

The Order Teleoplacophora is represented by three Families. Anlacochito-
nidae oue genus; Loriccll (two species). Callochitonidae one genus; Paricoplas

(four species). Chitonidae one genus; Anthachiton (four species).

Miovuenn.

The Order Hoplacophora is represented by one Mamily. Lepidupleuridae one
genus: Lerenachiton Your species ).

The Order Mesoplacophora represeuted by one Family, sch noehitonidae one
venus: Ischnochitow (lwo species).

The Order Isoplacophora represented by three Families. Cryptoconchidae
four wenera; Prolochiton (one species); Afessociiton (lwo species) ; Acantha-
chifon (five species) ; Uelochiton (two species). Cryptoplacidae one genus; Cryp-
toplas (one species). Plaxiphoridae one geuns; Poneraplac (wo species).

The Order Teleoplacophora is represented by four Families. Callochitonidae
with one genus: Ocellachiton (one species). Aulacochitonidae tour genera; Proto-
lovica (one species) ; Aulucochilon (three species) ; Pseudoloricella (one species) ;
Lovicella (two species). Chitonidae three genera; Anthachiton (one species) ;

Oovhiton (one species); and Lavconachiton (one species).

440) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
REVIEW OF PLIOCENE SPECIES.

Famity LEPIDOPLEURIDAE.

Of the five species recorded from this horizon, Verenochiton sinervus Ashby
aud Cotton, 7. stngus Ashby and Cotton, 7. arellus Ashby and Cotton, and 7.
babidus Ashby and Cotton are minute fragments of valves with fine granulose
sculpture similar to Living speeies. The last-named has corrugated lateral areas
simular to the recent 7. (italus TH. Adams and Augas. The fifth species, 7. sephis
Ashby and Cotton will probably prove to be aia Lselinechilow.

The genus Pelchifon was introduced to emphasize the distinctive sculpture of
the shell. Belcliton pulcherrimus Ashby and Cotton has enough of the sutural
laminae preserved to indicate the Mamily, and the holotype is better preserved than
most of the specimens in this Family.

amity ISCHNOCHITONIDAEF.,

The material in this Family is so poor that it is better to leave the species as
originally identified until more specimens ave available. If Isehpochitan vinazeus
Ashby and Cotton and J. éswurus Ashby and Cotton prove to be identical, the former
name has priority. J. cossyrus Ashby and Cotton is a badly-eroded specimen which
will be hard to identify again, and lL. durivs Ashby and Cotton is a mine juvenile
valve probably of the same species. 2. negfoefus Ashby and Cotton is a fragment
ol a strongly granulose posterior valve. Ashby aud Cotton (1956) described the
minute posterior valve ofa chiton feom the Gaza Bore under the heading of Lseh-
nochiton 2. The specimen soon ertiubled avay when exposed to the air, and we
vai Ouly leave it where the authors placed it. Isehnochitow varcnue Cotton ani
Godfrey (1940) is a posterior valve which was originally deseribed ancl figured as
Ischnochtton lisurus Ashby and Cotton (1959) and recorded as a hypotype of that
species. Lt was re-cdeseribed as J. warenee Colton and Godfrey (1910) beeause the
granules of the anti-mucronal area are finer aud more evenly spaced than those of
the pleural area of /. tiswrus, and the post-mnueronal shows none of the coarse
ermmpled sculpture of the lateral wrea of that species.

Famity CALLISTOCHITONIDAE,

In this Family the generic name Cullistelasme is used as the specimens re-
corded ave quite distiuet from the South American genus Cullistochiton. Callis-
felausma inerpeela Ashby and Cottou was recorded as Callistochiton meridionatis
Ashby (1925, p.187). Itis closely allied to that recent Flindersian species. Callts-

CoTTON— RECENT AND FOSSIL CREPIPODA 44]

lelasma reticulata Ashby and Cotton has the network sculpture formed by straight
ridges similar to @. antigua Reeve, and C. greed: Ashby and Cotton has stronger
seupture and wider ribs.

Pamity CRYPTOCONCHIDAE.

Several fossil generi¢ terms have been itreduced in this Family. .Lfosso-
chiton, with unslit insertion plates. has one speeies in this horizon, sl. suled Ashby
and Cotton with fine irrezularly eranulose sculpture, Te/ochiton with vay vibs or
folds extending across the artieulamentiim, 7. magnicostatus Ashby and Cottouw
has coarse, Clongated oval, separated pustules. The most interesting Lorm is Lira-
chiton tieepectis Ashby and Cotton, Lirdehiton appears to be the fossil eqnivalemt,
of the living venus Bussethutiia where the grannlose seulptiae becomes linear as
the shell develops. ti the specimen deseribed the insertion plates are well de-
veloped, but slits are not visible. MWaldeliton maces Ashby and Cotton appears to
bea part of the median valve of Lhe same species, and is here rewarded as a synonym.
The genus BLoplae must be regarded as the fossil equivalent to the living Votoplac
se. Moplax udelaidac Ashby and Colton WG is obviously closely allied to the rare
Notoplax spectosu Li, Adams.

The four species of the eeuns Aceuthochilon wre all interesting. They have
evidently been pliced in this genus provisionally as there are no insertion plates or
sitttiral laminae to denote their generic position. Ilowever, the seulpture is very
distinuetive, and further specimens should be readily veeogniaable. AL drwanius
Ashby and Cotton hay long overlapping pustules similar tow. lachrymosus May
and Torr, ol. forsythensis Ashby and Cotton has triangalar pustules, while <1.
Irianguloides Ashby aud Cotton has smaller and move crowded triangular pustules,
A, singletow Cotton and Godfrey has irregular elongated pointed pustiles. This
last Specimen was erroneously figured by Ashby and Cotton (1930, pl. xx, fig. 22)
us dhe holotype of Afosseehitan cudmoare’ Ashhy. Afossachiton cudimoret Ashby
192) isa Miovene fossil, and the holotype is in the National Musewn, Melbourne.

Famiry CRYPTOPLACIDAE,

The genus Cryploplar las four species, Cryploplae pritehard® Wall (1905)
was deseribed from valves too worn to show seulptare, and their identity as ehiton
valves was doubted, Reeenthy mauy hundreds of these eroded valves have been
discovered, and from this material Ashby and Cotton (1939) have selected and
illustrated a plesiotype which can now be accepted as this species. Two other
species have been named From the same locality, anc we have left the tames sep-
arate. Cryploplax municus Ashby and Cotton is probably a juveuile of C. prat-

442 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

chardi, but C. sieus Ashby and Cotton is in good condition and appears to be dis-
tinet. C. ludbroakac Ashby 1940 is a well preserved anterior valve from Holden's
Bore, South Australia; it is sculptured with irregular granules.

Famity AULACHOCHITONIDAE.

In this Family the only eemis recorded is Lorivella, and three species have
been separated, two of which are accepted. Loricella magiopustulosa Ashby aud
Cotton is very small for the genus, but appears to be distinctive. Loricella concava
Ashby and Cotton is a minute juvenile specimen with too few characteristies to be
easily recognized again. The name Lertcella pauucipustulosa Ashby and Torr is
reserved for the Miocene species, and the two specimens recorded as such from
MaeDoualds, Muddy Creek, are tiny undeveloped eroded specimens that cau only
be left with 4. magnopustulosa.

Famiry CALLOCHITONIDAE.

One specimen in this Family has been recorded as Caliochiton macdonaldy
Ashby and Cotton. It looks like a badly-eroded juvenile valve of Paricoplar cra-

crud Reeve. We record it in that venus.

amity CHITONIDAE,

in this Pantily the venus Anthochiton is represented by three species from
Vietoria and one from South Australia. Of the first three, duthochiton mucdon-
aldensis Ashby and Cotton, A. duodent Ashby and Cotton, and A. octocostatus
Ashby and Cotton are regarded as distinet; if further material proves them to be
identical the first name has priority. As the authors indicated, .Luthochiton relatus
Ashby aud Cotton is very closely related to. fricostalis Pilsbry.

List op» Purooenn Specs.

Order EOPLACOPHORA.
Faminy LEPIDOPLEURIDAE.

Terenochiton Tredale 1914 (sublropicalis Iredale).
sinervus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths, Victoria,
singus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.
ucellus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths, Victoria.
bubidus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.
sephus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths, Victoria.

COTTON—RECENT AND FOSSIL CREPIPODA

Belchiton Ashby and Cotton 1989 (pulcherrimus Ashby and Cotton),

pulcherrimus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.

Order MESOPLACOPHORA.

Famity ISCHNOCHITONIDAR,
Tschnochiton Gray 1847 (fertilis Gray).

vinazus Ashby and Cotton 1989, MaeDonalds, Victoria.
fisurus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Vietoria.
cossyrus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.
duvtus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MaeDonalds, Vietoria.
neglectus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths, Vietoria.
wumantius Ashby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths, Vietoria.
varenae Cotton and Godfrey 1940, MacDonalds, Vietoria.
sp. indet. Ashby and Cotton 1939, Gaza Bore, South Australia.

amity CALLISTOCHITONIDAE.,

Callistelasima Ivedale and Thull 1925 (untiquir Reeve).
inexpeclad Ashby and Cotton 1989, MacDonalds, Vietovia,
reticulata Ashby ond Cotton 1939, Vietoria.

deeedt Ashby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths. Vietoria.

Order ISOPLACOPHORA.

Pamiry CRYPTOCONCHIDAR.

slfossochilon Ashby 1925 Ceudmore’ Ashby ).

suled Ashby and Cotton 1939, MaeDonalds, Victoria.
Telochiton Ashby and Cotton 1939 (deadus Ashhy and Cotton).

magiicostatus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Vietoria.
Acanthochiton Gray 1821 (fuseiewlaris Linn).

forsythensis Ashby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths, Vietoria.

trianguloides Astby and Cotton 1939, Forsyths, Victoria.

drwnus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.

singletout Cotton and Godfrey 1940, MacDonalds, Victoria.
Lirachiton Ashby and Cotton 1939 (inerpectus Ashby and Cotton).

inenpectus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MaeDonalds, Victoria.
Koplar Ashby and Cotton 1939 (adelaidue Ashby and Cotton).

adelaidae Ashby and Cotton 1936, Torrensville, South Australia,

443

444 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Famiry CRYPTOPLACIDAE.

Cryptoplax Blainyille 1818 (larvaeformis Burrow).
pritchardy Hall 1904, MacDonalds, Victoria,
steus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.
monicus Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.
ludbrookae Ashby 1940, Holden’s Bore, South Australia.

Order TELEOPLACOPHORA.

Famrty AULACOCHITONIDAR.

Loricella Pilsbry 1895 (angast Hf. Adanis).
magnopustulosa Ashby and Cotton 1989, MacDonalds, Vietoria.
concava Ashby and Cotton, Maedonalds, Victoria.

Famiry CALLOCHITONIDAE.

Paricoplax tredale and Hull 1929 (erecing Reeve).
macdonaldi Ashby and Cotton 1939, MaeDonalds, Victoria,

Kamrty CHITONIDAE.

sAnthochiton Thiele 1893 (tulipa).
macdonaldensis Ashby and Cotton 1959, MacDonalds, Vietoria,
duodent Ashby and Cotton 1939, MacDonalds, Victoria.
octocostatus Ashby and Cotton 1989, MaeDonalds, Vietoria.
relatus Ashby and Cotton 1986, Torrensville, South Australia,

REVIEW OF MIOCENE SPECTES.

Famity LEPIDOPLEURIDAE.

Of the six names recorded in this Family, four have been placed in the genus

Terenochiton. They are 7. magnogranifer Ashby 1925, T. babioides Ashby and
Cotton, and 7. diversigranosus Ashby and Cotton. 7’. relatus Ashby and Cotton is

also ineluded, although it is probably an eroded fragment of the first.

pleurus nivarus Ashby and Cotton has been remoyed to the Tschnochitonidae.

Lepidoplewrus pamphilius Ashby and Cotton is a fragment of Protochiton granu-

losus Ashby, and becomes a synonym of {hat species.

CoTTON—RECENT AND FosstL CREPIPODA 445

lh aminy ISCHNOCHITONIDAE.

This Family is very poorly represented, and only two species are here re-
eorded, Tschnochiton mivarus Ashby and Cotton is added to this genus as the
featuves seem too distinetively Ischnochitonoid to leave with the Lepidapleuridae,
Ischnochiton ashbyt Cotton and Godfrey was deseribed and figured by Ashhy
(1929) as Ischnochiton (Heterozona) cariosus Pilsbry. Althongh this Miocene
fossil may possibly be allied to the living species the differences warrant the separa-
lion, Teashby?t does not show the strong broken rays which are prominent features
on the lateral areas of J. cariosus. The sub-eranulose lirae of the pleural area of
T, cariosus become zig-zag usually only at the jugum, but in 7. ashbyi zie-zae lirae

eross the whole of the plewal area and the raised lateral area as well,

Faminy CRYPTOCONCHIDAR.

This Family is represented by four genera, Profachiton grapnulasus Ashby
and Torr has been well deseribed and figured several times. A/sossochiton end-
more? Ashby has triangular pustules, and Acanthachiton cusus Ashby and Cotton
isa very small juvenile with similar sculpture, so may prove to be a juvenile of
that species. Lfossechiton. rostratus Ashby and Torr should be easily recognized
by the few irregularly-shaped pustules. Telochitan dendus Ashby and Cotton with
fine granules, and 7. iscus Ashby and Cotton with coarse vvanules both show the
characteristic ribbing of the genus. Neither Acanthoehiten sabratus Ashby and
Cotton with semi-cireular granules, nor Acanthochiton pilsbryotdes Ashby and
Cotton with ovately-pointed gramues, have insertion plates, so the correct generic
position cannot at present be ascertained, but sleanthachiton bulcombiensis Ashby
1039 with clliptieal flattopped pustules is a well-preserved and typieal Aequtho-
chilau valve.

Paminry CRYPTOPLACIDAF.

In (bis Family the name Cryploplax gatliffi Hall has been left on the list. [
has heen recorded as a synonym of Cryploplax pritchardi Wall, a Pliocene fossil.
The species was founded on a valye from which all distinguishing tezmentiin hal
heen eroded ; further research in the locality may produce material with sufficient

sculpture to justify its separation.

Faminy PLAXIPHORIDAE.

In this Family two species have been described which are here placed in the
genus Poneraplur, Poneroplax gelibrandi Ashby and Torr differs from the livine

446 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

P. costata Blainville chiefly in the colour, the tegmentim is black, and the artien-
lamentum white. P. eonecutrica Ashby and Torr is a small eroded specimen with

pale buff teementum and white articulamentim.

Famiiy CALLOCHITONIDAR.

This Family is represented by oue speeies which has heen deseribed us Callo-
chiton (Ocellochiton) sulet Ashby 1939. This tiny, fragile species is beautifully
preseryed and, curiously enough, appears to be closely allied to Callochiton (Isa-
plaw) septemcostatus Pergenhayn 1914, a very small speeies dredged off the shores
of Japan. The genus Orellochiton is here used as the fossil equivalent to the living
venus Lcoplac Thiele.

The specimens recorded as Lorica oeulea Ashby and Cotton and Laren narvend
Ashby and Cotton are both worn median valves of this species, and become
synonyms.

Famury AULACOCHITONIDAE.

All but one of the described species of this Family have been found in the Tabie
Cape beds of Tasmania. Four genera have been used. Pseudoloricella, introduced
for species with continuous sufural laminae, has one species, P, sculpta Ashby. 1
will be easily recognized by the distinctive sculpture. The genus Lerreciia has two
species, Loricella paucipustulosa Ashby and Torr with L, atkinsont Lull, L. neayy-
nifica Hull and L. vctoradiate Wull as synonyms. The other species is the large
L. gigantae Ashby and Torr. Pratolorica was introduced for the speeimen of a
posterior valve which in general appearance is similar to an slu/aeochiton valve but
without the anal sinus and not reeurved. Protolorica «thinsont Ashby is the only
species, and its relationship to Aulacochiton cudmoret Ashby has not yet heen de-
iermined, but the two forms are probably identical. Lidacachitan compressis
Ashby and Torr with sl. affinis Ashby aud Torr and A. daenina Tull as synonyms
is very closely allied to the living wtulieochiton cimolius Reeve, whieh it found
along the whole coast-line of the Flindersian Province. So also is Aulavochiton
erma Cotton and Godfrey, the only representative of this Family from the Mnddy
Creek beds. Tt is very similar to the Tasmania fossils, but until more specimens
are found to prove or disprove them to be identieal it is advisable to leaye them
separate.

Famiry CHITONIDAE.

Three genera are included in this Family, Anthochifon is represented by one
species, “t. fossicus Ashby and Torr, a badly-worn but recognizable median valve.
Ooachilon is also represented by only one species, Oochitan halli Ashby. This dis-

COTTON—RECENT AND Fossit CREPIPODA 447

finetive species is provisionally placed in the Family. In general appearance it is
very unlike any living species found around our coasts. This remark also applies
to the genus Lavenachiton which was introduced for the unique species L. clifton-
ensis Ashby and Cotton. The median valve of this species has been recorded as
Ischnochiton (Radstella) cliftanensis by Ashby and Cotton (1989, p. 231). The
more recent discovery of a posterior valve with identical sculpture but triangular
in shape and with terminal muero, definitely separated it from the Ischnochiton-
idae, and a new genus Lavenachiton was introduced for it by Cotton and Godfrey
(1940, p. 569). The genus is placed in the Chitonidae provisionally ; it is unlike
any living form with which we are familiar. As may be expected, in the Austra-
lian fossil beds, as in every Region in the world where fossil chitons are found.
forms are discovered which are certainly not congenerie with, and which appear to
have no phylogenetic relationship with, any living species. They are either repre-
sentatives of groups which have become extinet or the species whieh would form
the connecting link have not yet been discovered. This is another reason why
at present the classification of our fossil chitoms must 1o some extent be rewarded

as artificial.

List or Mrocenr SPECIES.
Order EOPLACOPHORA.

Famity LEPIDOPLEURIDAF.

Terenochiton Iredale 1914 (subtropicalis Iredale).
magnogranifer Ashby 1925, Cliftous, Victoria.
badioides Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftons, Victoria.
dtversiqranosus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftoms, Vietoria.
relatus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftons, Vietoria,

Order MESOPLACOPHORA.

Famity ISCHNOCHITONIDAE.

Tschnochiton Gray 1847 (textilis Gray).
ashbyt Cotton and Godfrey 1940, Baleombe Bay, Victoria.
mearus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftons, Victoria.

448 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
Order ISOPLACOPHORA.

Famiry CRYPTOCONCHIDAE.

Protochiton Ashby 1925 (granulosus Ashby and Torr).
granulosus Ashby and Torr 1901, Baleombe Bay, Victoria.
Afossochiton Ashby 1925 (cudmorer Ashby).
cudmoret Ashby 1925, Cliftons, Victoria.
rostratus Ashby and Torr 1901, Balcombe Bay, Victoria.
Telochiton Ashby and Cotton 1939 (dendus Ashby and Cotton).
dendus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftons, Victoria.
Acanthochiton Gray 1821 (fascicularts Linn).
pilsbryoides Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftons, Victoria.
sabratus Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftons, Victoria.
casus Ashby and Cotton, 1939, Cliftons, Victoria.
chapmani. Ashby 1925, Cliftons, Victoria.
balcombiensis Ashby 1939, Baleombe Bay, Victoria.

Famity CRYPTOPLACIDAE.
Cryptoplax Blainville 1818 (larvaeformis Burrow).
gathffi Hall, Cliftons, Vietoria.

Famity PLAXIPHORIDAE.

Poneroplax Iredale 1914 (costata Blainville).
gelibrandi Ashby and Torr 1901, Gellibrand, Victoria.
concentrica Ashby and Torr 1901, Gellibrand, Victoria.

Order TELEOPLACOPHORA.

Famity CALLOCHITONIDAE.

Ocellochiton Ashby 1939 (sulci Ashby).
sulcor 1939, Cliftons, Victoria.

Famity AULACOCHITONIDAE.

Protolorica Ashby 1925 (atkinsont Ashby).
atkinsom Ashby 1925, Table Cape, Tasmania.

COTTON—-RECENT AND FosstIL CREPIPODA 449

Aulacochiton Shuttleworth 1853 (volar Reeve).
cudnoret Ashby 1925, Table Cape, Tasmania,
compressus Ashby and Torr 1901, Table Cape, Tasmania.
criva Cotton and Godfrey 1900, Cliftons, Vietoria.
Pseudoloricella Ashby 1925 (seulpta Ashby).
sculpla Ashby 1921, Table Cape, Tasmania.
Loricella Pilsbvy 1892 (angast TL. Adams).
pauctpustulosa Ashby and Torr 1901, Table Cape, Tasmania.
gigantae Ashby and Torr 1901, Table Cape, Tasmania.

Famity CHITONIDAE,

Anthochiton Thiele 1893 (dulipa Quoy and Gaimard).
fossieus Ashby and Torr 1901, Table Cape, Tasmania.

Oochiton Ashby 1934 (halli Ashby).
halli Ashby 1934, Cliftons, Victoria.

Lavenachiton Cotton aud Godfrey 1940 (eliftanensis Ashby and Cotton).
cliftonensis Ashby and Cotton 1939, Cliftons, Vietoria.

OTHER STRATA,
PERMIAN.

Permochiton australianus Tredale and Hill 1926, Bundanoon, N.S. Wales.

REPRRENCES CITED,

Ashby, E, (1921) : Proe. Roy. Noc., Tasin., p. 38, pl. xv, fia, 1-2.

Ashby, E, (1925) : Trans. Roy. Soe., Vict., xxxvi, w.s., pp. 17-205, pl. xvili-xxil.

Ashby, E. (1929) : Trans, Roy. Soc., Vict., sli, us. pp. 220-230, pl. xxiv.

Ashby, E. (1939) : Proc. Linn, Soc., pp. 186-189, pl. iti.

Ashby KE. and Torr, W. G, (1901) : Trans. Roy, Soc., S. Aust., xxv, pp. 136-144,
pl. iv.

Ashby, BK. and Cotton, B.C. (1936) : Ree. 8. Aust. Mus., v, pp. 509-512.

Ashby, E. and Cotton, B.C. (1939) : Ree, 8. Aust. Mius., vi, pp. 209-242, pl. xix—xxi.

Chapman,

Le =f

. (1908) : Trans. Roy. Soc,, Viet., xx, ws. p. 218, pl. xxii, fia. 5-7.

Cotton, B.C. (1985): Rec. S. Aust. Mus., vp. 339.

Cotton, B.C. and Godfrey, F. 1K. (1940) : Molluses S. Aust.

Cotton, B.C. and Ludbrook, N. (1938): Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., xvii, pp. 217—
228, pl. xil.

450 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Cotton, B. C. and Woods, N. (1933) : Rec. S. Aust. Mus., v, p. 48.

Cotton, B. C. and Woods, N. (1935) : Ree. S. Aust. Mus., v, pp. 369-387.

Etheridge, R. (1897) : Rec. Geol. Surv., N.S. Wales, v, pp. 67-70, text-fig.

Fatliff, J. H. and Singleton, F. A. (19380) : Trans. Roy. Soc., Vict., xlii, pp. 71-77,
pl. ii-iv.

Hall, T. 8. (1905) : Trans. Roy. Soc., Vict., xvii, n.s., pp. 391-393, pl. xxx.

Hull, B. (1901) : Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. Wales, xxxv, p. 654, pl. xvii, fig. 1-2.

Hull, B. (1915) : Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S. W@les, xxxix, pp. 855-857, pl. xciv, fig. 1-2.

Tredale, T. and Hull, B. (1926) : Aust. Zool., iv, p. 141, pl. xiv.

STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN ACARINA
(2) TYROGLYPHIDAE (s.1)

By H. WoMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S.. ENTOMOLOGIST,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The mites with which this paper deals are small, and except when they force
themselves on our notice by sheer weight of numbers, are little known in Australia;
nevertheless, they are of much economic importance.

Most of the species are free-living as adults, feeding upon organic matter such as
various foodstuffs, grain, flour, cheese, etc., as well as in galls, where they eat the
dead or dying gall-makers. These have sometimes been classed as the “Detriticolae”,
the few remaining forms which are parasitic on insects being the “Insecticolae”.

STUDIES tn AUSTRALIAN ACARINA
(2) TYROGLYPHIDARE (s.].)

By H, WOMERSLEY, F.R.ES,, ALS... Exvomonocter, Sour Ausrrautan Musreunt.

1
Wie, 1-21.

THE mites with which this paper deals are small, and except when they force them-
selves on our notice by sheer weight of numbers, are little known in Australia;
nevertheless, they are of much eeonomic importance,

Most of the species are free-living as adults, feeding upon organic matter such
as various foodstuffs, grain, flour, cheese, ete., as well as in galls, where they eat the
dead or dying gall-makers. These have sometimes been classed as the ‘‘Detriti-
colac’’, the few remaining forms which are parasitie on insects being the
“Tnseeticolae’’.

Frequently certain species become seriotts pests of stored food materials, and,
during the war of 1914-18, mneh work was done in England by Newstead and his
associates on their effect upon flour and wheat. Other species attack cheese, and
one nay at Lines be a serious domestic nuisance in the upholstery of furniture.

During this present war perio the necessity for again storing large quantities
of wheat and other foodstuffs in Australia stresses the importance of the recoeni-
tion of these mites, and this paper should ass

in the determination of the species
known to occur here, Most are cosmopolitan, and probably have been introduced
by way of commerce; they are potential pests, and given suitable conditions may
become of serious importance,

Apart from brief notes in Agricultural Journals, little has previously been
recorded of their oceurrence here, Rainbow, in his “Synopsis of the Australian
Acarina’’ (Rec. Aust. Mus., vi, pt. 3, 1906), lists only the following: Tyraglyphus
queenslandiae Canestrini 1885, 7. entomephagus Laboul, 1862, 7. siro L. 1758,
Pullea discoidalis Canestr, 1885, Alewrabius farinae De Geer 1778, and Glyet-
phagus domesticus De Geer 1778 ; while Lea, 1908, in “‘Inseet and Fungus Pests of
Orchard and Farm”’ (Tasmania), records Rhizog! yphus echinopus F, and R. 1868,

The material studied here, apart from that collected by the author and that
housed in the South Australian Museum collections, includes a considerable amount
kindly forwarded to me by the different State Departments of Agriculture, by the

452 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Division of Eeonomie Entomology, C.8. and 1.R., Canberra, and by the Warte In-
stitute, Adelaide. To all of these L extend sincere thanks for their assistance,

Diagnosis ; Mostly small, soft-skinned mites of oval to rounded form. G natho-
soma visible from above, sometimes hidden beneath a camerostome, Mandibles
usually chelate, sometimes with a thin saw-like blade. Maxillary palpi Y-6-
segmented. Frequently a suture line between propodosoma and hysterosoma., A
pair of vertical setae at front of propodosoma, Hyes usually absent exeept in some
deutonymphs. Rarely with tracheae, but never with stigmal openings, Lees
short or long, sometimes with spines; tarsi with sessile or pedunenlate carnuele
and elaw, Land LL ustully with a more or less clavate sensory rod, LV in male fre-
quently with a pair of adhesive dises. Sexual dimosphism ewenerally well-marked,
males often with a pair of round dises on each side of anus; genital aperture in both
sexes mostly with a pair of tubercles on each side.

Nyiphal stage frequently of two forms—one a hypopus, dlewtonyiaph, or
resting stage without month-parts and with a posterior ventral plate furnished
with 2-8 suctorial dises; generally found upou inseets or other Arthropods,

Not parasitic on feathers of birds or fur of annals.

Reeent studies of (he Aeatina by Oudemans, Vitazthum and others has led to
the old family Tyraglyphidue sl. being subdivided into 21 families for the recog-
nition of which the following key is given. Nine are so far known Lo be represented
in Australia.

Key To KAMinies OF TYROGLYVIIDAE s.L.
(Mainly after Oudemans).

1, Mandibles chelate, without the saw-like process i$ a 18 Be
Mandibles saw-. knife-, orstvlet-like. Form variable, With or without sutime
between propodosoma and hysterosuma. Maxillary palpi flattened with two
flagella-like appendages. Legs | and IL lateral. Ambulacra with sessile
elaw and small eammele. Female genital apertiwe a transverse slit between
propodo- and hysterosoma, With pores (or dises) in female laterally between
coxae LLand LL and medially between coxae TV, in male forming a quadrangle
between coxae HPand TV. Lees [LLand (VY in deutonymph directed forwards.

Awonrman Oud. 1904,

2 Ambulaera with so-ealled sessile claw and carunele; latter often small; suture
between propodo- and hysterosoma; with propodosomal shield; @ genital
aperture between coxac [Pand TV, 4 between coxae TV; dises near anus and
ontarsi TV iomale. Larvae with sternal ehitinous rods ('Bruststiele’?) 3.
Ambulacra in adults with caruucle only, in larvae and nymphs with minute
claws on pedunculate caruneles ; tarsi ending claw-like. Suture between pro-
podo- and hysterosoma. Genital aperture in both sexes behind coxae IV;
with anal dlises but no suckers on tarsi LV. Body setae loose; cuticle smooth ;
tarsi without spmes. Laryae?] .. — Nanacampan Oued. 1924,
Ambulacra with pedunculate carunele and apical claw, often minute 2. 5.

8. Longer body setae loose and whip-like: Tn young stages often stiff and rod-

10.

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA +53

like 53 . - i, a a ee:
Body hairs rather short, hairy setae: hody elonpvate. constricted behind logs
IV; etitiele sooth a Pr venus: ACARIDINA van Beneden 1870,
No eervieal setae, these replaced by eve-like organs on a level with trochauters
1 nts i a ny: Ae .. Lexznpar Oud, 1928,
Cervical setae present or absent, , £0 os 24 -. OD,

Cervieal setae dorsal. on level with (trochanter 1, minute. smooth ov absent,
Cuticle smooth —. ‘a i ‘: x. Aa .. 6.
Cervical setae mareinal. before trochanter T, minute. smooth; larsi ventrally
an distally with mime spines. Cutiele erannlate Berrrimarg Oud, 1927,
Cerviral setae marginal, before troehunter I, lone, hairy, direeted forwards
and curved inwards and downwards: cutiele smooth + tarsi ventrally (some-
times also dorsally) anc clistally with minute spines Tynoriacipab Our, 1924,
No strony stout setie before sensory elih on tarsi Land LL: lees with or without

spines, i! present. may he long but never-stout and conical... day Ws
A stout conical spine before sensory club on tarsi | and Lf: lees short and
thiek with robust spines .. sh o Ruizoeuyrmtipaw One. 1922.
Posterior portion of propodosoma with a drapsverse row of four long and equal
setae, J »f 4 » Tyroanypitbag Donn. 1868,
Posterior portion Gf propodosoma with only 2 lone lateral setac or, if 4, then
incdiain Oles very short... , ae CALOULYPITbAR Ond, 1920,

Cuticle smooth, shape more or less Tyreglyphus-lile : partly with, partly with-
onl suture between propodo. and livsterosoma, Propodosomal shield aneer-
lain. Larvae without sternal rods |, .) CARPOGLYPHIDAD Oud, 1923,
Cuticle smooth bit wel shining, distinetty birt variably panctate or granulate.
Dorsal setae strongly ciliated, feathered or comb-like. Larvae with sternal
rods. oi ca nls e GiycnaActpar Berl, 1887.
Cuticle leathery or sealed, Dorsim flattened, plate-like, round oval, diamond-
shaped, or quadtangnlar. No sensory vod on tarsi Land TL. Parasitie on
insects As __ “1 So CANESTRINIDAE Berl, 1884.
Cutiele smooth, comparatively strongly ehitinized. Form oval to spindle-Like.
No snutiite between propodo- and hysterosoma., No propodosomal shield,
Mouth-parts hidden tidera prodnetion of the propodosoma (camerostome) .
Cnorroenypamar Bord. 1897,
Citiele smooth. Tarsi Land TL with # lone flexible process like an acecssory
claw. Not Tyroglyplus-like. With or without suture between propodo- and
hysterosoma. = With propodosomal shield. — Larvae without sternal rods.
Amongst seaweeds and alone between tide turks LenruNGunipam Berl. 1897,
Cuticle smooth, Form Tyroglyphus-like. With propodosomal shield and
sutire between propodosoma and liyslerosoma . . ro
Tarsi with (at least!) 3 spood-shaped or lanceolate setae; claws with ventral
knob. Cervical setae mareinal, minute. almost curved spines. (adults iwh-

known ) “s 4 ra 4. OLAPSENTIDAR Ond, 1927.
Tarsi without such spoonsbaped or lanceolate setae . = - 10,
No cervieal setae: § without suckers near anus or on tarsi TV. mn Dh,

Cervical setae dorsal minute, smooth: with easily visible ‘pinch organs’;
é with suckers near anus aud on tarsi LY PoxTorripaNtipab Oud. 1925,

454 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Cervical setae marginal, long, hairy, directed forwards and curved inwards
and downwards .. Fy yt 4: a Sie .. 12.
11. Female genital aperture between coxae IIT and 1V, male between coxae IV.
ENSLINIELLIDAE Vity. 1924.
Male and female genital apertures between coxae LY.
Winterscumipripag Oud, 1924,
Female and male wenital aperture behind coxae LY.
OZENSPINSKODAE Oud, 1927.
12. Claws in larvae and nymphs single, in Q all legs, and legs Tand I] of 4 Y-
shaped; @ genital aperture between coxae LT, heteromorphous ¢ between
trochanters IV; 4 with anal suckers and dises on tarsi [V. Larvae with

sternal rods he :'s A sh, LARDOGLYPITIpAg Oud, 1927.
Claws single; @ genital apertures between ecoxae LV, 4 between trochanters
IV: noanal suckers or tarsal dises in 4 4 SApRoGLYPHIDAE Oud. 1924.

In this paper 21 species are listed, Six of these are regarded as new, the r-
mainder, with three exceptions, being cosmopolitan and probably introductions to
Australia. Two previously deseribed species are regarded as requiring recis-
covery and study.

LIST OF SPECIES.

Tyroglyphus farinae (Linné 1798 ). Glycyphagus domesticus (De Geer
Thyrcophagus entomophagus (ab. 1778).

1852). Tlycyphagus cadaver (Schrank
Thyreophagus corticalis (Michael 1781).

1885). Clenoglyphus pluiniger (Xoeh 1835).
Caloglyphus berleset (Michael 1903). Sennertia queenslandica sp.mnoy.
Caloglyphus mycophagus (Megnin Scnnertia bifiis (Canestrini 1898).

1874). TTistiostoma feronarum (Dufour
Rhizogiyphus echinopus (Kumouze and 1839).

Robin 1868). Histiostomea nichollsi sp.nov.
Rhizoglyphus termihon spanov. Anoetastoma oudenanst &. et sp.nov.
Tyvophagus puirescentiae (Sehrank Incortae sedis:

1781). Pullen discoidalis Canestrini 1898.
Saproglyphus cocerphugus sp.uov. Tyroglyphus queensiandiac Canes-
Carpoglyphus lactis (Linné 1763), trini 1898.

Calvolia glabra sp.nov.

Famiry TYROGLYPHIDAEF Donnadieu (1868), Oudemans (1932).
Oudemans, 1932, restricts this family to the single genus Tyroglyphus Lat-
reille, of which there appears to be only one (at least well known) species, Tyro-
glyphus farinde.

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 455

TyroaLypiimus Latreille,

Acarus (part) Linnaeus: Syst. Nat. ed. x, 1758, p. 617.

Alewrobins Canestrini: Tiroglifidi 1888, p. 7; Berlese: A.MLS., fase. Ixxxv, No. 12,
1898; Kramer: Das Terreich, Lfe. vii, 1899, p. 157; Michael: Brit. Tyro-
elyphidae, ii, 1903, p. 71; Rainbow: Ree. Aust. Mus., vi, 1906, p. 180; New-
stead: Rept. Grain Pests (War) Committee, No. 8, Roy. Soc., 1920, p. 20.

Tyroglyphus Latreile: Precis Caraci. Lis., 1796, p. 185; Vitzthum: Tierwel), Mit-
teleuropas, 11, 1929, p. 73; Oudemans: Ent. Bericht., vill, 1982, p. 356,

Propodo- and hysterosoma separated by a suture. Propodosoma with a pos-
terior row of four long, subequal setae. Cervical setae (a pair of short setae on
sides of propodosoma about in line with trochanters of leg 1) present and ciliated.
Tarsi Land TH with sensory elub. Long seta of segment [1 of legs arising beyond
middle of segincut. Genital aperture in both sexes with a pair of tubules on each
side. Male with a pair of large anal dises, a pair of dises on tarsi 1V, and with a
strong spine-like apophysis on second seynunt of leg 1, Apex of hysterosoma in
both sexes with ouly a sinvle pair of lone setae.

Dentonyimph with dorsal cuticle finely punetate; suctorial plate with 8 dises,
median pair a little larger than rest, one on each side of vulva, none on coxae | and

II,
TYROUGLYPHUS VARINA (Linnaeus).
(Meal or Flow: Mite).

Acarus farinae Linnavus: Syst. Nat., ed. x, 1758, p. 617,

Tyroglyphus fovimae Gervais in Walekenaer, Ins. Apt., 11, 1444, p. 142; Berlese ;
A.MLS., fase. xiv, No. 9, 1884; Vitzthum: Tierwelt Mitteleuropas, tii, 1929,
p. 73.

Aleurabius furinie Canestrini : Tiroglifidi, 1888, p. 7; Kramer: Das Ticrreich, Lfe.
vii, 1899, p. 137; Michael: Brit, Tyroglyphidae, I1, 1908, p. 71; Rainbow: Ree.
Aust. Mus.. vi (3), 1906, p. 180; Newstead: Rept. Grain Pests (War) Com-
mittee, No. 2, Roy. Soe., 1920, p. 20.

Length of adults, 9 to 0-7 mm., width to 0-4 nom.; ¢ length to 0-55 mm.,
width to 0-35 nun. ; of deutonymph, length 0-215 mm., width 0-17 mm. Body of
both sexes ovate as figured. The dorsal and ventral views of female, ventral view
of male, first lex of male, and fourth tarsus of male showing suectorial dises are
figured and require no further description.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

456

“P jo F snsxey ‘gq £P Jo T Boy ‘q@ fperjuea P ‘OM fyeajuaa ‘omes ‘gq fyessops ‘yw *(qMpe) (1) evans siydApGouy “1 ‘SUT

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 457

The deutonymph or “‘hypopus’’ is also figured from specimens taken in pack-
ing straw from Hueland.

As the name of this species implies, it is a frequent pest in all kinds of stored
farinaceous material, but it is also known to attack cheese and the pollen of bee-
hives. The male is at onee recognized by the first lee.

Wig 2. Tyroglyphis farinde (l.) (deutonyinpl) + A, dorsal view; B, ventral yiew,

Loc. South Australia, Adelaide: Adults and dentonymphs from packing
straw from Kneland, May, 1934. Vietoria, Burnley: Ou vround near mustard
erop, July, 1984. CR.T.M.P.)

Rainbow (1906) only says *f Australia (introduced) ’’,

Famiry CALOGLYPHIDAE Oudemans (1932).
Acarologische Aanteekeningen, exil, Entom. Berichten, 1952, Dl. viii, p. 356.

This family was ereeted by Oudemaus to inelude all the genera previously
considered as in the Tyroglyphidae, with the exception of Tyroglyphus itself.

li is represented in Australia by the two genera Thyreophagus and Calo-
glyphus, each with two species, all of which are well-known in Europe and prob-
ably introduced into Australia.

458 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TiryreorHaGgus Rondaii,

Thyreophagus Rondani: Bull. Soc, ent, [al., vi, 1874, p. 67.
Histiogaster Berlese: Riy. Acc. Padova, xxxiii, 1858, p. 45.
Monieziella Berlese; A.MLS., fase. Ixxxix, No. 9, 1897.

Genotype: Tyroylyphus entamophagus Lab. 1852.

Elongate to cloneate-oval species with suture between propodo- aud hystero-
soma. Propodosoma with two posterior long setae only. Cervieal setae? Both
sexes with genital tubules; 9 genital aperture between coxae III] and IV, 3. be-
tween coxae TV. Male with a posterior shield-like projection and a pair of dises
nearanus, Tarsiof lees Land LI with sensory elub; long seta of sezgment TT of legs
arising beyond middle; leg LV of ¢ without discs. Deutonymph, where known,
with a pair of eye-like organs on a level with bases of trochanters | and placed
laterally.

THYRBOPHAGUS UNTOMOPUAGUS (Lab.).

Acarus enlomophayus Laboulbeue: Ann, Soc, ent. France, 1892; ** Bull.’ p. a4
(lit.).

Thyreophagus cntomophagus Rondani: Bull. Soe. ent, France, v, 1874, p. 67,

Tyroglyphus entomophagus Laboulbene et Robin: Ann. Sov, cut. Franee, ser. 4,
ii, 1868, pp. 317-338, pl. x; Rainbow: Rec. Aust. Mus., vi (3), 1906, p. 180.

Tyroglyphus malus Murray : Econ, Eutom,, Aptera, 1877, p. 275.

Monieziella cntomophaga Berlese: A.M.LS., fase. Ixxxix, No. 9, 1895.

Histiogaster entumophagus Kramer (part): Das Tierreich, Lfg, vii, 1899, p. 142.

This is a less elongate and more oval species than the following, and is at once
distingnished therefrom. Beyond giving the present figures from Australian
material, it is hardly wecessary to deseribe it in detail, for this has been done yery
thoroughly by Michael (1903) and Newstead (19380).

Length of ¢ O-4+mm., width 0-18 mm.; of @ O-5.1mm., and 0-21 mm. respec-
tively, The deutonyinph is devoid of a suetorial plate and dises, but is said to
possess lateral eyes as iu the next species. It is unknown to me,

This species is as important a pest of flour and other farinaceous material as
the previous oue, and causes similar damage. Both species are responsible for the
characteristic odour of infected flour.

Rainbow (1906) merely states ‘‘ Australia, introduced’’, but [ have material
from flour labelled ‘“ Sydney, N.S.W., July 6, 19384”".

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 459

>

Fig. 3.) Thareaphagus eutomaphagus (uah.) (adult): A, 9 dorsal; TB, same, ventral; ©,
@ ventral.

THYREOPITAGUS CoRTICALIS (Michael).

Tyroglyphus corticalis Michael: J. R. Mierose. Soe., ser. IT, v, 1885, pp, 27-81, p.
885, pl. iii, figs. 1-14.

Histiogaster entomophagus Kramer (part): Das Tierreich, Le. vii, 1899, p. 142.

Histiogaster corticalis Berlese : A.M.S,, fase, lvii, No. 7, 1890; Michael; Brit. Tyro-
elyphidae, ii, 1905, p. 66; Vitzthune: Tierwelt Milfeleuropas, iit, 1929, p. 74.

Monieziella mali Berlese: A.M.S., Crypt, 1897, p, 107.

A much more elongate and parallel-sided species than the preceding, it is
easily recognized. Vitzthum (lac. cit. 1929), because of the supposed absence of
the vertical setae, which are not figured by Michael (1903) or Berlese (1889-91),
questions the placing of this species in the above @enus. In all the Australian
material before me, however, these vertical setae are distinctly present as in figure
3A ; otherwise my material agrees, and one can only assume that this pair of setae
was overlooked.

The size of the specimens is: ¢ length to 0°35 mm., width to 0-1lmm.; ¢ 0:45
ram. and 0-12 nun. respectively. The eutiele is generally not so chitinized as in
entomophagus. As to the detailed deseription, the figures are sufficient. The
deutonymph possesses a pair of lateral eve-like organs on the level of trochanters L,
and to facilitate its recognition | give fiere 35 (after Michael),

460 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Michael found this species feeding under the epidermis of Arundo phragmites
in England, and Berlese found it on Polyporus hirsutus in Italy.

Loc. New South Wales: Castle Hill, 24th July, 1934, in frass on Cypress Pine ;
Sydney, 16th August, 1934, under bark of Mistletoe; Sydney, 16th May, 1959, on
Camellia bud.

HW)

Fig. 4. Thyreophagus corticalis (Mich,) (adult): A, 9 dorsal; B, same, ventral; C, leg |
of 9; D genital aperture and anal dises of ¢.

CaLocGLyPHts Berlese.
Centuria sesta di Acari Nuovi: Redia xv, 1923, p. 262.
Genotype: Tyroglyphus kramert Berlese, 1881.
Oval form, with suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma. Propodo-
somal shield present or doubtful. Propodosoma with posterior row of 4 setae of

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 461

which the median pair are very short. Cervical setae present or not, sometimes
ventro-laterally at extreme apex of propodosoma a pair of thick rod-like setae.
Tarsi [ and U1 apically with a pair of long setae sometimes lanceolate; without a
stout spine in front of the sensory club; segment Ll of legs with the long seta aris-
ing subapically ; tarsi with a few stoutish spines; tarsi TV in male with a pair of
dises. Genital aperture in both sexes between coxae LV, with a pair of tubules on

each side. Male with a pair of anal dises.

Mig 5. Thyreophagus ecorticalis (Mich.) (dentonymph) : Anterior portion from above show-
ing eve-like organs (after Miehael),

CALOGLYPHUS BERLESET (Michael).

Tyroglyphus mycophagus Berlese: A.M.S., fase. Iviii, No. 1. 1891; Kramer: Das
Tierreich, Lfe. vii, 1899, p. 1389.

Tyroglyphus berlesei Michael: Brit, Tyroglyphidae, ii, 1903, p. 116.

Caloglyphus berlesci Berlese ; Redia, xv, 1923. p. 262,

T have a large amount of Australian material of this species, all of which
agrees with the descriptions and figures given by Berlese and Kramer for Tyro-
glyphus mycophagus Megnin 1874. Michael (1903), however, has shown that
mycophagus Megnin is quite a different species, being really that figured by Ber-
lese in 1888 (A.M.S. xlix, No. 10) as Uyroglyphus kramert.

462 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Vig. 6. Caloglyphus berlesei (Michael) (adult): A, 2 dorsal; B 9 ventral; C, fd dorsal;
D, # ventral; BN, tarsus 1; F, tarsus 3; G, tarsus 4 of 3.

\WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 463

Tn my specimens there does not appear to be any cervical setae, unless the pair
of curved rods near the extreme tip of the propodosoma can be rewarded as such.
The mecian pair of setae in the row of four on the posterior part of the propodosoma
are longer and not so spine-like as those shown by Berlese and Kramer, but in these
latter they may possibly he fore-shortened.

Length of § to 0-95 mu. width to 0°42 mm.; of @ to 2-0 mm. and 1-0 mm.
respectively,

Loc, Western Australia: Claremont, 21st April, 1931 (I1.W.). South Aus-
tralia: Adelaide, on yam from China, 1909 (T.H.J.). Aust. Capital Territory ;
Canberra, froin killed mound of Butermes eritiosus (no date, GFT.) : in labora-
tory culture of same temnite, June, 1934 (CG.ELI.). Fiji: On banana beetle, 2nd
May, 1984; on copra, Levula, 1939 (RAL).

CaLoghypius ? Mycoprraqus (Meenin).
Tyraglyphus mycaphayus Megnin ; J, Anat. Physiol., x, 1874, p. 225.
Tyvaglyphus phylloverae Riley + Sixth Rept. Ins, Missouri, 1874, p. 52.
Tyroglyphus krameri Berlese : Atti. Ist. Veneto, ser. 5, viii, 1881, p. 13; AIMS. fase.
xlix, No. 10, 1888; Michacl; Brit, Tyvroglyphidae, ii, 1903, p. 109,
Caloglyphus myecophagus Vitzthum : Tierwelt Mitteleuropas, iii, 1929, p. 74.

This species in the adult stage differs from the preceding in the streneth of
the clorsal setae, the apparent lack of the anterolateral rod-like setae on the an-
terior part of the propodosoma, and the presence of distinct ciliated cervical setae.
The last feature, however, does not appear to be figured by either Michael or Ber-
lese, henee the material is referred to mycophagus with some doubt. The propodo-
somal shield is also distinctly present in my material.

Loe. Victoria, Burnley, October, 1939 (R.T.M.P.) on bulbs imported trom
China. |

Pamity RHIZOGLYPHIDAF Oudemans 1923.
Characterized by the short thiek legs and the presence of a stout short conical
spine immediately in front of the sensory rod on tarsi | and UH.
Rrtzoctyeinus Claparede.
“Studien an Acariden’’ in: Zeit. f. wiss. Zool, xviii (1868), p. 508.
Broadly oval species with short stout legs; generally well chitinized. Ambu-
lacra sessile, With suture hetween propodosoma and hysterosoma. Propodosoma

with distmet shield and a posterior row of only two long setae. Front portion of
hysterosoma with a quadrilateral of four setae, No posterior hysterosomal shield.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

464

“P # snsav} ‘9 {Pg Bap‘ gy fh Fo T Bal “Gq
fresxop vutosopodoad “q {peaquaa P ‘9 tpexquoa § ‘g fpescop & “Wy : Grape) (urusayy) sndpydoofiu snydhyboyg *L BIg

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 465

Cervical setae absent. Tarsi apically with 2 ventral, more or less lanceolate setae;
a Short stout conical spine immediately atter the sensory elib, Genital aperture
of & between coxae [11 and TV, @ between coxae LV, hoth with a lateral pair of
tubules. Anus of ¢ witha pair of large semi-circular dises,

Deutonymph with all coxae touching, Land UL with a small cireular pore or
dise ; another on each side of yulva. Suetorial plate with 8 dises. the median pair
Jone.

RizoaLypeuus Benieorus (Fumouze et Robin).
(Bulb or Eucharis Mite).

Tyrogly plus echinopus Fiononze et Robin; J. Anat. Physiol., v, 1868, p. 287.

Rhizoglyphus echinapus Murray ;‘* Keon, Entom.’? Aptera, 1877, p. 257; Kramer:
Das Tierreich, Lfy. vii, 1899, p. 143; Michael: Brit. Tyroglyphidae, ii, 1902,
p. 84; Lea: Insect and Fungus Pests of Tas., 1908, p. 89; Vitzthum = Tierwell
Mittelenropas, iii (7), 1929, p. 74.

Corpophagus echinopus Megnin : ‘* Les Parasites’’, 1880, p. 144.

Tyraglhyphus megnim Berlese; A.MLS., fase. xiv, No. 7.

There appears to be but one well-known species, characterized as in the generic
details given above and the accompanying figures,

It is a well-known pest in Europe and Ameriea on all kinds of bulbs and
tubers, but whether it actually initiates damage to healthy bulbs has heen dormbted
hy Michael.

According to Michael (1903), p.95, Mangin and Viala, in CLR. Ae, Sei. exxxiv,
pp. 151-3, say that they received this species from Australia. The fignre given by
Lea (1908) for this species, which he refers to as‘! A Destructive Root Mite’’, leaves
no doubt but that his determination was eorreet. Te gives no locality other than
Tasmania in eeneral,

Loc, New South Wales: Windsor, 15th May, 1984, on dahlia inbers (Dept.
Agr.), New Zealand: Auckland, from bulbs, 19838,

RaZoc.ypius ? teem ITUM sp. oy.

Deutonymph: Length Ty. width 65u, almost round in form and strongly
convex. Dorsinn with a shield of the same outline, outside of which the cutiele is
longitudinally siriated, while laterally inside the shield are a pair of longitudinal
sinuate lines almost extending to the posterior margin ; laterally outside these lines
the shield is longitudinally striated, while inside the surface is finely spotted (or
pitted), in places the spots (or pits) clumping together. Dorsum apparently with-
oul setae, except for 2 pairs of very sinall fine ones posteriorly. Ventrally the

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

466

“T Boz ‘op fopqrpuvu “q fpeaquaa § ‘H fyerquaa P ‘g fpessop Py : GInpe) Ca pue'y) srdouyoa sn ydhiBoryy ‘8 StL

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 467

coxae are very large, all in contact and occupying most of the surface. Lees fairly
short and stout, all tarsi with a long sinuate claw and strong spines, but without
subapical lanceolate setae, Legs Land 1 with long and strong spines. Segment TI
of leg | with an apical clavate rod-like seta, Gnathosomal process as figured. Coxae
Tand 11 with a small dise or pore, and another on each side of vulva. Suetorial

—=SaSsSs Sse rey 4
- = Sa eer j \ J

mS sm \ / _

Fig. ¥. Rhizoglyphus lermituin usp. (deutonymph) ; A, dorsal; B, ventral; ©, leg 1 dorsal;
D, same, ventral; E, tritosternum,

plate with 6 (?8) dises, a pair of large median ones, a sutaller One on each side of
these, and two small posterior ones; anterior of the large jucdian dises there may
be another pair, but it is difficult to decide whether these are discs or the semi-
circular structure found between each two outer dises. Outside of the coxae are
a few short fine setae,

Remarks: The uncertainty of the anterior pair of suctovial dises, the strong
spines on tarsi | and II], the lack of lanceolate tarsal setae, and the structure of the

468 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

dorsal plate render it uncertain whether this deutonymph is a true Rh izoglyphus
or not.

Loe, Aust, Capital Territory : Canberra, associated with Hutermes exitiosus,
May, 1980 (G.F.H.). New South Wales: With Porotermes sp., Eden, June, 1940
(S.L.A.).

Famity LYROPHAGIDAE Oudemans.
But, Berichten, 1924, D1, vi, p. 302.

Oharacterized as in the key to families. With only one genus so far known to
oecur in Australia.
TryrorHagus Oudemans,

Ent. Berichten, 1924, D1, vi, p. 250.

Of oval form with distinet suture between propodosoma and hysterosonia.
Propodosoma with a posterior row of four long setae, the inner pair slightly the
longer. Cervical setae present and ciliated. Ilysterosomal sctae long and shortly
(often uncertainly) ciliated. Genital aperture of 9 between coxae Ill and IV,
of ¢ between coxae 1V, on each side a pair of tubules. Male with a pair of anat
dises, and dises also on tarsi IV. Tarsi I and If with sensory rod but no strony
spines; the long seta on segment I] of legs subapical, Tarsi relatively long and
slender,

Genotype: Acarus pulrescentiae Schrank 1781.

This genus is represented in Australia by the following ubiquitous and cosmo-
politan ‘‘humus mite’’.

TYROPHAGUS PUTRESCENTIAE (Sehrank).

Acarus putrescentiag Schrank: Enum. Ins. Austriae, 1781, p. 521,

Acarus dimidiatus Hermau: Mem. Apt., 1802, p. 89.

Tyroglyphus longior Gervais: Aptera, iii, 1844, p. 262.

Tyroglyphus infestans Berlese: A.MLS,, fase. xiv, No. 8,

Tyroglyphus lintnert Osborne ; 1894 (Banks: U.S. Dept. Agric... Techn, Ser. No. 15,
1906, p. 15.

Tyroglyphus siro Rambow : Ree. Aust. Mus., vi (3), 1906, p. 180; Lea: Ins. and
Fungus Pests, Tas., p. 112.

Tyrophagus humerosus Oudemans: Ent. Ber., vi, 1924,

Tyrophagus dimidiatus Vitzthum : Tierwelt Mitteleuropas, ii, 1929, p. 74.

Tyrophagus putrescentiac Vitzthum ; Treubia, viti, 1926, p. 180.

469

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA

fP # snsivy

/
f

dt Teaqmos P ‘9 Syeaquea & ‘gq fyesxop § oy + (anpe) (quRApg) svpusasanpnd suboydouiy, OL Rta

470 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The first five of the above synouyis are generally regarded as varieties, but the
differences are very small aud uncertain, being to a large extent based on habitat,
so that there seems little point in regarding thei all other than as the one speeies.
The essential characters of the species are adequately shown im the accompanying
fizures.

This species oceurs almost everywhere in decaying hunts, dung, rotting tim-
ber and fruit, and even on cheese aud other foodstuts ; it is widespread in Australia.

Loc. South Australia: Adelaide, in eg powder from London, labelled as “7,
siro’’, wo date; on decaying mushrooms, Feb., 1994 (D.C.8.); on Cryptes bac-
caruit, Aug., 1933; in moss, Mount Barker, Jone, 1954 (11.W.) ; on decaying voeo-
nut, Adelaide, Aug. 1939 (ILW.). Western Australia: Perth, April, 1931
(IL.W.) ; Wooroloo, Aug., 1932 (1L.W.). Vietoria: In leaf debris, Mount Dan-
denony, May, 1932 (J.W.R.). New Zealand: Auckland, May, 1940, in fungus
culture (W.C.) ; Lincoln, August, 1985 (L.M.).

Rainbow (1906) merely says: ‘* Australia, introduced.’

Famtty SAPROGLYPHIDAEF Oudemans.,
Eniom, Beriehten 1924, D1, vi, p. 808.

Cuticle polished. Mandibles chelate, aAmbulacra with sessile claw and car-
uncle. Body more or less Tyroely phid-like, with suture between propodosoma ani
hysterosoma, Hemale genital aperture between eoxae [LT and TV. Male without
dists near arus or on tarsi TV; larvae without sternal rods (?).

This family contains only the veuus Svprogiyphes Berlese, although Vitzthum
(1931) is inclined to include the venus Aceridia van Beneden,

SAPROGLYPHUS Berlese.
A.MLS., fase. bai, No. 6, 1890.

Elongate species with more or less parallel sides. Propocdosoma separated
from hysterosoma by a sniare. Propodosoma with a posterior transverse row of
4 setae, the laterals very long and strong, mecdiaus small. Cervieal setae absent.
ILysterosoma with 2 or + long posterior setae. Ambulaera and claws sessile. Tarsi
rather clongate, without strong spines. with the usual sensory rod on [ aud IT;
segment IL of legs with the long seta subapical, Genital aperture of @ between
coxae [LLand LV, 6 between LY, in both sexes with a pair of tubereles on each side.
Male without anal dises or suckers on tarsi TV.

Genotype: S. neglectus Berlese 1890.

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 471

This genus is represented in Australia by the following new species or what
may be only a variety of the Huropean form.

SAPROGLYPITUS COCCIPITAGUS Sp-tloy.

Description: Female, length to 340y, width to 1852; male, length to 270),
width to 1354. Female, dorsal surface: propodosoma with the usual pair of ver-
tical setae 65p long, and + posterior setae in a transverse row, the outer ones very

long and strong, 130, inner ones very niieh shorter, 26; hysterosoma with a pair

r “VX

eee

\

\
\

Hig. Ll. Saproglyphus coceiphagus wasp. (adult): A, @ dorsal; B, 2 ventral; C, genital aper-
ture and penis of male,

of hioneral setae, onter 104d, immer 26; dorsally with 3 pairs of fine and moder-
ately long setae; apically with only one pair of lone setae, 260; laterally, on a level
of trochanter LY, a pair of medium fine setae; all setae simple. Ventral surface:
coxae L, [1] and LY with one fine seta of medium leneth : apex with one pair of lone
setae 150; anterior of apex with a transverse row of fine setae; genital aperture
large, placed between coxae LL] aud TV with the usual 2 pairs of tubercles. Male,
as in female, but the apical setae of the hysterosoma not so long; genital opening
between coxae LV with the usual 2 pairs of tubercles; penis long, fine and pointed ;

472 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

farsi TV and anus without suctorial dises. Leys relatively long and slender, am-
bulaera and claws sessile, tarsi elongate without spines, tarsi | and IL with a rather
slender sensory rod near base, segment IT of legs with a long seta arising sub-
apleally.

Loc, South Australia: Adelaide, Aug., 19438, on Cryptes baccarum (type
material). New South Wales: Goulburn, 7th June, 1954, from gall on tree-lucerne.

Remarks: This new species is very close to the genotype, S. neglectus Berlese,
but differs in having only one pair of long dorsal apical setae instead of two.

Famiry CARPOGLYPHIDAE, Oudemans.
Ent. Berichten, D1, vi, 1923, p. 206.

Ambulacra peduneulate with apical claw. Without suture between propodo-
soma and hysterosoma. Propodosomal shield doubtfiu, probably absent. Cervical
setae absent. Posterior row of propodosomal setae ouly two. Tarsi elongate with-
out strong spines; | and LL with usnal sensory rod; long seta of seament LL of legs
arising near middle. Genital aperture of @ between coxae [Land LLL, ¢ between
ILL and LV, in both sexes with usual pair of tubercles on each side. Male without
anal dises or suckers on tarsi LV. Dorsal setae rather strong and spine-like.

Represented in Australia by the following cosmopolitan genus and species.

Carpochuypius Robin.
J. Anat. Physiol., 6, 1869, 197-204, pl. 7-8.

With the characters as outlined for the family. Dorsal setae rather short and
spine-like, sunple; apex of hysterosoma with a pair of lone setae and a pair of
mecian setae. The setae of legs not plumed.

Genotype: Acarus luctis Linne 1763.

CakroGgLyriits LACTIS (Linnaeus).
(Dried-truit. Mite).

élearus lactis Linnaeus: Syst. Nat. ed. xii, 1763, p. 1024.

lcarus pussularum Hering: N. Acta Ac. Leop, xviii, 1836, p. 618,
Glyctphagus anonymus Haller: Jahresh. Ver. Wiirttemb., xxxviii, 1882, p, 297.
Trichodactylus anonymus Berlese : A.M.S., fase. xiv, No. 10, 1884.

Phycobius anonymus Cancstrini: Prosp. Acarotauna, iii, p. 392.

Acarus dysenteriae Schrank: Enum. Ins. Austriae, 1781, p. 510.

Shape oval. Length of male 400, female 3504; width of male 250p, of female
240. No suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma, only 2 setae in posterior

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 473

Carpoglyphus lactis (l.) (adult): A, 9 dorsal; B, 9 ventral; C, ¢ ventral.

Fig. 12.

474 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

row of propodosoma, Dorsal setae relatively short and spine-like, except two
pairs at posterior end. Lees relatively long and slender, with long tarsi and pedun-
culate caruncles; farsi | and LL with the usual basal dorsal sensory rod; the long
setae on metatarsi curved and arising from about the middle; the preceding see-
ment of leg I with two subapieal setae, one fairly loue, the other very short. Other
characters as in the generic diagnosis and ihe figures. Apparently without a
deutonymphal stage.

This mite commonly infests sugary nuaterial, such as dried fruit, and milk pro-
clucts and, from one of the following records, also scale-inseets, possibly attracted
by sugary secretions.

Loc. South Australia: Adelaide, 19th Jan., 134, on dried fruits; Port Ade-
laide, Feb., 1952, on stored prunes, Western Australia: Upper Swan, May, 1931,
on dried figs. Victoria: Melbouriue (no date), on figs. New South Wales: Allan-
dale, June, 1934, on seale-infested Pillosporwi.

Famity PON LTOPPIDANITDAE Oudemans.

Kutom. Beriehten, D1, vii, 1927, p. 244.

This family was erected for the genus Ponfoppidania Ouds. 1923, with Tyro-
glyphus littoralis Walbert 1920, an adult species, as type. In Bnt. Ber, D1, vi,
124, p. 251, Oudemans synonymizes this genus with Calvolia Ouds. 1911, based on
a two-eyed deutonymphal form. In the same publication, D1, vil, p. 247, he cor-
rects himself, and recognizes both genera.

The family can be distinguished by the characters given in the key, [t contains
only the two genera Powtoppidana and Calvolia, of which the latter is represented
in Australia,

CALVoOLIA Oudemans.

Hnt. Ber., 1911, D1, iii, p. 187.

Deutonymphal forms with a pair of eye-like organs at the apex of the propo-
dosoma, Propodosoma and hysterosoma separated by a distinet suture. Lees TI
and TV very short and stumpy, without claws, [V with a pair of long setae. Sue-
torial plate with 8 dises, uo dises near vulva or on coxae [and IIT,

Genotype: The deutonymph of Michael’s Tyroglyphus heterocomus (Brit.
Tyrogl., vol, 2, 1903).

CALVOLLA GLABRA Sp.noy.

Description; Deutonymph. Length 195p, width 1264. Dorsally with a dis-
tinct suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma, the former appearing to fit
into the latter, Apex of propodosoma with a pair of distinet eye-like lenses. Dorgal

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 475

surface apparently (even under Y,y in. oil immersion) devoid of setae, except for a
pair of short ones at posterior end. Ventrally under the gnathosoma with a pair of
lone curved setae arising from a bilobed process. Lees T and TT stout, but of
moderate length, with distinet carunecle and claw, TTT and TV short and stumpy,

Fig. 18. Calvolia glabra nsp. (deutonymph): A, ventral; B, dorsal,

without claws, 1V with a pair of long setae; coxae apparently without setae. Sue-
torial plate with 8 dises, a large middle pair, with a smaller one on each side, a pair
of still smaller ones behind, and a pair of larger ones anteriorly.

Loc. South Austral. Museum collections labelled ‘‘from the branchium of a
30a, Adelaide Zoo (A.E,J.)’’.

Remarks: The above record may be doubtful, but even Michael (loc. cit. p.
109) is not at all definite as to the habitat of what he considered the deutonymph
of T. heterocomus, for, speaking of the species as a whole, he says that he first beat
it from oak trees, and later found it in numbers in the moss of a squirrel’s summer
nest. He claims to have reared it by feeding on Boletus.

476 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Famitry GLYCYPHAGIDAE Berlese.

Cryptostigm., 1, 1897, p. 100.

Ambulaera pedunculate with terminal claw, With indistinet suture hetween
propodosoma and hysterosoma, Dorstm smooth or granulate; dorsal setae ciliated
or feathered, long and numerous.

Of the genera placed in this family, Glycyphaqus, Clenoglyphus and Sennertia
oceur in Australia.

TLYCYPHAQGUS Hering.
Acta. Aead, Caes. Leop. Car. Nat. Cur., vol. 8, pt. 2, 1888, p. 619.

Abdomen with dorsal setae lone and more or less thickly ciliated, but not
feathered or pliine-like. Cutiele not strongly, if at all oranulate. Tarsi elongate,
caruncle aud claws weak, tarsi | and Ll with sensory rod, but mo spines. Genital
aperture between coxae LIT and UV, with a pair of small tubules on each side. No
dises near anus or on tarsi LV. Tip of hysterosorma with a distinetly visible ecopu-
latory tubule, Deutonymph contained within larval skin, not free-living.

The following two species have been found in Australia,
GuyoYPHagius poMEsTICuS (DeGeer),

Acarus domesticus DeGeer : Mem, Hist. Ins., vil, 1778, pp. 88-89.
Glycyphaqus domesticus Rambow: Rec, Aust. Mus., vi (4), 1906, p. 181,

Somewhat oval in shape with a suture line between propodosoma and hystero-
soma. Propodosoina with a posterior row of 4 long, stronely ciliated setae, Cer-
vical setae present, strongly ciliated. Dorsal setae numerous, as lone as, or longer
than body and strongly ciliated. Lees lone, tarsi elongate, | and IT with a sen-
sory vod, but without the long scale-like seta of the next species. Claws and car-
uncle small. Female genitalia between coxae [ILand TV. Tip of hysterosoma with
tubular copulatory process. Length, female to 550, male 5002; width, female
400n, male 350..

This species ditfers from the following in the laek of the long seale-like seta
arising near the base of tarsi (see fig. OD), [t is a common species in dried plant
material, debris from beehives, and frequently infests houses, occurring in sugay,
ete,, as well as in upholstery.

Loe, Sonth Australia: Adelaide, 11th Sept., 1983, in tobacco seeds; Glen
Osmond, July, 1934, in moss (R.V.S.); Adelaide, Sept., 1940, in beehive debris.
Western Australia: Perth, 1981; Waroona, May, 1931. Victoria: Burnley, July,
1938 on sugar-beet (R.T.M.P.), New South Wales: Paddington, Syduey, in fur-
niture (Rainbow).

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 477

A, Q dorsal; B, Qventral; C, leg 19. D, G. cadaverum: tarsus 1,

A-C Glycyphagus domesticus (DeGeer) (adult):

Fig. 14.

478 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM
GLYCYPITAGUS CADAVERUM. (Schrank).
Acarus cadaverum Schrank 1781: Enum, Ins. Austriae, p. 912.

Differs only from the above in the presence of the long, seale-like seta on tarst.
Hi has similar habits.

Loe, South Australia: Adelaide, May, 1934, in packing siraw from England ;
Glen Osmond, Waite Institute, in erass seeds, March, 1986. Victoria: Melbourne,
Aug., 1932, on imported seeds (R.T.M.P.) ; Melbourne, Aue., 1938,

Crmnocuyrius Berlese.

ALM.LS., 1884, fase. xiv, No. 1 (as Clhenaglyphus).
As in the genus Glycyphagus, but the entiele is granular, and the setae comb-
like. Legs rather shorter.

Crenociypitus PLuuMicer (Koch),

Acarus plumiger Koeh, C, L.: C.MLA. Deutsehl., fase. v, 1845.
Cthenoglyphus pluniger Berlese» A,MLS., fase. xiv, No. 1, 1854.
Rather small oval species with granular cuticle and a line or depressed suture

hetween propodosoma aud hysterosoma. Length, female to 800n, width 200y, male

Fig. 15. Clenoglyphus pluniger Koeh (adult): A, @ dorsal; B, tarsus 19; C, dorsal seta.

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 479

rajher smaller. Legs relatively short but slender, tarsi | and IT with usual sensory
rod, ¢laws and carunele weak. Dorsal setae strongly ecomb-like, but the teeth
straight and not eurved inwards and upwards. Tarsi without long seale-like seta,

Two specimens only of this species were found amonest packing straw from
Bneland, at Adelaide in May, 1934.

SENNERTIA Oudemans,

Entom. Ber, 1905, D1, 2, p. 21.

Ambulacra with strong claws; with propodosomal plate only. Withont suture
line between propodosoma, and livsterosomia. Dorsal setae coarse, haired or feath-
ered, ov fan-like, Epimera [united to sternum. Dentonymph: shape somewhat
pentagonal, without suture. Cuticle striated, ouly one dorsal shield posteriorly.
Dorsal setae velatively long and spine-like, Eyes absent. Lees T, Tf, and TW with
very strong sickle-shaped claws; tarsi Land TT with sensory rod, LY without claws
but usually with one or more long terminal setae, Venter with shorter spines;
suctorial plate not ina chitinized horseshoe-like frame, with 8 dises, 2 median large,
Jsmall posterior and 2 snull anterior ones near vulva.

Genotype: Acarus cerombyecinus Seopoli 1765,

This genus is mainly known from the deutonymphal forms; only in a few
species have the adult aud other stages been ceseribed. The deutouyniphs live
amongst the hairs of various species of Nylocopid bees, and the adults in the nests
ofthe same. The extraordimary large claws of the deutonyinphs are specially adap-
ted for clinging to the hairs of their host.

The following two species have been found in the hairs of specimens of bees
ol the genus Vylocapa in the collections of the South Australian Museum,

SENNERTIA QUEENSLANDICA SP.noVy,

Description; Shape somewhat pentagonal. Leneth 410. width 880n. Dor
stim with a single posterior triangular shield which appears to broadly turn over to
the venter, and anteriorly does not reach beyond the line of eoxae ITT. Cuticle
transversely striated, shield pitted. Dorsmim with 5 pairs of stiff long spines, 162),
but not as long as in the following species; on the shield are 6 very small fine setae.
Leys moderately long and strony, tarsi 1-111 with strong and large grasping claws ;
Tau HH with a stout sensory rod, PV without claws but with a sinele long apical
seta. Ventrally the setae are very fine and simple, one on eoxae 1. one laterally
between coxae Tl and TT, a row of four between coxae LIL, and one on cach side

between coxae TV and the suetorial plate; on the portion of dorsal shield turned

480 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

over is a pair of fairly long setae with a pair of shorter ones between. Suetorial
plate as figured, with 8 discs, a median large pair, a posterior row of four very
small ones, and an anterior pair of small ones, one on each side of the vulva.

)W

Fig. 16. Sennertia queenslandica spnoy. (deutonymph); A, dorsal; B, ventral.

Loc. Moa Id., Torres Straits (S.W. Schombere). Found amongst the hairs
of specimens of Mesolricha bryormn in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,
In both this and the following species the adults are unknown to me.

SENNERTIA ?RIFILIS Canestrini.,
Termez. Puzetek., 1898: vol. 21, 196; cbid, 1897, vol. 20, 174.

Deutonymph: Shape somewhat pentagonal. Length 2502, width 170,.
Dorsum with a single posterior oval shield which reaches forward almost to
the line of coxae IT; outside of the shield with 4 pairs of lone strong setae (104).),
on each shoulder a long but finer seta and a pair of similar ones at apex of hystero-
soma, Legs moderately lone and strone. |-LLL furnished with lare@e, strone sickle-
shaped grasping claws, |V without claws but with one long seta, and a very short
one apically; tarsi T and I] with rod-like sensory seta. Ventrally the setae are
short with broad base, then tapering sharply; there is one on coxae 1, one between
coxae IL and ITT laterally, a row of four between coxae TTL ancl four between coxae

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 481

IV. The ventral suctorial plate has 8 dises, a large median pair, a posterior row of
four smaller ones, and anterior of the medians, a very small one on each side of
the vulva,

Specimens, as described above, appear to be this species as far as | am able
to judge from the meagre details given by Kramer 1899, Giard 1900 and Michael
1905. [have not been able to see Canestrini’s original paper.

Fig. 17. Sennertia bifilis (Canestr, 1898) (deutonymph): A, dorsal; B, ventral.

They were found amougst the hairs of specimens of the large carpenter bee,
Mesotricha bryorum in the collections of the South Australian Misewm,

Loc. Bowen, Queensland—no date. Moa Lc, Torres Strs. (J. W. Schomberg’).

The species was originally deseribed from New Guinea on Vy/ocopa combinata.

Famiry ANOETIDAER, Oudemans.

Entom. Ber., 1904, D1, 1, p. 191.

Adults with mandibles provided with a more or less toothed ‘‘augur-like’'
process. The apieal seement of the 2-seemented palpi somewhat leaf-like and with
two lone setae. With a suture line between the propodosoma aud hysterosomi.

482 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ventrally there are 2 pairs of circular or oval dises, one pair in the region of eoxae
Tl and the other between coxae IT and PY. Cartunele absent, claws sessile, tarsi
with some small spines and Land 1 with sensorial rod. Without anal dises or dises
on tarsus LV in male.

Deutonymph with suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma. Lees LIT
and LV directed forwards, tibia and tarsus indefinitely separated ; all lees slender,
claws small, tarsi and metatarsi apically usually with clavate or spathulate long
setae. Suctorial plate with 4-8 dises. With or without cises or pores on coxae and
near vulva.

This family contains a laree number of genera, most of which are based on the
dettonymphal forms, The following are known to oeer im Australia,

Histiosroma Kramer.
Arch, Naturees., 1876, vol. 42 (7), 105.

In 1904 Oudemians synouyiized this venus with Anoectus Dujardin 1842 (L’-
Institut. vol. 10 (1), fase. 454), but Jater (Tent, Ber,, D1, vii, p. 449-451 and vill,
p. 53) he modified his views and regarded Dujardin’s venus as only in part synony-
mous with Histiostoma. Toth genera were based upon deutonymphal forms, the
type of Anoctus being Jlypopus alicola Duj. 1849 and of Hishostume being IListio-
stoma (Phyllostoma) pectincun Kramer 1876 = Typopus feroniarwia Dut, 1839.

The only genera of which the adults appear to be at all well known ave [isfin-
stoma Kramer 1876, Sellea Oudemans 1929, and Wichmeniad Oudemans 1929,

Adult forms with suture between propodosoma anc liysterosoma, former some-
what triangular, latter quadrangular with flattened apex. Dorsunt often with
rounded bosses. Otherwise as iu family eharacterizations. Denutonymph with
broadly oval suetorial plate wider than lone and with 8 subequal dises. A snmiall
circular pore or dise on coxae Land Pil and on each side of vulva.

Genotype: Pyllastome peclineum Kramer 1876.

Histriosoma FERONIARUM (Dufour).

The synonymy of this species secs to be very confused, but appears to be as
follows:

Hypopus feroriarwm Dufour: Ann. Sei, nat. ser. 2, xi, 1839, p. 278,
Tyrolglyphus rostro-serratus Megnin: J, Anat, Physiol, ix, 1873, pp. 369-78.
Phyllostoma pectinewn Kramer: Areh. Naturees, xiii (1), 1876, p. 59.
Histiostoma pectinem Kramer: Arch. Naturees, xlii (1), 1876, p. 105,
Histiostoma foronarun Kramer: Das Tierreich, Lie, vil, 1d88, p. 185.

WOMERSLEY—-AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 483

Histiostoma rostro-serratus Michael: Brit, Tyroglyphidae, i, 1901, p. 208,
Anoclus feromarwn Oudemans: List, 1898, p. 202; Vitzthum: Tierwelt Mittel-
curopas, 11, 1929, p. 80,

Female: Length to 385, width to 2135p. Gnathosoma distinctly visible from
above in front of propodosoma. Palpi 2-seemented, the seoments expanded later-
ally leaf-like, with 2 long setae. Mandibles with a long, toothed ‘augur-like’’

fe ie

A)

Pig. 18. JTistiostoma feroniarmn (Dut) (adult ): A, Q dorsal: B, @ ventral; C, tip of pals
D, mandibular saw-like organ; 1, leg 1.

process (fig. 18d). Propodosoma triangular, separated from hysterosoma by a
distinet suture; liysterosoi quadrangular. Dorsum with a number of rounded
bosses, 8-4 on propodosoma and 9 on hysterosoma: dorsal setae fine and difficult to
see (fig. 18a), cuticle with fine pubescence, Lees with short spines; claws sessile.
The anus appears to be dorsal. Ventrally | can see no setae, but there are two pairs
of circular dises or pores, one pair immediately behind coxae EL and other pair in
the line between ¢oxae IIL and TV. The male is unknown to me.

Devionymph: Length 185p, width 150p. Suture distinctly present. Dorsum
apparently without any trace of setae. Ventrally as figured. Suctorial plate with

484 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

8 dises, subequal in size; a pair of small dises or pores on coxae I, coxae IIT and
near vulva,

The material from which the above descriptions and figures are drawn i
believe belongs to this species.

Loc. New South Wales: Bathurst, from dahlia tuber, 23rd Nov., 1982
(8.L.A.) ; Lindfield, on tiger lily, 15th May, 1932 (S8.L.A.) (adults). South Aus-
tralia: Mount Barker, in moss, 24th Junc, 1934 (H.W.) ; Hallet, on millipede, 1st

Vig. 19. Histiostoma feroniarum (Duf.) (deutonymph) : A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, leg 1.

Oect., 1938 (D.C.8.) (deutonymphs). New Zealand : Auckland, on rotting bulbs,
Jan., 1940 (W.C.) (adults).

HistiosTOMA NICHOLLS! sp.nov.

Description: Deutonymph, length 185 width 1835p. Shape oval as figured
with distinct suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma. Cuticle granular with
long fine setae, somewhat resembling IZ. lorentzi (Ouds.), but longer and differ-
ently arranged. As in Oudemans’ species, there is a striated band of cuticle near
the dorsal suture. There appears to be a more hyaline area outside of the propodo-
and hysterosomal shields.

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 485

Loc. Western Australia, on a small beetle from Crawley, Sept. 14, 1940 (G.
Snowball).

Remarks: This species appears to be nearest to Oudemans’? Histiostoma loi
entzt trom New Guinea (Ent. Ber., D1, 2, p. 223, 1906, and Nova Guinea, vol. v (4),
1906, p. 146-7),

Y

\ \\ if .
Wilf \

\

\

\

Mig. 20. Histiostoma nicholisi rsp, (deutonymph) s A, dorsal; B, ventral; ©, leg 1.

ANOETOSTOMA @on. nov,

Differs trom all other @enera in whieh the devtouyniphs have been deseribed
in the arrangement of the dises of the suctorial plate. Tn this plate ihere are only
6 dises, a median pair of large ones, posterior of whieh is a transverse row of 4
small ones. Off the plate and on each side of the vulva is a small disc, There are
to pores or dises on any coxae. The dorsal surface lacks a suture between propo-
dosoma and hysterosoma, but there is a transverse depression at about one-third
from apex; the surface is coarsely granular.

ANOESTOSTOMA OQUDEMANSI sp, lov.

Description: Deutonymph, length 165p, width 126); oval, broadest at about
one-third from front, no suture, but at oue-third from apex a transverse depression.
Dorsum apparently without setae (even under oil-immersion), Legs fairly lony
and slender, tarsi with small claws; tarsi | and If a pically with a long clavate seta,

486 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Lat base with a lone, clavate, rod-like sensory seta; seeoud scement of leg LT with
tan] ’ . ; Fon) Cc
lone seta arising near apex, none present on lee IT; tarsi LIT and TV with long
oC dD ba)
pointed apical seta; femur of leg [L with a long apical seta, Suetorial plate as in
venus.

HM

Big. 21. Anoctostoma vudemans), gen. ch sp.nov. (deutonymph): A, dorsal; B, ventral;
(, leg 1; D, leg 3; 1, leg 4.

Loc. New South Wales: Syduey, June, LY40. on Jascu domestica (ALR...
To relate this new vents to those previously described from the deutonymphs,
I give the following key :

Ky ‘ro THe Genera Ov ANOETIDAE,
Basep on tHE DuuTonyMPH.
1. Suctorial plate with only 4 dises; no dises near vulva or on coxae | and LIT,

Myianoctus Ouds, 1929.
Type Anoetus muscarum (i. 1755).

More than 4 dises on suctorial plate . . te ats ae viel ats
2. Suetorial plate with 6 dises is av j. aa yi ae:
Suctorial plate with 8 dises . ad} . ‘ . A
3. The suctorial dises of equal size; apparently none near vulva or on cosae L or
I1l. Leg IIL without the lone femoral seta .. hs Sellea Ouds. 1929.

Type Histiostoma pulchrwm Michacl 1901.

The two median suctorial dises very large, ofhers very small; a small one on
each side of vulya, none on coxae. Lee LIL with a long femoral seta.

Anoctostoima nov.

Type A. oudemansi sp. noy.

WoMERSLEY--AUSTRALIAN ACARINA 487

4. Suctorial plate with 2 large dises and 6 small posterior ones arranged in a hexa-
von; discs near vulva and on coxae | and TT Wichnannia Ouds. 1929,
Type Histiostama spiniferus Mich, 1901.

The 6 small dises of snetorial plate arranged around the two central large

ones sd be a “a 4) “ Ks rico,
5. Two sinall dises near vulva . at +e 2s 4 .. 6.
No cdises uear vulva, but bristles instead sy .. “SSutwehkia Ouds. 1924.

Type Anoctus guenthert Ouds, 1915.

6. On ecoxae land IIL a small club-like seta arising from a small basal ring,
Anoctus Duj. 1842.
Type Lypopus alicola Duy. 1849.

Not as above “, 4 A. . rae OG

7. Coxae lor LL or both with small dises ay ai aie 16 8
Both coxae Land IL] without dises or setae... Mauduytia Ouds. 1929.
Type Anoetus tropieus Ouds, 1911.

$. Small dises on both ecoxae [and TIT .. ss Tlistiostoma Kramer 1876.
Type Histiostoma pectincwm Kramer 1876.

Small dises on coxae L but not (Il. 1 Anoctoglyphus Vitz. 1927.
Type A. alewcht Vitz. 1927.

Small dises on coxae LET but not 1. , ee Glyphanoetus Ouds, 1929,

Type G. fulmekt Ouds, 1929.

GENERA BT SPECIES INQUIRENDAE.

Genus PULLEA Canestrini.

Canestrini Atti Ist. Veneto, ser. vi, vol. 2, I8s54, p. 725, pl. ux, f.1, la, 1b.

PULLBA DISCOLDALIS Canestrini 1884,
Thid.

Canestrini gives a figure of the entire dorsal view, the gnathosoma and leg [,
aud ihe suctorial plate of the deutonympl as well as a general description of the
animal,

The shape is more or less round with a suture line on level of coxae [Land an-
other on level of coxae TL. The dorsal setae are lone and fine. There is a short
but distinet carunele and elaw on all legs. In the deutonyimph the dises of the suc-
torial plate are 6 in number, subequal, and arranged in a median row of 4 and a
posterior row of 2.

Oudemans (Ent. Ber., 1924, D1, vi. p. 232 and 828) is disposed to place this
venus in the Carpoglyphidae, near to Carpoglyphus. In the 6 dises of the suctorial
plate of the deutonymph it is closely related to the genus Sellew Ouds. of the Anoe-
tidae, but if Canestrini correctly associated adult and deutonyniph then it cannot

488 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

possibly belong to this family, but more probably as Oudemans suggests. However,
pending re-discovery, it is impossible to definitely ascertain its status.
It was found on a species of Chrysomela (Coleoptera) from Queensland.

TYROGLYPHUS QUEENSLANDIAE Canestrini 1884.

Ibid., p. 724, pl. ix, £.3.

This speeies is described from the deutonyimph only. It is shown to have a
dorsal furrow running backwards from the second legs, and then connecting by a
transverse line. Canestrini’s figure shows the suctorial dises as being on the dorsal
surface; of these there are 8, a median row of 4 subequal, two in front and two
behind; there is also one on each side of where the vulva should be.

It was found on a species of Cetonia from Queensland.

As with the previous species the description and figure do not permit of its

recognition.

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

INDEX

Acauthochiton .. -

nentieandata, Ox yiiis

acuticaudatum, Poreellidium

adeluidensis, Cominelly

adehuidicum, Microtrumbidinin
wequalis, Microtrombidiin

iftine, Mievotrombidinna
Afossoehiton tf

“album, Cuenothrombium

alyicola, Biancoling ea

Allodiastylis =

Allothrombium ,. $6
Alteutha ts ia
Amphinseoides .. on
Amphinascopsis .. :
Aunplisepia <4 ‘
Anisakis .. a8 ,

annilata, Rhahdepleura

mimntipapilhitiun, Dipetwlonena

Anoctostomn at ;
miomalus, Prophlias .
Anthochiton :)

antipodianun, Allothrombium |.
SehOugastia

apama, Amplisepia

armata, GCeyloniells I

Astroeonns he
Ataxocerithium . .

attolus, Microtrombidinm
angustae, ¢ ‘acnothrom bin
australe, Poreellidium —.
australe, Longipedia .

australiense, Leeuwenhoekin

austrilis, Amphiascopsis..

Bisneolina ;
Mttinileria

Hudietylopus -

Sepioteuthis
Austrostrongy lus
Austrofhirombinit .
Austroxyuris =

babidus, Payee leas

badioidus, Lepidopleurus

barnardi, Paradexamine

harringuncuse, Microtrombidium

tasilisan ap
howchportensis, Bpideira
Seala.

heasleyi, Ataxoeerithium

selehiton 14s

berlesei, C: loglyplins
Rinneolina .
hifilis, Sennertin

tircenna os ch
hombax, Basilisse uct

hrevidactylum, Die

Page

213
14
06
LO

RS
SS
Sa
210
Ii
a2)

a3)
fe

Og
OST
415
412
was

a, 4a

105
Bets)
185
nid
wd
Tou

SI
18

4a
wn?

207
Mile
poll
oy
406
and
su
did
321
SO
AYO
Tit
Tah
OT

11

Mi

rovers)

178

87
ane
205
2u8
20+
a)
4]
ads

AS

428
202!
69

ro GENERA anp SPECIES.

eadavertim, Glyeypliigus .

Caecnothrombiun F 33

calliope, Calliostotin —.- 5
Culliostomi it “0
Callistoehiton 4 ote

Caloglyphus Pe -g Ae,
pale tieomNtly Pa ‘: iy
Calvoliu .. os ot
C ‘amorotliombiuny 3 '
capensis, Ceradocus a.
farina, Syaidex canine. ‘
Carpoglyphis .. we ‘

us, Acanthochiton .. om
Ceinn +t te - .
Ceradocis re the k
Cevloniella ra a3 t
ehevreuxi, Ceradocus —.. .
chiltoni, Ceradoeus ..
Oluy2erisa . she ‘

cineta, 1 thminola .. :

qinercus, Phascolaveties ..
elavki, Mrombidinn qe
cliffonensis, Lselinochiton

eocviphagns, Saprogly phils :

collinum, Gamerothrompitu
Cominella ue he
compressa, Lorie i
eoncayva, Lorivelli

coneun, Uber .. 3 !

Contracueeum — .. é.,
eourongensis, SchongasGa
coromita, Longipedia ..
cormuta, Laoplonte me
eorticalts, Thyrcoyingis

eossyrus, Iselmochiton |. he

cottoni, Cyelaspis ue
Crassicauda 3 a
crassipes, Wandelia

erassum, Cyenothroubiun
eretatus, Allodiastylis ..

Cridorsa a af
enstatum, Parspeltidium
Cryptoplax 13 7

Ctenoglyphus —.. a
cndmorei, Afossoehiton .,
Oyelaspis

evens, 1 nemothrombinn
Cylindryliioides .. 7
eyprina, Seissurella te

dasyeerci, Schéugastia ..
dehiseens, Tdotsusin .

delicatulum, Alothrombiun -

delphini, Phyllohothriam
dendus, Afossochitun — ..
Dentievradvcus -, :
depressum, Schizotreniy

Dic Mh tae ha a

Page
47s
4
200
200

St
LT4
472
P14

S16
mt

425
290
288
76
2Od
1
OT
val
471
92

101

237

240

103
4nd

SI
and

oo
oa

450
239
G3
LOG
a0

6

asl

ta
1a
ao
"17

208
a1i
203
74
Op

490 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
Pag
Dipetalonema 188 hirsutum, Nenothrombiamn
diseoidalis, Pullea : 87 Histiostomea &
diversigrunosus, Lepidopleurus F 227 hydrurgac, Phocascaris ..
domesticus, Glyeyphagus 476
drunus, ‘Acanthgehiton 214 Tdotasia
dubium, Parapeltidinm . . 401. ignea, Bireennit
duodeni, Anthochitom —.. 255 inexpeetus, Ae anthoshiten
durins, Tsehnoehiton 240 Callistochiton
insigne, Austrothrombinus
echidninum, Hehinothrombitia i intermedius, Machairopus
Dehinocephalus F 433 intermixtus, Aimphiascoides
echinopus, Rhizoglyphus , 65 Isehnochiton et .,
Hehinothrombium 8d iscus, Afossochiton
egregia, Ceima . RIT
elyeri, [thminolin 20) japonensis, Wandelia
Euemothrombiun 4 91 Johnstonia na A at
cotomophagus, Thyreoplagius 458 jousseaumei, Metis
Kophlianutis 22 oo, , ~ |
Epideira 205 Kairiensis, Mierotrombidinmn
eremig, Gundlaehia 206 kogiae, Anisakis +
Ethminolia 200 Porrocaceun os
Ettmiillerit Sh kondiniim, Austrothrombinne .,
Kudsetylopus — ., 11) koordanum, Calothvoudiun
Nuonysx 1 ura
: 9 '
Bosse eat | tet, Campos
evausi nemothrombiun m1 lagenorbynehi; Haloeercns
=m 3 Laminothvombiun t %
firinae, Tyroglyplus 155 Liuophonte : .
feroniarum, THistiostoma Ago lasiodactylum, Die a
HiUlavinenia, Ks Fe 19 Leeuwenhoek ia
fimbrintum, Poreellidinn 405 legrandi, Zeidora
fiulaysoni, Austroxyuris . 11 Lepidopleurus
fissi¢auda, Paradoxamine 185 Leptocuma on
flindersi, Epideria 205 Lirachiton att a
Onustus 25 longimana, Kuria
aradoxmimine 185 Longipedia ' .
Retic Vindissa 204 longipes, Amphiase opsis
Seals 208 longiset a, Liophonty .. a
fursy duane Acanthochiton 213 Loviea
trinsdovti, Paradexamine 182 Loricella
Pulvay Bireeuna , aed nitedoualdensis, Aqithochiton
fulvum, Poreelidium ANG ninedonaldi, Callochiton
foreatum. Caenothvoml inn i eet OOO ia
Machairopus
gabininia, Pelle aye Hiacroptiis, Promibienty
glabra, On lvolia AT4 miculosa, Cnploclloaens
Glyey phagus - 476 mapaa, Orassiequds -
gr tmpicoli, a Hasitatides. ye iInagnicostatus, Afossoeliton
grandicollis, Tdotiusi: 106 maghogranifer, Lepidoplenvus
granulosus, Protoehiton i) magnopustitlos, Loricella
Beem, Callistoehiton . 8ge iarsupialis, Protospirure
CGundlachia onG marsus, Spectimen obs te
guttatun, Allothrombium 99 mawsont, CyfindiyMoides
Gvnodiastylis Aes 4 (5 Melo o
gy psoplioc ae, € fontraenee eu 430 Mesochroa
Metis . ;
halli, Oochiton way Mie svotromhidlum =
halieovis, Dijardinis 452 iniltonis, Melo, . rm
Haloeercus a 453 miniatun, Caenothrombinn
Haplochlonenn 102 minutus, Austrostrongey tis
hirsti, Cawerothrombium ar ge Moliechiton a p» o's
Trombieulia SL moutivaguin, Cacnothrombiuar

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 491

moonta, Cridorsa. . -_
moorhousei, Paradexamine
mycopligus, Culoglyphus
myloriense, Mierotromhidium
Myrmicotrambium

myrmicum, Laminothroambium . .

mysis, Chylothalestris

nana, Paradexamineg

Nyannastacus

nasutus, Nannastiens

naxus, Molachiton

negleetus, Ischnochiton . ,

Neatrombidiim ..

newman, Mierotrombidinm

nichollsi, Bireeunn
Histiostoma

vivarus, Lepidoplourus

nohile, Caenothrombinm

novae-hollandine, Trombiewls

nomamius, Tsehnoehiten

numieus, Cryptoplax

nynganense, Caenothrombinm

obscura, Mttmiilleria
obsoleta, Tdotasia
wetocostatus, Anthoehiton
eemen, Lorie
ogmorhini, Contraracenm
Onistus _.

Oochitou .

Orthopsylins

osenlatumn, Contracaceum
qudemsinsi, Anoctostoma
Oxyuris

Pachystylis ws
pacifien, Paradexamine ..
pamphilins, Lepidepleurns
Paradexsmine
Paradiastylis

paranioun, Platy thrombidium
Parapeltidium

parvias, Passalurus
Passalurus ‘ rs
mineipustilosa, Lorieela
Pellax a

Peltidinw

peramelis, Filarinema
petrogale, SehGngastia
Pliuiseolaretus
Phyllobothriaum
Phiyllothalestris
pilshryoides, Acauthoehiton
nirloti, Muonys
Platythrombidium
nlumiger, Ctennglyplus .
Poreellidium

Porrocaceum wy
pritehardi, Cryptoplax , .
Prophlias .. Ss
Protochiton

Page
159
i)
4

Sh
77
91
411

185
73
7

994)

ere
85
88

29

484

999

v7
81
225
219
NG

85
164
235
237
4A
S45

23
420
43
485
14

val
176
SPO) oy
176

66

on
Biths
193
193
236

Page
Protospirura ; H “3 A. =l90
proximum, Pelt idinm es -. OOD
pulcher, Astroronus a ole 2. 207
pulcherrimus, Belehiton . be os 88
Pullea +e aa .. A87
putresecentiae, Tyr ‘oyhs netlis 4 J. 468
pygmaen, Mesoehroa be .. 419
queenslandine, Tyvoglypling — .. .. A488
qneenslandic¢a, Sennertia He v. ATO
Radsiella a as As ». 28)
ramsayi, Ceradocus aha us .. 288
rélatus, Lepidopleurus .. i 2. 224
retentns, Calothrombinn sg ¥. 85
ceticulatus, Callistochiton a) ; 235:
Retiennassa fa t. = J. 204
Rhabdoplenra —.. es a . 105
Rluzoglyphus .. Se ot 2. 468
robertsi, Dipetalonema .. = .- 188
robusta, Tydemanella ., fs -. 47
rubromaculatus, Corndoens rT 2. 28a
rigosus, Orthopsyllus ., ot :, 420
sabratus, Acanthoehiton oe ow ONG
Saproglyphus —., ote a4 o. =470
Seala at be 2 ny .. BOB
Schizotremiy te bs oe TA
Schingastis Pod ae $s .. RI
Seissurella 6. te ot vy 188
Secnitila } i, et .. 204
sellickensis, Coy adoeus ms .. S78
Sennertia . - an AT
seplues, Lepidoplourus 5 Py se 825
Sepioteuthis a oe -. 109
serieatum, Caenothrombinm - - 9G
serrata, Cerndoeus a ot :, 288
sexilentita, Parudexamine “ se 185
sheardi, Leptocuma ". :. .. 5
siens, Cryptoplax <9 “4 1 819
signata, Alteuths ag a .. 3so
Trombienl -_ ar “ gO
simile, Cameroethrambinm ros = 2
similis, Anisakis .. “ a z+ 4a
sinplex, Anisakis . d. <4 o) «433
Peltidium es 13 a. BOS
sineryvus, Lepidoplenrns p.. wv 885
singus, Lepidopleurus | . ds oy O26
sontheatti, Behinothrombium ., rt 50
speciosum, Peltidium = ,. ie .: BOT
Speetamen ao a «+ 201
spinicaudsa, Alteutha be Poet .. 888
subernssa, Seala . . oo 3 .. 208
sulci, Afossaehiton an ae .. #810
Syndexamine *: fs + .. 174
tasmanicumn, Miervatrombidium ., 7 88
Tagastes .. v4 iz + + 408
Telochiton 4 4 =x a BMI
termitum, Rhizogly phus 2! 2. ABD
jerrae-reginae, Atlothvomthium : -. Ina

Thyreophagus .. a te .. 458

492

tindalei, Eophliantis
Trombicula

tisurus, Ischnochiton

torridum, Caenothrombium

trianguloides, Acanthochiton

trichosuri, Syphacia

Trombella

Trombicula

Trombidium ‘ Ie

truneatifrons, Gynodiastylis

tubbi, Calothrombium

tumida, Paradiastylis

Tydemanella

Tyroglyphus

Tyrophagus

Page
323
81
228
96
216
194
76
80

97

65

86
66
416
455, 488
468

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Uber : + sy
uncinatus, Echinocephalus
uxellus, Lepidopleurus
varena, Lorica

vietus, Pachystylis
vinazus, Ischnochiton

Wandelia

westraliense, Microtrombidium .

Schéngastia
wyandrae, Allothrombium
Camerothrombium

Xenothrombium ..

Zeidora